JP6724893B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is equipped with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player on the front side of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

JP, 2009-261415, A

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-illustrated circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a specific display means,
A specific display control means for controlling the display of the specific display means,
In a settable situation that occurs based on the start of supply of operating power, setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the advantage of the player,
Equipped with
The specific display control means is a set value which is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value before the supply of the operating power is stopped or a set value which is more advantageous than the set value before the supply of the operating power is stopped. When the supply of operating power is started based on being set by the setting means as the setting value to be used, the display content of the specific display means is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation, and the operation is performed. In the case where the supply of the operating power is started based on the setting value lower than the advantage of the setting value before the supply of the power is stopped is set by the setting means as the setting value to be used. The display content of the specific display means is provided with a mode determining means for determining in a determination mode corresponding to a non-indication target situation ,
The mode determining means sets the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started based on the fact that the setting value to be used is not set by the setting means to the non-indication target. It is characterized in that the decision is made in a decision mode corresponding to the situation .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure regarding the discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. It is a front view of a main controller. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win/win lottery. It is an explanatory view for explaining various tables memorized by main side ROM. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the master side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation|variation start process performed by the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which makes the detection result of a ball detection sensor input into a main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the entrance detection processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining an electric configuration of a payout control device and various devices that communicate with the payout control device. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by a payment side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining an electric configuration of a management IC. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the input port of the management side I/F. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a correspondence memory. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the management processing performed by the management side CPU. (A) ~ (d) is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. It is a flow chart which shows management output processing performed by the master side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU. 8A to 8E are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the output processing of the setting value update signal performed by the main side CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. It is a flow chart which shows display output processing performed by a management side CPU. 8 is a flowchart showing a display process executed by the management-side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the data output process performed by (a) main side CPU, and is a flowchart which shows the external output process performed by (b) management side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining various tables memorized by main side ROM in a 2nd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for another preservation|save in 3rd Embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing a monitoring process of repeated changes executed by the management CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process of the repeated change performed by the main side CPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a setting update recognition performed by the management side CPU in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for history records in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for history in 7th Embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for history records in 8th Embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. It is a flow chart which shows history setting processing performed by a management side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows display output processing performed by a management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of the management side I/F in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the management processing performed by the management side CPU. (A) ~ (h) is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path which transmits the detection result of each ball detection sensor in 10th Embodiment to the main side CPU and management IC. It is a front view of the main control unit in an 11th embodiment. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure for performing various displays in the 1st-4th notification display apparatus based on control of MPU. 8 is a flowchart showing a display process executed by the management-side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the display device for 1st-4th notification when the management result of a game history is displayed, and (b) in the case where the setting state of a pachinko machine is changed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the 1st-4th notification display apparatus. (A) ~ (h) is a time chart showing how the first to fourth notification display devices are in a display state. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the 1st notification display apparatus in 12th Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the 2nd notification display apparatus. A first notification display device in the case of displaying a game history management result on the first to fourth notification displays and in a case of displaying a changeable state in which the setting state of a pachinko machine can be changed 6A and 6B are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents of the second notification display device. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the abnormality display area in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality setting process performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality display process performed by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows management output processing performed by the main side CPU in a 14th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in another form. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting aspect of the program and data of the main side ROM in 15th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a setting mode of each area in the main side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows management processing performed by a master side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows management execution processing performed by a master side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining various areas of a work area for non-specific control used for managing a game history. It is a flow chart which shows the check processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the usual entrance management processing performed by the master side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the result calculation process performed by the main side CPU. 6 is a flowchart showing a display process executed by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows management processing performed by the main side CPU in a 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by the main side CPU in a 17th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by the main side CPU in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management execution process performed by the main side CPU in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed by the main side CPU in 20th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows management execution processing performed by a master side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the electric composition in a 21st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 22nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main side CPU. 8 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. 7 is a flowchart showing a RAM monitoring process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main side CPU in another form. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by the main side CPU in another form. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM monitoring process performed by the main CPU in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the RAM monitoring process performed by the main CPU in 25th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows management execution processing performed by a master side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows another monitoring process performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed by the main CPU in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by the main side CPU in 27th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by the main CPU in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed by the main CPU in 29th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 30th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows blackout information storage processing performed by the main side CPU. (A) is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the MPU, and (b) is a time chart showing how the reset signal output section outputs the reset signal. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main side CPU. 6 is a flowchart showing a setting monitoring process executed by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows management processing performed by a master side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows management execution processing performed by a master side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows another monitoring process performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 31st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows clear processing at the time of abnormalities which is performed by a master side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the clear process for non-specific control performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows blackout information storage processing performed by a main side CPU in a 32nd embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing checksum monitoring processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the clear process for non-specific control performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 33rd embodiment. 8 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st timer interruption processing performed by the main side CPU. 6 is a flowchart showing a setting monitoring process executed by a main CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining a configuration for controlling display of various display circuits by the main CPU. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining various buffers provided in the work area for specific control, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining various storage areas provided in the work area for non-specific control. is there. It is an explanatory view for explaining the electric composition of a display IC. (A) to (g) shows how the main CPU transmits the type data and the display data to the display IC and the display data transmitted from the display IC is received by the first display circuit or the second display circuit. It is a time chart. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd timer interruption processing performed by the main side CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the 1st-4th notification display apparatus in the situation where a setting value is updated, (b) The 1st-4th notification in the situation where a setting value is confirmed. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of the display device for display. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by the main side CPU in 34th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electric constitution of the calculation result storage area in 35th Embodiment. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the 1st-4th notification display apparatus. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the 1st-4th notification display apparatus. (A) ~ (e) is a time chart showing how the base values of various areas are notified on the first to fourth notification display devices. It is a flowchart which shows the result calculation process performed by the main side CPU. 6 is a flowchart showing a display process executed by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the master side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st timer interruption processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd timer interruption processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the setting processing at the time of normal performed by the side CPU. 8 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main CPU. (A) ~ (f) is a time chart for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display device when the supply of operating power to the main CPU is started. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 36th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 37th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of normal performed by the main CPU in 38th Embodiment. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting corresponding storage area provided in the main side ROM in 39th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows reading processing of a hit/miss table performed by a master side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process to the 5th display data buffer during setting update performed by the main side CPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting corresponding storage area provided in the main side ROM in 40th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various display parts provided in the area|region visible from the front of a pachinko machine through the window panel in 41st Embodiment, (b) The display content of a round display part is demonstrated. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 42nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st timer interruption processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the result calculation process performed by the main side CPU in 43rd Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a display process executed by a main CPU. (A) ~ (g) is a time chart showing how the base values of various areas are notified on the first to fourth notification display devices. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the base value of various areas is notified by the 1st-4th indicator display in a 44th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 45th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a storage area related to set values provided in a work area for specific control. 8 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process to the 5th display data buffer during setting confirmation performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process to the 5th display data buffer during setting update performed by the main side CPU. Description for explaining the content of the processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power outage processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed It is a figure. 8A to 8E are time charts showing the end timings in relation to the operation state of the setting key insertion portion of the setting value update processing and the setting confirmation processing. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 46th embodiment. Description for explaining the content of the processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power outage processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed It is a figure. Details of the processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed in the forty-seventh embodiment It is an explanatory view for explaining. Details of the processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed in the forty-eighth embodiment It is an explanatory view for explaining. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 49th embodiment. 8 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main CPU. (A) ~ (h) is a time chart showing how the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are permitted in the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. (A) ~ (g) is a time chart showing the progress of the process when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, the checksum or the set value occurs. (A) ~ (g) is a time chart showing the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices when the supply of operating power to the main CPU is started. Description for explaining the content of the processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power outage processing is executed in the situation where the setting value update processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed It is a figure. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electric constitution of a sound emission control device. It is the flowchart which shows the production control processing which is executed with the sound side CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining an operation corresponding to the contents of the processing executed in the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power in the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the production control processing performed by the sound light side CPU in a 50th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining an operation corresponding to the contents of the processing executed in the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power in the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 51st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 52nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 53rd embodiment. (A) ~ (g) is a time chart showing the state of the subsequent processing when the supply of operating power to the main CPU is stopped in the situation where the set value updating processing is being executed. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value update processing performed by the main CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a storage area provided in a work area for specific control. It is a time chart which shows a mode that the setting value of (a)-(f) update object is updated. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 54th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the main side CPU in a 55th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a clear target area and a clear target non-clear area provided in a work area for specific control. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd timer interruption processing performed by the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the special figure display part and general figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the supply of operating electric power. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each area provided in the clear target area of the work area for specific controls in 56th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed by the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the special figure display part and general figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the supply of operating electric power. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed by the main side CPU in 57th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the special figure display part and general figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the supply of operating electric power. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each area provided in the clear target area and the non-clear target area of the work area for specific controls in 58th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st timer interruption processing performed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed by the main side CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the deviation display lottery table for special figures, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the deviation display lottery table for general figures. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed by the main side CPU in 59th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the initial display lottery table for special figures, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the initial display lottery table for general drawings. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the special figure display part and general figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the supply of operating electric power. It is a flow chart which shows the display start processing performed by the main side CPU in a 60th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the special figure display part and general figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the supply of operating electric power. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed by the main side CPU in 61st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value update process performed by the main side CPU in 62nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed by the main side CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st display allocation table for special figures, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd display allocation table for special drawings, (c) It is an explanatory view. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st display allocation table for drawings, and (d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd display allocation table for general drawings. It is a flowchart which shows the display start process performed by the main side CPU in 63rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko machine 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main components of the pachinko machine 10. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. Have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. The outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the island frame of the game hall may be equipped with the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward when the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side when viewed from the front.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be turned forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation front end side in front view.

In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating front end, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 in a locked state, and The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that the door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide the means. The guide rail as is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

By the way, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper plate 55a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and a launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. By rotating the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 27c is drive-controlled, and the game ball is fired.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, etc. are provided in each opening. ing. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and one is provided for each other.

Even if the ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 occur, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Regarding the number of prize balls, specifically, when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operation port 34. The payout of one prize ball is executed, and when one game ball is inserted into the general winning opening 31, the payout of ten prize balls is executed and the special prize winning device 32 is displayed. When one of the game balls is entered, the payout of 15 prize balls is executed.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls may be smaller in the second operating port 34 than in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may be the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a wind turbine are provided.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the outlet 24a, a general prize hole 31, a special electric prize winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, and a through gate 35. Entering a game ball into is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, the both operating ports 33, 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second working port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the universal electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the universal electric object 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operation port 34 in the downflow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through-gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is triggered by winning the prize in the through gate 35, and a public figure display of the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area in the game area PA where the game balls do not pass. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power combination opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal graphic display portion 38a is ended, the operation shifts to the universal electric open state. In the general electric open state, the general electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the general-purpose display unit 38a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of display segments by LEDs are arranged in a predetermined mode, but the display unit 38a is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL device, or the like. It may be configured by other types of display devices such as a display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display. Further, as the pattern variably displayed on the universal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the universal figure unit 38, a universal figure hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal figure display section 38a. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the through gate 35 is four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the universal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is carried out with the winning of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special drawing unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a special drawing display portion 37a. The display area of the special figure display portion 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display portion 37a, a winning or lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating opening 33 or the winning of the second operating opening 34 as a trigger, whereby a variable display or a predetermined display of the design is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display portion 37a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of display segments by LEDs are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL device or the like. It may be configured by other types of display devices such as a display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display. As the picture displayed on the special figure display portion 37a, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors are displayed. A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the special figure pending display portion 37b.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. May be.

In the symbol display device 41, when the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed on the special symbol display portion 37a based on the winning in the first operating port 33 or the winning in the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of upper, middle, and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas, and each of the symbol columns has a number "1" to "9". The symbols are scroll-displayed with the symbols arranged in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display in all the symbol rows is first started, and the scroll display is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row, the lower symbol row, and the middle symbol row, and finally in each symbol row It ends with the pattern still displayed. Then, in the game times in which the game result is a jackpot result, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the preset effective line on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the same odd symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the most advantageous jackpot result described later is displayed, and the same even symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the low-probability jackpot result described later is displayed. If it is a low winning high certainty jackpot result, it is not the same symbol combination, but if it is not a low winning high certainty jackpot result, the symbol combination that is not stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34, but also the display effect in the opening/closing execution mode which is shifted after the winning is achieved. Be seen. In addition, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the display is started on the special figure display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined result is displayed and ended until the game time is 1 Equivalent to times. Further, the manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the picture display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

When a big hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first working opening 33 or the winning of the second working opening 34, the opening/closing execution mode in which it is possible to win the special electric prize winning device 32 is performed. The special electric winning device 32 is provided with a big winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The open/close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and when the game is transferred to the open/close execution mode in the internal lottery, the game balls can be switched to an open state in which prizes can be won. It has become. By the way, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that in the closed state, the winning is not impossible, but the winning state may be less likely to occur than in the opened state.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to the discharge of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

As described above, the game balls that enter the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a are discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball shot from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the outlet 24a. By entering the ball, it will be discharged from the game area PA. The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, or the out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a. .. The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the flowed out discharge passages 42 to 48, and to the discharge ball collecting portion (not shown). Be recovered. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collecting section are discharged to the ball circulating device of the island facility in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting a game ball are provided in the respective discharge passage portions 42 to 48. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since the four general winning openings 31 are provided as described above, the discharge passage portions 42 to 44 are provided corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the right general winning opening 31 adjacent thereto. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided such that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is formed in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. The second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage portion 42, and the game that entered the general winning opening 31 on the right side thereof. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join at the middle position with respect to the two right general winning openings 31 is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an entrance side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and also has one exit side area due to the entrance side areas joining in the middle. doing. The third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that the detection range exists at an intermediate position of the outlet side region of the third discharge passage portion 44. The game ball that has entered one of the two right winning openings 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44.

The fourth discharge passage portion 45 is provided so as to correspond to the special electric winning device 32. The special electricity detection sensor 45a is provided so that the detection range exists at the midway position of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the game ball entering the special electricity prize winning device 32 is in the middle of passing through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. The fifth discharge passage portion 46 is provided so as to correspond to the first operation port 33. The first working port detection sensor 46a is provided so that the detection range is present at an intermediate position of the fifth discharging passage portion 46, and the game sphere that has entered the first working opening 33 moves through the fifth discharging passage portion 46. During the passage, it is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a. The sixth discharge passage portion 47 is provided so as to correspond to the second operation port 34. The second working port detection sensor 47a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharging passage part 47, and the game ball entering the second working port 34 moves through the sixth discharging passage part 47. During the passage, it is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a. The seventh discharge passage portion 48 is provided so as to correspond to the outlet 24a. The outlet detection sensor 48a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and the game ball entering the outlet 24a is in the middle of passing through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

In addition, the game ball detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, a gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

An electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as each of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect a game ball. Further, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when the game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball is detected. The relationship between HI and LOW is not limited to this, and may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided with a window portion 51 that allows almost the entire game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, and the game area PA is provided from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. If it is visible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

A display light emitting portion 53 is provided above the window portion 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting a sound effect according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulge portion 55 and a lower bulge portion 56 which bulge toward the front side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main controller 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted. FIG. 5 is a front view of main controller 60.

As shown in FIG. 5, the main controller 60 has a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. The MPU 62 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 61. The board box 60a is formed transparent so that the MPU 62 housed in the board box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the board box 60a. Although the substrate box 60a is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 housed in the substrate box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. The main controller 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 in the board box 60a faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 to expose the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually recognize the facing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. The MPU 62 can be viewed through the facing wall portion 60b.

The board box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c in the front and back. The plurality of case bodies 60c prevent separation of the case bodies 60c and traces of the case bodies 60c when they are separated. Is provided with a coupling portion 60e for leaving. A plurality of coupling portions 60e are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 60a. Accordingly, even if the case body 60c is separated by destroying the part of the joint portion 60e while the separation of the case body 60c is prevented by using the part of the joint portion 60e, another joint is performed after that. By separating the part 60e, the case body 60c can be prevented from being separated again. Further, when the case body 60c is separated, the joint portion 60e is destroyed and a trace thereof remains, so that it is possible to visually confirm the joint portion 60e to grasp whether or not the case body 60c is illegally separated. It will be possible. Further, a seal sticker 60f is attached to one side of the substrate box 60a opposite to one side where the coupling portions 60e are arranged in parallel so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c. When the sealing seal 60f is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body 60c. As a result, when the sealing seal 60f is peeled off when the case body 60c is separated, the trace can be left.

In the main control device 60 having the above-mentioned configuration, the main control board 61 is owned by the manager of the game hall in order to generate an opportunity to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6". A setting key insertion portion 68a that is turned on by inserting a setting key, an update button 68b that is operated to sequentially change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on, and a main controller. A reset button 68c operated to clear data of a main RAM 65 described later provided in the MPU 62 of 60, and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying a game history management result. , Are provided. Further, the MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 is connected to the connection terminal of the external device in order to read the management result of the game history or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device. A reading terminal 68d is provided for reading. The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the six stages of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and any number of stages can be set.

The setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, the reading terminal 68d (that is, the MPU 62), and the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61. ing. The element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the facing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a as described above, but the setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d face each other. It is not covered by the wall 60b. That is, in the facing wall portion 60b, the areas facing the setting key insertion portion 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the reading terminal 68d are individual openings. As a result, the setting key can be inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a without pressing the board box 60a, the update button 68b can be pressed, and the reset button 68c can be pressed. It is possible to connect the connection terminal of the external device to the reading terminal 68d.

By inserting the setting key into the setting key inserting section 68a and rotating the setting key in a predetermined direction, the setting key inserting section 68a is turned on. It is possible to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by starting the supply of the operation power to the pachinko machine 10 in that state (that is, by starting the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). It becomes possible to change. Then, each time the update button 68b is pressed once in this state, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed step by step in the ascending order within the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6". When the update button 68b is operated in the state of "setting 6", the setting is updated to "setting 1". In addition, by rotating the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion portion 68a in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction from the position of the ON operation and returning it to the initial position, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned OFF. Become. When the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off, the changeable state ends, and the game can be played in the state of the set value at that time. That is, the set value cannot be changed even if the update button 68b is operated after the changeable state ends.

The ON operation to the setting key insertion portion 68a is valid only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is started). Therefore, even if the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 performs an ON operation on the setting key insertion portion 68a after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed, the setting value cannot be changed.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the degree of advantage per unit time in the pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of n in the “setting n” (n is an integer of “1” to “6”) (that is, the setting). The higher the value, the higher the advantage. Although details will be described later, there are a low-probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively low and a high-probability mode in which the winning probability is relatively high as win/loss lottery modes for determining the winning probability of the jackpot result, and the set value is The higher the probability, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode is set. On the other hand, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high-probability mode is constant regardless of the set value.

The reset button 68c is operated to clear the data in the main RAM 65 as described above, but in order to generate the clearing of the data, the reset button 68c is pressed and supplied with operating power to the pachinko machine 10. Must be started (that is, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 must be started). The ON operation to the reset button 68c is valid only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the reset button 68c is pressed after the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is completed, the data in the main RAM 65 cannot be cleared.

As described above, the reading terminal 68d is connected to the connection terminal of the external device in order to read the game history management result or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device. In order to perform the external output to the pachinko machine 10 in the state where the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d (that is, the operation of the main controller 60 to the MPU 62 is required). It is necessary to start the power supply). The connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is valid only when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the external output to the external device is not performed.

Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is a segment display in which seven display segments by LEDs are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a single multicolor light emission type is provided. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is installed so that the display surface thereof faces the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a is used. Is covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is formed transparent, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c housed in the substrate box 60a are visually observed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible. Further, as already described, the main controller 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 in the board box 60a faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 to expose the back surface of the resin base 21 to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third notifications are made through the facing wall portion 60b. The display surfaces of the display devices 69a to 69c can be visually checked.

On the display surface of the first notification display device 69a, not only the numbers "0" to "9" but also various characters including alphabetic characters are displayed. On the other hand, the numbers 0 to 9 are displayed on the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c. The management results of the game history are notified using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the contents of this notification will be described in detail later. Further, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. The value corresponding to the set value may be displayed on the first notification display device 69a or may be displayed on the second notification display device 69b. Further, the set value before the changeable state is displayed on one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the current setting value is set to the first to third notifications. It may be configured to be displayed on another one of the notification display devices 69a to 69c.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the payout mechanism unit 73 and the control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC, and a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply.

The control device gathering unit 74 generates and outputs a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and accompanies the player's operation of the firing operation device 28. It is provided with a power supply/launching control device 78 for controlling the launch of a game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged in front and back so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game, and a power failure monitor board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 contains a main side ROM 64, a main side RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main side CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above-described elements, the MPU 62 contains an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main-side ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage storage (that is, a non-volatile storage unit), and is used as a read-only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

The main RAM 65 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs power supply from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 can be randomly accessed and has a shorter read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data and the like for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the game history based on the information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although the details will be described later, while the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of the game ball into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, The frequency of entering the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is ascertained according to the obtained winning history. Further, the management IC 66 grasps the occurrence frequencies of the open/close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode described later.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 62, the power failure monitoring board 67 and the payout controller 77 provided in the main controller 60 are connected. A power supply/launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67.

Various sensors such as the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a has the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electricity detection sensor 45a, and the first working opening detection. The sensor 46a, the second operation port detection sensor 47a, the out port detection sensor 48a, and the gate detection sensor 49a are included. Based on the detection results of these ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not each ball has entered the ball. In the main CPU 63, various kinds of lottery are executed based on the winning of the first operating opening 33, and various kinds of drawing are executed based on the winning of the second operating opening 34.

On the input side of the MPU 62, a setting key insertion section 68a provided on the main control board 61, an update button 68b and a reset button 68c are provided. The setting key insertion portion 68a is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is arranged in the ON operation position or the OFF operation position. Then, the main CPU 63 identifies whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is arranged at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position based on the detection result from the sensor. The update button 68b is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the update button 68b is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the update button 68b is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor. The reset button 68c is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor.

A power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a voice emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. In the payout control device 77, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the fact that a game ball has entered a prize ball-corresponding ball part in which the occurrence of a ball corresponds to the payout of a game ball in the ball entering part. It Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81.

On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes the opening and closing door 32a of the special electric prize winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes the general electric officer 34a of the second operation port 34, and The drawing unit 37 and the universal drawing unit 38 are connected. By the way, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a and a special figure reservation display section 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the universal figure unit 38 is provided with a universal figure display section 38a and a universal figure hold display section 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the drive control of the drive unit 32b for special electricity is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the special electricity winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the general electric outlet object 34a is in the open state, the main CPU 63 executes drive control of the general electric outlet 34b so that the general electric outlet object 34a is opened and closed. Further, at the time of each game, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the special figure display portion 37a. Further, in the case of clearly indicating the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the general figure display unit 38a. Further, when a prize is generated in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, or when the variable display is started on the special figure display unit 37a, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the special figure hold display unit 37b. When the winning is generated in the through gate 35, or when the variable display is started on the general figure display section 38a, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the general figure hold display section 38b.

First to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Further, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 is notified through the display on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the current set value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. In this case, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are controlled by the management IC 66 and not controlled by the main CPU 63, whereas the third notification display device 69c is controlled by the main CPU 63. The display is controlled and the display is controlled by the management IC 66. Regarding the display of the third notification display device 69c, the display control by the main CPU 63 has priority over the display control by the management IC 66.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the third notification display device 69c may have a configuration in which the display is controlled by the management IC 66 and not controlled by the main CPU 63. In this case, when the current setting value is displayed on the third annunciating display device 69c when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the main CPU 63 instructs the management IC 66 to display the setting value. Good.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d. The reading terminal 68d is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the connecting terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether the connection terminal of the external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d based on the detection result from the sensor. When an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d, the management result of the game history in the management IC 66 or the information (program and data) stored in the main ROM 64 is output to the external device.

The power failure monitoring board 67 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 78, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power supply/launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the like are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is mainly used. Electric power for storage is supplied to the main RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77. Further, the power supply/launch control device 78 is responsible for the launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied. Further, the payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with the power switch as already described, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, and the power switch is turned off. As a result, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

The sound emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission part 53 and the speaker part 54 provided on the front door frame 14 and controls the display control device 82 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. Is. The display control device 82 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the voice emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for the main CPU 63 to perform various lottery will be described with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 63 uses a variety of counter information at the time of the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the special symbol display portion 37a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the general symbol display portion 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery for winning, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are displaced. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when performing, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the hit random number counter C1, and display duration in the special figure display portion 37a and the symbol display device 41 are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the universal electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the universal electric open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0". Each counter is updated at short time intervals. The information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as acquisition information storage means in the main side RAM 65 when a winning is generated in the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34. It is stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

The hold storage area 65a includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and the winning history of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 is recorded. In addition, a combination of numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the winning in the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1→the second holding area RE1 Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the holding area RE2→the third holding area RE3→the fourth holding area RE4. Since the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 are provided in this way, the winning history of the game balls to the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. ..

Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical value information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display portion 37a, and starts one game time. At that time, a win/fail judgment or the like is performed on the basis of various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The general electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The ordinary electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and is stored in the ordinary electric current holding area 65c of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric outlet 34a to be in the open state based on the stored value of the general electric outlet opening counter C4.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with the situation where the game balls are continuously emitted in the same manner in the game area PA, the general electric service object 34a of the second working port 34 is opened per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high or low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability that the ordinary electric open state wins in the ordinary electric open lottery using the ordinary electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric outlet 34a is in the open state when the general electric open state is won is set to a greater number than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set longer. Has been done. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the general electric open state wins and the general electric auditors a thing 34a is opened a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum securing time required for the next regular electric train open lottery to be performed after one regular electric train open lottery (ie The one-time display duration on the display section 38a) is set to be short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operation port 33 is higher than in the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than the first operation port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a winning is generated in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he or she holds. It can be carried out.

Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency of the high frequency support mode to be in the normal power open state per unit time more than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, in the normal power open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the ordinary electric open state. In addition, a securing time that is secured when the next ordinary electric train open lottery is performed after one ordinary electric train open lottery is performed (for example, it is executed in the universal map display portion 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In the configuration where multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter securing time is easier to select or the average securing time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Good. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the time of opening is lengthened, and the securing time that is secured when the next regular electric train opening lottery is performed after one regular electric train opening lottery is shortened. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or an arbitrary combination of conditions of shortening the averaging time and increasing the winning probability.

Here, as described above, the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6” exist in the pachinko machine 10, but which is the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general electric officer 34a in the low frequency support mode? The setting values are the same, and the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general electric auditors article 34a in the high frequency support mode are the same regardless of the setting values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the opening frequency and the opening mode of the general electric officer 34a varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in at least one of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. It may be configured. For example, the higher the set value is, the higher the frequency of opening the general electric outlet 34a in the low frequency support mode may be, and the second operation in the case where the general electric outlet 34a is in the open state once in the low frequency support mode. The probability that the game ball enters the mouth 34 may be increased. Further, the higher the set value is, the higher the frequency of opening the general electric utility article 34a in the high frequency support mode may be. The second case when the general electric utility article 34a is in the open state once in the high frequency support mode may be adopted. It may be configured such that the probability of a game ball entering the actuation opening 34 increases.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and then returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a win/loss table. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64. As the win/loss table, low probability win/loss tables 64a to 64f for the low probability mode and a high accuracy win/loss table 64g for the high probability mode are stored.

The low probability hit/miss tables 64a to 64f are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". That is, the low probability table 64a for setting 1 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1", and the setting referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". 2 low probability table 64b, the low probability table 64c for setting 3 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3", and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “Setting 5”, the low probability table 64d for setting 4 referred to when the pachinko machine 10 and the pachinko machine 10 are set. The low probability table 64f for the setting 6 referred to when the setting state of “setting 6” is “setting 6” exists.

These low certainty win/loss tables 64a to 64f are set so that the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the jackpot result. Specifically, when the low-probability/probability table 64a for setting 1 is referenced, a big hit result is obtained at about 1/320, and when the low-probability/probability table 64b for setting 2 is referenced, about 1/310. Results in a big hit, and when the low probability table 64c for setting 3 is referenced, the result is about 1/300. When the low accuracy table 64d for setting 4 is referenced, the result is approximately 1/290. Results in a big hit, about 1/280 when the low probability table 64e for setting 5 is referred to, and about 1/270 when a low accuracy table 64f for setting 6 is referred to. The result is a big hit. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low-probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, the high-probability hit/miss table 64g is provided in only one kind so as to be common in any of the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". The high-probability win/loss table 64g is set so that the winning probability of the jackpot result is higher than that of the low-probability win/loss tables 64a to 64f in any of the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Specifically, when the highly accurate hit/miss table 64g is referred to, the result is a big hit with about 1/30. As a result, it is possible to make the high-probability mode more advantageous than the low-probability mode regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, even in the lowest setting state "setting 1", the probability of a jackpot result can be made higher than in the low probability mode of "setting 6" which is the highest setting state by being in the high probability mode. Becomes Further, in the high-probability mode, it is possible to prevent an advantage or a disadvantage due to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and to suppress the storage capacity for storing the high-probability hit/miss table 64g in the main ROM 64 in advance. It becomes possible.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are (1) a mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode, and (3) A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating the three conditions of the support mode in the universal electric accessory 34a of the 2 working port 34.

As a mode of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, the high frequency is set so that the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in either the high frequency winning mode or the low frequency winning mode, the round game is executed with the predetermined number of round games as the upper limit.

A round game is a game that continues until either one of the following conditions is satisfied: a predetermined upper limit duration elapses and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric prize winning device 32. That is. Further, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same in the fixed round number regardless of the type of the jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, regardless of which jackpot result is obtained, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types are set for the one-time opening mode of the special electric prize winning device 32, with different open durations from the opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 to the closing. Specifically, a long time mode in which the open duration is set to 29 seconds, which is a long time, and a short time mode in which the open duration is set to 0.06 seconds, which is a short time shorter than the above long time, Is set.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 28 is being operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 seconds. Controlled. Further, the upper limit number of end conditions of the round game is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode of the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening duration time is set to be longer than the product of the game cycle of the game ball and one round game. On the other hand, in the short time mode, a time shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and one round game, more specifically, a release duration of a time shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball is set. Therefore, when the opening is performed once in the long time mode, it is expected that the special electric prize winning device 32 will be won by the upper limit number in one round game. It is expected that if the special opening award device 32 is opened twice, no prize is won in the special electric prize winning device 32, or even if a prize is won, only one prize is won.

In the high frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a long time mode. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

In addition, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened/closed in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those of the high frequency winning mode. Is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of winning the special electric prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher than that in the low frequency winning mode. Is.

The distribution destination of the jackpot result to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table 64h as shown in FIG. Then, in the distribution table 64h, a low-probability jackpot result, a low winning high-probability jackpot result, and a most advantageous jackpot result are set as the distribution destinations of the jackpot results when the jackpot result is obtained.

The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

The low winning high-accuracy jackpot result is the jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/loss lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. is there. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the win/loss lottery becomes a big hit state win, and the big hit state is brought about.

The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the win/loss lottery becomes a big hit state win, and the big hit state is brought about.

Note that the normal game state in relation to each of the above-mentioned game states means not the open/close execution mode but the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In addition, as a game result, a low winning high probability jackpot result may not be set. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode in the low winning high-probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be smaller than that in the low-probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result.

In the distribution table 64h, of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to the low-probability jackpot result, and "10 to 14" correspond to the low winning high-probability jackpot result. Corresponding, "15-29" corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result.

Only one kind of distribution table 64h is provided so as to be common in any of the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distribution state of the jackpot result from being advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and the storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 in advance. Can be suppressed.

The distribution mode of the jackpot results may be different depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, a higher setting value may be configured to increase the probability of being distributed to the most advantageous jackpot result, and a higher setting value may be configured to increase the probability of being distributed to the most advantageous jackpot result or the low winning affirmative jackpot result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of becoming the high-probability mode after the jackpot result. In addition, the higher the set value, the lower the probability of being distributed to the high-accuracy jackpot result may be set to be low. It may be configured so that it can be distributed to the jackpot results. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the open/close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode will occur.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Expected effects are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a kind of display effects in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a game machine in which a final stop result is a given response result in a game time that is a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 The display state for making the player think that the variation display state is likely to be the above-mentioned assignment correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol is started. In addition, as for the assignment correspondence result, specifically, a combination of symbols having the same number is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines.

Two types of expected display are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display or the result of the assignment response in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed for a part of the symbol columns displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, thereby displaying a combination of the reach symbols, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol column is included. Further, in the state where the reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the reach display is performed by displaying the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. , Which includes reducing or displaying a combination of reach patterns and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbols is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns, or some symbol columns are plural. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol column, the aspect in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol column is included. Further, a background screen having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes and a pattern on the symbol row having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes are also included. Such notice display can occur in both game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game time when the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. Moreover, in the game times corresponding to the big hit result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, it is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the result of deviation, it is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. ..

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made in the sound emission control device 81, not in the main control device 60. In this case, the voice emission control device 81 is more likely to give a notice display in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the miss result, and to give a notice display with a low appearance rate. The lottery process for displaying the advance notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that is likely to occur. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for game use is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Here, the probability that the reach display is generated in the game times that result in the deviation is the same in any of the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage due to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from occurring with respect to the probability that the reach display is generated in the game times that result in the deviation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the reach display will occur in the game times that result in the deviation.

Next, the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the main CPU 63 determines the display duration time in the special figure display portion 37a and the display duration time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a timer interrupt process described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is executed. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the variation display on the special figure display unit 37a and determining the variation pattern at the time when the symbol display device 41 starts the variation of the symbol.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 for advancing a game will be described. The processes of the main CPU 63 are roughly classified into a main process that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process is started, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) elapses without waiting for the next process. During the execution period of the power-on weight process, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102).

Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned on (step S103). When the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned on (step S103: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S104). When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S104: YES), each area of the main RAM 65 is set to "except for the area in the main RAM 65 in which the information of the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. When "0" is cleared, initial setting is performed for the area where "0" is cleared (step S105). That is, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while pressing the reset button 68c without the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 for the setting value information is started. The clear process of the main RAM 65 is executed while maintaining the state before the power supply is stopped, and the storage area in which the clear process is executed is initialized. This makes it possible to initialize other areas of the main RAM 65 without the need to change the set value. In step S105, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized.

When the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S104: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S106). The power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 65, and when the supply of the operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped and a predetermined power failure time process is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to "1". Will be set. When the power failure flag is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation result matches the checksum saved when the power is cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S107). .. When the process of step S105 is executed, or when the positive determination is made in step S107, it is determined whether the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the main RAM 65 (step S108). Specifically, it is determined to be normal when the setting value is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and abnormal when it is "0" or 7 or more.

When a negative determination is made in any of steps S106 to S108, the operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, an infinite loop is performed after executing the error notification process for notifying the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of the error (step S109). The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the all clear process (step S117) described later.

When a positive determination is made in all of steps S106 to S108, power-on setting processing is executed (step S110). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. After executing the process of step S110, the management IC 66 recognizes various information (step S111) and outputs various data to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. A data output process is executed (step S112). Details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be described later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S112 is completed and the process of step S113 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S112 ends, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S113 is started. Therefore, the processing for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until the situation is reached.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S113 to S116. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S113 to S116 is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps S113 to S116 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed.

In the residual processing, first, in step S113, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In a succeeding step S114, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S115. In these update processes, the current numerical value information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical value information is performed, and then the process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S116, an interrupt permission setting for switching from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. When the process of step S116 is executed, the process returns to step S113 and the processes of steps S113 to S116 are repeated.

On the other hand, when the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on (step S103: YES), the main RAM 65 including the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. All areas are cleared to "0", and initial settings are made to the areas cleared to "0" (step S117). That is, when an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, all areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to "0" and cleared even if the reset button 68c is not pressed. Initialization is performed on the storage area in which the processing has been executed. Further, in step S117, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even if an operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, the entire RAM 65 on the main side is not operated. The clearing process may be executed without executing the clearing process and when the operation for changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the reset button 68c is pressed.

After that, the set value update processing is executed in step S118, the set value update signal output processing is executed in step S119, and then the process proceeds to step S110. The setting value update process will be described below. The output processing of the set value update signal will be described later in detail. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the set value updating process.

First, "1" is set to the set value counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S201). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. By setting "1" in the set value counter, when the set value updating process is executed, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point.

After that, display start processing of the set value is executed (step S202). In the setting value display start processing, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number "1" corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed. When changing the set value, the manager of the game hall can confirm the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c.

Then, it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S204), on condition that the setting key insertion part 68a has not been operated OFF (step S203: NO). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When a negative determination is made in step S204, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off.

When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S204: YES), the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S205). When the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S206: YES), "1" is set in the set value counter (step S207). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, it is updated to the setting value one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", it is set to "setting 1". Will return.

When a negative determination is made in step S206, or when the processing of step S207 is executed, the display update processing of the set value is executed (step S208). In the display update process of the set value, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number corresponding to the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is displayed. By checking the third notification display device 69c, the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process of step S208, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off. When the OFF operation has not been performed (step S203: NO), the processes of step S204 and thereafter are executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S203: YES), display end processing of the set value is executed (step S209). In the display end processing of the set value, the display of the set value on the third notification display device 69c is ended.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

First, power failure information storage processing is executed (step S301). In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power cutoff is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and when the occurrence of the power failure is identified, the infinite loop is executed after the power failure processing is executed. Become. In the power failure process, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S302). In the lottery random number updating process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility article release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical value information is sequentially read from the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility article opening counter C4, and the read numerical value information is incremented by 1 respectively. After that, a process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S303, the random number initial value updating process is executed as in step S114, and at the same time, the fluctuation counter updating process is executed in step S304 as in step S115.

After that, the fraud detection process of monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as the fraudulent monitoring target has occurred is executed (step S305). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, "1" is set to the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65. In a succeeding step S306, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. When a negative determination is made in step S306, the processing from step S307 is executed.

In step S307, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting the various drive units 32b and 34b corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, output of a drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general electric power is started and the state should be switched to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

Then, the reading process is executed (step S308). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

Then, a ball detection process is executed (step S309). In the entrance detection process, the signals received from the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read results, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the first operating opening 33. , The presence or absence of a ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the incoming ball detection process will be described later.

After that, a timer updating process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S310). In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may be configured.

Then, the firing control process for controlling the firing of the game ball is executed (step S311). In the situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 seconds. In subsequent step S312, as input state monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing in step S308, disconnection confirmation of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and open confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. I do.

After that, the special figure special electric power control processing for executing the game time execution control and the execution control of the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S313). The special figure special power control processing will be described in detail later.

After that, the universal figure/universal control process is executed (step S314). In the general/universal/universal control process, a process for acquiring the suspension information on the general/universal side is executed when a prize is paid to the through gate 35, and the suspension information on the general/universal side is stored. Then, the release information is determined to be released, and the processing for performing the effect for the universal figure is executed when the release determination is triggered. In addition, based on the result of the open determination, a process of opening and closing the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. Further, in the case of the open/close execution mode, even if the support mode immediately before that is the high frequency support mode, it becomes the low frequency support mode.

In the following step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S313 and S314, the output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information related to the special figure display unit 37a in the special figure hold display unit 37b is set and The output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information related to the universal figure display section 38a on the universal figure hold display section 38b is set. In step S315, the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display portion 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S313 and S314, and the display content of the general figure display portion 38a is set. Set the output information for updating.

After that, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state receiving process for performing the process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S316). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S317). Further, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S318). Then, the management output process for outputting the information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S319). Details of the management output process will be described later.

Next, the special figure special power control processing of step S313 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a process of acquiring pending information is executed (step S401). In the process of obtaining the hold information, it is determined whether or not a prize has been paid to the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34, and if a winning has occurred, the number of holdings in the holding storage area 65a is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is less than the value (“4” in the present embodiment). When the number of reservations is less than the upper limit value, the number of reservations is incremented by 1, and each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S302 is used for holding. It is stored in the first holding area among the empty holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE. In addition, when the winnings to the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34 occur at the same time, the processing for acquiring the holding information is performed within the range in which the processing for acquiring the holding information is executed once. Run multiple times. Further, when a new acquisition of the hold information is performed, a corresponding acquisition-time command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. When the voice emission control device 81 receives the command, it updates the display of the image showing the number of the hold information on the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the increase of the hold information.

After that, the information of the special figure special power counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S402), and the special figure special power address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step S403). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the special map special telephone address is acquired from the special figure special telephone address table (step S404), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address among the processes of steps S406 to S412 (step S405). ). The special figure special telephone counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to know which of the various processes of steps S406 to S412 should be executed. The special figure special telephone address table is The start address of the program for executing the processing of steps S406 to S412 is set in association with the numerical information.

In step S406, special figure variation start processing is executed. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation start processing.

In the special figure variation start process, the data setting process is executed (step S502) on condition that the number of the hold information stored in the hold area RE is 1 or more (step S501: YES). In the data setting process, first, the number of reservations is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the process of shifting the data stored in each of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 to the lower area side, and specifically, the second holding area RE2→the first holding area RE1. , The third reservation area RE3→the second reservation area RE2, the fourth reservation area RE4→the third reservation area RE3, and the like, and the fourth reservation area RE4 is cleared to “0”. At this time, a shift command for recognizing that the data in the holding area has been shifted is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. When the voice emission control device 81 receives the command, it updates the display of the image showing the number of the hold information on the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the decrease of the hold information.

After executing the data setting process, the win/fail table is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). Specifically, the current winning/unwinning lottery mode is grasped by reading information indicating the winning/unwinning lottery mode in the main RAM 65. In the case of the high probability mode, the high probability table 64g is read from the main ROM 64. On the other hand, in the low probability mode, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is grasped by reading the value of the setting value counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the low probability table 64a to 64f corresponding to the grasped set value is read from the main ROM 64.

After that, the win/loss determination process is executed by referring to the win/loss tables 64a to 64g read in step S503 (step S504). In the hit determination processing, the hit determination information among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical value information relating to the hit random number counter C1 is set as the jackpot numerical value information set in the hit tables 64a to 64g read in step S503. It is determined whether or not

When the result of the win/loss determination process is the jackpot win result (step S505: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S506). In the distribution determination process, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical value information related to the jackpot type counter C2, is read out from the information stored in the execution area AE. Then, by referring to the distribution table 64h provided in the main ROM 64, it is determined which jackpot result the numerical information related to the read jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to. Specifically, it specifies which of the low-probability jackpot result, the low winning high-probability jackpot result, and the most advantageous jackpot result corresponds to the jackpot result.

After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S507). Specifically, in the game time of the variation start of this time, the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display portion 37a from the stop result table for the jackpot result prestored in the main ROM 64. It is specified and the specified information is written in the main RAM 65. In this big hit result stop result table, information on the form of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display portion 37a is set differently for each kind of big hit result.

Then, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S508). Specifically, the main RAM 65 is provided with a flag corresponding to each kind of jackpot result, and in step S508, among the flags corresponding to each kind of jackpot result, of the distribution determination processing of step S506. "1" is set to the flag corresponding to the result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S505 that the result is not the jackpot, the stop result setting process for the outlier result is executed (step S509). Specifically, in the game time of the variation start this time, the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display portion 37a is stored in the main side ROM 64 in advance from the stop result table for the disconnection result. It is specified and the specified information is written in the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After performing the process of either step S508 or step S509, the process of grasping the duration of the game is performed (step S510). In this process, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated on the symbol display device 41 at the current game time. Specifically, when the game number related to the current fluctuation start is the low-probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display is generated. If it is not any of the jackpot results and the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence, it is determined that the reach display is generated.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the reach generation continuation period table stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to, and the continuation period of the game time corresponding to the numerical value information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the continuation of the game times corresponding to the numerical value information of the variation type counter CS of this time is referred by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 64. Get the period. By the way, the duration of game times that can be obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of game times that can be obtained by referring to the reach occurrence duration table.

In addition, the duration of the game time when the reach is not generated is set so that the duration of the game time becomes shorter as the number of pieces of holding information stored in the holding area RE increases. In addition, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, a shorter duration of the game time is selected as compared with the case where the number of holding information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The reach non-occurrence duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the duration of the game times may not change in accordance with the number of pieces of hold information and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the duration of the game times when the reach occurs. Further, the duration table may be set individually for each of the various jackpot results, the case of the missed reach, and the case of the missed result of the non-reach occurrence. In this case, the distribution of the duration of game times is performed according to each game result.

After that, the information on the duration of the game times acquired in step S510 is set in the special figure special power timer counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S511). The updating of the numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed in the timer updating process (step S310). By the way, as the effect for game play, the variable display of the symbol on the special figure display portion 37a and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are performed. However, when each of these variable displays is finished, the game time is changed. In the state in which the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a predetermined combination of symbols is waited on the activated line), the final stop is displayed for the final stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the duration of the game time acquired in step S510 is the total time for one game time.

After that, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S512). The variation command includes information on the duration of the game. Here, as described above, the duration of the game times obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game times obtained by referring to the reach occurrence duration table. Even if the variation command does not include the information about the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, the voice emission control device 81 can identify the presence or absence of the reach occurrence from the information on the duration of the game. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variation command may include information directly indicating whether or not the reach has occurred. Further, the type command includes information on the game result.

When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the variation command and the type command from the main CPU 63, the display light emission part 53, the speaker part 54, and the symbol display device 41 are caused to execute the game use effect. In this case, the effect for game play is performed in a mode corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command. Further, in the symbol display device 41, a variable display of symbols is performed as an effect for game use, and when the effect for game use is finished, a combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the win/loss determination process and the distribution determination process is displayed. It will be stopped.

After that, the variable display of the design on the special figure display portion 37a is started (step S513). Then, the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S514). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1". After that, "1" is set to the eleventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S515). The eleventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that the game time has started is to be executed for the management IC 66.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52 ), the special figure changing process is executed in step S407. In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing before the final stop display during the duration of the game time, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display portion 37a is ruled. Process for changing the target. At the time of the final stop display, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special map special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special figure changing process from the special figure changing process. Update to stuff. In this embodiment, the main CPU 63 does not send the final stop command to the sound emission control device 81.

In step S408, the processing for determining the special figure is executed. In the special figure finalizing process, the display mode of the design on the special figure display portion 37a is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game. In addition, in the special figure finalizing process, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not transition to the open/close execution mode occurs. When the shift to the open/close execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is cleared to "0". When a shift to the open/close execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special map special electric counter is incremented by 1 to change the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to that corresponding to the special electric start process. Update.

In step S409, a special power start process is executed. In the special electric power starting process, if the process for starting the opening period in the current open/close execution mode has not been executed yet, the opening period setting process is executed. Further, the opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the opening effect. When the opening period has elapsed, the starting process for starting the first round game is executed. In the starting process, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and the ending condition of the round game is set. In setting the ending condition, the upper limit duration time for keeping the special electric prize winning device 32 in the open state in the first round game of this time is set, and the special electric prize device 32 can be won in the first round game of this time. The upper limit number of game balls is set in the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 65.

In step S410, the special electric power releasing processing is executed. In the special electric open processing, it is determined whether or not the ending condition of the round game is satisfied. When the ending condition is satisfied, the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed. Then, if the round game that has ended this time is not the last round game of the execution time, the numerical information of the special map special electric counter is incremented by 1 to change the numerical information of the counter from the special electric open processing to the special electric closing processing. If the round game ended this time is the round game of the last execution time, the numerical information of the special map special electric counter is added by 2 to correspond to the special electric open processing. Update from the one that corresponds to the special telephone end processing.

In step S411, a special electric power closing process is executed. In the special electric closed processing, it is determined whether or not the interval period between round games has passed. The interval period is set when the previous round game ends. When the interval period has elapsed, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and the ending condition of the round game is set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric power closing processing to the value corresponding to the special electric open processing.

In step S412, special electric power termination processing is executed. In the special electric power termination processing, if the processing for starting the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode of this time is not yet executed, the ending period (for example, 5 seconds) is set and the ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. .. The sound emission control device 81 receives the ending command, and causes the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the ending effect. When the ending period has elapsed, each of the winning/losing lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set to a mode corresponding to the jackpot result which triggered the opening/closing execution mode of this time.

Next, in the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, the second working opening 34, and the through. A configuration for identifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a are input to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can simultaneously handle eight types of signals. Areas in which information of "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7 are provided as the area. Further, although more than eight kinds of signals are input to the input port 63a, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a depends on the driver IC in order to limit the simultaneous input to eight kinds. It can be switched through the switching control.

In the incoming ball detection process (step S309) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. In such a situation where the setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning a prize detection sensor 44a is stored in the second bit D2, and the information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric power detection sensor 45a is stored in the third bit D3. , The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6-bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

When the passage of the game ball is not detected, each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal as a detection signal indicating that the game ball is not being detected, and detects the passage of the game ball. In that case, a HI level signal indicating that the detection is being performed is output as the detection signal. The input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when receiving the LOW level signal, and "1" for the corresponding bit when receiving the HI level signal. Stores the information of. That is, in a situation where passage of the game ball is not detected by the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is detected. In the detected state, information of "1" corresponding to the information indicating that the bit is being detected is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the incoming ball detection process executed in step S309 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, the first winning hole detection sensor 42a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S601: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S602), and the value of the 10 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S603). .. The first output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag. The 10 prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that the payout of 10 game balls should be executed. When the value of the counter for 10 award balls is 1 or more, the 10 award ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the 10 award balls are issued. When the command is output once, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the ten prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that ten game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S604: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S605), and the value of the 10 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S606). .. The second output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S607: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S608), and the value of the 10 award ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S609). .. The third output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the special-electricity detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S610: YES). In this case, the special electricity winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S611), and the fourth output flag provided to the main RAM 65 is set to 1 (step S612). The value of the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S613). The special electric prize flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric prize device 32 in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode. In the special figure special electric power control processing (step S313) of the timer interruption processing (FIG. 11), by confirming that the special electric prize winning flag is set to "1", one game ball is inserted into the special electric prize winning device 32. It is specified that a ball has occurred, and the remaining possible number of balls to enter the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game is subtracted by one. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of possible balls to enter is executed, the special electric prize flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the special electric power detection sensor 45a should be executed to the management IC 66. .. The counter for 15 prize balls is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that the payout of 15 game balls should be executed. When the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the 15 prize balls are also displayed. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 award ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S614: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S615), and the fifth output flag provided to the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S616). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S617). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation opening 33. In the special figure special electric power control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to “1”, and thus the result is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a. On condition that the number of held information items is less than 4, which is the upper limit number, a process of newly storing the held information items is executed. In the special electric special electric power control processing (step S313), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". To do. The fifth output flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that one game ball should be paid out. When the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, the one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the one prize ball is obtained. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5 is switched to the state in which the information of “1” is stored, the second working port detection sensor 47a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S618: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S619), and "1" is set to the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S620). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S621). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operating port 34. In the special figure special electric power control process (step S313) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 11), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to “1”, and thus the result is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a. On condition that the number of held information items is less than 4, which is the upper limit number, a process of newly storing the held information items is executed. In the special electric special electric power control processing (step S313), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". To do. The sixth output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the second working opening detection sensor 47a should be executed for the management IC 66. It is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information of "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6 is switched to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. Is detected (step S622: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S623). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one gaming ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be executed for the management IC 66. is there.

When it is confirmed that the situation where the information of "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S624: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S625). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the universal communication control processing (step S314) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), it is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1", and the universal communication stored in the universal communication holding area 65c is confirmed. A process of storing the numerical information of the current general electric utility article release counter C4 in the general electric power holding area 65c as the general-purpose-side holding information, provided that the number of pieces of the holding information on the side is less than the upper limit number of 4. To execute. It is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1" in the normal/universal control process (step S314), and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated in a cycle of 4 milliseconds as already described, when the detection of one game ball is started by one of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a, The main side CPU 63 specifies that one game ball has been detected by the ball detection sensors 42a-49a while the ball detection sensors 42a-49a continue to detect the one game ball. Will be held in. Therefore, it suffices if each one of the first to seventh output flags is provided.

Next, the content of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configurations of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 16.

The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 includes a payout side CPU 92, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit, as well as a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used as a read-only memory. The payout side ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the payout side CPU 92 and fixed value data.

The payout RAM 94 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs to be supplied with electric power from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 is capable of random access and has a shorter read time than the payout side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

The payout side CPU 92 can perform bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. Upon receipt of the prize ball command from the main CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the payout of the game balls can be normally performed, and when it is determined that the payout of the game balls is not normally possible, the payout side RAM 94 is displayed. The payout device 76 is stopped even in the situation where the number of unpaid prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits to the main side CPU 63 a payout restriction command indicating that the normal payout is not possible. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 perform a notification indicating that it is not possible to normally pay out the game balls. As described above, the notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. As a state in which it is not possible to normally pay out the game balls, the lower plate 56a is filled with the game balls, the tank 75 has no balls filled with the game balls, and the payout device 76. Is not operating normally, there is a payout abnormal state, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. ..

An unillustrated full tank detection sensor is provided at an intermediate position of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming ball is in a full state when the gaming ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state in which the gaming ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. In this case, it is specified that the full tank state has been released.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided at an intermediate position of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that there is no ball when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and when the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball no detection sensor is released. Specify that the ball-free state has been released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the game balls paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Further, the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the payout detection sensor is in the payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect the game ball despite the drive control of the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. , When the state in which the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is specified that the abnormal payout state has been released.

A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a close detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In the case of, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and when receiving the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. The front door frame 14 is specified to be in the open state. Further, the payout-side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing specified that the front door frame 14 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. The front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when receiving the front door opening command, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closing state when receiving the front door closing command.

A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2 ), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body opening sensor 96 sends an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It specifies that the main body 12 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main CPU 63 at a timing specified that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at a timing. The main CPU 63 identifies that the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state when receiving the body opening command, and identifies that the gaming machine body 12 is in the closing state when receiving the body closing command.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds).

First, a full tank process is executed (step S701). In the process for full tank, as described above, it is determined whether or not the tank is in the full tank state based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and in the case of the full tank state, the process for stopping the payout of the game balls. And the command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the full tank state is released, processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and at the same time, a command indicating that the full tank state has been released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the ball non-use process is executed (step S702). In the ball non-use process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball is in a non-ball state based on the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor, and in the case of the non-ball state, a process for stopping the payout of the game ball Along with the execution, a command indicating that there is no ball is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the non-sphere state is released, a process for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and a command indicating that the non-sphere state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the payout abnormality monitoring processing is executed (step S703). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the payout state is abnormal based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and when the payout state is abnormal, the process of stopping the payout of the game ball is executed. At the same time, a command indicating that the dispensing is abnormal is sent to the main CPU 63. Also, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state has been canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Then, the front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S704). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95, and when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, While executing the process of stopping the payout of the game balls, it sends a front door opening command to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is closed, processing for enabling payout of game balls is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Then, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S705). In the main body opening monitoring process, as described above, based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96, it is specified whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball The process of stopping the payout of the main body is executed and the main body opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, processing for enabling the payout of gaming balls is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the command reading process is executed (step S706). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command transmitted by the main CPU 63 is executed, and the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number of the received prize ball commands to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S707), the payout device 76 pays out the game balls. The payout control process for controlling the execution of is executed (step S708). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 has a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and the payout detection sensor detects one game ball. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize ball number information. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S709).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals. Some external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some external terminals are provided. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 in this way, as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

One external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96. In detail regarding the configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at an intermediate position of a signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branching from the signal path SL1 from the front door opening sensor 95 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to the external terminal for opening the front door of the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door of the external terminal board 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

For details of the main body opening sensor 96, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branching path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 from the main body opening sensor 96 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to the external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal board 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

Next, the contents of information externally output to the hall computer HC from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 will be described. First, the content of information output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

In the external information setting process (step S318) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the main CPU 63 sets output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 in the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, information indicating that the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode, and one game time have ended. And a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls from the game area PA through any one of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. Information indicating that the game ball has been discharged, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information that indicates that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. ..

In the external information setting process (step S709) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the payout side CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 in the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 gaming balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of paying out the game balls in the pachinko machine 10 or the like. For example,
・The payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of payouts of the game balls generated until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine ・The output in the normal game state that is not the opening/closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode Ball rate (hereinafter, this ball output rate is referred to as "B")
-Ball output rate in open/close execution mode-ball output rate in high frequency support mode-number of game times executed until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is "S")
B-S x "the number of prize balls for winning in the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34"
-The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 that occur until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
-The number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 that have occurred until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
B-(S1 x "number of prize balls for winning in first working port 33" + S2 x "number of prize balls for winning in second working port 34")
The probability of occurrence of the open/close execution mode per unit game time, the probability of occurrence of high frequency support mode per unit game time, etc. are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball input section.

<Structure for managing the winning mode of the game ball>
Next, a configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. Further, the MPU 62 is provided with the I/F 101 in addition to these, and is also provided with the reading terminal 68d already described.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting/receiving a signal to/from a device external to the MPU 62. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. The detection result from the sensors such as the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and the command from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I/F 101, and based on the input detection result and the content of the command. As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. Further, when a signal is output to a device such as the drive unit 32b for special electric power as a result of execution of various processes in the main CPU 63, the signal is output through the output port of the I/F 101, and When a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81 as a result of the CPU 63 performing various processes, the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101.

The management IC 66 includes a management-side I/F 111, a management-side CPU 112, a management-side ROM 113, a management-side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, a history memory 117, and a calculation result memory 131. Equipped with. These respective devices are connected to each other through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication.

The management-side I/F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 68d via the. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 68d are output from the output port of the management I/F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d via the bidirectional communication signal path group 120 built in the MPU 62.

The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management-side ROM 113 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, nonvolatile storage means), and is used as a read-only memory. The management-side ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management-side CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management-side RAM 114 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs to be supplied with electric power from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 is capable of random access and has a shorter read time than the management-side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like for execution of the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date information and time information, and outputs the measured date information and time information (hereinafter, also referred to as date and time information) according to an instruction from the management CPU 112. This is a possible configuration. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure the date information and the time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

The correspondence relationship memory 116 is a memory such as an SRAM and a DRAM that requires external power supply to retain the memory (that is, a volatile storage unit), and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence relationship memory 116 stores information on the correspondence relationship between the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for. Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

The history memory 117 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage (that is, nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the game history received from the main CPU 63 through the management I/F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

The operation result memory 131 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The calculation result memory 131 is used to sequentially store various parameters calculated by the management-side CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c and are output to the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management-side I/F 111 will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is an input target signal. Information of "0" is stored as the first data when is at the LOW level, and information of "1" is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at the HI level. The relationship between the LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

The first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU63 outputs the first signal of the LOW level in the situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level first signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level first signal is input to the first buffer 122a.

The second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the second signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is played by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level second signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level second signal is input to the second buffer 122b.

The third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a low-level third signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and one game is played by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level third signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level third signal is input to the third buffer 122c.

The fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, when the main CPU 63 outputs a low-level fourth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. And outputs a fourth signal of HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

The fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first working opening detection sensor 46a, and one game is played by the first working opening detection sensor 46a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level fifth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal of the HI level is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

The sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second working opening detection sensor 47a, and one game is played by the second working opening detection sensor 47a. When the sphere is detected, the HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

The seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level seventh signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the out-mouth detecting sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out-mouth detecting sensor 48a. In that case, the seventh signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in operation is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level eighth signal in the situation other than the open/close execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in the situation of the open/close execution mode.

A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in operation is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW-level ninth signal in the situation not in the high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in the situation in the high-frequency support mode.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and continues the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. And output.

The eleventh signal corresponding to whether or not the game time has started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eleventh signal before the game time is started, and outputs the HI level eleventh signal for a specific period when the game time is started. To do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI-level eleventh signal is input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

A set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize that the main CPU 63 has newly set the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, when the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level set value update signal in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not newly set, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. In addition, the HI level set value update signal is output for the number of pulse signals corresponding to the newly set set value for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

The sixteenth buffer 122p has an output instruction signal for causing the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the trigger for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d. Is entered. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal in a situation where it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. To do. The specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

Although the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the fourteenth buffer 122n can input signals from the main CPU 63, the pachinko machine 10 is blank in which normal signals are not input. In this way, as the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111, the number of buffers 122a to 122p, which are larger than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10, are provided. It is possible to use the management IC 66 for a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118l to 118n may not be formed between the buffers 122l to 122n to be blanked.

Whether the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p are determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and an instruction from the main CPU 63 is received. Instead, the management-side CPU 112 can specify that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the kind of these signals is instructed by the main CPU 63. As a result, the CPU 112 on the management side specifies. Although the details of the types of these signals in the management-side CPU 112 will be described later, when the control is started in the main-side CPU 63 and the management-side CPU 112 with the start of the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62, the main-side CPU 63 causes the management-side CPU 112 to perform control. It is performed by transmitting a type identification command to the. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the types of various signals are specified by the management side CPU 112 in the situation where the operating power is supplied, The information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. In the correspondence memory 116, the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111. It is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. Further, in the first correspondence area 123a, together with information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31, also information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces) Is stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the second buffer 122b. Further, in the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 and information (10 pieces) on the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 are also provided. Is stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, together with the information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31, information (10 pieces) of the number of gaming balls paid out when one gaming ball enters the general winning opening 31 Is stored.

In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating the special electric prize winning device 32 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32 (15 pieces) Is stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating the first operating port 33 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. Further, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, together with information indicating that it is the first operation port 33, information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 (1 ) Is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second operating port 34 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. Further, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, together with information indicating that it is the second operation port 34, information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 (1 ) Is also stored. Information indicating the outlet 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

Information indicating the open/close execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored as information for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j. In the eleventh correspondence area 123k, as the information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k, information indicating that the game time is started is stored.

In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l in the management CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, as the information for specifying the type of the signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management side CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n by the management-side CPU 112, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any is stored.

As described above, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is specified by the management-side CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main-side CPU 63. The management IC 66 can be used for a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66.

Also, instead of outputting the information for recognizing the type of the signal each time the signal corresponding to the storage of the history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, the type of the signal is recognized in advance. And the information for specifying the type of the signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n on the management side CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. It is a configuration. As a result, compared with the configuration in which the information for recognizing the type of the signal is output each time the signal output corresponding to the storage of the history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, It is possible to reduce the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112.

In addition, the output of information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by the management-side CPU 112 is performed at the start of supply of operating power. As a result, in the situation where a game is started on the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n.

Further, information setting that the setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o and information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p are performed in the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, not only the pachinko machine 10 but also other types of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66 can reliably use the set value update signal and the output instruction signal for the fifteenth buffer 122o and the sixteenth buffer 122p. It is possible to omit the processing for specifying the type of signal input to the. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the processing for specifying the type of the signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are sequentially set, and a history information storage area 125 is set so as to correspond to each pointer information one-to-one. The history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is assigned. When it is necessary to store the correspondence information in accordance with the signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n (actually, the first to eleventh buffers 122a to 122k in the case of the pachinko machine 10) First, the date and time information measured by the current RTC 115 is stored in the area for storing the RTC information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the current writing target. After that, the correspondence relationship information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n that triggered the information storage this time is read from the correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122n in the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the read correspondence relationship information. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information which is the current writing target.

Regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, specifically, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g are input with the signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a as described above. Therefore, the information corresponding to the types of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of the ball entering portion corresponding to each of the ball detecting sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a are all for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 31, so these first to third winning openings are provided. Information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored in each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a. Further, information indicating that it is the special electricity winning device 32 is stored in the fourth correspondence area 123d, and information indicating that it is the first operation port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e. The sixth correspondence relationship area 123f stores information indicating the second operation port 34, and the seventh correspondence relationship area 123g stores information indicating the outlet port 24a. When the buffers 122a to 122n that have triggered the information storage this time are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the ball entering portion corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to the first. It is read from any of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the read information on the type of the ball entering portion is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125.

On the other hand, a signal indicating whether the eighth buffer 122h is in the open/close execution mode is input, a signal indicating whether the ninth buffer 122i is in the high frequency support mode is input, and the tenth buffer 122j is A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input, and a signal indicating whether or not the game time has started is input to the eleventh buffer 122k. Accordingly, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating the open/close execution mode, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and the tenth correspondence area 123h. Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j, and information indicating that it is a game time is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eighth signal in the situation where the open/close execution mode is not set, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in the situation where the open/close execution mode is set. The side CPU 112 identifies that the opening/closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and identifies that the opening/closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, regardless of whether the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 generates a trigger to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify as done. That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information is stored together with the history information storage area 125. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of. Further, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information is also recorded together with the history information storage area 125. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW-level ninth signal in the situation not in the high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in the situation in the high-frequency support mode. The managing CPU 112 identifies that the high-frequency support mode is started when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and ends the high-frequency support mode when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to specify that it has been done. Then, regardless of whether the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 causes the history information storage area 125 to store the correspondence information. Identify as done. That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i, but also the start information is stored in the history information storage area. It is stored in the area for storing 125 correspondence information. Further, when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information is recorded in the history information storage area. It is stored in the area for storing 125 correspondence information.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Since the continuous output is performed, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, regardless of whether the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or when the HI level changes to the LOW level, the management-side CPU 112 causes the history information storage area 125 to store the correspondence information. Identify as done. That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored together with the history information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125. Further, when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information is stored together with the history information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level eleventh signal until the game time start timing, and when the game time start timing is reached, the HI level eleventh signal is output for a specific period. Output a signal. Therefore, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the game time has started when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level. That is, when the eleventh signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the information indicating the game time read from the eleventh correspondence relation area 123k is stored as the correspondence relation information in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area.

The history information storage area 125 can store all history information generated during the 10 consecutive business days in which the game balls are continuously emitted from the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. It is provided for a few minutes. For example, if the history information is generated 60,000 times a day, 600,000 or more history information storage areas 125 are provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for identifying the pointer information, which is the current write target in the history memory 117, by the management-side CPU 112. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating the pointer information “0” as the writing target is set in the pointer area 126. Then, each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the pointer information of the last order is the write target and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information of the last order, the pointer information of "0" is set as the write target. The information in the usage area 126 is updated. As a result, when a history information storage trigger occurs that exceeds the number of history information items that can be stored, new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 125 in which old history information is stored. Become.

Further, when the history information is read from the history memory 117 by the external device, all the history information storage area 125 is cleared to “0”, and the pointer information of “0” becomes the writing target. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information that was once read from becoming read again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9).

First, "14" is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S801). The output counter for recognition recognizes which type of signals the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 correspond to, and outputs the remaining information output to the management-side CPU 112. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the required number of times. As described above, 14 of the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are targets of signal type recognition, so "14" is set in the recognition output counter.

Then, the output process of the identification start command is executed (step S802). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to. When outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management-side CPU 112 to store history information, the first to fourteenth buffers 122a are used. Command output is performed to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal corresponds to 122n. This reduces the number of signal paths as compared with a configuration in which a signal path for performing the command output is provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification start command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. Has been done. Upon receiving the identification start command, the management-side CPU 112 should start the process for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

Then, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S803). In this case, the first buffer 122a corresponds to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n so that the signal type setting target is first and then the (n+1)th buffer is the signal type setting target after the nth buffer. The recognition setting of the signal type to be performed is performed. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is "14" to "12", the type identification command indicating the general winning opening 31 and the number of prize balls is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "11", the special prize winning The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read, and if the recognition output counter is "10", the type identification command indicating the first operation port 33 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is "9", it means that it is the second operating port 34 and that the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read out. If the recognition output counter is "8", it means that it is the outlet 24a. The type identification command shown is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "7", the type identification command indicating the open/close execution mode is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "6", it is the high frequency support mode. Is read, and if the output counter for recognition is "5", the type identification command for front door frame 14 is read, and if the output counter for recognition is "4", it is a game game. Is read out, and if the recognition output counter is "3" to "1", the type identification command indicating blank is read out.

Then, the output process of the read type identification command is executed (step S804). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity similarly to the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started so that the management side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification type command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. Has been done. By receiving the identification type command, the management-side CPU 112 responds to the identification type command to the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffers to be set this time among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n. Information to be stored.

After that, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S805), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement is 1 is "0" (step S806). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S806: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction of 1 is executed (step S803 and Step S804).

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S806: YES), the output process of the identification end command is executed (step S807). The identification end command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification end command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. Has been done. Upon receiving the identification end command, the management-side CPU 112 identifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is completed. To do.

Next, the management processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management CPU 112 is higher than that of the main CPU 63, and the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started after the main CPU 63 starts one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). By the time the process starts, the combination of the processes from step S908 onward in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

First, it is determined whether an identification start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S901). If the identification start command has not been received (step S901: NO), the setting update recognition process is executed (step S902), and the process returns to step S901. Although details will be described later, in the setting update recognition process, when the main CPU 63 newly sets the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the corresponding process is executed.

When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S901: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S903). The setting target counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffer 122a to 122n for which the signal type is set. The first buffer 122a is the target for setting the signal type first, and then the n+1th buffer is the target for setting the signal type after the nth buffer.

After that, on condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S905). In the correspondence relation setting process, of the first to fourteenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123n of the correspondence relation memory 116, the type identification received this time is recorded in the correspondence relation area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management RAM 114. Stores the signal type information set in the command. Then, the value of the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S906).

If a negative determination is made in step S904, or if the processing of step S906 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907). If the identification end command has not been received (step S907: NO), the process returns to step S904, and on the condition that the type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), steps S905 and S906 are executed. Execute the process again.

When the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S907: YES), the processes of steps S908 to S910 are repeatedly executed. Although details will be described later, in step S908, history setting processing for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. Although details will be described later, in step S909, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the calculation results are notified by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Display output processing for executing. In step S910, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the operation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d, which will be described in detail later, is executed.

FIG. 24 is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122n is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. 24A shows a period during which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h), and FIG. FIG. 24B shows a period in which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 24C shows the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122n. 24D shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, and FIG. 24D shows the timing at which the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process (step S905).

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. It Further, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t2 in which the output of the identification start command is continued, as shown in FIG. 24B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level. The management-side CPU 112 confirms that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, thereby specifying that the command has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped by confirming the information of. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 enters the identification state by making a positive determination in step S901 of the management process (FIG. 23). Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 24A, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t5, which is the situation where the type identification command is continuously output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management-side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first-eighth buffers 122a to 122h By confirming the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. In the correspondence relation setting process, information indicating the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. After that, at the timing of t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG.

After that, in each of the timing of t7 to the timing of t9, the timing of t10 to the timing of t12, the timing of t13 to the timing of t15, and the timing of t16 to the timing of t18, similarly to the timing of t4 to the timing of t6, The management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence relationship setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the 14th type identification command is completed from timing t16 to timing t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 24A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t20 in which the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). The management-side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first-eighth buffers 122a to 122h By confirming the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management-side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG.

In order to instruct the management-side CPU 112 to store history information, the management-side CPU 112 is configured to recognize whether or not the command is output using the ninth signal as described above. Even if the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) used, it is clear to the management side CPU 112 that the command is being output. It becomes possible to recognize.

Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S319 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, "11" is set to the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1001). The management target counter specifies, by the main CPU 63, whether or not there is a management target that is not a target for specifying whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in this management output process. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which management target should change the signal output state to the management CPU 112. In the one-time management output process, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. The management targets are the seven ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. There are a total of 11 whether the open/close execution mode is executed, the high-frequency support mode is executed, the front door frame 14 is opened/closed, and the game time is started. Therefore, first, "11" is set in the managed counter.

Then, it is determined whether the output state of the signal to the management-side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current value of the management target counter is the HI level (step S1002). When it is not the HI level (step S1002: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter is 5 or more, so that the entry detection sensors 42a having seven managed objects corresponding to the value of the managed counter are detected. To 48a are specified (step S1003).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S1004). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is “11” and corresponds to the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first output flag, When the value of the managed counter is “10” and corresponds to the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second output flag, and the value of the managed counter is determined. Is "9" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third output flag, and the value of the managed counter is "8". If it corresponds to the special electric power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fourth output flag, and the value of the managed counter is "7", and the first working opening detection sensor 46a. If it corresponds to, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fifth output flag, the value of the managed counter is "6", and it corresponds to the second working port detection sensor 47a. In this case, it is determined whether or not the sixth output flag is set to "1", and when the value of the managed counter is "5" and it corresponds to the outlet 24a, the seventh output flag is set to " It is determined whether "1" is set. As described above, the first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball detection process (FIG. 15).

When "1" is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S1004: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. Is set (step S1005). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S1006).

When a negative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined whether a trigger for switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the HI level has occurred (step S1007). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "4", it is determined whether or not the transition to the open/close execution mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is "3", it is high. It is determined whether or not the transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is “2”, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and the managed counter When the value is "1", it is determined whether the game time is started by determining whether "1" is set in the eleventh output flag. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1007, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the HI level (step S1008). If the process of step S1008 is executed when the value of the managed counter is "1", the eleventh output flag is cleared to "0".

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether or not a trigger for switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is 5 or more or "1" and the current management target is any of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a or the start of the game time, the first to seventh signals And, it is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 milliseconds) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter in the 11th signal was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. .. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S908) of the management process (FIG. 23) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level It is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management CPU 112. When the value of the managed counter is “4” and the current managed object is the open/close execution mode, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode has ended, and the value of the managed counter is “3”. When the current management target is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode has ended, the value of the management target counter is “2”, and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In this case, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is closed. When the opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S1010).

If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the process of step S1006 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S1007, the process of step S1008 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S1009, or When the process of S1010 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1012). When the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S1012: NO), the process from step S1002 is executed on the management target corresponding to the new management target counter value.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S908 of the management process (FIG. 23).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 of the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the confirmation counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S1101). Specifically, of the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than the information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. The information of the number that was set is set in the check target counter. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 stores information other than the information indicating that it is blank in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, so that in step S1101, the check target counter is set to "11". To do.

Then, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1102). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122n are the check targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh buffer 122k is the check target of the numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is the check target of the numerical information. ..

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the RTC information that is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1103). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1104). In the writing process, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information of the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S1103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. If the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the open/close execution mode, the information indicating the high frequency support mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, when the value of the check target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123n is a target for reading correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh correspondence relationship area 123k is the target for reading the correspondence relationship information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence relationship area 123e is the correspondence relationship. It is a target for reading information.

By performing the writing process as described above, the value of the confirmation target counter is any one of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the game times. In the case of, the RTC information, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second opening are stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. A combination of the corresponding information indicating that the operation port 34 is one of the game times is stored as history information. When the value of the check target counter is one of the open/close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. A combination of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the correspondence information indicating any one of the front door frames 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

After that, the target pointer is updated (step S1105). In the update processing, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, or if the processing of step S1105 is executed, it is determined whether or not the signal output is switched to the LOW level in the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter. It is determined whether or not the correspondence information to be confirmed is stored (step S1106). Specifically, when the current value of the check target counter is “8” to “10”, the corresponding correspondence areas 123h to 123j have the information indicating the open/close execution mode and the high frequency support mode. Since either the information indicating that there is the information or the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored, a positive determination is made in step S1106.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the numerical value information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is changed from "1" to "0". By checking whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S1107). If an affirmative decision is made in step S1107, the RTC information is read out (step S1108), as in step S1103, and writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1109). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S1108 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the check target counter is one of the open/close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the pointer information corresponding to the write target is dealt with. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating any one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the end information is stored as history information. It will be in the state of being. After that, similar to step S1105, the target pointer update processing is executed (step S1110).

If a negative determination is made in step S1106, a negative determination is made in step S1107, or if the process of step S1110 is executed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S1111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1112). When the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S1112: NO), the process from step S1102 is executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 27A shows a period in which an HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k, and FIG. 27B shows the HI level signal to the eighth buffer 122h. 27(c) shows a period in which the HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 27(d) shows a HI level signal in the tenth buffer 122j. 27(e) shows the timing of writing history information to the history memory 117.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 27A, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 117 at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t2, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 27A. However, the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g and 122k, and the switching of the LOW level is not a target for storing history information. At the timing, writing of history information is not executed as shown in FIG.

Then, at each of the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal input to any of the 11 buffers 122a to 122g and 122k is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, at each of these timings, the history information is written as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 27B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from the timing of t4 to the timing of t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the presence/absence of the open/close execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27E, the timing t4, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t4 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t7 includes end information. As a result, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the open/close execution mode.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, or the second operating opening 34 is in the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered the car is in the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 27C, the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to the presence/absence of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), the timing of t8, which is the timing when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t8 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t11 includes end information. As a result, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, the execution period of the high frequency support mode can be grasped.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, history information indicating that a ball has entered into any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is displayed even in the high-frequency support mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered the high frequency support mode is in the high frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 27D, the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing of t12 to the timing of t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27E, the timing t12 when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing of t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t12 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing of t15 includes end information. As a result, by confirming the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, history information indicating that a ball has entered into any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is opening the front door frame 14. It is possible to distinguish whether or not it is. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 can be obtained. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered the car is during opening of the front door frame 14.

Next, the output process of the set value update signal executed when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the output processing of the set value update signal executed by the main CPU 63. The output process of the set value update signal is executed in step S119 in the main process (FIG. 9).

A value corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is set in the pulse number counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1201). Specifically, the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is set in the pulse number counter. Then, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal directed to the management CPU 112 is at the HI level (step S1202). As described above, the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management IC 66. Here, the output processing of the set value update signal is processing for causing the management-side CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the main processing (FIG. 9). It is executed at a timing before a certain recognition process. On the other hand, the fact that the set value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is set in the management IC 66 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the set value update signal is output before the recognition process. Even if the processing is executed, it becomes possible for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is the set value update signal.

When a negative determination is made in step S1202, the value of the LOW level counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1203), and whether or not the value of the LOW level counter after the decrement is 1 is "0". It is determined (step S1204). The LOW level counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the set value update signal has been kept at the LOW level for a predetermined period while a plurality of pulses in which the set value update signal becomes the HI level is output. Is. When the value of the LOW level counter is “0” (step S1204: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the HI level, so the set value update signal is set to the HI level. It is set (step S1205).

Then, "20" is set to the HI level counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1206). The HI level counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the period during which the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level. Since the value set in the HI level counter is decremented by 1 in a cycle of about 10 microseconds, the set value update signal is maintained at the HI level for 200 microseconds when one pulse is output. This HI level maintenance period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

When the set value update signal is at the HI level (step S1202: YES), the value of the HI level counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1207), and the value of the HI level counter after the decrement by 1 is set to "0". It is determined whether or not (step S1208). When the value of the HI level counter is "0" (step S1208: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the LOW level, so the set value update signal is set to the LOW level. It is set (step S1209).

After that, the value of the pulse number counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1210), and it is determined whether the value of the pulse number counter after the decrement by 1 is "0" (step S1211). When the value of the pulse number counter is not “0” (step S1211: NO), the output of the pulse signal by the set value update signals for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. Since it means that there is not, "20" is set to the LOW level counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1212). Since the value set in the LOW level counter is decremented by 1 in a cycle of about 10 microseconds, the LOW level is maintained for 200 microseconds between a plurality of pulse outputs by the set value update signal. This LOW level maintenance period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the set value update signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level.

When the value of the pulse number counter is "0" (step S1211: YES), it means that the output of the pulse signals by the set value update signals for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. Therefore, the output processing of the setting value identification end command is executed (step S1213). The set value identification end command is a command for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output of the set value update signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time is completed. When outputting the set value identification end command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used in the same manner as the identification start command, the type identification command, and the identification end command. However, the signal pattern of the set value identification end command is different from the identification start command, the type identification command, and the identification end command.

As described above, in the output processing of the set value update signal, the pulse signals of the set value update signals corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set at the start of the supply of the operating power this time are output to the management IC 66. To do. The management side CPU 112 grasps the number of pulse signals by the set value update signal by executing the setting update recognition process, and grasps the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time based on this.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112. The setting update recognition process is executed in step S902 of the management process (FIG. 23).

It is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1301). If an affirmative decision is made in step S1301, the value of the set value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S1302). The set value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

After that, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1303). If an affirmative decision is made in step S1303, the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

When a negative determination is made in step S1303, or when the processing of step S1304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1305). When a negative determination is made in step S1305, the process returns to step S1303.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, the RTC information, which is the date information and the time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1306). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1307). In the writing process, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information corresponds to the writing target pointer information. The RTC information read in step S1306 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed, The combination is stored as history information.

After that, the target pointer is updated (step S1308). In the update processing, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set by performing the setting update recognition process as described above, the setting is performed, the date and time when the setting is performed, and the setting. A combination of set values when the setting is performed is stored in the history area 124 as history information. Accordingly, the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the setting is performed by reading and analyzing the information stored in the history memory 117 by using the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d. It becomes possible to grasp the contents of the set value when the setting is performed.

Here, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the information stored in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is. As a result, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being deleted, and various parameters to be described later are the timing of changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It is calculated by using the history information existing before and after. In this case, since the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is stored in the history memory 117 as described above, it is stored in the history memory 117 by connecting an external device to the reading terminal 68d. By reading the information, it becomes possible to calculate various parameters after the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and during the period when the setting state is maintained.

Next, the display output process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The display output process is executed in step S909 of the management process (FIG. 23).

First, it is determined whether it is the calculation timing (step S1401). If 51 seconds have passed since the supply of the operating power to the management CPU 112 was started, or if 51 seconds have passed since the affirmative determination was made last time in step S1401, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, various numbers of normally entered balls are calculated (step S1402). Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 in which the correspondence information indicating the outlets 24a is stored, Calculate the number of incoming balls. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the winning into the general winning opening 31 is achieved. Calculate the number. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the special electric prize winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the special electric prize winning device 32 is entered. Calculate the number. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the first operating ports 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the first operating ports 33 are stored. Calculate the number of incoming balls. In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second operation ports 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the number of the history information storage areas 125 is increased. Calculate the number of incoming balls.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the exit port generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34 are respectively calculated (step S1403). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is the serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relation indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the total number of entered balls for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is present. If the correspondence information and the end information indicating the front door frame 14 are not stored in the history information storage area 125 in which is stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as when the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Then, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1402 and S1403 (step S1404). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1403 is subtracted from each number of incoming balls calculated in step S1402. Then, the following first to eighth parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of incoming balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1402 and the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1403 is defined as the number of entered balls K1, and the number of the general winning openings 31 calculated in step S1402 is calculated. The difference in the number of balls of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K2, and the special electricity winning device calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls of the special electricity winning device 32 calculated in step S1402 The difference in the number of entered balls in 32 is K3, and the difference in the number of entered balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of entered balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1402 is entered. The number K4 is defined as the number K4, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1402 and the number of balls entered in the second operation port 34 is set as number K5.
・First parameter: total payout number of game balls (K2דnumber of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31”+K3דnumber of prize balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32”+K4דfirst working opening 33” Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “the number of prize balls for winning the prize”+K5דthe number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34”) D1")
-Second parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K2 into the general winning opening 31 / the total number of game balls (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) discharged from the game area PA-Third parameter: game balls into the special electric prize winning device 32 Ratio of the total number of entered balls K3/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) The fourth parameter: The total number of entered game balls into the first working port 33 K4/discharged from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D2”)
-Fifth parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K5 entering the second operating port 34/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3")
-Sixth parameter: D1-(D2 x "number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D3 x "number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
-Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning in second working port 34")/total payout number of game balls (K2 x "general “Number of prize balls for winning in prize hole 31”+K3דNumber of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32”+K4דNumber of prize balls for prize in first operating port 33”+K5דSecond operating port 34” 8th parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32"/total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "for winning in general winning hole 31") "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" In step S1404, the first to eighth parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the storage area for normal time in the calculation result memory 131. The first to eighth parameters stored in the normal time storage area are stored and held until the next step S1404 is executed. That is, when the next step S1404 is executed and the first to eighth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighth parameters are stored in the normal-time storage area. The previous calculation results of the first to eighth parameters stored in the normal storage area are overwritten.

Then, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the outlet 24a and the general winning opening 31 generated in the opening/closing execution mode are referred to. , The special electric prize winning device 32, the first actuating port 33 and the second actuating port 34, respectively, the number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1405). A history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and correspondence information and end information indicating the open/close execution mode. Is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of incoming balls for the section is calculated. Further, although the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information are stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored. When the stored history information storage area 125 does not store the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the end information, the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the open/close execution mode.

After that, during the period of the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1405, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the like generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The number of balls entering each of the second working ports 34 is calculated (step S1406). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as the case of step S1403, except that the period of the open/close execution mode specified in step S1405 is assumed.

Then, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1405 and step S1406 (step S1407). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1406 is subtracted from the number of incoming balls calculated in step S1405. Then, the following eleventh to eighteenth parameters are calculated by using the respective numbers of incoming balls after the subtraction. In addition, the difference between the number of entered balls of the outlet 24a calculated in step S1406 and the number of entered balls of the outlet 24a calculated in step S1405 is defined as the number of entered balls K11, and the winning of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1405. The difference in the number of balls of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls entered K12, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of balls of the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1405 The difference in the number of entered balls of 32 is defined as the number of entered balls K13, and the difference in the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1406 with respect to the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1405 is entered. The number K14 is defined as the number K14, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1405 and the number of balls entered in the second operation port 34 is set as number K15.
Eleventh parameter: total payout number of game balls (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K14 x "first operating port 33" Ratio of the number of prize balls for winning in the prize”+K15דnumber of prize balls for winning in the second operation port 34)/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is “ D11")
・Twelfth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K12 into the general winning opening 31/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) ・Thirteenth parameter: game ball to the special prize winning device 32 Ratio of the total number of entered balls K13/the total number of game balls (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) discharged from the game area PA. The 14th parameter: the total number of entered game balls into the first working port 33 K14/discharged from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D12”)
Fifteenth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls K15 entering the second operation port 34/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”)
-Sixteenth parameter: D11-(D12 x "number of prize balls for winning in first operating port 33" + D13 x "number of prize balls for winning in second operating port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/total payout number of gaming balls (K12 x "general “Number of prize balls for winning in prize hole 31”+K13דNumber of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32”+K14דNumber of prize balls for prize in first operating port 33”+K15דSecond operating port 34” 18th parameter: K13 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" / total payout number of game balls (K12 x for winning in general winning hole 31) "Number of prize balls" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric prize winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" In step S1407, the 11th to 18th parameters, which are the calculation result, are stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode in the calculation result memory 131. The 11th to 18th parameters stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode are stored and held until the next step S1407 is executed. That is, when the next step S1407 is executed and the first to eighteenth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighteenth parameters are stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode. The previous calculation results of the 11th to 18th parameters stored in the storage area for the opening/closing execution mode are overwritten.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating the high frequency support mode. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the outlet 24a generated in the high frequency support mode, The number of balls entered into each of the winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1408). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relation indicating the high frequency support mode. When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the total number of entered balls for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored, the RTC information corresponding to the time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. If the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the end information are not stored in the history information storage area 125 in which is stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the high frequency support mode are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the high frequency support mode.

After that, during the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408, the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the first operating opening 33 that are generated when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Then, the number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1409). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that in step S1403, except that the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1408 is assumed.

Then, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1408 and S1409 (step S1410). Specifically, first, the number of incoming balls generated during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1409 is subtracted from each number of incoming balls calculated in step S1408. Then, the following 21st to 26th parameters are calculated using the respective numbers of incoming balls after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a calculated in step S1408 is defined as the number of entered balls K21, and the number of the general winning openings 31 calculated in step S1408 is calculated. The difference in the number of balls of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls entered K22, and the special prize winning device calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls of the special prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1408 The difference in the number of entered balls of 32 is K23, and the difference in the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of entered balls of the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1408 is entered. The number K24 is defined as the number K24, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second working port 34 calculated in step S1408 and the number of balls entered in the second working port 34 is set as number K25.
21st parameter: total payout number of game balls (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K23 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K24 x "first operating port 33" The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “the number of prize balls for winning the prize”+K25דthe number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34”) D11")
-Twenty-second parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K22 to the general winning opening 31 / total number of game balls (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) discharged from the game area PA-Twenty-third parameter: game ball to special prize winning device 32 Ratio of the total number of entered balls K23/the total number of game balls (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) discharged from the game area PA. The 24th parameter: the total number of entered game balls K24 into the first working port 33/discharged from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D22”)
25th parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls K25 entering the second operation port 34/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D23”)
-Twenty-sixth parameter: D21-(D22 x "number of prize balls for winning in first operating port 33" + D23 x "number of prize balls for winning in second operating port 34")
In step S1410, the 21st to 26th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the storage area for high frequency support mode in the calculation result memory 131. The 21st to 26th parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1410 is executed. That is, when the next step S1410 is executed and the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 21st to 26th parameters are stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area. Then, the previous calculation results of the 21st to 26th parameters stored in the storage area for the high frequency support mode are overwritten.

Then, the frequency of occurrence of the open/close execution mode is calculated and stored (step S1411). Specifically, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening/closing execution mode are stored, the opening/closing execution mode is calculated. Calculate the number of occurrences of. Further, the number of times the game times have occurred is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the game times have started is stored in the history area 117 of the history memory 117. .. Then, the number of times the open/close execution mode is generated per unit game time is calculated. The number of times the open/close execution mode is generated is K31, and the number of game times is K32.
・Thirty-first parameter: K31/K32
In step S1411, the 31st parameter which is the calculation result is stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode frequency in the calculation result memory 131. The 31st parameter stored in the storage area for opening/closing execution mode frequency is stored and held until the next step S1411 is executed. That is, when the next step S1411 is executed and the 31st parameter is calculated, the newly calculated 31st parameter is stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area, so that the opening/closing execution mode until then. The previous calculation result of the 31st parameter stored in the frequency storage area is overwritten.

Then, the frequency of occurrence of the high frequency support mode is calculated and stored (step S1412). Specifically, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the high frequency Calculate the number of occurrences of support mode. Further, the number of times the game times have occurred is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the game times have started is stored in the history area 117 of the history memory 117. .. Then, the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game time, and the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the open/close execution mode are calculated. The number of times the high frequency support mode is generated is K41, the number of game times is the number K42, and the number of times the open/close execution mode is calculated in step S1411 is the number K43.
41st parameter: K41/K42
42nd parameter: K41/K43
In step S1412, the 41st to 42nd parameters that are the calculation results are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area of the calculation result memory 131. The 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area are stored and held until the next step S1412 is executed. That is, when the next step S1412 is executed and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 41st to 42nd parameters are stored in the high-frequency support mode frequency storage area. Then, the previous calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the storage area for high frequency support mode frequency are overwritten.

When a negative determination is made in step S1401 or when the processing of step S1412 is executed, the display processing is executed (step S1413). FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the display process.

First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the management-side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S1501). The update timing counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that it is time to update the display content of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management-side CPU 112 controls the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and thereby the first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, and the thirty-first parameter. The parameters and the calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters are reported. In this case, the first notification display device 69a displays information corresponding to the type of parameter to be notified. In addition, among the values obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed for the third notification. It is displayed on the device 69c. And in the 1st-3rd notification display devices 69a-69c, said 1st-8th parameter, said 11th-18th parameter, said 21st-26th parameter, said 31st parameter and said 41st-. The display corresponding to the calculation result of the 42nd parameter is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the display object in the last order, is displayed, the display object in the first order is displayed. The calculation result of one parameter is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds.

Here, the calculation cycle of the various parameters in the management side CPU 112 is 51 seconds. On the other hand, the number of various parameters is 25, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. Therefore, the various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are displayed at least once on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

When the process of step S1501 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0". It is determined whether or not the timing has come (step S1502). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, the value of the display target counter provided in the management-side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1503). When the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "24" (step S1504: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S1505).

The display target counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Of the first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameters and the fourteenth to forty-second parameters, and the display target counters of "0" to "24". There is a one-to-one correspondence with the possible values. For example, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the first parameter, which is the first display target, becomes the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is "24". In the case of, the 42nd parameter, which is the last display target, becomes the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If a negative determination is made in step S1504, or if the process of step S1505 is executed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. It is controlled (step S1506). Further, the parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the calculation result memory 131, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and the number corresponding to the tens digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. The number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S1507). The contents displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in step S1506 and step S1507 are continued until the next update timing or until the supply of operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is stopped. It Then, the value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 as the value corresponding to the next update timing (step S1508).

When the supply of operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started by executing the display processing as described above, the game history management result is displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. To be done. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and the main body of the gaming machine 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the main controller 60 is operated from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is performed regardless of whether it is visible. In this way, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is executed regardless of the game situation or the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that the first to third notification display device 69a is executed. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of ~69c.

The display of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is started after the supply of the operating power to the management CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63. To be done. In this case, like the information stored in the history memory 117, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is stored and retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Therefore, when the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is stopped is displayed.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, information corresponding to the set value being changed is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. However, while the display of the information corresponding to the set value is performed before the identification end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63, the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The display of the management result of is started after the identification end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63. Accordingly, even if the third notification display device 69c is also used as a display device for displaying information corresponding to the set value and displaying the management result of the game history, these displays are displayed. It is possible to prevent the periods from overlapping.

When the information corresponding to the set value is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are hidden. On the other hand, when the game history management result is displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not hidden. This makes it possible to identify which of the display of information corresponding to the set value and the display of the game history management result is being performed on the third notification display device 69c.

Next, regarding the processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62 explain. FIG. 32A is a flowchart showing the data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S112 in the main process (FIG. 9).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that an external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d is received from the reading terminal 68d (step S1601). When a negative determination is made in step S1601, this data output process is ended as it is. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63. As a result, in order to output the history information and various parameters to the outside, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started with the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. Need to Since the power switch for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is provided in the payout mechanism unit 73 mounted on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, these stopping and starting operations are performed. In order to do so, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 to expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to output the history information and various parameters to the outside, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started with the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. With the configuration that needs to be performed, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an operation of reading the history information and various parameters even if the person other than the game hall manager performs the operation.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a signal for confirming control information is received from the reading terminal 68d, so that the current connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is the main ROM 64. It is determined whether or not the control information (program and data) is checked (step S1602). The external device has a configuration that allows both confirmation of control information and confirmation of history information and various parameters.When confirmation of control information is selected by manual operation on the external device, the external device can confirm the control information. A signal for control information confirmation is transmitted, and when confirmation of history information and various parameters is selected by manual operation on the external device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the external device. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the control information confirmation external device and the history confirmation external device may be separate. In this case, when an external device for checking control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, a signal for checking control information is transmitted from the external device, and an external device for checking history is sent to the reading terminal 68d. When the device is electrically connected, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the external device.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1602, an output process for confirming control information is executed (step S1603). In the output process, a program and data are read from the main ROM 64 as control information, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, the control information can be read by the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and it can be confirmed whether the control information is regular or normal. Will be possible.

When a negative determination is made in step S1602, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management side CPU 112 (step S1604). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state is continued for a specific period. The specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management side CPU 112 executes the process for outputting the history information.

Specifically, when the management-side CPU 112 switches the output state of the output instruction signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 from the LOW level to the HI level, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. (Step S1701: YES), the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the operation result memory 131 are read out, and the read history information and various parameters are output to the reading terminal 68d. (Step S1702). As a result, the history information and various parameters can be read by the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and the information on the management result of the game history can be analyzed. When the management-side CPU 112 outputs the history information to the reading terminal 68d, the management-side CPU 112 clears the history memory 117 by "0" (step S1703). The history information in the history memory 117 is deleted only when the history information is read by the external device.

Returning to the description of the data output process (FIG. 32A), when the process of step S1603 is executed or the process of step S1604 is executed, the electrical connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is continued. It is determined whether it has been done (step S1605). If it is continued (step S1605: YES), the process stands by in step S1605. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the external device is disconnected from the reading terminal 68d. When the connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d is released (step S1605: NO), this data output process ends.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

Since the game ball is paid out when the game ball enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, the player can select one of these entering portions. A game will be played while expecting a game ball to enter. In this configuration, the game ball enters the any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as a history target entering portion). If the occurrence occurs, the history information corresponding to it will be stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can store and hold information for managing the number of game balls or the frequency of entering the game balls into each history target ball entering unit, and use this managed information. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the entry mode of the game ball into each history target entry part. Further, since the history information is stored and held by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification.

All the ball-in units for ejecting the game balls from the game area PA are targets for execution of the history information storage processing and targets for management using the history information. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the ball entry frequency for any history-target ball entry section by using the history information. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target ball portion to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA, using history information.

The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the history-targeted ball entering section that has triggered the storage of the history information. With this, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp the entry history of the game ball into the history entry ball portion in detail.

In the memory 117 for history, not only history information corresponding to the game ball entering the history target ball-entering section, but also history information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, and the high-frequency support mode is in effect. The history information indicating whether or not and the history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open are stored. As a result, it is possible to manage whether or not the game sphere enters the history target ball-in part by distinguishing whether or not each of these situations is present.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to an external device which is a device outside the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read history information with an external device and use the read history information to analyze the ball entry mode of the game ball into the history target ball entry section.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d, and the program can be read from the main ROM 64 by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to output history information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is specified as a program or history information, and the information on the side corresponding to the specification result is externally output through the reading terminal 68d. As a result, in the configuration in which the history information is externally output using the reading terminal 68d for externally outputting the program, it is determined whether the information to be externally output is the program or the history information. The specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, it is possible to read only the necessary information even if the reading terminal 68d is also used.

Based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is the program or the history information. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of information to be output to the outside from becoming complicated.

An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 that stores a program in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 68d. As a result, the signal paths for the reading terminal 68d can be integrated in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the reading terminal 68d.

The main CPU 63 that executes a process for paying out the game ball based on the entry of the game ball into any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. A management CPU 112 is provided separately from the management CPU 112, and the management CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball into each history target entry part while preventing the processing load of the main CPU 63 from increasing excessively.

The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

The main-side CPU 63 uses the signal paths corresponding to the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a and the signal paths corresponding to the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to buffer each of the buffers of the input port 121 of the management IC 66. 122a to 122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each buffer 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

The main CPU 63 has information indicating whether the open/close execution mode is in effect, information indicating whether the high frequency support mode is in effect, information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open, And the information corresponding to the start of the game time is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122k of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 by using the signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the type of information corresponding to each of these situations corresponds to each of the buffers 122h to 122k (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management side CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

The main CPU 63 transmits to the management CPU 112 correspondence information indicating which type of information each of the buffers 122a to 122k (that is, each of the signal paths 118a to 118k) corresponds to. As a result, it is not necessary to store the correspondence information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation in which a game ball may enter the history-target entrance portion, the management IC 66 can identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history-target entrance portion. It becomes possible to become.

Correspondence relationship information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 by using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not the game sphere has entered the history target entry portion. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with the configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting the correspondence information is provided.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, each time the main CPU 63 transmits the information of the detection result of each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, the information that enables the management target IC 66 to identify the history target entrance part corresponding to the information of the transmission target. Eliminates the need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection result of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

Information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d by switching the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management-side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence information from the main-side CPU 63. .. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of the correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is larger than the number of types of information required to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Has been. As a result, even when the number of types of the information increases or decreases according to the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration related to the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

When the history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 68d, the correspondence information indicating the type of the history-target ball entrance portion corresponding to the history information is included in each history information. As a result, it is possible to specify the entry mode of the game ball into each history target entry part by using the read history information.

By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh parameter, eleventh parameter) corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA in a predetermined period are used. ~ 18th parameter, 21st to 26th parameter, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameter) are calculated. Then, various parameters resulting from these calculations are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. As a result, it becomes possible for the pachinko machine 10 to notify various parameters that are the results of calculations using the history information.

Various parameters are calculated in a state where history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. In addition, various parameters corresponding to the open/close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to understand the entry mode of the game ball according to each situation.

When the history information of the history memory 117 is output to the external device, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clear processing of the history memory 117. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes a storage target in the history memory 117, and the history information that should normally be stored and retained is erased by overwriting. It becomes possible to make it difficult to generate.

When the game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, an external output corresponding to the game ball is output through the external terminal board 97, and the history information is stored in the history memory 117. .. With this, by using the information output to the outside through the external terminal board 97, the history while easily grasping the number and the frequency of entering the game balls into the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34. By using the history information stored in the memory 117 for use, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls and the frequency of entering the game balls into the history target ball-in portion.

The probability of a jackpot result in the low-probability mode changes depending on the setting states of the "setting 1" to "setting 6" of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, even with a single pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cause a situation in which the probability of a jackpot result in the low-probability mode is advantageous or disadvantageous. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The probability of a jackpot result in the low-probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, while the probability of a jackpot result in the high-probability mode is set by the pachinko machine 10. It does not change depending on the condition. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to the probability of a jackpot result to the situation in the low-probability mode. Further, since the high probability table 64g referred to in the high probability mode can be made common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to preliminarily set the table 64a to 64g in the main ROM 64. It is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storing.

The probability of a jackpot result in the low-probability mode varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6", while the distribution mode of the types of jackpot results depends on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It does not change accordingly. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to the situation in the low probability mode. Further, since it is possible to make the distribution table 64h referred to when distributing the types of jackpot results common to any of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64. It is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity for storing in advance.

Even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is not erased but stored and retained. As a result, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information up to that point can be continuously stored in the history memory 117, and the history memory can be stored for a long time. It is possible to specify the management result of the game history by using the history information accumulated in 117.

Even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, in the configuration in which the history information stored in the history memory 117 is not erased but stored and retained, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. When the process is performed, the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history memory 117. As a result, it becomes possible to distinguish between the history information before the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 and the history information after the new setting.

When the history information corresponding to it is stored in the history memory 117 by newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the information corresponding to the set value is included in the history information. As a result, it becomes possible to specify the content of the setting value set in the past by referring to the history information.

When the set value update process (FIG. 10) is started, the set value is changed from the set value corresponding to the start that is set in advance. As a result, regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value updating process (FIG. 10) is started, in the setting value updating process (FIG. 10), a change operation of the set value corresponding to a certain start is performed. Will be possible. Therefore, it becomes easy for the operator to understand the work content of the setting value changing operation.

Specifically, the setting value corresponding to the start is “setting 1” having the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the setting value updating process (FIG. 10) is started, the setting value is changed from “setting 1” having the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the manager of the game hall unintentionally terminates the set value update processing (FIG. 10) immediately after the start of the set value update processing (FIG. 10), the setting value with the lowest advantage is set. Therefore, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage from occurring in the game hall.

In addition, when various parameters are calculated at the calculation timing, the history information corresponding to a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 is used as a reference and history information stored after that is used. Then, it may be configured to calculate various parameters. In this case, the management result of the game history at the timing after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed can be derived as various parameters.

Further, when various parameters are calculated at the calculation timing, history information corresponding to a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117, and history information corresponding to a change of the set value is used as a reference. Alternatively, various parameters may be calculated using history information stored after that. In this case, it becomes possible to derive the management result of the game history at the timing after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed as various parameters.

Although the board box 60a of the main controller 60 is provided with the opening for exposing the reading terminal 68d, the opening is not provided and the reading terminal 69d is provided on the opposite wall 60b. It may be configured to be covered by. In this case, in order to connect an external device to the reading terminal 68d, it is necessary to open the board box 60a.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the hit/miss table corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 64 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the main ROM 64, a setting 1 area 161, a setting 2 area 162, a setting 3 area 163, a setting 4 area 164, a setting 5 area 165, and a setting 6 area. 166 are provided. In the setting 1 area 161, the low probability table 161a for setting 1 referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are shown. The high probability table 161b for setting 1, which is referred to when the setting state of "is 1" and the winning/winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, is stored. In the setting 2 area 162, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, the low probability table 162a for setting 2 which is referred to when the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are provided. And the highly probable hit/miss table 162b for the setting 2 that is referred to when the win/win lottery mode is the high-probability mode. In the setting 3 area 163, the low probability table 163a for setting 3 which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The high probability table 163b for setting 3, which is referred to when the setting state of “is 3” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, is stored.

In the setting 4 area 164, the low probability table 164a for setting 4 which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are shown. The high probability table 164b for setting 4 which is referred to when the setting state of "is 4" and the winning/winning lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored. In the setting 5 area 165, the low-probability/probability table 165a for setting 5, which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are provided. And a high probability table 165b for setting 5, which is referred to when the setting state of “is 5” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the setting 6 area 166, the low probability table 166a for setting 6 which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6” and the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 are shown. The high-probability/probability table 166b for setting 6, which is referred to when the setting state of “is 6” and the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, is stored.

The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the low certainty win/loss tables 161a to 166a are different from each other. Specifically, when the low-probability/probability table 161a for setting 1 is referenced, the jackpot result is about 1/320, and when the low-probability/probability table 162a for setting 2 is referenced, about 1/310. Results in a big hit, about 1/300 when the low probability table 163a for setting 3 is referred to, and about 1/290 when a low probability table 164a for setting 4 is referenced. Results in a big hit, about 1/280 when the low probability table 165a for setting 5 is referred to, and about 1/270 when a low accuracy table 166a for setting 6 is referred to. The result is a big hit. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low-probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in the high-probability winning/losing tables 161b to 166b are different from each other. Specifically, when the high-probability/probability table 161b for setting 1 is referenced, the jackpot result is about 1/45, and when the high-probability/probability table 162b for setting 2 is referenced, it is about 1/40. Results in a big hit, and when the high-accuracy hit/miss table 163b for setting 3 is referred to, the jackpot result is obtained at about 1/35. When the high-accuracy hit/miss table 164b for setting 4 is referred to, approximately 1/30 Results in a big hit, and when the high-accuracy hit/miss table 165b for setting 5 is referred to, the result is about 1/25. When the high-accuracy hit/miss table 166b for setting 6 is referred, it is about 1/20. The result is a big hit. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the high probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

That is, in the first embodiment, the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode becomes higher as the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode becomes “Setting 1”. Although the configuration is common in any of the setting states of “setting 6”, in the present embodiment, both the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low-probability mode and the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high-probability mode are pachinko. The higher the setting value of the machine 10, the higher the setting value. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's advantage with respect to the fact that a high set value is set.

In addition, even if the winning probability of the jackpot result of the low probability mode in the case of the highest setting state "setting 6", the winning of the jackpot result of the high probability mode in the case of the lowest setting state "setting 1" It is set lower than the probability. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's advantage when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1” from becoming extremely low, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting”. It is possible to prevent the player's advantage in the case of "6" from becoming extremely high.

On the other hand, as with the first embodiment, only one sort table 64h is provided so as to be common in any of the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it is possible to prevent the distribution state of the jackpot result from being advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and the storage capacity for storing the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64 in advance. Can be suppressed.

The winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, whereas the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher in the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The configuration may be such that the set value is lower. In this case, in the low probability mode, the higher the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the more advantageous the player is to the setting value, and in the high probability mode, the lower the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the better the setting value is to the player. It becomes possible.

The winning probability of the jackpot result in the high-probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low-probability mode is “setting 1” to “setting 6”. The configuration may be constant in the setting state of ". In this case, in the high-probability mode, the higher the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the more advantageous the setting value for the player, and in the low-probability mode, it is possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage due to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from occurring. Become.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the management result of the game history when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

The management IC 66 is provided with a separate storage memory 171 as a memory for storing information, in addition to the memories in the first embodiment. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the separate storage memory 171. The separate storage memory 171 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage storage (that is, a non-volatile storage unit), and is used for both reading and writing.

The separate storage memory 171 is provided with a first separate storage area 172, a second separate storage area 173, a third separate storage area 174, a fourth separate storage area 175, and a fifth separate storage area 176. Information of the management result of the game history calculated when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set in these first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, more specifically, the first embodiment. The various parameters described in (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameters) are sequentially stored. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters are first stored in the first separate storage area 172, and thereafter, every time the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the n-th type. The areas to be stored are switched so that the storage areas 172 to 176 → the (n+1)th storage areas 172 to 176 are stored. When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set after the various parameters are stored in the fifth separate storage area 176, the various parameters are stored again in the first separate storage area 172. At this time, the various parameters already stored in the first separate storage area 172 are erased. As a result, various parameters until the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed five times are stored in the separate storage memory 171, and the oldest various parameters are erased when the number of times exceeds five. It will be remembered.

The various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1801: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". It is set (step S1802). The set value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S1803). If an affirmative decision is made in step S1803, the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1804). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

When a negative determination is made in step S1803 or when the process of step S1804 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1805). When a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process returns to step S1803.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1805, repeated change monitoring processing is executed (step S1806). Although details of the repeated change monitoring process will be described later, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 repeatedly occurs in a short period of time, a process for notifying it is executed. In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the management result of the game history when the game is played for a predetermined period is intended. It is assumed that new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time so as to be erased automatically. On the other hand, by repeatedly performing the change monitoring process, when such an action is performed, the corresponding notification is performed.

After that, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S1807). In various calculation processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereby, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters and fourteenth parameters) are utilized by utilizing the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. ~ 42nd parameter) is calculated.

After that, the various parameters calculated in step S1807 are stored in the areas to be stored this time among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1808). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area is set so that the management CPU 112 can specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. The information in the pointer information area is changed so that when various parameters are stored in the storage target area of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage area is changed to the next order area. Will be updated. By executing the processing of step S1808, various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 this time.

After that, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S1809). That is, in the present embodiment, not only when the history information is read by the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory The history information 117 is deleted.

After that, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1810). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1811). In the writing process, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information of the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S1810 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed, The combination is stored as history information.

After that, the target pointer is updated (step S1812). In the update processing, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

Next, the repetitive change monitoring process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was set last time is within a reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) (step S1901). Specifically, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of game times is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of game times executed since the state was set last time is grasped, and it is further judged whether or not the grasped number of game times is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times).

When a positive determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repeat change counter provided in the separate storage memory 171 is incremented by 1 (step S1902). Since the separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require external power supply for storage and storage as already described, the external storage does not require power supply for storage of the repeated change counter value.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeat change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value "5" (step S1903). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S1903, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without the execution of the game times exceeding the reference number of times is the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not it has exceeded.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, display processing of repeated changes is executed (step S1904). In the display process of the repeated change, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c correspond to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 being repeated a number of times exceeding the notification reference value in a short period of time. It is the display content of repeated changes. The display content of the repeated change is the display content that displays "E" on all of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and this display content does not occur in other situations. Further, the state in which the display content of the repeated change is displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is continued until the repeated change flag provided in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0". .. The repeat change flag is a flag for the management CPU 112 to specify that the display contents of the repeat change should be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when the repeated change flag is set to "1" and the display contents of the repeated change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display process in the first embodiment described above. (FIG. 31) is not executed. After that, "1" is set to the repeat change flag of the separate storage memory 171 (step S1905).

When a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repeat change counter of the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0" (step S1906). After that, on condition that the repeated change flag of the separate storage memory 171 is set to "1" (step S1907: YES), the display contents of the repeated changes on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are displayed. The display is terminated (step S1908), and the repeat change flag is cleared to "0" (step S1909).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased. Thereby, it becomes possible to leave the history information of the game executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, various parameters are calculated as the management result of the game history by using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in the situation before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10. Further, even if the history information in the history memory 117 is deleted when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history by the history information to be deleted. It will be possible.

In the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the history information of the history memory 117 at that time when a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10, the calculated various parameters are stored separately in the storage memory. 171 is stored. As a result, even if a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the setting is performed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

By providing the plurality of separate storage areas 172 to 176 in the separate storage memory 171, it becomes possible to store various parameters corresponding to the setting timing of the setting state for a plurality of times. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods with reference to the timing when the new setting of the setting state is performed. Further, even if new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated under the situation where the game is not played, various parameters calculated by using the history information of the situation where the game is practically played are It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in the separate storage memory 171.

The various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by the external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history before the new setting of the setting state is performed in the pachinko machine 10.

In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the management result of the game history when the game is played for a predetermined period is intended. It is assumed that new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time so as to be erased automatically. On the other hand, by repeatedly performing the change monitoring process, when such an action is performed, the corresponding notification is performed. As a result, it becomes possible to notify an administrator or the like that new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

The notification that the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time is performed by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thereby, by using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management result of the game history, new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time. It is possible to make a notification.

In a situation where it is necessary to notify that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the display contents of the repeated change are continuously displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The notification of the game history management result at the normal time is not performed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Thereby, it becomes possible to emphasize the notification that the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period.

In addition, when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In a situation where the number is within the reference number, if the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification reference value and continues, a corresponding notification may be executed. In addition, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entrance portion (for example, any one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the first operation opening 33, and the second operation opening 34 or a predetermined operation opening). In the situation where the total number of discharged game balls entered in (combination) is within the reference number and the event for which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. Good. In addition, when the total number of history information items newly stored in the history memory 117 after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number, the event of the new setting is notified. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which when the number exceeds the reference value and continues, the corresponding notification is executed.

Further, when the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed within the monitoring reference period (for example, 600 seconds) exceeding the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed.

Further, in the situation where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times, the event in which the new setting is performed continuously exceeds the notification reference value. Although the notification corresponding to it is configured to be executed, the set value is changed in a situation where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which when an event exceeds the notification reference value and continues, the corresponding notification is executed.

Further, in the situation where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times, the event in which the new setting is performed continuously exceeds the notification reference value. Although the notification corresponding to that is executed, the new setting is triggered when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within the reference number. When the event in which the various parameters are calculated exceeds the notification reference value and continues, the corresponding notification may be executed.

Further, in the situation where the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. Although the notification corresponding to the above is executed, the progress of the game may be restricted in addition to or instead of that for a predetermined period (for example, one hour).

<Fourth Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the monitoring process of repeated changes is executed by the main CPU 63. The configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing a monitoring process of repeated changes executed by the main CPU 63. It should be noted that the repeated change monitoring process is executed when the set value update process (step S118) is executed in the main process (FIG. 9). That is, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the change monitoring process is repeatedly executed. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the monitoring process of the change is repeatedly executed when the set value is changed.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of game times executed since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was set last time is within a reference number (specifically 100 times) (step S2001). The main RAM 65 is provided with a game number counter for measuring the number of game times executed after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, and the main CPU 63 newly executes the game times. Each time, the value of the game number counter is incremented by 1. The game number counter is excluded from the target of clearing "0" even when the main RAM 65 clearing process (steps S105 and S117) is executed.

When a positive determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repeat change counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2002). The repetitive change counter is excluded from the target of clearing “0” even when the clearing process of the main RAM 65 (steps S105 and S117) is executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeat change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value "5" (step S2003). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S2003, the number of times the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeated without the execution of the game times exceeding the reference number of times is the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. It is determined whether or not it has exceeded.

When a positive determination is made in step S2003, "1" is set to the repeat change flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2004). The repetitive change flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the repetitive change should be notified. The repetitive change flag is excluded from the target of clearing "0" even when the clear process (step S105, step S117) of the main RAM 65 is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repeat change counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2005). After that, on condition that the repeat change flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2006: YES), the repeat change flag is cleared to "0" (step S2007).

In the repeated change monitoring process, when "1" is set in the repeated change flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2008: YES), a repeated change notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S2009). When the sound emission control device 81 receives the notification command of the repeated change, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 notify the repeated change. The notification of the repeated change is continued until the supply of the operating power to the sound emission control device 81 is stopped.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify that new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time based on the control by the main CPU 63. Further, since the notification is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54, even if the gaming machine main body 12 is not opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 It becomes possible for the administrator to recognize that the new setting has been repeated in a short period of time.

When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the notification command of the repeated change is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81, A configuration may be adopted in which external output corresponding thereto is performed.

Further, the main CPU 63 may execute the repeated change monitoring process in this embodiment, and the management side CPU 112 may execute the repeated change monitoring process in the third embodiment. As a result, it becomes possible to strictly monitor whether a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly set in a short period of time.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the setting update recognition processing in the management side CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. The configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2101: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". It is set (step S2102). The set value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

After that, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2103). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2104). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

When a negative determination is made in step S2103, or when the processing of step S2104 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2105). When a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process returns to step S2103.

When a positive determination is made in step S2105, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of predetermined history information is present in the history memory 117 (step S2106). Specifically, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the start of game times is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The number of game times executed since the state was set last time is grasped, and it is further determined whether or not the grasped number of game times exceeds a reference number (specifically 100 times). However, the number is not limited to this, and the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the game balls have been discharged from the game area PA is stored is a reference number (specifically 1000). It may be configured to determine in step S2106 whether or not it exceeds. Correspondence relationship information indicating that the game ball has entered a predetermined ball entrance portion (for example, any one of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the first operation opening 33, and the second operation opening 34 or a predetermined combination) It may be configured to determine in step S2106 whether or not the number of history information storage areas 125 in which is stored exceeds the reference number (specifically, 1000). Further, it may be configured to determine in step S2106 whether the total number of history information stored in the history memory 117 (specifically, 1000) is exceeded.

In addition, when the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number of times, the event in which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total discharge of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In a situation where the number is within the reference number, if the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification reference value and continues, a corresponding notification may be executed. In addition, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entrance portion (for example, any one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the first operation opening 33, and the second operation opening 34 or a predetermined operation opening). In the situation where the total number of discharged game balls entered in (combination) is within the reference number and the event for which the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, the corresponding notification may be executed. Good. In addition, when the total number of history information items newly stored in the history memory 117 after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is within the reference number, the event of the new setting is notified. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which when the number exceeds the reference value and continues, the corresponding notification is executed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2107). In various calculation processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereby, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters and fourteenth parameters) are utilized by utilizing the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. ~ 42nd parameter) is calculated.

After that, the various parameters calculated in step S2107 are stored in the areas to be stored this time among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 (step S2108). In the separate storage memory 171, a pointer information area is set so that the management CPU 112 can specify an area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176. The information in the pointer information area is changed so that when various parameters are stored in the storage target area of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176, the storage area is changed to the next order area. Will be updated. By executing the process of step S2108, various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 this time.

If a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the process of step S2108 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S2109). That is, in the present embodiment, not only when the history information is read by the external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory The history information 117 is deleted.

After that, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2110). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2111). In the writing process, the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is referred to identify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information corresponds to the writing target pointer information. The RTC information read in step S2110 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed, The combination is stored as history information.

After that, the update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S2112). In the update processing, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

According to the above configuration, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory 117 stores the history information in the history memory 117 on condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored. Various parameters are calculated using the history information, and the various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171. As a result, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, the information of the management result of the game history as a result of the game being substantially played is stored in the separate storage memory 171. It becomes possible to be stored.

Note that the process of step S2109 may be executed on condition that the processes of steps S2107 and S2108 are executed. That is, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased on condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even if a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the structure of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. First to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n, 142a to 142n, 143a to 143n, 144a to 144n are provided in each of these areas 141 to 144, respectively. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the second counters 141b to 144b of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information about the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third counters 141c to 144c of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourth counters 141d to 144d of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifth counters 141e to 144e of each of the areas 141 to 144. The sixth counters 141f to 144f of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh counters 141g to 144g of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eighth counters 141h to 144h of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the ninth counters 141i to 144i of each area 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141j to 144j of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eleventh counters 141k to 144k in each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 141l to 144l of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of each of the areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the 14th counters 141n to 144n of each area 141 to 144.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, of the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than the information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the identification is performed. The information of the number that was set is set in the check target counter. In the present pachinko machine 10, since information other than the information indicating that it is blank is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, "11" is set in the confirmation target counter in step S2201.

After that, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122n corresponding to the current check target counter are buffers to which the signal of the status information is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, as correspondence information, information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, and It is determined whether any of the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2202, state information setting processing is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the open/close execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the first state indicating that the open/close execution mode is in the management side When the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, it is stored in the RAM 114, and the information of the first state is deleted from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the second state indicating that the high frequency support mode is set is displayed on the management side RAM 114 When the output state of the ninth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the third state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open Is stored in the management RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the third state is erased from the management RAM 114.

When a negative determination is made in step S2202, or when the process of step S2203 is executed, the numerical value information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is , It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer is switched from the LOW level to the HI level by checking whether or not it has been changed from “0” to “1” ( Step S2204). If the numerical information stored in the eighth buffer 122h is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is the value corresponding to the eighth buffer 122h, the process proceeds to step S2203. The information of the first state is stored in the management RAM 114, and a positive determination is made in step S2204. If the numerical value information stored in the ninth buffer 122i is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the current value of the check target counter is the value corresponding to the ninth buffer 122i, the process proceeds to step S2203. The second state information is stored in the management side RAM 114, and a positive determination is made in step S2204. If the numerical value information stored in the tenth buffer 122j is changed from “0” to “1” in a situation where the value of the current check target counter is the value corresponding to the tenth buffer 122j, the process proceeds to step S2203. The information of the third state is stored in the management side RAM 114, and a positive determination is made in step S2204.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the corresponding sum counter addition processing is executed (step S2205). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n for summing in the summing area 141 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the total eleventh counter 141k is the addition target, and if the check target counter value is “5”, the total fifth counter 141e is the addition target, If the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first total counter 141a is the addition target.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the open/close execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the addition processing of the corresponding counter for the first state is executed (step S2207). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 142a to 142n for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. .. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 142k for the first state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 142e for the first state is the addition target. If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state becomes the addition target.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), the corresponding counter for the second state is added (step S2209). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 143a to 143n for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 143k for the second state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 143e for the second state is the addition target. If the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is the addition target.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the corresponding counter for the third state is added (step S2211). In the addition processing, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fourteenth counters 144a to 144n for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117 is incremented by 1. .. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “11”, the eleventh counter 144k for the third state is the addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 144e for the third state is the addition target. If the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first counter 144a for the third state is the addition target.

When a negative determination is made in step S2204, a negative determination is made in step S2210, or when the processing of step S2211 is executed, the value of the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2213). When the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the process from step S2202 is executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the number of game balls entered into the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34, and the opening/closing execution The number of times the mode is generated, the number of times the high-frequency support mode is generated, and the number of times the game is generated are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but are stored as number-of-times information. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

Since the number of times is stored as the number of times information instead of the history information, it is not necessary to perform the process of deriving the number of times information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

Next, the setting update recognition process executed by the management-side CPU 112 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2301: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". It is set (step S2302). The set value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

After that, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HI level again (step S2303). If an affirmative decision is made in step S2303, the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2304). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S2303, or if the process of step S2304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2305). If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process returns to step S2303.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2305, a total eleventh counter 141k for measuring the number of times of game times executed in the total area 141 in the history memory 117, and an opening/closing execution in the total area 141 in the history memory 117 The eighth total counter 141h measuring the number of times of mode occurrence and the total ninth counter 141i measuring the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode in the total area 141 of the history memory 117 are respectively provided. "0" is cleared (step S2306 to step S2308). As a result, the number of times the game is executed, the number of times the open/close execution mode is generated, and the number of times the high-frequency support mode is generated are all cleared to "0" when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. To be done. Therefore, the 31st parameter indicating the number of times of opening and closing execution mode per unit game time, the 41st parameter indicating the number of times of high frequency support mode per unit game time, and the high frequency support mode for the number of times of opening and closing execution mode The calculation result of the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are set to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. By making the contents corresponding to the game contents after the new setting is performed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting value. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

On the other hand, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the counters other than the eighth total counter 141h, the total ninth counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 are " 0” is not cleared. As a result, the management of the number of game balls or the frequency of game balls entering each history-targeted ball input unit is performed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible.

According to the above configuration, the number of game balls entered into the outlet 24a, the general prize opening 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34, the number of times the opening/closing execution mode has occurred, and high frequency support. The number of times the mode is generated and the number of times the game is generated are stored not as the history information as in the first embodiment but as the number information. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

Further, since the number of pieces of information is stored as the number-of-times information instead of the history information, it is not necessary to perform a process of deriving the number-of-times information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

Each piece of information on the number of times the game has been executed, the number of times the open/close execution mode has been generated, and the number of times the high-frequency support mode has been generated is cleared to "0" when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Therefore, the 31st parameter indicating the number of times of opening and closing execution mode per unit game time, the 41st parameter indicating the number of times of high frequency support mode per unit game time, and the high frequency support mode for the number of times of opening and closing execution mode The calculation result of the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. In the configuration in which the winning probability of the jackpot result is changed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are set to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. By making the contents corresponding to the game contents after the new setting is performed, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting value. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

On the other hand, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the counters other than the eighth total counter 141h, the total ninth counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 are " 0” is not cleared. As a result, the management of the number of game balls or the frequency of game balls entering each history-targeted ball input unit is performed based on the long-term game history without being affected by the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible.

Note that the configuration of the history memory 117 as in this embodiment may be applied to the first to fifth embodiments and the embodiments described after this embodiment. For example, when applied to the first embodiment, the information in the history memory 117 is maintained as it is even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Further, when applied to the third embodiment, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the entire history memory 117 is cleared to "0".

Further, the processing of step S2306 to step S2308 may be executed in the setting update recognition processing (FIG. 41) when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Thereby, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the set value is not changed before and after that, information on the number of times the game is executed, information on the number of times the open/close execution mode is generated, and high-frequency support The information of the number of times the mode is generated is not cleared to "0", and when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the information of the number of times of the game time, the information of the number of times of the open/close execution mode, and the high frequency support mode It is possible to clear the information of the number of occurrences of “0”.

In addition, in the setting update recognition process (FIG. 41), various parameters are calculated using the counters 141 to 144 of the history memory 117 before the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 are executed, and the parameters are calculated. Various parameters may be stored in the calculation result memory 131.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the structure of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

As the history memory 117, history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to “setting 1” to “setting 6”, which are the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, are provided. Specifically, a history memory 181 for setting 1 is provided corresponding to "setting 1", and a history memory 182 for setting 2 is provided corresponding to "setting 2". A history memory 183 for setting 3 is provided corresponding to “setting 3”, a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided corresponding to “setting 4”, and corresponding to “setting 5”. A history memory 185 for setting 5 is provided, and a history memory 186 for setting 6 is provided corresponding to “setting 6”.

Each of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. Thereby, it becomes possible to store the history information in association with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the set value for which the new setting is performed are the storage targets of the history information. It is possible to store the history information separately for each set value without erasing the history information when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Further, since various parameters are calculated using the history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 that is currently set, various parameters corresponding to each setting value can be appropriately derived.

In addition, in each of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, the total area 141, the first state area 142, the second state area 143, and the third state area 144 in the sixth embodiment are provided. The combination may be set.

Next, the setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2401: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter provided in the calculation result memory 131 Is set to "1" (step S2402). The set value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6". Further, in the present embodiment, since the set value grasping counter is provided in the operation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storage, it is assumed that the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped. Also, the value stored in the set value grasping counter is stored and held.

Then, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2403). If an affirmative decision is made in step S2403, the value of the set value grasping counter of the operation result memory 131 is incremented by 1 (step S2404). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

When a negative determination is made in step S2403 or when the processing of step S2404 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2405). When a negative determination is made in step S2405, the process returns to step S2403.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the values of the set value grasping counter of the calculation result memory 131 are set as the storage target of the history information and the reference target when the various parameters are calculated ( Step S2406). Specifically, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “1”, it means that the setting is set to “setting 1”. Therefore, the history memory 181 for setting 1 is set as the storage target of the history information and various parameters. Set as a reference target during calculation. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “2”, it means that the setting is set to “setting 2”. Therefore, the history memory 182 for setting 2 is used for storing the history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “3”, it means that the setting is set to “setting 3”. Therefore, the history memory 183 for setting 3 is used for storing the history information and calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “4”, it means that the setting is set to “setting 4”. Therefore, the history memory 184 for setting 4 is set in the history information storage target and when various parameters are calculated. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is “5”, it means that the setting is set to “setting 5”. Therefore, the history memory 185 for setting 5 is used for storing the history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. Further, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is set to "setting 6". Therefore, the history memory 186 for setting 6 is used for storing the history information and calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target.

After that, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2407). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2408). In the writing process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the history information storage target in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6. Then, by referring to the pointer area 126 in the history memories 181 to 186 which are the storage objects, the pointer information of the history area 124 which is the current writing object is specified and becomes the writing object. The RTC information read in step S2407 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information. Further, the information for identifying the set value is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, a combination of the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed is stored as history information.

After that, the update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S2409). In the update processing, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the storage targets of history information in step S2406 are selected from the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6, and the history memories 181 to 186 are selected. The numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

According to the above configuration, as the history memory 117, the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 are provided so as to correspond to the “setting 1” to the “setting 6”, respectively. As a result, it becomes possible to store the game history in correspondence with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the set value for which the new setting is performed are the storage targets of the history information. It is possible to store the history information separately for each set value without erasing the history information when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Further, since various parameters are calculated using the history information corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 that is currently set, various parameters corresponding to each setting value can be appropriately derived.

It should be noted that the history memory 117 is not limited to the configuration in which six memories of the history memories 181 to 186 for the settings 1 to 6 are provided, and one memory can be used for the setting 1 Corresponding to the history memory 181 for setting 2, the area corresponding to the history memory 182 for setting 2, the area corresponding to the history memory 183 for setting 3, and the history memory 184 for setting 4. An area, an area corresponding to the history memory 185 for setting 5, and an area corresponding to the history memory 186 for setting 6 may be set.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the structure of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

As the history memory 117, a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192 are provided. Each of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. In this case, when the history information is stored using one of the history memories 191 and 192 of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. If a certain number of pieces of history information are stored in the other history memories 191 and 192, the history information of the one history memory 191 and 192 is not erased and remains. In addition, it is possible to store history information newly in both history memories 191 and 192 until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memories 191 and 192. Become.

Next, the setting update recognition processing in this embodiment executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2501: YES), the value of the set value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is set to " 1” (step S2502). The set value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the set value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the set value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1". If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means "setting 6".

After that, it is determined whether or not the set value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2503). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the value of the set value grasping counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2504). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management-side CPU 112 is increased by one step.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, or if the processing of step S2504 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. Then, it is determined whether or not a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2505). When a negative determination is made in step S2505, the process returns to step S2503.

When a positive determination is made in step S2505, "1" is set to the setting change occurrence flag provided in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2506). The setting change occurrence flag has been set as a storage target of history information until then in the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. This is a flag for the management CPU 112 to specify whether not only the history memories 191 and 192 but also the other history memories 191 and 192 are the storage targets of the history information. Further, since the setting change occurrence flag is provided in the operation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, even if supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, setting change occurs. The value stored in the flag is stored and retained.

After that, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2507). Then, the writing process to the history memories 191 and 192 is executed (step S2508). In the writing process, first, the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191 is referenced to specify the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target, and the pointer information of the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed, The combination is stored as history information in the first history memory 191. In the writing process, the pointer information 126 of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192, and the pointer that is the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S2507 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the information. Further, both the information for identifying the set value and the value information of the set value grasping counter are written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereby, the information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting is performed, and the information of the setting value when the setting is performed, The combination is stored in the second history memory 192 as history information.

After that, update processing of each target pointer is executed (step S2509). In the update process, first, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information. In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If it exceeds the maximum value, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

Next, the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When "1" is not set in the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 (step S2601: NO), the side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 that is the storage target is selected. This means that only the history information should be stored. In this case, first, the history memories 191 and 192, which are currently stored, are grasped (step S2602). The calculation result memory 131 is provided with a storage target flag, and when the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the first history memory 191 becomes the storage target and the value of the storage target flag is “1”. If it is, the second history memory 192 is to be stored. Since the storage target flag is provided in the operation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, the storage target flag is stored. The value of is stored and retained.

After that, the history setting execution processing is executed for the history memories 191 and 192 which are storage targets (step S2603). Specifically, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed for one of the history memories 191 and 192 that are storage targets. As a result, the history information is stored in one of the history memories 191 and 192 that are storage targets.

On the other hand, when "1" is set in the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 (step S2601: YES), it is a storage target of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192. This means that the history information should be stored not only on the side but also on the other side. In this case, history setting execution processing is executed for both history memories 191 and 192 (step S2604). Specifically, first, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed on the first history memory 191. As a result, the history information is stored in the first history memory 191. After that, the processes of steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed on the second history memory 192. As a result, the history information is stored in the second history memory 192.

When the process of step S2603 is executed or the process of step S2604 is executed, it is determined whether "1" is set in the setting change occurrence flag of the operation result memory 131 (step S2605). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, it is determined whether or not there is a predetermined number or more of ball discharge histories in the history memories 191, 192 that are not to be stored (step S2606). Specifically, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is “0”, the first history memory 191 is the storage target, so the game area PA is stored in the second history memory 192. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") of history information indicating that the game balls have been discharged is stored. Further, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is “1”, the second history memory 192 is the storage target, so that the first history memory 191 moves from the game area PA to the game ball. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) of history information indicating that the has been discharged is stored. It should be noted that the game time is executed rather than determining whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “1000”) of history information indicating that the game balls have been discharged from the game area PA is stored. It may be configured to determine whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, “100”) or more of history information indicating is stored.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, a storage target change process is executed (step S2607). In the change processing of the storage object, the value of the storage object flag of the operation result memory 131 is set between the two values to a value different from the current value, so that the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are set. The side to be memorized is changed. Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is “0”, the storage target is changed from the first history memory 191 to the second history memory 192 by setting the storage target flag to “1”. If the value of the storage target flag is "1", the storage target flag is cleared to "0" to change the storage target from the second history memory 192 to the first history memory 191. As a result, the history memories 191 and 192 in which only the history information of the game executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored are set as storage targets. Then, various parameters are calculated by using the history information of the history memories 191 and 192 which are newly stored, so that it is executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It is possible to derive various parameters depending on the game.

After that, the clear process is executed on the side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 which has been the storage target until then (step S2608). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is "0", the second history memory 192 is cleared to "0", and if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the first history memory 191 is " 0” is cleared. After that, the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0" (step S2609).

Next, the display output processing in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When it is the calculation timing (step S2701: YES), the storage target side of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is grasped (step S2702). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is “0”, the first history memory 191 is recognized as the storage target, and if the value of the storage target flag is “1”, the second history memory 191 is stored. The history memory 192 is grasped as a storage target. After that, using the history information stored in the storage target history memories 191 and 192 grasped in step S2702, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. By doing so, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters, fourteenth to forty-second parameters) are calculated, and the calculated various parameters are calculated. The result memory 131 is stored (step S2703). In this case, the history information is stored in both the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 because the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1". Even if there is, various parameters are calculated by using one of the history memories 191 and 192 which are storage targets.

If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or if the process of step S2703 has been executed, the display process is executed (step S2704). The processing content of the display processing is the same as the display processing (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided as the history memory 117, and when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, While the history memories 191 and 192 that have been storage targets are directly stored, the history information is also stored in the history memories 191 and 192 that are not storage targets. When a predetermined number or more of history information corresponding to the discharge of the game balls from the game area PA is stored in the history memories 191 and 192 on the side that is not the storage target, the history information is not the storage target. The history memories 191 and 192 on the side are directly stored, and the history memories 191 and 192 on the side that have been stored until then are cleared to “0”. Thereby, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, it is possible to calculate various parameters using only history information of the game performed at the newly set setting value. Become.

On the other hand, according to the above configuration, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time so as not to appropriately calculate various parameters, the history target to be stored is stored. Memories 191 and 192 remain unchanged. Thereby, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time, it is possible to appropriately derive the management result of the game history up to that point.

It should be noted that the history memory 117 is not limited to a configuration in which two memories, a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192, are provided, and one memory can be used for the first history. The first history area corresponding to the memory 191 and the second history area corresponding to the second history memory 192 may be set.

Alternatively, only one history memory 117 may be provided. In this case, when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. The history information before the specified timing may be erased, and the history information after the setting timing may be stored and retained without being deleted. As a result, at a timing when a predetermined number or more of history information is accumulated after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a history before the timing at which the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It becomes possible to erase information. In addition, the history information corresponding to the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the history memory 117 at the timing when the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. It is possible to distinguish the history information before and the history information after the timing when is performed.

Further, the timing of deleting the history information is not limited to the case where the total number of discharged game balls from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. Instead, the number of game times executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed may be a predetermined number or more.

Further, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the setting value is not changed before and after the new setting, the change of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored and the history information When the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed without erasing, and when the set value is changed before and after that, the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored as described above. May be changed and the history information may be deleted.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111, the type of the signal whose input signal is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 is the above-mentioned. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 in order to specify the type of the input signal to the management CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same kind of signal as that of the first embodiment is input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the 16th buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. Two signals are input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning a prize mouth detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal, A signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, a signal corresponding to the start of the game game is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as the eleventh signal, and the set value update signal is the fifteenth buffer. However, in the present embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the start of the game round is input to the eleventh buffer 122k as the game round signal, the set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 122l, and the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is in the open/close execution mode. The signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as a signal, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is the fifteenth door opening signal. It is input to the buffer 122o.

The game time signal is input to the eleventh buffer 122k, the set value update signal is input to the twelfth buffer 122l, the open/close execution mode signal is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the fourteenth buffer 122n. It is decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the high frequency support mode input signal, the door opening signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and the output instruction signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. Therefore, without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 can specify that the signals corresponding to each of the 11th to 16th buffers 122k to 122p are input. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j has not been determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and these kinds of signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. As a result, the CPU 112 on the management side specifies. The process for identifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 9) as in the first embodiment.

First, "10", which is the number of the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j to be recognized for the signal type, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2801). After that, the output processing of the identification start signal is executed (step S2802). In the output process, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode input signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. Is set to the HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output states of these signals.

After that, the information on the output count corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read output count information is set in the output counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S2803). The output number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the output number of the type identification signal.

In the present embodiment, when the management-side CPU 112 recognizes the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j, the number of prize balls set for the incoming ball portion corresponding to the signal type. And the type identification signal is output the same number of times as. The management-side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. .. That is, the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j is grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entering portion corresponding to the type of the signal.

In step S2803, if the value of the recognition output counter is any of "10", "9" and "8", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the output number counter. .. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "7", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is “6”, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first working opening 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "5", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operating port 34 is set in the output number counter. If the value of the output counter for recognition is “4”, the payout of the game ball is not executed even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a. Set "0" to. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any one of "3" to "1", since the corresponding ball entry portion does not exist and it is blank, "0" is set in the output number counter.

After that, the output process of the start trigger signal is executed (step S2804). In the output process, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

After that, on the condition that the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S2805: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set on the output counter in step S2803, The process advances to step S2806. In step S2806, a type identification signal output process is executed. In the output process, the output state of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period in which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

After that, the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2807), and it is determined whether the value of the output counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S2808). When the value of the output counter is 1 or more (step S2808: NO), the process returns to step S2806.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S2805, or if an affirmative decision is made in step S2808, output processing of the termination trigger signal is executed (step S2809). In the output process, the output of the termination trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period in which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

After that, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2810), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement by 1 is "0" (step S2811). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2811: NO), the process returns to step S2803, and processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction by 1 is executed. To do.

On the other hand, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "0" (step S2811: YES), output processing of the identification end signal is executed (step S2812). In the output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode input signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. Is set to the HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period in which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output states of these signals.

Next, the management processing executed in the management CPU 112 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

First, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2901). If the identification start signal has not been received, the setting update recognition process is executed in step S2902, and then the process of step S2901 is executed again. The processing content of the setting update recognition processing is the same as that of the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2901: YES), the value of the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S2903). After that, on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. When the type identification signal is received (step S2905: YES), the value of the reception number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2906). The reception counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. The value of the reception number counter is cleared to "0" when a positive determination is made in step S2904.

If a negative determination is made in step S2905, or if the processing of step S2906 is executed, it is determined whether or not an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2907). If the termination trigger signal has not been received (step S2907: NO), the process returns to step S2905, and if the termination trigger signal has been received (step S2907: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S2908). In the correspondence relation setting process, among the first to tenth correspondence relation areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence relation memory 116, the correspondence relation area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 is set in the reception number counter. Stores the value that is set. In this case, “10” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set. Is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first working port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relationship In the area 123f, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second working port 34 is set. Also, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. After that, the value of the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2909).

When a negative determination is made in step S2904, or when the processing of step S2909 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2910). When the reception of the identification end signal is not completed (step S2910: NO), the process returns to step S2904, and on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the processes after step S2905 are performed. Execute. When the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is finished (step S2910: YES), the history setting process of step S2911, the display output process of step S2912, and the external output process of step S2913 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 51 is a time chart showing a state in which information on the correspondence between the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j is stored in the correspondence memory 116. 51A shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, FIG. 51B shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level, and FIG. ) Indicates a period during which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 51(d) indicates a period during which the output state of the signal in the open/close execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. FIG. 51(f) shows the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j, showing the period during which the output state of the signal in the high frequency support mode is at the HI level. 51G shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, FIG. 51G shows the timing when the value of the reception counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. The timing at which the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process (step S2908) is shown.

As the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 51(a), 51(d) and 51(e), the first signal The output states of the open/close execution mode signal and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Then, at the timing of t2, the output states of the first signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative decision in step S2901 of the management processing (FIG. 50), and the identification state is entered as shown in FIG. 51(f).

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t3 to timing t4 as shown in FIG. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. Then, from the timing of t5 to the timing of t7, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51(b). As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management-side CPU 112 once. In this case, the value of the reception number counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG.

After that, from the timing t8 to the timing t10, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51(c). As a result, the termination trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t9, the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 51(h). Since the value of the reception number counter is "1" at the timing when the correspondence relation setting process is executed, the correspondence relation information "1" is stored in the correspondence relation memory 123 in the correspondence relation memory 116 as the correspondence relation information 123a to 123j. Information is stored.

After that, from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 51( b ), the timing t13 to timing t15, the timing t16 to timing t18, the timing t19 to timing t21, and the timing t22 to timing t24 are changed as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management-side CPU 112 once. In this case, the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 51(g) at each of the timing t14, the timing t17, the timing t20, and the timing t23.

After that, from the timing of t25 to the timing of t27, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 51(c). As a result, the termination trigger signal is output to the management-side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t26, as shown in FIG. 51(h), the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process. Since the value of the reception number counter is “10” at the timing when the correspondence relation setting process is executed, the correspondence relation information “10” is stored in the correspondence relation memory 123 in the correspondence relation memory 116 as the correspondence relation information 123a to 123j. Information is stored.

Thereafter, at the timing of t28, the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are LOW as shown in FIGS. 51(c), 51(d), and 51(e). Level is changed to HI level. As a result, the main CPU 63 starts outputting the identification end signal to the management CPU 112. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative decision in step S2910 of the management processing (FIG. 50), so that the identification state is canceled as shown in FIG. 51(f).

Note that, in the present embodiment, since information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is stored in the history information, and the prize balls corresponding to the ball-entering portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number of pieces is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of ball entry parts having the same number of prize balls, the ball entry parts cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the number of prize balls for each of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is one, it is possible to distinguish the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. In such a situation, the number of prize balls may be different between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. This makes it possible to distinguish the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 in the history information even with the configuration in which the history information is stored as in the present embodiment.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the set value update signal and the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether or not the game time is started, information corresponding to whether or not in the opening and closing execution mode, Regarding the information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress and the information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the main CPU 63 determines that the signal path corresponds to these information. It is possible for the management side CPU 112 to specify even without receiving the correspondence information of. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection result of each of the ball entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is the information required to cause the management CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence between each information and each signal path 118a to 118j. Become. When causing the management-side CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence information, the same number of pulse signals as the number of prize balls corresponding to each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 to the management-side CPU 112 using the second signal. Is output to. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to the transmission of the correspondence information.

<Tenth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for providing the information of each ball entry result to the management IC 66. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a signal path for allowing the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. The detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. The detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. The detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. The detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from the middle position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. A fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervention of the processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes a process for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the respective entrance results of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. Since it is not necessary to do so, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63.

Further, branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 are present in the MPU 62. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the branch point and each of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act in which an abnormal entry result is input only to the management IC 66. ..

<Eleventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the display device for displaying the management result of the game history is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 53 is a front view of main controller 60 in the present embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the first notification display device 69a, the second notification display device 69b, and the third notification display device 69c. However, in the present embodiment, the first notification display device 69a is provided. A display device 201, a second notification display device 202, a third notification display device 203, and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided. These first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61.

Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is a segment display in which seven display segments by LEDs are arranged, but the display device is not limited to this, and a single multicolor emission type single display device is used. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are installed so that their display surfaces face the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and by the facing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. Is covered. In this case, since the substrate box 60a is formed transparent, the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 housed in the substrate box 60a are visually observed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. It becomes possible. Further, the main controller 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 in the board box 60a faces the back of the pachinko machine 10, so that the gaming machine. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 through the facing wall portion 60b. It is possible to visually check the display surfaces of 204.

Alphabets such as "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O" are displayed on the display surface of the first notification display device 201. On the other hand, on the second notification display device 202, the third notification display device 203, and the fourth notification display device 204, numbers are displayed in the range of “0” to “9”. The management results of the game history are notified using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, the management result of the game history that is the notification target in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 (the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters in the first embodiment). Parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameter) are displayed, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are notification targets. A display corresponding to the content of the management result of the type of game history is performed.

In detail, as the type of the management result of the game history, the 1st to 8th parameters, the 11th to 18th parameters, the 21st to 26th parameters, the 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters in the first embodiment. Exists. On the first notification display device 201, a display corresponding to the type of parameter group that is the notification target is performed. Specifically, when any of the first to eighth parameters is the notification target, “A” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and any one of the first to eighteenth parameters is displayed. If the notification target is the first notification display device 201, “E” is displayed, and if any of the 21st to 26th parameters is the notification target, the first notification display device. When “H” is displayed on 201 and any of the 31st parameters is the notification target, “L” is displayed on the first notification display device 201 and the 41st to 42nd parameters are notified. When it is a target, “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 201.

The second notification display device 202 displays the order corresponding to the type of the management result of the game history that is the notification target among the arrangement order of the management results of the game history in the parameter group that is the notification target. Explaining the parameter group of the first to eighth parameters as an example, when the first parameter is the notification target, “1” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the second parameter is When it is the notification target, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the third parameter is the notification target, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202. Is displayed and “4” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the fourth parameter is the notification target, and the second notification is displayed when the fifth parameter is the notification target. When "5" is displayed on the display device 202 and the sixth parameter is the notification target, "6" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the seventh parameter is the notification target. If it is, the second notification display device 202 displays “7”, and if the eighth parameter is the notification target, the second notification display device 202 displays “8”. Further, the parameter group of the 21st to 26th parameters will be described as an example. When the 21st parameter is the notification target, “1” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and the 22nd parameter is displayed. When the parameter is the notification target, “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the 23rd parameter is the notification target, the “2” is displayed on the second notification display device 202. "3" is displayed, "24" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the 24th parameter is the notification target, and "2" is displayed when the 25th parameter is the notification target. "5" is displayed on the notification display device 202, and "6" is displayed on the second notification display device 202 when the 26th parameter is the notification target.

For details of the display contents of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the numeral corresponding to the tens digit of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100 is the third notification information. The number is displayed on the display device 203, and the numeral corresponding to the ones digit is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

In the 1st-4th notification display devices 201-204, the said 1st-8th parameter, the said 11th-18th parameter, the said 21st-26th parameter, the said 31st parameter, and the said 41st-42nd. The display corresponding to the parameter calculation result is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the display object in the last order, is displayed, the first parameter that is the display object in the first order is displayed. The calculation result of is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. On the other hand, the calculation cycle of the various parameters in the management-side CPU 112 is 51 seconds, and the number of various parameters is 25. Therefore, the various parameters calculated by the management-side CPU 112 are subject to notification in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 202 at least once.

In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, not only the notification of the management result of the game history but also the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed as in the first embodiment In, the value corresponding to the current set value is displayed. Specifically, in the changeable state, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off, whereas in the horizontally arranged first to fourth notification display devices 204, they are present at the right end. The value corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. That is, when “setting 1” is selected in the changeable state, “1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when “setting 2” is selected in the changeable state “2” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when “setting 3” is selected in the changeable state, “3” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 and can be changed. When “setting 4” is selected in the state, “4” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when “setting 5” is selected in the changeable state, the fourth notification is displayed. "5" is displayed on the display device 204, and when "setting 6" is selected in the changeable state, "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

Next, an electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 based on the control of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 54 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 under the control of the MPU 62.

As described above, the MPU 62 and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided on the main control board 61. Further, the main control board 61 is provided with a first display IC 205, a second display IC 206, a third display IC 207 and a fourth display IC 208.

The first display IC 205 is provided corresponding to the first notification display device 201, is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL31, and is electrically connected to the first notification display device 201 through the signal path SL32. It is connected. The first display IC 205 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the first notification display device 201, that is, each display is performed according to the display data stored in the storage buffer. Control the light emission of the display segment. The first display IC 205 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and the display content corresponding to the stored and held display data is displayed by the first notification display device. It is continuously displayed on 201. Then, the display data is changed by the MPU 62, so that the display of the first notification display device 201 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, after the supply of the operating power to the first display IC 205 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data is all “0” data. Indicates that the first notification display device 201 is in the non-display state, that is, in the extinguished state.

However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by the backup power being supplied to the first display IC 205, the first display IC 205 displays The data may be stored and held. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the first notification display device 201 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It will be started by the first notification display device 201.

The second display IC 206 is provided so as to correspond to the second notification display device 202, is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL33, and is electrically connected to the second notification display device 202 through the signal path SL34. It is connected. The second display IC 206 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the second notification display device 202, that is, each display, according to the display data stored in the storage buffer. Control the light emission of the segment. The second display IC 206 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and the display content corresponding to the stored and held display data is displayed on the second notification display device. It is continuously displayed on 202. Then, the display data is changed by the MPU 62, so that the display of the second notification display device 202 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in a situation after the supply of the operating power to the second display IC 206 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data is all “0” data. Indicates that the second notification display device 202 is in the non-display state, that is, in the off state.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the second display IC 206 displays even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by the backup power being supplied to the second display IC 206. The data may be stored and held. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the second notification display device 202 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It will be started on the second notification display device 202.

The third display IC 207 is provided corresponding to the third notification display device 203, is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL35, and is electrically connected to the third notification display device 203 through the signal path SL36. It is connected. The third display IC 207 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the third notification display device 203, that is, each display is performed according to the display data stored in the storage buffer. Control the light emission of the display segment. The third display IC 207 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when the operating power is supplied, and the display content corresponding to the stored and held display data is displayed by the third notification display device. The display is continued on 203. Then, by changing the display data by the MPU 62, the display of the third notification display device 203 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in a situation after the supply of the operating power to the third display IC 207 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data is all “0” data. Indicates that the third notification display device 203 is in the non-display state, that is, in the off state.

However, the present invention is not limited to the configuration, and the third display IC 207 displays even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by the backup power being supplied to the third display IC 207. The data may be stored and held. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the third notification display device 203 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It will be started on the third notification display device 203.

The fourth display IC 208 is provided so as to correspond to the fourth notification display device 204, is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through the signal path SL37, and is electrically connected to the fourth notification display device 204 through the signal path SL38. It is connected. The fourth display IC 208 is provided with a storage buffer for storing the display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the fourth notification display device 204, that is, each display is performed according to the display data stored in the storage buffer. Control the light emission of the segment. The fourth display IC 208 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer when operating power is supplied, and the display content corresponding to the stored and held display data is displayed by the fourth notification display device. It is continuously displayed on 204. Then, the display data is changed by the MPU 62, so that the display of the fourth notification display device 204 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. Further, in the situation after the supply of the operating power to the fourth display IC 208 is started and the display data is not set by the MPU 62, the display data is all “0” data. Indicates that the fourth notification display device 204 is in the non-display state, that is, in the off state.

However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the fourth display IC 208 displays even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by the backup power being supplied to the fourth display IC 208. The data may be stored and held. In this case, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display performed on the fourth notification display device 204 immediately before the supply of the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is concerned. It will be started by the fourth notification display device 204.

The output of the display data to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 is performed by the MPU 62, and the output setting of the display data is performed by each of the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112. That is, the main CPU 63 executes the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the management CPU 112 executes the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, the period in which the output setting of the display data is performed is adjusted so that the output setting of the display data is not performed at the same time in the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112. Specifically, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started. In the changeable state, the output setting of the display data is performed by the main CPU 63. On the other hand, the output setting of the display data by the management CPU 112 is not performed. On the other hand, in the state where the set value is not changeable, the output data of the display data is set by the management CPU 112, whereas the output setting of the display data is not set by the main CPU 63.

If the output setting of the display data by the main CPU 63 and the output setting of the display data by the management CPU 112 are performed at the time of synchronization, the output setting of the display data by the main CPU 63 has priority. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display side output setting by the management-side CPU 112 may be prioritized.

Next, the display processing in this embodiment executed by the management-side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the value of the update timing counter of the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S3001). The update timing counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that it is the time to update the display content of the game history management result on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. After that, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by determining whether the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is “0”. Is determined (step S3002).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the value of the display target counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S3003). When the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "24" (step S3004: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S3005). The display target counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Of the first to eighth parameters, the first to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameters and the fourteenth to forty-second parameters, and the display target counters of "0" to "24". There is a one-to-one correspondence with the possible values. For example, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the first parameter, which is the first display target, becomes the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the value of the display target counter is “24”. In this case, the 42nd parameter, which is the last display target, becomes the display target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When a negative determination is made in step S3004, or when the process of step S3005 is executed, display data corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the management-side ROM 113 (step S3006). Then, the display data setting process corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is executed (step S3007), and the display data setting process corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is executed (step S3008). For example, if the value of the display target counter is “0” and the first parameter is the display target, the display data for displaying “A” on the first notification display device 201 is displayed on the first display IC 205. In addition to the output, the display data for displaying “1” on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206. Further, for example, if the value of the display target counter is “24” and the 42nd parameter is the display target, the display data for displaying “O” on the first notification display device 201 is first displayed. The display data for displaying “2” on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206 while being output to the IC 205.

After that, the parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the operation result memory 131, and the display data corresponding to the tens digit and the display data corresponding to the ones digit of the result obtained by multiplying the read parameter by 100 are displayed. It is read from the management-side ROM 113 (step S3009). Then, the display control of the third notification display device 203 is performed so that the number corresponding to the tens place of the result is displayed (step S3010), and the fourth number is displayed so that the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed. The display of the notification display device 204 is controlled (step S3011). For example, when the result multiplied by 100 is “53”, the display data for displaying “5” on the third notification display device 203 is output to the third display IC 207, and the fourth notification display device 204 is displayed. Display data for displaying “3” is output to the fourth display IC 208.

After that, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set as a value corresponding to the next update timing in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S3012).

By executing the display process as described above, the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and the main body of the gaming machine 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the main controller 60 is operated from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is performed regardless of whether it is visible. In this way, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed regardless of the status of the game or the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that the first to fourth notification display device 201. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of ~ 204.

The display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started after the supply of the operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main side CPU 63. To be done. In this case, like the information stored in the history memory 117, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is stored and retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Therefore, when the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is started, the management result of the game history calculated before the supply of the operating power to the management-side CPU 112 is stopped is displayed.

The first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 store and hold the display data output from the MPU 62 while operating power is being supplied, and the corresponding first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data. Display control. Therefore, after the display of the management result of the game history is started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not in the off state (that is, the non-display state), and the lighting state corresponding to some display ( That is, the display state).

Next, the setting value update processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, the extinguishing process of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is executed (step S3101). Specifically, the display data that is all “0” is output to the first to third display ICs 205 to 207. As a result, all the display segments of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off, and the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are hidden. Immediately after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are all in the off state and the first to fourth notification display device 201. ˜204 are non-display states. Therefore, step S3101 is a process of maintaining the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 in the non-display state, and if any of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is caused by some influence. If it is in the display state, it is a process of making it in the non-display state.

After that, "1" is set to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3102). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. By setting "1" in the set value counter, when the set value updating process is executed, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point.

Then, the display start processing of the set value in the fourth display annunciation device 204 is executed (step S3103). In the setting value display start processing, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “Setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

Then, it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3105), on condition that the setting key insertion part 68a has not been operated OFF (step S3104: NO). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When a negative determination is made in step S3105, the process returns to step S3104 and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off.

When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S3105: YES), the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3106). When the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S3107: YES), "1" is set in the set value counter (step S3108). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, it is updated to the setting value one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", it is set to "setting 1". Will return.

If a negative determination is made in step S3107, or if the processing of step S3108 is executed, display update processing of the set value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3109). In the display update processing of the set value, the display data for displaying the number corresponding to the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process of step S3109, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off. When the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3104: NO), the processes of step S3105 and thereafter are executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S3104: YES), display start processing of the management result in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3110).

In the display start process, the management result display start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. Upon receiving the management result display start command, the management CPU 112 executes a process for displaying the first parameter of the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display process (FIG. 55). Accordingly, the display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operation power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped last time is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Next, the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the game history management result is displayed and when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated will be described. 57(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 when the game history management result is displayed, and FIG. 57(b) is a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the 1st-4th notification display apparatuses 201-204 in case the setting state of 10 is changed.

When the management result of the game history is displayed, at least one display segment is in a light emitting state in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 57(a). That is, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. Then, this is the same regardless of which of the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the fourteenth to the forty-second parameter is to be notified. .. Thereby, the manager of the game hall visually confirms that all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state, so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It is possible to understand that the management result of the game history is displayed.

On the other hand, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, all the display segments are turned off in each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 as shown in FIG. 57(b). That is, each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is in the non-display state. Further, any one of "1" to "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. As described above, by displaying any one of “1” to “6” on the fourth notification display device 204 and each of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 being in the non-display state, It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to understand that the display corresponding to the set value is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and to clearly understand the current set value. It becomes possible.

Next, the manner in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 58(a) to 58(h). 58(a) shows a changeable state period in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, and FIG. 58(b) shows update of the setting display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. 58C shows the timing, FIG. 58C shows a period in which the game history management result is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 58D is the first to fourth notification display device. The display update timing corresponding to the management result of the game history in 201 to 204 is shown, FIG. 58(e) shows the period during which the first notification display device 201 is in the display state, and FIG. 58(f) shows the 2 shows the period during which the notification display device 202 is in the display state, FIG. 58(g) shows the period during which the third notification display device 203 is in the display state, and FIG. 58(h) shows the fourth notification. The period during which the display device 204 is in the display state is shown.

By changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 58(a), by supplying the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the setting key insertion section 68a turned on. Can be changed. At the timing of t1, the setting display is updated as shown in FIG. 58B, the fourth notification display device 204 is in the display state as shown in FIG. 58H, and the display state is continued. In this case, since “setting 1” is selected, “1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state, that is, all the display segments are turned off. Maintained.

Thereafter, an operation for changing the set value is performed by operating the update button 68b at each of the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, and the timing of t5, so that each of these timings is changed as shown in FIG. 58(b). Is the update timing of the set value display. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(h), in the fourth notification display device 204, the display content is switched to the number corresponding to the changed set value at each timing, but the display content is switched. The fourth notification display device 204 is maintained in the display state including the timings at which On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the display devices 201 to 203 for the first to third notifications are in the non-display state, that is, for all the display, at each of the update timings of these set value displays. The segment remains off.

Thereafter, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off at the timing of t6, and the changeable state is ended as shown in FIG. 58(a). In this case, the display period of the game history management result is started at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 58(c). Specifically, the display of the first parameter stored in the calculation result memory 131 is started. Therefore, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are switched from the non-display state to the display state and the fourth notification display is performed. Although the display content of the device 204 is changed, the display state is maintained.

After that, at each of the timing of t7, the timing of t8, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t11, and the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 58(d), the display timing of the management result of the game history is updated. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(h), the display contents corresponding to the management result of the updated game history at each of the timings in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Although it is switched, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the display state including the timings at which the display contents are switched.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

In the configuration in which the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. In the changeable state, the corresponding display is displayed. This is performed by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, it becomes possible to use the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 not only for displaying the management result of the game history but also as a display device for performing the corresponding display in the changeable state. ..

It corresponds to the period in which the game history management result is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the setting value changeable state on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is distinguished from the period during which the display is made. Accordingly, by grasping the situation in which the display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, which display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to specify whether or not there is.

When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 have different display modes from the display mode when the game history management result is displayed. Display controlled. Accordingly, by grasping the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to identify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible.

A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. As a result, a wide variety of displays can be performed as displays corresponding to the game history management results. In addition, due to the presence of the plurality of display devices 201 to 204 for notification, the display mode is large depending on whether the management result of the game history is displayed or the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed. It is possible to make a difference.

When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 that are not hidden when displaying the management result of the game history are hidden. Thereby, the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value are performed only by confirming whether the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly specify which one of them is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, the fourth notification display device 204 is in the display state, and the display content is the fourth notification display device 204 when the management result of the game history is displayed. These are the display contents that can be displayed in. By thus allowing the display contents on the fourth notification display device 204 to be duplicated, the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the case where the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, respectively. It is possible not to give any restriction to the display contents of. Even if the display contents on the fourth notification display device 204 are duplicated as described above, if the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, the first to third notification display devices are displayed. Since 201 to 203 are in the non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the management result of the game history is displayed, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. As a result, the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are clearly different between when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed. It becomes possible.

When the management result of the game history is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in the non-display state even when the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is changed. .. As a result, it is possible to specify the game history management result regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are confirmed in the situation where the game history management result is displayed. In addition, regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are confirmed, the game history management result is displayed and the set value can be changed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to specify which of the corresponding displays is being performed.

When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, only one of the fourth notification display devices 204 is in the display state. As a result, it becomes easy to understand whether or not the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is displayed.

In the configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged in the lateral direction, the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is displayed by using only the fourth notification display device 204 arranged at the right end. Done. As a result, it becomes easy to understand whether or not the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is displayed.

When the management result of the game history is displayed, a display corresponding to the type of the management result of the game history to be displayed is performed using the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. Using the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, a display corresponding to the content of the management result of the game history is performed. This makes it easier to understand the management result of the game history. In this case, both the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in which the type of the game history management result is displayed are in the non-display state in the set value changeable state. As a result, the non-display state of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 for displaying the type corresponds to the changeable state of the set value, which corresponds to the changeable state of the set value. It becomes easy to understand that the display is being performed.

Further, when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, not only the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 that display the type of the management result of the game history, but also the game The third annunciation display device 203 in which the content of the history management result is displayed is also in the non-display state. This makes it easy to understand that the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is being performed.

Display data is output from the MPU 62 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, and the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 perform predetermined display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 according to the display data. In the configuration, the display data is stored and held by the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Thereby, even when the execution of the process for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is stopped due to the occurrence of the electric wave detection abnormality or the vibration detection abnormality (in the case of making a positive determination in step S306), It is possible to maintain the display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In addition, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed among the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the targets to be in the non-display state (all extinguished state) are: The display units 201 to 203 are not limited to the third display units 201 to 203, and the first and second display units 201 and 202 may be used. In this case, a predetermined display (for example, a display of "5") different from the content of the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. May be displayed, and a predetermined display (for example, display of "5") different from the content of the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and the third notification is displayed. The display device 203 may display a number corresponding to the current set value. In addition, the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all extinguished state), and the second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a display state. Alternatively, the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in the non-display state (all lights off state), and the second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 are in the display state. The second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all lights off state), and the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 are displayed. The second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a non-display state (all extinguished state), and the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 May be in a display state.

Further, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in the non-display state (all off state). Only the display device 202 may be in the non-display state (all off state), only the third notification display device 203 may be in the non-display state (all off state), and the fourth notification display device. Only 204 may be in a non-display state (all extinguished state).

Further, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be displayed, and only the second notification display device 202 is displayed. The third notification display device 203 alone may be in the display state.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in the set value changeable state are different from those of the eleventh embodiment. The configuration different from the eleventh embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

59A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first notification display device 201, and FIG. 59B is an explanatory diagram for describing the configuration of the second notification display device 202.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), the first notification display device 201 includes seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g is formed in a rod shape and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. The seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g are arranged so that the first notification display device 201 is a so-called seven-segment display.

As shown in FIG. 59B, the second notification display device 202 includes seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is formed in a rod shape and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g are arranged such that the second notification display device 202 is a so-called seven-segment display.

FIG. 60 shows a case where the game history management result is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a case where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changeable. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of a first notification display device 201 and a second notification display device 202 in FIG.

The display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 when displaying the game history management result are the same as in the eleventh embodiment. Therefore, any one of “A”, “E”, “H”, “L”, and “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and “1” to “8” on the second notification display device 202. Is displayed.

In this case, each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g of the first notification display device 201 is "A", "E", "H", "L" in the first notification display device 201. At least one type of display of “O” is a light emission target. In other words, the display segments 201a to 201g that are not the light emission targets are displayed regardless of which of "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O" is displayed on the first notification display device 201. It doesn't exist.

Similarly for the second notification display device 202, each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g of the second notification display device 202 is "1" to "8" in the second notification display device 202. In at least one type of display, the light emission target is displayed. In other words, there is no display segment 202a to 202g that is not the light emission target regardless of which of "1" to "8" is displayed on the second notification display device 202.

In the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in the light emitting state in the first notification display device 201. As described above, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e can be in a light emitting state when the game history management result is displayed on the first notification display device 201. In addition, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in the light emitting state in any case where the game history management result is displayed on the first notification display device 201. On the other hand, among the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g, only the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in the light emitting state. It does not exist when displaying results. Thereby, in the state where the set value can be changed, a display that is not displayed when displaying the game history management result while using the display segments 201b and 201e that can be in a light emitting state when displaying the game history management result The mode can be displayed on the first notification display device 201. Therefore, the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value can be displayed on the first notification display device 201 while also using the display segments 201a to 201g used when displaying the management result of the game history. It will be possible.

In the state in which the set value can be changed, the third display segment 202c in the second notification display device 202 is in the light emitting state. As described above, the third display segment 202c can be in the light emitting state when the game history management result is displayed on the second notification display device 202. On the other hand, among the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g, only the third display segment 202c is in the light emitting state, and the display content of the second notification display device 202 is present when the game history management result is displayed. I haven't. Thereby, in the changeable state of the set value, a display mode is displayed which is not displayed when displaying the management result of the game history while using the display segment 202c which can be in the light emitting state when displaying the management result of the game history. It becomes possible to display it on the second notification display device 202. Therefore, it is possible to cause the second notification display device 202 to perform a display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value while also using the display segments 202a to 202g used when displaying the management result of the game history. It will be possible.

Next, the setting value update processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the start processing of displaying the set values on the first to second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3201). Specifically, regarding the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in the light emitting state, and the other display segments 201a, 201c, 201d, 201f, 201g are in the off state. The following display data is output to the first display IC 205. Further, regarding the second notification display device 202, the display data in which the third display segment 202c is in the light emitting state and the other display segments 202a, 202b, 202d to 202g are in the off state is output to the second display IC 206. As a result, the display for notifying that the pachinko machine 10 is in the changeable state in which the setting state can be changed is started on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202.

Then, the extinguishing process of the third notification display device 203 is executed (step S3202). Specifically, the display data of all “0” is output to the third display IC 207. As a result, all the display segments of the third notification display device 203 are turned off, and the third notification display device 203 is in the non-display state.

After that, "1" is set to the set value counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3203). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. By setting "1" in the set value counter, when the set value updating process is executed, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point.

After that, the display start processing of the set value on the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3204). In the setting value display start processing, display data for displaying “1” is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number “1” corresponding to “Setting 1” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

After that, on condition that the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned off (step S3205: NO), it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When a negative determination is made in step S3206, the process returns to step S3205 and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned off.

When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S3206: YES), the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3207). When the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S3208: YES), "1" is set in the set value counter (step S3209). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, it is updated to the setting value one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", it is set to "setting 1". Will return.

If a negative determination is made in step S3208, or if the process of step S3209 is executed, the display update process of the set value in the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3210). In the display update processing of the set value, the display data for displaying the number corresponding to the value of the set value counter of the main RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process of step S3210, the process returns to step S3205, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off. When the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3205: NO), the processes of step S3206 and subsequent steps are executed again. When the OFF operation is performed (step S3205: YES), display start processing of the management result in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3211).

In the display start process, the management result display start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. Upon receiving the management result display start command, the management CPU 112 executes a process for displaying the first parameter of the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display process (FIG. 55). Accordingly, the display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operation power of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped last time is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The set value can be changed by setting the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 that can be in the light emitting state when the game history management result is displayed to the light emitting state. A display corresponding to the status is made. As a result, in diversifying the display of the game history management result, it is possible to prevent the display contents corresponding to the game history management result from being restricted as much as possible. On the other hand, for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to become the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed. The combination of 202g is a combination that does not exist when the management result of the game history is displayed. Thereby, by grasping the combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are in the light emitting state for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the display of the game history management result It is possible to understand which one of the displays corresponding to the changeable state of the set value and the set value is displayed.

For each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, there are display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are not in a light emitting state even if the game history management results are displayed in all patterns. I haven't. As a result, in diversifying the display corresponding to the management result of the game history, it is possible to prevent the display contents of the management result of the game history from being restricted as much as possible.

When the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed, the third notification display device 203 that is not in the non-display state when displaying the management result of the game history is in the non-display state. As a result, not only the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, but also whether or not the third notification display device 203 is in the non-display state is confirmed. It is possible to clearly specify which of the display of the management result and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the set value is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Note that it is possible to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, and is limited to the configuration in which only one type of display content corresponding to the changeable state is set. Instead, a plurality of types may be set. In this case, the display order of the plurality of types of display content may be predetermined, and the display content to be displayed may be changed according to the display order each time the changeable state is newly executed. Even when there are a plurality of types of display contents corresponding to the changeable state of set values, the display contents are in the light emitting state when the game history management result is displayed. .About.201g, 202a to 202g are displayed, and the display contents are not displayed when the management result of the game history is displayed.

Further, in one of the case of displaying the management result of the game history and the case of displaying corresponding to the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the first and second notification display devices It may be configured such that blinking display is performed in 201 and 202, and display that keeps lighting is performed in the other. In this case, since it is possible for the manager of the game hall to specify which of the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the changeable state, it can be changed depending on whether the display is blinking or lit. The combination of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g which are in the light emitting state in the display corresponding to the possible state may be the combination used when displaying the management result of the game history, and the management of the game history. It may be a combination that is not used when displaying the result. The lighting period and the extinguishing period in the blinking display may be the same in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, or may be completely deviated. The configuration may be such that only part of them overlap.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when an abnormal state occurs in the pachinko machine 10, a display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, which is different from the eleventh embodiment. There is. The configuration different from the eleventh embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the abnormality display area 211 provided in the main RAM 65.

The abnormality display area 211 is an area for storing information on an abnormal state to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The abnormality display area 211 is provided with a plurality of unit areas 211a to 211d. Specifically, the first unit area 211a, the second unit area 211b, the third unit area 211c, and the fourth unit area 211d are provided. It is possible to store information on the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 one by one in each of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d. That is, in the abnormality display area 211, a maximum of four pieces of information on the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 can be stored and held.

Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 63 specifies all the information about the abnormal state that occurs in the pachinko machine 10. For example, when an abnormality relating to the payout of gaming balls (for example, the lower plate 56a is full, the ball in the tank 75 is empty, a payout abnormality by the payout device 76) occurs, the command corresponding to the generated abnormality is the payout CPU 92. From the main CPU 63. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a radio wave detection sensor and a vibration detection sensor (not shown), and when an illegal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor, an abnormal signal corresponding thereto is transmitted to the main CPU 63 to cause an abnormal condition. When the vibration detection sensor detects vibration, an abnormal signal corresponding to the detected vibration is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, the occurrence of disconnection abnormality of these ball detection sensors 42a to 49a is specified based on the fact that normal signals are not transmitted from the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a.

The type of abnormal state specified by the main CPU 63 is larger than the maximum number of abnormal state information that can be stored in the abnormal display area 211. Then, when a large number of abnormal states occur at the same time, it is expected that new abnormal information will occur although the maximum number of abnormal state information is already stored in the abnormal display area 211. On the other hand, for the information on the abnormal state, the storage priority is set in the setting stage of the pachinko machine 10, and in the situation where the maximum number of information on the abnormal state has already been stored in the abnormality display area 211, When an abnormal state occurs in the abnormal state, information of the abnormal state having a high storage priority is left in the abnormal display area 211. As a result, it becomes possible to give priority to the notification of an abnormal state having a high storage priority.

Next, the abnormality setting process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The abnormality setting process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, it is determined whether or not an abnormality display target has occurred (step S3301). The types of the abnormality display target include full filling of the lower plate 56a, no ball of the tank 75, abnormality of the dispensing by the dispensing device 76, abnormality of radio wave detection, abnormality of vibration detection, and disconnection abnormality of each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. The number of types of abnormality display targets is larger than the number of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormality display area 211.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S3301, whether or not the abnormal state information corresponding to the abnormal display target that has occurred this time is already stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211. Is determined (step S3302). If already stored, the abnormal state information corresponding to the abnormal display target that has occurred this time is not stored in the abnormal display area 211. This makes it possible to prevent the same type of abnormal state information from being redundantly stored in the abnormal display area 211.

When a negative determination is made in step S3302, it is determined whether or not the value of the abnormality target counter provided in the main RAM 65 is the maximum value (specifically "4") (step S3303). The abnormality target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of areas in the abnormality display area 211 in which the information on the abnormal state is stored among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d.

When the value of the abnormality target counter is the maximum value (step S3303: YES), priority comparison processing is executed (step S3304). In the priority comparison process, first, the abnormal state information having the lowest storage priority is specified among the abnormal state information stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211. The memory priority is predetermined in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and specifically, the lower tray 56a is full → the ball in the tank 75 is absent → vibration detection abnormality → dispensing abnormality by the dispensing device 76 → ball entry detection sensor 42a. The storage priority increases in the order of disconnection abnormality of 49a to radio wave detection abnormality. In the priority comparison process, one of the abnormal state information having the lowest storage priority stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d and the abnormality display target generated this time has a higher storage priority. It is compared and judged.

If the storage priority of the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is lower (step S3305: NO), the abnormality display area 211 does not store information about the abnormality state that corresponds to the abnormality display target that has occurred this time. Accordingly, in a configuration in which the number of types of abnormality display targets is greater than the number of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormality display area 211, information on an abnormal state having a high storage priority is displayed. It is possible to leave it in the abnormality display area 211.

If the storage priority of the abnormality display target that occurred this time is higher (step S3305: YES), the setting processing of the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3306). In the setting process of the abnormality display area 211 that is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, the unit areas 211a to 211d specified as storing the abnormal state information with the lowest storage priority occur this time. The information about the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display target is overwritten.

On the other hand, when the value of the abnormality target counter in the main RAM 65 has not reached the maximum value (step S3303: NO), the value of the abnormality target counter is incremented by 1 (step S3307), and then the abnormality display area 211 is set. Is executed (step S3306). In the setting process, one area is selected from the unit areas 211a to 211d in which the abnormal state information is not stored in the abnormal display area 211, and the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display target that has occurred this time in the selected area is selected. Stores the information of.

In step S3306, if only one piece of abnormal state information is stored in the abnormal display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a. If there is a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information stored in the above, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area having the smallest value of "n" in the nth unit areas 211a to 211b.

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an abnormal display target release event has occurred (step S3308). For example, whether or not a command indicating that the lower tray 56a is full, that the tank 75 is empty, or that the dispensing abnormality by the dispensing device 76 has been released is received from the dispensing side CPU 92. judge. In addition, whether or not the abnormality release operation for the occurrence of radio wave detection abnormality has been performed, whether the abnormality release operation for the occurrence of vibration detection abnormality has been performed, or whether the abnormality release operation for the occurrence of disconnection abnormality has been performed. judge.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S3308, an erasing process of the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3309). In the erasing process, it is specified whether or not the information on the abnormal state corresponding to the abnormal display target that is the current cancellation target is stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormal display area 211. If it is stored, the stored area is cleared to "0" to erase the information on the abnormal state. In this case, if only one piece of abnormal state information is stored in the abnormal display area 211 after erasing, the information of the abnormal state is stored in the first unit area 211a, and after erasing, the abnormal state information is stored. When there are a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information stored in the display area 211, the pieces of abnormal state information are stored in order from the area having the smallest “n” value in the nth unit areas 211a to 211b. Also, the value of the abnormality target counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3310).

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an operation to start displaying an abnormality has occurred (step S3311). The start operation of the abnormality display is such that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed and the game machine main body 12 is opened to the front with respect to the outer frame 11 in a non-changeable state, and the update button 68b is pressed. It is done by operating.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3311, it is determined whether one or more pieces of abnormal state information are stored in the abnormal display area 211 (step S3312). If the information on the abnormal state is not stored, the abnormal display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not started. This makes it possible to prevent the abnormal display from being started even though there is no abnormal state information to be notified.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3312, "1" is set to the abnormality display flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3313). The abnormal display flag stops the display corresponding to the management result of the game history, and displays the display corresponding to the abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the situation is to be performed in. Even if the abnormality display start operation is performed in a situation where the abnormality display flag is already set to "1", a negative determination is made in step S3311.

After that, the management result display stop setting process is executed (step S3314). In the cancellation setting process, a display cancellation command is transmitted to the management-side CPU 112 to temporarily cancel the update of the display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Upon receiving the display stop command, the management-side CPU 112 stops the display process (FIG. 55). However, the management-side CPU 112 does not set the display data to be the data of all “0” in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 even if the display stop command is received. Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the display of the management result of the game history at that time is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an operation for ending the abnormality display has occurred (step S3315). The operation of ending the abnormal display is performed by pressing the reset button 68c in a state where the gaming machine main body 12 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changeable. It is done by operating. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3315, the abnormal display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3316). Even if the operation of ending the abnormal display is performed in a situation where the value of the abnormal display flag is "0", a negative determination is made in step S3315.

After that, the cancellation release process of displaying the management result is executed (step S3317). In the cancellation cancellation process, the cancellation cancellation command is transmitted to the management-side CPU 112 so that the update of the display of the management result of the game history on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is canceled. To release. The management CPU 112 resumes the execution of the display process (FIG. 55) by receiving the cancellation cancel command. However, the management-side CPU 112 does not set the display data, which is the data of all “0”, in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 even if the cancel release command is received. Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the management CPU 112 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the abnormal display at that time is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, the management side CPU 112 continues to store history information and calculate various parameters even in a situation where the update of the display of the game history management result is stopped, and the result of calculating various parameters is calculated. It is stored in the result memory 131. Therefore, when the update of the display of the management result of the game history is canceled, the display of the latest management result of the game history is immediately displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It will be restarted.

In the abnormality setting process, if "1" is set in the abnormality display flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3318: YES), the abnormality display process is executed (step S3319). FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the abnormality display processing.

First, the extinguishing process of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3401). Specifically, the display data that is all “0” is output to the first and second display ICs 205 and 206. As a result, all the display segments of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off, and the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are hidden.

After that, the value of the update timing counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3402). The update timing counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is the time to update the display content of the abnormality display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. If the value of the update timing counter is already "0", that state is maintained. After that, by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter is “0”, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 ( Step S3403).

If an affirmative decision is made in step S3403, update processing of the display target counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S3404). In the update processing, if the current abnormal display processing has been performed for the first time since the abnormal display flag of the main RAM 65 was set to "1" this time, the display target counter is set to "0". The value of the display target counter corresponds to the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211, and specifically, the value of "0" of the display target counter corresponds to the first unit area 211a. The display target counter “1” value corresponds to the second unit area 211b, the display target counter “2” value corresponds to the third unit area 211c, and the display target counter “3”. The value of “” corresponds to the fourth unit area 211d. In the update processing, the value of the display target counter is incremented by 1 if this is not the first processing time of the abnormality display processing after the abnormality display flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1".

After that, it is determined whether or not the information of the abnormal state is stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d (step S3405). Here, as described above, when only one piece of abnormal state information is stored, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and a plurality of abnormal state information is stored. In this case, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area having the smallest “n” value in the nth unit areas 211a to 211b. Therefore, when the abnormal state information is not stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter, the abnormal state information is also stored in the area corresponding to the value larger than the value of the display target counter. There will be no. Further, when the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value “3”, since the corresponding area does not exist in the first place, the information on the abnormal state is treated as not stored. ..

If an affirmative decision is made in step S3405, the value of the display target counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3406). Here, it is assumed that all the abnormal states that are the targets of the abnormal display are canceled in the situation where the abnormal display is being performed. In this case, even if the abnormal display process is executed, the abnormal display area 211 does not store the abnormal state information. In such a situation, a display indicating that the information on the abnormal state is not stored is displayed on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204.

If a negative determination is made in step S3405, or if the processing of step S3406 is executed, display data of the display target corresponding to the value of the display target counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S3407). Specifically, the information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter of the main RAM 65 among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211 is read. Then, the display data corresponding to the information is read from the main ROM 64. The display data is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the abnormal state information, and the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 based on the display data are set for each type of abnormal state information. It's different. There is also display data corresponding to the absence of abnormal state information, and this display data is different from the display data corresponding to the abnormal state information. Therefore, when the abnormal state information does not exist, the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 have different display contents from those when the abnormal state information exists.

On the other hand, the display content of the display corresponding to the information of the abnormal state on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 and the display content of the display corresponding to the absence of the information of the abnormal state are the third and the third. The display contents when displaying the management result of the game history on the 4th notification display devices 203 and 204 and the display contents of the set value on the 4th notification display device 204 overlap. On the other hand, when displaying the management result of the game history, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the display state, and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. In the state, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state and the fourth notification display device 204 is in the display state, and when the abnormal display is performed, the first and second notification display devices Since 201 and 202 are in the non-display state and the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are in the display state, even if the display contents are duplicated as described above, any situation can be dealt with. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to know whether the display is displayed.

After that, the display of the third notification display device 203 is controlled according to the display data read in step S3407 (step S3408), and the display control of the fourth notification display device 204 is controlled (step S3409). In this case, the third annunciator display device 203 and the fourth annunciator display device 203 are used regardless of whether the information corresponding to the abnormal state information is displayed or the information corresponding to the absence of the abnormal state information is displayed. None of the display devices 204 are in the non-display state (that is, are not in the all-off state), and are in some display state.

After that, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the main RAM 65 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S3410).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

In the configuration in which the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is done. As a result, it becomes possible to use the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 not only for displaying the management result of the game history but also as a display device for performing a display corresponding to the abnormal state.

In the case where the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are caused to perform the display corresponding to the abnormal condition when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the abnormal condition, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 A display corresponding to that no abnormal condition has occurred is displayed. This makes it possible to clearly specify whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in an abnormal state by checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The period corresponding to the period in which the game history management result is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is distinguished from the period during which it is opened. Accordingly, by grasping the situation in which the display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, which display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to specify whether or not there is.

When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 have different display modes from the display mode when the game history management result is displayed. Display controlled. Accordingly, by grasping the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to identify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible.

A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. As a result, a wide variety of displays can be performed as displays corresponding to the game history management results. In addition, due to the presence of the plurality of display devices 201 to 204 for notification, the display mode is large when the management result of the game history is displayed and when the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It is possible to make a difference.

When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 that are not in the non-display state when displaying the game history management result are in the non-display state. Thereby, the display of the management result of the game history and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 are performed only by confirming whether or not the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly specify which one of them is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are in the display state, and the display content is the third when the game history management result is displayed. , Display contents that can be displayed on the fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. In this way, the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are allowed to overlap with each other, so that the case where the management result of the game history is displayed and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. It is possible not to give a restriction to each display content when it is performed. Further, even if the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 may overlap as described above, when the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first, first Since the second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In addition, when the operation for starting the abnormality display is performed in a situation where the information on the abnormal state is not stored in the abnormality display area 211, the information on the abnormal state is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time. May be configured to be displayed corresponding to the fact that is not stored.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management output processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the management start flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3501). The management start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the history information should be stored in the history memory 117. In this embodiment, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started) is the management start criterion. If the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or larger than the management start reference value, the history information is not stored in the memory 117 for history until the number becomes equal to or more than the value. The storage of history information in the history memory 117 is started. When the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, for example, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping. In that case, the game ball is trimmed in each ball entrance portion and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes the management start reference value or more. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the result of entering the ball during the above-described operation check from being stored as history information.

When a negative determination is made in step S3501, "7" is set to the start time management counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3502). The start-time management counter indicates which of the seven ball-entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is in the situation in which the detection state of the game ball is specified in the situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify.

Then, it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the start time management counter is set to "1" (step S3503). Specifically, when the value of the start time management counter is "7" and it corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first output flag. If the value of the start time management counter is "6" and it corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second output flag, and the start time management is performed. When the value of the counter is "5" and corresponds to the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third output flag, and the value of the start-time management counter is When the value is "4" and corresponds to the special electric power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", and the value of the start-time management counter is "3" and the first When it corresponds to the working port detection sensor 46a, it is determined whether or not the fifth output flag is set to "1", and the value of the start time management counter is "2" and the second working port detection sensor is detected. If it corresponds to 47a, it is judged whether or not "1" is set in the sixth output flag, and if the value of the start management counter is "1" and it corresponds to the outlet 24a. Determines whether the seventh output flag is set to "1". As described above, the first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball detection process (FIG. 15).

If an affirmative decision is made in step S3503, the output flag corresponding to the value of the start-time management counter is cleared to "0" (step S3504). After that, the value of the discharged number counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3505). The discharge number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where “1” is not set in the management start flag of the main RAM 65.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the discharged number counter is equal to or larger than the management start reference value (step S3506). Although the management start reference value is set to "300", the present invention is not limited to this, and the number may be smaller than "300" or may be larger than "300". ..

When a negative determination is made in step S3503 or when a negative determination is made in step S3506, the value of the start-time management counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3507). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start management counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3508). When a negative determination is made in step S3508, the process returns to step S3503, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S3508, the output process for management is directly ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the discharge number counter of the main RAM 65 is equal to or larger than the management start reference value (step S3506: YES), the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3509). After that, the management process is executed (step S3510). Also, when the management start flag is set to "1" and an affirmative judgment is made in step S3501, the management process is executed (step S3510). The processing content of the management process is the same as steps S1001 to S1012 of the management output process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is managed after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started). The history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the number of game balls is equal to or larger than the start reference value, and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or larger than the management start reference value. In this case, the storage of history information in the history memory 117 is started. When the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, for example, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping. In that case, the game ball is trimmed in each ball entrance portion and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes the management start reference value or more. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the result of entering the ball during the above-described operation check from being stored as history information.

Here, for history until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started becomes equal to or more than the number corresponding to the management start reference value. In the configuration in which the history information is not stored in the memory 117, the management result of the game history during that period cannot be calculated. Therefore, in such a situation, the display corresponding to the situation may be performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. For example, all the display segments in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be in a light emitting state. Since the display content is not displayed either when the management result of the game history is displayed or when it is displayed that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changeable, By checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, it is possible to specify whether or not the history information is not stored as described above.

Note that the setting mode of the information of the management start flag of the main RAM 65 differs depending on whether or not the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the start of supplying the operating power to the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured to. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a main process in the another mode executed by the main CPU 63. In steps S3601 to S3609, the same processing as steps S101 to S109 of the main processing in the first embodiment (FIG. 9) is executed, and in steps S3611 to S3620, the main processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. The same processing as steps S110 to S119 of 9) is executed. On the other hand, in this another embodiment, when the affirmative determination is made in step S3608, the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S3610), and the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is executed after executing the processing of step S3620. Is set to "1" (step S3621). According to the configuration, when the process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not executed, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. The history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until is greater than or equal to the management start reference value, and when a process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, History information is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of the number of discharged game balls after the start of supplying the operating power. As a result, in a situation where it is highly unlikely that the operation check at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 is likely to occur, it becomes possible to manage the game history immediately after the start of supplying the operating power to the pachinko machine 10.

Further, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or larger than the management start reference value after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. Instead of the non-history structure, an area for storing history information may be provided separately from the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls exceeds a management start reference value. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the management result of the game history in the situation.

Further, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. As a condition under which a situation does not exist, a configuration may be added in which a condition that the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where history information is not stored in the history memory 117 is added. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where history information has already been stored in the history memory 117, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is the management start criterion. The history information is stored in the history memory 117 from the beginning regardless of whether the value is greater than or equal to the value.

Further, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. In addition to or instead of the non-existing configuration, when an abnormal state such as a radio wave detection abnormality or a vibration detection abnormality occurs, the history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 until the abnormal state is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent history information from being stored for an event that occurred in an abnormal situation.

Further, the history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. In addition to or instead of the non-existent configuration, history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 when the gaming machine body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open. This makes it possible to prevent history information from being stored for an event that occurred in a situation where the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the execution subject of the process for managing the game history is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Although the MPU 62 is provided with the management IC 66 in the first embodiment, the MPU 62 is not provided with the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. Instead of the management IC 66 being provided, in the present embodiment, processing for managing the game history is executed by the main CPU 63. Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes various controls by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control. Specifically, the control relating to the management of the game history is the non-specific control, and the control other than the non-specific control including the control for advancing the game based on the game operation by the player is the specific control.

Regarding the specific control in detail, all the control by the main process (FIG. 9) executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started is included in the specific control. In the present embodiment, the recognition process (step S111), the data output process (step S112), and the set value update signal output process (step S119) in the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are performed. Not executed Further, even in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing is executed periodically so as to interrupt the processing of steps S113 to S116 in the main processing (FIG. 9). Of these, all the processes other than the management process described later are included in the specific control. Part of the management process is also included in the specific control.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of programs and data in the main ROM 64. Corresponding to the fact that the control executed by the main CPU 63 is distinguished between the specific control and the non-specific control, as shown in FIG. 67, the main ROM 64 also has a specific control program and a specific control program. The addresses of the areas in which the data and the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are stored are clearly distinguished.

Specifically, the programs for specific control are collectively stored in the area of each continuous address within the range of addresses X(1) to X(k+2). Further, the addresses X(k+3) to X(k+5) that are consecutive to the addresses X(1) to X(k+2) are addresses of an unused area in which no data is stored, and the address X( Data for specific control is collectively stored in the area of each continuous address within the range of k+6) to X(m+2). Further, the addresses X(m+3) to X(m+5) which are consecutive to the addresses X(k+6) to X(m+2) are addresses of an unused area in which no data is stored, and the address X( Programs for non-specific control are collectively stored in the area of each continuous address in the range of m+6) to X(n+2). Further, the addresses X(n+3) to X(n+5) that are continuous with the addresses X(m+6) to X(n+2) are addresses of an unused area in which no data is stored, and the address X(n The data for non-specific control are collectively stored in the area of each continuous address within the range of (n+6) to X(p+2). The relationship between the program and data and the address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main ROM 64 and the logical address on the memory map recognized by the main CPU 63.

As described above, the program for specific control and the data for specific control, the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control, regardless of the execution order of the process for executing the corresponding control, Since the addresses are stored in the areas of different ranges, for example, when checking only the program for specific control and the data for specific control, the address where the program for specific control and the data for specific control are stored Only the area of the range needs to be checked. For example, when checking only the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control, the address where the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control are stored. You only have to check the area of the range. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently perform the work when the program and the data are checked by distinguishing between the specific control and the non-specific control. In addition, accordingly, it is possible to efficiently perform the work when the program and the data are modified by distinguishing between the specific control and the non-specific control.

No data is stored between the address range of the area storing the program for specific control and the data for specific control and the address range of the area storing the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control By setting the address range of the unused area which is not set, the boundary between the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control can be easily grasped at the time of checking work.

In each of the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control, programs and data are stored in areas with different range of addresses, regardless of the execution order of the processing for executing the corresponding control. By doing so, it becomes possible to efficiently carry out the work in the case where the program and the data are distinguished and checked. Further, since the address range of the unused area where no data is stored is set between the address range of the area where the program is stored and the address range of the area where the data is stored, It becomes easy to understand the boundary between the address range and the address range of the data when checking.

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of each area in the main RAM 65. Corresponding to the fact that the control executed by the main CPU 63 is distinguished between specific control and non-specific control, as shown in FIG. 68, the main RAM 65 also has a work area 221 for specific control and a specific control. A clear distinction is made between the address range of the stack area 222 for non-specific control and the address range of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Specifically, the area of each successive address within the range of addresses Y(1) to Y(r+2) is set as the work area 221 for specific control. Further, the addresses Y(r+3) to Y(r+5) that are continuous with the addresses Y(1) to Y(r+2) are the addresses of the unused areas, and the addresses Y(r+6) to Y(s+2) follow thereafter. The area of each successive address within the range of () is set as a stack area 222 for specific control. Addresses Y(s+3) to Y(s+5), which are continuous with addresses Y(r+6) to Y(s+2), are addresses of unused areas, and are followed by addresses Y(s+6) to Y(t+2). The area of each consecutive address within the range of () is set as the work area 223 for non-specific control. Further, addresses Y(t+3) to Y(t+5) consecutive to the addresses Y(s+6) to Y(t+2) are addresses of unused areas, and subsequently, addresses Y(t+6) to Y(u+2). The area of each continuous address within the range of () is set as the stack area 224 for non-specific control. The relationship between each area and the address as described above is set in both the physical address in the main RAM 65 and the logical address on the memory map recognized by the main CPU 63.

When the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control are set separately as described above, the main CPU 63 executes the specific control and the non-specific control is executed. Thus, different areas of the main RAM 65 are used when various calculations are executed. As a result, when one of the specific control and the non-specific control is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the event that the information in the main RAM 65 required by the other is erased. Incidentally, when writing information to each work area 221, 223 and reading information from each work area 221, 223, the main CPU 63 issues a load instruction.

Since the stack area 222 for the specific control and the stack area 224 for the non-specific control are set separately, the main CPU 63 performs the specific control and the non-specific control mainly. Different areas of the main RAM 65 are used when the information stored in the register of the side CPU 63 is saved and when the information of the return address on the program is stored. As a result, when one of the specific control and the non-specific control is executed, the information stored in the register of the main CPU 63 is saved, and the information of the return address on the program is stored, the other is used. It is possible to make it difficult for an event such as the deletion of the stored information to occur. By the way, when writing information to the stack areas 222 and 224, the main CPU 63 issues a push instruction, and when reading information from each stack area 222 and 224, a main CPU 63 issues a pop instruction. Further, when reading information from the stack areas 222 and 224, the writing order to the stack areas 222 and 224 is to be read first after the later information.

Here, when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, and It is possible to read information from the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Information cannot be written to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control from being accidentally erased in the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed.

Further, when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. At the same time, it is possible to read information from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. It is impossible to write information to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control from being accidentally erased in the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed.

The backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the non-specific control Are supplied to all of the work area 223 for stacking and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. As a result, the information stored in the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224 is turned off by the pachinko machine 10. Even after that, the data is retained while the backup power is being supplied.

Next, the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Similar to the first embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) in a situation where the processes of steps S113 to S116 are executed in the main process (FIG. 9). The program corresponding to the timer interrupt processing is set to the program for specific control.

In steps S3701 to S3718, the same processing as steps S301 to S318 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment is executed. These processes are executed in the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data. In step S3719 in the timer interrupt processing, management processing is executed. When the management process is executed, the subroutine program corresponding to the management process set in the specific control program is executed. The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process in is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the management process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the program returns to the timer interrupt processing program indicated by the return address.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the management process. The processes of steps S3801 to S3805 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) (step S3801). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is the process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the later-described management execution process which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

After that, as "PUSH PSW", the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command (step S3802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of an arithmetic instruction, a rotate instruction, an input/output instruction, and the like. By saving the information in the flag register before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process is started, the information in the flag register in the state before the call of the subroutine and the state before the change of the subroutine is changed is saved. It is possible to save it in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information amount of the flag register is 1 byte.

After that, the management execution process is started by reading the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S3803). In this case, the information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the management execution process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

When returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, the flag register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S3802 by the pop command as “POP PSW” is used as the main CPU 63. The flag register is reset (step S3804). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S3802 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

After that, the interrupt permission is set to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which the generation is permitted (step S3805). This allows new execution of timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the management execution process. The processes of steps S3901 to S3915 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

First, as "LDSP, Y(u+2)", a load instruction sets Y(u+2) as a fixed address at the start of the non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 (step S3901). The stack pointer is an area in which information on an address for specifying, in the stack areas 222 and 224, a storage area to which information is to be written by a push command is specified by the main CPU 63. Each time a push instruction is performed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time a pop instruction is issued, the stack pointer information is written in the previous order. The information of the address of the storage area is updated. When the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and every time the information to be stored is added. Further, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S3901, the information of the last address in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer. As described above, the information is stored from the storage area of the last address to the storage area of the first address also in the stack area 222 for specific control.

By the way, regarding both the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, when the push command is additionally executed despite the information being set in all the storage areas, All areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to "0" as an abnormality has occurred in the storage process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding as it is even though an abnormality occurs in the storage process.

After that, as "LD (_WABUF), WA", the information of the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the WA buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3902). Further, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the load instruction saves the information in the BC register of the main CPU 63 to the BC buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S3903). Further, as "LD (_DEBUF), DE", the information of the DE register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the DE buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3904). Also, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", the load instruction saves the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 to the HL buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S3905). Further, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", the load instruction saves the information of the IX register of the main CPU 63 to the IX buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S3906). Further, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", the load instruction saves the information of the IY register of the main CPU 63 to the IY buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S3907).

In the registers of the main CPU 63, there are various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag registers already described. In this case, in steps S3902 to S3907, information of each of the general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, which are some of the registers, WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register. Are saved in the corresponding buffer in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register each have an information amount of 2 bytes.

The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S3908) corresponding to the non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers in the work area 223 for non-specific control prior to executing the check process (step S3908), the information in these registers used in the specific control is controlled by non-specific control. It is possible to evacuate before the start of. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten in the non-specific control, the information saved in the work area 223 for the non-specific control is restored to these registers when the non-specific control is finished, so that the states of these registers can be restored. Can be returned to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

Further, instead of saving all information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA to be used in the check process corresponding to the non-specific control is used. Register information is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control by selectively saving information in the register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to the work area 223 for non-specific control. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the capacity to be secured. Therefore, it is possible to save the information in the register as described above while securing a large capacity of the work area 223 for non-specific control that can be used in the check processing. Of course, various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main CPU 63 other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are compatible with non-specific control. The information set before the processing to be performed is stored and held until the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the processing corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

Further, the register information is not saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 but is saved in the non-specific control work area 223, so that the capacity of the non-specific control stack area 224 can be reduced to that extent. It will be possible. Further, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the writing order of information is read first from the later information as described above. Therefore, the reading order of information is displaced due to some noise or the like. If this happens, all subsequent read order information will be restored to a different register. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the information in the register in the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above event from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. ..

After executing the processes of steps S3902 to S3907, the check process is executed (step S3908). When executing the check processing, the subroutine program corresponding to the check processing set in the non-specific control program is executed. Information for specifying the return address of the execution process is written in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the push command. When the check processing is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the program returns to the management execution processing program indicated by the return address. Details of the check processing will be described later.

After executing the check process, Y(r+α) is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as a fixed address at the time of returning to the specific control by a load instruction as “LDSP, Y(r+α)” (step S3909). ). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

The amount of information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control is always constant immediately before the subroutine of the management execution processing is executed in step S3803 of the management processing (FIG. 70), and accordingly, the main amount at the timing The information of the stack pointer of the side CPU 63 (that is, the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, as the information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control, for example, information on the return address of the management process (FIG. 70) after the management execution process (FIG. 71) is completed and the management process ( Information on the return address of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) after the end of FIG. 70) can be given. The constant information of the stack pointer is Y(r+α). Therefore, when the check process, which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control, ends and the process returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, Y(r+α), which is the certain information, is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63. As a result, the information of the stack pointer can be restored to the information immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. By setting the fixed information in the stack pointer in this way to restore the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is performed. It is not necessary to save the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65 before starting. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load, and it is not necessary to secure an area for saving in the main RAM 65.

After that, the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LD WA, (_WABUF)" (step S3910). Further, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3911). Further, the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)" (step S3912). Further, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the load instruction overwrites the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control in the HL register of the main CPU 63 (step S3913). Further, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3914). Further, as "LDIY, (_IYBUF)", the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S3915). By executing the processing of step S3910 to step S3915, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. It is possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before.

Here, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed is not saved in the main RAM 65 when the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted. .. As a result, there is no need to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222.

Further, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the information stored in the flag register and the various registers of the main CPU 63 has the processing corresponding to the non-specific control after returning to the processing corresponding to the specific control. This information is not used when restarted. That is, the information necessary for a plurality of processing times of the processing corresponding to the non-specific control executed with the processing corresponding to the specific control interposed therebetween is the work area 223 for the non-specific control or the stack area for the non-specific control. 224, and is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 is not saved in the main RAM 65 when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is not performed. Does not cause any problems.

Next, the check processing executed by calling the program of the subroutine in step S3908 will be described. In the check process, a process for collecting information on the game history, a process for deriving a game history management result, and a process for notifying the management result are executed. That is, the processing for collecting the information of the game history, the processing for deriving the management result of the game history, and the processing for notifying the management result are executed as the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

Prior to the description of the check process, the contents of various areas 231 to 234 of the non-specific control work area 223 used for managing the game history will be described. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas 231 to 234 of the work area 223 for non-specific control used for managing the game history.

The work area 223 for non-specific control is provided with a normal counter area 231, an opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and a high frequency support mode counter area 233. In each of these areas 231-233, general prize winning counters 231a, 232a, 233a, special electric prize winning counters 231b, 232b, 233b, first operation counters 231c, 232c, 233c, second operation counters 231d, 232d, 233d, and Out counters 231e, 232e, 233e are provided. The general payout counters 231a, 232a, 233a are counters for measuring the number of game balls entered into the general payout opening 31 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The special electric prize winning counters 231b, 232b, 233b are counters for measuring the number of game balls entered into the special electric prize winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The first operation counters 231c, 232c, 233c are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The second operation counters 231d, 232d, 233d are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The out counters 231e, 232e, 233e are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start trigger.

Each of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 is a target ball entry portion 24a in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and is neither the open/close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode. It is used to count the number of game balls that enter 31 to 34. Each of the counters 232a to 232e in the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232 enters the target ball-in portion 24a, 31 to 34 in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening/closing execution mode is in effect. It is used to count the number of game balls played. The counters 233a to 233e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are the target ball-in portions 24a, 31 to 34 in the high-frequency support mode in which the front door frame 14 is closed. It is used to measure the number of game balls that enter the ball.

In addition, the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is out of the measurement target because the game balls enter the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 with the front door frame 14 open. This is because the number of entered balls in the case of being excluded is excluded from the measurement target. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state may be a measurement target similarly to the situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state.

The work area 223 for non-specific control is provided with a calculation result storage area 234 in addition to the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233. The calculation result storage area 234 is an area for storing information on the management result of the game history calculated by using the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233. .. The information on the management result of the game history stored in the calculation result storage area 234 is stored and held until the information on the management result of the game history is newly calculated and the newly calculated information is overwritten.

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the check processing executed by calling the program of the subroutine in step S3908. The processes of steps S4001 to S4008 in the check process, including the process of the subroutine, are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data. When executing the processing of the subroutine, the information of the return address after the execution of the processing of the subroutine is written in the storage area corresponding to the current value of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. At the same time, the value of the stack pointer is updated to the address information of the storage area to be stored in the next order. When the processing of the subroutine is completed, the information of the return address is read from the storage area corresponding to the value of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63, which corresponds to the value of the previous order, and the information of the return address is corresponded to. While returning to the program, the value of the stack pointer is updated to the information of the address of the storage area from which the information of the return address is read.

In the check process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S4001: YES), a normal ball entry management process (step S4004), a ball entry management process in the opening/closing execution mode (step S4005), and a high frequency. The result calculation process (step S4007) and the display process (step S4008), which will be described later, are executed without executing any of the entry management process (step S4006) in the support mode. Since the game area PA is formed by the space defined by the back surface of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24, the front door frame 14 is opened. Even if the game area PA is opened toward the front and the game ball is shot toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball cannot normally flow down the game area PA. Further, when the game balls enter the ball entrance portions 24a, 31 to 34 in a state where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the game hall manager may perform maintenance or trouble elimination. This is a case where the front door frame 14 is opened and the game balls enter due to maintenance or the like. Since such a game ball entry is not a game ball entry in a normal game execution situation, it is not necessary to manage such a game ball entry. Therefore, in the check processing, if the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processing in steps S4004 to S4006 is executed.

When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is neither in the open/close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode (step S4001 to step S4003: NO), a normal entrance management process is executed (step S4004). If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the open/close execution mode (step S4001: NO, step S4002: YES), the entrance management process in the open/close execution mode is executed (step S4005). If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the high frequency support mode (step S4001: NO, step S4003: YES), the entrance management process in the high frequency support mode is executed (step S4006).

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the normal entrance management process in step S4004.

When it is determined that one gaming ball is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a (step S4101: YES), that is, the signal received from the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is switched from LOW level to HI level. When it is confirmed that it has been changed, when it is determined that one gaming ball is detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a (step S4103: YES), that is, the signal received from the second winning hole detection sensor 43a. Is confirmed to have switched from the LOW level to the HI level, or when it is determined that one gaming ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a (step S4105: YES), that is, the third winning opening. When it is confirmed that the signal received from the detection sensor 44a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the value of the normal general winning award counter 231a is incremented by 1 (step S4102, step S4104, step S4106).

In addition, in the case of the entrance management process in the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the general winning counter 232a for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to steps S4102, S4104 and S4106, and the winning in the high frequency support mode is performed. In the case of ball management processing, the value of the general winning counter 233a for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as the processing corresponding to steps S4102, S4104 and S4106. In addition, in the ball detection processing (step S3709) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) executed as the processing corresponding to the specific control, the detection results of the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a are monitored, and When it is determined that one of the game balls is detected by any of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a, a process for paying out the number of gaming balls corresponding to the general winning opening 31 To execute.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S4107: YES), that is, it is confirmed that the signal received from the special electric detection sensor 45a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, the value of the special electric prize winning counter 231b for normal is incremented by 1 (step S4108).

In the case of the entrance management process in the high frequency support mode, the value of the special electricity prize counter 232b for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S4108 in the case of the entrance management process in the open/close execution mode. As the process corresponding to step S4108, 1 is added to the value of the special electric prize winning counter 233b for the high frequency support mode. Further, the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 45a is also monitored in the incoming ball detection processing (step S3709) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) executed as the processing corresponding to the specific control, and one electric power detection sensor 45a detects one electric power. When it is determined that a game ball has been detected, a process for causing the number of game balls corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32 to be paid out is executed, and a process for specifying the end timing of the round game is executed.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first working opening detection sensor 46a (step S4109: YES), that is, the signal received from the first working opening detection sensor 46a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If it is confirmed that the value has been changed, the value of the normal first operation counter 231c is incremented by 1 (step S4110).

In the case of the entrance management process in the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the first operation counter 232c for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S4110, and the entrance management process is in the high frequency support mode. For example, as the process corresponding to step S4110, 1 is added to the value of the first operation counter 233c for the high frequency support mode. Further, the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is also monitored in the entrance detection processing (step S3709) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) executed as the processing corresponding to the specific control, and the first working opening detection sensor is detected. When it is determined that one game ball is detected at 46a, a process for paying out the number of game balls corresponding to the first operating port 33 is executed and the pending information for special figures is acquired. Execute the process to identify the trigger.

When it is determined that the one game ball is detected by the second working opening detection sensor 47a (step S4111: YES), that is, the signal received from the second working opening detection sensor 47a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If it is confirmed that the value has been changed, the value of the normal second operation counter 231d is incremented by 1 (step S4112).

In the case of the entrance management process in the open/close execution mode, the value of the second operation counter 232d for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S4112, and the entrance management process is in the high frequency support mode. For example, as the processing corresponding to step S4112, the value of the second operation counter 233d for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1. Further, the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is also monitored in the entrance detection processing (step S3709) of the timer interruption processing (FIG. 69) executed as the processing corresponding to the specific control, and the second working opening detection sensor is detected. When it is determined that one game ball is detected at 47a, a process for causing the number of game balls corresponding to the second operation port 34 to be paid out is executed, and the pending information for special figures is acquired. Execute the process to identify the trigger.

When it is determined that one gaming ball is detected by the out-mouth detecting sensor 48a (step S4113: YES), that is, the signal received from the out-mouth detecting sensor 48a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If confirmed, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1 (step S4114).

In the case of the entrance management process in the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the out counter 232e for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S4114. As the process corresponding to S4114, 1 is added to the value of the out counter 233e for the high frequency support mode. Further, in the entrance detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as the process corresponding to the specific control, the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is not monitored.

By performing the processing of step S4004 to step S4006 as described above, the number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 is measured by using the general prize counters 231a, 232a, 233a, and the special prize winning device 32. The number of game balls entering the game ball is measured using the special electric prize winning counters 231b, 232b, 233b, and the number of game ball entering the first working port 33 is measured using the first working counters 231c, 232c, 233c. Is measured by using the second operation counters 231d, 232d, 233d, and the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 is measured by using the second operation counters 231d, 232d, 233d. It is measured using 232e and 233e. As a result, it becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp the entry history into each entry portion 24a, 31 to 34. In addition, since the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are separately provided, it is possible that neither the open-close execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode is present. It is possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp the entry history into each entry part 24a, 31 to 34 by distinguishing between the open/close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of the check process (FIG. 73 ), if an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, the process of step S4004 is executed, the process of step S4005 is executed, or the process of step S4006 is executed, A result calculation process is executed in step S4007, and a display process is executed in step S4008.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the result calculation process of step S4007.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S4201). The management start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the game history collection for calculating the game history management result should be executed. In the present embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured (that is, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the game discharged from the game area PA. Until the total number of balls exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is not collected without collecting the game history for calculating the management result of the game history. When the number becomes greater than or equal to the management start reference value, the game history is collected to calculate the management result of the game history. When the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, for example, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping. In that case, the game ball is trimmed in each ball entrance portion and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, a game for calculating the management result of the game history until the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA after the start of the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 becomes the management start reference value or more. By not allowing the history to be collected, it is possible to prevent the result of entering the ball during the above operation check from being collected as the game history for calculating the management result of the game history. Become.

Here, when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured (that is, the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the value of the management start flag is “0”. Has become. In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e of the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e of the high-frequency support mode counter area 233. Is also "0". On the other hand, in a situation where the value of the management start flag is "1", the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and then the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is supplied in a situation where backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65. When the supply of No. is started, the value of the management start flag remains "1". In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e of the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e of the high-frequency support mode counter area 233. Also, the state before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is maintained. With the above configuration, when the value of the management start flag is "0", the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 and the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232. The values of the counters 233a to 233e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are also "0".

By the way, when the main RAM 65 clearing process is executed in step S105 or step S117 in the main process (FIG. 9), the target of the clearing process is the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack for the specific control. The area 222, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are excluded from the target of the clearing process. As a result, the game hall manager cannot intentionally clear the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0".

Further, the main CPU 63 confirms whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) described later, and the abnormality is generated. When it is confirmed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to “0”. This makes it possible to initialize the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control when an abnormality occurs. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the configuration, the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" without clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0". However, when an abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" without clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0". Good. Further, even if an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the calculation result storage area 234 may be excluded from the target of clearing "0".

When a negative determination is made in step S4201, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are determined. The total number is calculated by summing all the values of the counters 233a to 233e (step S4202). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is larger than the management start reference value “300” (step S4203).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, the management start flag of the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S4204). Also, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the counters 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the counters 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to "0". (Step S4205). Thereby, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is started) is the management start reference value. All the game history information collected until the number of games corresponding to the above is exceeded will be erased. Therefore, after the start of the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10, until the total number of the game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the management start reference value, the collection of the game history for calculating the management result of the game history. It becomes possible not to execute.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S4201, the calculation processing of the total number is executed as in step S4202 (step S4206). That is, the values of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e of the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e of the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are set. The total number is calculated by summing all. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is equal to or greater than the calculation reference number “6000” (step S4207).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4207, arithmetic processing of various parameters is executed (step S4208). Specifically, the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are set to K61 to K65, the values of the various counters 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232 are set to K71 to K75, and the high frequency support mode is used. When the values of the various counters 233a to 233e in the counter area 233 are K81 to K85, the following 61st to 68th parameters are calculated.
-61st parameter: total payout number of game balls ("K61+K71+K81" x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + "K62 + K72 + K82" x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + "K63 + K73 + K83" ”דNumber of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33”+“K64+K74+K84”דNumber of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA ( Ratio of K61+K62+K63+K64+K65+K71+K72+K73+K74+K75+K81+K82+K83+K84+K85) ・The 62nd parameter: the total payout amount of the game balls in the normal time (K61דthe number of prize balls for winning the prize at the general prize hole 31”+K62דthe special prize winning device 32”). × “Number of prize balls for winning in first operating port 33”+K64דNumber of prize balls for winning in second operating port 34”)/Total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in normal time (K61+K62+K63+K64+K65) ) Ratio, 63rd parameter: total payout number of game balls in the opening/closing execution mode (K71 x "number of prize balls for winning in the general winning hole 31" + K72 x "number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32") +K73 x "number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" +K74 x "number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/total of game balls discharged from the game area PA in the opening/closing execution mode Ratio of the number (K71+K72+K73+K74+K75) ・The 64th parameter: Total payout number of game balls in the high-frequency support mode (K81 x "number of prize balls for winning at general winning a prize hole 31" + K82 x "winning to special electric prize winning device 32") "Number of prize balls" + K83 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K84 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/is discharged from the game area PA in the high-frequency support mode percentage - 65 parameters of the total number of playing balls (K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85): percentage of the total number of general total ball entrance number of game balls to winning hole 31 (K61 + K71 + K81) / game region game ball discharged from PA (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K75 + K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) -66th parameter: the total number of entered game balls into the first operating port 33 (K63 + K7 3+K83)/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K61+K62+K63+K64+K65+K71+K72+K73+K74+K75+K81+K82+K83+K84+K85) 67th parameter: (“K62+K72+K82”דK62+K72+K82” to “K+ special prize winning device 64”) 2) Number of prize balls for winning in the operating port 34)/total number of payouts of game balls ("K61+K71+K81" x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning port 31" + "K62+K72+K82" x "Toward special prize winning device 32" Ratio of the number of prize balls for winning prize+K63+K73+K83×the number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33+K64+K74+K84×the number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34) Parameter: “K62+K72+K82”דnumber of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32”/total number of game balls paid out (“K61+K71+K81”דnumber of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31”+“K62+K72+K82”ד "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric prize winning device 32" + "K63 + K73 + K83" x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + "K64 + K74 + K84" x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" After that, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated in step S4208 are overwritten in the calculation result storage area 234 (step S4209). In this case, the 61st to 68th parameters of the calculation result in the previous processing times, which are already stored in the calculation result storage area 234, are erased. Even when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65. Therefore, if the backup power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, the backup power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. Even immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power, the calculation result storage area 234 stores the information of the 61st to 68th parameters calculated before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

After that, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the counters 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the counters 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to "0". (Step S4210). As a result, when the 61st to 68th parameters are calculated, the information of the game history can be temporarily deleted at that time.

Immediately after the management start flag is set to "1", when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or more than the value obtained by subtracting the management start reference value from the calculation reference number, steps S4208 to The processing of step S4210 may be executed, and thereafter, the processing of steps S4208 to S4210 may be executed when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or larger than the calculation reference number.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the display processing of step S4008 in the check processing (FIG. 73).

First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is decremented by 1 (step S4301). The update timing counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify that the display content of the management result of the game history on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is updated. The main CPU 63 notifies the calculation results of the 61st to 68th parameters by controlling the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In this case, the first notification display device 69a displays information corresponding to the type of parameter to be notified. In addition, among the values obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100, the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed for the third notification. It is displayed on the device 69c. Then, in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the displays corresponding to the calculation results of the 61st to 68th parameters are sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and are the display objects in the final order. After the calculation result of the 68th parameter is displayed, the calculation result of the 61st parameter, which is the display target in the first order, is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds.

Here, the calculation cycle of the 61st to 68th parameters in the main CPU 63 is 60 minutes at the shortest. On the other hand, the number of the 61st to 68th parameters is 8, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds. Therefore, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated by the main CPU 63 are displayed at least once on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

When the process of step S4301 is executed, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are updated by determining whether or not the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0". It is determined whether or not the timing has come (step S4302). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4302, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S4303). When the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "7" (step S4304: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S4305).

The display target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the type of parameter to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the 61st to 68th parameters and the possible values of the display target counters of "0" to "7". For example, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the 61st parameter, which is the first display target, becomes the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the value of the display target counter is “7”. In this case, the 68th parameter, which is the last display target, becomes the display target of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If a negative determination is made in step S4304, or if the processing of step S4305 is executed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. It is controlled (step S4306). Further, the parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the calculation result storage area 234, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and the number corresponding to the tens digit is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. The number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S4307).

Here, a display IC is provided corresponding to each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In step S4306, the main CPU 63 outputs the display data to the display IC corresponding to the first notification display device 69a, and in step S4307 the main CPU 63 displays the display IC corresponding to the second notification display device 69b and the third notification. The display data is output to each of the display ICs corresponding to the display device 69c for display. These display ICs can store and hold display data when operating power is supplied, and display contents corresponding to the stored and held display data are continuously displayed on the corresponding notification display devices 69a to 69c. Display it. Then, by changing the display data by the main CPU 63, the display of the notification display devices 69a to 69c is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. As a result, even after the management execution process (FIG. 71), which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control, is completed and the process corresponding to the specific control is returned to, the execution status of the process corresponding to the non-specific control is set. The display corresponding to the display data will be continued on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

After that, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S4308).

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started by executing the display processing as described above, the game history management result is displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. To be done. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and the main body of the gaming machine 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the main controller 60 is operated from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is performed regardless of whether it is visible. In this way, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is executed regardless of the game situation or the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that the first to third notification display device 69a is executed. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of ~69c.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control and a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control. In the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, a process corresponding to the specific control is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data. While the information can be stored and the information can be read out, the main CPU 63 executes the process corresponding to the non-specific control using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data. In this case, the information can be read but the information cannot be stored. Further, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are capable of storing information and reading information when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed by the main CPU 63. On the other hand, when the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed by the main CPU 63, the information can be read but the information cannot be stored. As a result, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as a dedicated storage area for the process corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area for non-specific control are provided. It is possible to handle 224 as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control. Therefore, the storage destination of information in the main RAM 65 can be clearly different between the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Therefore, when one of the processes corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased.

The process corresponding to the specific control includes a process for controlling the progress of the game, and the process corresponding to the non-specific control includes a process for managing the game history. Then, as described above, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as a dedicated storage area for the processing corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the non-specific control Stack area 224 is treated as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control. Thereby, when executing the process for controlling the progress of the game, information used in the process for managing the game history, for example, the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode It is possible to prevent the information stored in the use counter area 233 and the calculation result storage area 234 from being rewritten.

A normal counter area 231, an opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, a high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and a calculation result storage area 234 in which information for managing a game history is stored are provided in the main RAM 65. This allows the main CPU 63 to complete the processing for managing the game history. Further, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access or unauthorized modification to the information of the game history and the information of various parameters calculated using the information of the game history.

When the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed from the condition in which the process corresponding to the specific control is executed, or when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, various types of main CPU 63 The information in the register is saved in the main RAM 65. Thus, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the various registers of the main CPU 63 from being rewritten when the process corresponding to the specific control is executed. Become. Further, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is ended or after the processing is ended, the information saved in the main RAM 65 is restored to various registers of the main CPU 63. As a result, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, it is possible to execute the process corresponding to the specific control from the state of various registers of the main CPU 63 before the execution of the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Become.

When a situation in which a process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed from a situation in which the process corresponding to the specific control is executed, or when a process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, various registers of the main CPU 63 Information of some of the registers is saved in the main RAM 65. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity necessary for saving the information in the register of the main CPU 63 in the main RAM 65.

When a situation in which a process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed from a situation in which the process corresponding to the specific control is executed, or when a process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, various registers of the main CPU 63 Of the registers, the information of the register that is the storage target of the information in the process corresponding to the non-specific control is saved in the main RAM 65. As a result, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, it is possible to restart the process corresponding to the specific control from the state of the register of the main CPU 63 before the execution of the process corresponding to the non-specific control. In the main RAM 65, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity necessary for saving the information in the register of the main CPU 63.

When the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for the specific control in the process corresponding to the specific control, and the WA register, BC register of the main CPU 63, Each information of the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, it becomes possible to save the information stored in the various registers of the main CPU 63 at a timing preferable for the information, and the processing for saving the information corresponds to the processing corresponding to the specific control and the non-specific control. It becomes possible to distribute and execute by processing.

The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of an arithmetic instruction, a rotate instruction, an input/output instruction, and the like. In this case, the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in the processing corresponding to the specific control before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. This makes it possible to save the information of the flag register in the state before the call of the subroutine corresponding to the non-specific control or the start of the subroutine and before the change in the stack area 222 for the specific control.

The information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is not saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, but is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is possible to keep the capacity of the stack area 224 for specific control small. Further, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the writing order of information is read first from the later information. Therefore, if the reading order of information is deviated due to some noise or the like, it may occur. All subsequent read order information will be restored to a different register. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the information in the register in the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above event from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. ..

The stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is changed from the status where the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed to the status where the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed Information is fixed information, and the information of the stack pointer is not saved in the main RAM 65 at the start of the process corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, it is not necessary to secure a capacity for saving the stack pointer information in the main RAM 65, so that the storage capacity of the main RAM 65 can be suppressed accordingly. Even if the stack pointer information is not saved in this way, when the situation corresponding to the non-specific control is changed from the situation corresponding to the non-specific control to the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed. When the situation in which the corresponding process is executed, the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 becomes fixed information, and thus the process corresponding to the non-specific control can be performed without saving the information on the stack pointer as described above. When finished, it is possible to return to the information of the stack pointer before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

Although the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the specific control when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the information in the flag register may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, the configuration is such that after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the processing corresponding to the specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. The information may be returned to the flag register in a process corresponding to the non-specific control.

In addition, after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started for the information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63, the main processing is performed in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. Although the configuration is such that the information is saved in the side RAM 65, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information in these registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. Further, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to each of the registers in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the return of the information to the register is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the management process executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S4401 to S4405 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S4401). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is the process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the later-described management execution process which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

After that, as "LD (_PSWBUF), PSW", the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the PSW buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by a load instruction (step S4402). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of an arithmetic instruction, a rotate instruction, an input/output instruction, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process is started, the flag register in the state before being changed after the subroutine is called or the subroutine is started is saved. Information can be saved in the work area 221 for specific control.

Thereafter, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program is read to start the management execution process (step S4403). In this case, the information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the management execution process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

When returning to the management processing program after the execution of the management execution processing, a load instruction as "LD PSW, (_PSWBUF)" is executed to save it in the PSW buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S4402. The information in the flag register is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S4404). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S4402 was previously executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

Thereafter, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted, the interrupt permission is set (step S4405). This allows new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 immediately before switching from the specific control to the non-specific control is saved in the specific control work area 221 instead of the specific control stack area 222. As a result, it is possible to save the information in the flag register while suppressing the capacity of the stack area 222 for specific control.

Although the PSW buffer in the work area 221 for specific control is secured as a dedicated area, it is not limited to this and may be a shared area in which other information can be written. That is, it is not necessary to save the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 corresponding to the specific control in the situation where the management processing is not executed. It is also possible to use a shared area that is also used as a PSW buffer when executing arithmetic processing. In this case, the shared area is surely used to save the information in the flag register when the management process is executed. It is necessary to have a configuration in which unnecessary information is written in the shared area.

<17th Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment in the processing configuration of the management execution processing. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the management execution process executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S4501 to S4515 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the non-specific control is started in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as “LD SP, Y(u+2)”. Y(u+2) is set as the fixed address in step S4501.

Thereafter, as "PUSH WA", a push instruction saves the information in the WA register of the main CPU 63 to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S4502). In this case, the information in the WA register is saved in the storage area corresponding to the fixed address set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in step S4501. Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

After that, as "PUSH BC", the push instruction saves the information in the BC register of the main CPU 63 to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S4503). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

After that, as "PUSH DE", the push instruction saves the information in the DE register of the main CPU 63 to the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S4504). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

Thereafter, as "PUSH HL", a push instruction saves the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S4505). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

After that, as "PUSH IX", the push instruction saves the information in the IX register of the main CPU 63 to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S4506). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

Then, as "PUSH IY", a push instruction saves the information in the IY register of the main CPU 63 to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S4507). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

After performing the processes of steps S4502 to S4507, the check process is performed (step S4508). When the check process is executed, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. At the time of executing the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the execution of the check process is provided by the push command with the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Write to the storage area corresponding to the information. When the check process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for identifying the return address, and the program returns to the program of the management execution process indicated by the return address. The content of the check process is the same as that of the fifteenth embodiment.

After that, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 returns to the specific control by the load instruction as “LD SP, Y(r+α)”. Y(r+α) is set as the fixed address in step S4509. The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as the "POP IY", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The IY register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4510). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP IX", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The main CPU 63 overwrites the IX register (step S4511). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP HL", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4512). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP DE", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The DE register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4513). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP BC", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The BC register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4514). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP WA", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information in the previous order with respect to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction is displayed. The WA register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4515). Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

By executing the processing of steps S4510 to S4515, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. It is possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before.

In addition to the flag register, various registers of the main CPU 63 include general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S4502 to S4507, information about each of the general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, which are some of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register. Are saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S4508) corresponding to the non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers in the stack area 224 for non-specific control before executing the check process (step S4508), the information in these registers used in the specific control is controlled by non-specific control. It is possible to evacuate before the start of. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during the non-specific control, the information saved in the stack area 224 for the non-specific control is restored to these registers when the non-specific control is finished, so that the states of these registers can be restored. Can be returned to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

Further, instead of saving all information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the WA to be used in the check process corresponding to the non-specific control is used. Register information is saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by selectively saving information in the register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Therefore, it becomes possible to suppress the capacity to be secured. Therefore, it is possible to save the information in the register as described above while securing a large capacity of the stack area 224 for non-specific control that can be used in the check processing.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment in the processing configuration of the management execution processing. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S4601 to S4605 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the non-specific control is started in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as “LD SP, Y(u+2)”. Y(u+2) is set as the fixed address in (step S4601).

After that, as “LD (_ALLBUF), ALL”, the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the ALL buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S4602). As a result, not only the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register that are used in the check process that is the process corresponding to the non-specific control, but also all other registers are included. The register information is collectively saved in the ALL buffer of the non-specific control work area 223. By thus saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 in the work area 223 for non-specific control, there is no need to selectively save the information in the registers of the main CPU 63.

Here, the registers to be saved include a flag register. The information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S3802 of the management process (FIG. 70), but the information in the flag register is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control in step S4602. To be done. This eliminates the need to selectively save the information in the register of the main CPU 63 including the information in the flag register. Further, even if the information in the flag register is duplicated and saved as described above, after the management execution processing is completed, in step S3804 of the management processing (FIG. 70), the special control stack area 222 is removed from the main CPU 63. Since the information is returned to the flag register of the above, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 can be returned to the state immediately before the execution of the management execution process. Becomes

After that, a check process is executed (step S4603). When the check process is executed, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. At the time of executing the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the execution of the check process is provided by the push command with the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Write to the storage area corresponding to the information. When the check process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for identifying the return address, and the program returns to the program of the management execution process indicated by the return address. The content of the check process is the same as that of the fifteenth embodiment.

After that, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, "LD SP,Y(r+α)" is set and the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 returns to the specific control by the load instruction. Y(r+α) is set as the fixed address in step S4604. The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "LD ALL, (_ALLBUF)", the information saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the register corresponding to each of the main CPUs 63 by the load instruction (step S4605). This makes it possible to restore each piece of information in all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

According to the above configuration, the information in the register of the main CPU 63 is not saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, but is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is possible to keep the capacity of 224 small. Further, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the writing order of information is read first from the later information. Therefore, if the reading order of information is deviated due to some noise or the like, it may occur. All subsequent read order information will be restored to a different register. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the information in the register in the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above event from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. ..

Further, when the information in the register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA register, BC register, DE register, and HL register used in the check processing corresponding to the non-specific control are performed. , IX register and IY register, as well as other registers, the information of all the registers is collectively saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control. By thus saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 in the work area 223 for non-specific control, there is no need to selectively save the information in the registers of the main CPU 63.

Although the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information of all the registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. In addition, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to all the registers in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. The information may be restored in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

<19th Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment in the processing configuration of the management execution processing. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the management execution process executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S4701 to S4706 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

First, as "LD (_SPBUF), SP", the load instruction saves the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 to the SP buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S4701). As a result, the information of the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is saved in the work area 223 for the non-specific control.

After that, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the non-specific control is started in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as “LD SP, Y(u+2)”. Y(u+2) is set as the fixed address in (step S4702).

After that, as a “PUSH ALL”, a push command is executed to transfer the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 from the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control and the storage area. It is saved in continuous storage areas (step S4703). In this case, since the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 cannot be stored in one storage area in the non-specific control stack area 224, the current state of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 is as described above. The storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer and the storage area continuous from the storage area are set as the save destination of the information of the register. Also, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order with respect to the storage area in which the last information is stored when the information of all registers is saved.

After that, a check process is executed (step S4704). When the check process is executed, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program is executed. At the time of executing the program of the subroutine, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the execution of the check process is provided by the push command with the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Write to the storage area corresponding to the information. When the check process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for identifying the return address, and the program returns to the program of the management execution process indicated by the return address. The content of the check process is the same as that of the fifteenth embodiment.

After that, as a "POP ALL", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction and the storage area continuous from the storage area Are overwritten on the registers corresponding to the respective main CPUs 63 (step S4705). This makes it possible to restore the information in all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

After that, the information saved in the SP buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LD SP, (_SPBUF)" (step S4706). As a result, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

According to the above configuration, when the information of the register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the WA register, the BC register, and the DE used in the check process corresponding to the non-specific control. Not only the registers, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register, but also the other registers, the information of all the registers is collectively saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. By thus saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, it is not necessary to selectively save the information of the registers of the main CPU 63.

The information of the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is saved in the work area 223 for the non-specific control. Thereby, even if the information of the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is changed, the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the specific control is performed. When returning to the corresponding process, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 can be returned to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

Although the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information of all the registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. In addition, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to all the registers in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. The information may be restored in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

<Twentieth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configurations of the management process and the management execution process are different from those of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the management processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S4801 to S4811 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S4801). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is the process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the later-described management execution process which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

After that, as "PUSH PSW", the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command (step S4802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of an arithmetic instruction, a rotate instruction, an input/output instruction, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process is started, the flag register in the state before being changed after the subroutine is called or the subroutine is started is saved. Information can be saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "LD WA, 0", the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4803). Further, as "LD BC,0", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4804). Also, as "LD DE,0", the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4805). Also, as "LD HL,0", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4806). Also, as "LD IX,0", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4807). Also, as "LD IY,0", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4808).

In addition to the flag register, various registers of the main CPU 63 include general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S4803 to S4808, the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are set. Clear "0". The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S4902) corresponding to the non-specific control. Before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the states of these registers are cleared by clearing "0" to the management execution processing (step S4809) which is the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. In addition, the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 can be started.

The information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control starts after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends. This is unnecessary information in the process corresponding to the specific control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the specific control that is restored after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends.

After executing the processes of steps S4803 to S4808, the management execution process is started by reading the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S4809). In this case, the information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the management execution process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

When returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S4802 by the pop command as “POP PSW” is used as the main CPU 63. It returns to the flag register (step S4810). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S4802 was previously executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

Then, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted, the interrupt permission is set (step S4811). This allows new execution of timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the management execution process executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S4901 to S4909 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, “LD SP,Y(u+2)” is set to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction at the start of non-specific control. Y(u+2) is set as the fixed address (step S4901).

After that, a check process is executed (step S4902). When executing the check processing, the subroutine program corresponding to the check processing set in the non-specific control program is executed. Information for specifying the return address of the execution process is written in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the push command. When the check processing is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the program returns to the management execution processing program indicated by the return address. The content of the check process is the same as that of the fifteenth embodiment.

Thereafter, as "LD WA, 0", the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4903). Further, as "LD BC,0", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4904). Also, as "LD DE,0", the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4905). Also, as "LD HL,0", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4906). Also, as "LD IX,0", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4907). Also, as "LD IY,0", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S4908).

The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S4902) corresponding to the non-specific control as described above. By clearing such registers to "0" prior to the return from the process corresponding to the non-specific control to the process corresponding to the specific control, the states of these registers can be The state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the side CPU 63 is started can be achieved.

Further, the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the process corresponding to the specific control is not specified after the process corresponding to the specific control is completed. This is unnecessary information in the processing corresponding to the control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control that is restored after the processing corresponding to the specific control is completed.

After that, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, when the load pointer returns to the specific control as “LD SP, Y(r+α)” by the load instruction. Y(r+α) is set as the fixed address in step S4909. The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

According to the above configuration, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started from the state where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register of the main CPU 63 And the IY register are cleared to "0". This eliminates the need to save the information of each register in the main RAM 65. Therefore, there is no need to secure a capacity for saving these pieces of information.

Also, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control from the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register and IY register of the main CPU 63 are set. The configuration is such that "0" is cleared. As a result, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it becomes possible to return the state of each of these registers to the state immediately before the start of the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

The state where each of the registers is cleared to “0” is the state when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting each of the registers to a predetermined state when starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. ..

When starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the registers for which the “0” is cleared are some of the various registers of the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for setting each of the registers to a predetermined state when starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control.

In a configuration in which the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register are cleared to “0” when starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, Registers other than "0" are not cleared. This makes it possible to prevent the information required in the process corresponding to the specific control from being erased at the start of the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

Information of registers other than the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register is not saved in the main RAM 65 at the start of the process corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, there is no need to secure an area for saving the information in the main RAM 65.

The information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control starts after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends. This information is not used in the process corresponding to the specific control. As a result, even if the above-mentioned registers are cleared to “0” when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the specific control is performed after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. It is possible to prevent the processing from being affected.

Note that instead of the configuration of clearing the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 to "0" in steps S4803 to S4808 in the management process (FIG. 81), The register may be initialized. That is, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the information of each register of the main CPU 63 is set to the initial state after being cleared to “0” once. In steps S4803 to S4808, each register may be set so as to be in this initial state. In this case, in each of the steps S4903 to S4908, the setting of each register is performed so as to be in the initial state, so that the state of each register is not specified when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. It is possible to restore the state immediately before the processing corresponding to the control is started.

Further, in steps S4803 to S4808 in the management process (FIG. 81), the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 are replaced with a configuration in which they are cleared to “0”. The configuration may be such that "1" is set in all the registers. In this case, in step S4903 to step S4908 also, by setting "1" in all of the above registers, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the state of each register is processed corresponding to the non-specific control. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the start of.

Further, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65 in the processing corresponding to the specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the flag register information may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, the configuration is such that after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the processing corresponding to the specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. The information may be returned to the flag register in a process corresponding to the non-specific control.

Further, the process of clearing the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 to "0" corresponds to the specific control before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the process of clearing these registers to "0" may be performed by the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends, the processing for clearing each register to “0” is performed in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, but the present invention is not limited to this. The processing of clearing each of the registers to “0” may be performed in the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

In the management process (FIG. 81), the process of “PUSH PSW” in step S4802 is executed before setting “0” to each register in steps S4803 to S4808. However, instead of this, , "PUSH PSW" processing in step S4802 is executed after "0" is set in each register in steps S4803 to S4808 and before the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution processing is read in step S4809. It may be configured to be. This makes it possible to save the information in the flag register, which has been changed by the load instruction in steps S4803 to S4808, in the stack area 222 for specific control.

<Twenty-first embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration for collecting information on the game history is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of this embodiment.

The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, and a main RAM 65 as in the fifteenth embodiment. Further, unlike the fifteenth embodiment, the MPU 62 is electrically connected with the management RAM 241. That is, the management RAM 241 is provided separately from the main RAM 65 built in the MPU 62, and the management RAM 241 is externally attached to the MPU 62.

The main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control, and a stack area 224 for non-specific control as in the fifteenth embodiment. ing. Therefore, when the main CPU 63 executes the process corresponding to the specific control by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main ROM 64, the specific control work area 221 in the main RAM 65 and When the stack area 222 for specific control is used and the main CPU 63 uses the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control in the main ROM 64 to execute the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control in the main RAM 65 are used.

The management RAM 241 is provided with a normal counter area 231, an opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, a high frequency support mode counter area 233, and a calculation result storage area 234. The contents of these areas 231 to 234 are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment. Also in this embodiment, the management execution process including the check process is executed as the process corresponding to the non-specific control in the main CPU 63. Then, in the check process, similar to the fifteenth embodiment, the game history is collected by updating the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and at the same time, the game history is collected. The 61st to 68th parameters calculated using the collected game history are written in the calculation result storage area 234. That is, the management RAM 241 is used when the main CPU 63 executes the process corresponding to the non-specific control, and thus the management RAM 241 is used as a work area for the non-specific control.

In addition, when the 61st to 68th parameters are calculated using the collected game history and the collected history information, the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 of the main RAM 65 are Used as appropriate.

According to the above configuration, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are provided in the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62. This makes it possible to store the collected game history information while not increasing the storage capacity required in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the main RAM 65, and use the game history. It is possible to store the calculated 61st to 68th parameters. Further, it becomes possible to increase the storage capacity for storing the information of the game history while using the general-purpose MPU 62.

The non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 of the main RAM 65 are appropriately used when collecting the game history and calculating the 61st to 68th parameters using the collected history information. To be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing speed from extremely decreasing when executing the processing related to the history information.

In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the normal RAM counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are provided in the management RAM 241, the first embodiment described above is used. A storage area corresponding to the history memory 117 in the form may be set. In this case, although it is necessary to increase the storage capacity required to store the history information, the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62 is used as a storage unit for storing the history information. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly cope with an increase in storage capacity.

<Twenty-second Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S5001 to S5019 in the main process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S5001). In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process is started and waits for a predetermined time for wait (specifically, 1 second) without proceeding to the next process. During the execution period of the power-on weight process, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5002).

After that, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S5003), and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned on using the setting key (step S5004), and the inner frame It is determined with respect to 13 whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S5005), and it is determined with respect to the outer frame 11 whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state (step S5006).

In the present embodiment, a front door opening sensor 95 for detecting whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the front door opening sensor The detection result of 95 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a close detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In the case of, the front door opening sensor 95 sends an opening detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and when receiving the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. The front door frame 14 is specified to be in the open state.

Further, in the present embodiment, a main body opening sensor 96 for detecting whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main body opening sensor The detection result of 96 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 sends an open detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It specifies that the main body 12 is in the open state.

When the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S5003: YES) and a negative determination is made in any of steps S5004 to S5006, a clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed (step S5007). .. In the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the specific control is performed except for the area (specifically, the set value counter) in the work area 221 for the specific control in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. The work area 221 for use is cleared to "0", and the area cleared to "0" is initialized. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode is cleared to "0". The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not being variably displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general electric power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display portion 37a is erased and the general figure display portion is deleted. The hold information for 38a is deleted. In addition, in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”. In addition, in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0” and then initialized.

In the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started with the reset button 68c being pressed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". It becomes possible to do so.

When the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S5003: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S5008). The power failure flag is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, and when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and a predetermined power failure process is normally executed, the power failure flag is set. Will be set to "1". When the power failure flag is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation result matches the checksum saved when the power is cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S5009). .. When the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed in step S5007 or when the positive determination is made in step S5009, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is confirmed by checking the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control. It is determined whether the value is normal (step S5010). Specifically, when the set value set in the set value counter is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or 7 or more, there is an abnormality. Judge that there is.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5008 to S5010, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibiting process, an infinite loop is performed after executing the error notifying process for notifying the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of the error (step S5011). The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a clearing process (step S5018) at the time of updating the setting, which will be described later.

When a positive determination is made in all of steps S5008 to S5010, power-on setting processing is executed (step S5012). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the work area 221 for specific control such as initialization of the power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S5012 is completed and the process of step S5013 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power-on setting process of step S5012 ends, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S5013 is started. Therefore, the processing for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until the situation is reached.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S5013 to S5016. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S5013 to S5016 is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps S5013 to S5016 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed. In steps S5013 to S5016, the same processing as steps S113 to S116 of the main processing (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed.

On the other hand, when the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S5003: YES) and a positive determination is made in all of steps S5004 to S5006, processing for updating the set value is executed. Specifically, first, a setting value copy process is executed (step S5017). In the copy processing, information on a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific control work area 221 is stored in a copy area provided in the specific control work area 221. .. As a result, even if the setting value counter information is cleared to "0" in the subsequent clearing process at the time of updating the setting (step S5018), the book before the clearing process at the time of updating the setting value is executed. It is possible to grasp the set value of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped).

After that, a clear process at the time of updating the setting is executed (step S5018). In the clear process at the time of updating the setting, the work area 221 for the specific control is set to “0” except for the area indicating whether the win/loss lot mode in the work area 221 for the specific control is the high probability mode and the copy area. The area which has been cleared to "0" is initialized. As a result, the game times are not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not being variably displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. There is a certain situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general electric power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display portion 37a is erased and the general figure display portion is deleted. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, in the clearing process at the time of updating the settings, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, and the area cleared to “0” is initialized. Further, in the clearing process at the time of updating the setting, the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared to “0”. Further, in the clearing process at the time of updating the settings, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0” and then initialized.

On the other hand, in the clear process at the time of updating the settings, the area indicating whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode is not cleared to “0”, so that the winning/winning lottery mode is executed even if the setting value updating process (step S5019) is executed. Can be maintained in the mode before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, since the copy area is not cleared to "0" in the clearing process at the time of setting update, it is possible to specify the set value set before the clearing process at the time of setting update is executed.

In the clear processing at the time of updating the settings, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if the setting value updating process capable of changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". It becomes possible to do so.

After that, after executing the setting value update process in step S5019, the process proceeds to step S5012. The setting value update process will be described below. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the set value updating process. The processing of steps S5101 to S5114 in the setting value update processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, "1" is set to the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S5101). The set value counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which set value the set state of the pachinko machine 10 is. By setting "1" in the set value counter, when the set value updating process is executed, the set value becomes "set 1" regardless of the set value up to that point.

After that, display start processing of the set value is executed (step S5102). In the setting value display start processing, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number "1" corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed. When changing the set value, the manager of the game hall can confirm the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c.

After that, it is determined whether or not one gaming ball is detected by the out mouth detection sensor 48a (step S5103). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal received from the outlet detection sensor 48a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When a negative determination is made in step S5103, it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. When a negative determination is made in step S5104, the process returns to step S5103 and it is determined whether or not one gaming ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a.

When the update button 68b is pressed once (step S5104: YES), the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S5105). When the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S5106: YES), "1" is set in the set value counter (step S5107). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, it is updated to the setting value one step higher, and when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", it is set to "setting 1". Will return.

If a negative determination is made in step S5106, or if the processing of step S5107 is executed, display update processing of the set value is executed (step S5108). In the display update process of the set value, the display control of the third notification display device 69c is performed so that the number corresponding to the value of the set value counter in the specific control work area 221 is displayed. By checking the third notification display device 69c, the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process of step S5108, the process returns to step S5103, and it is determined whether or not one gaming ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. When one gaming ball is not detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a (step S5103: NO), the processes after step S5104 are executed again. When one gaming ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a (step S5103: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion part 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5109). In this case, it is not specified whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, but it is specified whether or not the switching from the ON state to the OFF state has occurred, and that the switching has occurred. If specified, an affirmative decision is made in step S5109.

If it has not been switched to the OFF state (step S5109: NO), the process of step S5109 is executed again. As a result, the process is on standby until the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off. When it is switched to the OFF state (step S5109: YES), display end processing of the set value is executed (step S5110). In the display end processing of the set value, the display of the set value on the third notification display device 69c is ended. In this case, the display of the information of various parameters stored in the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is started on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

After that, a comparison process of set values is executed (step S5111). In the setting value comparison processing, it is determined whether or not the information of the setting value counter in the specific control work area 221 matches the information stored in the copy area in the specific control work area 221. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and the set value set in the set value update process this time.

When the set value set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and the set value set in the set value updating process this time are the same (step S5112: NO), non- The notification process at the time of change is executed (step S5113). In the notification process at the time of non-change, a setting maintenance command indicating that the set value has not been changed is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the setting maintaining command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the setting maintaining, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output the sound “Setting is maintained”. In addition, the character image of "Maintain settings" is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

These notifications are maintained until the notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the setting maintenance command is transmitted, and is ended when the notification execution period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the manager of the game hall can understand that the set value has been maintained. In the notification process during non-change, the set value is maintained by setting the display content on at least one of the first to third display devices 69a to 69c as the display content corresponding to the setting maintenance. It may be configured to notify that, or may be configured to perform external output indicating that the set value is maintained.

If the set value set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is not the same as the set value set in the current set value updating process (step S5112: YES), change The notification processing for the hour is executed (step S5114). In the notification process at the time of change, a setting change command indicating that the set value has been changed is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the setting change command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting change, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a sound of “setting change”. In addition, the character image of “setting change” is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

These notifications are maintained until the notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the setting change command is transmitted, and is terminated when the notification execution period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the game hall manager can recognize that the set value has been changed. In the notification process at the time of change, the set value is changed by setting the display content of at least one of the first to third display devices 69a to 69c as the display content corresponding to the setting change. May be informed, or an external output indicating that the set value has been changed may be performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the set value updating process, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on, but also the reset button 68c is pressed and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Therefore, the gaming machine main body 12 needs to be in an open state. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to execute the set value updating process illegally.

Further, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in an open state in order to execute the set value updating process. As a result, even if the setting value updating process is attempted to be illegally executed, the fraudulent act becomes noticeable because the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, and the manager of the gaming hall concerned It's easier to find fraud.

In particular, in order to execute the set value updating process, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60 but also the opening operation of the front door frame 14 is required. It becomes possible to make the work of the fraudulent operation complicated and to make the fraudulent activity noticeable.

Further, in the configuration that does not return to the process for advancing the game when the set value update process is not completed, in order to confirm the set value selected in the set value update process and end the set value update process, It is necessary to insert a game ball into the outlet 24a and cause the outlet detection sensor 48a to detect the game ball, and then turn off the setting key insertion portion 68a. As a result, even if the setting value updating process is illegally executed, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation for subsequently ending the setting value updating process and returning to the process for advancing the game.

In addition, the set value set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and the set value selected in the set value updating process are compared to determine whether or not both set values are the same. The notification corresponding to the crab is executed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not the set value can be changed by the set value updating process.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) in a situation where the processes of steps S5013 to S5016 are executed in the main process (FIG. 84). The program corresponding to the timer interrupt processing is set to the program for specific control.

In steps S5201 to S5205, the same processes as steps S301 to S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed in the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

After that, a setting confirmation process is executed (step S5206). When executing the setting confirmation process, the subroutine program corresponding to the setting confirmation process set in the specific control program is executed. However, when executing the subroutine program, the setting confirmation process is executed. The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process after execution of is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. Then, when the setting confirmation processing is completed, the information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the timer interrupt processing program indicated by the return address.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing. The processes of steps S5301 to S5312 in the setting confirmation process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, it is determined whether or not the set value corresponding to the set value counter information in the specific control work area 221 is being displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S5301). When a negative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether it is neither the game time nor the open/close execution mode (step S5302), and the variable display time of the pattern on the universal figure display portion 38a and the universal electric utility article 34a are opened. It is determined whether or not it is any of the normal electric open states that can be the state (step S5303), and it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S5304), and the outer frame. It is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to 11 (step S5305), and it is determined whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on (step S5306). Whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state is determined based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 as in step S5005 in the main process (FIG. 84), and whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state. This determination is made based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, as in step S5006 in the main process (FIG. 84).

When a negative determination is made in any of steps S5302 to S5306, this setting confirmation process is terminated without executing the processes of steps S5307 to S5309. When a positive determination is made in all of steps S5302 to S5306, setting value display start processing is executed (step S5307). In the set value display start processing, the third notification display device 69c is display-controlled so that the set value number corresponding to the information of the set value counter in the specific control work area 221 is displayed. When confirming the setting value, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by visually checking the third notification display device 69c.

Then, "1" is set to the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S5308). The game stop flag is a situation in which a positive determination is made in step S5207 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86) and the processing of steps S5208 to S5221 is not executed, that is, the execution of processing for advancing the game should be stopped. This is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not there is. When the game stop flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S5207 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86), and the processing in steps S5208 to S5221 is not executed. As a result, the setting value is confirmed in the situation where the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. However, even if the game stop flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S5201 to S5205 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86) is executed, so that the setting value is being confirmed. Even when the power failure is monitored, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is executed.

After that, the confirmation notification start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S5309). Upon receiving the confirmation notification start command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting confirmation, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output the voice “Setting confirmation is in progress”. .. Further, the symbol display device 41 is made to display a character image "Setting confirmation is in progress." These notifications are continued until the confirmation notification end command is received from the main CPU 63. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which external output indicating that the setting value is being confirmed is performed.

As described above, on condition that it is neither the game times nor the opening/closing execution mode, and further, neither the variable display times of the picture in the universal figure display portion 38a nor the universal electric open state in which the general electric accessory 34a can be in the opened state, Since the display for confirming the set value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c, it is possible to prevent the set value confirmation work from being performed in the situation where the game is being played. It will be possible.

Moreover, in order to display the confirmation of the set value on the third notification display device 69c, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on, but also the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, the gaming machine main body 12 needs to be in an open state. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally display the setting value for confirmation, it is difficult to do so.

Further, in order for the display for confirming the set value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be open. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally display the set value for confirmation, since the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in an open state, the fraudulent act becomes conspicuous, and the management of the gaming hall is performed. It becomes easier for a person to discover the wrongdoing.

In particular, in order for the display for confirming the set value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60, Since the opening operation of the front door frame 14 is also required, it becomes possible to complicate the work of the fraudulent act and make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S5301, it is decided whether or not the setting key insertion part 68a has been turned off (step S5310). If the OFF operation has been performed (step S5310: YES), the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S5311). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S5207 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86), and the processing in steps S5208 to S5221 is executed. As a result, the state in which the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped is released.

After that, the confirmation notification end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S5312). Upon receiving the confirmation notification end command, the voice emission control device 81 ends the notification indicating that the setting values in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are being confirmed.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86), after ending the setting confirmation process of step S5206, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped (step S5207). In this case, if the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" in the setting confirmation process of step S5206, an affirmative decision is made in step S5207, and steps S5208 to S5221 are executed. Do not execute the process. Further, even when the occurrence of fraud is detected in the fraud detection processing in step S5205, a positive determination is made in step S5207, and the processing in steps S5208 to S5221 is not executed.

In steps S5208 to S5219, the same processes as steps S307 to S318 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. These processes are executed in the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data. Further, in step S5221, the same process as step S3719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) in the fifteenth embodiment is executed.

On the other hand, in step S5220, RAM monitoring processing is executed. When executing the RAM monitoring process, the program of the subroutine corresponding to the RAM monitoring process set in the program for specific control is executed. However, when executing the program of the subroutine, after executing the RAM monitoring process. The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process in is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the RAM monitoring process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for identifying the return address, and the program returns to the timer interrupt process program indicated by the return address.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring process. The processes of steps S5401 to S5412 in the RAM monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, the monitoring process of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5401). In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not the information stored in the specific control work area 221 is abnormal due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, in the work area 221 for specific control, whether the state of the storage area in which information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state is determined. There is a method of observing, and determining that an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is set to a value of "0", it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when "1" is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is "1". When the value is “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the storage area has a value of “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, it may be configured to determine that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from the value that can be set in a normal state.

If it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5401 (step S5402: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in step S5401 (step S5402: NO), the process proceeds to step S5403.

In step S5403, monitoring processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not the information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control is abnormal due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, in the stack area 222 for specific control, whether or not the state of the storage area where information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state There is a method of observing, and determining that an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is set to a value of "0", it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when "1" is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is "1". When the value is “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the storage area has a value of “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, it may be configured to determine that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from the value that can be set in a normal state.

When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5403 (step S5404: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in step S5403 (step S5404: NO), the process proceeds to step S5405.

In step S5405, monitoring processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control is abnormal due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, in the work area 223 for non-specific control, whether the state of the storage area in which information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state There is a method of monitoring whether or not and determining that an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is set to a value of "0", it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when "1" is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is "1". When the value is “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the storage area has a value of “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, it may be configured to determine that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from the value that can be set in a normal state.

When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5405 (step S5406: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in step S5405 (step S5406: NO), the process proceeds to step S5407.

In step S5407, monitoring processing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed. In the monitoring process, it is monitored whether information stored in the non-specific control stack area 224 is abnormal due to noise or the like. Although this monitoring method is arbitrary, for example, in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, whether the state of the storage area in which information is not written under various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state There is a method of monitoring whether or not and determining that an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is set to a value of "0", it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when "1" is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is "1". When the value is “0”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the storage area has a value of “0”. In addition to the above monitoring method, it may be configured to determine that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from the value that can be set in a normal state.

When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5407 (step S5408: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. Specifically, first, a setting value copy process is executed (step S5409). In the copy processing, information on a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific control work area 221 is stored in a copy area provided in the specific control work area 221. .. As a result, even if the setting value counter information is cleared to "0" in the abnormal clearing process (step S5410) that is executed thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormal clearing process is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the set value of.

After that, the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step S5410). In the clear processing at the time of abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area is cleared to “0”, and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack for non-specific control are provided. The area 224 is cleared to "0". Also, after "0" is cleared, initial setting is performed. That is, in the RAM monitoring process, an abnormality occurs in any one of the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224. If it is specified that the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” except for the copy area, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the non-specific control Clear the stack area 224 of "0". As a result, if there is a possibility that some sort of information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, neither the processing corresponding to the specific control nor the processing corresponding to the non-specific control will be executed in that state. It becomes possible to do so.

When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the information on the return address after the RAM monitoring processing is also erased. Therefore, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the process of step S5412 is terminated, and then a specific program is uniquely returned. Specifically, the processing is uniquely returned to the processing of step S5013 in the main processing (FIG. 22). However, the program that uniquely returns is not limited to step S5013, and may be step S5221 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86). Further, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the storage order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, an abnormal command indicating that the clear processing at the abnormal time has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5411). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forced clear, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output the sound "Forced clear." In addition, the character image "Forced clear." is displayed on the pattern display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the game hall manager can grasp that the main RAM 65 has been forcibly cleared.

After that, the set value updating process is executed (step S5412). That is, when the clear processing at the time of abnormality occurs, "0" is cleared including the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control. Therefore, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is reset. In order to do so, set value update processing is executed. The processing contents of the setting value update processing are the same as step S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 84). Therefore, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated one step at a time, and the set value being selected is confirmed by detecting the game ball with the outlet detection sensor 48a. The set value that is being updated and the set value that has been confirmed are displayed on the third notification display device 69c. After that, when the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the ending condition of the set value updating process is satisfied.

Here, it is not determined that the termination condition is satisfied only by the setting key insertion portion 68a being in the OFF state, and the termination condition is determined when the setting key insertion portion 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. It is determined that it has been established. When the setting value updating process is executed in the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88), the setting key inserting unit 68a is in the OFF state at the start of the setting value updating process, and therefore the termination condition of the setting value updating process is set. In order to be satisfied, it is necessary to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion portion 68a, perform the ON operation once, and then perform the OFF operation. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the setting value updating process from ending even though the game hall manager has not performed a regular operation.

When the setting key insertion portion 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state and the ending condition of the setting value updating process is satisfied, by executing step S5111 in the setting value updating process (FIG. 85), It is compared whether or not the set value stored in the copy area in the specific control work area 221 and the set value currently set in the set value counter in the specific control work area 221 are the same. That is, it is determined whether the set value set before the execution of the clear process (step S5410) at the time of abnormality is the same as the set value set in the set value update process this time. When both set values are the same (step S5112: NO), the notification process at the time of non-change (step S5113) is executed to perform the setting maintenance notification already described. On the other hand, if the two setting values are different (step S5112: YES), the notification process at the time of change (step S5114) is executed so that the setting change notification described above is performed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

In order to execute the set value update process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on but also the reset button 68c is pressed. The front door frame 14 needs to be in the open state, and the gaming machine body 12 needs to be in the open state. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to execute the set value updating process illegally.

In order to execute the set value updating process, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in an open state. As a result, even if the setting value updating process is attempted to be illegally executed, the fraudulent act becomes noticeable because the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in the open state, and the manager of the gaming hall concerned It's easier to find fraud.

In particular, in order to execute the set value updating process, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60 but also the opening operation of the front door frame 14 is required. It becomes possible to make the work of the fraudulent operation complicated and to make the fraudulent activity noticeable.

If the set value update process is not completed and the process does not return to the process for advancing the game, the set value selected in the set value update process is confirmed and the set value update process is ended. It is necessary to insert a game ball into 24a and have the outlet detection sensor 48a detect the game ball, and then turn off the setting key insertion portion 68a. As a result, even if the setting value updating process is illegally executed, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation for subsequently ending the setting value updating process and returning to the process for advancing the game.

The set value that was set before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped and the set value that was selected in the set value update processing are compared to determine whether the two set values are the same. The corresponding notification is executed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can easily grasp whether or not the set value can be changed by the set value updating process.

The setting value is set on the condition that neither the game time nor the opening/closing execution mode is set, and further, neither the variable display time of the picture on the universal figure display portion 38a nor the universal electric open state in which the general electric accessory 34a can be opened. By making the display for confirmation displayed on the third notification display device 69c, it becomes possible to prevent confirmation work of the set value from being performed in a situation where a game is being played. ..

In order for the display for confirming the set value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on, but the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, the gaming machine main body 12 needs to be in an open state. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally display the setting value for confirmation, it is difficult to do so.

In order for the display for confirming the set value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be open. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally display the set value for confirmation, since the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in an open state, the fraudulent act becomes conspicuous, and the management of the gaming hall is performed. It becomes easier for a person to discover the wrongdoing.

In particular, in order for the display for confirming the set value to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c, not only the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 necessary for exposing the main control device 60, Since the opening operation of the front door frame 14 is also required, it becomes possible to complicate the work of the fraudulent act and make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

When it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in any one of the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224. Clears the work area 221 for specific control excluding the copy area to "0", and sets the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0". "clear. As a result, when there is a possibility that some sort of information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, both the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control are executed in that state. It is possible to prevent it.

In the process corresponding to the specific control, information abnormality occurs not only in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, but also in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224. Whether or not it is monitored. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the process corresponding to the specific control and the process corresponding to the non-specific control are separately monitored for whether or not an information abnormality has occurred.

When it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in any one of the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, the non-specific control work area 223, and the non-specific control stack area 224. In the process corresponding to the specific control, not only the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control but also the work area 223 for the non-specific control and the stack area 224 for the non-specific control are “0. It will be cleared. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration as compared with the configuration in which the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control are separately performed to clear “0”.

When the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed due to the occurrence of the information abnormality, the set value update processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding even though the set value is not set. In this case, if the set value that was set before the abnormal clearing process was executed is the same as the setting value that was set in the set value update process after the abnormal clearing process was executed. Is notified of setting maintenance. As a result, even if the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed, the setting maintenance notification will be performed by resetting the setting value set in the previous situation, and the clear processing at the time of abnormality will be executed. Also, it becomes possible to clearly indicate to the player that the set value has not changed. By the way, since it is common to record the set value of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall, the set value update process after the execution of the clear process at the time of abnormality so that the recorded set value becomes the recorded set value. Can be performed.

It should be noted that the condition for executing the set value updating process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started may be a condition different from the above embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a main process which is another form. In the main process, the same processes as steps S5001 to S5019 of the main process (FIG. 84) in the above embodiment are executed in steps S5501 to S5506 and steps S5508 to S5520. On the other hand, in the main processing, in step S5507, it is determined whether or not the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 that is operated to fire the game ball in the game area PA has been rotated from the initial rotation position. Then, the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5503: YES), the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON (step S5504: YES), and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Yes (step S5505: YES), the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S5506: YES), and the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position. If so (step S5507: YES), the set value update process (step S5520) is executed. Accordingly, in order to execute the set value updating process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion section 68a and the ON operation is performed, but also the firing is performed. It is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the operation handle of the operation device 28 is rotated. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally changing the set value. It should be noted that, in step S5507, it is not determined whether the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position, but it is determined whether the firing operation device 28 is touched by the player. It may be configured.

Further, as a condition for executing the set value updating process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and the outside Although both of the conditions that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state are set for the frame 11, only one of these conditions may be set.

Further, the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed is set as the condition for executing the set value updating process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. However, the condition may not be set.

Further, as a condition for executing the set value updating process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the operation to the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the situation where the game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. The configuration may be such that the condition that power supply has started is set. Accordingly, in order to execute the set value updating process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only the setting key is inserted into the setting key inserting section 68a to perform the ON operation but also the through operation is performed. It becomes necessary to start the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the game balls retained in the gate 35. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally changing the set value.

Further, the content of the operation for confirming the set value in the set value update processing may be different from that of the above-described embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing a setting value updating process which is another form. In the set value update processing, the same processing as step S5101 to step S5102 and step S5104 to step S5114 of the set value update processing (FIG. 85) in the above embodiment is executed in step S5601 to step S5602 and step S5604 to step S5614. .. On the other hand, in the setting value updating process, in step S5603, the ON signal is continuously output from the gate detection sensor 49a, instead of determining whether or not the game ball is detected by the out-mouth detection sensor 48a. It is determined whether the ON duration is equal to or longer than the termination reference period (specifically, 5 seconds). Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, the set value being selected is confirmed, and the flow proceeds to step S5609. According to this configuration, it is necessary to intentionally retain the game ball in the through gate 35 for at least the termination reference period in order to confirm the selected setting value. The game ball staying in the through gate 35 for more than the end reference period does not occur in a situation where a normal game is being played. This makes it possible to make the condition for confirming the selected setting value not satisfied or difficult to be satisfied in a situation where a normal game is being played. Further, even if the setting value updating process is started due to injustice, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the operation for confirming the setting value being selected in the setting value updating process.

In the set value updating process, the set value being selected may be confirmed when the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position, and the firing operation device 28 is touched by the player. The configuration may be such that the set value being selected is confirmed when the setting is performed.

Further, in the set value updating process, the set value being selected may be fixed when the special electric prize detection sensor 45a detects that the game ball has entered the special electric prize winning device 32 provided with the opening/closing member. Of course, the setting value being selected may be determined when the game ball enters the second operating port 34 provided with the opening/closing member is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a. In this case, in order to confirm the set value being selected, it is necessary to manually maintain the game ball after manually opening the target ball-in portion, making it difficult to illegally change the set value. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the set value update process, selection is made based on the fact that the game ball has been detected in the second ball entering portion after it has been detected that the game ball has entered the first ball entering portion. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the set value inside is fixed. In this case, in order to fix the selected setting value, it is necessary to enter the game balls into the multiple ball entry parts in a predetermined order according to a predetermined order, so it is difficult to illegally change the setting value. Is possible. In this case, the workability of the regular work is not extremely deteriorated by making the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part both ball entry parts not provided with the opening/closing member. It becomes possible to do.

Further, in the setting value updating process, the setting key inserting unit 68a may be switched from the ON state to the OFF state to confirm the setting value being selected and satisfy the ending condition of the setting value updating process.

Further, the operation for updating the set value by one step in the set value update processing is not limited to the configuration in which the update button 68b is pressed, and the set value is changed by one step by pressing the reset button 68c. The configuration may be updated.

Further, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key, When the front door frame 14 is not open to the frame 13 or the gaming machine main body 12 is not open to the outer frame 11, a clear process (step S5007) at the time of non-setting update is executed. The configuration is not limited, and the clear process at the time of non-setting update may not be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the clear processing at the time of non-setting update from being executed against the intention of the game hall manager.

In addition, in a case where the reset button 68c is being pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is not being turned ON by the setting key, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. When the front door frame 14 is not open to the frame 13 or the gaming machine main body 12 is not open to the outer frame 11, a clear process (step S5007) at the time of non-setting update is executed. The configuration is not limited, and the clear process at the time of non-setting update may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the clear process at the time of non-setting update illegally.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing is different from that of the 22nd embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 22nd embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the twenty-second embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S5701 to S5720 in the main process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S5701). In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process is started and waits for a predetermined time for wait (specifically, 1 second) without proceeding to the next process. During the execution period of the power-on weight process, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5702).

Thereafter, based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S5703), and based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96, the outer frame 11 In contrast, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state (step S5704), and it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5705). When a negative determination is made in any of steps S5703 to S5705, the processes of steps S5706 to S5714 are executed. The processing of these steps S5706 to S5714 is the same as the processing of steps S5008 to S5016 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

When a positive determination is made in all of steps S5703 to S5705, selection processing is executed (step S5715). In the selection process, whichever of the following situations is performed, the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed and the set value update process is not executed, or the clear process at the time of setting update is executed and the set value update process is executed. A process of deciding whether to be based on the selection operation by the manager of the game hall is executed. Specifically, every time the update button 68b is pressed once, the state in which one of the above situations is selected is switched to the state in which the other situation is selected. The selection operation may be performed by operating the reset button 68c, or may be performed by operating another operation unit. Further, when the state where the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed and the set value update process is not executed is selected, “O” is displayed on the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b is displayed. When the third notification display device 69c is turned off and the clearing process at the time of setting update is executed and the setting value update process is executed, “O” is displayed on the second notification display device 69b. Is displayed and the first notification display device 69a and the third notification display device 69c are turned off. In addition, when the reset button 68c is continuously pressed for a fixed selection period (specifically, 10 seconds) or more, the status of the selected side among the above statuses is fixed as the selection target this time. To do.

In addition, when the update button 68b is continuously pressed for a fixed selection period (specifically, 10 seconds) or more, the status of the selected side among the above statuses is fixed as the current selection target. The configuration may be adopted, and when the other operation unit is continuously pressed for a fixed selection period (specifically, 10 seconds) or more, the situation of the selected side among the above situations is selected this time. It may be configured to be determined as a target. Alternatively, the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 may be pivotally operated to determine the selected situation among the above situations as the current selection target.

In the process for selection, when the situation where the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed and the setting value update process is not executed is confirmed as the current selection target (step S5716: NO), the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed. (Step S5717). The processing content of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is the same as step S5007 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the 22nd embodiment.

In the process for selection, when the situation of executing the clear process at the time of setting update and executing the set value update process is confirmed as the current selection target (step S5716: YES), the set value copy process is executed (step S5716). In step S5718, a clear process at the time of setting update is executed (step S5719), and a set value update process is executed (step S5720). The processing contents of these steps S5718 to S5720 are the same as the steps S5017 to S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

According to the above configuration, even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is not provided, the clear process at the time of non-setting update is executed and the setting value update process is not executed, and the clear process at the time of setting update is executed. At the same time, the game hall manager can select which of the situations in which the setting value updating process is to be executed.

Further, not only when the setting value updating process is executed but also when the clearing process at the time of non-setting updating is executed, the operating power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 when the reset button 68c is pressed. In addition to starting, it is necessary to open the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 and open the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the clear process at the time of non-setting update illegally.

In addition, as conditions for executing the selection process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and the outer frame. Although both of the conditions that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state are set for 11, the configuration may be such that only one of these conditions is set.

In addition, a condition that the firing handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated is added as a condition for executing the selection process when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. As the configuration, the condition that the firing operation device 28 is touched may be added, and the condition that the game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a may be added. Good.

<Twenty-fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the RAM monitoring processing is different from that of the 22nd embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 22nd embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the twenty-second embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S5801 to S5814 in the RAM monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, the monitoring process of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5801). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5801 (step S5802: YES), the processes of steps S5805-S5808 are executed.

If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in step S5801 (step S5802: NO), monitoring processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S5803). The content of the monitoring process is the same as step S5403 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5803 (step S5804: YES), the processes of steps S5805-S5808 are executed.

For details of the processing in steps S5805 to S5808, first, a setting value copy processing is executed (step S5805). In the copy processing, information on a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific control work area 221 is stored in a copy area provided in the specific control work area 221. .. As a result, even if the set value counter information is cleared to “0” in the abnormal clearing process (step S5806) executed thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormal clearing process is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the set value of.

After that, the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step S5806). In the clear processing at the time of abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area is cleared to "0" and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Also, after "0" is cleared, initial setting is performed. On the other hand, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". That is, in the RAM monitoring process according to the present embodiment, when it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in either the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the specific control is performed excluding the copy area. The work area 221 for clearing is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed as it is. It is possible to prevent it. Further, even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to “0”. By not doing so, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0" by the information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. It becomes possible not to.

When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the information on the return address after the RAM monitoring processing is also erased. Therefore, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the process of step S5808 is terminated, and then the program is uniquely returned to. Specifically, the processing is uniquely returned to the processing of step S5013 in the main processing (FIG. 22). However, the program that uniquely returns is not limited to step S5013, and may be step S5221 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 86). Further, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the storage order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, an abnormality command indicating that the clear processing at the time of abnormality has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5807). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forced clear, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output the sound "Forced clear." In addition, the character image "Forced clear." is displayed on the pattern display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the game hall manager can grasp that the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control have been forcibly cleared.

After that, the set value updating process is executed (step S5808). The processing content of the setting value update processing is the same as step S5412 in the RAM monitoring processing (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment.

When it is not determined that there is an abnormality in both step S5801 and step S5803 (step S5802 and step S5804: NO), monitoring processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S5809). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5809 (step S5810: YES), the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is performed (step S5811). In this case, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are all cleared to “0”. This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

On the other hand, in step S5811, the work area 221, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if the information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are " It is possible not to clear "0".

In step S5811, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0", but the management start flag is not cleared to "0". It may be configured. In step S5811, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the management start flag are cleared to “0”, but the operation result storage area 234 is not cleared to “0”. It may be configured. In step S5811, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to “0”, but the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are not cleared to “0”. It may be configured.

If a negative determination is made in step S5810 or the processing of step S5811 is executed, the monitoring processing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S5812). The content of the monitoring process is the same as step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5812 (step S5813: YES), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” and initialized (step S5814). This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the non-specific control stack area 224.

On the other hand, in step S5814, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, even if an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are " It is possible not to clear "0".

According to the above configuration, when it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in either the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the specific control work area 221 is excluded except for the copy area. Is cleared to "0" and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed as it is. It is possible to prevent it.

Even if an information abnormality occurs in the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. As a result, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0" due to the information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. It becomes possible to do so.

Even if the information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are prevented from being cleared to “0” due to the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It becomes possible.

Even if the information abnormality occurs in the non-specific control stack area 224, the work area 221 for the specific control, the stack area 222 for the specific control, and the work area 223 for the non-specific control are not cleared to “0”. This prevents the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" due to the information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It becomes possible.

When an information error occurs in the specific control work area 221, the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0” except for the copy area, while the specific control stack area 222 is set to “0”. The configuration may not be cleared to "0".

Further, when an information abnormality has occurred in the stack area 222 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, while the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to “0”. May be In this case, even if the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0”, the processing in steps S5805 to S5808 may not be executed.

<Twenty-fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration for monitoring whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in each of the areas 221 to 224 of the main side RAM 65 is different from that of the 22nd embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 22nd embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the twenty-second embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S5901 to S5908 in the RAM monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, the monitoring processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5901). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5901 (step S5902: YES), the processes of steps S5905-S5908 are executed.

If it is not determined that there is an abnormality in step S5901 (step S5902: NO), monitoring processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S5903). The content of the monitoring process is the same as step S5403 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5903 (step S5904: YES), the processes of steps S5905-S5908 are executed.

For details of the processing in steps S5905 to S5908, first, a setting value copy processing is executed (step S5905). In the copy processing, information on a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific control work area 221 is stored in a copy area provided in the specific control work area 221. .. As a result, even if the setting value counter information is cleared to "0" in the abnormal clearing process (step S5906) executed thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormal clearing process is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the set value of.

After that, the clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed (step S5906). In the clear processing at the time of abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area is cleared to "0" and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Also, after "0" is cleared, initial setting is performed. On the other hand, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". That is, in the RAM monitoring process according to the present embodiment, when it is specified that an abnormality has occurred in either the specific control work area 221 or the specific control stack area 222, the specific control is performed excluding the copy area. The work area 221 for clearing is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed as it is. It is possible to prevent it. Further, even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to “0”. By not doing so, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0" by the information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. It becomes possible not to.

After that, an abnormal command indicating that the clear processing at the abnormal time has occurred is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S5907). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forced clearing of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, and the speaker unit 54. To output the sound "Forced clear has been executed for specific control." In addition, the character image "Forced clear has been executed for specific control." is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the game hall manager can grasp that the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control have been forcibly cleared.

After that, the setting value updating process is executed (step S5908). The processing content of the setting value update processing is the same as step S5412 in the RAM monitoring processing (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment.

As described above, in the RAM monitoring process executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data, information abnormality is monitored in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. However, the abnormal information is not monitored for the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224. The monitoring of the information abnormality of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is performed by a process corresponding to the non-specific control in which the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data are used. Is executed.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the management execution processing executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The management execution process is executed by reading the program of the subroutine in the management process (FIG. 70) as in the fifteenth embodiment. Further, the processes of steps S6001 to S6016 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

In steps S6001 to S6008 and steps S6010 to S6016, the same processes as steps S3901 to S3915 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment are executed. In step S6009, another monitoring process is executed. When the separate monitoring process is executed, the subroutine program corresponding to the separate monitoring process set in the non-specific control program is executed. However, when executing the subroutine program, the separate monitoring process is executed. Information for specifying the return address of the later management execution processing is written in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the push command. Then, when the separate monitoring process is completed, the information for identifying the return address is read out by the pop command, and the process returns to the program of the management execution process indicated by the return address.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing another monitoring process. The processes of steps S6101 to S6108 in the separate monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

First, the monitoring process of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S6101). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S6101 (step S6102: YES), the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed (step S6103). In this case, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are all cleared to “0”. This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

On the other hand, in step S6103, the work area 221, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if the information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are " It is possible not to clear "0".

In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0", but the management start flag is not cleared to "0". It may be configured. In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the management start flag are cleared to "0", but the operation result storage area 234 is not cleared to "0". It may be configured. In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to "0", but the operation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are not cleared to "0". It may be configured.

After that, clear notification processing is executed (step S6104). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been cleared to “0” is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clearing of the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the speaker unit 54 displays “forcibly clearing history information. The voice is output. Further, the character image "History information has been forcibly cleared." is displayed on the pattern display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the game hall manager can grasp that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

When a negative determination is made in step S6102 or the processing of step S6104 is executed, the monitoring processing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S6105). The content of the monitoring process is the same as step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S6105 (step S6106: YES), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed (step S6107). This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the non-specific control stack area 224.

On the other hand, in step S6107, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are " It is possible not to clear "0".

After that, a clear notification process is executed (step S6108). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the stack area 224 for non-specific control has been cleared to “0” is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a mode corresponding to the forcible clearing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and causes the speaker unit 54 to display "the stack for non-specific control is It was forcibly cleared." is output. In addition, the character image "The stack of non-specific control has been forcibly cleared." is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the game hall manager can grasp that the stack area 224 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

When the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, the program address of step S6010 in the management execution process (FIG. 94) is uniquely set as the information of the return address after the execution of the separate monitoring process. .. As a result, even if the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, it is possible to return to the program that should be restored in the management execution process. Further, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the storage order in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

According to the above configuration, monitoring whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control in the main CPU 63, and Monitoring of whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed in a process corresponding to the non-specific control in the main CPU 63. Thereby, not only the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 to be used are clearly distinguished by the processing corresponding to the specific control and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, but also the area of the main RAM 65 to be monitored. It is also possible to clearly distinguish 221 to 224.

When the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0”, it is information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the specific control and is stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The saved information is also cleared to "0". In this case, even if the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and returns to the process corresponding to the specific control, it may not be possible to return to the state before the process corresponding to the non-specific control starts. Therefore, when the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0”, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control may be cleared to “0”. Further, in the configuration, the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to “0”, and therefore, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is returned to the process corresponding to the specific control, the specific control is performed. The setting value update process may be executed first as the corresponding process.

<Twenty-sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that in the twentieth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the twentieth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the twentieth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the management process executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S6201 to S6219 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S6201). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is the process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the later-described management execution process which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

After that, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as "LD HL,SP" (step S6202). In this case, the information amount of the stack pointer is 16 bits, and the information amount of each of the H register and the L register is 8 bits. , And 8-bit information consecutive from the lower side of the stack pointer is overwritten on the L register.

After that, as "LD (HL), 0", the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is set to "0" by the load instruction. It is cleared (step S6203). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in step S6202, and the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is not updated until the process of step S6203 is executed. Since it has not been performed, in step S6203, the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0".

After that, as "LD SP, SP-1," the load instruction updates the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order in the stack area 222 for specific control. (Step S6204). When the stack area 222 for specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and is added each time the information to be stored is added. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222. Therefore, in step S6204, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area on the side where the address is smaller by one in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the processing of step S6204, the storage area in the next order is set as the storage object of the information by the next push command with respect to the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6203, and in step S6203. The storage area cleared to “0” is set as a target for reading information by the next pop command.

After that, as "LD WA, 0", the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6205). Also, as "LD BC,0", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6206). Also, as "LD DE,0", the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6207). Also, as "LD HL,0", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6208). Further, as "LD IX,0", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the load instruction (step S6209). Further, as "LD IY,0", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6210).

In addition to the flag register, various registers of the main CPU 63 include general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S6205 to S6210, the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are set. Clear "0". The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the management execution process (step S6212) that is a process corresponding to non-specific control. Before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the states of these registers are cleared by clearing "0" to the management execution process (step S6212) which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. In addition, it is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

The information of the WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control starts after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends. This is unnecessary information in the process corresponding to the specific control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the specific control that is restored after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends.

After that, as a “POP PSW”, a pop instruction is used to read information from the storage area in the writing order one before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control, The read information is overwritten in the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6211). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the pop instruction is executed in step S6211 is the storage area of the next write order with respect to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control which is cleared to “0” in step S6203. It is the information corresponding to. Therefore, the storage area in the write order that is one before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is the storage area in which “0” is cleared in step S6203. .. Then, by overwriting the flag register of the main CPU 63 with the information read from this storage area, the flag register becomes a state where "0" is cleared. Note that one storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), and the flag register of the main CPU 63 also has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). .. By clearing the flag register to "0" prior to the execution of the management execution process (step S6212) which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control, the state of the flag register is set before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. The state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started can be achieved.

After that, the management execution process is started by reading the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S6212). In this case, the information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the management execution process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

The content of the management execution process is the same as the management execution process (FIG. 82) in the twentieth embodiment. Therefore, after the check processing is completed in the management execution processing, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are cleared to "0". As a result, these registers are cleared to "0" before returning from the process corresponding to the non-specific control to the process corresponding to the specific control, and the states of these registers are reset before returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. The state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started can be achieved.

After returning to the management processing program after executing the management execution processing, the processing for clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" is executed. Specifically, first, as “PUSH HL”, a push instruction saves information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 to the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6213). After the execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is the information corresponding to the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area in which the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

After that, as “LD HL,SP”, the load instruction overwrites the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the HL register of the main CPU 63 (step S6214). In this case, the information amount of the stack pointer is 16 bits, and the information amount of each of the H register and the L register is 8 bits. , And 8-bit information consecutive from the lower side of the stack pointer is overwritten on the L register.

After that, as “LD (HL), 0”, the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is set to “0” by the load instruction. Clear (step S6215). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in step S6214, and the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is not updated until the process of step S6215 is executed. Since it has not been performed, in step S6215, the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0".

After that, as "LDSP, SP-1," the load instruction updates the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 to the information of the address of the storage area to be written next in the stack area 222 for specific control. (Step S6216). When the stack area 222 for specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and is added each time the information to be stored is added. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222. Therefore, in step S6216, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area on the side where the address is smaller by one in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the processing of step S6216, the storage area in the next order is set as the storage target of information by the next push command with respect to the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6215, and in step S6215. The storage area cleared to “0” is set as a target for reading information by the next pop command.

After that, as a "POP PSW", a pop instruction is used to read information from the storage area in the write order immediately before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control, The read information is overwritten in the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6217). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the execution of the pop instruction in step S6217 is the storage area of the next writing order with respect to the storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control which is cleared to “0” in step S6215. It is the information corresponding to. Therefore, the storage area in the writing order that is one before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is the one for specific control which is cleared to “0” in step S6215. It becomes a storage area in the stack area 222. Then, by overwriting the flag register of the main CPU 63 with the information read from this storage area, the flag register becomes a state where "0" is cleared. Note that one storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), and the flag register of the main CPU 63 also has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). .. By clearing the flag register to “0” after execution of the management execution process (step S6212) which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control, the main CPU 63 is set after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. It is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the device is started. Further, when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is one before.

After that, as "POP HL", the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6213 is restored to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the pop command (step S6218). Since the HL register is cleared to “0” immediately before the management execution process (step S6212) is completed, the information cleared to “0” is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6213. At the same time, in step S6218, the information cleared to "0" is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63, and as a result, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0". When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

After that, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted, the interrupt permission is set (step S6219). This allows new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above structure, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects described in the twentieth embodiment.

The configuration is such that the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed. This eliminates the need to save the flag register information used in the process corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65 in the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed. Therefore, there is no need to secure a capacity for saving the information.

Also, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" even when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is returned to the process corresponding to the specific control. As a result, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it becomes possible to return the state of the flag register to the state immediately before the start of the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

The state in which the flag register is cleared to "0" is the state when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the flag register to a predetermined state when starting the process corresponding to the non-specific control and when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control.

The information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is information that is not used in the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. As a result, even if the flag register is cleared to “0” when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is finished. It becomes possible not to affect.

A predetermined storage area of the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", and the flag register is cleared to "0" by overwriting the flag register with the information of the cleared "0" storage area. The composition. This makes it possible to clear the flag register to "0" even if the flag register is restricted from being directly cleared by a load instruction.

The flag register may be initialized instead of clearing the flag register to "0". That is, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is temporarily cleared to "0" and then the information is set to the initial state. In S6204 and S6211, the flag register may be set so as to be in this initial state. In this case, the flag register is set so as to be in the initial state also in steps S6213 to S6218, so that the state of the flag register is set to the non-specific control when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the process corresponding to is started.

Further, in steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211, instead of the configuration in which the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0", the configuration may be such that all flag registers are set to "1". In this case, by setting "1" in all of the flag registers also in steps S6213 to S6218, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the state corresponding to the flag register starts the process corresponding to the non-specific control. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the operation.

Further, instead of the processing of steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211, "LD PSW,0" may be configured to directly clear the flag register of the main CPU 63 by "0" by a load instruction. Further, instead of the processes of steps S6213 to S6218, the flag register of the main CPU 63 may be directly cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD PSW,0".

Further, instead of the configuration of executing the processing of steps S6213 and S6218, the configuration may be such that "LD HL,0" clears the HL register by "0" by a load instruction. Even in this case, it is possible to restore the state of the HL register to the state immediately before the management execution process, which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of clearing the flag register to “0” is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the process may be executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

<Twenty-seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that in the twentieth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the twentieth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the twentieth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the management process executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S6301 to S6323 in the management process are executed in the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) (step S6301). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is the process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the later-described management execution process which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

Then, as "PUSH AF", a push instruction stores each of the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 and the information of the flag register corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The area and the storage area of the next writing order are saved in the storage area (step S6302). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. Evacuated. When the push command is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP HL", a pop instruction overwrites the HL register of the main CPU 63 with the information of the A register and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6302 (step S6303). .. In this case, the information of the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is L of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. The H register and the L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

After that, as "LD A, 0", the A register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6304). Then, as "LDL, A", the load instruction overwrites the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 in the L register of the main CPU 63 (step S6305), and at the same time as "LD H, A", by the load instruction. The information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63 (step S6306). Since the A register is cleared to "0" in step S6304, the L register and the H register are overwritten with the information of the A register to clear the L register and the H register to "0". Becomes

After that, as “PUSH HL”, the push instruction causes the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 to correspond to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area are saved (step S6307). Since the H register and the L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the H register and the information of the L register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. Evacuated. When the push command is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "LD BC, 0", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6308). Further, as "LD DE,0", the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6309). Further, as "LD IX,0", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6310). Further, as "LD IY,0", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6311).

In addition to the flag register, various registers of the main CPU 63 include general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S6308 to S6311, the BC register, the DE register, the IX register, and the IY register, which are some of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are cleared to "0". Also, the HL register is cleared to "0" in steps S6305 and S6306. These BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the management execution process (step S6313) which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. Before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the states of these registers are cleared by clearing "0" to the management execution processing (step S6313) which is the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. In addition, it is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

Further, each information of the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is changed to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is finished. This is unnecessary information in the corresponding processing. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem occurs in the processing corresponding to the specific control that is restored after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends.

After that, as "POP AF", by a pop instruction, the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6307 are overwritten in the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 ( Step S6312). In this case, the information of the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is flagged by the main CPU 63. Register is overwritten. Since the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control are all "0" information, the A register of the main CPU 63 is The state is cleared to "0" and the flag register of the main CPU 63 is also cleared to "0". This makes it possible to set the state of the flag register to the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

After that, the management execution process is started by reading the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S6313). In this case, the information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the management execution process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

Note that after the check processing is completed in the management execution processing, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register are cleared to "0". As a result, these registers are cleared to "0" before returning from the process corresponding to the non-specific control to the process corresponding to the specific control, and the states of these registers are reset before returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. The state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started can be achieved.

After returning to the management processing program after executing the management execution processing, the processing for clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" is executed. Specifically, first, as “PUSH HL”, a push instruction saves information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 to the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6314). After the execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is the information corresponding to the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area in which the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

Then, as "PUSH AF", a push instruction stores each of the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 and the information of the flag register corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order are saved to the storage area (step S6315). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. Evacuated. When the push command is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP HL", a pop instruction overwrites the HL register of the main CPU 63 with the information of the A register and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6315 (step S6316). .. In this case, the information of the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is L of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. The H register and the L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

After that, as “LD A,0”, the A register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to “0” by a load instruction (step S6317). Then, the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LDL, A" (step S6318), and the load instruction by "LD H, A" The information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63 (step S6319). Since the A register has been cleared to "0" in step S6317, the L register and the H register have been cleared to "0" by overwriting the information of the A register in the L register and the H register, respectively. Becomes

After that, as “PUSH HL”, the push instruction causes the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 to correspond to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area are saved (step S6320). Since the H register and the L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the H register and the information of the L register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. Evacuated. When the push command is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "POP AF", by a pop command, the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6320 are overwritten in the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 ( Step S6321). In this case, the information of the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is flagged by the main CPU 63. Register is overwritten. Since the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control are all “0” information, the A register of the main CPU 63 is changed to the A register by executing the process of step S6321. The state is cleared to "0" and the flag register of the main CPU 63 is also cleared to "0". By clearing the flag register to "0" after the management execution process (step S6313) which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control, the state of the flag register is terminated after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, and then the main CPU 63 It is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of the operating power to the device is started. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

After that, as "POP HL", the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6314 is restored to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the pop command (step S6322). Since the HL register is cleared to “0” immediately before the management execution process (step S6313) ends, in step S6314 the information cleared to “0” is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. At the same time, in step S6322, the "0"-cleared information is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63, and as a result, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0". When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

After that, in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted, the interrupt permission is set (step S6323). This allows new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, the flag register of the main CPU 63 can be cleared to “0” without executing the process of clearing “0” by the load instruction to the predetermined storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control. Becomes As a result, even if the configuration is such that the "0" clearing to a predetermined storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control is restricted by the load instruction, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0". Is possible.

The flag register may be initialized instead of clearing the flag register to "0". That is, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is temporarily cleared to "0" and then the information is set to the initial state. In S6307 and S6312, the flag register may be set so as to be in this initial state. In this case, the flag register is set so as to be in the initial state also in steps S6314 to S6322, so that the state of the flag register is set to the non-specific control when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the process corresponding to is started.

Further, in steps S6302 to S6307 and step S6312, instead of the configuration in which the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0", the configuration may be such that "1" is set in all the flag registers. In this case, also in steps S6314 to S6322, by setting "1" in all of the flag registers, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the state of the flag register starts the process corresponding to the non-specific control. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the operation.

Further, the processing of steps S6302 and S6303 may not be executed. In this case, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, the processing of steps S6315 and S6316 may not be executed. In this case, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, instead of the configuration for executing the processes of steps S6302 to S6306, as "LD HL,0", the load instruction clears the HL register to "0", and then the HL register cleared to "0" is pushed. Thus, the flag register of the main CPU 63 may be cleared to "0" by saving the information in the stack area 222 for specific control and then returning the saved information to the AF register by the pop instruction.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of clearing the flag register to “0” is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the process may be executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

<Twenty-eighth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the management processing executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S6401 to S6416 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S6401). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is the process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the later-described management execution process which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

After that, as "PUSH WA", the information of the WA register (that is, the W register and the A register) of the main CPU 63 corresponds to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push instruction. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area are saved (step S6402). Since the W register and the A register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the W register and the A register are individually saved in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. It When the push command is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LD A, PSW" (step S6403). In this case, the flag register and the A register both have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). Then, as "LD (_FGBUF), A", the load instruction saves the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 to the FG buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6404). Since the information in the flag register is overwritten in the A register in step S6403, the information in the flag register is saved in the work area 221 for specific control by executing step S6404.

After that, as the "POP WA", the information of the WA register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6402 is returned to the WA register of the main CPU 63 by the pop command (step S6405). As a result, even if the A register is used to save the information in the flag register to the work area 221 for specific control, the state of the A register can be returned to the state before the saving. Become. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

After that, the management execution process is started by reading the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S6406). In this case, the information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the management execution process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

The content of the management execution process is the same as the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment. Therefore, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control before the check processing is started in the management execution processing. In addition, the information saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control after the check processing in the management execution processing is stored in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. Will be returned to. This allows the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 to be in the same state before and after the check process.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing content of the management execution processing may be the same as the management execution processing (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment, and the management execution processing in the eighteenth embodiment. The configuration may be the same as that of (FIG. 79) or the same as the management execution process (FIG. 80) of the nineteenth embodiment.

After returning to the management processing program after the execution of the management execution processing, processing for returning the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the state before the execution of the management execution processing is executed. Specifically, first, as "PUSH HL", a push instruction saves the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 to the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6407). After the execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is the information corresponding to the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area in which the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

Thereafter, as "PUSH WA", a push instruction saves the information in the WA register of the main CPU 63 to the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6408). After the execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is the information corresponding to the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area in which the information of the WA register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

After that, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LD HL,SP" (step S6409). In this case, the information amount of the stack pointer is 16 bits, and the information amount of each of the H register and the L register is 8 bits. , And 8-bit information consecutive from the lower side of the stack pointer is overwritten on the L register.

After that, the information of the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6406 is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as "LD A, (_FGBUF)" (step S6410). Then, as "LD (HL), A", by the load instruction, the main side is stored in the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer stored in the HL register of the main side CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. Information on the A register of the CPU 63 is stored (step S6411). As a result, the information of the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6404 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "LDSP, SP-1," the load instruction updates the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 to the information of the address of the storage area to be written next in the stack area 222 for specific control. (Step S6412). When the stack area 222 for specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and is added each time the information to be stored is added. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222. Therefore, in step S6412, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area on the side where the address is smaller by one in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the processing of step S6412, the storage areas of the next order are set as the storage objects of the information by the next push command with respect to the storage areas in which the information of the A register is saved in step S6411, and The storage area in which the information of the A register is saved in S6411 is set as the information read target of the next pop command.

After that, as a "POP PSW", a pop instruction is used to read information from the storage area in the write order immediately before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control, The read information is overwritten in the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6413). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the execution of the pop instruction in step S6413 is the information corresponding to the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area in which the information of the A register is saved in step S6411. Has become. Therefore, the storage area in the write order that is one before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is the storage area in which the information of the A register is saved in step S6411. It becomes an area. Then, by overwriting the flag register of the main CPU 63 with the information read from this storage area, the information of the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6404 is the flag of the main CPU 63. It will be restored to the register. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control is one before.

After that, as a "POP WA", the information of the WA register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6408 is restored to the WA register of the main CPU 63 by the pop command (step S6414). When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before. As "POP HL", the pop instruction is used to restore the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6407 to the HL register of the main CPU 63 (step S6415). When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

After that, the interrupt permission is set to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted (step S6416). This allows new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started from the situation where the process corresponding to the specific control is being executed, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is not stored in the stack area 222 for the specific control. It is possible to save the work in the work area 221 for specific control. When the process corresponding to the non-specific control is restored to the process corresponding to the specific control, the information of the flag register saved in the work area 221 for the specific control is the flag of the main CPU 63. It is restored to the register. As a result, the information may be returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 from the storage area of the work area 221 for specific control designated on the program without referring to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63. Even when the information of the stack pointer of the side CPU 63 is rewritten due to noise or the like, the information can be restored to the flag register of the main side CPU 63.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of saving the information in the flag register in the main RAM 65 is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the configuration may be performed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of returning the flag register information saved in the main RAM 65 to the flag register of the main CPU 63 is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is performed. It may be configured to be executed.

<Twenty-ninth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the management processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S6501 to S6519 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S6501). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is the process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the later-described management execution process which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

After that, as “PUSH HL”, the push instruction causes the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 to correspond to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area are saved (step S6502). Since the H register and the L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the H register and the L register are individually saved in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. It When the push command is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Then, as "PUSH AF", a push instruction stores each of the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 and the information of the flag register corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The area and the storage area in the next writing order are saved to the storage area (step S6503). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. Evacuated. When the push command is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "POP HL", the pop instruction overwrites the HL register of the main CPU 63 with the A register information and the flag register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6503 (step S6504). .. In this case, the information of the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is L of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

After that, as "LD A, L", the information in the L register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S6505). Since the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register in step S6504, the information in the flag register is overwritten in the A register by overwriting the information in the L register in the A register. Become. Then, as "LD (_FGBUF), A", the load instruction saves the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 to the FG buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6506). Since the information of the flag register is overwritten in the A register in step S6505, the information of the flag register is saved in the work area 221 for specific control by executing step S6506.

Then, as "PUSH HL", the push instruction causes the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 to correspond to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area are saved (step S6507). In this case, since the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are overwritten in the HL register in step S6504, the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6507. I made it. When the push command is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "POP AF", a pop instruction overwrites the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 with the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6507 ( Step S6508). In this case, the information of the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is flagged by the main CPU 63. Register is overwritten. The information of the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the information of the A register at the time of step S6503, and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the flag at the time of step S6503. It is the information of the register. Therefore, by executing the processing of step S6508, the states of the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 are returned to the states at the time of step S6503. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

After that, as "POP HL", the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6502 is restored to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the pop command (step S6509). As a result, the state of the HL register of the main CPU 63 returns to the state at the time of step S6502. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

After that, the management execution process is started by reading the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S6510). In this case, the information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the management execution process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

In the management execution process, the information of the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control before the check process is started. After the check processing is completed in the management execution processing, each information saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control is restored to the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. As a result, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register of the main CPU 63 can be set to the same state before and after the check process.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing content of the management execution processing may be the same as the management execution processing (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment, and the management execution processing in the eighteenth embodiment. The configuration may be the same as that of (FIG. 79) or the same as the management execution process (FIG. 80) of the nineteenth embodiment.

After returning to the management processing program after the execution of the management execution processing, processing for returning the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the state before the execution of the management execution processing is executed. Specifically, first, as "PUSH HL", a push instruction saves the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 to the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6511). After the execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is the information corresponding to the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area in which the information of the HL register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

Then, as "PUSH AF", a push instruction stores each of the information of the A register of the main CPU 63 and the information of the flag register corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The area and the storage area of the next writing order are saved to the storage area (step S6512). Since the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information of the A register and the information of the flag register are individually stored in two storage areas having consecutive addresses. Evacuated. When the push command is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as “POP HL”, the pop instruction overwrites the HL register of the main CPU 63 with the information of the A register and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6512 (step S6513). .. In this case, the information of the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is L of the main CPU 63. The register is overwritten. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

Then, the information of the flag register at the time of step S6503 saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6506 by the load instruction as “LD A, (_FGBUF)” is stored in the A register of the main CPU 63. (Step S6514). Then, as "LDL, A", the information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S6515). Since the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 at the time of step S6503 is restored to the A register at the time of step S6503, the information of the A register is overwritten on the L register to the L register at the time of step S6503. The information in the flag register is overwritten.

Then, as "PUSH HL", the push instruction causes the information of the HL register (that is, the H register and the L register) of the main CPU 63 to correspond to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control. The storage area and the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area are saved (step S6516). In this case, since the information of the A register at the time of step S6512 is overwritten in the H register in step S6513, the information of the A register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516. Become. Since the information of the flag register at the time of step S6503 is overwritten in the L register in step S6515, the information of the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516.

After that, as "POP AF", by the pop instruction, the information of the H register and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516 are overwritten in the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 ( Step S6517). In this case, the information of the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is flagged by the main CPU 63. Register is overwritten. The information of the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the information of the A register at the time of step S6512, and the information of the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the flag at the time of step S6503. It is the information of the register. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6517, the state of the A register of the main CPU 63 returns to the state of step S6512, and the state of the flag register returns to the state at the time of step S6503.

Incidentally, the A register of the main CPU 63 is not used in the management execution process. Therefore, the state of the A register at the time of step S6512 is the state of the A register at the time of step S6508, and the state of the A register at the time of step S6508 is the state of the A register at the time of step S6503. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6517, the states of the A register and the flag register of the main CPU 63 are returned to the states at the time of step S6503. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

After that, as "POP HL", the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6511 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the pop command (step S6518). As a result, the state of the HL register of the main CPU 63 is returned to the state at the time of step S6511. When the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area in which the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is two before.

After that, the interrupt permission is set to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted (step S6519). This allows new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is directly executed by the load instruction without executing the process of directly overwriting the information of the flag register from the flag register of the main CPU 63 to another register of the main CPU 63. Can be saved in the work area 221 for specific control.

Note that the information in the flag register is overwritten by the load instruction as "LD (_FGBUF), L" after executing the process in step S6504 instead of executing the process in steps S6505 to S6508. The information of the L register may be saved in the FG buffer to save the information of the flag register in the work area 221 for specific control.

Also, without performing the processing of step S6514 and step S6515, instead of performing the processing of step S6513, as a "LDL, (_FGBUF)" by the load instruction, the work area for specific control The configuration may be such that the flag register information saved in 221 is overwritten in the L register.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of saving the information in the flag register in the main RAM 65 is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the configuration may be performed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of returning the flag register information saved in the main RAM 65 to the flag register of the main CPU 63 is executed in the process corresponding to the specific control, the process corresponding to the non-specific control is performed. It may be configured to be executed.

<Thirtieth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S6601 to S6621 in the main process are executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S6601). In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process is started and waits for a predetermined time for wait (specifically, 1 second) without proceeding to the next process. During the execution period of the power-on weight process, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S6602).

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221 in the main RAM 65 (step S6603). If the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S6603: YES), checksums are calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S6604).

The calculation method of the checksum is arbitrary, but for example, a calculation method of adding all the numerical values of the storage area subject to the checksum calculation can be used. The method of calculating the checksum is the same as the method of calculating the checksum in the power failure process described later. The checksum calculated in the power failure process to be described later is stored in the specific control work area 221, and the storage area of the specific control work area 221 in which this checksum is stored is the checksum calculation. At that time, it is excluded from the storage areas to be calculated.

That is, when the checksum is calculated, some of the storage areas in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are to be calculated. In the storage area to be calculated, the checksum is calculated in the power failure process when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, and then the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is restarted to execute the process of step S6604. Until that time, when the power supply such as the backup power to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is continued, it is basically a storage area in which information is not rewritten. Therefore, the information of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is not changed from the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 to the restart of the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62. In this case, the checksums of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are the same as immediately before the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped. Note that the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum is an area (specifically, a set value counter) in which information of set values indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is set. )It is included.

After that, the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area for the specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped and are stored in the work area 221 for the specific control. The checksum for 222 is read from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S6604 (step S6605). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S6606).

Here, the power failure information storage processing executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S6801 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) described later.

In the power failure information storage process, first, the repeat counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set with the information "10" which is the number of times of repetition for power failure signal (step S6701), and the work area for specific control is also set. The power failure detection counter provided in 221 is cleared to "0" (step S6702).

After that, a process of reading the information of the power failure signal received in the input port of the MPU 62 is executed (step S6703). In this case, when the power failure signal (LOW level power failure signal) corresponding to the fact that the power is not cut off is received, the information “0” is stored in the input port as the non-power failure information, When a power failure signal (HI level power failure signal) corresponding to the occurrence of power cutoff is received, information "1" is stored in the input port as power failure occurrence information. In step S6703, a process of reading the information of the power failure signal into the register of the main CPU 63 is executed.

When the information of the power failure signal read in step S6703 corresponds to the occurrence of power failure (occurrence of power failure) (step S6704: YES), the numerical information of the power failure detection counter is incremented by 1 (step S6705). When a negative determination is made in step S6704 or when the processing of step S6705 is executed, the numerical value information of the repetition counter is decremented by 1 (step S6706). Then, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the repeat counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S6707). When a negative determination is made in step S6707, the process returns to step S6703 and the processes of steps S6703 to S6706 are repeated. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S6707, the operation proceeds to step S6708.

In step S6708, it is determined whether or not the current numerical value information of the power failure detection counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of times corresponding to the power failure occurrence. If it is less than the trigger reference number of times, the power failure information storage processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the number of times is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the power failure process of steps S6709 to S6712 is executed.

Specifically, first, the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step S6709). As a result, when the power failure process is executed normally and the information is stored and retained in the main RAM 65 normally, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started again, the specific control is performed. The power failure flag of the work area 221 of 1 is set to "1".

After that, checksums are calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6710). In this case, the storage areas in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 that are the calculation targets when the checksum is calculated are the checksum calculation targets in step S6604 of the main process (FIG. 100). The storage area is the same as the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. In addition, the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum is an area (specifically, a set value counter) in which information of set values indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is set. )It is included. Then, the calculated checksum is stored in the storage area for storing the checksum in the work area 221 for specific control, which is excluded from the checksum calculation target.

After that, all the output port information in the register of the main CPU 63 is set to "0" (step S6711), and access to the main RAM 65 is prohibited (step S6712). Then, the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

Since the power failure information storage process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process, it is not necessary to execute the timer interrupt process in the middle of power recovery. As a result, it is not necessary to store the address of the process being executed at the time of the power failure as stack information in the main RAM 65, and the processing load of the process at the time of the power failure can be reduced.

Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 100), if a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed (step S6607). In the clear process at the time of non-setting update, in the specific control work area 221, the specific control is performed except for the area (specifically, the setting value counter) in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. The work area 221 for is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode is cleared to "0". The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not being variably displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general electric power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display portion 37a is erased and the general figure display portion is deleted. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is executed. Further, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0” and then the initial setting is executed.

On the other hand, in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not executed normally, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are "0". It becomes possible not to be cleared. Even if an error occurs in the checksum of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to “0”. It is possible to prevent it.

When a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, after the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed in step S6607, the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is confirmed to check the pachinko machine. It is determined whether the set value of 10 is normal (step S6608). Specifically, when the set value set in the set value counter is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or 7 or more, there is an abnormality. Judge that there is. If the set value is abnormal (step S6608: NO), processing for setting a new set value (step S6619 to step S6621) described below is executed. As a result, it is possible to monitor whether or not the set value is normal even when a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606 and the clear processing at the time of non-setting update (step S6607) is executed. In addition, if the set value is abnormal, the set value can be reset.

When the set value is normal (step S6608: YES), power-on setting processing is executed (step S6609). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the work area 221 for specific control such as initialization of the power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S6609 is completed and the process of step S6610 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power-on setting process of step S6609 ends, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S6610 is started. Therefore, the processing for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until the situation is reached.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S6610 to S6613. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S6610 to S6613 is repeatedly executed by utilizing this irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the residual process of steps S6610 to S6613 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed. In steps S6610 to S6613, the same processing as steps S113 to S116 of the main processing (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, "1" is not set in the power failure flag of the work area 221 for specific control, or the checksums do not match. In this case, if the set value is normal after executing the clear process at the time of non-setting update (step S6608: YES), the process proceeds to the process for advancing the game. As a result, even if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not executed normally, the power is turned on again after the operating power supply to the main CPU 63 is started. There is no need to turn it off. Even if an abnormality occurs in the checksum of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, the power is turned on and off again after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. There is no need to operate.

When a positive determination is made in both step S6603 and step S6606, it is determined whether or not the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6614). ). Specifically, when the set value set in the set value counter is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or 7 or more, there is an abnormality. Judge that there is. If the set value is abnormal (step S6614: NO), the process for setting a new set value (step S6619 to step S6621) described below is executed.

If the set value is normal (step S6614: YES), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S6615), and whether the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned ON using the setting key. It is determined whether or not (step S6616), the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S6617), and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11. It is determined whether there is any (step S6618).

In the present embodiment, a front door opening sensor 95 for detecting whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the front door opening sensor The detection result of 95 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a close detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. In the case of, the front door opening sensor 95 sends an opening detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and when receiving the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. The front door frame 14 is specified to be in the open state.

Further, in the present embodiment, a main body opening sensor 96 for detecting whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main body opening sensor The detection result of 96 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 sends an open detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It specifies that the main body 12 is in the open state.

If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S6615: NO), the power-on setting process is executed in step S6609, and then the remaining process of steps S6610 to S6613 is repeated. That is, when the reset button 68c is not pressed, the process proceeds to the process for controlling the progress of the game without executing the clear process of the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control. ..

When the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S6615: YES), and when a negative determination is made in any of steps S6616 to S6618, after executing the clear processing at the time of non-setting update (step S6607). ), on condition that the set value is normal (step S6608: YES), the process proceeds to the process for controlling the progress of the game in step S6609 and subsequent steps. The processing content of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is as already described.

When the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S6615: YES), and when a positive determination is made in all of steps S6616 to S6618, processing for updating the set value is executed. Also, when it is determined in step S6608 or step S6614 that the set value is abnormal, the process for updating the set value is executed.

Specifically, first, a setting value copy process is executed (step S6619). In the copy processing, information on a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific control work area 221 is stored in a copy area provided in the specific control work area 221. .. As a result, even if the setting value counter information is cleared to "0" in the subsequent clearing process at the time of updating the setting (step S6620), the book before the clearing process at the time of updating the setting value is executed. It is possible to grasp the set value of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped).

After that, a clear process at the time of updating the setting is executed (step S6620). In the clear process at the time of updating the settings, the work area 221 for the specific control is set to “0 "Clear and execute the initial settings. As a result, the game times are not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not being variably displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. There is a certain situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general electric power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display portion 37a is erased and the general figure display portion is deleted. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, in the clearing process at the time of updating the setting, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is executed. Further, in the clearing process at the time of updating the setting, the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared to “0”. Further, in the clearing process at the time of updating the settings, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0” and then the initial setting is executed.

On the other hand, in the clearing process at the time of updating the settings, the area indicating whether the win/win lottery mode is the high-probability mode is not cleared to "0". Can be maintained in the mode before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, since the copy area is not cleared to "0" in the clearing process at the time of setting update, it is possible to specify the set value set before the clearing process at the time of setting update is executed. The configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and the setting value counter used for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 may not be cleared to “0” in the clearing process at the time of updating the setting. In the clearing process, the area indicating whether the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode may be cleared to "0".

In the clear processing at the time of updating the settings, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if the setting value updating process capable of changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". It becomes possible to do so.

After that, in step S6621, the setting value update processing is executed. The processing content of the setting value updating processing is the same as the setting value updating processing (FIG. 85) in the twenty-second embodiment. After executing the setting value update process, the process proceeds to the process for controlling the progress of the game after step S6609.

According to the above configuration, when the setting value is abnormal, the setting value updating process is started without requiring a special operation by the game hall manager. Then, when the set value updating process is completed, the process proceeds to a process for controlling the progress of the game. As a result, it becomes possible to play the game in the situation where the normal set value is set. On the other hand, in order to complete the set value update processing, an OFF operation or the like by the set key to the set key insertion portion 68a is required, so the set value is arbitrarily set by a person other than the manager of the game hall and the game is started. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event of being lost.

Next, a configuration for forcibly stopping the progress of the game when the main CPU 63 cannot perform various processes normally will be described. FIG. 102A is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the MPU 62.

As shown in FIG. 102A, the MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, and a main RAM 65, as well as a reset signal output unit 251 and a program monitoring unit 252. The reset signal output unit 251 has a function of outputting a reset signal to the main CPU 63. Specifically, the reset signal output unit 251 uses the reset signal as the HI level signal when the operating power is supplied from the power supply/launch control device 78 and the output disable condition is not satisfied. The CPU 63 outputs the reset signal to the main CPU 63 when the power supply/launch control device 78 does not supply the operating power, or when the operating disable is satisfied even when the operating power is supplied. Do not output to. The main CPU 63 executes various processes when the operating power is supplied from the power supply/launch control device 78 and the reset signal is received from the reset signal output unit 251, and Even if the operating power is supplied, if the reset signal is not received from the reset signal output unit 251, various processes are not executed. Further, when the main CPU 63 is supplied with operating power from the power supply/launch control device 78, it switches from a situation in which no reset signal is received from the reset signal output unit 251 to a situation in which a reset signal is received. Then, the main process (FIG. 100) is started.

The program monitoring unit 252 has a function of monitoring whether or not the main CPU 63 can normally perform various processes. Specifically, the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the value of the program counter provided in the main CPU 63 is an abnormal value. The program counter is for storing an address where an instruction to be executed in the main CPU 63 is stored. The possible values of the program counter are defined, and the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether or not the value of the program counter is a value other than the possible values. Further, the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the address designated as the write destination area is an abnormal address when the information is written in the work area 221 for specific control by the load instruction. The program monitoring unit 252 may be configured to monitor whether or not the address designated as the read target area is an abnormal address when the information is read from the specific control work area 221 by the load instruction.

When the program monitoring unit 252 determines that the value of the program counter is an abnormal value, or when the address specified when writing information by the load instruction is determined to be an abnormal address, the reset signal output unit 251. Outputs a monitoring abnormality signal to. When the reset signal output unit 251 receives the monitoring abnormality signal from the program monitoring unit 252, the reset signal output unit 251 temporarily stops the output of the reset signal even if the operating power is supplied from the power supply/launch control device 78, and continues the stop. After the output of the reset signal is stopped for a period, the output of the reset signal is restarted. The stop continuation period is a period sufficient for the main CPU 63 to specify that the output of the reset signal is stopped. As a result, when the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value, or when the address specified when writing the information by the load instruction becomes an abnormal address, the main CPU 63 is turned OFF/ON through the reset signal. The main processing is executed at.

FIG. 102B is a time chart showing how the reset signal output section 251 outputs the reset signal. 102(b1) shows a period during which operating power is supplied from the power supply/launch control device 78, FIG. 102(b2) shows a period during which a reset signal is output from the reset signal output unit 251, and FIG. b3) shows the timing at which the monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252.

First, the case where the monitoring abnormality signal is not output from the program monitoring unit 252 will be described. When the power supply/launch control device 78 starts supplying the operating power to the MPU 62 at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 102(b1). , T2, the reset signal output unit 251 starts to output the reset signal as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 102(b1), the supply of operating power from the power supply/launch control device 78 to the MPU 62 is stopped, so that the timing of t4 is reset as shown in FIG. 102(b2). The output of the reset signal from the signal output unit 251 is stopped.

Next, description will be made regarding the case where the monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252. At t5, as shown in FIG. 102(b1), supply of operating power from the power supply/launch control device 78 to the MPU 62 is started. As a result, at the timing of t6, the reset signal output unit 251 starts outputting the reset signal as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing of t7, the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value, or the address specified when the information is written by the load instruction becomes an abnormal address, so that the program monitoring is performed as shown in FIG. 102(b3). A monitoring abnormality signal is output from the unit 252 to the reset signal output unit 251. As a result, as shown in FIG. 102(b2), the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is temporarily stopped at the timing of t7 and restarted at the subsequent timing of t8.

In this case, the main CPU 63 stops the execution of various processes at the timing of t7, and starts the main process (FIG. 100) at the timing of t8 which is the timing at which the rising edge of the reset signal is confirmed. However, since the process at the time of power failure is not executed when the execution of the various processes of the main CPU 63 is stopped, the main process in the situation where the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" (Fig. 100). And the main processing (FIG. 100) is started without storing the checksums of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. Therefore, in the main process (FIG. 100), a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, and the clear process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607) is executed. As a result, when the program monitoring unit 252 outputs the monitoring abnormality signal when the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value or the address specified when writing information by the load instruction becomes an abnormal address, It is possible to execute a clear process at the time of non-setting update, in which a predetermined storage area of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 is cleared to “0”. ..

However, in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if the program monitoring unit 252 outputs a monitoring error signal due to an abnormal value of the program counter or an address specified when writing information by a load instruction becomes an abnormal address, It is possible to prevent the work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to “0”.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 102(b), after that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 102(b1), the supply of the operating power from the power supply/launch control device 78 to the MPU 62 is stopped, so that the timing of t10 is reached. As shown in FIG. 102(b2), the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is stopped.

Next, the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) in a situation where the processes of steps S6610 to S6613 are executed in the main process (FIG. 100). The program corresponding to the timer interrupt processing is set to the program for specific control.

In steps S6801 to S6819, the same processes as steps S5201 to S5219 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86) in the twenty-second embodiment are executed. These processes are executed in the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data. After that, the setting monitoring process is executed (step S6820). FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the setting monitoring process.

By confirming the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control, it is determined whether or not the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal (step S6901). Specifically, when the set value set in the set value counter is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or 7 or more, there is an abnormality. Judge that there is.

If the set value is abnormal (step S6901: NO), first, a copy process of the set value is executed (step S6902). In the copy processing, information on a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific control work area 221 is stored in a copy area provided in the specific control work area 221. .. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the set value of the pachinko machine 10 before the execution of the set value updating process executed thereafter.

After that, an abnormality command indicating that the abnormality of the set value has occurred is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S6903). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality in the set value, and also causes the speaker 54 to emit a voice message "abnormality in the set value has been detected." Output. In addition, the character image "Abnormality of the set value is detected." is displayed on the pattern display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the game hall manager can know that the set value abnormality has occurred.

After that, the set value updating process is executed (step S6904). That is, every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is executed, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value, and when the occurrence of the set value abnormality is specified, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is reset. To perform the setting value update processing. The processing content of the setting value updating processing is the same as the setting value updating processing (FIG. 85) in the twenty-second embodiment. Therefore, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated one step at a time, and the set value being selected is confirmed by detecting the game ball with the outlet detection sensor 48a. The set value that is being updated and the set value that has been confirmed are displayed on the third notification display device 69c. After that, when the setting key insertion unit 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the ending condition of the set value updating process is satisfied. After executing the set value updating process, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103).

Here, in the set value updating process, it is not determined that the ending condition is satisfied only by the setting key inserting section 68a being in the OFF state, and the setting key inserting section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. If it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied. When the setting value updating process is executed in the setting monitoring process, since the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state at the start of the setting value updating process, the end condition of the setting value updating process is satisfied. It is necessary to insert a setting key into the setting key insertion portion 68a, perform an ON operation once, and then perform an OFF operation. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the setting value updating process from ending even though the game hall manager has not performed a regular operation.

When the setting key insertion portion 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state and the ending condition of the setting value updating process is satisfied, by executing step S5111 in the setting value updating process (FIG. 85), It is compared whether or not the set value stored in the copy area in the specific control work area 221 and the set value currently set in the set value counter in the specific control work area 221 are the same. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value set before the set value update process (step S6904) is executed and the set value set in the current set value update process are the same. When both set values are the same (step S5112: NO), the notification process at the time of non-change (step S5113) is executed to perform the setting maintenance notification already described. On the other hand, if the two setting values are different (step S5112: YES), the notification process at the time of change (step S5114) is executed so that the setting change notification described above is performed.

In the configuration where the set value update process is executed when a set value error occurs, the set value that was set before the set value update process and the set value set by the set value update process are set. If the set value is the same, the setting maintenance notification is given. As a result, even if the setting value update process is executed due to a setting value error, the setting maintenance notification will be performed by resetting the setting value that was set in the previous situation, and the setting value update due to the setting value error Even if the processing is executed, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the set value has not changed. By the way, since it is common to record the set value of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall, it is possible to execute the set value update process due to the set value abnormality so that the set value becomes the recorded set value. It is possible.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 103), after executing the setting monitoring processing in step S6820, the management processing is executed in step S6821. When the management process is executed, the subroutine program corresponding to the management process set in the specific control program is executed. The information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process in is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the management process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the program returns to the timer interrupt processing program indicated by the return address.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the management processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S7001 to S7005 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 103) (step S7001). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103), which is a process corresponding to the specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of a management execution process, which will be described later, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control. Is possible.

After that, as "LD (_PSWBUF), PSW", the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the PSW buffer set in the specific control work area 221 by a load instruction (step S7002). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of an arithmetic instruction, a rotate instruction, an input/output instruction, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process is started, the flag register in the state before being changed after the subroutine is called or the subroutine is started is saved. Information can be saved in the work area 221 for specific control.

After that, the management execution process is started by reading the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S7003). In this case, the information for specifying the return address of the management process after the execution of the management execution process is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the management execution process is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the process returns to the management process program indicated by the return address.

After returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, "LD PSW, (_PSWBUF)" was saved to the PSW buffer in the specific control work area 221 in step S7002 by a load command. The information in the flag register is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7004). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S7002 was previously executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

After that, the interrupt permission is set in order to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted (step S7005). This enables a new execution of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S7101 to S7116 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

In steps S7101 to S7108 and steps S710 to S7116, the same processing as steps S4501 to S4515 of the management execution processing (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment is executed. Also, in step S7109, another monitoring process is executed. When the separate monitoring process is executed, the subroutine program corresponding to the separate monitoring process set in the non-specific control program is executed, but after executing the separate monitoring process, the subroutine program is executed. Information for specifying the return address of the management execution process in (1) is written in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the push command. Then, when the separate monitoring process is completed, the information for identifying the return address is read out by the pop command, and the process returns to the program of the management execution process indicated by the return address.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing another monitoring process. The processes of steps S7201 to S7206 in the separate monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

In the separate monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the value of the pointer indicating the processing position of the process executed in the non-specific control program exceeds the normal numerical range (step S7201). Further, the information stored in the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is obviously abnormal information. It is determined whether or not (step S7202). For example, when the value of the normal out counter 231e in the normal counter area 231 is "0" but the value of the normal general prize winning counter 231a is 1000 or more, it is determined to be abnormal. Further, it is determined whether the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is obviously abnormal information (step S7203). For example, when any of the 62nd to 64th parameters is not "0" even though the 61st parameter is "0", it is determined to be abnormal.

If an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S7201 to S7203, it is determined that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and a partial clearing process of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed. (Step S7204). In the partial clear process, the storage areas other than the management start flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". In this case, all of the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to “0”. This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

In addition, by not clearing the management start flag to "0", it becomes possible to maintain the state in which the management start flag is already set to "1", and the pachinko machine 10 has already continued in the game hall. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being regulated in the shipping stage regarding the collection of the history information even though the pachinko machine 10 is used. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and in step S7204, the entire work area 223 for non-specific control including the management start flag may be cleared to "0".

Also, in step S7204, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0". In the stack area 224 for non-specific control, information of various registers used in the processing corresponding to the specific control in steps S7102 to S7107 in the management execution processing (FIG. 106) is saved. In this case, by not clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0", the stack area for non-specific control is information of various registers used in the process corresponding to this specific control. It is possible to prevent the information saved in 224 from being erased. Further, the stack area 224 for non-specific control stores the return address information of the management execution process (FIG. 106) after the completion of another monitoring process. By not clearing it, it becomes possible to prevent the information at this return address from being erased.

After that, initialization processing is executed (step S7205). In the initial setting process, the initial setting is performed for the storage area for which “0” is cleared in the work area 223 for non-specific control in step S7204.

After that, a clear notification process is executed (step S7206). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been cleared to “0” is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clearing of the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the speaker unit 54 displays “forcibly clearing history information. The voice is output. Further, the character image "History information has been forcibly cleared." is displayed on the pattern display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification may be ended when the notification end operation is performed by the game hall manager. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the notification, the game hall manager can grasp that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

If a negative determination is made in all of steps S7201 to S7203, or if the process of step S7206 is executed, another monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the monitoring execution process (FIG. 106).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

When the program monitoring unit 252 identifies that the address specified when the information is written by the load instruction is an abnormal address, the reset signal output unit 251 turns the reset signal from OFF to ON, whereby the main CPU 63 Then, the main process (FIG. 100) is executed as in the case where the supply of operating power is newly started. When the reset signal is turned from OFF to ON, the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1" and the checksum at the time of power failure is stored in the specific control work area 221. Since this has not been done, the clear process (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is forcibly executed. In the clear process at the time of non-setting update, the storage area other than the storage area in which the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to “0” and the stack area 222 for specific control is set to “ 0” is cleared, and the initial setting process of these areas is executed. As a result, when there is a possibility that information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are On the other hand, it is possible to eliminate the information abnormality by executing the “0” clearing process and the initial setting process.

When the program monitoring unit 252 identifies that the value of the program counter of the main CPU 63 is an abnormal value, the reset signal output unit 251 turns the reset signal from OFF to ON, so that the main CPU 63 outputs the operating power. The main processing (FIG. 100) is executed in the same manner as when the supply is newly started. When the reset signal is turned from OFF to ON, the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1" and the checksum at the time of power failure is stored in the specific control work area 221. Since this has not been done, the clear process (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is forcibly executed. In the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the internal storage area of the main CPU 63 including various registers is cleared to “0” and the initial setting processing is executed. As a result, when there is a possibility that an information abnormality has occurred in the internal storage area of the main CPU 63, the internal storage area of the main CPU 63 is cleared by executing "0" clear and initialization processing. It is possible to eliminate the information abnormality.

On the other hand, in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, since the program monitoring unit 252 has identified the information abnormality as described above, “0” is cleared in the internal storage area of the main CPU 63, the specific control work area 221, and the specific control stack area 222. Even when the initial setting process is executed with, it is possible to prevent the information of the game history from being erased and prevent the information of the management result of the game history from being erased. It becomes possible to do.

If the power failure flag is not set to "1" in the main process (Fig. 100) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, or if the checksums do not match, clear at the time of non-setting update In the configuration in which the process (step S6607) is executed, when the program monitoring unit 252 identifies the occurrence of the information abnormality, the reset signal is turned from OFF to ON so that the power failure flag is not set to "1". At the same time, the main process (FIG. 100) is executed in a situation where the checksum is not stored. This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality specified by the program monitoring unit 252 by using the configuration for eliminating the information abnormality at the start of supplying the operating power.

In the configuration in which whether or not the checksum is normal is monitored in the main process (FIG. 100) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the checksum calculation target is for specific control. Work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control are included, and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not included. This makes it possible to specify whether or not the information abnormality has occurred only in the storage area corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65.

When it is determined that the checksum is abnormal in the main process (FIG. 100) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the clear process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607) is executed. However, in the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the processing for clearing “0” and the initialization processing are executed in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. On the other hand, the process of clearing "0" is not executed in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing corresponding to the specific control from being continuously executed in the same state despite the occurrence of the information abnormality in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. In addition, the storage area corresponding to the non-specific control in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" when the information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is triggered. It becomes possible not to.

In the power failure information storage processing (FIG. 101) during power failure processing (steps S6709 to S6712), checksums are calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, whereas the main RAM 65 The checksum is not calculated for the storage area corresponding to the non-specific control of. This makes it possible to prevent the processing period required to complete the power failure process from becoming excessively long.

When the occurrence of an abnormality is specified in the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control in another monitoring process (FIG. 107) executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control, the non-specific control is performed. In the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107) which is the process to be performed, the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to “0” and the initial setting process is executed. As a result, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is executed in a state where the information of the work area 223 for non-specific control is held as it is, although some abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is possible to prevent it. Further, since the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to “0” and the process of initial setting are executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control, regarding the update of the information of the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is possible to prevent the processing corresponding to the specific control from intervening.

In another monitoring process (FIG. 107) that is a process corresponding to non-specific control, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed, and Performs a process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" and a process of initial setting. As a result, a series of processes in the process corresponding to the non-specific control include monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the non-specific control work area 223 and executing initialization of the non-specific control work area 223. Can be executed as.

When the occurrence of an abnormality is specified in the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control in another monitoring process (FIG. 107) executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control, The process of clearing "0" and the process of initializing the work area 223 are executed, but the process of clearing "0" and the process of initializing the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not executed. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the information and other management of various registers used in the process corresponding to the specific control saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It is possible to prevent the information at the return address from being deleted after the processing is completed.

The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" and initializing the work area is executed by the process corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "0". The process of clearing and initializing is executed by the process corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, also regarding such initialization processing, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as dedicated storage areas for processing corresponding to specific control, and also for non-specific control. The work area 223 can be treated as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control.

In the main process (FIG. 100), it is configured to monitor whether the set values are normal in steps S6608 and S6614. However, the process of monitoring whether the set values are normal is performed. The configuration may not be executed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power, which is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In addition, even if the process at the start of supplying the operating power does not monitor whether or not the set value is normal, a timer interrupt executed after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. Since the setting monitoring process (step S6820) of the process (FIG. 103) monitors whether or not the set value is normal, it is possible to cope with the abnormal set value.

The setting monitoring process (step S6820) is not limited to the configuration executed every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is activated. The configuration may be configured such that the setting monitoring process (step S6820) is performed every time the process is performed a number of times (for example, 10,000 times). In this case, it is possible to suppress the frequency of execution of the monitoring while regularly monitoring whether or not the set value is normal.

Further, the setting monitoring process (step S6820) may be configured to be executed by the residual process (steps S6610 to S6613) in the main process (FIG. 100). In this case, it becomes possible to monitor whether or not the set value is normal by utilizing the free time in the situation where the timer interrupt process is not executed.

Further, the setting monitoring process (step S6820) may be executed when the game time is newly started. More specifically, the setting monitoring process (step S6820) may be executed before the hit determination process is executed when the game time is newly started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the success/failure determination process from being executed when the setting value is abnormal.

Further, when it is specified that the set value is abnormal in the setting monitoring process (step S6820), the work is provided in the work area 221 for specific control instead of the configuration of shifting to the set value updating process (step S6904). The game stop flag may be set to "1". In this case, since a positive determination is made in step S6807 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 103), the processing in steps S6808 to S6821 is not executed, so that the progress of the game is stopped if the set value is abnormal. Becomes However, since the processes of steps S6801 to S6806 are executed, power failure monitoring is executed, and the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and Fraud detection is performed. In addition, when the game stop flag is set to "1", a notification indicating that the set value should be updated may be executed to prompt execution of the set value update process. In this case, the game hall manager who confirms the notification performs the power ON operation in a mode in which the set value update processing is executed after the power OFF operation, and the game stop flag is cleared to "0". As a result, the state in which the progress of the game is stopped is released, and the set value updating process is executed to set the normal set value.

When it is specified that the set value is abnormal in the setting monitoring process (step S6820), the main process (1) is set in the state where the setting error flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set ( (FIG. 100) may be started, and in order to stop the progress of the game in a state where the setting abnormality flag is set to "1" and release the state where the progress of the game is stopped, the power is turned off. It may be configured to require ON. In this case, in the main process (FIG. 100), even if the setting value update process is not performed, if the setting error flag is set to "1", the setting is forcibly set. By performing the value update process, it becomes possible to force the new setting of the set value by using the set value update process set in the main process (FIG. 100).

Further, when the program monitoring unit 252 identifies the occurrence of the information abnormality and the reset signal is forcibly turned from OFF to ON, the initialization processing is performed on the work area 221 for specific control. The setting value of the pachinko machine 10 may be “setting 1”. When the program monitoring unit 252 identifies the occurrence of the information abnormality and the reset signal is forcibly turned from OFF to ON, the setting is performed after the initialization process is executed for the specific control work area 221. The value update process may be executed.

Further, when the program monitoring unit 252 identifies the occurrence of the information abnormality, the reset signal is not compulsorily turned from OFF to ON, and the clear process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607) is executed. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the clear process (step S6620) and the set value update process (step S6621) at the time of setting update are executed.

Further, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607), the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1" by initializing the storage area for storing the setting value information in the work area 221 for specific control. The configuration may be used, or the configuration may be a preset setting value other than “setting 1”. As a result, when the clearing process at the time of non-setting update is executed, it becomes possible to set the preset value.

Further, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607), the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0", but may be cleared to "0". Good.

Although the management start flag is not cleared to "0" in step S7204 of the separate monitoring process (Fig. 107), the management start flag may be cleared to "0". Further, in step S7204 of the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to “0”. The configuration may be such that 234 is not cleared to "0".

In step S7204 of the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), the process of clearing “0” and the initial setting process are performed not only on the work area 223 for non-specific control but also on the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It may be configured. In this case, in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, it is used in the information corresponding to the return address of the management execution process after the completion of the separate monitoring process and the process corresponding to the specific control saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It is preferable not to erase the information in the various registers.

In another monitoring process (FIG. 107), whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is checked. The stack area 224 may be configured to execute the process of clearing “0” and the initial setting process. In this case, it is preferable not to erase the information of the return address of the management execution process after the end of the separate monitoring process in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Further, both the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are not limited to the configuration in which the checksum is calculated, and only the specific control work area 221 is the checksum calculation target. The checksum calculation target may be only the stack area 222 for specific control.

<31st Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that in the thirtieth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the thirtieth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirtieth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S7301 to S7322 in the main process are executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S7301). In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process is started and waits for a predetermined time for wait (specifically, 1 second) without proceeding to the next process. During the execution period of the power-on weight process, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S7302).

Then, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221 in the main RAM 65 (step S7303). If the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S7303: YES), checksums are calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S7304). The checksum calculation method is the same as step S6604 of the main process (FIG. 100) in the thirtieth embodiment.

After that, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control work area 221 which are calculated and stored in the specific control work area 221 in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S7304 (step S7305). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match each other (step S7306).

When a positive determination is made in step S7306, the processes of steps S7307 to S7320 are executed. In this case, the processing contents of steps S7307 to S7314 are the same as steps S6614 to S6621 of the main processing (FIG. 100) in the thirtieth embodiment, and steps S7316 to S7320 are the main processing in the thirtieth embodiment. This is the same as steps S6609 to S6613 of the processing (FIG. 100).

Further, when the reset button 68c is being pressed (step S7308: YES), if a negative determination is made in any of steps S7309 to S7311, the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed (step). S7315). The processing content of the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is the same as step S6607 of the main processing (FIG. 100) in the thirtieth embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, after executing the clear process at the time of non-setting update, the process proceeds to steps S7316 to S7320 without determining whether or not the set value is normal. The clear process at the time of non-setting update (step S7315) will be executed only when a negative determination is made in any of steps S7309 to S7311, but before the processes of steps S7309 to S7311 are executed. Since it is determined in step S7307 whether or not the set value is normal, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the set value is normal after executing the clear processing at the time of non-setting update.

If a negative determination is made in step S7303 or step S7306, that is, if the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1" or a checksum error occurs, the clear processing at the time of error is executed. Yes (step S7321). FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the clearing process at the time of abnormality. The processes of steps S7401 to S7405 in the abnormal clearing process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, a clear process of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S7401). In the clear processing, the specific control work area is excluded except for the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 221. 221 is cleared to “0” and the area for which the “0” is cleared is initialized. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode is cleared to "0". The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not being variably displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general electric power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display portion 37a is erased and the general figure display portion is deleted. The hold information for 38a is deleted.

After that, a clearing process of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S7402). In the clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and is initialized.

After that, the information of the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command as "PUSH PSW" (step S7403). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of an arithmetic instruction, a rotate instruction, an input/output instruction, and the like. By saving the information in the flag register before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the clear processing for non-specific control is started, the flag of the state before the call of the subroutine or the state before the change after the subroutine is started It becomes possible to save the information of the register in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information amount of the flag register is 1 byte.

After that, by reading the program of the subroutine corresponding to the non-specific control clear processing set in the non-specific control program, the non-specific control clear processing is started (step S7404). In this case, the information for specifying the return address of the clear processing at the time of abnormality after the execution of the clear processing for non-specific control is written in the stack area 222 for specific control by the push command. When the clear processing for non-specific control is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the program returns to the program for the clear processing at the time of abnormality indicated by the return address.

When returning to the program for the clear processing at the time of abnormality after executing the clear processing for non-specific control, the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S7402 as a "POP PSW" by a pop command. Information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7405). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S7402 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the clearing process for non-specific control. The processes of steps S7501 to S7516 in the non-specific control clearing process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

First, as "LDSP, Y(u+2)", a load instruction sets Y(u+2) as a fixed address at the start of the non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 (step S7501). In this case, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, information on the last address in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer.

After that, the information of the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the WA buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction as "LD (_WABUF), WA" (step S7502). Further, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the load instruction saves the information in the BC register of the main CPU 63 to the BC buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S7503). Further, as "LD (_DEBUF), DE", the information of the DE register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the DE buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S7504). Further, as "LD (_HLBUF),HL", the load instruction saves the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 to the HL buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S7505). Further, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", the load instruction saves the information of the IX register of the main CPU 63 to the IX buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S7506). Further, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", the load instruction saves the information of the IY register of the main CPU 63 to the IY buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S7507).

In the registers of the main CPU 63, there are various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag registers already described. In this case, in steps S7502 to S7507, information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, is set. Are saved in the corresponding buffer in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The WA register, the BC register, the DE register, the HL register, the IX register, and the IY register each have an information amount of 2 bytes.

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are processes corresponding to non-specific control, partly clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S7508) and initial setting process ( This is a register used in step S7509). The information set in such a register is saved in the non-specific control work area 223 prior to the execution of the partial clearing process (step S7508) and the initial setting process (step S7509) of the non-specific control work area 223. By doing so, it becomes possible to save the information of these registers used in the specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten in the non-specific control, the information saved in the work area 223 for the non-specific control is restored to these registers when the non-specific control is finished, so that the states of these registers can be restored. Can be returned to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

Further, instead of saving all information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, is stored. Information for the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register that is the target of use in the partial clear processing (step S7508) and the initial setting processing (step S7509) is selectively used for non-specific control. By saving the information in the register in the work area 223 for non-specific control by saving it in the work area 223, it is possible to suppress the capacity secured. Therefore, while securing a large capacity of the work area 223 for non-specific control that can be used in the process of partially clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S7508) and the initialization process (step S7509), It becomes possible to save the information in the register as described above. Of course, various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main CPU 63 other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are compatible with non-specific control. The information set before the processing to be performed is stored and held until the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the processing corresponding to the specific control is restarted.

Further, the register information is not saved in the non-specific control stack area 224 but is saved in the non-specific control work area 223, so that the capacity of the non-specific control stack area 224 can be reduced to that extent. It will be possible. Further, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is used, the writing order of information is read first from the later information as described above. Therefore, the reading order of information is displaced due to some noise or the like. If this happens, all subsequent read order information will be restored to a different register. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. On the other hand, by saving the information in the register in the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above event from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. ..

After executing the processes of steps S7502 to S7507, a partial clearing process of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S7508). In the partial clear processing, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, storage areas other than the storage area in which the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is saved. Is cleared to "0". Specifically, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA buffer, BC buffer, DE buffer, HL buffer, IX buffer, and IY buffer are not cleared to "0", while storage other than these various buffers is not performed. Clear the area to "0".

In this case, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are all cleared to “0”. This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control. In addition, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends by not clearing the storage area in which the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is saved. When returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control can be returned to various registers of the main CPU 63.

Further, in step S7508, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0". The stack area 224 for non-specific control stores information on the return address of the clear processing (FIG. 109) in the event of an abnormality after the clear processing for non-specific control is completed. By not clearing "0" in 224, it is possible to prevent the information at the return address from being erased.

After that, initialization processing is executed (step S7509). In the initial setting process, the initial setting is performed for the storage area for which “0” is cleared in the work area 223 for non-specific control in step S7508.

After that, as “LD SP, Y(r+α)”, the load instruction causes the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 to return to the specific control, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment. Y(r+α) is set as the fixed address at the time (step S7510). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LD WA, (_WABUF)" (step S7511). Further, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7512). Further, the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)" (step S7513). Further, as "LD HL,(_HLBUF)", the load instruction overwrites the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control in the HL register of the main CPU 63 (step S7514). Further, as "LD IX,(_IXBUF)", the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7515). Further, the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IY register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction as "LDIY, (_IYBUF)" (step S7516). By executing the processing of steps S7511 to S7516, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. It is possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before.

According to the above configuration, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” in the main process (FIG. 108) executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, or the checksum is abnormal. In some cases, not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "0" by executing the clear processing at the time of abnormality (step S7321). It is cleared and initialized. When the information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control may also have information abnormality. The work area 223 is also initialized so that the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is not executed as it is even though the work area 223 for non-specific control has an information abnormality. It becomes possible to do.

Even when the process of clearing "0" and the process of initializing the work area 223 for non-specific control are executed in the clear processing (step S7321) at the time of abnormality, the work area for non-specific control is executed. The information of various registers used in the process corresponding to the specific control saved in 223 is not cleared to "0". As a result, a process of clearing "0" to the work area 223 for non-specific control while preventing the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control from ending after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. Also, it becomes possible to execute processing for initial setting.

Even when the process of clearing “0” and the process of initializing the work area 223 for non-specific control are executed in the clear processing (step S7321) at the time of abnormality, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed. For 0, the process of clearing “0” and the process of initial setting are not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the information of the return address from being erased after the clear processing for non-specific control (FIG. 110) is completed.

The process of clearing “0” and the process of initializing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are executed by the process corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control is The process of clearing “0” and the process of initial setting are executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, with respect to the process of clearing “0” and the process of initial setting, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as a dedicated storage area for the process corresponding to the specific control, and The work area 223 for specific control can be treated as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which both the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are checksum calculation targets, and only the specific control work area 221 is a checksum calculation target. Alternatively, the check area may be calculated only in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Alternatively, the work area 223 for non-specific control may be a checksum calculation target. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control may be the target of the checksum calculation, and the stack area 222 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control may be checked. The sum may be calculated, or the specific control work area 221, the specific control stack area 222, and the non-specific control work area 223 may be the checksum calculation target.

Further, the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be the target of checksum calculation. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be the target of checksum calculation, and the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be checked. The sum may be calculated, or the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be calculated as checksums.

Further, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be the target of checksum calculation. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be the target of checksum calculation. The work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be the target of checksum calculation, and the work area 221, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 222 for non-specific control may be used. The work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 may be the target of checksum calculation.

Further, in step S7508 and step S7509 in the clear processing for non-specific control (FIG. 110), not only the work area 223 for non-specific control but also the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to "0". It may be configured to execute the initial setting process. In this case, it is preferable not to erase the information of the return address of the clear processing at the time of abnormality after the completion of the clear processing for non-specific control.

Further, in step S7508 in the clear processing for non-specific control (FIG. 110), the management start flag is cleared to “0”, but the management start flag may not be cleared to “0”. Further, in step S7508 in the clear processing for non-specific control (FIG. 110), the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to “0”. The calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0".

<Thirty-second embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the thirtieth embodiment in the processing configuration relating to the information abnormality monitoring of the main RAM 65 using the checksum. The configuration different from that of the thirtieth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirtieth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a power failure information storage process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S6801 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103). Further, the processes of steps S7601 to S7613 in the power failure information storage process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

In steps S7601 to S7608 in the power failure information storage processing, the same processing as steps S6701 to S6708 of the power failure information storage processing (FIG. 101) in the thirtieth embodiment is executed. When the occurrence of a power failure is specified, an affirmative determination is made in step S7608 and the power failure processing of steps S7609 to S7613 is executed.

Specifically, first, the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step S7609). As a result, when the power failure process is executed normally and the information is stored and retained in the main RAM 65 normally, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started again, the specific control is performed. The power failure flag of the work area 221 of 1 is set to "1".

After that, checksums are calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S7610). In this case, the storage areas in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, which are to be calculated when calculating the specific control checksum, are stored in the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112), which will be described later, in step S7701. Is the same as the storage area in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, which are the target of the specific control checksum calculation. Further, in the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum for the specific control, an area (specifically, a set value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for the specific control is set). Is a set value counter). Then, the calculated checksum for specific control is a storage area for storing the checksum for specific control in the work area 221 for specific control, and is excluded from the calculation target of the checksum for specific control. It is memorized in the memory area.

After that, checksums are calculated for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S7611). In this case, the storage areas in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 that are to be calculated when calculating the non-specific control checksum are the checksum monitoring processing described later (FIG. 112). In step S7706, the storage area is the same as the storage area in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 for which the non-specific control checksum is calculated. Then, the calculated checksum for non-specific control is a storage area for storing the checksum for non-specific control in the work area 221 for specific control, and is excluded from the calculation target of the checksum for specific control. Stored in the designated storage area.

After that, all the output port information in the register of the main CPU 63 is set to "0" (step S7612), and access to the main RAM 65 is prohibited (step S7613). Then, the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

Next, the checksum monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The checksum monitoring process is executed instead of steps S6604 to S6606 in the main process (FIG. 100). Further, the processes of steps S7701 to S7711 in the checksum monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, a checksum for specific control is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S7701). The method of calculating the checksum for the specific control is the same as step S7610 in the power failure information storage processing (FIG. 111). After that, the checksum for the specific control calculated in step S7610 of the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and specified in the work area 221 for the specific control is specified. The checksum for specific control read out from the control work area 221 is compared with the checksum for specific control calculated in step S7701 (step S7702). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums for the specific control match (step S7703).

If the checksums for specific control do not match (step S7703: NO). The clear processing of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S7704). In the clear processing, the specific control work area is excluded except for the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 221. 221 is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode is cleared to "0". The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not being variably displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general electric power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display portion 37a is erased and the general figure display portion is deleted. The hold information for 38a is deleted. In the clearing process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to "0" and then the initial setting is executed. Further, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed (step S7705).

If an affirmative decision is made in step S7703, or if the processing of step S7705 is executed, a checksum for non-specific control is calculated for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S7706). The method for calculating the checksum for the non-specific control is the same as step S7611 in the power failure information storage process (FIG. 111). After that, the checksum for the non-specific control calculated in step S7611 of the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is saved and stored in the work area 221 for the specific control is performed. While reading from the work area 221 for specific control, the read checksum for nonspecific control is compared with the checksum for nonspecific control calculated in step S7706 (step S7707). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums for non-specific control match (step S7708).

If the checksums for non-specific control do not match (step S7708: NO), the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command as "PUSH PSW" ( Step S7709). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sine flag, a half carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution result of an arithmetic instruction, a rotate instruction, an input/output instruction, and the like. By saving the information in the flag register before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the clear processing for non-specific control is started, the flag of the state before the call of the subroutine or the state before the change after the subroutine is started It becomes possible to save the information of the register in the stack area 222 for specific control. The information amount of the flag register is 1 byte.

After that, the non-specific control clear processing is started by reading the program of the subroutine corresponding to the non-specific control clear processing set in the non-specific control program (step S7710). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the checksum monitoring process after the execution of the non-specific control clearing process is written in the specific control stack area 222 by the push command. When the clear processing for non-specific control is completed, the pop instruction reads the information for specifying the return address, and the program returns to the checksum monitoring program indicated by the return address.

When the program returns to the clearing process at the time of abnormality after the execution of the clearing process for non-specific control, the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S7709 as a "POP PSW" by the pop command. Information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7711). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information at the time when step S7709 was executed. That is, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information for executing the specific control.

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the clearing process for non-specific control. The processes of steps S7801 to S7818 in the non-specific control clearing process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data.

In steps S7801 to S7807 in the non-specific control clear processing, the same processing as steps S7501 to S7507 in the non-specific control clear processing (FIG. 110) in the thirty-first embodiment is executed.

After that, a part of the non-specific control work area 223 is cleared (step S7808). In the partial clear processing, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, storage areas other than the storage area in which the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is saved. Is cleared to "0". Specifically, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA buffer, BC buffer, DE buffer, HL buffer, IX buffer, and IY buffer are not cleared to "0", while storage other than these various buffers is not performed. Clear the area to "0".

In this case, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are all cleared to “0”. This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control. In addition, the processing corresponding to the non-specific control ends by not clearing the storage area in which the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the specific control is saved. When returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, the information used in the process corresponding to the specific control can be returned to various registers of the main CPU 63.

After that, initialization processing is executed (step S7809). In the initial setting process, the initial setting is performed for the storage area for which “0” is cleared in step S7808 in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

After that, a partial clearing process of the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S7810). In the partial clearing process, information on the return address of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112) after the completion of the clearing process for non-specific control is stored in each storage area of the stack area 224 for non-specific control. The storage areas other than the storage areas that have been cleared are cleared to "0". This prevents the information at the return address of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112) after the completion of the non-specific control clearing process from being erased, while preventing the information error in the non-specific control stack area 224. Can be eliminated.

After that, the initial setting process is executed (step S7811). In the initial setting process, the initial setting is performed for the storage area for which the “0” is cleared in step S7810 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Then, the processes of steps S7812 to S7818 are executed. The processing in these steps S7812 to S7818 is the same as the processing in steps S7510 to S7516 in the non-specific control clear processing (FIG. 110) in the thirty-first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the checksum for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 and the checksum for the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 are provided. Calculated individually. Thereby, it is possible to individually specify the information abnormality in each of the storage area of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the specific control and the storage area of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the non-specific control.

If the checksum for specific control has an abnormality, the processing for clearing "0" and the initialization process are executed for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to perform the non-specific control. If the checksum is abnormal, the processing for clearing “0” and the initialization processing are executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. As a result, it is possible to narrow down the target for executing the “0” clearing process and the initial setting process to the area where the checksum abnormality is specified.

The process of clearing “0” and the process of initializing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are executed by the process corresponding to the specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control is The process of clearing “0” and the process of initial setting are executed in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. As a result, with respect to the process of clearing “0” and the initialization process, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as a dedicated storage area for the process corresponding to the specific control, and non-specific The control work area 223 can be treated as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Although the management start flag is cleared to “0” in step S7808 in the clear processing for non-specific control (FIG. 113), the management start flag may not be cleared to “0”. Further, in step S7808 in the clear processing for non-specific control (FIG. 113), the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to “0”. The calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0".

<Thirty-third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S7901 to S7924 in the main process are executed by using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step S7901). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the main process is started, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) elapses without waiting for the next process. In the predetermined period for this weight, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

After that, an internal function register setting process is executed (step S7902). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), which is a process that is periodically interrupted and activated with respect to the main process, is the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds). And the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to a second interrupt period that is shorter than the first interrupt period. (Specifically, it is set to 2 milliseconds).

That is, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing includes the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing so that the interrupt cycle becomes relatively long and short. Both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are activated by interrupting the main process. Also, the second timer interrupt process is activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process does not start by interrupting the second timer interrupt process. If both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where neither the first timer interrupt process nor the second timer interrupt process is executed, the second timer interrupt process is performed regardless of the sequence of the cycles. The timer interrupt processing is started first. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process is a process activated prior to the first timer interrupt process.

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. To do. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, the setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

After that, "1" is set to the in-start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S7903). The startup processing flag indicates that the first timer interrupt process should be terminated without executing the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process even if the first timer interrupt process is activated. This is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63. By setting the start-up processing flag to "1", even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, the various processes set in the first timer interrupt processing are not executed and the first timer interrupt processing is not executed. The timer interrupt processing will be ended.

After that, interrupt permission is set (step S7904). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is activated in the first interrupt period and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is activated in the second interrupt period. However, since "1" is set in the startup processing flag in step S7903, even if the first timer interrupt processing is activated, various processing set in the first timer interrupt processing is executed. Without this, the first timer interrupt processing is ended.

After that, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S7905). That is, it is determined whether or not the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the reset button 68c is being pressed. Here, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60 is provided with the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with not the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c but the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment.

If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S7905: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7906). "1" is set in the power failure flag when the power failure information storage processing (step S8202) of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) described later executes the power failure processing. The power outage flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power outage process was appropriately performed at the previous power off time.

When "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S7906: YES), checksums are calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S7907). The method of calculating the checksum is arbitrary, but the same calculation method as that used when the checksum is calculated in the power failure process in the power failure information storage process (step S8202) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) described later Has become a method. The checksum calculated in the power failure process is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. The storage area of the work area 221 for specific control in which the checksum is stored is used when calculating the checksum. It is excluded from the storage areas subject to calculation.

That is, when the checksum is calculated, the storage areas to be calculated, which are some storage areas in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222, are the calculation targets. In the storage area to be calculated, the checksum is calculated in the power outage process when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, and then the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is restarted to execute the process of step S7907. Until that time, when the power supply such as the backup power to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is continued, it is basically a storage area in which information is not rewritten. Therefore, the information of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is not changed from the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62 to the restart of the supply of the operation power to the MPU 62. In this case, the checksums of the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are the same as immediately before the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped. In addition, the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum is an area (specifically, a set value counter) in which information of set values indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is set. )It is included. The checksum calculation target does not include the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

After that, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control work area 221 which are calculated and stored in the specific control work area 221 in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S7907 (step S7908). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match (step S7909).

If a negative determination is made in step S7906 or step S7909, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control Is set to "1" (step S7910). The game stop flag is a situation in which a positive determination is made in step S8207 and the processes of steps S8208 to S8221 are not executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) described later, that is, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. This is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the situation should be met. When the game stop flag is set to "1", an affirmative decision is made in step S8207 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) which will be described later, whereby the process of steps S8208 to S8221 is not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power shutdown, the game progress is stopped and the specific control is performed. If at least one of the work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control does not match the checksums due to the change in the storage state of information since the last power-off, the progress of the game is stopped. It will be in a state of being.

In this case, in the storage area to be calculated when the checksum is calculated, an area (specifically, the information of the set value indicating the set state of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific control work area 221 is set as described above. Setting value counter) is included. Therefore, if the set value abnormality occurs after the last power-off, the checksums do not match, and the progress of the game is stopped.

On the other hand, even when the game stop flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S8202 to S8206 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) is executed. Therefore, even if the progress of the game is stopped, power failure monitoring is executed, and the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and Fraud detection is performed.

After that, an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum at the start of supplying the operating power is transmitted to the voice light emission control device 81 (step S7911). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, and the speaker unit 54 "Please change the setting." Is output. Further, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is given when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed. It may be configured to continue.

The manager of the game hall, who has confirmed the above notification in the situation where the progress of the game is stopped, temporarily stops the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 and then resumes the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10. If so, an operation for performing the set value updating process (step S7918) will be performed. This makes it possible to set a new setting value in the setting value update processing (step S7918) when an abnormality occurs in the power failure flag or checksum at the start of supplying the operating power. ..

In particular, in the storage area to be calculated when calculating the checksum, an area (specifically, the set value) in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific control work area 221 is set as described above. Counter) is included, there is a possibility that the set value is abnormal if the checksum is abnormal. On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs with respect to the checksum as described above, the execution of the setting value update processing (step S7918) is prompted, so that the game is not played with the abnormal setting value. It becomes possible to do.

When the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (step S7906 and step S7909: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on by using the setting key. (Step S7912), it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 (Step S7913). The front door opening sensor 95 is used to detect whether the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 as in the thirtieth embodiment. The main body open sensor 96 is used to detect whether or not it is in the open state, as in the thirtieth embodiment. The setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key (step S7912: YES), the front door frame 14 is opened to the inner frame 13, and the gaming machine main body is set to the outer frame 11. If 12 is in the open state (step S7913: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step S7914). In the setting confirmation process, the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 which are used to display various parameters which are the management results of the game history. A process for performing a display indicating that the situation is present and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing. The processes of steps S8001 to S8003 in the setting confirmation process are executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, "1" is set to the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8001). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed. When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the corresponding display control is performed to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) described later. Be seen. Accordingly, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. Is done.

Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off using the setting key (step S8002). In this case, it may be configured to determine whether the setting key inserting section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or may be configured to determine whether the setting key inserting section 68a is in the OFF state. If the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned off (step S8002: NO), the process of step S8002 is repeated.

When the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off (step S8002: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8003). Accordingly, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The state in which is performed is released. In this case, the display of the management result of the game history is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, so that the operating power to the main CPU 63 is increased. In the situation where the main process is started after the supply of the is started, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on, and the process of allowing the game to proceed in the main process is performed. The setting confirmation process is executed in the condition before the execution of the supply of the operating power, which is the condition before the execution. As a result, it becomes possible to confirm the set value even when the game is not being played.

Assuming that the setting value is confirmed in the situation where the game continues, for example, if the setting value is confirmed during the execution of the game times, the setting value is being confirmed. Therefore, there is a possibility that a shift to the open/close execution mode may occur. In this case, there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be fired toward the special electric prize winning device 32 even though the opening/closing execution mode is started. Further, if the set value is confirmed during the execution of the open/close execution mode, the open/close execution mode will proceed under the situation where the set value is being confirmed. It may not be possible to shoot a game ball toward.

Assuming that the progress of the game is stopped when the setting value is confirmed, if the setting value confirmation is started in the situation where the game is being performed, the progress of the game is stopped midway. Processing may be complicated. For example, if the confirmation of the set value is started during the execution of the game time and the progress of the game is to be stopped midway, a process for stopping the game time is required. In this case, when the confirmation of the set value is started, the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is stopped midway, and when the confirmation of the set value is completed, the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is restarted. If so, complicated processing is required. In addition, for example, when the confirmation of the set value is started during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode and it is attempted to stop the progress of the game on the way, a process for stopping the opening/closing execution mode is required. Further, when the setting value confirmation is started during the execution of the variable display of the pattern on the public figure display unit 38a and the game progress is to be stopped midway, the process for stopping the variable display of the pattern is performed. Will be needed. Further, if the setting value confirmation is started during the execution of the open execution state of the general electric auditors a and the progress of the game is to be stopped midway, a process for stopping the open execution state is required. Become. On the other hand, a configuration may be considered in which the setting value is confirmed by waiting until all the games are completed, but in this case, the game times, the opening/closing execution mode, the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display portion 38a, and the normal electric combination Since it is necessary to wait until a state in which none of the open execution states of the object 34a is executed is executed, there is a possibility that the waiting time until the confirmation of the set value is started becomes long.

On the other hand, in the main process executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, when the supply of the operating power is the situation before the process that allows the progress of the game is executed. Since the setting confirmation processing is executed in the situation where the processing is being executed, the setting value is confirmed in the situation where the progress of the game is already stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being confirmed while the game is in progress, and to stop the progress of the game midway when confirming the set value, or to stop the progress of the game. There is no need to wait for confirmation of the set value until Therefore, it is possible to properly confirm the set value.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 114 ), when the reset button 68c is pressed (step S7905: YES), the RAM clear process is executed (step S7915). In the RAM clearing process, the work area for specific control except for the area (specifically, the set value counter) in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. 221 is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode is cleared to "0". The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not being variably displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general electric power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display portion 37a is erased and the general figure display portion is deleted. The hold information for 38a is deleted. In the RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. In the RAM clearing process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to "0" and then the initial setting is executed. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step S7902 (step S7902) is executed.

On the other hand, in the RAM clear processing, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" by the clearing operation by the manager of the game hall.

Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key (step S7916), and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13 and the outer frame 11 is opened. Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state (step S7917). The front door opening sensor 95 is used to detect whether the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 as in the thirtieth embodiment. The main body open sensor 96 is used to detect whether or not it is in the open state, as in the thirtieth embodiment. The setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key (step S7916: YES), the front door frame 14 is open to the inner frame 13, and the gaming machine main body is opened to the outer frame 11. If 12 is in the open state (step S7917: YES), the set value update processing is executed (step S7918).

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the setting value update processing. The processing of steps S8101 to S8107 in the setting value update processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, "1" is set to the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8101). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated. By setting the setting update display flag to "1", the corresponding display control is performed to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) described later. Be seen. As a result, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. Be seen.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more corresponding to "setting 1" and 6 or less corresponding to "setting 6" (step S8102). When the value of the set value counter is "0" or is 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S8102 and "1" is set in the set value counter (step S8103). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1".

If an affirmative decision is made in step S8102, or if the processing of step S8103 is executed, it is decided whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned OFF using the setting key (step S8104). In this case, it may be configured to determine whether the setting key inserting section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or may be configured to determine whether the setting key inserting section 68a is in the OFF state.

When the setting key insertion portion 68a is not turned off (step S8104: NO), the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is provided on condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8105: YES). Is incremented by 1 (step S8106). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated by one step. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8105: NO) or if the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S8102. If it is determined that the value is 7 or more, "1" is set in the set value counter in step S8103. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", the process returns to "setting 1".

When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off (step S8104: YES), the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S8107). Thereby, on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The state of being exposed is released. In this case, the display of the management result of the game history is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the reset button 68c, the operation power is supplied to the main CPU 63 and the main process is reset. The button 68c is pressed, and the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed regardless of whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON. As a result, the operation content of powering on the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c is uniquely linked to the execution of the RAM clear processing (step S7915), and the RAM clear processing (step S7915) is performed. The operation content to be generated can be easily understood by the game hall manager.

Even if the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed, the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0" and the information of the set value counter is not changed. This makes it possible to prevent the set value from being changed even if the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed.

RAM clear processing based on not only turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c, but also turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key. Not only (step S7915), but also the set value updating process (step S7918) is executed. In addition, as described above, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is performed based on the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. To be executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make the ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a common as the operation for executing the process related to the set value. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for generating the processing related to the set value.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process is executed and the reset is performed. When the pressing operation of the button 68c is added, the set value updating process is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process different from each other depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for executing the desired processing among the setting confirmation processing and the setting value updating processing. Further, by increasing the number of operation contents for executing the setting value updating process rather than the setting confirming process, it becomes possible to make it particularly difficult to illegally perform the setting value updating process.

Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 114 ), when the process of step S7911 is executed, when the negative determination is made in step S7912 or step S7913, when the process of step S7914 is executed, the negative is obtained in step S7916 or step S7917. When the determination is made or when the processing of step S7918 is executed, the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S7919). By clearing the start-up processing flag to "0", the state in which the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process are not executed is canceled even if the first timer interrupt process is activated. In step S7919, the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is also cleared to "0".

After that, the return command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S7920). The return command indicates information indicating the number of holding information for the special figure display unit 37a, information indicating the current win/fail lottery mode, information indicating the current support mode, and whether or not the open/close execution mode is being executed. The information and the information indicating whether or not the game game is being executed are included. These pieces of information are set based on the information stored in the work area 221 for specific control. By receiving the return command, the voice emission control device 81 corresponds the display content of the symbol display device 41, the light emission content of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output content of the speaker unit 54 to various information set in the return command. What to do

Here, when confirming the set value of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion portion 68a with the setting key. Then, for example, when it is necessary to confirm the set value during the execution of the game time, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off during the execution of the game time, and then the setting key insertion unit 68a is operated by the setting key. The power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In this case, since backup power is not supplied to the RAM provided in the voice emission control device 81, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the RAM of the voice emission control device 81 is used for game play. The information for controlling is erased. On the other hand, the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 and the clearing process of the main RAM 65 is not executed when confirming the set value, so the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off during the game play. After that, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on by the setting key, the variation display of the pattern is displayed on the special figure display section 37a after the setting confirmation process is executed. Will be restarted. This causes a situation in which the symbol display is not displayed on the symbol display device 41, although the symbol display is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a.

On the other hand, after the setting confirmation process is completed, a return command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81, and the return command includes information indicating whether or not the game game is being executed. When the voice emission control device 81 receives the return command, it causes the symbol display device 41 to start the variable display of the symbols. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the variable display of the symbols is not performed on the symbol display device 41 even though the variable display of the symbols is performed on the special symbol display unit 37a. .. The variable display of the symbols is performed at a relatively high speed so that the symbols in the variable display become indistinguishable or difficult for the player to identify. Further, the return command does not include the result of the hit/miss determination process and the result of the distribution determination process of the game time to be restarted, and does not include the information indicating the end timing of the game time to be restarted. Therefore, when the voice emission control device 81 starts the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 based on the return command, if the game time to be restarted corresponds to the deviation result, the next game time is started. When a command to be displayed or a command to start the demo display is received by the symbol display device 41, the variable display of the symbol based on the return command is ended and the display corresponding to the newly received command is started to be restarted. If the game time corresponds to the jackpot result, when the opening command indicating the start of the opening/closing execution mode is received, the variable display of the symbols based on the return command is ended and the opening effect is started.

Further, when the return command includes information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the sound emission control device 81 starts the display effect indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in the symbol display device 41. To be done. This enables the player to recognize that the open/close execution mode is being executed.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S7921 to S7924. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), but between the one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. There will be some residual time. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S7921 to S7924 is repeatedly executed by utilizing this irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the residual process of steps S7921 to S7924 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed. In steps S7921 to S7924, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, the first timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 117. It should be noted that the first timer interrupt process is periodically activated at the 4 ms cycle, which is the first interrupt cycle, as already described. Further, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt processing is set to the program for specific control.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8201). As described above, the start-up processing flag is set to "1" in step S7903 of the main processing (FIG. 114). When the start-up processing flag is set to "1" (step S8201: YES), the first timer interrupt processing is ended without executing the various processing of steps S8202 to S8221. Thus, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started and the main process (FIG. 114) is started, the execution of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process is permitted early. Even if there is, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the first timer interrupt process are performed until the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is finished and the execution of the process for controlling the progress of the game is permitted. It is possible to prevent it from being executed.

As described above, the startup processing flag is cleared to "0" in step S7919 when the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed in the main processing (FIG. 114). In the first timer interrupt process, when “1” is not set in the startup process flag (step S8201: NO), the processes of step S8202 and thereafter are executed.

In steps S8202 to S8219 and step S8221, the same processes as steps S3701 to S3719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) in the fifteenth embodiment are executed. These processes are executed in the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data. In this case, if it is determined that the power failure flag is not set to "1" in the main process (FIG. 114) as described above (step S7906: NO) or it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S7906). (S7909: NO), "1" is set to the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S7910). When the game stop flag is set to "1", the first timer interrupt process executes the processes of steps S8201 to S8206, but makes a positive determination in step S8207 to execute the processes of steps S8208 to S8221. Do not run. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power shutdown, the game progress is stopped and the specific control is performed. If at least one of the work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control does not match the checksums due to the change in the storage state of information since the last power-off, the progress of the game is stopped. It will be in a state of being. For example, since the processing of step S8212 is not executed, the firing of the game ball is prohibited. In addition, the execution of the game times and the opening/closing execution mode is prohibited by not executing the processing of step S8214. Further, since the process of step S8218 is not executed, the payout of gaming balls is prohibited.

On the other hand, even in the situation where the progress of the game is stopped in this way, the power failure monitoring is executed in step S8202, and the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 in steps S8203 and S8204. And the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud detection is executed in step S8206.

In the first timer interrupt processing, the setting monitoring processing is executed in step S8220. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the setting monitoring process. The processes of steps S8301 to S8303 in the setting monitoring process are executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

By checking the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control, it is determined whether or not the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal (step S8301). Specifically, when the set value set in the set value counter is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or 7 or more, there is an abnormality. Judge that there is.

When the set value is abnormal (step S8301: NO), “1” is set to the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 as in step S7910 in the main process (FIG. 114) (step S8302). When the game stop flag is set to "1", the affirmative determination is made in step S8207 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), whereby the process of steps S8208 to S8221 is not executed. As a result, when it is specified that the set value is abnormal, the progress of the game is stopped. On the other hand, even if the game stop flag is set to "1", the process of steps S8202 to S8206 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is executed, so that the progress of the game is stopped. Even in the situation where the power failure is monitored, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is executed.

After that, an abnormal command indicating that the set value is abnormal is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S8303). Upon receipt of the abnormal command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormal set value, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output the voice "Please change the setting." .. Further, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the setting value updating process (step S7918) of the main process (FIG. 114) is executed. It may be configured such that the notification is continued in the case of being notified.

The manager of the game hall, who has confirmed the above notification in the situation where the progress of the game is stopped, temporarily stops the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 and then resumes the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10. If so, an operation for performing the set value updating process (step S7918) will be performed. This makes it possible to newly set the set value in the set value updating process (step S7918) when the set value abnormality occurs.

Here, the monitoring process for determining whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) that is regularly activated. Thereby, it becomes possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal even in a situation where a game is being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even if the set value is abnormal. Further, the monitoring of whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed every time a monitoring trigger occurs. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether the set value is abnormal.

In the main process (FIG. 114), the process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is not set. When the process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is set in the process at the start of supplying the operating power in the main process (FIG. 114), the power failure flag and the checksum are set at the start of supplying the operating power. It becomes necessary to monitor whether or not the set value is normal, in addition to the above-mentioned monitoring, which increases the monitoring load. Further, when it is determined that the set value is abnormal at the start of the supply of the operating power, the RAM clear process (step S7915) and the set value update process (step S7918) are attempted to be executed. Becomes complicated. On the other hand, since the process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is not set in the main process (FIG. 114), the processing configuration of the process at the start of supplying the operating power is preferable. It becomes possible. Even if the process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is not set in the process at the start of supplying the operating power as described above, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is performed as described above. Since the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is executed by the above, if the set value is abnormal, it can be dealt with.

In the configuration in which the first timer interrupt process is executed as described above, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is provided separately from the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) as the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment as already described. While existing, the second timer interrupt process is activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt process even during execution of the first timer interrupt process. In this case, although not shown in the first timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is prohibited and the timer interrupt process is permitted before and after the processes of steps S8201 to S8221. For example, the timer interrupt process is prohibited before executing the lottery random number updating process (step S8203), and the timer interrupt process is permitted after executing the lottery random number updating process (step S8203). As a result, it is possible to prevent the second timer interrupt process from being interrupted and activated during the execution of the lottery random number updating process. Further, the timer interrupt process is prohibited before the special figure special power control process (step S8214) is executed, and the timer interrupt process is permitted after the special figure special power control process (step S8214) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second timer interrupt process from being interrupted and activated during the execution of the special figure special power control process.

Next, a configuration for controlling the display of various display units by the main CPU 63 will be described. FIG. 119 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration for controlling display of various display units by the main CPU 63.

Targets whose display control is performed by the main CPU 63 are special figure display unit 37a, special figure reservation display unit 37b, general figure display unit 38a, general figure reservation display unit 38b, and first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201. 204 exists. Each of these is provided as a segment display unit in which a plurality of display segments by LEDs are arranged. These segment display parts are in a light emitting state when data corresponding to the light emitting state (for example, data of “1” which is one of the binary data) is set, and data corresponding to a light extinguishing state (for example, of the binary data The other one, "0" data), is set to turn off the light.

The main control board 61 is provided with a first display circuit 261 corresponding to the special figure display portion 37a, and a second display circuit 262 corresponding to the special figure reservation display portion 37b. A third display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the display portion 38a, a fourth display circuit 264 is provided corresponding to the universal figure reservation display portion 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are provided. A fifth display circuit 265 is provided corresponding to 204. In the eleventh embodiment, the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 are provided on the main control board 61 in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. However, these first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 are not provided in the present embodiment.

The first display circuit 261 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the special figure display portion 37a. As a result, each display segment of the special figure display portion 37a is turned on or off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the first display circuit 261. In this case, the first display circuit 261 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but when the predetermined period elapses, the display data is gradually changed to "0". It will approach the state of. Therefore, the display segment of the special figure display portion 37a which is in the light emitting state due to the display data provided to the first display circuit 261 has passed the predetermined period without new display data being provided to the first display circuit 261. By doing so, the light is gradually turned off. Further, due to such a configuration, not only when the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is changed but also when the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is not changed, the output processing of the previous display data is performed. The same display data as the times is supplied to the first display circuit 261.

The number of display segments provided in the special figure display portion 37a is eight. Therefore, 8-bit data is provided to the first display circuit 261 as display data for controlling the display of the special figure display portion 37a.

The second display circuit 262 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the special figure reservation display portion 37b. As a result, each display segment of the special figure reservation display portion 37b is turned on or off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262. In this case, the second display circuit 262 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all “0”. It will approach the state of. Therefore, the display segment of the special figure reservation display unit 37b which is in the light emitting state by the display data provided to the second display circuit 262 is not provided with new display data for a predetermined period. The light is gradually turned off as time passes. Further, due to such a configuration, not only when the display content of the special figure reservation display section 37b is changed but also when the display content of the special figure reservation display section 37b is not changed, the previous display data The same display data as the output processing time is supplied to the second display circuit 262.

The number of display segments provided in the special figure reservation display portion 37b is four. Therefore, 4-bit data is provided to the second display circuit 262 as display data for controlling the display of the special figure reservation display portion 37b. However, since the display data is provided in 8-bit units, even when the display data is provided to the second display circuit 262, 8-bit data is provided. It is used as display data for controlling the display of 37b.

The third display circuit 263 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the normal figure display unit 38a. As a result, each display segment of the general-purpose display section 38a is turned on or off in a mode corresponding to the display data provided to the third display circuit 263. In this case, the third display circuit 263 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period elapses, the display data is gradually changed to "0". It will approach the state of. Therefore, the display segment of the general-purpose display section 38a which is in a light emitting state according to the display data provided to the third display circuit 263 has passed the predetermined period without being provided with new display data to the third display circuit 263. By doing so, the light is gradually turned off. Further, due to such a configuration, not only when the display content of the public figure display unit 38a is changed but also when the display content of the general figure display unit 38a is not changed, the output processing of the previous display data is performed. The same display data as the times is supplied to the third display circuit 263.

The number of display segments provided on the general-purpose drawing display portion 38a is eight. Therefore, 8-bit data is provided to the third display circuit 263 as display data for controlling the display of the universal figure display unit 38a.

The fourth display circuit 264 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the universal figure reservation display section 38b. As a result, each display segment of the universal figure reservation display section 38b is in a light emitting state or a light extinguishing state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the fourth display circuit 264. In this case, the fourth display circuit 264 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but when the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all “0”. It will approach the state of. Therefore, the display segment of the universal figure reservation display section 38b, which is in the light emitting state by the display data provided to the fourth display circuit 264, does not have new display data provided to the fourth display circuit 264 and has a predetermined period. The light is gradually turned off as time passes. Further, due to such a configuration, not only when the display content of the universal figure hold display section 38b is changed but also when the display content of the universal figure hold display section 38b is not changed, the previous display data The same display data as the output processing time is supplied to the fourth display circuit 264.

The number of display segments provided on the universal figure reservation display section 38b is four. Therefore, 4-bit data is provided to the fourth display circuit 264 as display data for controlling the display of the universal figure reservation display unit 38b. However, since the display data is provided in units of 8 bits, even when the display data is provided to the fourth display circuit 264, the 8-bit data is provided. 38b is used as display data for display control.

The fifth display circuit 265 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments provided in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are turned on or off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit 265. In this case, the fifth display circuit 265 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". It will approach the state of. Therefore, new display data is provided to the fifth display circuit 265 in the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 which are in the light emitting state according to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit 265. Without a certain period of time, the light is gradually turned off when a predetermined period elapses. Further, due to such a configuration, not only when the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed, but also the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed. Even if the display data is not output, the same display data as the previous output processing of the display data is supplied to the fifth display circuit 265.

Seven display segments are provided on each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. On the other hand, the display data is provided in 8-bit units. When the display data of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided to the fifth display circuit 265, 7-bit display data corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is provided as 8-bit unit data. Then, 7-bit display data corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is provided as 8-bit unit data, and then 7-bit display data corresponding to the third notification display device 203 is provided in 8-bit units. And finally, 7-bit display data corresponding to the fourth notification display device 204 is provided as 8-bit unit data.

In the configuration in which the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 are provided as described above, the main CPU 63 supplies the display data to the display IC 266. That is, the display ICs 266 are not provided in the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 in a one-to-one manner, but one display IC 266 is provided so as to be common to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. A display IC 266 is provided. When the main CPU 63 supplies the display data to the display IC 266, the main CPU 63 also supplies the display IC 266 with the type data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data corresponds to.

For details of the electrical connection between the main CPU 63 and the display IC 266, the main CPU 63 and the display IC 266 include the type data signal line LN1, the type clock signal line LN2, the display data signal line LN3, and the display clock signal. It is electrically connected using the line LN4. All of these signal lines LN1 to LN4 are signal lines for transmitting signals from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by one-way communication.

The type data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by serial communication using the type data signal line LN1. In this case, each 1-bit delimiter of the type data by serial communication is indicated by the type clock signal transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the type clock signal line LN2. The type data is data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data to be transmitted corresponds to. The type data is transmitted as 5-bit data including the first bit to the fifth bit. When the display data corresponds to the first display circuit 261, the first bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the second display circuit 262, the second bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the third display circuit 263, the third bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fourth display circuit 264, the fourth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fifth display circuit 265, the fifth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level.

Display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by serial communication using the display data signal line LN3. In this case, each 1-bit delimiter of the display data by serial communication is indicated by the display clock signal transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the display clock signal line LN4. The display data is transmitted in 8-bit units of the first to eighth bits.

The main CPU 63 transmits the display data corresponding to each of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 to the display IC 266 by the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) described later. In this case, the display data is transmitted to one of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 and the nth display circuit→the n+1th display is performed once in the second timer interrupt processing. Each time a new processing time of the second timer interrupt processing occurs, the display circuits 261 to 265 to which the display data are transmitted are changed one by one according to the order of the circuits. In addition, in the second timer interrupt processing in the processing cycle subsequent to the processing cycle in which the display data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265, which is the final cycle in the order, is transmitted, the first display circuit 261 in the first cycle in the above order. The display data corresponding to is transmitted. It should be noted that although only one piece of display data in 8-bit units is transmitted in the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing for transmitting display data to any of the first to fourth display circuits 261 to 264, the fifth display circuit 265 In the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing for transmitting the display data to the display device, four pieces of display data in 8-bit units are transmitted corresponding to the numbers of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In the configuration in which the main CPU 63 transmits the display data as described above, the storage area 221 for the specific control and the work area 223 for the non-specific control are various storage areas referred to by the main CPU 63 for transmitting the display data. Is set. FIG. 120(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various buffers 271 to 275 provided in the work area 221 for specific control, and FIG. 120(b) is provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is an explanatory view for explaining various storage areas 234 and 276.

As shown in FIG. 120A, in the work area 221 for specific control, the first display data buffer 271, the second display data buffer 272, the third display data buffer 273, the fourth display data buffer 274, A fifth display data buffer 275 is provided.

Display data to be supplied to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the first display data buffer 271. Since the first display circuit 261 is provided corresponding to the special figure display unit 37a as already described, the first display data buffer 271 contains the display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform a predetermined display. Will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the first display data buffer 271 in the display control process (step S8216) in consideration of the contents of the special figure special power control process (step S8214) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). .. Further, when the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) for transmitting the display data to the first display circuit 261 is reached, only when the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is changed. Instead, even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The display data to be supplied to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the second display data buffer 272. Since the second display circuit 262 is provided corresponding to the special figure reservation display section 37b as described above, the second display data buffer 272 is a display for causing the special figure reservation display section 37b to perform a predetermined display. The data will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the second display data buffer 272 in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the special figure special power control process (step S8214) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). .. Further, when the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) for transmitting the display data to the second display circuit 262 is reached, only when the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is changed. Instead, even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The third display data buffer 273 stores the display data to be supplied to the third display circuit 263. As described above, the third display circuit 263 is provided in association with the public figure display unit 38a, so that the third display data buffer 273 has display data for causing the public figure display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display. Will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the third display data buffer 273 by the display control process (step S8216) in consideration of the contents of the universal figure universal power control process (step S8215) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). Be seen. Further, when the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) for transmitting the display data to the third display circuit 263 is reached, only when the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is changed. Instead, even if the display data is not changed, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The display data to be supplied to the fourth display circuit 264 is stored in the fourth display data buffer 274. As described above, the fourth display circuit 264 is provided corresponding to the universal figure hold display section 38b, and therefore, the fourth display data buffer 274 displays a display for causing the universal figure hold display section 38b to perform a predetermined display. The data will be stored. In this case, the display data is stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 by the display control process (step S8216) in consideration of the contents of the universal figure/general electric power control process (step S8215) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). Be seen. Further, when the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) for transmitting the display data to the fourth display circuit 264 is reached, only when the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is changed. Instead, the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is transmitted to the display IC 266 even when the display data is not changed.

The fifth display data buffer 275 stores the display data to be supplied to the fifth display circuit 265. Since the fifth display circuit 265 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as described above, the fifth display data buffer 275 has the first to fourth notification display devices 201. The display data for causing the display units 204 to 204 to perform the predetermined display is stored. When the processing time of the second timer interrupt processing for transmitting the display data to the fifth display circuit 265 is reached, not only when the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is changed, but also the display data concerned. Even if is not changed, the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

Here, the display corresponding to the management result of the game history is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) or the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is executed. If it does, a display corresponding to the current set value is displayed. In this case, since the fifth display data buffer 275 is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, the process of storing the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is performed as the process corresponding to the specific control. On the other hand, the process for deriving the management result of the game history is performed as a process corresponding to the non-specific control, and the 61st parameter to the 68th parameter, which are the management result of the game history, are the first to fourth notification display devices. Items 201 to 204 are sequentially displayed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 120B, not only the calculation result storage area 234 for storing the 61st parameter to the 68th parameter in the work area 223 for non-specific control, but also the 61st parameter to the 68th parameter. A display target setting area 276 for storing parameters to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided. Even in the present embodiment, as in the case of the fifteenth embodiment, the period in which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds. Every time a second elapses, the calculation result of the parameter to be displayed is read from the calculation result storage area 234 according to the predetermined display order, and the calculation result of the read parameter is stored in the display target setting area 276. It When the game history management result is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) corresponding to the specific control is performed. The display data stored in the display target setting area 276 is read, and the read display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

On the other hand, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is being executed, the first to fourth notification displays are displayed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) that is a process corresponding to the specific control. The display data for allowing the devices 201 to 204 to display the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are the fifth display data. It is stored in the display data buffer 275. Further, when the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is being executed, the first to fourth notification displays are displayed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) which is a process corresponding to the specific control. The display data for displaying that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated in the devices 201 to 204 and the display showing the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are the fifth display data. It is stored in the buffer 275.

In the configuration in which the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 are provided as described above, the main CPU 63 makes the display data corresponding to each processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123). Display data is read from the buffers 271-275, the read display data is transmitted to the display IC 266, and type data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data corresponds to is displayed. It is transmitted to the display IC 266. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the display IC 266.

As shown in FIG. 121, the display IC 266 includes a type data buffer 281, a selection signal output unit 282, a display data buffer 283, and a display data output unit 284. The display data buffer 283 stores the display data received from the main CPU 63. The display data output unit 284 transmits the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. The type data buffer 281 stores the type data received from the main CPU 63. The selection signal output unit 282 is a selection signal for designating the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to the type data stored in the type data buffer 281 among the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 as the display data receiving destination. Is output.

In detail, as shown in FIG. 119, the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261 are electrically connected using the display signal group 291. The display signal group 291 is provided so as to be able to transmit 8-bit display data at a time, and the 8-bit unit display data is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. A branch signal group 292 is provided by branching from the display signal group 291, and the branch signal group 292 includes the second display circuit 262, the third display circuit 263, the fourth display circuit 264, and the fifth display circuit 265. Are electrically connected to each of the. The branch signal group 292 is provided so as to be able to transmit 8-bit display data at a time, like the display signal group 291, and the 8-bit unit display data is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. It

Since the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 are provided as described above, when the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 is transmitted by the display data output unit 284, the display data is Is supplied to all of the fifth display circuits 261 to 265. In this case, the first to fifth selection signal lines 301 to 305 are provided to receive the supplied display data and specify the display circuits 261 to 265 to be used.

The first selection signal line 301 is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261. When the type data buffer 281 stores the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261, in order to cause the first display circuit 261 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the first selection signal to the first display circuit 261 through the first selection signal line 301. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the first display circuit 261.

The second selection signal line 302 is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the second display circuit 262. When the type data buffer 281 stores the type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262, in order to cause the second display circuit 262 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the second selection signal to the second display circuit 262 through the second selection signal line 302. As a result, the display data supplied to all the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the second display circuit 262.

The third selection signal line 303 is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the third display circuit 263. When the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to make the third display circuit 263 receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the third selection signal to the third display circuit 263 through the third selection signal line 303. As a result, the display data supplied to all the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the third display circuit 263.

The fourth selection signal line 304 is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fourth display circuit 264. When the type data buffer 281 stores the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264, in order to cause the fourth display circuit 264 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the fourth selection signal to the fourth display circuit 264 through the fourth selection signal line 304. Thereby, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the fourth display circuit 264.

The fifth selection signal line 305 is provided so as to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fifth display circuit 265. When the type data buffer 281 stores the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265, in order to cause the fifth display circuit 265 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits the fifth selection signal to the fifth display circuit 265 through the fifth selection signal line 305. As a result, the display data supplied to all the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only in the fifth display circuit 265.

FIG. 122 shows how the main CPU 63 transmits the type data and the display data to the display IC 266, and the display data transmitted from the display IC 266 is received by the first display circuit 261 or the second display circuit 262. It is a time chart. 122(a) shows a transmission period of the type data signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, FIG. 122(b) shows a transmission period of the type clock signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and FIG. ) Indicates the transmission period of the display data signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, FIG. 122D shows the transmission period of the display clock signal from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and FIG. 122E shows the display IC 266. 122 shows a transmission period of the first selection signal from the display IC 261 to the first display circuit 261, FIG. 122(f) shows a transmission period of the second selection signal from the display IC 266 to the second display circuit 262, and FIG. The transmission period of the display data from the display IC 266 to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is shown. The same applies when the display data is received by the third to fifth display circuits 263 to 265.

Type data from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 at the timing t1 after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 including the main CPU 63, the display IC 266, and the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is started. And the transmission of the display data is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122(b), the pulse-like type clock signal is transmitted at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, and the timing of t5. As shown in (a), the pulsed type data signal is transmitted in correspondence with the transmission of the pulsed type clock signal at the timing of t1. As a result, the information corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the type data buffer 281 of the display IC 266.

Further, as shown in FIG. 122(d), a pulse-shaped display clock is generated at each of the timing t1, the timing t2, the timing t3, the timing t4, the timing t5, the timing t6, the timing t7, and the timing t8. A signal is transmitted, and a pulse-shaped display data signal corresponding to the transmission of the pulse-shaped display clock signal at the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t5, and the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 122(c). Will be sent. As a result, the display data corresponding to the above information form is stored in the display data buffer 283 of the display IC 266.

Then, at the timing of t9, the transmission of the display clock signal of the 8th bit is completed as shown in FIG. 122(d), so that at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 122(e), the type data buffer 281 is stored. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 starts transmitting the first selection signal to the first display circuit 261 corresponding to the stored type data, and at the timing t9, as shown in FIG. 122(g). Then, the display data output unit 284 of the display IC 266 starts transmitting the display data stored in the display data buffer 283. As a result, the display data is received and used by the first display circuit 261.

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIGS. 122A to 122D, the transmission of the type data and the display data from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 is newly started. In this case, at the timing of t10, the transmission of the first selection signal from the display IC 266 to the first display circuit 261 is stopped as shown in FIGS. The transmission of the display data to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is stopped.

For details of the new transmission of the type data and the display data, as shown in FIG. 122(b), a pulse-shaped type clock is provided at each of the timing t10, the timing t11, the timing t12, the timing t13, and the timing t14. The signal is transmitted, and as shown in FIG. 122(a), the pulsed type data signal is transmitted corresponding to the transmission of the pulsed type clock signal at the timing of t11. As a result, the information corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281 of the display IC 266.

Further, as shown in FIG. 122(d), a pulse-shaped display clock is generated at each of the timing t10, the timing t11, the timing t12, the timing t13, the timing t14, the timing t15, the timing t16, and the timing t17. The signal is transmitted, and as shown in FIG. 122(c), it corresponds to the transmission of the pulsed display clock signal at the timing of t10, the timing of t11, the timing of t12, the timing of t15, the timing of t16, and the timing of t17. Then, the pulse-shaped display data signal is transmitted. As a result, the display data corresponding to the above information form is stored in the display data buffer 283 of the display IC 266.

Then, at the timing of t18, the transmission of the display clock signal of the eighth bit is completed as shown in FIG. 122(d), so that it is stored in the type data buffer 281 at the timing of t18 as shown in FIG. 122(f). The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 starts transmitting the second selection signal to the second display circuit 262 corresponding to the classified data, and at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. The display data output unit 284 of the display IC 266 starts transmission of the display data stored in the display data buffer 283. As a result, the display data is received and used by the second display circuit 262.

Regarding the first to fourth display circuits 261-264, only one display data is transmitted in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) which is the transmission target of the display data, but regarding the fifth display circuit 265, In the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) that is the transmission target of the display data, four pieces of display data are transmitted corresponding to the numbers of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) will be activated in the second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) as already described, but even if it is the processing time of transmitting four display data. Each processing time is set such that one processing is completed within the second interrupt cycle.

With the above structure, display data can be transmitted to the plurality of display circuits 261 to 265 by using one display IC 266. Here, as described above, each of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but the predetermined period has elapsed. Then, the display data gradually approaches the state of all "0". In this case, if the reception of the display data in each of the display circuits 261 to 265 exceeds the predetermined period, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the special figure reservation display unit 38b. Even in a situation in which the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not changed, the display segment that is in the light emitting state temporarily approaches the extinguished state, and as a result, the light in the display segment is changed. May flash. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) activated in the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds), the second interrupt shorter than the first interrupt cycle is executed. A second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) activated in a cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) is set, and the display data is transmitted to the display IC 266 collectively in the second timer interrupt process. ..

The second timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 123. The processes of steps S8401 to S8413 in the second timer interrupt process are executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), interrupt prohibition is set (step S8401). Since the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is prohibited, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. It is possible to prevent it from being started with. Further, since the generation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is prohibited, even if the second interrupt cycle elapses during the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), the second timer interrupt process is performed. It is possible to prevent the processing (FIG. 123) from being redundantly activated.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8402). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the setting value update processing (FIG. 116) is being executed by the main CPU 63. As described above, the set value updating process (FIG. 116) is performed in the main process (FIG. 114) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the process at the start of supplying the operating power is executed. Although it will be executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is activated by interruption even if the process at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is activated by interruption even when the value update process (FIG. 116) is being executed.

The situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1" means that the main CPU 63 is executing the setting value update processing (FIG. 116) for the current processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123). It means that the processing time was interrupted and activated in some situations. If an affirmative decision is made in step S8402, setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step S8403). In the setting process, a display showing that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a display showing the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. The display data to be executed is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

When the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the description of FIG. 124(a) is made for the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The display shown in the figure is performed. Specifically, when the display indicating that the setting value is being updated is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. At least one display segment is in a light emitting state in each. That is, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. As a result, even if a display indicating that the setting value is being updated is being displayed, the fact that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 have not failed is displayed in the game hall. The administrator can grasp it. Even when the management result of the game history is displayed, at least one display segment in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light emitting state, and the first to fourth notifications are performed. Each of the display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state.

For details of the display contents of each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the first notification display device 201, one central display segment is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state. Becomes Even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one central display segment in the first notification display device 201 can be in a light emitting state, When the management result of the game history is displayed, the display content of the first notification display device 201 includes the display content in which one display segment at the center is in the light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in the off state. Not not. Thereby, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 in the situation where the set value is updated while using the display segment that can be in the light emitting state even when the management result of the game history is displayed It is possible to make the display contents not displayed in the management result of.

In the second notification display device 202, as in the first notification display device 201, one central display segment is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state. Even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one central display segment in the second notification display device 202 can be in a light emitting state, When the management result of the game history is displayed, the display content of the second notification display device 202 includes the display content in which one display segment at the center is in the light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in the off state. Not not. As a result, the display contents of the second notification display device 202 in the situation where the setting value is updated while using the display segment that can be in the light emitting state even when the management result of the game history is displayed It is possible to make the display contents not displayed in the management result of.

On the third annunciator display device 203, some of the display segments are in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in an off state so that the character “H” is displayed. In this case, the display segment in the light emitting state can be in the light emitting state even when the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, but the game history management result is When displayed, the display content of the third notification display device 203 does not include the display content in which the character “H” is displayed. As a result, the display contents of the third notification display device 203 in the situation where the setting value is updated while using the display segment that can be in the light emitting state even when the management result of the game history is displayed are displayed as the game history. It is possible to make the display contents not displayed in the management result of. Further, the display content of the third notification display device 203 in the situation of confirming the set value does not include the display content in which the character “H” is displayed. Thus, by displaying "H" on the third notification display device 203, it is possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall that the setting value is being updated.

On the fourth annunciator display device 204, some of the display segments are in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in an off state so that the display corresponding to the current set value is performed. In the case of FIG. 124(a), the current setting value is “setting 2”, and thus “2” corresponding to “setting 2” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the game hall manager can grasp the current set value. Note that the display content of the fourth notification display device 204 in the situation where the setting value is updated can be displayed in both the situation in which the management result of the game history is displayed and the situation in which the setting value is being confirmed.

Returning to the explanation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), if a negative decision is made in step S8402, it is decided whether or not “1” is set in the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control. (Step S8404). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 115) is being executed by the main CPU 63. As described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is performed in the main process (FIG. 114) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed. Although it will be executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is activated by interruption even if the process at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed. The second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is activated by interruption even in the situation where the confirmation processing (FIG. 115) is being executed.

The situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" means that the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 115) for the current processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123). It means that the processing time was interrupted and activated in some situations. If an affirmative decision is made in step S8404, setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step S8405). In the setting process, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The display data to be executed is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

In the case where the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the description of FIG. The display shown in the figure is performed. Specifically, when the display indicating that the setting value is being updated is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. At least one display segment is in a light emitting state in each. That is, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. As a result, even if a display indicating that the setting value is being confirmed is being displayed, the fact that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 have not failed is displayed in the game hall. The administrator can grasp it.

For details of the display contents of each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the first notification display device 201, one central display segment is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state. Becomes Even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one central display segment in the first notification display device 201 can be in a light emitting state, When the management result of the game history is displayed, the display content of the first notification display device 201 includes the display content in which one display segment at the center is in the light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in the off state. Not not. As a result, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 in the situation where the set value is confirmed while using the display segment that can be in the light emitting state even when the management result of the game history is displayed are displayed as the game history. It is possible to make the display contents not displayed in the management result of.

In the second notification display device 202, as in the first notification display device 201, one central display segment is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state. Even when the management result of the game history is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one central display segment in the second notification display device 202 can be in a light emitting state, When the management result of the game history is displayed, the display content of the second notification display device 202 includes the display content in which one display segment at the center is in the light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in the off state. Not not. As a result, the display contents of the second notification display device 202 in the situation of confirming the set value while using the display segment that can be in the light emitting state even when the management result of the game history is displayed are displayed as the game history. It is possible to make the display contents not displayed in the management result of.

Here, the display contents on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are the same whether the setting value is being updated or the setting value is being confirmed. As a result, that the display target on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not related to the game history management result but is related to the set value, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. With this display, it becomes possible to clearly inform the manager of the game hall.

On the third annunciator display device 203, some of the display segments are in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in an off state so that the character "k" is displayed. In this case, the display segment in the light emitting state can be in the light emitting state even when the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, but the game history management result is The display content of the third notification display device 203 when being displayed does not include the display content in which the character “k” is displayed. Thereby, the display contents of the third notification display device 203 in the situation where the set value is confirmed while using the display segment that can be in the light emitting state even when the management result of the game history is displayed It is possible to have display contents that are not displayed in the management result of. Further, “H” is displayed on the third notification display device 203 when the set value is being updated, whereas “k” is displayed on the third notification display device 203 when the setting value is being confirmed. Is displayed. Thus, by confirming the display content of the third notification display device 203, the manager of the game hall is notified of whether the setting value is being updated or the setting value is being confirmed. It becomes possible.

On the fourth annunciator display device 204, some of the display segments are in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in an off state so that the display corresponding to the current set value is performed. In the case of FIG. 124B, since the current setting value is “setting 2”, “2” corresponding to “setting 2” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the game hall manager can grasp the current set value. The display content of the fourth notification display device 204 in the situation of confirming the set value can be displayed in both the situation in which the management result of the game history is displayed and the situation in which the set value is updated.

Returning to the explanation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), if a negative decision is made in step S8404, the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 in the normal time is executed (step S8406). In this case, information is read from the display target setting area 276 in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the parameters corresponding to the read information are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. By transmitting the display data to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 calculate the current display target parameter among the 61st to 68th parameters. The result is displayed.

When the process of step S8403, step S8405 or step S8406 is executed, the signal transmission state through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is set to the OFF state (step S8407), and the display data signal line LN3 and the display are displayed. The transmission state of the signal through the clock signal line LN4 is turned off (step S8408). After that, the type counter provided in the specific control work area 221 is updated (step S8409).

The type counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the transmission target of display data among the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing time of the second timer interrupt processing. When the value of the type counter is "1", the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is the transmission target. When the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data of the third display data buffer 273 is the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 is When it becomes a transmission target and the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data of the fifth display data buffer 275 becomes a transmission target. In the type counter update process, the value of the type counter is incremented by 1, and if the value of the type counter after adding 1 exceeds the upper limit value of "5", the value of the type counter is set to "1". .. As a result, the transmission target of display data is sequentially changed in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 for each processing time of the second timer interrupt processing.

After that, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step S8410). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the second type data is read. The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the type counter value is “3”, the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64 and the type counter value is When it is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the type counter value is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is mainly read. Read from the side ROM 64.

Then, the display data is read from the display data buffers 271-275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S8411). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the second display data buffer 272 is read. When the display data is read and the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the fourth display data buffer 274 is read. The display data is read out, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the display data is read out from the fifth display data buffer 275.

After that, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step S8412). In the transmission processing, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step S8410 is transmitted to the display IC 266. Further, in the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step S8411 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

After that, in order to permit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), the interrupt permission is set (step S8413).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In the situation where the main process (FIG. 114) is started, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on, and the process for allowing the progress of the game is executed in the main process. The setting confirmation process is executed in the condition before the supply of the operating power is being executed, which is the condition before the setting. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally confirming the set value.

Assuming that the setting value is confirmed in the situation where the game continues, for example, if the setting value is confirmed during the execution of the game times, the setting value is being confirmed. Therefore, there is a possibility that a shift to the open/close execution mode may occur. In this case, there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be fired toward the special electric prize winning device 32 even though the opening/closing execution mode is started. Further, if the set value is confirmed during the execution of the open/close execution mode, the open/close execution mode will proceed under the situation where the set value is being confirmed. It may not be possible to shoot a game ball toward.

Assuming that the progress of the game is stopped when the setting value is confirmed, if the setting value confirmation is started in the situation where the game is being performed, the progress of the game is stopped midway. Processing may be complicated. For example, if the confirmation of the set value is started during the execution of the game time and the progress of the game is to be stopped midway, a process for stopping the game time is required. In this case, when the confirmation of the set value is started, the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is stopped midway, and when the confirmation of the set value is completed, the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is restarted. If so, complicated processing is required. In addition, for example, when the confirmation of the set value is started during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode and it is attempted to stop the progress of the game on the way, a process for stopping the opening/closing execution mode is required. Further, when the setting value confirmation is started during the execution of the variable display of the pattern on the public figure display unit 38a and the game progress is to be stopped midway, the process for stopping the variable display of the pattern is performed. Will be needed. Further, if the setting value confirmation is started during the execution of the open execution state of the general electric auditors a and the progress of the game is to be stopped midway, a process for stopping the open execution state is required. Become. On the other hand, a configuration may be considered in which the setting value is confirmed by waiting until all the games are completed, but in this case, the game times, the opening/closing execution mode, the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display portion 38a, and the normal electric combination Since it is necessary to wait until a state in which none of the open execution states of the object 34a is executed is executed, there is a possibility that the waiting time until the confirmation of the set value is started becomes long.

On the other hand, in the main process executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, when the supply of the operating power is the situation before the process that allows the progress of the game is executed. Since the setting confirmation processing is executed in the situation where the processing is being executed, the setting value is confirmed in the situation where the progress of the game is already stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being confirmed while the game is in progress, and to stop the progress of the game midway when confirming the set value, or to stop the progress of the game. There is no need to wait for confirmation of the set value until Therefore, it is possible to properly confirm the set value.

When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the reset button 68c, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main process (FIG. 114) is started. Is pressed, and the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed regardless of whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is ON-operated. As a result, the operation content of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c is uniquely linked to the execution of the RAM clear processing (step S7915), and the RAM clear processing (step S7915). It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for generating.

Even if the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed, the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0" and the information of the set value counter is not changed. This makes it possible to prevent the set value from being changed even if the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed.

Based on not only turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c, but also turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion portion 68a with the setting key, the RAM Not only the clearing process (step S7915) but also the set value updating process (step S7918) is executed. In addition, as described above, the setting confirmation processing is performed based on the ON operation of the power of the pachinko machine 10 while the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a is performed by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c (step S7914). Is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make the ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a common as the operation for executing the process related to the set value. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for generating the processing related to the set value.

When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation processing is executed and the reset button When the pressing operation of 68c is added, the set value updating process is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process different from each other depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for executing the desired processing among the setting confirmation processing and the setting value updating processing. Further, by increasing the number of operation contents for executing the setting value updating process rather than the setting confirming process, it becomes possible to make it particularly difficult to illegally perform the setting value updating process.

The monitoring process for determining whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) that is regularly activated. Thereby, it becomes possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal even in a situation where a game is being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even if the set value is abnormal.

The monitoring of whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed every time a monitoring trigger occurs. More specifically, it is executed every time the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is started. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether the set value is abnormal.

In the main process (FIG. 114), the process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is not set. When the process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is set in the process at the start of supplying the operating power in the main process (FIG. 114), the power failure flag and the checksum are set at the start of supplying the operating power. It becomes necessary to monitor whether or not the set value is normal, in addition to the above-mentioned monitoring, which increases the monitoring load. Further, when it is determined that the set value is abnormal at the start of the supply of the operating power, the RAM clear process (step S7915) and the set value update process (step S7918) are attempted to be executed. Becomes complicated. On the other hand, since the process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is not set in the main process (FIG. 114), the processing configuration of the process at the start of supplying the operating power is preferable. It becomes possible. Even if the process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal is not set in the process at the start of supplying the operating power as described above, the setting monitoring is performed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). Since the processing (step S8220) is executed, it is possible to deal with the abnormal set value.

According to the display data transmitted from the main CPU 63, the display settings for the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 are performed by the display IC 266, so that the special display portion 37a displays the display content corresponding to the display data. , The special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are display-controlled. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63. In this case, a plurality of display units such as the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. In the provided configuration, the display ICs 266 are not provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of display units, but one display IC 266 is also used for the plurality of display units. This makes it possible to increase the number of display units to be display-controlled while suppressing the increase in the number of display ICs 266. Further, the transmission interval of the display data from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 is set to the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to the respective display units before the display corresponding to the display data cannot be maintained in each display unit. The display interval is set by the display IC 266. With this, even in the configuration in which one display IC 266 is also used for a plurality of display units, it is possible to appropriately perform the display corresponding to the display data on each display unit.

When transmitting the display data to the display IC 266, the main CPU 63 transmits, to the display IC 266, type data that allows the type of the display circuits 261 to 265 to be set for the display data to be specified. Accordingly, when the display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63, the display IC 266 may set the display data in the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to the type data transmitted from the main CPU 63. Therefore, even if one display IC 266 is also used for a plurality of display sections, the structure of the display IC 266 can be simplified.

The main CPU 63 transmits the display data so that the update cycle is repeated when the plurality of display units are set as the display data setting objects once in the predetermined order as one update cycle. I do. As a result, the main CPU 63 only needs to change the display unit to which the display data is transmitted in accordance with a predetermined order, so that the processing configuration of the main CPU 63 can be simplified.

Even when the content of the display data for one display unit is the same as the content of the display data when the display unit was previously transmitted as the transmission target, the main CPU 63 determines that the display unit is the transmission target. Sends the display data. This makes it possible to continue the same display on a predetermined display unit even if one display IC 266 is also used for a plurality of display units.

The main CPU 63 executes a process for transmitting display data to the display IC 266 by a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) which is activated by interrupting another process when the second interrupt cycle is reached. This makes it possible to set the cycle in which the display data is set in each display unit to a predetermined cycle. Therefore, even if one display IC 266 is also used for a plurality of display units, it is possible to display each display unit before the display corresponding to the display data cannot be maintained. It becomes possible to set the display data by the display IC 266.

The processing for transmitting the display data to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 which are the objects of the display setting by the display IC 266 is summarized in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123). As a result, it is possible to set the cycle in which the display data is set in the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 to be the same cycle.

When the first interrupt cycle comes, the main CPU 63 interrupts other processing and executes the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117). In this case, the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is set to be shorter than the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). As a result, it becomes possible to transmit the display data in a shorter cycle than the configuration in which the process of transmitting the display data to the display IC 266 is executed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117).

Also, the process of transmitting the display data to the display IC 266 is set to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) whose interrupt cycle is shorter than the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in which the process for advancing the game is set. Has been done. As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is activated at an appropriate cycle in executing the process for advancing the game, and it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already described. Become.

The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is activated by interrupting even when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is being executed. This allows the display data transmission cycle to be set to a predetermined cycle.

When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started, the interrupt of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is prohibited, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is ended, the first timer interrupt process The interrupt of FIG. 117 is enabled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) from being interrupted and executed while the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is being executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to prioritize the process for transmitting the display data.

The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is activated even if the process (steps S7901 to S7918) at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114). This makes it possible to control the display of a plurality of display units even in the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. Further, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is activated by interrupting the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, the process configuration of the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is not complicated. Also, it becomes possible to display-control the plurality of display units in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is also interrupted and activated even in the situation where the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114), and in that situation, the second timer interrupt process is performed. In (FIG. 123), the display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to display the current set value is transmitted. As a result, the current set value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 in the situation where the set value updating process (step S7918) is being executed without complicating the processing configuration of the main process (FIG. 114). It is possible to do so.

Even after the process at the start of supply of operating power is executed in the main process (FIG. 114), the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is activated every time the second interrupt period elapses. As a result, by using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), whether the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed or the condition after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is finished. Also in this case, it is possible to control the display of a plurality of display units.

Note that the update button 68b is provided as in the first embodiment, and in the set value update processing (FIG. 116), the set value is updated by one step each time the reset button 68c is pressed. Instead, the set value may be updated by one step each time the update button 68b is pressed. Further, the position corresponding to each of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is set as the rotation operation position when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and the rotation operation is performed. A set value corresponding to the rotational operation position of the portion 68a may be set. In addition, the setting key insertion portion 68a is configured to be able to be rotated further than the ON position, and each time the rotating operation beyond the ON position is performed, the set value being updated becomes the set value in the next order. The configuration may be updated.

Further, in the set value updating process (FIG. 116), the set value being selected is confirmed by turning off the setting key insertion portion 68a, and the set value updating process is finished by further pressing the reset button 68c. It may be configured to be. Further, in the configuration provided with the update button 68b, in the set value update processing (FIG. 116), the set value being selected is confirmed by turning off the set key insertion section 68a, and the update button 68b is further pressed. The configuration may be configured such that the setting value update processing is ended by an operation.

Further, as the condition for executing the set value updating process (FIG. 116), the condition that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state may not be set, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. It may be configured such that the condition that the game machine body 12 is in the open state and the condition that the front door frame 14 is in the open state are not set.

Further, as the condition for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115), the condition that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state may not be set, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. It may be configured such that the condition that the game machine body 12 is in the open state and the condition that the front door frame 14 is in the open state are not set.

Further, it is specified that "1" is not set in the power failure flag or the checksum is abnormal in the main process (FIG. 114) executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In this case, the RAM clearing process (step S7915) may be executed. In this case, the setting clearing process (step S7918) may be executed after the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed, and a notification indicating that the setting value updating process (step S7918) should be executed is given. May be configured to stop the progress of the game while executing, and the configuration to start the process for controlling the progress of the game.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the main process (FIG. 114) is executed after the determination process of whether or not the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum comparison process. The configuration may be executed before these processes. In this case, it is possible to give priority to the processing for confirming the set value.

Further, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is not limited to the configuration executed every time the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is activated. The setting monitoring process (step S8220) may be executed every time a predetermined number of triggers (for example, 10,000 times) is executed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the frequency of execution of the monitoring while regularly monitoring whether or not the set value is normal.

Further, the configuration monitoring process (step S8220) may be executed by the residual process (steps S7921 to S7924) in the main process (FIG. 114). In this case, it is possible to monitor whether or not the set value is normal by utilizing the free time in the situation where the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) are not executed. It will be possible.

Further, the configuration monitoring process (step S82220) may be executed when the game number is newly started. More specifically, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) may be executed before the hit determination process is executed when the game time is newly started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the success/failure determination process from being executed when the setting value is abnormal.

Further, when it is specified that the set value is abnormal in the setting monitoring process (step S8220), the process may be shifted to the set value updating process (step S7918).

When it is determined that the setting value is abnormal in the setting monitoring process (step S8220), the main process (“1”) is set in the setting abnormal flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control. 114) may be started, and in order to stop the progress of the game with the setting abnormality flag set to "1" and release the state where the progress of the game is stopped, the power is turned off. It may be configured to require ON. In this case, in the main process (FIG. 114), even if the operation for executing the set value updating process is not performed, if the setting abnormality flag is set to “1”, the setting is forcibly set. By executing the value update process, it becomes possible to force a new setting of the set value by using the set value update process set in the main process (FIG. 114).

In addition, the hold information acquired when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 and the hold information acquired when the game ball enters the second operating port 34 are stored separately. The special figure display section 37a may have a configuration in which a first special figure display section and a second special figure display section are provided in correspondence with the reservation information. In this case, the variable display of the pattern on the first special figure display part and the variable display of the pattern on the second special figure display part can be executed in an overlapping manner, and when either one of the predetermined game states is reached, either The duration of variable display of patterns on the special figure display portion may be extremely long. In this configuration, if the player tries to wait for confirmation of the set value until the game is not played, the waiting time becomes long. On the other hand, by performing the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63, the set value can be set without causing the standby time as described above. It becomes possible to confirm.

Further, in the low frequency support mode, the duration of variable display of the picture on the general figure display section 38a may be extremely long. In this configuration, if the player tries to wait for confirmation of the set value until the game is not played, the waiting time becomes long. On the other hand, by performing the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63, the set value can be set without causing the standby time as described above. It becomes possible to confirm.

Further, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is executed are not limited to the display contents in the above-described embodiment, and for example, the third notification is performed. Instead of displaying the character "k" on the display device 203 for display, only the central display segment may be in the light emitting state as in the case of the first display device 201 for notification and the second display device 202 for notification. .. In addition, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 may be turned off, and the fourth notification display device 204 may be configured to perform a display corresponding to the current set value.

Further, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the case where the set value updating process (FIG. 116) is executed are not limited to the display contents in the above-described embodiment. Instead of displaying the character “H” on the display device 203 for display, only the central display segment may be in the light emitting state like the first display device 201 for notification and the second display device 202 for notification. .. In addition, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 may be turned off, and the fourth notification display device 204 may be configured to perform a display corresponding to the current set value.

Further, the main CPU 63 may have a configuration in which, instead of simultaneously transmitting the type data and the display data to the display IC 266, the transmission of the display data is started after the transmission of the type data is started. In this case, the display data transmission may be started during the transmission of the type data, or the display data transmission may be started after the transmission of the type data is completed. Further, the configuration may be such that the transmission of the type data is started after the transmission of the display data is started. In this case, the type data may be transmitted while the display data is being transmitted, or the type data may be transmitted after the display data is completely transmitted.

Further, the display IC 266 is not limited to the configuration in which only one display IC is provided so as to be common to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. The configuration may be such that they are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each other. In this configuration, when the display data stored in each display IC provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is short, the display data to each display IC is Depending on the providing cycle, there is a possibility that unintentional blinking may occur on each display unit. On the other hand, by consolidating the processing for transmitting the display data to the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) having a relatively short interrupt cycle as in the above-described embodiment, the display data of each display IC can be displayed. The provision cycle can be shortened, and it is possible to prevent unintentional blinking on each display unit.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the winning random number counter C1 is provided in the main RAM 65, a configuration may be provided in which a random number circuit for updating the random number acquired in the hit/miss determination processing is provided. In this case, in the internal function register setting process in the main process (FIG. 114), settings are made to associate the random number of the random number circuit with the random number acquired in the hit/miss determination process.

In the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), the timer interrupt process is prohibited and the timer interrupt process is permitted before and after each process of steps S8201 to S8221, but this may be changed. For example, for some processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), the timer interrupt process is prohibited and the timer interrupt process is permitted before and after the process, while other processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) are performed. With respect to the above, the configuration may be such that the timer interrupt processing is not prohibited and the timer interrupt processing is not permitted before and after that. Further, it may be configured such that a plurality of processes included in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) are sandwiched between the prohibition of the timer interrupt process and the permission of the timer interrupt process.

Further, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), the setting for prohibiting the interrupt of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) may not be performed. In this case, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is executed with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), it is possible to give priority to the display control of the plurality of display units. .. Further, in the configuration, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), the interrupt of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is prohibited in order to prevent the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) from being activated in duplicate. On the other hand, the interrupt of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) may not be prohibited.

When both the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) are triggered, the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) is executed as the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 123). 117), the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) may be prioritized over the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) instead of the prioritized execution. The timer interrupt process having the earliest occurrence may be configured to be started first.

Further, in the situation where the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is executed instead of the configuration in which the execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is prohibited. Even in the situation where the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is started, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) may be activated. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the process for advancing the game over the display control of the plurality of display units.

Further, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is not set, and various processes of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) are the main process (FIG. 114) and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), respectively. It may be configured to be distributed and executed in. For example, in the setting confirmation processing (step S7914) in the main processing (FIG. 114), a display indicating that the setting is being confirmed and a display corresponding to the current setting value are displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the processing to be performed in step 1 is set. Further, in the setting value update processing (step S7918) in the main processing (FIG. 114), a display indicating that the setting is being updated and a display corresponding to the current setting value are displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the processing to be performed in step 1 is set. Further, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a process for controlling the display of each of the display devices 204 to 204 is set.

Further, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is not limited to the configuration in which only the process for controlling the display of the plurality of display units is executed, and in addition to the process for controlling the display of the plurality of display units, Alternatively, or alternatively, a process different from the process for controlling the display of the plurality of display units may be executed. For example, a part of the process for advancing the game may be executed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), and the rest may be executed by the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). In this case, the processing in which the execution cycle is preferably shorter is executed by the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) in which the interrupt cycle is relatively shorter, and the processing does not cause a problem even if the execution cycle is relatively long. Is preferably executed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) having a relatively long interrupt cycle. Further, of the processes of steps S8202 to S8221 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) of the above embodiment, the power failure information storage process (step S8202) is executed by the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), and A process other than the above may be configured to be executed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). In this case, it is possible to repeatedly execute power failure monitoring with a relatively short cycle. In addition to or in place of the configuration, the fraud detection process (step S8206) is executed by the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), and the other processes are executed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). It may be configured to be. In this case, fraud monitoring can be repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle.

Further, the number of the display circuits 261 to 265 to which the display data is set to be displayed by the display IC 266 is not limited to five, and may be two, three, four, or six or more. Good. Further, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not limited to the configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are associated with the fifth display circuit 265. The display circuits may be provided in a one-to-one correspondence.

<34th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the setting value update processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that in the 33rd embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 33rd embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted. Further, in the present embodiment, the update button 68b is provided on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing the setting value update processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. Note that the processing of steps S8501 to S8508 in the setting value update processing is executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, "1" is set to the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8501). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more corresponding to "setting 1" and 6 or less corresponding to "setting 6" (step S8502). When the value of the set value counter is "0" or is 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S8502 and "1" is set in the set value counter (step S8503). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1".

When an affirmative determination is made in step S8502 or the processing of step S8503 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S8504). When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8504: NO), the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is set on condition that the update button 68b is pressed (step S8505: YES). Is incremented by 1 (step S8506). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated by one step. If the update button 68b is not pressed (step S8505: NO) or if the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S8502. If it is determined that the value is 7 or more, "1" is set in the set value counter in step S8503. As a result, when the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", the process returns to "setting 1".

When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8504: YES), the current set value is confirmed and the process proceeds to step S8507. In step S8507, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off using the setting key. In this case, it may be configured to determine whether the setting key inserting section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or may be configured to determine whether the setting key inserting section 68a is in the OFF state. When the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned off (step S8507: NO), the process of step S8507 is executed again.

When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off (step S8507: YES), the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S8508).

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the update button 68b is pressed to update the set value, the reset button 68c is pressed to confirm the set value, and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off. As a result, the setting value update process is completed. That is, in order to end the set value updating process after updating the set value in the set value updating process, it is necessary to press the reset button 68c as well as the setting key inserting section 68a to be turned off. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an act of playing a game with the set value after the set value is illegally updated.

<35th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration relating to the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that in the 33rd embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 33rd embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

The calculation result storage area 234 stores information on the base value calculated by the main CPU 63. The base value is for the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation where neither the open/close execution mode due to the big hit result nor the high frequency support mode is present. It is the ratio of the total payout number of game balls.

In detail regarding the calculation of the base value, although the normal counter area 231 is provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the present embodiment, the open/close execution mode counter area 232 and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are provided. Is not provided. Similar to the fifteenth embodiment, the normal counter area 231 has a normal general prize winning counter 231a, a normal special electric prize winning counter 231b, a normal first operating counter 231c, a normal second operating counter 231d and A normal out counter 231e is provided. In a situation where neither the open/close execution mode due to the big hit result nor the high frequency support mode is present, when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, the value of the normal general winning counter 231a is incremented by 1, When one game ball enters the prize winning device 32, the value of the special electric prize winning counter 231b for normal is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the first operating port 33, it is for normal use. The value of the first operation counter 231c of 1 is added, and when one game ball enters the second operation port 34, the value of the normal second operation counter 231d is added by 1, and the value is added to the outlet 24a. When one game ball enters, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1. Then, when the values of the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are K91 to K95 in a situation where neither the open/close execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode is used, the base values are as follows.
Base value: total payout number of game balls (K91 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K92 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K93 x "to first operating port 33" Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K91+K92+K93+K94+K95)+K94דnumber of prize balls for winning in the second operation port 34”)/K94.

The calculation of the base value is performed every time the result calculation process (FIG. 130) described later is executed in the management process (step S8920) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) described later, but the normal counter area The values of the various counters 231a to 231e of H.231 are in a situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the opening/closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode depending on the jackpot result. When the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number in a situation that is neither of the above, “0” is cleared, The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1" and is neither the open/close execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode (that is, the game area PA). "0" is cleared when the total number of game balls supplied to (1) becomes the shift reference number.

The management start reference number is set to 300, which is smaller than the shift reference number, as in the fifteenth embodiment. At the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 or the like, the operation check of the pachinko machine 10 may be performed before shipping, in which case the game ball is cared for in each ball entry portion and the subsequent operation is checked. The base value in such a situation can be a value different from the situation in which a normal game is played. Therefore, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" and is neither the open/close execution mode due to the big hit result nor the high frequency support mode (that is, the game) When the total number of game balls supplied to the area PA becomes the management start reference number, which is smaller than the shift reference number, the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are temporarily cleared to "0". As a result, it is possible to reduce the influence of the above-described operation check on the base value in a situation where a normal game is played after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. Note that the management start reference number is not limited to 300, and may be any number as long as it is a plurality, and may be set to a number less than 300 or more than 300. Good.

The shift reference number is set to 60,000. In the pachinko machine 10, a maximum of 100 game balls are fired per minute, so 60000 is the maximum number of shots in 10 hours. In this case, the general business hours in the game hall are about 13 hours, and the time during which the game is played is about 10 hours in the situation where neither the open/close execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode depending on the jackpot result. Therefore, the shift reference number is set assuming the maximum number of game balls to be shot in about one business day. By clearing the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 to "0" each time the shift reference number is reached, the base value can be calculated within the range of the shift reference number. The shift reference number is not limited to 60,000, and may be any number as long as it is a plurality, and may be set to a number smaller than 60,000 or a number larger than 60,000. Good.

The calculation result storage area 234 is provided with a current status area 311, a first history area 312, a second history area 313, and a third history area 314 as storage areas for storing the information of the base value. There is. All of these various areas 311 to 314 have the same storage capacity, and specifically, have a capacity of 1 byte so that the information of the base value can be stored.

The current value area 311 stores the base value calculated in the latest result calculation processing (FIG. 130). That is, the latest base value is stored in the current area 311.

In the first history area 312, the final base value in the previous calculation period is stored. In this case, if the previous calculation period is after the management start flag is set to “1”, the first history area 312 has the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the previous calculation period. In addition, the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation that is neither in the high frequency support mode Is stored. If the management start flag is set to “1” after the previous calculation period has elapsed, the first history area 312 displays the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the previous calculation period and The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number in a situation that is neither in the high frequency support mode Is stored.

In the second history area 313, the final base value in the calculation period two times before is stored. In this case, if the calculation period two times before is after the management start flag is set to “1”, the second history area 313 has the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the calculation period two times before. In addition, the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation that is neither in the high frequency support mode Is stored. Further, if the management start flag is set to “1” after the calculation period of two times before has elapsed, the second history area 313 shows the opening/closing execution mode according to the jackpot result in the calculation period of two times before and The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number in a situation that is neither in the high frequency support mode Is stored.

The final base value in the calculation period three times before is stored in the third history area 314. In this case, if the calculation period three times before is after the management start flag is set to “1”, the third history area 314 shows the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the calculation period three times before. And, the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation that is neither in the high frequency support mode Is stored. If the management start flag is set to “1” after the calculation period three times before has elapsed, the third history area 314 shows the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result in the calculation period three times before and The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the management start reference number in a situation that is neither in the high frequency support mode Is stored.

The base values stored in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 are sequentially reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, every time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, a current order area 311→first history area 312→second history area 313→third history area 314 is set in a predetermined order. The base value to be notified is switched, and the base value to be notified is switched in the predetermined order.

127(a) to 127(d) are for the first to fourth notifications when the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 are notified in the situation where the management start flag is set to "1". It is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of display devices 201-204. 127(a) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 when the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified, and FIG. 127(b) shows the first history. An example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the area 312 is notified is shown. FIG. 127(c) shows the base stored in the second history area 313. FIG. 127D shows an example of display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the value is notified, and FIG. 127D shows the case where the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified. An example of the display content of the 1st-4th notification display devices 201-204 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 has eight display segments 321 to 324. Of the eight display segments 321-324, the seven display segments 321-324 are all rod-shaped light emitting regions having the same shape and size, and are arranged so as to generate a "8" shape. Has been done. On the other hand, one display segment 321 to 324 is a circular light emitting region and is located at the lower right position with respect to the seven display segments 321 to 324 arranged in the shape of "8". It is provided. Regardless of which base value of each of the various areas 311 to 314 is notified, at least one display segment 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light emitting state.

On the first notification display device 201, a display indicating that the base values are notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is displayed. Specifically, the character "b" is displayed on the first notification display device 201 regardless of which of the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 is notified. When information other than the base value is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the character “b” is not displayed on the first notification display device 201. Thereby, by confirming that the character "b" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the manager of the game hall can use the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a base. It becomes possible to grasp that the value is notified.

On the second notification display device 202, a display indicating which of the various areas 311 to 314 is being notified of is displayed. Specifically, in a situation where the base value of the current area 311 has been notified, the character “L.” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(a). In a situation where the base value of the first history area 312 has been notified, the character “1.” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(b). In a situation where the base value of the second history area 313 has been notified, the character “2.” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(c). In a situation where the base value of the third history area 314 has been notified, the character “3.” is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(d). Thus, by checking the characters displayed on the second notification display device 202, the manager of the game hall can determine which base value is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to grasp whether or not it is during the calculation period of.

In the second notification display device 202, the circular display segments 321 to 324 are in a light emitting state even when any of the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 is notified. As will be described later, on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, any of the numbers "0" to "9" is displayed as the display corresponding to the base value. In this case, when any number “1” to “3” is displayed on the second notification display device 202, three numbers are displayed on the second to fourth notification display devices 202 to 204. It will be lined up, and it will be difficult to grasp the base value. On the other hand, when the circular display segments 321 to 324 provided in the lower right of the second notification display device 202 are in the light emitting state, “1” to “” are displayed on the second notification display device 202. Even when any number of “3” is displayed, the number displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are displayed. It is possible to distinguish it from numbers.

On the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the number of the base value that is the notification target is displayed. The base value will be calculated as a decimal number up to the second decimal place, but the first decimal point of the base value is displayed on the third annunciator display device 203, and the decimal point of the base value is displayed. The second digit is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Here, when the base value is "1.00", the number "0" is displayed on each of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, when the base value is not yet stored in the notification target areas 311 to 314, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display are displayed as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. The character "-" is displayed on each of the devices 204. As a result, even when the base value calculated as the decimal point to the second decimal place is notified on the two display devices, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the base value It is possible to distinguish the display content between the case where "1" is "1.00" and the case where the base value is not yet stored in the areas 311 to 314 to be notified.

The display contents of the combination of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are the same when the base value is “1.00” and when the base value is “0.00”. On the other hand, in order to distinguish between the two, the former and the latter may be configured so that the light emitting state of the display of "00" is maintained and the display of "00" is blinked in the other.

Next, referring to the time chart of FIG. 129, in a situation where the management start flag is set to “1”, the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 are notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The situation will be described. FIG. 129(a) shows a period in which the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204, and FIG. 129(b) is stored in the first history area 312. FIG. 129(c) shows that the base value stored in the second history area 313 indicates the first to fourth notifications. 129 (d) shows the period notified by the display devices 201-204 for display, and in FIG. 129(d), the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified by the first-fourth display devices 201-204. FIG. 129(e) shows the period, and the total of the game balls discharged from the game area PA in the situation where neither the opening/closing execution mode by the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode has occurred since the base value calculation period was newly started. The period until the number (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000) is shown.

At a timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 129(a), the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 127(a), a display indicating that the base value is the notification target is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and is stored in the current area 311 on the second notification display device 202. The display indicating that the base value is the notification target is displayed, and the display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204.

Here, as shown in FIG. 129(e), the calculation initial display is performed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2. Specifically, since the base value calculation period was newly started, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the open/close execution mode due to the big hit result nor the high frequency support mode (that is, the game area) During the period until the total number of game balls supplied to the PA reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000), the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are displayed. Instead of continuing the lighting of the character, the character to be displayed is blinked and displayed as the calculation initial display. Immediately after the start of the calculation period, since there is little information on the game history for calculating the base value, the actual measurement value of the base value may be a value that is largely outside the theoretical value range of the base value. On the other hand, by causing the calculation initial display to be performed immediately after the calculation period is started in this manner, it becomes possible to let the manager of the gaming hall recognize that it is immediately after the calculation period is started. ..

Further, while the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, in which the number corresponding to the base value is displayed in the initial calculation display, continue to turn on the numbers, the first notification display device. Characters to be displayed are displayed blinking on 201 and the second notification display device 202. As a result, it is possible to notify that the calculation period has just started, while preventing the visibility of the base value from decreasing. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and even in the initial calculation display, blinking display may be performed on at least one of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. The display may be performed, or the blinking display may be performed on only one of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. Further, the initial reference number is not limited to 6000, and may be any number as long as it is a plurality, and may be set to a number less than 6000 or more than 6000. Good.

At the timing of t2, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the big hit result nor the high-frequency support mode has been reached from the timing of t1 (that is, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA). When the total number reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000), the calculation initial display is ended as shown in FIG. 129(e). As a result, the lighting display is started not only on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 but also on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t1 at the timing of t3, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. As shown, notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the final calculation result of the base value in the calculation period one time before, the calculation initial display is not performed.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t3 at the timing of t4, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is ended as shown in FIG. As shown in (), the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the final calculation result of the base value in the calculation period two times before, the calculation initial display is not performed.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t4 at the timing of t5, the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is finished as shown in FIG. As shown in (), the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the third history area 314 is the final base value calculation result in the calculation period three times before, the calculation initial display is not performed.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t5 at the timing of t6, the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is ended as shown in FIG. As shown in (), notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started. In this case, since the base value calculation period is newly started, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in the situation where neither the open/close execution mode by the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode is present (that is, in the game area PA In order to notify that it is a period until the total number of supplied game balls) reaches the initial reference number (specifically 6000), FIG. 129(e) over the timing from t6 to t7. Initial calculation display is performed as shown in FIG.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t6 at the timing of t8, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 129(a), and the display in FIG. As shown, notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the final calculation result of the base value in the calculation period one time before, the calculation initial display is not performed.

Next, a processing configuration for enabling the notification of the base value as described above will be described.

The management process (step S8920) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) described later is a process corresponding to the non-specific control in step S3803 as in the management process (FIG. 70) in the fifteenth embodiment. Read the management execution process program. Then, in this management execution process (FIG. 71), the check process is executed in step S3908 as in the fifteenth embodiment.

In the check process, in the situation where neither the open/close execution mode due to the big hit result nor the high frequency support mode is specified, when the entry of one game ball into the general winning opening 31 is specified, the normal general winning counter 231a When the value is incremented by 1 and the entry of one gaming ball into the special electric prize winning device 32 is specified, the value of the normal special electric prize counter 231b is incremented by 1, and the value of the first working opening 33 is increased by 1. When the entry of the game ball is specified, the value of the normal first operation counter 231c is incremented by 1, and when the entry of one game ball into the second operation port 34 is specified, the normal operation is performed. The value of the second operation counter 231d is incremented by 1, and when the entry of one gaming ball into the out port 24a is specified, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1. In the checking process, the result calculation process and the display process are executed.

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the result calculation process. The processes of steps S8601 to S8615 in the result calculation process are executed using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, a base value calculation process is executed (step S8601). In the calculation process, the base value is calculated using the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231. The calculation method of the base value is as described above. Then, the calculated base value is overwritten in the current area 311 (step S8602).

After that, it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S8603). The management start flag has a value of “0” when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured. Further, when the work area 223 for non-specific control is also initialized by clearing "0" including the management start flag, the value of the management start flag becomes "0". The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where the management start flag is a value of "0" and is neither the open/close execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode (that is, in the game area PA Since the total number of supplied game balls) becomes the management start reference number, "1" is set in the management start flag. Further, when the management start flag is set to "1", the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" and a new calculation period is started. As a result, the influence of the operation check at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 can be made difficult to reach the base value in the situation where a normal game is played after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped.

If a negative determination is made in step S8603, the total number is calculated by summing all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step S8604). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is greater than the management start reference number of 300 (step S8605).

When a positive determination is made in step S8605, the management start flag is set to "1" (step S8606). After that, a data shift process is executed (step S8607). In the data shift process, the information stored in the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is changed from the second history area 313 to the third history area 314. , First history area 312→second history area 313, current area 311→first history area 312. As a result, the final base value in the calculation period two times before is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the calculation period three times before, and the final base value in the calculation period one time before. Is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the calculation period two times before, and the last calculated base value in the current calculation period is calculated as the final base value in the calculation period one time before. One history area 312 is stored. In the data shift processing, the LDIR instruction is used when the above information shift is performed. In the LDIR instruction, the information stored in the storage area is shifted (copied) to the storage area by designating the address of the storage area of the information and the address of the storage area of the information. Becomes

However, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", basically, the base value information is not stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314, and therefore, in step S8607, the management is substantially performed. Only the shift of the final base value of the calculation period to the first history area 312 in the situation where the start flag is not set to "1" is performed. After that, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" (step S8608).

If an affirmative decision is made in step S8603, the total number is calculated by summing the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step S8609). Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is greater than the initial reference number of 6000 (step S8610). When a negative determination is made in step S8610, "1" is set to the calculation initial flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S8611), and when a positive determination is made in step S8610, The calculation initial flag is cleared to "0" (step S8612). The calculation initial flag is the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the game area) in a situation where the base value calculation period is newly started and the open/close execution mode by the big hit result is neither the high frequency support mode. This is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the total number of game balls supplied to the PA has reached the initial reference number.

When the process of step S8611 or step S8612 is executed, it is determined whether the total number calculated in step S8609 is the shift reference number of 60,000 or more (step S8613). If a positive determination is made in step S8613, data shift processing is executed (step S8614). In the data shift process, the information stored in the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is changed from the second history area 313 to the second history area 313 as in step S8607. The third history area 314, the first history area 312→the second history area 313, the current area 311→the first history area 312 are shifted in this order. As a result, the final base value in the calculation period two times before is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the calculation period three times before, and the final base value in the calculation period one time before. Is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the calculation period two times before, and the last calculated base value in the current calculation period is calculated as the final base value in the calculation period one time before. One history area 312 is stored. In the data shift processing, the LDIR instruction is used when the above information shift is performed. In the LDIR instruction, the information stored in the storage area is shifted (copied) to the storage area by designating the address of the storage area of the information and the address of the storage area of the information. Becomes After that, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" (step S8615).

FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the display process. The processes of steps S8701 to S8714 in the display process are executed using the non-specific control program and the non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S8701). When an affirmative determination is made in step S8701, the value of the switching timing counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is decremented by 1 (step S8702). The switching timing counter is a display for first to fourth notification among the base values stored in each of the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the timing at which the base value to be notified in the devices 201 to 204 is switched. As described above, every time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the notification is made in the predetermined order of the current area 311→the first history area 312→the second history area 313→the third history area 314. The target base value is switched, and the switching of the base value to be notified in the predetermined order is repeated.

When the process of step S8702 is executed, by determining whether or not the value of the switching timing counter after subtracting 1 is “0”, the base value, which is the current notification target, becomes the notification target. It is determined whether or not the display continuation period has elapsed since (step S8703). When a positive determination is made in step S8703, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8704). When the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "3" (step S8705: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S8706).

The display target counter is the first to fourth notification displays among the base values stored in the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the base value to be notified in the devices 201 to 204. Specifically, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the base value stored in the current area 311 becomes the notification target, and when the value of the display target counter is “1”, the first history area When the base value stored in 312 is the notification target and the value of the display target counter is “2”, the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the notification target and the value of the display target counter is “3”. , The base value stored in the third history area 314 is the notification target.

If a negative determination is made in step S8705, or if the process of step S8706 is executed, the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control is displayed as a value corresponding to the switching timing of the next notification target (specifically, A value corresponding to 5 seconds) is set (step S8707).

If a negative determination is made in step S8703, or if the processing of step S8707 is executed, the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control corresponds to the base value which is the notification target of this time. Perform the process to set the display data. Specifically, first, display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8708). The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to perform a display indicating that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the base value, and the notification target base. A display indicating which of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 the value corresponds to in the calculation result storage area 234 is displayed on the second notification display device 202. And display data to be executed.

Then, the base value is read from the current result area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 corresponding to the value of the display target counter, and the read base is read. The calculation result data corresponding to the decimal point first digit and the decimal point second digit in the value are set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8709). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to perform a display corresponding to the first decimal point number in the notification target base value, and the second decimal point number in the notification target base value. And display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to perform a display corresponding to.

As described above, the display data including the display type data and the calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 276. By transmitting the display data to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) described later, the display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. ..

Further, the processing of step S8709 is executed every time the display processing (FIG. 131) is executed regardless of the switching timing of the base value of the notification target. As described above, every time the calculation result storage process (FIG. 130) is executed, the base value is calculated using the current value in each of the counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231, and the calculated base value is It is stored in the current state area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234. In this case, the processing of step S8709 for setting the calculation result data in the display target setting area 276 as described above is executed every time the display processing (FIG. 131) is executed regardless of the switching timing of the base value of the notification target. When the base value of the current area 311 is changed in the situation where the base value of the current area 311 is a notification target, the changed base value can be notified.

Then, based on the value of the display target counter, it is determined whether or not the base value of the current area 311 is the notification target (step S8710), and the calculation initial flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to " It is determined whether "1" is set (step S8711). As already described, the calculation initial flag is the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where the base value calculation period is newly started and the open/close execution mode by the jackpot result and the high-frequency support mode are neither. This is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) has reached the initial reference number. When a positive determination is made in both step S8710 and step S8711, "1" is set to the initial display flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S8712), and either step S8710 or step S8711 is performed. If a negative decision is made in step S6, the initial display flag is cleared to "0" (step S8713).

The initial display flag is used to notify that the base value is the initial calculation base value after the start of the calculation period in the situation where the base value of the current area 311 is the notification target. And a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the second notification display device 202 should be displayed in a blinking manner. When it is specified that the initial display flag is set to “1” in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) described later, it is sufficient to transmit the display data stored in the display target setting area 276 to the display IC 266. When the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are caused to perform the display corresponding to the display data, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are displayed in blinking and the third The notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are lit and displayed. When it is specified that the initial display flag is not set to "1" in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) described later, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the display target setting area 276 is displayed first. When the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are lit and displayed.

On the other hand, if "1" is not set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control and a negative determination is made in step S8701, the current area 311 is read regardless of the value of the display target counter. The base value is read, and the calculation result data corresponding to the first decimal place number and the second decimal place number in the read base value are set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8714). By transmitting the display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the first decimal place number in the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the base of the current area 311 is displayed. The number in the second decimal place in the value is displayed on the fourth annunciator display device 204. With the above configuration, when the management start flag is not set to "1", the base value in the past calculation period is not notified, and only the base value calculated in the current calculation period is notified. To be done.

In a situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag, the calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 276, but the display type data is not set. Although details will be described later, when the base value is notified in a situation where “1” is not set in the management start flag, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are managed. The display content is different from that when the base value is notified in the situation where the start flag is set to "1".

Next, the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The processes of steps S8801 to S8825 in the main process are executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step S8801). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the main process is started, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) elapses without waiting for the next process. In the predetermined period for this weight, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

After that, an internal function register setting process is executed (step S8802). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds). And the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to a second interrupt period that is shorter than the first interrupt period. (Specifically, it is set to 2 milliseconds).

That is, in the present embodiment, similar to the 33rd embodiment, the timer interrupt processing includes the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing so that the interrupt cycle becomes relatively long and short. Both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are activated by interrupting the main process. Also, the second timer interrupt process is activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process does not start by interrupting the second timer interrupt process. If both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where neither the first timer interrupt process nor the second timer interrupt process is executed, the second timer interrupt process is performed regardless of the sequence of the cycles. The timer interrupt processing is started first. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process is a process activated prior to the first timer interrupt process. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process may be activated prior to the second timer interrupt process.

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. To do. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, the setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

After that, “1” is set to the startup processing flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step S8803). Even if the first timer interrupt processing is activated, the startup processing in progress flag executes the processing for power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processing set in the first timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, it is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the first timer interrupt process should be ended without executing the process for advancing the game.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. It should be noted that the first timer interrupt process is periodically activated at the 4 ms cycle, which is the first interrupt cycle, as already described. Further, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt processing is set to the program for specific control.

In steps S8901 to S8905, the same processes as steps S301 to S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment are executed. That is, power failure monitoring is executed by executing power failure information storage processing in step S8901. Specifically, similarly to the power failure information storage processing (FIG. 101) in the thirtieth embodiment, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power shutdown is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and the power failure is detected. When the occurrence of is specified, it becomes an infinite loop after executing the process at the time of power failure. In the power failure process, "1" is set to the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the specific control work area 221. In addition, by executing the random number updating process for lottery in step S8902, each numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility open counter C4 is updated, and in step S8903. The numerical information of the random number initial value counter CINI is updated by executing the random number initial value updating process, and the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is updated by executing the fluctuation counter updating process in step S8904. Further, by executing the fraud detection processing in step S8905, it is monitored whether or not an event set as a fraudulent monitoring target has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of multiple types of events is monitored, and by confirming that any of these multiple types of events has occurred, the game stop provided in the work area 221 for specific control is stopped. Set "1" to the flag.

After executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the game stop flag or the in-progress process flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control. (Step S8906). When "1" is not set to either the game stop flag or the in-progress process flag (step S8906: NO), the processes of step S8907 to step S8920 are executed. In steps S8907 to S8919, the same processes as steps S8208 to S8220 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. Further, in step S8920, although the management process is executed similarly to step S8221 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment, the contents of the check process of the management execution process called in the management process. Has already been explained. In the check process, the update process of each of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 is executed, and the result calculation process (FIG. 130) and the display process (FIG. 131) are executed.

On the other hand, if "1" is set in at least one of the game stop flag and the in-start-up flag (step S8906: YES), the first timer interrupt process is performed without executing the processes of steps S8907 to S8920. finish. That is, not only in the situation where the game stop flag is set to "1" but also when the startup processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the first timer interrupt processing is performed. While executing, the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed.

As for the start-up processing flag, the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps S8801 to S8819) is started and the interruption permission (step S8805) is started in the main processing (FIG. 132) as in the 33rd embodiment. "1" is set before the operation is performed, and "0" is cleared before the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is finished and the residual processing (steps S8822 to S8825) is started. In this case, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing, when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed, thereby supplying the operating power. It is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in the situation where the process at the start (steps S8801 to S8819) is being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing, even when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed to start the supply of the operating power. Even when the process (step S8801 to step S8819) is being executed, power failure monitoring is performed, and the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated. It is executed, and further fraud detection is executed.

Particularly, even when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) is executed, so that the operation power supply start processing (steps S8801 to S8819) is started. Even if a power failure occurs in the situation where (1) is being executed, it is possible to execute the power failure process for it. In the power failure process, as described above, the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the specific control work area 221. Since the data is saved, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, even when a power failure occurs during the set value update process (step S8819), the set value selected at that time can be stored and held as the set value of the current pachinko machine 10. .. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during execution of the set value updating process, it becomes unnecessary to execute the set value updating process again when the supply of operating power is restarted.

By the way, in the situation where the set value updating process is executed, the interrupt is not prohibited in both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and the interrupt is generated at an arbitrary timing. It is possible. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the main process (FIG. 132) including the set value updating process, the target is to be activated. The information of the return address of the main process (FIG. 132) for returning after the end of the interrupted timer interrupt process is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the main side immediately before the timer interrupt process is activated. Information of various registers of the CPU 63 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process that is the activation target ends, the process returns to the process of the main process (FIG. 132) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is restored to various registers of the main CPU 63.

Returning to the explanation of the main processing (FIG. 132 ), after setting the start-up processing flag to “1” in step S8803, the initial check period (specific The value corresponding to 5 seconds) is set (step S8804). In the present embodiment, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, can each of the display segments 321 to 324 provided in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 normally emit light? In order to allow the manager of the gaming hall to check whether or not the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until the initial check period elapses after the processing in step S8804 is started. .. As the check display, specifically, all the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the light emitting state as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 128(b). .. In step S8804, information corresponding to this initial check period is set in the checking counter.

It should be noted that the initial check period is required until the processing for controlling the progress of the game is started when none of the processing of step S8811, step S8812, step S8815, and step S8819 described below is executed in the main processing. It is set longer than the longest time. Therefore, the game may be started in a situation where the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, interrupt permission is set (step S8805). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt period. However, since "1" is set in the start-up processing flag in step S8803, even if the first timer interrupt processing is activated, power failure monitoring and counters of various counters among various processing of the first timer interrupt processing are performed. While the processing for updating and fraud monitoring is executed, the first timer interrupt processing is ended without executing the processing for advancing the game.

Then, in steps S8806 to S8825, the same processes as steps S7905 to S7924 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. Specifically, in step S8806, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed. That is, it is determined whether or not the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the reset button 68c is being pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in the present embodiment, as in the 33rd embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c, but is not provided with the update button 68b. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with not the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c but the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment.

When the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S8806: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8807). When the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) executes the power failure processing, the power failure flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power outage process was appropriately performed at the previous power off time.

When "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S8807: YES), checksums are calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S8808). The method of calculating the checksum is the same as in the 33rd embodiment. After that, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control work area 221 which are calculated and stored in the specific control work area 221 in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S8808 (step S8809). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match (step S8810).

When a negative determination is made in step S8807 or step S8810, that is, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control Is set to "1" (step S8811). When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the affirmative determination is made in step S8906 to steps S8907 to step. The process of S8920 is not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power shutdown, or the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are set. If the checksums do not match for at least one of the above due to the change in the information storage state since the last power-off, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and unauthorized monitoring is executed. On the other hand, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

After that, at the start of supplying the operating power, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S8812). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, and the speaker unit 54 "Please change the setting." Is output. Further, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is given when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the setting value update processing (step S8819) is executed. The configuration may be continued.

When the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (step S8807 and step S8810: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on by using the setting key. Then (step S8813), it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 (step S8814). The front door opening sensor 95 is used to detect whether the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13 as in the thirtieth embodiment. The main body open sensor 96 is used to detect whether or not it is in the open state, as in the thirtieth embodiment. The setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key (step S8813: YES), the front door frame 14 is open from the inner frame 13, and the gaming machine body is opened from the outer frame 11. If 12 is in the open state (step S8814: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step S8815). The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8806: YES), the RAM clear process is executed (step S8816). The contents of the RAM clear process are the same as step S7915 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the 33rd embodiment. After that, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key (step S8817: YES), and the front door frame 14 is open to the inner frame 13 and the outer frame 11 is played. If the machine body 12 is in the open state (step S8818: YES), the set value updating process is executed (step S8819). Details of the setting value update processing will be described later.

When the process of step S8812 is performed, when the negative determination is made at step S8813 or step S8814, when the process of step S8815 is performed, when the negative determination is made at step S8817 or step S8818, or the process of step S8819 is performed. When executed, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S8820). By clearing the start-up processing flag "0", the state in which the processing for advancing the game is not executed is canceled even if the first timer interrupt processing is started. In step S8820, the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is also cleared to "0".

After that, a return command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S8821). The content of the information included in the return command and the processing content of the sound emission control device 81 when the return command is received are the same as those in step S7920 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the 33rd embodiment. ..

After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S8822 to S8825. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between the one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Residual time will occur. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S8822 to S8825 is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps S8822 to S8825 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed. In steps S8822 to S8825, the same processing as steps S113 to S116 of the main processing (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed.

Next, the second timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The processes of steps S9001 to S9014 in the second timer interrupt process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), interrupt prohibition is set (step S9001). Since the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is prohibited, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. It is possible to prevent it from being started with. Further, since the generation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is prohibited, even if the second interrupt cycle elapses during the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the second timer interrupt process is performed. It is possible to prevent the processing (FIG. 134) from being activated in duplicate.

After that, update processing of the checking counter is executed (step S9002). In the updating process of the checking counter, when the value of the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more, the value of the checking counter is decremented by 1. As a result, when the initial check period is being measured using the checking counter, the value of the checking counter is periodically subtracted each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started. The Rukoto.

After that, it is determined whether the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step S9003). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the setting value update processing (FIG. 137) is being executed by the main CPU 63. As described above, the set value updating process (FIG. 137) is performed in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed in the main process (FIG. 132) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Although it will be executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting even when the process at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated by interruption even when the value update process (FIG. 137) is being executed.

The situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1" means that the main CPU 63 is executing the setting value update processing (FIG. 137) for the current processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134). It means that the processing time was interrupted and activated in some situations. If an affirmative decision is made in step S9003, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed (step S9004). In the setting process, similar to step S8403 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment, the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are updated on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data for displaying the current status and the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, similar to the 33rd embodiment described above, a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is done.

When a negative determination is made in step S9003, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9005). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136). As described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is performed in the main process (FIG. 132) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed. Although it will be executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting even when the process at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed. Even in the situation where the confirmation process (FIG. 136) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated.

The situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" means that the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 137) for the current processing time of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134). It means that the processing time was interrupted and activated in some situations. When an affirmative determination is made in step S9005, the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is executed (step S9006). In the setting process, similarly to step S8405 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment, the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are confirmed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data for displaying the current status and the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, similarly to the 33rd embodiment, a display indicating that the setting value is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is done.

When a negative determination is made in step S9005, normal setting processing is executed (step S9007). The normal setting process will be described later in detail.

When the process of step S9004, step S9006 or step S9007 is executed, the process of steps S9008 to S9014 is executed. The processing contents of these steps S9008 to S9014 are the same as the steps S8407 to S8413 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment.

Specifically, first, the signal transmission state through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is set to the OFF state (step S9008), and the signal is transmitted through the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4. The state is turned off (step S9009). After that, the update processing of the type counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S9010).

The type counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the transmission target of display data among the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing time of the second timer interrupt processing. When the value of the type counter is "1", the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is the transmission target. When the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data of the third display data buffer 273 is the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 is When it becomes a transmission target and the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data of the fifth display data buffer 275 becomes a transmission target. In the type counter update process, the value of the type counter is incremented by 1, and if the value of the type counter after adding 1 exceeds the upper limit value of "5", the value of the type counter is set to "1". .. As a result, the transmission target of display data is sequentially changed in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 for each processing time of the second timer interrupt processing.

Then, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step S9011). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the second type data is read. The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the type counter value is “3”, the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64 and the type counter value is When it is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the type counter value is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is mainly read. Read from the side ROM 64.

Then, the display data is read from the display data buffers 271-275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S9012). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the second display data buffer 272 is read. When the display data is read and the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the fourth display data buffer 274 is read. The display data is read out, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the display data is read out from the fifth display data buffer 275.

After that, transmission processing of various signals is executed (step S9013). In the transmission processing, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step S9011 is transmitted to the display IC 266. Further, in the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step S9012 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

After that, interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) (step S9014).

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the normal setting processing in step S9007 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134). The processes of steps S9101 to S9109 in the normal setting process are executed by the main CPU 63 using the specific control program and the specific control data.

First, it is determined whether the value of the checking counter provided in the specific control work area 221 is 1 or more (step S9101). When the value of the checking counter is 1 or more (step S9101: YES), it means that it is the initial check period. In this case, the check display data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the specific control work area 221 (step S9102). The display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is display data for controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as already described. In addition, the check display data is display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform the check display, that is, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The display data is for displaying all the display segments 321 to 324 in a light emitting state. By supplying the data for the check display to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. The display segments 321 to 324 are in a light emitting state. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not each of the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can normally be in the light emitting state.

Here, the initial check period can be canceled when confirming the setting or updating the set value. The cancelable configuration will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process executed in step S8815 of the main process (FIG. 132). Note that the processing of steps S9201 to S9206 in the setting confirmation processing is executed by using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, the operation instruction command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S9201). Upon receiving the operation instruction command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the speaker 54 to output a voice "Please operate the reset button 68c." The notification is continued until the reset button 68c is pressed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S9202). If the reset button 68c has not been pressed, the process waits in step S9202. When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S9202: YES), the checking counter provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S9203). This cancels the initial check period.

Then, "1" is set to the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9204). When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) makes a positive determination in step S9005 as described above, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 A display data indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed at 204 and a display value indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step S9006). Thereby, similarly to the 33rd embodiment, a display indicating that the setting value is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is done.

After that, on condition that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off (step S9205: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S9206). Accordingly, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The state in which is performed is released. In this case, the display indicating the base value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the setting confirmation process is started as described above, the initial check period is canceled on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed, and the current status is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The set value of is notified. As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 132) is started in the main CPU 63, the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main processing is executed. Even if the initial check period is started and the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the above situation, the process at the start of supplying the operating power is executed. In the case where the set value is to be confirmed under the situation, it is possible to cancel the initial check period and display the present set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, the set value can be confirmed without waiting for the initial check period to elapse.

Further, even when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is executed in the main process (FIG. 132 ), the initial check period is started first, so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. It is possible to confirm the set value after confirming whether or not each display segment 321 to 324 in each of them can normally emit light. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the setting value updating process executed in step S8819 of the main process (FIG. 132). Note that the processing of steps S9301 to S9310 in the setting value update processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, an update start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step S9301). Upon receiving the update start command, the voice emission control device 81 causes the speaker unit 54 to output a voice "setting is being changed." The notification is continued until the setting value updating process is completed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more corresponding to "setting 1" and 6 or less corresponding to "setting 6" (step S9302). When the value of the set value counter is "0" or is 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S9302 and "1" is set in the set value counter (step S9303). As a result, the set value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1".

If an affirmative decision is made in step S9302 or if the processing of step S9303 is executed, it is decided whether or not the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned OFF using the setting key (step S9304). In this case, it may be configured to determine whether the setting key inserting section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, or may be configured to determine whether the setting key inserting section 68a is in the OFF state.

If the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been operated to OFF (step S9304: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S9305). When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S9305: YES), the condition is that the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" (step S9306: NO). ), the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step S9307), and the checking counter provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S9308).

The initial check period is canceled by clearing the checking counter to “0”. In addition, since the setting update display flag is set to "1", in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 as already described, and the first to fourth notification display devices. In the fifth display data buffer 275, display data for causing a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated in 201 to 204 and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. It is stored (step S9004). As a result, similar to the 33rd embodiment described above, a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Is done.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S9306, or if the processing of step S9308 has been executed, the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S9309). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated by one step. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S9305: NO) or if the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S9302. If it is determined that the value is 7 or more, "1" is set in the set value counter in step S9303. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", the process returns to "setting 1".

When the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off (step 9304: YES), the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S9310). Thereby, on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The state of being exposed is released. In this case, the display indicating the base value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the set value update processing is executed as described above, the initial check period is canceled halfway and the current status is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, provided that the reset button 68c is pressed. The set value of is notified. As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 132) is started in the main CPU 63, the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power in the main processing is executed. Even if the initial check period is started and the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the above situation, the process at the start of supplying the operating power is executed. In the case where the set value is updated under the situation, it is possible to cancel the initial check period and display the present set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, the setting value can be updated while confirming the current setting value without waiting for the initial check period to elapse.

Further, even when the setting value updating process (FIG. 137) is executed in the main process (FIG. 132), the initial check period is started first. It is possible to update the set value after confirming whether or not the display segments 321 to 324 in each of them can normally emit light. This makes it possible to update the set value accurately.

The initial check period is canceled when the reset button 68c is pressed to update the set value in the set value update process (FIG. 137). As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed to update the set value, the initial check period is canceled accordingly, and the operability for canceling the initial check period can be improved. Become.

Returning to the description of the setting process in the normal state (FIG. 135 ), if the value of the checking counter is “0” and it is not the initial check period (step S9101: NO), the work area 223 for non-specific control is provided. It is determined whether "1" is set in the management start flag (step S9103). When "1" is not set in the management start flag (step S9103: NO), the setting process of the display before management start is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S9104). In the setting process, display data for setting all the display segments 321 and 322 in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 to the light emitting state is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. Note that the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are not limited to the configuration in which all the display segments 321 and 322 are in the light emitting state, and the first and second notification display devices 201 and A configuration may be adopted in which all of the display segments 321 and 322 in 202 each perform blinking display.

Thereafter, the calculation result data set in the display target setting area 276 in the non-specific control work area 223 is read (step S9105), and the read calculation result data is displayed in the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. The display data to be applied is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 (step S9106). As described above, in the display process (FIG. 131), when the management start flag is not set to “1” (step S8701: NO), the base value is read from the current area 311 and the first decimal point in the read base value is set. The calculation result data corresponding to the digit of the second digit and the digit of the second decimal point is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8714). In step S9106, the calculation result data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 as display data to be applied to the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204.

By supplying the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 to the display IC 266 in steps S9104 and S9106, the first and second notification displays are displayed as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(c). In a situation where all the display segments 321 and 322 in the devices 201 and 202 are in a light emitting state, the decimal point is the first decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period in the third notification display device 203. Is displayed, and the number in the second decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. In each of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, while displaying all the display segments 321 and 322 in the light emitting state, a number corresponding to the base value is displayed on the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204. By doing so, it becomes possible to let the manager of the game hall recognize that the base value currently notified is the base value in the situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag.

Further, in the situation where the management start flag is set to “1”, as described above, every time the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the current status area 311→first history area 312→first area While the base values to be notified are switched on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a predetermined order of the second history area 313 to the third history area 314, the management start flag is set to " In the situation where "1" is not set, the base value of the current area 311 is maintained as the notification target. Accordingly, when the operation check of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to check the current base value at any timing.

When the management start flag is set to "1" (step S9103: YES), the display data set in the display target setting area 276 in the work area 223 for non-specific control is read, and the read display data is set to the first display data. 5 display data buffer 275 (step S9107). By supplying the display data to the display IC 266, if the base value of the current area 311 is the notification target, the display as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 127A is used for the first to fourth notifications. If the base values of the first history area 312 are displayed on the display devices 201 to 204, the display as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 127(b) is displayed for the first to fourth notifications. If the base value of the second history area 313 is the notification target, the display as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 127(c) is performed by the devices 201 to 204. 201 to 204, and if the base value of the third history area 314 is the notification target, the display as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 127(d) is displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201. ~204.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the initial display flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S9108). As described above, the initial display flag is the first notification in order to notify that the base value is the initial calculation base value after the start of the calculation period in the situation where the base value of the current area 311 is the notification target. This is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the status display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 should be displayed in blinking. When the initial display flag is set to "1" (step S9108: YES), the blinking setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S9109).

In the blink setting process, when the display corresponding to the display data currently set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is displayed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the display is blinked. Settings to enable it. As the setting for making the display blinking, specifically, regarding the transmission of the display data to the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the display data currently set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is set. Corresponding data is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a predetermined lighting period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and then all the display segments 321 and 322 of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off. The state data is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a predetermined extinguishing period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and thereafter the predetermined lighting period and the predetermined extinguishing period are alternately repeated. As a result, when the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified immediately after the new base value calculation period is started, the calculation initial display is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202. Therefore, it is possible for the manager of the game hall to understand that the current base value notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is immediately after the start of the new calculation period. It will be possible.

Next, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 138. FIG. 138(a) shows the initial check period, and FIG. 138(b) shows the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 in a situation where "1" is not set in the management start flag. FIG. 138(c) shows the display period before the start of management, in which the base values stored in various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG. 138(d) shows a normal display period that is displayed, and FIG. 138(d) shows a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display showing the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 138(e) shows a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the current state of the pachinko machine 10. The display showing the set value shows the display period during the setting confirmation performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 138(f) shows the timing at which the reset button 68c is pressed.

First, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the situation where the management start flag is not set to “1”, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) and A case where the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is not executed will be described.

At the timing of t1, the initial check period is started as shown in FIG. 138(a). As a result, the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in the explanatory view of FIG.

Then, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 138(a), the initial check period ends without being canceled midway. In this case, the pre-management start display period is started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 138(b). In the display period before the start of management, all the display segments 321 and 322 in the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are in the light emitting state as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. On the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, numbers corresponding to the current base value are displayed.

After that, at the timing of t3, in the situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", and neither the open/close execution mode due to the big hit result nor the high frequency support mode, the gaming balls discharged from the game area PA The total number (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the management start reference number which is smaller than the shift reference number. As a result, the management start flag is set to "1", whereby the pre-management start display period ends as shown in FIG. 138(b). In this case, the normal display period is started at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 138(c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Will be announced in sequence.

Next, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the situation where the management start flag is set to "1" and the process for starting the supply of the operating power is started, the setting confirmation process (Fig. 136). ) And the setting value updating process (FIG. 137) are not executed.

At the timing of t4, the initial check period is started as shown in FIG. 138(a). As a result, the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in the explanatory view of FIG.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 138(a), the initial check period ends without being canceled midway. In this case, the normal display period is started at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 138(c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Will be announced in sequence.

Next, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the situation where the management start flag is set to “1”, and the setting value updating process (FIG. 137) is performed in the process when the supply of the operating power is started. ) Will be described.

At the timing of t6, the initial check period is started as shown in FIG. 138(a). As a result, the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in the explanatory view of FIG.

After that, the set value updating process (FIG. 137) is started in the middle of the initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 138(f). As a result, at the timing of t7, the initial check period ends midway as shown in FIG. 138(a), and at the timing of t7, the setting update display period starts as shown in FIG. 138(d). R.

Then, at the timing of t8, the setting updating display period ends as shown in FIG. 138(d). In this case, the normal display period is started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 138(c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Will be announced in sequence.

Next, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the situation where the management start flag is set to "1" and the process for starting the supply of the operating power is started, the setting confirmation process (Fig. 136). ) Will be described.

At the timing of t9, the initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 138(a). As a result, the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in the explanatory view of FIG.

After that, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is started in the middle of the initial check period, and the reset button 68c is pressed at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 138(f). As a result, at the timing of t10, the initial check period is ended midway as shown in FIG. 138(a), and at the timing of t10, the setting confirmation display period is started as shown in FIG. 138(e). R.

After that, at the timing of t11, the setting confirming display period ends as shown in FIG. 138(e). In this case, the normal display period is started at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 138(c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Will be announced in sequence.

It should be noted that when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" and the process for starting the supply of the operating power is started, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136). Alternatively, when the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed and the initial check period is canceled halfway, the pre-management display period starts after the setting update display period or the setting confirmation display period ends. It will be.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

As a check display, an initial check period may occur in which each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light emitting state. This makes it possible to confirm whether each of the display segments 321 to 324 is in a light emitting state, and confirms whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. It becomes possible to do.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Accordingly, when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to confirm early whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

Each time the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. This makes it possible to check whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal each time the supply of operating power is started.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started without requiring a special operation. As a result, it becomes possible to facilitate the work of confirming whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

Even if the initial check period has not elapsed, if the cancellation trigger occurs, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is terminated halfway. As a result, even during the initial check period, the check display can be terminated and another display can be performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and before the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed, the initial check period is started and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 At 204, the check display is started. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal before the game is started.

Start of supply of operating power in a configuration in which predetermined setting-related processing such as setting confirmation processing (FIG. 136) and setting value updating processing (FIG. 137) is executed in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed The initial check period is started in the situation where the hour process is being executed. This makes it possible to aggregate not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the initial check period with respect to the processing when the supply of the operating power is started.

In the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) and the set value update process (FIG. 137), in the configuration in which the display corresponding to the current set value is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, these predetermined settings are performed. Before the related processing is executed, the initial check period is started, and the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thereby, after confirming whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal, the current set values are confirmed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it becomes possible to accurately confirm the set value.

Based on the fact that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the set value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in the situation of the initial check period, even if the initial check period has not elapsed, the first to fourth notifications The display for checking on the display devices 201 to 204 is terminated halfway. Accordingly, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 do not have to wait for the initial check period to elapse. It becomes possible to display the present set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by terminating the checking process in 204. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the current set value at an early stage.

When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the set value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in the initial check period and the reset button 68c is pressed, the initial check period has elapsed. Even if it does not exist, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is terminated halfway. This makes it possible to end the initial check period at an arbitrary timing after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the set value update process (FIG. 137) is started. For example, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is started, the game hall manager is sufficiently aware that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. After confirming the above, it is possible to end the check display and start displaying the current set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Further, in the set value updating process (FIG. 137), the reset button 68c is pressed to update the set value to be selected. In this case, when the reset button 68c is pressed as described above, the check display is ended and the current set value display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. By doing so, it is not necessary to perform a dedicated operation for ending the check display and starting the display of the current set value. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the workability of the work for updating the set value.

The calculation result storage area 234 stores a plurality of base values derived by using the information in the normal counter area 231 in different periods. As a result, it is possible to grasp the base value in a plurality of periods, so that it is possible to accurately grasp the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA.

The calculation result storage area 234 is provided with a current area 311 in which the latest base value is stored, and first to third history areas 312 to 314 in which base values derived before that are stored. There is. As a result, the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA can be grasped not only in the latest but also in the past.

The base value that is repeatedly calculated in a relatively short cycle before one calculation period elapses is stored in the current area 311 and the base value calculated when one calculation period elapses is the first to third values. The history areas 312 to 314 are stored. This makes it possible to grasp the most recent ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA, and to grasp the above-mentioned ratio in the unit of one calculation period. Is possible. Also, since the base values in the unit of one calculation period are stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314, the number of base values stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314 is suppressed. It becomes possible.

Based on the elapse of one calculation period, the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity in the normal counter area 231. Even if the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are configured to be cleared to "0" as described above, the base values calculated when one calculation period elapses are the first to third values. Since the history areas 312 to 314 are stored, the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA in the past calculation period can be grasped later.

A plurality of history areas 312 to 314 are provided as areas for storing past base values. This makes it possible to compare the base values in a plurality of past calculation periods.

The base values stored in each of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to individually grasp the base values in a plurality of calculation periods while suppressing the number of the notification devices 201 to 204.

Even when the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, the occurrence of the power outage is monitored and the occurrence of the power outage is identified by executing the power outage information storage process (step S8901). The power outage process is executed. As a result, when a power outage occurs in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

In the configuration in which the power outage information storage process (step S8901) is included in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the first timer interrupt process is executed even if the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. It starts by interrupting. As a result, it is possible to regularly monitor the occurrence of a power failure even in the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated by interruption even in a situation where the residual process is executed after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. As a result, it is possible to regularly monitor the occurrence of a power failure in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed by using the first timer interrupt process that is activated by interrupting the residual process. Become.

When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by interruption in the situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, the start-up process in progress flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control indicates “ Since "1" is set, the process for advancing the game is not executed. As a result, even if the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, the first timer interrupt process is interrupted and activated to periodically monitor the occurrence of the power outage. It is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in the situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed.

In the configuration in which the setting value update processing (FIG. 137) is executed in the situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed, the power failure information Storage processing (step S8901) is executed. As a result, even if a power failure occurs during the setting of the setting value to be used, it is possible to appropriately cope with it.

The check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to the configuration that is ended when the initial check period elapses, and an operation for ending the check display is performed. The check display may be continued until. As the operation for ending the operation, for example, the reset button 68c may be operated regardless of whether any one of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 136) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 137) is executed. Of course, the operation section other than the reset button 68c may be operated. In this case, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until it is time to confirm the base value or the set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it becomes possible to confirm the base value or the set value after confirming whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. Moreover, since the check display is ended based on the operation of the operation unit, the check display can be ended at a desired timing.

Further, when a predetermined operation unit such as the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is operated regardless of whether or not the supply of operating power is started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used for checking. The display may be started. In this case, the check display can be started at a desired timing when confirming the base value or the set value. Further, in the configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, and the predetermined operation unit operated to start the check display or another operation unit different from the predetermined operation unit. The check display may be terminated when the operation unit is operated.

Further, when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where a specific operation unit other than the reset button 68c such as the update button 68b is operated, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The check display may not be started when the check display is started and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started without operating the specific operation unit. In this case, in the configuration in which the check display is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to select whether or not the check display is started by the operation of the game hall manager.

Further, the base value is not limited to the configuration in which the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 regardless of whether or not the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state. When the open state is specified based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, the base value may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, first the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started, and then the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201. The base value may be displayed at 204. Thereby, before confirming the base value, it is possible to confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. Further, in the configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, and the predetermined operation unit operated to start the check display or another operation unit different from the predetermined operation unit. The check display may be terminated when the operation unit is operated.

Further, when the main process (FIG. 132) is started in a state where the condition for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is satisfied, the check displays of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. If the main process is started without being started and the condition for executing the setting check process is not satisfied, the check display may be started. In this case, if it is confirmed that the set value is confirmed, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed.

Further, when the main process (FIG. 132) is started in a state where the condition for executing the set value update process (FIG. 137) is satisfied, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is displayed. The check display may be started when the main process is started without being started and the condition for executing the set value update process is not satisfied. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed when it is determined that the setting value will be updated.

When the main process (FIG. 132) is started in a state where either the condition for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the condition for executing the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is satisfied, The main processing is performed in a state where both the condition for executing the setting confirmation process and the condition for executing the set value updating process are not satisfied without the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 being started. The check display may be started when is started. In this case, when it is confirmed that the set value is confirmed or the set value is updated, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed.

In addition, the check display is not limited to the configuration in which the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in the light emitting state, and the first to fourth notifications are provided. Each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the display devices 201 to 204 may be in a blinking state. Further, in the check display, each of the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 sequentially becomes a light emitting state one by one or in a part thereof, and the range of the initial check period Each of the display segments 321 to 324 may be in a light emitting state at least once.

Further, the processing for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform the check display is not limited to the configuration executed as the processing corresponding to the specific control, and the processing corresponding to the non-specific control It may be configured to be executed as.

When the base value is not stored in any of the first to third history areas 312 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234, the history areas 312 to 314 are displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the notification is not performed in steps 204 to 204. In this case, for example, when the base value is stored in the current area 311 and the first history area 312 while the base value is not stored in the second history area 313 and the third history area 314, the display continuation period , The notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are switched between the current area 311 and the first history area 312, and the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 become It will not be subject to notification.

In addition, the present value area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 store base values represented as decimals up to the second decimal place. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the configuration may be such that information on a combination of the first decimal point number and the second decimal point digit of the base value is stored. The total payout number of game balls to be able to calculate (K91 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K92 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K93 x "No. 1) The number of prize balls for winning in the operation port 33"+K94 x "the number of prize balls for winning in the second operation port 34") and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K91+K92+K93+K94+K95) The information may be stored. In the former case, the information of the various areas 311 to 314 can be set as it is in the display target setting area 276, and in the latter case, after the base value is calculated using the information of the various areas 311 to 314, Information on the first decimal place number and the second decimal place number extracted from the base value is set in the display target setting area 276.

Further, the calculation result storage area 234 may have a configuration in which only the current state area 311 and the first history area 312 are provided as areas for storing the base value, and the current state area 311, the first history area 312, and the first history area 312 and the first history area 312. The configuration may be such that only the two history areas 313 are provided. Further, it may be configured such that four or more areas are provided as history areas for storing information on past base values.

Further, in the calculation result storage area 234, the various areas 311 to 314 are fixed on the addresses, and the base value is not limited to be shifted in the various areas 311 to 314 as necessary. ˜314 may be provided as a ring buffer.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the base value is calculated as the mode information, the configuration in which the 61st parameter to the 68th parameter are calculated as in the fifteenth embodiment may be adopted. In this case, all of the 61st to 68th parameters may be stored in each of the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234. The present area 311 may store some parameters, such as 61st to 68th parameters, but the 1st to 3rd history areas 312 to 314 may store only 61st parameters.

Further, in addition to or instead of the base value as the aspect information, the probability of occurrence of the jackpot result may be calculated and stored, or the probability of occurrence of the high frequency support mode may be calculated and stored.

Further, the trigger for shifting the base value in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is limited to when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or larger than the shift reference number. Alternatively, the shift may be performed when a predetermined period (e.g., 8 hours) has elapsed, or the shift may be performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The shift may be performed when the supply of the operating power to the CPU 63 is started, or the shift may be performed when the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Further, there may be a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of triggers for shifting.

Until the management start flag provided in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to “1”, the display segments 321 and 322 in the first and second notification display devices 202 are in the light emitting state. The display segments 321 and 322 in each of the first and second notification display devices 202 may be in a blinking state. In addition, until the management start flag is set to "1", "bL.---"→"b1.---"→"b2.---"→ in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The display of "b3.---" may be repeated.

In addition, until the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1", the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are The display for checking that is in the light emitting state is not performed, and the display segments 321 and 322 in the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the light emitting state or the blinking state, and the third and fourth notifications are performed. For example, the display corresponding to the current base value is displayed on the display devices 203 and 204, and the display corresponding to the fact that "1" is not set in the management start flag may be performed.

In addition, when the game stop flag is set to "1" because the power failure flag is not set to "1" or the checksums do not match, the progress of the game is stopped. In the display devices 201 to 204, each display segment 321 to 324 may be in a light emitting state as in the check display, or each display segment 321 to 324 may be in a blinking state.

The display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to the configuration performed by the main CPU 63, and may be performed by a dedicated control unit. The display control device 82 may also be used. In this case, when the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the base value to be notified is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means that is the control subject, and When the set value is displayed on the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the set value to be notified is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means that is the control subject. When the main CPU 63 executes the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the first to the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed in the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. Thus, the information corresponding to the start of the check display is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject so that the check display is started.

<Thirty-sixth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that in the 35th embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 35th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S9401 to S9426 in the main process are executed by using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

In steps S9401 to S9403, the same processes as steps S8801 to S8803 of the main process (FIG. 132) in the 35th embodiment are executed. After that, interrupt permission is set (step S9404). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt period. However, since "1" is set in the start-up processing flag in step S9403, even if the first timer interrupt processing is activated, power failure monitoring and various counters among various processing of the first timer interrupt processing are performed. While the processing for updating and fraudulent monitoring is executed, the first timer interrupt processing is ended without executing the processing for advancing the game.

After that, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9405). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the 35th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 35th embodiment.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the checking counter is "0" (step S9406). Then, the process waits in step S9406 until the value of the checking counter reaches "0". As a result, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is continued until the initial check period set in step S9405 elapses.

After that, the processes of steps S9407 to S9426 are executed. The processing contents of these steps S9407 to S9426 are the same as the steps S8806 to S8825 of the main processing (FIG. 132) in the 35th embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is started in the main CPU 63, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The check display is displayed, and the progress of the process at the start of supplying the operating power is stopped until the initial check period elapses in that situation. This makes it possible to prevent the setting confirmation and the setting value update from being executed in the middle of the initial check period, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load. Further, it becomes possible to prevent the game from being started during the initial check period.

<Thirty-seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that in the 35th embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 35th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps S9501 to S9525 in the main process are executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

In steps S9501 to S9518, the same processes as steps S7901 to S7918 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. After that, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9519). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the 35th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 35th embodiment.

After that, the processing from step S9520 is executed. The processing contents of steps S9520 to S9525 are the same as the steps S7919 to S7924 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the residual processing is performed after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps S9501 to S9518) is completed in the main CPU 63. Before (Step S9522 to Step S9525) is started, the initial check period is started. With this, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

The setting confirmation process (step S9514) and the setting value update process (step S9518) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, whereas the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed during the initial check period. It will be started later. Thereby, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set values are displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, either the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the set value update process (step S9518) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (step S9518). In either case where neither S9514) nor the set value update processing (step S9518) is executed, the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal regardless of the situation when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

In the main processing (FIG. 140) of the main CPU 63, when either the setting confirmation processing (step S9514) or the setting value update processing (step S9518) is executed, and the setting confirmation processing (step S9514) and setting This is a process that is commonly executed regardless of whether neither the value update process (step S9518) is executed nor the setting confirmation process (step S9514) and the set value update process (step S9518). If the execution is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked as processing that is performed later than the setting confirmation processing (step S9514) and the setting value update processing (step S9518). The process to start the message display is set. As described above, the processing for starting the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set as the common processing, and thus the processing configuration is simplified and excellent as already described. It is possible to achieve the desired effect.

Even when the check display is being executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the main CPU 63 can start the process for advancing the game. Thereby, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the set value update process (step S9518) is executed, the game is played. It is possible to prevent the start timing of the processing for advancing from being delayed.

Note that the processing after step S9520 may not be started until the initial check period elapses. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in the situation where the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

<38th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the normal setting processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 35th embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 35th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the setting processing in normal time in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S9601 to S9605 in the normal setting process are executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S9601). If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S9601: NO), the check display data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the specific control work area 221 (step S9602). By supplying the data for the check display to the display IC 266, the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, all of the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in a light emitting state. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not each of the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can normally be in the light emitting state.

When "1" is set in the management start flag (step S9601: YES), the processes of steps S9603 to S9605 are executed. The processing contents of steps S9603 to S9605 are the same as those of steps S9107 to S9109 in the normal setting process (FIG. 135) in the thirty-fifth embodiment. By executing the processes of steps S9603 to S9605, the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the same time, when the base value of the current area 311 is notified immediately after the start of the new calculation period, the calculation initial display is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202.

According to the above configuration, when "1" is not set in the management start flag, the check period is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period. Thereby, the situation where the initial check period is started when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started is limited to the situation where the management start flag is not set to “1” at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. Is possible.

<39th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration related to the set value is different from that of the 33rd embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 33rd embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

142(a) to 142(d) are explanatory views for explaining the setting correspondence storage area 325 provided in the main ROM 64.

In the setting correspondence storage area 325, the low probability mode win/loss table, the high probability mode win/loss table, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) and the set value update process (FIG. 116) are associated with the set values of the pachinko machine 10. In, the display data of the set value used to display the current set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set. More specifically, the setting correspondence storage area 325 includes a first setting information storage area 325a, a second setting information storage area 325b, a third setting information storage area 325c, a fourth setting information storage area 325d, and a fifth setting information storage area. 325e and the sixth setting information storage area 325f are provided.

Each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f has a storage area for storing a win/loss table of the low probability mode that is referred to when the win/loss lot mode is the low probability mode, and a win/loss lot mode. A storage area for storing the high probability mode success/failure table referred to in the high probability mode, and the first to fourth notifications in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) and the set value update process (FIG. 116). A storage area for storing display data of set values used to display the current set values on the display devices 201 to 204 is provided. In each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, a predetermined multi-byte area is secured as a storage area for storing the low probability mode hit/fail table, and the high probability mode hit/fail table is stored. A predetermined area of a plurality of bytes is secured as a storage area for storing the data, and a 1-byte area is secured as a storage area for storing the display data of the set value. Therefore, each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f has a storage capacity of a plurality of bytes. In this case, the start address of the first setting information storage area 325a is A(1), the start address of the second setting information storage area 325b is A(2), and the third setting information storage area 325c. Is A(3), the start address of the fourth setting information storage area 325d is A(4), and the start address of the fifth setting information storage area 325e is A(5). The start address of the sixth setting information storage area 325f is A(6).

In the above configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment of the present embodiment, as the set values of the pachinko machine 10, six setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6" are set as in the 33rd embodiment. ing. In this case, the probabilities of jackpot results in the low-probability mode are different in each of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", while the probabilities of jackpot results in the high-probability mode are the same. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 142(a), in the first setting information storage area 325a, the first low probability table LT (corresponding to "setting 1" in the storage area for storing the low probability mode win/loss table). 1) is stored, and a common high certainty hit/miss table HT common to “setting 1” to “setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing the hit/miss table of the high probability mode. Display data for displaying "1" is stored in a storage area for storing display data. In the second setting information storage area 325b, a second low certainty probability table LT(2) corresponding to “setting 2” is stored in a storage area for storing the low probability mode win/loss table, and the high probability mode is stored. In the storage area for storing the hit/no hit table, the common high-accuracy hit/miss table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored, and in the storage area for storing the display data of the set value, Display data for displaying "2" is stored.

The third setting information storage area 325c stores a third low certainty probability table LT(3) corresponding to “setting 3” in a storage area for storing the probability table of the low probability mode, and the high probability mode. In the storage area for storing the hit/no hit table, the common high-accuracy hit/miss table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored, and in the storage area for storing the display data of the set value, Display data for displaying "3" is stored. The fourth setting information storage area 325d stores a fourth low certainty probability table LT(4) corresponding to “setting 4” in a storage area for storing the low probability mode win/loss table, and the high probability mode. In the storage area for storing the hit/no hit table, the common high-accuracy hit/miss table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored, and in the storage area for storing the display data of the set value, Display data for displaying "4" is stored.

The fifth setting information storage area 325e stores a fifth low certainty probability table LT(5) corresponding to "setting 5" in a storage area for storing the low probability mode win/loss table, and the high probability mode. In the storage area for storing the hit/no hit table, the common high-accuracy hit/miss table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored, and in the storage area for storing the display data of the set value, The display data for displaying "5" is stored. In the sixth setting information storage area 325f, a sixth low certainty probability table LT(6) corresponding to “setting 6” is stored in a storage area for storing the low probability mode win/loss table, and the high probability mode is stored. In the storage area for storing the hit/no hit table, the common high-accuracy hit/miss table HT common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored, and in the storage area for storing the display data of the set value, Display data for displaying "6" is stored.

In the case of the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the larger the set value, the higher the probability that the jackpot result will be in the low-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of a jackpot result in the high-probability mode is the same regardless of the set value. Since the probability of a jackpot result in the high-probability mode is 1/30, the probability of a jackpot result in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode in “setting 6” even in “Setting 1”. There is a high probability.

In the first mode in which "setting 1" to "setting 6" are set as the set values, the process is executed in step S503 in order to execute the success/failure determination process in step S504 of the special figure variation start process (Fig. 13). The process of reading the hit/miss table will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the read/write process of the win/fail table. Note that the processing of steps S9701 to S9705 in the read/write processing of the hit/miss table is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 is read (step S9701). Which of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting correspondence storage area 325 should be referred to by the setting value counter when reading the hit/miss table and when reading the display data of the setting value? Is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify.

After that, among the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting correspondence storage area 325, the storage area corresponding to the value of the set value counter read in step S9701 is selected (step S9702). The set value counter is configured to take any value of "1" to "6" as in the 33rd embodiment, and the set value counter is set to the first value when the value of the set value counter is "1". When the setting information storage area 325a is selected and the value of the setting value counter is "2", the second setting information storage area 325b is selected, and when the value of the setting value counter is "3", the third value is selected. When the setting information storage area 325c is selected and the value of the setting value counter is "4", the fourth setting information storage area 325d is selected, and when the value of the setting value counter is "5" the fifth value is selected. The setting information storage area 325e is selected, and when the value of the setting value counter is "6", the sixth setting information storage area 325f is selected.

At the time of this selection, the correspondence table previously stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to. The correspondence table defines the correspondence between the value of the set value counter and the start addresses of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. Specifically, the start address A(1) of the first setting information storage area 325a is set in correspondence with the value of the set value counter "1", and corresponds to the value of "2" of the set value counter. The start address A(2) of the second setting information storage area 325b is set, and the start address A of the third setting information storage area 325c corresponding to the value "3" of the setting value counter A is set. (3) is set, the start address A(4) of the fourth setting information storage area 325d is set in correspondence with the value of "4" of the setting value counter, and "5" of the setting value counter is set. A(5), which is the start address of the fifth setting information storage area 325e, is set in correspondence with the value of "", and the sixth setting information storage area 325f is set in correspondence with the value of "6" of the setting value counter. The start address A(6) is set.

Then, if the current winning/discarding lottery mode is the low probability mode (step S9703: NO), the winning/discarding table of the low probability mode is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9702 (step S9704). On the other hand, if the current winning/discarding lottery mode is the high probability mode (step S9703: YES), the winning/discarding table of the high probability mode is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9702 (step S9705).

By executing the process of reading the win/loss table as described above, the win/loss table corresponding to the current win/win lottery mode is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the values of the set value counters. Then, in the win/loss determination process (step S504) of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), it is determined whether or not this game time corresponds to the jackpot result, by using the read win/loss table.

Next, the processing in the case where the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is activated by interruption in the situation where the setting value updating processing (step S7918) is being executed in the main processing (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63 will be described. To do. In this case, in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting value update is executed (step S8403). FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update. The processing of steps S9801 to S9805 in the setting processing is executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, the value of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 is read (step S9801). After that, among the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting correspondence storage area 325, the storage area corresponding to the value of the setting value counter read in step S9801 is selected (step S9802). The set value counter is configured to take any value of "1" to "6" as in the 33rd embodiment, and the set value counter is set to the first value when the value of the set value counter is "1". When the setting information storage area 325a is selected and the value of the setting value counter is "2", the second setting information storage area 325b is selected, and when the value of the setting value counter is "3", the third value is selected. When the setting information storage area 325c is selected and the value of the setting value counter is "4", the fourth setting information storage area 325d is selected, and when the value of the setting value counter is "5" the fifth value is selected. The setting information storage area 325e is selected, and when the value of the setting value counter is "6", the sixth setting information storage area 325f is selected. At the time of this selection, the correspondence table stored in advance in the main ROM 64 is referred to as in the read/write table reading process (FIG. 143).

After that, the display data of the setting value is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9802 (step S9803). Then, the display data of the read set value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the specific control work area 221 as display data to be applied to the fourth notification display device 204 (step S9804). In addition, display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to display a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step S9805).

By executing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step S9805 is displayed. The third notification display devices 201 to 203 perform the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step S9804 on the fourth notification display device 204. Thereby, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 124(a), for example, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are first. ~ The fourth notification display device 201 to 204.

The setting executed when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is activated by interruption while the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63. Also in the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during confirmation (step S8405), the setting of the display data of the set value is the same as the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update (FIG. 144). The process of is executed.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, six setting values of “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set as the setting values of the pachinko machine 10, but depending on the model and model of the pachinko machine 10. May use setting values less than 6 levels. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 142(b), three setting values of “setting 1”, “setting 3” and “setting 6” are set. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment shown in the explanatory view of 142(c), four setting values of “setting 1”, “setting 2”, “setting 3” and “setting 4” are set, and FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment shown in the explanatory view of (d), only the one-step set value of "setting 1" is set. In this case, any of the pachinko machines 10 of the second to the fourth modes, like the pachinko machine 10 of the first mode, enables the setting of the setting values in six stages, that is, the first to the sixth setting information storage. A setting correspondence storage area 325 having areas 325a to 325f is used.

For details about the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the second mode, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 142(b), the first setting information storage area 325a and the fourth setting information storage area are shown. Various information corresponding to “setting 1” is stored in 325d. That is, in the first setting information storage area 325a and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, the first low-probability table LT(1) corresponding to “setting 1” is stored in the storage area for storing the low-probability mode win/loss table. ) Is stored, and the first high-probability hit/miss table HT(1) corresponding to “setting 1” is stored in the storage area for storing the hit/miss table in the high probability mode. Display data for displaying “1” is stored in the storage area for storing.

Various information corresponding to “setting 3” is stored in the second setting information storage area 325b and the fifth setting information storage area 325e. That is, in the second setting information storage area 325b and the fifth setting information storage area 325e, the third low-probability table LT(3) corresponding to "setting 3" is stored in the storage area for storing the low probability mode win/loss table. ) Is stored, and the third high-probability hit/miss table HT(3) corresponding to “setting 3” is stored in the storage area for storing the hit/miss table in the high probability mode. Display data for displaying "3" is stored in the storage area for storing.

Various information corresponding to “setting 6” is stored in the third setting information storage area 325c and the sixth setting information storage area 325f. That is, in the third setting information storage area 325c and the sixth setting information storage area 325f, the sixth low certainty hit/miss table LT(6) corresponding to "setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the hit/miss table of the low probability mode. ) Is stored, and a sixth high-probability hit/miss table HT(6) corresponding to “setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the hit/miss table in the high probability mode. Display data for displaying "6" is stored in the storage area for storing.

In the case of the configuration of the second form, even if the configuration corresponding storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is used, these first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are used. The set value of the number of stages is set to be smaller than the number of six. Then, in the low-probability mode, the larger the set value is, the higher the probability of being a jackpot result is. The jackpot probability in the high-probability mode in “Setting 1” is higher than the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode in “Setting 6”.

In the case of the configuration of the second embodiment, in the read/write table (FIG. 143), the setting value counter corresponds to “setting 1” regardless of whether the value is “1” or “4”. The win/loss table is read, and the win/loss table corresponding to “setting 3” is read regardless of whether the value of the set value counter is “2” or “5”, and the value of the set value counter is In either case of "3" or "6", the win/loss table corresponding to "setting 6" is read.

The read/write table reading process (FIG. 143) is configured to read the win/loss table from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the set value counter regardless of the number of steps of the set value. As a result, even if three-stage setting values are set, the processing configuration of the read/write table (FIG. 143) is the same as that when six-stage setting values are set. It becomes possible.

In the case of the configuration of the second mode, when the setting correspondence storage area 325 capable of setting the setting values in six stages is used, the setting values in three stages are set, so that the setting correspondence storage area 325 can set the setting values. It is possible to divide the number of stages of various set values by the number of stages of set values to be used. That is, the number of steps of the set value to be used is a divisor of the maximum number of steps of the set value that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 325, and is a number different from the maximum number of steps. In this case, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are allocated to each of the setting values to be used, and the setting values of three stages are arranged in ascending order one by one. In such a case, the setting values are assigned to the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f so that the group is repeated. Thus, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the set value counter is "1" in the set value update process (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The set value displayed as is changed in the order of “1”→“3”→“6”→“1”→“3”→“6”→“1”→... That is, the display is changed to a display of different set values in response to one operation of the reset button 68c, and the display in a certain mode is performed when one set of display cycles indicates that settable set values are displayed once. The orbit will be repeated. Therefore, it becomes easy to perform the update operation of the set value.

In the setting process (FIG. 144) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update, the set value is displayed from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the set value counter regardless of the number of steps of the set value. This is a configuration for reading data. As a result, even when three-stage setting values are set, the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 144) can be made the same as that when six-stage setting values are set. It will be possible.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second mode, various information corresponding to “setting 1” is stored in the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area 325b, and the third setting information storage area 325c and the third setting information storage area 325c are stored. Various information corresponding to “setting 3” is stored in the fourth setting information storage area 325d, and various information corresponding to “setting 6” is stored in the fifth setting information storage area 325e and the sixth setting information storage area 325f. It may be configured to have. That is, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are assigned to the respective setting values to be used, and the same setting values are consecutive in relation to the value of the setting value counter. The configuration may be set to 325a to 325f. In this case, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the set value counter is "1" in the set value update process (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The set value displayed as is changed in the order of “1”→“1”→“3”→“3”→“6”→“6”→“1”→...

For details about the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the third mode, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142(c), the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area are shown. Various information corresponding to “setting 1” is stored in 325b. That is, in the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area 325b, the first low certainty probability table LT(1) corresponding to "setting 1" is stored in the storage area for storing the probability table of the low probability mode. ) Is stored, and a common high certainty hit/miss table HT that is common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the hit/miss table of the high probability mode, and the set value is displayed. Display data for displaying "1" is stored in a storage area for storing data.

Various information corresponding to "setting 2" is stored in the third setting information storage area 325c and the fourth setting information storage area 325d. That is, in the third setting information storage area 325c and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, the second low probability table LT(2) corresponding to “setting 2” is stored in the storage area for storing the low probability mode win/loss table. ) Is stored, and a common high certainty hit/miss table HT that is common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the hit/miss table of the high probability mode, and the set value is displayed. Display data for displaying "2" is stored in a storage area for storing data.

Various information corresponding to “setting 3” is stored in the fifth setting information storage area 325e. That is, in the fifth setting information storage area 325e, the third low-probability/probability table LT(3) corresponding to “setting 3” is stored in the storage area for storing the low/probability mode win/loss table, which is high. A common high certainty accuracy table HT that is common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the probability table of the probability mode, and a storage area for storing the display data of the set value. The display data for displaying "3" is stored.

Various information corresponding to "setting 4" is stored in the sixth setting information storage area 325f. That is, in the sixth setting information storage area 325f, the fourth low certainty probability table LT(4) corresponding to “Setting 4” is stored in the storage area for storing the win/loss table of the low probability mode, and the high probability A common high certainty accuracy table HT that is common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is stored in the storage area for storing the probability table of the probability mode, and a storage area for storing the display data of the set value. The display data for displaying "4" is stored in.

In the case of the configuration of the third mode, even if the configuration corresponding storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is used, these first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are used. The set value of the number of stages is set to be smaller than the number of six. The probability of a big hit result in the low-probability mode increases as the set value increases, and the probability of a big hit result in the high-probability mode becomes the same regardless of the set value. Since the probability of a jackpot result in the high-probability mode is 1/30, the probability of a jackpot result in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode in “setting 4” even in “Setting 1”. There is a high probability.

In the case of the configuration of the third mode, in the read/write table (FIG. 143), the setting value counter corresponds to “setting 1” regardless of whether the value is “1” or “2”. The win/loss table is read, and the win/loss table corresponding to “setting 2” is read regardless of whether the value of the set value counter is “3” or “4”, and the value of the set value counter is In the case of "5", the win/loss table corresponding to "setting 3" is read, and in the case of the value of the set value counter being "6", the win/loss table corresponding to "setting 4" is read.

The read/write table (FIG. 143) is configured to read the win/loss table from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the set value counter regardless of the number of steps of the set value. As a result, even if four-step set values are set, the processing configuration of the read/write table (FIG. 143) is the same as that when six-step set values are set. It becomes possible.

In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, when the setting correspondence storage area 325 capable of setting the setting values in 6 stages is used, the setting values in 4 stages are set, so that the setting correspondence can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 325. The number of different set values cannot be divided by the number of set values to be used. In this case, two continuous setting information storage areas 325a to 325d are allocated to each of "setting 1" and "setting 2" in relation to the value of the setting value counter, and "setting 3" and One setting information storage area 325e, 325f is allocated to each of the "settings 4". Thus, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the set value counter is "1" in the set value update process (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The set value displayed as is changed in the order of “1”→“1”→“2”→“2”→“3”→“4”→“1”→...

In the setting process (FIG. 144) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update, the set value is displayed from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the set value counter regardless of the number of steps of the set value. This is a configuration for reading data. As a result, even if four-step set values are set, the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 144) can be made the same as that when six-step set values are set. It will be possible.

In addition, in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), in order to change the display of the setting values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 with respect to one operation of the reset button 68c, It is preferable that various pieces of information corresponding to the same set value are not set in consecutive set information storage areas 325a to 325f in relation to the value of the set value counter. For example, various information corresponding to “setting 1” is set in the first setting information storage area 325a, various information corresponding to “setting 2” is set in the second setting information storage area 325b, and third setting information storage area Various information corresponding to "setting 3" is set in 325c, various information corresponding to "setting 4" is set in the fourth setting information storage area 325d, and "setting 1" is set in the fifth setting information storage area 325e. A configuration is conceivable in which various information to be set is set and various information corresponding to “setting 2” is set in the sixth setting information storage area 325f. In this case, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the set value counter is "1" in the set value update process (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The set value displayed as is changed in the order of “1”→“2”→“3”→“4”→“1”→“2”→“1”→...

For details on the case where the setting correspondence storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth mode, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 142(d), all of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are described. Various information corresponding to "Setting 1" is stored in the. That is, in the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, the first low certainty hit/miss table LT(1) corresponding to "Setting 1" is stored in the storage area for storing the hit/miss table of the low probability mode. The common high-probability table HT, which is common to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, is stored in the storage area for storing the hit table of the high probability mode, and the display data of the set value is stored. Display data for displaying “1” is stored in the storage area for displaying.

In the case of the configuration of the fourth embodiment, only one type of setting value is set even if the setting correspondence storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f is used. Even if only one type of setting value is set in this way, in the read/write table reading process (FIG. 143), the read/write table can be read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the set value counter. is there. As a result, even when only one type of setting value is set, the processing configuration of the read/write table (FIG. 143) is the same as the processing configuration when setting values in six stages. It becomes possible to do.

In the case of the configuration of the fourth mode, it is not basically necessary to execute the set value update processing (FIG. 116) because it is not necessary to set the set value, but if the set value is abnormal, the set value is updated. The update process (FIG. 116) may be executed. In this case, “setting 1” is assigned to all of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. Therefore, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the set value counter is "1" in the set value update process (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used. The set value displayed is “1”→“1”→“1”→“1”→“1”→“1”→“1”→... It will be.

In the setting process (FIG. 144) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update, the set value is displayed from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the set value counter regardless of the number of steps of the set value. This is a configuration for reading data. As a result, even when only one type of setting value is set, the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 144) should be the same as the processing configuration when the setting value of 6 levels is set. Is possible.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

Since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player expects that a more advantageous setting value is to be used. It will be. In this case, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second form to the fourth form, the first predetermined number (specifically, 6) of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are provided to store the win/loss table corresponding to the set values. In this configuration, the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number. This makes it possible to share the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in which the number of kinds of setting values to be used is the first predetermined number and the setting correspondence storage area 325, and to change the number of kinds of setting values. In this case, the design work of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily performed.

In the set value update processing (step S7918), the set value to be used is changed by changing the numerical information of the set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control every time the reset button 68c is operated. By using the win/loss table of the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the changed numerical value information in the win/loss judgment process, the win/loss judgment process is executed in a manner corresponding to the setting value to be used. Become. In this case, each hit/miss table of set values that can be set is stored in at least one of the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, and is a part of the first predetermined number and stores a plurality of setting information. Since the same win/loss table is stored in the areas 325a to 325f, the win/loss table is stored in all of the first predetermined number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. Thereby, while using the configuration in which the first predetermined number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are used as they are and the setting value counter is used to determine the setting value to be used, the setting value to be used is changed. It is possible to make the number of types smaller than the first predetermined number.

In this configuration, the win/loss table is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the numerical value information of the set value counter, and the win/loss determination process is executed using the read win/loss table. As a result, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the configuration for reading the win/loss table when executing the win/loss determination process can be used as it is. ..

In the situation where the set value update processing (step S7918) is executed, the display data of the set value is read from the set information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the numerical information of the set value counter, and the read display data of the set value is read. The corresponding display is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. As a result, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is less than the first predetermined number, the configuration for reading the display data of the setting values when executing the display corresponding to the setting values is used as it is. It becomes possible to do.

The number of steps of the setting value to be used is a divisor of the maximum number of steps of the setting value that can be set in the setting correspondence storage area 325, and is a number different from the maximum number of steps. In this case, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are allocated to each of the setting values to be used, and the setting values of three stages are arranged in ascending order one by one. In such a case, the setting values are assigned to the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f so that the group is repeated. Thus, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from the situation where the value of the set value counter is "1" in the set value update process (FIG. 116), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. The set value displayed as is changed in the order of “1”→“3”→“6”→“1”→“3”→“6”→“1”→... That is, the display is changed to a display of different set values in response to one operation of the reset button 68c, and the display in a certain mode is performed when one set of display cycles indicates that settable set values are displayed once. The orbit will be repeated. Therefore, it becomes easy to perform the update operation of the set value.

In a configuration in which the high probability mode win/loss table does not change according to the set value, the high probability mode win/loss table is stored in the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f of the setting correspondence storage area 325. Instead of being stored, it may be stored in a storage area different from the setting correspondence storage area 325 in the main ROM 64.

Further, when there is only one setting value to be used, the win/loss table corresponding to the setting value is set only in one setting information storage area 325a to 325f and the remaining setting information storage area 325a to The win/loss table may not be set in 325f. In addition, when the setting value to be used is a plurality of steps but the number of steps is smaller than the number of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, the win/fail tables corresponding to the respective setting values are respectively set. A configuration may be adopted in which only one corresponding setting information storage area 325a to 325f is set and the remaining setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are not set with win/fail tables. In the configuration, by setting the numerical information corresponding to the setting information storage areas 325a to 325 for which the win/loss table is not set as the numerical information that cannot be selected by the set value counter, the setting information storage area for which the win/loss table is not set It is possible to prevent 325a to 325f from being selected at the time of reading the hit/miss table or the display data of the set value.

<40th Embodiment>
In the thirty-ninth embodiment, the setting correspondence storage area 325 capable of setting the setting values in six stages is used, but in the present embodiment, the setting correspondence storage area capable of setting the setting values in three stages is set. The storage area 326 is used.

145(a) to 145(c) are explanatory views for explaining the setting correspondence storage area 326 stored in the main ROM 64 in advance.

The setting correspondence storage area 326 is provided with a first setting information storage area 326a, a second setting information storage area 326b, and a third setting information storage area 326c. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 145(a), various information corresponding to "setting 1" is set in the first setting information storage area 326a, and "setting 2" is set in the second setting information storage area 326b. Is set, and various information corresponding to "Setting 3" is set in the third setting information storage area 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the maximum number of settable values in the setting correspondence storage area 326 is set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 145(b), various information corresponding to “setting 1” is set in all of the first to third setting information storage areas 326a to 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second mode, only one type of set value is set by using the setting correspondence storage area 326 in which set values of three stages can be set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third mode shown in FIG. 145(c), various information corresponding to “setting 1” is set in the first setting information storage area 326a and the second setting information storage area 326b, and the third setting is performed. Various information corresponding to “setting 3” is set in the information storage area 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the setting correspondence storage area 326 capable of setting the setting values in three stages is used to set the setting values in two stages.

According to the above configuration, the setting correspondence storage area 326 capable of setting three-stage setting values is used in the second and third modes in which the setting values of the number of stages smaller than the three-stage setting values are used. The pachinko machine 10 can be used as it is. Also, as in the 39th embodiment, the processing configuration of the read/write table (FIG. 143) and the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 144) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update are as follows: ~ It becomes possible to use in common in the pachinko machine 10 of the third mode.

<Forty-first embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) or the set value update process (step S7918) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, it is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The third embodiment is different from the thirty-third embodiment in that a predetermined notification is executed on the display unit. The configuration different from that of the 33rd embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 146( a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various display units provided in a region visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 that causes the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

As various display parts, a special figure display part 37a, a special figure reservation display part 37b, a general figure display part 38a, and a general figure reservation display part 38b are provided. These functions are the same as those in the first embodiment. The special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a are provided side by side, but the round display portion 330 is provided so as to be side by side with the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a. Has been.

The round display section 330 has seven display segments 331 to 337, like the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a. Each of the seven display segments 331 to 337 is a rod-shaped light emitting region having the same shape and the same size, and is arranged so as to generate the shape of "8". The seven display segments 331 to 337 are individually controlled to emit light.

In the round display section 330, the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is notified. In the present embodiment, as a jackpot result that can be selected when the jackpot determination process is a jackpot, the first jackpot result that triggers a transition to the open/close execution mode in which the number of round game executions is relatively small, and the round game. There is a second jackpot result that triggers a transition to the open/close execution mode in which the number of times of execution is relatively large. Specifically, the round game is executed twice in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first jackpot result, and the round game is executed 16 times in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second jackpot result.

The first jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/loss lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the win/win lottery mode has a high probability in the end/opening/closing execution mode. There is a big hit result that the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as well as the mode. In addition, the second jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/loss lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and the win/loss lottery mode has a high probability after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. There is a big hit result that the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as well as the mode.

FIG. 146( b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the round display unit 330.

The round display unit 330 displays at least a part of the display state from the non-display state in which all the display segments 331 to 337 are turned off when the open/close execution mode triggered by one of the jackpot results is started. The segments 331 to 337 are in a display state in which they emit light. When the open/close execution mode continues, the display content displayed on the round display section 330 at the start of the open/close execution mode is maintained. Then, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the round display unit 330 changes from the display state to the non-display state.

In the opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed twice, as shown in FIG. 146(b), the first to fourth display segments 331 to 334 of the round display section 330 are turned off, and the fifth segment is displayed. ~ The seventh display segments 335 to 337 are turned on. In the open/close execution mode in which 16 round games are executed, as shown in FIG. 146(b), the first to fourth display segments 331 to 334 of the round display section 330 are turned on, and the fifth segment is displayed. The seventh display segments 335 to 337 are turned off. Thereby, the manager of the game hall confirms the round display section 330 when the pachinko machine 10 is executing the opening/closing execution mode, and the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to any kind of opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not.

When the set value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, the round display unit 330 makes a corresponding display. Specifically, when the set value update process (step S7918) is being executed, as shown in FIG. 146(b), the first display segment 331, the third display segment 333 of the round display unit 330, The fifth display segment 335 and the seventh display segment 337 are turned off, and the second display segment 332, the fourth display segment 334, and the sixth display segment 336 are turned on.

The display in the round display unit 330 corresponding to the set value update process (step S7918) is started when the set value update process (step S7918) is started, and is displayed when the set value update process (step S7918) is finished. Will be terminated. This display content is different from the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 when the open/close execution mode is executed, and when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) described below is further executed, the round display unit is displayed. It is also different from the display content displayed on 330. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can easily confirm whether or not the setting value updating process (step S7918) is being performed by checking the round display unit 330. In addition, such a grasp can be performed by using the round display unit 330.

When the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, the corresponding display is displayed in the round display unit 330. Specifically, when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed, as shown in FIG. 146(b), the first display segment 331, the third display segment 333 of the round display unit 330, The fifth display segment 335 and the seventh display segment 337 are turned on, and the second display segment 332, the fourth display segment 334, and the sixth display segment 336 are turned off.

The display in the round display unit 330 corresponding to the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is started when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is started, and is displayed when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is ended. Will be terminated. This display content is different from the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 when the open/close execution mode is executed, and is displayed on the round display unit 330 when the set value update processing (step S7918) is further executed. It is also different from the displayed content. As a result, the game hall manager can easily confirm by checking the round display section 330 whether or not the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed. In addition, such a grasp can be performed by using the round display unit 330.

In the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) are executed in the main process (FIG. 114), the process for advancing the game is not executed. Therefore, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the set value update process (step S7918) are not executed in the situation where the open/close execution mode is executed. Further, in the situation where one of the setting confirmation processing (step S7914) and the setting value update processing (step S7918) is being executed, the other is not executed. Therefore, even if the round display section 330 is also used as a display section for performing each display, the situation in which each display should be performed does not occur in duplicate.

The display contents of the round display unit 330 are not limited to the above display contents, and are arbitrary as long as it is possible to distinguish the respective situations from the display contents of the round display unit 330, for example, One of the display and set value update processing (step S7918) corresponding to the setting confirmation processing (step S7914) may be configured so that all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are in the lighting state. In addition, in one of the display and set value update processing (step S7918) corresponding to the setting confirmation processing (step S7914), all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are turned on and the state is maintained. On the other hand, all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 may be in a blinking state.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and the display corresponding to the setting value update process are performed in the round display unit 330, the special figure display unit 37a may perform these displays, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which these displays are performed on the public figure display unit 38a. Further, a display corresponding to the setting confirmation process is performed on any one of the special figure display section 37a, the general figure display section 38a, and the round display section 330, and the display is performed on the other one display section. The display corresponding to the value update processing may be performed.

In addition, the hold information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first operating opening 33 and the hold information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second operating opening 34 are stored separately. As the special view display unit 37a, the first special view display unit in which the game times are triggered by the hold information corresponding to the first working port 33, and the game triggered by the hold information corresponding to the second working port 34 In the configuration provided with the second special figure display unit for executing the number of times, the first special figure display unit performs a display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and a display corresponding to the set value update process. Alternatively, the second special figure display unit may be configured to perform a display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and a display corresponding to the set value update process, and the first special figure display unit may correspond to the setting confirmation process. The second special figure display unit may perform a display corresponding to the set value update processing.

Further, a configuration may be provided in which a dedicated display unit for displaying that the setting confirmation process is being executed is provided, and it is displayed that the setting value update process is being executed. May be provided with a dedicated display unit for displaying the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process. The display unit may be provided. In this case, the dedicated display unit may be display-controlled by the main CPU 63, or may be display-controlled by the sound emission control device 81 or the display control device 82.

<42nd Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configurations of the main process and the first timer interrupt process are different from those of the 33rd embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 33rd embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the thirty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps S9901 to S9923 in the main process are executed by using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step S9901). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the main process is started, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) elapses without waiting for the next process. In the predetermined period for this weight, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

After that, the internal function register setting process is executed (step S9902). In the internal function register setting process, similarly to step S7902 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment, the first timer interrupt process (process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process ( The interrupt period of FIG. 148) is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process. ) Is set to the second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) which is shorter than the first interrupt cycle.

After that, the interrupt permission is set for the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) (step S9903). As a result, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle. On the other hand, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148), the interrupt permission is not set. As a result, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) is still maintained in the interrupt disabled state.

Then, the processing of steps S9904 to S9917 is executed. The processing contents of these steps S9904 to S9917 are the same as the steps S7905 to S7918 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the 33rd embodiment.

After the processing of steps S9904 to S9917 is completed, the interruption permission is set for the first timer interruption processing (FIG. 148) (step S9918). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle. That is, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is activated by the first interrupt cycle and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is activated by the second interrupt cycle. After that, in steps S9919 to S9923, the same processes as steps S7920 to S7924 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. It should be noted that the first timer interrupt process is periodically activated at the 4 ms cycle, which is the first interrupt cycle, as already described. Further, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt processing is set to the program for specific control.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), interrupt prohibition is set (step SA101). Since the generation of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) is prohibited and the generation of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) is prohibited, it is assumed that the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) is being executed. Even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed, it is possible to prevent the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) from being repeatedly activated. Further, since the generation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is prohibited, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is different from the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) even if the second interrupt cycle elapses. It is possible to prevent it from being interrupted and started.

Then, in steps SA102 to SA121, the same processes as steps S8202 to S8221 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. If the determination in step SA107 is affirmative, or if the process in step SA121 is executed, the interrupt permission setting is set to permit the generation of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123). Is performed (step SA122).

According to the above configuration, while the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed in the main processing (FIG. 147), the interrupt of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is permitted, while the first timer interrupt processing is performed. Interrupts (Fig. 148) are not allowed. Accordingly, it is possible to execute the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) even in the situation where the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. On the other hand, the processing for controlling the progress of the game by the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) can be prevented from being executed.

Further, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148) does not start by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) becomes the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 148). It does not start by interrupting it. This makes it possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing from being activated again.

<Forty-third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration for displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is different from that of the 35th embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 35th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

In the present embodiment as well, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the normal counter area 231 is provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Similar to the fifteenth embodiment, the normal counter area 231 has a normal general prize winning counter 231a, a normal special electric prize winning counter 231b, a normal first operating counter 231c, a normal second operating counter 231d and A normal out counter 231e is provided. In a situation where neither the open/close execution mode due to the big hit result nor the high frequency support mode is present, when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, the value of the normal general winning counter 231a is incremented by 1, When one game ball enters the prize winning device 32, the value of the special electric prize winning counter 231b for normal is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the first operating port 33, it is for normal use. The value of the first operation counter 231c of 1 is added, and when one game ball enters the second operation port 34, the value of the normal second operation counter 231d is added by 1, and the value is added to the outlet 24a. When one game ball enters, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1. Then, when the values of the various counters 231a to 231e of the normal counter area 231 are K91 to K95 in a situation where neither the open/close execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode is used, the base values are as follows.
Base value: total payout number of game balls (K91 x "number of prize balls for winning in general prize hole 31" + K92 x "number of prize balls for winning in special electric prize winning device 32" + K93 x "to first operating port 33" Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K91+K92+K93+K94+K95)+K94דnumber of prize balls for winning in the second operation port 34”)/K94.

In the work area 223 for non-specific control, a calculation result storage area 234 is provided in addition to the normal counter area 231. Similar to the thirty-fifth embodiment, the calculation result storage area 234 serves as a storage area for storing the base value information, as a current status area 311, a first history area 312, a second history area 313, and a second history area 313. 3 history area 314 is provided (see FIG. 126). The current area 311 stores the latest base value calculated by the result calculation process (FIG. 149). In the first history area 312, the final base value in the previous calculation period is stored. In the second history area 313, the final base value in the calculation period two times before is stored. The final base value in the calculation period three times before is stored in the third history area 314.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the result calculation processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The management process (step S8920) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) corresponds to the non-specific control in step S3803, like the management process (FIG. 70) in the fifteenth embodiment. Read the program for management execution processing. Then, in this management execution process (FIG. 71), the check process is executed in step S3908 as in the fifteenth embodiment. In this check processing, the result calculation processing is executed and the display processing (FIG. 150) described later is executed. Further, the processing of step SA201 to step SA217 in the result calculation processing is executed using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, the base value calculation process is executed (step SA201). In the calculation process, the base value is calculated using the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 as in the 35th embodiment. Here, in the present embodiment, the calculation of the base value is not completed in one processing cycle of the result calculation processing, but is completed by executing the processing cycle of the result calculation processing a plurality of predetermined times.

Specifically, in a predetermined number of times of the result calculation processing in which the calculation of the base value is newly started, in step SA201, the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are set to K91 to K95. In this case, K91דthe number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31”, K92דnumber of prize balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32”, and K93דwinning for the first operating opening 33” The number of prize balls", K94 x "the number of prize balls for winning in the second operation port 34", and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K91+K92+K93+K94+K95) are calculated, and the respective calculation results are calculated. Is stored in the storage area during calculation provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. After that, in step SA201 of the result calculation processing of the processing number one time after the predetermined processing number, the total payout number of the game balls (K91× "Number of prize balls for winning in the general prize opening 31" + K92 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32" + K93 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K94 x "Second operation The number of prize balls for winning in the mouth 34") is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the above-mentioned calculation storage area. Then, in step SA201 of the result calculation processing of the processing times two times after the predetermined processing times, the base value is calculated using various information stored in the calculation-in-progress storage area.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is necessary to execute the result calculation processing three times in order to calculate one base value. In this case, since the result calculation process is called and executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), it is executed every time the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds) elapses. Become. Therefore, one base value is calculated in a cycle of about 12 milliseconds. However, the cycle in which one base value is calculated is not limited to this, and may be a cycle shorter than the 12-millisecond cycle or a cycle longer than the 12-millisecond cycle.

As described above, by adopting a configuration in which one base value is calculated by executing the result operation processing a plurality of times, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating the base value. In particular, since the result calculation process is executed as a process corresponding to the non-specific control, not only the process of reading the program for the non-specific control and the data for the non-specific control but also the specific control for executing the result calculation process. It is necessary to save the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to. In this case, by reducing the processing load for calculating the base value, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the result calculation process, and as a result, the processing load for executing the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Can be reduced.

Even if the result calculation process is executed multiple times to calculate one base value, each piece of information during the calculation of the base value in each process of the result calculation process is a work for non-specific control. Written in area 223. As a result, the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control is performed as the process corresponding to the specific control is executed between one processing cycle of the result calculation processing and the next processing cycle. Even if the information in the various registers is erased, it is possible to store and hold each piece of information during the calculation of the base value.

Even in a configuration in which the processing times of the result calculation processing for calculating one base value are executed a plurality of times, the normal counter area 231 is used in the first processing time of the result calculation processing for calculating the new base value. All the values of the various counters 231a to 231e are extracted, and the extracted values are used to calculate the base value of the calculation times. As a result, even if the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are changed while the one base value is being calculated, the one base value is prevented while being unaffected by the change of the value. Can be calculated.

After the base value calculation processing is executed in step SA201, it is determined whether or not the calculation of one base value is completed in the result calculation processing of this processing time (step SA202). When the calculation of one base value is not completed (step SA202: NO), the current value area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234 is not overwritten with the base value by not executing the processing of steps SA203 to SA205.

When the calculation of one base value is completed (step SA202: YES), the calculated base value is overwritten in the current area 311 (step SA203). Then, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the shift trigger flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA204). In the present embodiment, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation that is neither the open/close execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode. When the calculation of the new base value is completed after the shift reference number (specifically, 60000) is reached, the data shift process (step SA216) in the calculation result storage area 234 is executed. In this data shift process, the information stored in the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is changed from the second history area 313 to the third history area. After shifting in the order of 314, first history area 312→second history area 313, current area 311→first history area 312, the current area 311 is cleared to “0”. The shift trigger flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the situation is after the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number and before the data shift process is executed.

When "1" is set in the shift trigger flag (step SA204: YES), "1" is set in the shift completion flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA205). The calculation completion flag at the time of shift is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the calculation of one base value is completed after the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number.

If a negative determination is made in step SA202, a negative determination is made in step SA204, or the process of step SA205 is executed, "1" is set to the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is determined whether or not it is set (step SA206). If "1" is not set in the management start flag (step SA206: NO), the management pre-processing is executed (step SA207). In the pre-management start processing, the processing of steps S8604 to S8608 of the result calculation processing (FIG. 130) in the 35th embodiment is executed.

When the management start flag is set to "1" (step SA206: YES), it is determined whether the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA208). .. When "1" is not set in the shift trigger flag (step SA208: NO), the total number is calculated by summing the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step SA209). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated total number is not less than the shift reference number of 60000 (step SA210).

When a positive determination is made in step SA210, "1" is set to the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA211). Further, "1" is set to the pre-shift display flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA212). The pre-shift display flag mainly indicates that the pre-shift display corresponding to the fact that the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number should be started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63.

When the shift trigger flag is set to "1" and an affirmative determination is made in step SA208, it is determined whether or not the calculation completion flag at the time of shift in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1". Yes (step SA213). The calculation completion flag at the time of shift is set to "1" when the calculation of one base value is completed after the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number as already described. When a positive determination is made in step SA213, the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA214). Further, the operation completion flag at the time of shift in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA215).

Then, the data shift process is executed (step SA216). In the data shift process, the information stored in the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is changed from the second history area 313 to the third history area 314. , The first history area 312→the second history area 313, the current area 311→the first history area 312, and then the current area 311 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the final base value in the calculation period two times before is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the calculation period three times before, and the final base value in the calculation period one time before. Is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the calculation period two times before, and the base value calculated after the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number in the current calculation period is once. It is stored in the first history area 312 as the final base value in the previous calculation period. Further, the current area 311 is in a state where no base value is stored. In the data shift processing, the LDIR instruction is used when the above information shift is performed. In the LDIR instruction, the information stored in the storage area is shifted (copied) to the storage area by designating the address of the storage area of the information and the address of the storage area of the information. Becomes After that, the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are all cleared to "0" (step SA217).

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the display processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of step SA301 to step SA320 in the display processing is executed using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the management start flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA301). When a negative determination is made in step SA301, the base value is read from the current area 311 and the decimal point is the first decimal place in the read base value, as in step S8714 of the display process (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment. The calculation result data corresponding to the numeral and the second decimal place are set in the display target setting area 276 (step SA302). By transmitting the display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the first decimal place number in the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the base of the current area 311 is displayed. The number in the second decimal place in the value is displayed on the fourth annunciator display device 204. With the above configuration, when the management start flag is not set to "1", the base value in the past calculation period is not notified, and only the base value calculated in the current calculation period is notified. To be done. Note that the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value is notified in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" are the same as those in the 35th embodiment. ..

When a positive determination is made in step SA301, the value of the switching timing counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is decremented by 1 (step SA303). The switching timing counter determines the timing of switching the display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the base values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is a counter for specifying in.

In the present embodiment, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation that is neither the open/close execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode. When the shift reference number is not reached, the notification of the base value stored in each of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 is displayed continuously (specifically, Is executed for 5 seconds), and the interval non-display is performed for the interval period (specifically 1 sec.) in order to notify that the switching of the base value to be notified occurs between the notifications of the base values. Seconds). Specifically, as the interval non-display, all the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are turned off, so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are displayed. 204 is hidden. The non-display for the interval is performed before the base value to be notified is switched in the predetermined order of the current area 311→the first history area 312→the second history area 313→the third history area 314. It is possible for the manager of the game hall to clearly recognize that the target base value is switched.

In a situation where the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number, the corresponding pre-shift display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, as the pre-shift display, “A.” is displayed on each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The display content of “A.” is the display content that is not displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in both the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the base value and the interval period in which the interval is not displayed. is there. As a result, the entire display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the state where the pre-shift display is performed are the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the base value and the interval period in which the interval non-display is performed. Can have different display contents. Therefore, when the game hall manager confirms that the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the total number of the game balls has reached the shift reference number. This makes it possible to understand that the base value is being shifted.

The display contents of the pre-shift display are the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation in which the check display is being performed, and the display content in the situation in which "1" is not set in the pre-management start flag. Display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is being executed, and setting value update It is also different from the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the process (FIG. 137) is being executed. From this point as well, the manager of the game hall confirms that the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, so that the total number of the game balls is the shift reference number. It becomes possible to understand that the base value is being shifted by reaching the value of.

The execution period of the pre-shift display is set to be longer than the interval period (specifically, 1 second) in which the interval non-display is performed. The execution period of the pre-shift display is set to be longer than the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) of the display corresponding to the base value. Specifically, the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to 8 seconds. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the pre-shift display may be longer than the interval period and equal to or less than the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the base value, or may be equal to or less than the interval period. .. However, in order for the game hall manager to clearly recognize that the pre-shift display is being performed, it is preferable that the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to be longer than the interval period.

As already described, in order to complete the calculation of one base value, the result operation processing (FIG. 149) needs to be executed a plurality of times. Specifically, the cycle for calculating one base value is It has a cycle of 12 milliseconds. Further, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the data shift processing (step SA216) in which the information of the base value is shifted among the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 is set to the shift reference number. It is executed after one base value is newly calculated after reaching. In this case, the execution period of the pre-shift display is longer than the longest period required to complete the data shift process (step SA216) when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number. It is set. Thereby, in the situation where the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the new calculation of one base value and the data shift processing of the base value (step SA216) are completed. Is possible.

Returning to the description of the display process (FIG. 150), when the process of step SA303 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the switching timing counter after subtracting 1 is “0” to display the base value. It is determined whether or not the current measurement target period has elapsed among the continuation period, the interval period in which the interval non-display is performed, and the pre-shift display execution period (step SA304). When a positive determination is made in step SA304, it is a situation in which the pre-shift display should be started by determining whether or not "1" is set in the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is determined whether or not (step SA305). When a negative determination is made in step SA305, it is determined whether "1" is set in the interval flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA306). The interval flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the non-display for interval should be started.

When a negative determination is made in step SA306, it means that the target of which the notification should be started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at this switching timing is the base value. In this case, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step SA307). When the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "3" (step SA308: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step SA309).

The display target counter is the first to fourth notification displays among the base values stored in the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the base value to be notified in the devices 201 to 204. Specifically, when the value of the display target counter is “0”, the base value stored in the current area 311 becomes the notification target, and when the value of the display target counter is “1”, the first history area When the base value stored in 312 is the notification target and the value of the display target counter is “2”, the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the notification target and the value of the display target counter is “3”. , The base value stored in the third history area 314 is the notification target.

When a negative determination is made in step SA308 or when the process of step SA309 is executed, the base timing is displayed on the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control as a value corresponding to the next switching timing. A value corresponding to the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set (step SA310). Then, the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA311). As a result, if "1" is not set in the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control by the next switching timing, the interval non-display will be used when the next switching timing comes. It will be displayed.

After that, the processing for setting the display data corresponding to the base value that is the current notification target in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed. Specifically, similar to step S8708 of the display process (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter is set in the display target setting area 276 (step SA312). .. The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to perform a display indicating that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the base value, and the notification target base. A display indicating which of the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 the value corresponds to in the calculation result storage area 234 is displayed on the second notification display device 202. And display data to be executed.

After that, as in step S8709 of the display process (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are displayed. A base value is read from the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter, and calculation result data corresponding to the decimal point first digit and the decimal point second digit in the read base value are displayed in the display target setting area 276. (Step SA313). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to perform a display corresponding to the first decimal point number in the notification target base value, and the second decimal point number in the notification target base value. And display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to perform a display corresponding to.

By setting the display data including the display type data and the calculation result data in the display target setting area 276, the display data is displayed by the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. The display corresponding to the display data is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. That is, when the base value of the current area 311 is the notification target, the display as shown in FIG. 127A is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as an example. When the base value of the history area 312 is the notification target, the display as shown in FIG. 127(b) is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as an example, and the second history area is displayed. When the base value of 313 is the notification target, the display as shown in FIG. 127C is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as an example, and the third history area 314 is displayed. When the base value is the notification target, the display as shown in FIG. 127D is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as an example.

When a positive determination is made in step SA306 because the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1", the switching timing of this time is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Means that the target for which the notification should be started is the interval non-display. In this case, the interval setting process is executed (step SA314). In the setting process, a value corresponding to the interval period (specifically, 1 second) is set in the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control as a value corresponding to the next switching timing. After that, the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA315). As a result, when "1" is not set in the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control by the next switching timing, the base value of the base value is set when the next switching timing comes. It will be displayed.

After that, the interval data is set in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA316). The interval data is data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform interval non-display, and specifically, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is data for turning off the display segments 321 to 324. By setting the interval data as the display data in the display target setting area 276, the interval data is transmitted to the display IC 266 by the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 All of 204 are in a non-display state. The manager of the game hall, who has confirmed that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the non-display state, can recognize that it is the interval period.

When a positive determination is made in step SA305 because the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1", the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 indicate the current time. This means that the target to be notified when the switching timing is triggered is the pre-shift display. In this case, the pre-shift display period setting process is executed (step SA317). In the setting process, a value corresponding to the execution period of the pre-shift display (specifically, 8 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control as a value corresponding to the next switching timing.

After that, the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0", and the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA318). The maximum value "3" is set in the display target counter in the work area 223 (step SA319). When the execution period of the pre-shift display has elapsed by clearing the interval flag to "0", the next notification target becomes the base value. Then, by setting the maximum value to the display target counter, if a negative determination is made in step SA306 to notify the base value, the display target counter after adding 1 to the value of the display target counter in step SA307 Value exceeds the maximum value, a positive determination is made in step SA308 and the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0". Thus, when the execution period of the pre-shift display has elapsed, the next notification target becomes the base value, and the base value becomes the base value of the current area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234.

That is, when the pre-shift display is performed, the notification of the base value is started regardless of whether the notification target before the pre-shift display is the base value or the interval non-display. As a result, when the pre-shift display is completed, it is possible to confirm the base value without waiting for the interval period to elapse. In addition, the base value that is the last notification target before the pre-shift display is displayed is any one of the current result area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234. Even if there is, when the pre-shift display is completed, the notification is started from the base value of the current area 311. As a result, the base value notification order in the current area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 can be returned to the first notification order, and immediately after the base value shift occurs. It is possible to make it easy for the manager of the game hall to recognize that

Thereafter, the pre-shift display data is set in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA320). The pre-shift display data is data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform the pre-shift display. Specifically, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, “ It is data for displaying "A.". By setting the pre-shift display data as the display data in the display target setting area 276, the pre-shift display data is transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and the first to fourth notifications are made. “A.” is displayed on each of the display devices 201 to 204. The manager of the game hall who confirms that the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can recognize that it is the execution period of the pre-shift display. ..

Next, referring to the time chart of FIG. 151, in a situation where the management start flag is set to “1”, the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 are notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The situation will be described. FIG. 151( a) shows a period in which the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204, and FIG. 151( b) is stored in the first history area 312. 151(c) shows the base values stored in the second history area 313 for the first to fourth notifications. 151(d) shows the base value stored in the third history area 314 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204. 151(e) shows a period in which interval non-display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 151(f) shows the first to fourth notification display devices. 201 to 204 show a period during which the pre-shift display is performed, and FIG. 151(g) shows a case where neither the open/close execution mode according to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode has occurred since the base value calculation period was newly started. The timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) has reached the shift reference number (specifically, 60000) is shown.

At a timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 151(a), the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 127(a), a display indicating that the base value is the notification target is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and is stored in the current area 311 on the second notification display device 202. The display indicating that the base value is the notification target is displayed, and the display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t1 at the timing of t2, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is finished as shown in FIG. 151(a), and shown in FIG. 151(e). Thus, the non-display for intervals is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This non-display for interval is ended as shown in FIG. 151(e) at the timing of t3, which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t2.

At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 151(b), the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this notification, as shown in FIG. 127(b), a display indicating that the base value is the notification target is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and the second notification display device 202 displays on the first history area 312. A display indicating that the stored base value is a notification target is performed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. Be seen.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t3 at the timing of t4, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is ended as shown in FIG. 151(b), and the timing shown in FIG. As shown in, the interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This non-display for interval is ended as shown in FIG. 151(e) at the timing of t5 which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t4.

At the timing of t5, the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 151(c). In this notification, as shown in FIG. 127(c), a display indicating that the base value is the notification target is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and the second notification display device 202 displays in the second history area 313. A display indicating that the stored base value is a notification target is performed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the second history area 313 is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. Be seen.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t5 at the timing of t6, the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is finished as shown in FIG. 151(c), and FIG. 151(e). As shown in, the interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This non-display for interval is ended as shown in FIG. 151(e) at the timing of t7 which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t6.

At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 151(d), the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this notification, as shown in FIG. 127(d), a display indicating that the base value is the notification target is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and the second notification display device 202 displays in the third history area 314. A display indicating that the stored base value is a notification target is performed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the third history area 314 is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. Be seen.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t7 at the timing of t8, the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is finished as shown in FIG. 151(d), and the display of FIG. 151(e) is completed. As shown in, the interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This non-display for interval is ended as shown in FIG. 151(e) at the timing of t9 which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t8.

After that, similarly to the timing of t1 to the timing of t2 from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10, the display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 as shown in FIG. 4 display device 201 to 204 for notification, and, similarly to the timing of t2 to the timing of t3 over the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. This is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Then, similarly to the timing of t3, the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is displayed at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 151(b). Started at.

After that, at the timing of t12 which is the timing during which the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is being performed, the base value calculation period is newly added as shown in FIG. 151(g). The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) is shifted in a situation where neither the open/close execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode has been started since the start. The reference number (specifically, 60,000) is reached. However, at the timing of t12, since the display continuation period has not elapsed since the display corresponding to the base value of the first history area 312 was started at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 151(b). The display corresponding to the base value of the one history area 312 is continued. Thereby, even if the timing when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number is arbitrary, the display of the current notification target on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is performed as planned. It is possible to start the pre-shift display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after performing the operation for a period.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t11 at the timing of t13, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is ended as illustrated in FIG. 151(b), and the notification of the base value illustrated in FIG. 151(f) is completed. As shown in, the pre-shift display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Even if the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while other base values are being notified, if the display continuation continuation for the notification of the base value has elapsed, before the shift. The display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, even if the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while the non-display for the interval is being performed, the pre-shift display is displayed when the interval period for the non-display for the interval has elapsed. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are started.

After that, at the timing of t14, the execution period of the pre-shift display elapses from the timing of t13, the pre-shift display is ended as shown in FIG. 151(f), and the current area 311 is shown as shown in FIG. 151(a). The notification of the base value stored in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. That is, even if the notification target when the pre-shift display is started is the base value of the first history area 312, when the pre-shift display is completed, it corresponds to the first notification order in the base value notification order. The notification is started from the base value of the current area 311.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t14 at the timing of t15, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is finished as shown in FIG. 151(a), and then shown in FIG. 151(e). Thus, the non-display for intervals is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is ended as shown in FIG. 151(e) at the timing of t16, which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t15, and as shown in FIG. 151(b), the base of the first history area 312 is displayed. The display corresponding to the value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The base values stored in the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. To be done. This makes it possible to individually notify the respective base values corresponding to different periods while suppressing the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, since each base value is displayed in a predetermined order, the manager of the game hall can easily understand the type of the base value to be displayed.

The display order of the base values is determined in association with each of the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of the base value to be displayed when the base value is newly displayed.

Before the situation in which one base value is displayed is changed to the situation in which the next base value is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the interval non-display state. This allows the manager of the game hall to clearly understand that the type of the base value to be displayed has been switched.

In the configuration in which the base values are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in either the open/close execution mode or the high frequency support mode depending on the jackpot result after the base value calculation period is newly started. When the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000) in the absence of the first condition, the first -Pre-shift display is performed on the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the total number of the game balls has reached the shift reference number by using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number, the base value stored in the current result area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. Is shifted to the storage area on the rear side of the storage order, various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0", and the calculation of the base value of the new calculation period is started. Therefore, when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, the content of the base value notification on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is changed. In this case, when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, the notification of the base value is restarted after the pre-shift display is performed, so that the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number. It is possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the content of the notification of the base value is changed when this is done.

When the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while the base value is being displayed, the pre-shift display is started after the display continuation period of the display of the base value has elapsed. This makes it possible to start the pre-shift display while not disturbing the already-displayed base value.

In the configuration in which the plurality of base values stored in the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially displayed in the predetermined display order, after the pre-shift display is performed, the base values in the first order in the predetermined display order are displayed. As a result, when the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number, it is possible to check again from the base value of the first order in the predetermined display order.

In the configuration for calculating the base value in the result calculation process (FIG. 149), the result calculation process is executed a plurality of times from the start of calculation of one base value until the calculation of the base value is completed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for executing the result calculation process, as compared with the configuration in which the calculation of the base value is completed in one result calculation process.

When the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number, the base value data shift process (step SA216) is executed after the base value is newly derived at the timing when the shift reference number is reached. When the total number of the game balls has reached the shift reference number, the pre-shift display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, in a situation in which the base value is newly derived and the data shift processing of the base value is being performed, it becomes possible to perform pre-shift display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to prevent the previous display of the base value from being continued even though the reference number has been reached.

In addition, since the base value calculation period is started, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation where neither the open/close execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode is provided (that is, supplied to the game area PA). Until the total number of game balls reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6000), as in the 35th embodiment, if the base value of the current area 311 is displayed, the first to fourth values are displayed. The notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to perform the initial calculation display.

In addition, when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000) in a state where the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not displayed for the interval, it is immediately shifted. The total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number (specifically, 60000) in the situation where the previous display is started and the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, the pre-shift display may be started when the display continuation period of the display of the base value has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to start the pre-shift display early while preventing the base value display that has already been performed from being terminated midway.

The display contents of the pre-shift display are not limited to those described above, and the display contents of at least a part of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be displayed in other situations. However, the entire display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be display content that is not displayed in other situations. In addition, when the pre-shift display is performed, at least one display segment 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a lighting state. For some of the 4 notification display devices 201 to 204, all the display segments 321 to 324 may be turned off. In addition, when the pre-shift display is performed, the display content of the pre-shift display is not limited to the configuration in which the display content of the pre-shift display is maintained for the execution period of the pre-shift display. The configuration may be such that it blinks over the execution period of.

Further, the execution period of the pre-shift display is not limited to a fixed configuration. For example, a new base value is calculated after the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60000). The execution period of the pre-shift display may be changed according to the period required to complete the data shift process of the base value.

Further, when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number, the last of the display laps of the respective base values being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time point. The configuration may be such that the pre-shift display is started after the display of the sequential base values (that is, the base values stored in the third history area 314) is completed. As a result, after the display cycle of each base value is completed, it is possible to start a new display cycle of each base value via the pre-shift display.

Further, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the calculation of the base value is started using the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 at that time, and the calculation of the base value is started. The data shift process (step SA216) may be performed when the process is completed. In this case, it becomes possible to accurately calculate the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number.

Further, in the interval period, instead of performing the non-display for the interval, at least a part of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 performs a predetermined display and also displays the first to fourth notification displays. The entire display of the devices 201 to 204 may be configured to perform an interval display having display content different from display content that may occur in a situation where the base value is notified. For example, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, only the central display segments 321 to 324 may be in a lighting state so that “−” is displayed. The display of “−” may be displayed on a part of the display devices 201 to 204 for 4 notification and the remaining display devices may be in the non-display state.

Further, the interval period may not be set. In this case, when the display continuation period has elapsed for one base value, the display of the base value to be displayed in the next order is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Become.

<44th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the start timing of the pre-shift display is different from that in the 43rd embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the forty-third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the forty-third embodiment is basically omitted.

The start timing of the pre-shift display in this embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 152(a) shows a period in which the base value stored in the current area 311 is notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204, and FIG. 152(b) is stored in the first history area 312. 152(c) shows the base value stored in the second history area 313 for the first to fourth notifications. 152D shows the period notified by the display devices 201-204, and FIG. 152D shows the base values stored in the third history area 314 notified by the first-fourth display devices 201-204. 152(e) shows a period in which interval non-display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 152(f) shows a first to fourth notification display device. 201 to 204 show a period during which the pre-shift display is performed, and FIG. 152(g) shows a case where neither the open/close execution mode according to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode has occurred since the base value calculation period was newly started. The timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) has reached the shift reference number (specifically, 60000) is shown.

At the timing of t1 to t11, the display continuation period is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the time charts of FIGS. 151(a) to 151(g) in the 43rd embodiment. The display corresponding to the base value and the execution of the non-display for the interval in the interval period are repeated, and the display corresponding to the base value is the current status area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234→the first history area 312→the second area. The history area 313 is repeated in the order of the third history area 314. Then, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 152(b), the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, as shown in FIG. 152(g), the base value calculation period is newly added at the timing t12 which is the timing during which the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is being performed. The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) is shifted in a situation where neither the open/close execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode has been started since the start. The reference number (specifically, 60,000) is reached. In this case, at the timing t12, although the display continuation period has not elapsed since the display corresponding to the base value of the first history area 312 was started at the timing t11, as shown in FIG. 152(b). The notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is ended, and the pre-shift display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 152(f).

Even when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number while the other base values are being notified, the pre-shift display is the first to fourth notification display devices 201 at that timing. It starts at ~204. Further, even when the total number of the game balls reaches the shift reference number while the non-display for interval is being performed, the pre-shift display is the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that timing. Started at.

After that, when the execution period of the pre-shift display elapses from the timing of t12 at the timing of t13, the pre-shift display is ended as shown in FIG. 152(f), and the current area 311 is shown as shown in FIG. The notification of the base value stored in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. That is, even if the notification target when the pre-shift display is started is the base value of the first history area 312, when the pre-shift display is completed, it corresponds to the first notification order in the base value notification order. The notification is started from the base value of the current area 311.

After that, when the display continuation period elapses from the timing of t13 at the timing of t14, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is finished as shown in FIG. 152(a), and shown in FIG. 152(e). Thus, the non-display for intervals is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is ended as shown in FIG. 152(e) at the timing of t15, which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t14, and as shown in FIG. 152(b), the base of the first history area 312 is displayed. The display corresponding to the value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

According to the above configuration, since the base value calculation period is newly started, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (that is, a game in a situation where neither the open/close execution mode due to the big hit result nor the high frequency support mode is present). When the total number of game balls supplied to the area PA has reached the shift reference number (specifically, 60000), before the shift on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that timing. The display will start. As a result, the pre-shift display can be started early, and it is possible to notify early that the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number.

<45th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that in the 35th embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 35th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the thirty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps SA401 to SA425 in the main process are executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step SA401). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the main process is started, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) elapses without waiting for the next process. In the predetermined period for this weight, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Then, the internal function register setting process is executed (step SA402). In the internal function register setting process, as in the 35th embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt period. (Specifically, 4 ms), and the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process that is periodically interrupted and activated with respect to the main process, is set from the first interrupt period. Is set to the second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) which is a short cycle.

That is, in this embodiment, as in the 35th embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are performed so that the interrupt cycle becomes relatively short as the timer interrupt processing. And exist. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are activated by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) does not start by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). Further, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are not executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is started first regardless of the lapsed order of the above. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is a process that is activated prior to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be activated prior to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is set. It is set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, the setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

Then, "1" is set to the in-start-up processing flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SA403). As in the 35th embodiment, the start-up processing flag is among the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated. While the power outage monitoring, the processing for updating various counters and the illegality monitoring are executed, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) should be terminated without executing the processing for advancing the game. This is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63.

As for the start-up processing in progress flag, the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power (step SA401 to step SA418) is started in the main processing (FIG. 153) and the interruption permission (step SA404) is started as in the 35th embodiment. "1" is set before the operation is performed, and "0" is cleared before the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is finished and the residual processing (step SA422 to step SA425) is started. In this case, similarly to the 35th embodiment, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SA401 to step SA418) is being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", by executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905, the operating power is reduced. The power failure monitoring is performed even when the process (step SA401 to step SA418) at the start of the supply of is performed, and the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter are also performed. Update of CINI is executed, and further fraud detection is executed.

Particularly, even when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) is executed to start the operation power supply start processing (steps SA401 to SA418). Even if a power failure occurs in the situation where () is being executed, it is possible to execute the power failure process for it. In the power failure process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for the specific control. Since the data is stored in the work area 221 of No. 2, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation process (step SA415) or the set value update process (step SA418), the fact that a power failure has occurred during these setting-related processes is supplied to the next operating power. It is possible to specify at the start.

By the way, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) or the set value update process (step SA418) is being executed, both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are performed. Interrupts are not prohibited and can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed in the main process (FIG. 153) including the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and the setting value update process (step SA418). When the program is interrupted and activated, the information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 153) for returning after the timer interrupt process which is the activation target is completed is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before the timer interrupt processing is activated is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process that is the activation target ends, the process returns to the process of the main process (FIG. 153) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is restored to various registers of the main CPU 63.

After setting the start-up processing flag to "1" in step SA403, interrupt permission is set (step SA404). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt period. However, since "1" is set in the startup processing flag in step SA403, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started, various processing of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is performed. Out of the above, processing for performing power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while the processing for advancing the game is not executed, and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is ended. ..

Then, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SA405). That is, it is determined whether or not the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the reset button 68c is being pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in the present embodiment, as in the 35th embodiment, the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c are provided in the main control device 60, but the update button 68b is not provided. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with not the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c but the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment.

When the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SA405: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA406). When the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) executes the power failure processing, the power failure flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power outage process was appropriately performed at the previous power off time.

When the power failure flag is set to "1" (step SA406: YES), checksums are calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step SA407). The method of calculating the checksum is the same as in the 33rd embodiment. After that, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control work area 221 which are calculated and stored in the specific control work area 221 in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SA407 (step SA408). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksums match (step SA409).

When a negative determination is made in step SA406 or step SA409, that is, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control Is set to "1" (step SA410). When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the positive determination is made in step S8906 to steps S8907 to step. The process of S8920 is not executed. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power shutdown, or the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 are set. If the checksums do not match for at least one of the above due to the change in the information storage state since the last power-off, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and unauthorized monitoring is executed. On the other hand, the processing for advancing the game is not executed.

After that, an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum at the start of supplying the operating power is transmitted to the voice light emission control device 81 (step SA411). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, and the speaker unit 54 "Please change the setting." Is output. Further, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is given when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the setting value update processing (step SA418) is executed. It may be configured to continue.

When the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (step SA406 and step SA409: YES), "1" is set to the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control. It is determined whether it has been done (step SA412). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update processing (step SA418) is being executed as in the 35th embodiment, and the setting update display flag is "1". When is set, a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a setting value being updated are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting value updating process (step SA418) is started and is cleared to "0" when the setting value updating process (step SA418) is ended. In the situation where the set value update process (step SA418) is not executed, basically, the state where the setting update display flag is set to "1" is not set. However, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the set value updating process (step SA418) is being executed, and then the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In, the setting update display flag is set to "1". When the setting update display flag is set to "1", the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed, or the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" in the set value update process (step SA418). It is maintained until it is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step SA412 because "1" is not set in the setting update display flag, it is determined whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key (step SA413). ). When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on by using the setting key (step SA413: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step SA415). Even when the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on by using the setting key (step SA413: NO), the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". If is set (step SA414: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step SA415). The setting confirmation process will be described later.

The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the processing for setting confirmation (step SA415) is being executed as in the 35th embodiment, and the setting confirmation display flag is "1". If is set, a display indicating that the setting value is being confirmed and a display indicating the currently set setting value are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Be seen. The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is started and is cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is ended. In a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed, basically, the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1". However, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed, and then the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, or the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting confirmation process (step SA415). It is maintained until it is executed.

When the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA405: YES), the RAM clear process is executed (step SA416). In the RAM clearing process, in the specific control work area 221, the specific control is performed except for an area (specifically, a setting reference area 341 described later) in which information of a setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. The work area 221 for use is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode is cleared to "0". The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not being variably displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general electric power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display portion 37a is erased and the general figure display portion is deleted. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are cleared to "0". In addition, the setting update area 342, which will be described later, provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. In the RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. In the RAM clearing process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to "0" and then the initial setting is executed. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step SA402 is executed. Note that the processing for clearing “0” and the processing for initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key inserting section 68a is turned on by using the setting key (step SA417). When the ON operation is performed (step SA417: YES), the set value updating process is executed (step SA418). The setting value update process will be described later.

When the process of step SA411 is executed, a negative determination is made in step SA414, the process of step SA415 is executed, a negative determination is made in step SA417, or the process of step SA418 is executed, specific control Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 (step SA419). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the 35th embodiment. When the value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 35th embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the residual processing is performed after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SA401 to step SA418) is completed in the main CPU 63. Before (Step SA422 to Step SA425) is started, the initial check period is started. With this, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

Further, while the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and the setting value update process (step SA418) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed during the initial check period. It is started after finishing. Thereby, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set values are displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

After that, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA420). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906, and thus not only the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 The processing of steps S8907 to S8920 will be executed, and the state where the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step SA420, the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is also cleared to "0".

Then, the return command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step SA421). The content of the information included in the return command and the processing content of the sound emission control device 81 when the return command is received are the same as those in step S7920 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the 33rd embodiment. ..

After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps SA422 to SA425. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between the one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Residual time will occur. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps SA422 to SA425 is repeatedly executed by utilizing this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps SA422 to SA425 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed. In steps SA422 to SA425, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, the configuration related to the set values in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a storage area for setting values provided in the work area 221 for specific control.

As shown in FIG. 154, the work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored. In step S503 of the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 13), the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is specified based on the information stored in the setting reference area 341, and the hit/miss table corresponding to the specified setting value is read. Then, in step S504, the read/write table is used to execute the determination processing. Further, in the situation where the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the display of the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is the fourth notification display. This is performed by the device 204.

Numerical information is stored in the setting reference area 341 as setting value information. Specifically, when the numerical value information “1” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”. When the numerical information of “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. When the numerical information of “3” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”. When the numerical information of “4” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. When the numerical information of “5” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5”. When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6”.

The setting update area 342 stores information on the setting value being updated in the setting value updating process (step SA418). That is, in the set value update processing (step SA418), the information of the set value to be selected is updated every time the reset button 68c is pressed, but at the time of this update, the setting stored in the setting reference area 341 is set. The setting value information stored in the setting updating area 342 is changed without changing the value information. As a result, it becomes possible to update the set value while storing and holding the information of the set value that was set before the start of the set value updating process (step SA418). When the setting value updating process (step SA418) is completed, the setting reference information 341 is overwritten with the setting value information stored in the setting updating area 342 at that time. As a result, the set value obtained as a result of the update in the set value updating process (step SA418) is set as the set value of the current pachinko machine 10. Further, when the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the display of the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 is the fourth notification display. This is performed by the device 204.

Numerical information is stored in the setting update area 342 as information on the set value. Specifically, when the numerical information of “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the set value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When the numerical information of “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 2”. When the numerical information of “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 3”. When the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 4". When the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 6”.

FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process executed in step SA415 of the main process (FIG. 153). The processing of steps SA501 to SA504 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

On the condition that the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" (step SA501: NO), the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SA502). .. When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134). (Step S9006) is executed.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation. Note that the processing of step SA601 to step SA603 in the setting processing is executed by using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, the display data of the setting value corresponding to the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 of the work area 221 for specific control is read (step SA601). Then, the read set value display data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the specific control work area 221 as display data to be applied to the fourth notification display device 204 (step SA602). In addition, display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to perform a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step SA603).

By executing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation as described above, the displays corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA603 are displayed as the first to the first. The third notification display devices 201 to 203 perform the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA602 on the fourth notification display device 204. Thereby, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 124(b), for example, a display showing that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display showing the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are the first. ~ The fourth notification display device 201 to 204.

Returning to the description of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), if an affirmative judgment is made in step SA501 or the process of step SA502 is executed, the setting key insertion unit 68a uses the setting key to change from the ON state to the OFF state. It is determined whether the switching has been performed (step SA503). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. To do. Therefore, the OFF state is maintained not only when the setting key inserting section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation process is started in a situation where the setting key inserting section 68a is in the OFF state. In that case, a negative determination is made in step SA503. When it is not specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA503: NO), the process of step SA503 is repeated.

When it is specified that the setting key insertion portion 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA503: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SA504). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), so that the setting processing (step S9006) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The state to be performed is released.

As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In the situation where the main process (FIG. 153) has been started and the reset button 68c has not been pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned ON, the game can proceed in the main process (FIG. 153). The setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed in a state where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, which is the condition before the process is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to confirm the set value even when the game is not being played.

FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the set value updating process executed in step SA418 of the main process (FIG. 153). Note that the processing of step SA701 to step SA710 in the setting value update processing is executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA701). When "1" is not set in the setting update display flag (step SA701: NO), "1" is set in the setting update display flag (step SA702). After that, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 in the specific control work area 221 is overwritten in the setting update area 342 in the specific control work area 221 (step SA703). As a result, the setting value information that was set when the supply of operating power was stopped last time is set in the setting update area 342.

On the other hand, the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped while the set value updating process is being executed, and the RAM clearing process (step SA416) of the main process (FIG. 153) is executed. If the setting update display flag is already set to "1" due to the start of the setting value update process (step SA701: YES), the process of step SA703 is not executed. In this case, the processing of step SA704 and the subsequent steps is executed in a state where the setting value information set in the setting update area 342 in the setting value update processing before the supply of the operating power is stopped is maintained. Become.

When the setting update display flag is set to "1", a positive determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), so that the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step S9004) is executed.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update. Note that the processing of step SA801 to step SA803 in the setting processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, the display data of the setting value corresponding to the setting value information stored in the setting updating area 342 of the work area 221 for specific control is read (step SA801). Then, the read display data of the set value is set to the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control as display data to be applied to the fourth notification display device 204 (step SA802). In addition, display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to display that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step SA803).

By executing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA803 is changed from the first display to the first display. The third notification display devices 201 to 203 perform the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA802 on the fourth notification display device 204. As a result, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(a), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the setting value selected as the update target of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Returning to the description of the setting value update processing (FIG. 157), when the positive determination is made in step SA701 or the processing of step SA703 is executed, the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is "1"- It is determined whether the value is "6" (step SA704). If it is not any of "1" to "6" (step SA704: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SA705). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step SA704 or the processing of step SA705 is executed, it is judged whether or not the setting key inserting section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state by using the setting key (step SA706). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. To do. Therefore, the OFF state is maintained not only when the setting key inserting section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value updating process is started in the situation where the setting key inserting section 68a is in the OFF state. Also in this case, a negative determination is made in step SA706.

When a negative determination is made in step SA706, the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA707: YES) (step SA708). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated by one step. Further, when the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA707: NO) or when the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SA704, but the setting is updated in step SA704. If it is determined that the value of the use area 342 is 7 or more, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 in step SA705. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", the process returns to "setting 1".

When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA706: YES), the setting reference area 341 is overwritten with the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 ( Step SA709). As a result, the setting value information obtained as a result of the updating of the setting value this time is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is set in the current pachinko machine 10. It becomes the set value.

Then, the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SA710). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), so that the setting processing (step S9004) for the fifth display data buffer 275 is not executed during the setting update. Therefore, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current set value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and the setting selected as the update target of the pachinko machine 10 are set. The state in which the value is displayed is canceled.

Based on not only performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c as described above, but also performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while further ON-operating the setting key insertion portion 68a with the setting key, Not only the RAM clearing process (step SA416) but also the set value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed. In addition, as described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is performed based on the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. To be executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make the ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a common as the operation for executing the setting related processing regarding the setting value. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for generating the setting related processing.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process is executed and the reset is performed. When the pressing operation of the button 68c is added, the set value updating process is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process different from each other depending on whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for executing the desired processing among the setting confirmation processing and the setting value updating processing. Further, by increasing the number of operation contents for executing the setting value updating process rather than the setting confirming process, it becomes possible to make it particularly difficult to illegally perform the setting value updating process.

Next, when the power outage process is executed in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, the main process (Fig. The contents of the processing executed in (153) will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 159.

First, when the power outage process is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update process (FIG. 157) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, the main process ( The contents of the processing executed in FIG. 153) will be described.

When the supply of operating power is resumed without the setting key insertion portion 68a being turned on and the reset button 68c being pressed (that is, in the case of "no operation"), the RAM is used in the main process (FIG. 153). None of the clearing process (step SA416), the setting value updating process (step SA418), and the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is executed. When the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on, but the supply of operating power is resumed while the reset button 68c is being pressed (that is, when the "RAM clear operation" is performed), the main process (FIG. 153). Then, the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, while the setting value updating process (step SA418) and the setting confirmation process (step SA415) are not executed. When the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on and the reset button 68c is pressed and the supply of operating power is resumed (that is, when the "setting change operation" is performed), the RAM is used in the main process (FIG. 153). While the clearing process (step SA416) is executed and the setting value updating process (step SA418) is executed, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. If the supply of operating power is resumed without pressing the reset button 68c while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on (that is, the "setting check operation" is performed), the setting check process (step While SA415) is executed, the RAM clearing process (step SA416) and the set value updating process (step SA418) are not executed.

Next, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (step SA418) is being executed (that is, the condition where the setting update display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when the process is restarted will be described.

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the state where the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed in the main process (FIG. 153) while the set value update process (step SA418) and The setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. In other words, even if the power outage process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (step SA418) is being executed, if the “RAM clear operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed after that, the set value is set. The RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed without restarting the updating process (step SA418) and newly executing it. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of only the RAM clear processing (step SA416) for the “RAM clear operation”. In this case, if the power outage process is executed before the process of step SA709 is executed in the set value update process (step SA418), the set value updated in the set value update process (step SA418) (that is, Since the information of the changed set value) is not set in the setting reference area 341, the set value that was set before the start of the set value updating process (step SA418) restarts the supply of the operating power. It will be used later. The setting update display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416).

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the state where the “setting change operation” is performed, the RAM clearing process (step SA416) and the set value updating process (step SA418) are executed in the main process (FIG. 153). On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. That is, even if the power outage process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (step SA418) is being executed, the RAM is cleared when the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. After the process (step SA416) is executed, the set value update process (step SA418) is newly started.

When the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" as described above, and therefore, in the setting value updating process (FIG. 157), step SA701 By making a negative determination in, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is overwritten in the setting update area 342. Therefore, if the power failure process is executed before the process of step SA709 is executed in the set value update process (step SA418) before the supply of the operating power is stopped, the set value update process (step SA418). The information of the setting value updated in () is invalidated because it is not set in the setting reference area 341. In this case, in the set value updating process (step SA418) after the supply of the operating power is restarted, the setting that was set before the setting value updating process (step SA418) before the supply of the operating power was stopped is started. The set value is updated from the value.

If the supply of operating power is restarted in the situation of "no operation", or if the supply of operating power is restarted in the situation of "setting confirmation operation", the power failure flag and check are performed in the main process (Fig. 153). By making an affirmative decision in step SA412 on condition that no abnormality has occurred with respect to the thumb, the set value update processing (step SA418) is executed without the RAM clear processing (step SA416) being executed. If the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is not executed, the state in which the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" is maintained, and therefore the step in the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is performed. By making a positive determination in SA701, the information of the setting value of the setting update area 342 is maintained as it is. Therefore, the update of the set value is restarted from the set value that is being updated in the set value update process (step SA418) before the supply of the operating power is stopped. As a result, when the power failure process is executed in the middle of the set value updating process (step SA418) and the “RAM clear operation” is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter, the “setting Even if the "change operation" is not performed, the setting value update processing (step SA418) can be restarted.

In particular, it is assumed that the pachinko machine 10 is powered off by mistake while the set value updating process (step SA418) is being performed. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 power is immediately turned on. It is possible that In this case, it is assumed that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without pressing the reset button 68c while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on, and then the "setting confirmation operation" is performed. In this situation, the supply of operating power will be restarted. In such a situation, the set value updating process (step SA418) is executed as described above, and the set value updating process before the supply of the operating power is stopped in the set value updating process (step SA418) (step SA418). At, the update of the set value is restarted from the set value that is being updated. As a result, even if the above-mentioned event occurs, it is possible to restart the update of the set value without any problem.

Next, when the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SA415) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the subsequent supply of operating power The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when the process is restarted will be described.

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the state where the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed in the main process (FIG. 153) while the set value update process (step SA418) and The setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. That is, even if the power failure process is executed while the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed, the setting confirmation is performed when the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. The RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed without newly executing the process (step SA415). This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of only the RAM clear processing (step SA416) for the “RAM clear operation”. The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416).

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the state where the “setting change operation” is performed, the RAM clearing process (step SA416) and the set value updating process (step SA418) are executed in the main process (FIG. 153). On the other hand, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. That is, even if the power outage process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is executed, the setting confirmation is performed when the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. The setting value updating process (step SA418) is executed after the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed without newly executing the process (step SA415). This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the RAM clearing process (step SA416) and the setting value updating process (step SA418) for the “setting change operation”. Even if the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed in this manner, the setting value to be updated is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 by the setting value update process (step SA418) being executed. At the end of the set value update processing (step SA418) that is displayed and set value information to be updated at that time is set in the setting reference area 341, the manager of the game hall is in charge of the current pachinko machine. The set value of 10 can be confirmed. The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416).

When the supply of operating power is restarted while the "setting confirmation operation" is performed, the main confirmation process (FIG. 153) is performed on condition that there is no abnormality in the power failure flag and checksum. SA 415) is executed. As a result, even if the power failure process is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation process (step SA415), it is possible to restart the setting value confirmation by performing the "setting confirmation operation" when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Becomes

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the “no operation” situation, an affirmative decision is made in step SA414 on condition that no abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag and checksum in the main processing (FIG. 153). The setting confirmation process (step SA415) is executed even if the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on. As a result, even when the power failure process is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and the setting value is confirmed when the operation power supply is restarted after that, the operation is not performed. It becomes possible to restart.

Next, the end timing of the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) in relation to the operation state of the setting key insertion portion 68a will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 160. FIG. 160(a) shows a period in which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an ON state, FIG. 160(b) shows a period in which the setting key insertion portion 68a is ON-operated, and FIG. 160(c) shows a setting. 160D shows the period during which the value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, FIG. 160D shows the period during which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, and FIG. Indicates the period of time that has been maintained.

First, the case where each of the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is executed in the normal flow will be described.

At the timing of t1, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and at the subsequent timing of t2, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160(a). The operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is also pressed. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the set value update processing (FIG. 157) is started as shown in FIG. 160(c). After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the setting key insertion portion 68a is changed from being turned on to being turned off. As a result, the set value updating process (FIG. 157) is completed as shown in FIG. 160(c).

Further, at the timing of t5, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and at the subsequent timing of t6, as shown in FIG. ON operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is not pressed. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started as shown in FIG. 160(d). After that, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the setting key insertion portion 68a is changed from the ON operation to the OFF operation. This completes the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) as shown in FIG. 160(d).

Next, a case where the power failure process is executed during the execution of the set value updating process (FIG. 157) and the situation is “no operation” at the time of restarting the supply of the operating power will be described.

At time t9, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and at timing t10 thereafter, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160(a). The operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is also pressed. Therefore, at the timing of t11, the set value update processing (FIG. 157) is started as shown in FIG. 160(c). Then, as shown in FIG. 160(a), the power is turned off due to a power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 or a sudden power outage of the commercial power supply at the timing of t12 during the execution of the set value updating process (FIG. 157). By entering the state, the power failure process is started as shown in FIG. 160(e). In this case, the set value update processing (FIG. 157) ends as shown in FIG. 160(c) at the timing t12, and the power failure processing ends as shown in FIG. 160(e) at the timing t13.

After that, at the timing of t14, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off as shown in FIG. 160(b), and at that timing at the timing of t15, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160(a). The ON operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is not pressed. That is, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the state of “no operation”. However, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 was turned off last time, the power failure process is executed during the set value update process (FIG. 157). Therefore, at the timing of t16, the set value update processing (FIG. 157) is started as shown in FIG. 160(c). In this case, the set value update process (FIG. 157) is ended when it is specified that the set key insertion portion 68a has been switched from the ON-operated state to the OFF-operated state, and thus the set value update process (FIG. 157) is performed. Even if the setting key insertion portion 68a is maintained in the OFF-operated state from the start timing of (157), the termination condition of the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is not satisfied.

After that, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key at the timing of t17 which is in the middle of the execution of the set value updating process (FIG. 157), and then at t18. At a timing, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the setting key insertion portion 68a is changed from being turned on to being turned off. As a result, the set value updating process (FIG. 157) is completed as shown in FIG. 160(c).

Next, a case will be described in which the power failure process is performed during the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the operation is not performed when the operating power supply is resumed.

At the timing of t19, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and at the timing of subsequent t20, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160(a). The operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is not pressed. Therefore, at the timing of t21, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started as shown in FIG. 160(d). Then, the power is turned off as shown in FIG. 160(a) due to the power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 or the sudden power outage of the commercial power supply at the timing of t22 during the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). By entering the state, the power failure process is started as shown in FIG. 160(e). In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) ends as shown in FIG. 160(d) at the timing t22, and the power failure process ends as shown in FIG. 160(e) at the timing t23.

After that, at the timing of t24, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned off as shown in FIG. 160(b), and at that timing, at the timing of t25, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 160(a). The ON operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is not pressed. That is, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the state of “no operation”. However, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 was turned off last time, the power failure process is executed during the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). Therefore, at the timing of t26, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started as shown in FIG. 160(d). In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is terminated when it is specified that the setting key insertion portion 68a has been switched from the ON-operated state to the OFF-operated state. Even if the setting key insertion portion 68a is maintained in the OFF-operated state from the start timing of (155), the end condition of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not satisfied.

After that, at the timing of t27 which is in the middle of execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and then at t28. At a timing, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the setting key insertion portion 68a is changed from being turned on to being turned off. This completes the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) as shown in FIG. 160(d).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

In order to execute the set value updating process (FIG. 157), when the supply of the operating power is started, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on and the reset button 68c is pressed to perform the "setting." It is necessary to perform "change operation". As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to illegally change the set value. In this case, if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the “setting change operation” is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed. However, the set value update process (FIG. 157) can be executed. As a result, it becomes possible to give priority to the execution of the setting value update processing (FIG. 157).

When the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (Fig. 157) is being executed, a "setting confirmation operation" is performed to confirm the set value when the supply of operating power is resumed. In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not executed, but the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. This makes it possible to prioritize the change of the set value over the confirmation of the set value, so that the game will not be started even though the change of the set value to be used is not actually completed. It becomes possible.

In the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the set value selected as the update target is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to change the set value while grasping the set value selected as the update target. In addition, by displaying the setting value selected as the update target in this way, the setting value updating process (see the figure) is performed even if the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Even with the configuration in which 157) is prioritized, it is possible to substantially confirm the set value.

In the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, not only the display corresponding to the set value selected as the update target on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 but also the set value update process A display corresponding to the situation where (Fig. 157) is being executed is also displayed. As a result, even if the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is started even though the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed. It becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to know that the game has started.

When the operation power supply is stopped while the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is being executed, and when the operation power supply is resumed after that, “no operation” or “setting confirmation operation” Is performed, the set value is changed from the set value that was selected before the supply of the operating power was stopped. This makes it possible to continue changing the set value from the set value that was selected before the supply of the operating power was stopped.

If the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed, The setting value is changed from the setting value that is the target of use. This makes it possible to make the initial set value when changing the set value different according to the operation content when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

When the “RAM clear operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed even when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the set value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed The set value update process (FIG. 157) is not executed. As a result, even when the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed, it is not necessary to execute the set value updating process (FIG. 157) thereafter. By performing the “RAM clear operation” when the supply of the operating power is started, it becomes possible to prevent the set value updating process (FIG. 157) from being executed.

In order to execute the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), it is necessary to perform a “setting confirmation operation” by turning on the setting key insertion portion 68a when the supply of operating power is started. .. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally confirming the set value. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, the “setting confirming operation” is not performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. However, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) can be executed. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155).

When the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed even when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, The setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is executed without executing the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155). This makes it possible to prioritize the work of changing the set value over the work of confirming the set value.

The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342, and information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value update processing is performed. Information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the situation where (FIG. 157) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. As a result, while the setting reference information 341 stores and holds the information of the setting value set before the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is started, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) sets the target of updating. It is possible to change the set value.

When the supply of operating power is stopped while the set value updating process (Fig. 157) is being executed, "no operation" or "setting confirmation operation" has been performed when restarting the supply of operating power thereafter. In this case, when the setting value is started to be changed from the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342, and when the “setting change operation” is performed at the time of restarting the supply of the operating power, The setting value may be changed from the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341. This makes it possible to appropriately generate each of these situations.

In order to start the set value updating process (FIG. 157), it is necessary to turn on the setting key inserting section 68a using the setting key, so that the set value updating process (FIG. 157) is attempted to be illegally started. It becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an action. In this case, the set value updating process (FIG. 157) is not ended only by turning off the setting key inserting section 68a, but is turned off from the state where the setting key inserting section 68a is turned on. Will be finished. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and “there is no operation” when the supply of the operating power is resumed after that, the setting key is inserted. Even if the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is started in a state where the section 68a is in the OFF state, the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is not immediately terminated, and the setting key insertion unit 68a is once turned ON. Since the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is ended by further turning off after the operation, it is possible to end the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) at a timing preferable for the manager of the game hall.

In order to start the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), it is necessary to turn on the setting key insertion unit 68a using the setting key, so that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is attempted to be illegally started. It becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an action. In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not ended only by turning off the setting key inserting section 68a, but is turned off from the state where the setting key inserting section 68a is turned on. Will be finished. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and when the supply of the operating power is resumed after that, the setting key is inserted. Even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started in the state where the section 68a is in the OFF state, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not immediately terminated, and the setting key insertion section 68a is once turned ON. Since the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is ended by further turning it off after the operation, it is possible to end the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) at a timing preferable for the game hall manager.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the residual processing (step SA422 to step SA422) is performed after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SA401 to step SA418) is completed in the main CPU 63. The initial check period is started before SA425) is started. With this, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

The setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, while the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed during the initial check period. It will be started later. Thereby, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set values are displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the set value update processing (FIG. 157) are not executed, the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal regardless of the situation when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

In the main process (FIG. 153) of the main CPU 63, when either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting process are performed. This is a process that is commonly executed even when neither the value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, and whether the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the set value update process (FIG. 157). When the execution is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked as the processing whose execution order is later than those of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 157). The process to start the message display is set. As described above, the processing for starting the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set as the common processing, and thus the processing configuration is simplified and excellent as already described. It is possible to achieve the desired effect.

Even when the check display is being executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the main CPU 63 can start the process for advancing the game. Thus, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, the game is played. It is possible to prevent the start timing of the processing for advancing from being delayed.

Note that if the operation power supply is stopped while the set value update processing (FIG. 157) is being performed and the operation power supply is resumed, “no operation” is performed, the set value update processing is performed. (FIG. 157) is not limited to the configuration started from the setting value being changed before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and is not limited to the setting value of the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341. The configuration may be started. Further, in the case where the operation power supply is stopped while the set value update processing (FIG. 157) is being executed and the operation power supply is resumed, if there is “no operation”, the RAM clear processing ( The configuration may be such that the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed after step SA416) is executed, and the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. May be

Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the setting value updating process ( 157) may not be executed. In this case, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 may be overwritten in the setting update area 342 at the start of the next setting value update process (FIG. 157).

Further, when the operation power supply is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, when the operation power supply is resumed, the setting confirmation process ( 155) may not be executed.

Further, in the case where the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the “RAM clear operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed, The setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be performed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is performed. In this case, the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) may be started from the setting value which is being changed before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341 is used. The configuration may be started from the set value of.

Further, in the case where the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the “RAM clear operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed, The setting value updating process (FIG. 157) may be executed without executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416), and the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed after the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed. May be configured to be executed. In this case, the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) may be started from the setting value which is being changed before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341 is used. The configuration may be started from the set value of.

Further, in the case where the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed and the “RAM clear operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed, The setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed after the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed without executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416). May be executed, or the RAM clearing process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed.

Further, in the case where the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed, Although the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is configured to start from the setting value of the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341, the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) stops the supply of operating power. The configuration may be started from the set value that is being changed before the change.

Further, in the case where the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed, The setting value updating process (FIG. 157) may be executed without executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416), and the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed after the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed. May be configured to be executed. In this case, the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) may be started from the setting value which is being changed before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341 is used. The configuration may be started from the set value of.

Further, if the setting change operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, Although the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is configured to start from the setting value of the current use target stored in the setting reference area 341, the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) stops the supply of operating power. It may be configured to start from the set value that is being changed before the setting.

Further, if the setting change operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, The setting value updating process (FIG. 157) may be executed without executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416), and the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed after the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed. May be configured to be executed.

Further, if the setting change operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, The configuration may be configured such that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not executed, and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed. The configuration may be executed, or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. Further, if the setting change operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, Both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may not be executed.

Further, in the case where the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed, The setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not limited to the configuration started from the setting value that is being changed before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not limited to the setting reference area. The configuration may be started from the setting value of the current use target stored in 341.

Further, in the case where the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed, The configuration clearing process (FIG. 157) may be executed after the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, and the RAM clearing process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed. It may be configured to be executed.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the setting is performed when the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. The configuration confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed without executing the value update process (FIG. 157). In this case, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 may be overwritten in the setting update area 342 at the start of the next setting value update process (FIG. 157).

Further, in the case where the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed, The setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. ) May be configured to be executed. Further, in the case where the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed and the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed, Both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may not be executed.

Further, when the supply of the operating power is started in the situation where the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the power-on initial setting process (step SA401) is used for weighting. After the predetermined time has elapsed, the interrupt of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted, and the setting value is stored in the display and setting update area 342 indicating that the setting value is being updated. The display showing the set value corresponding to the information is not limited to the configuration started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the display of these weights without waiting for the elapse of the predetermined time. The display may be started. In addition, even if the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting value is updated on condition that the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed. The display and the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, it is possible to prevent these displays from being displayed in a situation where the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is not executed.

Further, when the supply of the operating power is started in the situation where the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to “1”, the power-on initial setting process (step SA401) After the predetermined time has elapsed, the interrupt of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted, and the display and the setting reference area 341 indicate that the setting value is being confirmed. The display showing the set value corresponding to the information is not limited to the configuration started by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the display of these weights without waiting for the elapse of the predetermined time. The display may be started. Further, even if "1" is set in the setting confirmation display flag, the setting value is confirmed on condition that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed. The display and the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, it is possible to prevent these displays from being displayed when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not being executed.

Further, in the situation where the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is being executed, it is possible to have a configuration in which an image indicating that the setting value is being updated is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display is performed. In addition to or instead of the above, an image showing an operation procedure for updating the set value may be displayed, and the display light emitting unit 53 or the speaker unit 54 may update the set value. The configuration may be such that the notification is given. In this case, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to clearly recognize that the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed.

Further, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, an image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display may be performed. In addition to or instead of the above, an image showing an operation procedure for confirming the set value may be displayed, and the display light emitting unit 53 or the speaker unit 54 may confirm the set value. The configuration may be such that the notification is given. In this case, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to clearly recognize that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed.

Further, the operation unit operated to update the set value in the set value update process (FIG. 157) is not limited to the reset button 68c, and may be a dedicated operation unit such as the update button 68b. It may be an operation unit provided in main controller 60 to cancel the abnormal state. Further, the position corresponding to each of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is set as the rotation operation position when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and the rotation operation is performed. A set value corresponding to the rotational operation position of the portion 68a may be set. In addition, the setting key insertion portion 68a is configured to be able to be rotated further than the ON position, and each time the rotating operation beyond the ON position is performed, the set value being updated becomes the set value in the next order. The configuration may be updated.

Further, when the set value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to externally output a signal corresponding to the game hall management computer. In this case, the signal output may be performed for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) set in advance, and the signal output is continued while the set value update processing (FIG. 157) is executed. It can be configured as well. As a result, it becomes possible for the management computer in the game hall to recognize that the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.

Further, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to externally output a signal corresponding to the game hall management computer. In this case, the signal output may be performed for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) set in advance, and the signal output is continued while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed. It can be configured as well. As a result, it becomes possible for the management computer in the game hall to recognize that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the configuration in which the processing is terminated when the key insertion unit is changed from the ON state to the OFF state is applied to processing other than the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 157). Good. For example, in order to display the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the predetermined key insertion part needs to be operated to the ON position, and the predetermined key insertion part is turned on. The display may be terminated when it is specified that the state has been changed to the OFF state.

Further, as a condition for starting the set value updating process (FIG. 157), a condition may be set such that at least one of the gaming machine body 12 and the front door frame 14 is operated to be opened. .. In the configuration, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the set value updating process (FIG. 157) is being executed and “no operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted, or the “setting confirmation operation” is performed. The setting value updating process (FIG. 157) may be started even if the opening target is not operated to open.

Further, as a condition for starting the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), a condition may be set such that at least one of the gaming machine body 12 and the front door frame 14 is operated to be opened. .. In the configuration, in the case where the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed and “there is no operation” when restarting the supply of the operating power, the above-mentioned opening is performed. The configuration confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be started even if the target has not been opened.

In addition, the RAM clear process executed before the set value update process (FIG. 157) is executed and the RAM clear process executed without the set value update process are executed in the main RAM 65. The target areas may be different.

Further, when the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started in the situation where “1” is not set in the setting update display flag, the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is changed. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the setting value is changed, and the configuration may be configured such that the setting value is changed from the preset setting value of the initial value. The initial value may be, for example, “setting 1”, “setting 6”, or a setting value other than these.

Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed as the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, in the situation after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is finished, the “setting change operation” The setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed based on the fact that "." Even with this configuration, if the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) ends before the normal termination trigger occurs, the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is executed even if the “setting change operation” is not performed. With the configuration that is executed, it is possible to give priority to the work of changing the set value.

Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed as a process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the “setting confirmation operation The configuration confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed based on the fact that "." Even with this configuration, if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is completed before the normal termination trigger occurs, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed even if the “setting confirmation operation” is not performed. With the configuration that is executed, it is possible to give priority to the work of confirming the set value.

<46th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that in the 45th embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 45th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the 45th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. Note that the processing of steps SA901 to SA925 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

In steps SA901 to SA904, the same processing as steps SA401 to SA404 of the main processing (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SA905). When the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting value updating process (step SA918) is being executed, the setting update display flag is set to "1". In, the main process is started.

When a negative determination is made in step SA905, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SA906). That is, it is determined whether or not the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the reset button 68c is being pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

When the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SA906: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA907). When the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) executes the power failure processing, the power failure flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power outage process was appropriately performed at the previous power off time.

When "1" is set in the power failure flag (step SA907: YES), checksums are calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step SA908). The method of calculating the checksum is the same as in the 33rd embodiment. After that, the specific control work area 221 and the specific control work area 221 which are calculated and stored in the specific control work area 221 in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SA908 (step SA909). Then, it is determined whether these checksums match (step SA910).

When a negative determination is made in step SA907 or step SA910, that is, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control Is set to "1" (step SA911). Further, at the start of supplying the operating power, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag or the checksum is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SA912). The processing contents of these steps SA911 and SA912 are the same as those of steps SA410 and SA411 of the main processing (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment.

When the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (step SA907 and step SA910: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on by using the setting key. Yes (step SA913). When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SA913: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step SA914). The processing content of the setting confirmation processing is the same as that in the 45th embodiment. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the setting confirmation process is executed unless the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on. Not done. Therefore, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting confirming process is being executed, the setting confirming process is not executed unless the supply of the operating power is restarted in the condition where the “setting confirming operation” is performed.

When "1" is set in the setting update display flag (step SA905: YES) or when the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA906: YES), the RAM clearing process is executed (step SA915). The contents of the RAM clearing process are the same as the RAM clearing process (step SA416) of the main process (FIG. 153) in the 45th embodiment.

After that, when the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SA916: YES), the setting value update process is executed regardless of whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON (step SA916). SA918). On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the setting update display flag (step SA916: NO), the setting value is updated on condition that the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on (step SA917: YES). The process is executed (step SA918). That is, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the set value updating process is being executed, the RAM clearing process (step The setting value update process (step SA918) is newly started after SA915 is executed.

When the process of step SA912 is executed, the negative determination is made in step SA913, the process of step SA914 is executed, the negative determination is made in step SA917, or the process of step SA918 is executed, the step SA919 is executed. ~ The process of step SA925 is executed. The processing contents of step SA919 to step SA925 are the same as step SA419 to step SA425 of the main processing (FIG. 153) in the 45th embodiment.

FIG. 162 shows a main process when restarting the supply of operating power after the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting value updating process (step SA918) or the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is executed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the process performed in FIG. 161).

When neither the set value update process (step SA918) nor the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is executed and the power failure process is executed, the main process (Fig. The content of the process executed in () is the same as that of the 45th embodiment. That is, when the supply of operating power is restarted in the "no operation" situation, the RAM clearing process (step SA915), the set value updating process (step SA918), and the setting confirming process (step) in the main process (FIG. 161). None of SA914) is executed. Further, when the supply of operating power is restarted in the state where the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the RAM clear process (step SA915) is executed in the main process (FIG. 161), while the set value update process (step SA915) is executed. SA918) and the setting confirmation process (step SA914) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is restarted in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, the RAM clearing process (step SA915) is executed in the main process (FIG. 161) and the setting value updating process (step SA918) is executed. While being executed, the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is not executed. When the supply of operating power is restarted while the "setting confirmation operation" is performed, the setting confirmation processing (step SA914) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 161), while the RAM clear processing (step SA915). Also, the set value updating process (step SA918) is not executed.

Next, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update processing (step SA918) is being executed (that is, the situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the subsequent supply of operating power The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 161) when the process is restarted will be described.

If the operating power supply is restarted in the "no operation" situation, if the operating power supply is restarted in the "RAM clear operation" situation, the operation is performed in the "setting change operation" situation The RAM clearing process (step SA915) is performed in the main process (FIG. 161) regardless of whether the power supply is restarted or the operating power supply is restarted in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed. ) Is executed and the setting value updating process (step SA918) is executed, while the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is not executed. That is, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (step SA918) is being executed, the RAM clearing is performed regardless of the operation content when restarting the supply of the operating power thereafter. After the process (step SA915) is executed, the set value update process (step SA918) is newly started.

With the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the set value updating process (step SA918), when restarting the supply of the operating power, the setting key insertion unit when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It becomes possible to newly start the set value updating process (step SA918) after the RAM clearing process (step SA915) is executed, irrespective of the operation contents of the 68a and the reset button 68c. With this, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of updating the set value, when the supply of the operating power is resumed after that, the opportunity to complete the setting value after the update is surely generated. It becomes possible. Therefore, when the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped while the set value is being updated, the setting before the start of the previous set value updating process (step SA918) It is possible to prevent the game from being started with the value kept.

Further, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the set value updating process (step SA918), the RAM clearing process (step SA915) is uniquely executed irrespective of the operation content when restarting the supply of the operating power. By executing the set value updating process (step SA918) after the above, the process configuration is simplified as compared to the configuration in which the process content executed according to each operation content is changed. It is possible to achieve the desired effect.

Next, when the power failure processing is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SA914) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the subsequent supply of operating power The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 161) when the process is restarted will be described.

When the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SA914) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”) The content of the processing executed in the processing (FIG. 161) is that the processing at the time of power failure is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) nor the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is executed. At the time of resuming the supply of operating power thereafter, the contents are the same as the contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 161). That is, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed, if the supply of the operating power is resumed after that, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The process corresponding to the operation content is executed.

Unlike the change of the set value, the confirmation of the set value does not affect the game even if the set value is terminated and not restarted. Therefore, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the confirmation of the set value, the process corresponding to the operation content at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is executed so that the game hall manager It is possible to give priority to the operation content when the power is turned on.

<Forty-seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the setting value update processing (step SA918) or the setting confirmation processing (step SA914) is executed and the power failure processing is executed, the main processing ( The content of the processing executed in FIG. 161) is different from that in the 45th embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 45th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the 45th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 163 shows the main process when restarting the supply of operating power after the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed. FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the processing executed in FIG. 153).

When neither the setting value update process (FIG. 157) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed in the situation where the power failure process is executed, the main process (FIG. The content of the process executed in () is the same as that of the 45th embodiment. Further, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step FIG. 155) is being executed (that is, the condition in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power is performed. The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when the process is restarted are the same as those in the 46th embodiment.

When the power outage process is executed in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed (that is, the condition where the setting update display flag is set to “1”), the main operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. As for the contents of the processing executed in the processing (FIG. 153), in the case of “no operation” and “setting confirmation operation”, the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is restarted as in the 45th embodiment. Is. In the case of “RAM clear operation” and “setting change operation”, the set value update processing (FIG. 157) is restarted after the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed. In this case, in the RAM clear processing (step SA416), not only the setting reference area 341 provided in the specific control work area 221, but also the setting update display flag and the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are set. The area 342 is excluded from the initialization target. Therefore, even if the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed in a situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to the setting update display flag at the start of the subsequent setting value update process (FIG. 157). The state is set to "1", and the update of the set value is started from the information of the set value stored in the setting update area 342 at that time.

With the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the updating of the set value, the set value updating process (FIG. 157) is not only reliably executed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. It is possible to restart the update of the set value from the set value that is being updated immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. This makes it possible to continue the work of changing the set value.

<48th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the setting value update processing (step SA918) or the setting confirmation processing (step SA914) is executed and the power failure processing is executed, the main processing ( The content of the processing executed in FIG. 161) is different from that in the 45th embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 45th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the 45th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 164 shows the main process (restart of the supply of operating power) after the power failure process is executed when the setting value update process (FIG. 157) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed. FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the processing executed in FIG. 153).

When neither the setting value update process (FIG. 157) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed in the situation where the power failure process is executed, the main process (FIG. The content of the process executed in () is the same as that of the 45th embodiment. Further, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step FIG. 155) is being executed (that is, the condition in which the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power is performed. The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when the process is restarted are the same as those in the 46th embodiment.

When the power outage process is executed in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed (that is, the condition where the setting update display flag is set to “1”), the main operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. The contents of the processing executed in the processing (FIG. 153) are “no operation”, “RAM clear operation” and “setting confirmation operation”, the set value update processing (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation. When the power outage process is executed in a situation where none of the power consumption process (FIG. 155) is executed, the same content as the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed after that Is. That is, in the case of "no operation", the RAM clear process (step SA416), the set value update process (Fig. 157), and the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155) are not all executed, and the "RAM clear operation" is performed. In this case, the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, but the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) are not executed. Although the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) and the set value update process (FIG. 157) are not executed.

On the other hand, in the case of the “setting change operation”, the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed and then the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is restarted. In this case, in the RAM clear processing (step SA416), not only the setting reference area 341 provided in the specific control work area 221, but also the setting update display flag and the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are set. The area 342 is excluded from the initialization target. Therefore, even if the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed in a situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to the setting update display flag at the start of the subsequent setting value update process (FIG. 157). The state is set to "1", and the update of the set value is started from the information of the set value stored in the setting update area 342 at that time.

With the above configuration, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the set value is being updated, it corresponds to the operation content by the administrator of the game hall when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. It is possible to give priority to the execution of processing.

Also, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the set value is being updated and the supply of operating power is restarted in the situation where the “setting change operation” was performed, the supply of operating power It is possible to restart the update of the set value from the set value that is being updated immediately before the stop. This makes it possible to continue the work of changing the set value.

<49th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that in the 45th embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 45th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the 45th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps SB101 to SB128 in the main process are executed by using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step SB101). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the main process is started, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) elapses without waiting for the next process. In the predetermined period for this weight, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

After that, the internal function register setting process is executed (step SB102). In the internal function register setting process, as in the 35th embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt period. (Specifically, 4 ms), and the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process that is periodically interrupted and activated with respect to the main process, is set from the first interrupt period. Is set to the second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) which is a short cycle.

That is, in the present embodiment, similar to the 35th embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are performed so that the interrupt cycle becomes relatively short as the timer interrupt processing. And exist. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are activated by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) does not start by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). Further, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are not executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is started first regardless of the lapsed order of the above. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is a process that is activated prior to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be activated prior to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is set. It is set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, the setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

Then, "1" is set to the in-start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB103). As in the 35th embodiment, the start-up processing flag is among the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated. While the power outage monitoring, the processing for updating various counters and the illegality monitoring are executed, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) should be terminated without executing the processing for advancing the game. This is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63.

The start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power is started in the main processing (FIG. 165), and the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is started. It is cleared to "0" before the end of (step SB101 to step SB122) and the start of the residual processing (step SB125 to step SB128). As in the 35th embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. Thus, in order to advance the game in a situation where a setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or a set value update process (FIG. 167) described later among the processes at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) are executed. It is possible to prevent the processing of (1) from being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", by executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905, the operating power is reduced. The power failure monitoring is executed even in the situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or the set value update processing (FIG. 167) described later among the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of is executed. At the same time, the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is executed.

Particularly, even when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) is executed, so that the operation power supply start processing (steps SB101 to SB122) is started. Even if a power outage occurs in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) described later is executed, it is possible to execute the power outage process for it. In the power failure process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for the specific control. Since the data is stored in the work area 221 of No. 2, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167), the fact that a power failure has occurred during these setting-related processes is supplied to the next operating power. It is possible to specify at the start.

Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are performed. Interrupts are not prohibited and can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167), The information of the return address of the main process (FIG. 165) for returning after the timer interrupt process that is the activation target is finished is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt process is activated. Information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process which is the activation target ends, the process returns to the process of the main process (FIG. 165) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is restored to various registers of the main CPU 63.

After setting the start-up processing flag to "1" in step SB103, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB104). .. When the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) executes the power failure processing, the power failure flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power outage process was appropriately performed at the previous power off time.

When "1" is set in the power failure flag (step SB104: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step SB105). Specifically, first, checksums are calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. The method of calculating the checksum is the same as in the 33rd embodiment. After that, the work area 221 for the specific control and the work area 221 for the specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for the specific control, are performed. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the main processing this time. Then, it is determined whether the checksums match.

If the checksums match (step SB105: YES), is the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 within the normal range? It is determined whether or not (step SB106). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored as in the 45th embodiment. When the numerical information of “1” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”. When the numerical information of “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. When the numerical information of “3” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”. When the numerical information of “4” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. When the numerical information of “5” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5”. When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6”. In step SB106, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is any one of "1" to "6".

When a positive determination is made in all of steps SB104 to SB106, it is determined whether "1" is set in the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SB107). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is being executed as in the 35th embodiment, and the setting update display flag is set to "1". When is set, a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a setting value being updated are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting value updating process (Fig. 167) is started and is cleared to "0" when the setting value updating process (Fig. 167) is ended. In the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is not executed, basically, the setting update display flag is not set to “1”. However, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the set value updating process (FIG. 167) is being executed, and then the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In, the setting update display flag is set to "1". The state in which the setting update display flag is set to "1" is maintained until the process of clearing the setting update display flag to "0" is executed in the setting value update process (FIG. 167).

When a negative determination is made in step SB107 because the setting update display flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB108). That is, it is determined whether or not the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the reset button 68c is being pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in the present embodiment, as in the 35th embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c, but not the update button 68b. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with not the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c but the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment.

When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB108: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB109). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the positive determination is made in step S8906 to steps S8907 to step. The process of S8920 is not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control are If at least one of the checksums does not match due to the change in the information storage state since the last power-off, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and illegal operation While the processing for monitoring is executed, the processing for advancing the game is not executed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB109, the processes of step SB121 and step SB122 described below are executed.

When a negative determination is made in step SB109, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on by using the setting key (step SB110). When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on by using the setting key (step SB110: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step SB112). Even when the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on by using the setting key (step SB110: NO), the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". If is set (step SB111: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step SB112).

The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed as in the 35th embodiment, and the setting confirmation display flag is "1". If is set, a display indicating that the setting value is being confirmed and a display indicating the currently set setting value are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Be seen. The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) is started and is cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) is ended. In the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed, basically, the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1". However, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, and then the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) described below is executed, the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) described below is executed, or the setting confirmation is executed. It is maintained until the processing for clearing the setting confirmation display flag to "0" is executed in the processing for processing (FIG. 166).

Not only when the reset button 68c is not pressed as described above and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on (that is, when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed), the reset button 68c is The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed by executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) even when the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1” even when the pressing operation is not performed. When the power failure process is executed under the above condition, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed even if the “setting confirmation operation” is not performed when the supply of the operating power is subsequently restarted. As a result, it becomes possible to continuously confirm the current set value of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, if the reset button 68c is pressed when restarting the supply of operating power, Without performing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), the first RAM clear process (step SB117) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are executed corresponding to the operation performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. To be done. As a result, the execution of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) or the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) can be prioritized over the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166).

Here, the setting confirmation process executed in step SB112 will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process. The processing of steps SB201 to SB207 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt permission is set (step SB201). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt period.

In this embodiment, in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power, the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are basically prohibited. In the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167), interruption is permitted. Therefore, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are prohibited, and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or the set value updating processing (FIG. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). ) And the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, since the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. Even if 133) is activated, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the processes for performing power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraudulent monitoring are executed, while progressing the game. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is terminated without executing the process.

After that, "1" is set to the setting confirmation display flag on condition that "1" is not set to the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB202). When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134). (Step S9006) is executed. The contents of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation are the same as those in the 45th embodiment. As a result of the processing being performed, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. Is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, the confirmation start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step SB203). Upon receiving the confirmation start command, the sound emission control device 81 recognizes the image indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed and the operation content for ending the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). The display control device 82 is display-controlled so that the image for enabling is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the game hall to recognize that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed, and is necessary for ending the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). It is possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize various operation contents. In addition to or instead of the above-mentioned notification being performed by the symbol display device 41, at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 may be configured. In addition, the external output indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed may be performed to a device outside the pachinko machine 10 such as a game hall management computer.

After that, the setting key inserting unit 68a determines whether or not the ON state is switched to the OFF state by using the setting key (step SB204). Specifically, similarly to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) in the forty-fifth embodiment, the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion portion 68a corresponds to the ON state. It is determined whether the reception state corresponding to the OFF state is changed to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is started in the situation where the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is set. Even if it is maintained, a negative determination is made in step SB204. When it is not specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB204: NO), the process of step SB204 is repeated.

When it is specified that the setting key insertion part 68a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB204: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB205). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134), so that the setting processing (step S9006) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The state to be performed is released.

After that, the interruption is prohibited (step SB206). As a result, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is terminated and the process returns to the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 165), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the interrupt of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

After that, a return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step SB207). By receiving the return command at the time of confirmation, the sound emission control device 81 specifies that the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is completed in the main CPU 63, and at the same time It is specified that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (step SB101 to step SB122). Then, the processing corresponding to the reception of the confirmation return command is executed. The contents of the processing will be described later.

As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In the situation where the main process (FIG. 165) has been started and the reset button 68c has not been pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned ON, the game is advanced in the main process (FIG. 165). The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in a state before the process of (1) is executed, which is a process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power. As a result, it becomes possible to confirm the set value even when the game is not being played.

Returning to the explanation of the main processing (FIG. 165), when the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned on using the setting key and "1" has not been set in the setting confirmation display flag (step SB110 and (Step SB111: NO), the normal recovery command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step SB113). The voice emission control device 81 receives the normal recovery command to identify that the main CPU 63 has completed the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, and starts the supply of the operating power this time. It is specified that the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), and the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at that time. .. Then, the processing corresponding to the reception of the normal recovery command is executed. The contents of the processing will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step SB108 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and it is determined that the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (steps SB108 and SB114). : YES), or when it is determined in step SB107 that the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting value updating process is executed (step SB115). Not only when the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON (that is, when the "setting change operation" is performed) as described above, the reset button 68c Setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed even when the setting update display flag is set to "1" regardless of whether or not the pressing operation and the ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a are performed, thereby updating the setting value. When the process at the time of power failure is executed in the situation where the process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the operation content at the time of starting the supply of the operating power thereafter is “no operation”, “RAM clear operation”, “setting change”. Regardless of whether it is an “operation” or a “setting confirmation operation”, the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to give priority to the execution of the setting value update processing (FIG. 167).

Here, the setting value updating process executed in step SB115 will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the set value updating process. The processing of steps SB301 to SB314 in the setting value update processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt permission is set (step SB301). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt period.

In this embodiment, in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power, the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are basically prohibited. In the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167), interruption is permitted. Therefore, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are prohibited, and the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or the set value updating processing (FIG. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). ) And the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, since the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. Even if 133) is activated, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the processes for performing power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraudulent monitoring are executed, while progressing the game. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is terminated without executing the process.

After that, the setting update display flag is set to "1" on condition that the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1" (step SB302). When the setting update display flag is set to "1", a positive determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step S9004) is executed. The processing content of the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is the same as that in the 45th embodiment. By executing the process, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 124(a), for example, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and selection as an update target of the pachinko machine 10 are made. The displayed set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, initial setting at the start is performed (step SB303). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". As for the game stop flag, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power shutdown (step SB104: NO), the work area 221 for specific control and If the checksums do not match due to a change in the information storage state of at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control since the last power-off (step SB105: NO), or the setting reference area 341 This is a flag that is set to "1" in step SB119 of the main process (FIG. 165) when the set value corresponding to the information stored in is not in the normal range (step SB106: NO). When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the positive determination is made in step S8906 to steps S8907 to step. The process of S8920 is not executed. As a result, when the information abnormality of the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, the processing for performing the power failure monitoring, the updating of various counters and the illegality monitoring is executed, while the processing for advancing the game is executed. Will not be done. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step SB303, the state in which the occurrence of the information abnormality of the main side RAM 65 is specified is canceled when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. Is possible.

After that, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 (step SB304). The setting update area 342 is a storage area for storing information on the setting value being updated in the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) as in the 45th embodiment. When the numerical information of “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the set value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When the numerical information of “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 2”. When the numerical information of “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 3”. When the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 4". When the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 6”.

By setting "1" in the setting update area 342 in step SB304, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1". That is, in the present embodiment, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1” when the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is started, whichever setting value the pachinko machine 10 currently has.

After that, the update start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step SB305). Upon receiving the update start command, the sound emission control device 81 displays an image showing that the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is being executed, and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the setting value. , And the display control device 82 so as to display an image for recognizing the operation content for ending the setting value update process (FIG. 167) on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation content and the setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (FIG. 167). It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the operation content necessary for ending the game. In addition to or instead of the above-mentioned notification being performed by the symbol display device 41, at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 may be configured. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which an external output indicating that the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is being executed is performed to a device outside the pachinko machine 10, such as a game hall management computer.

Then, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is any one of "1" to "6" (step SB306). If it is not any of "1" to "6" (step SB306: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB307). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SB306 or the processing of step SB307 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB308). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. To do. Therefore, the OFF state is maintained not only when the setting key inserting section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value updating process is started in the situation where the setting key inserting section 68a is in the OFF state. Also in this case, a negative determination is made in step SB308.

When a negative determination is made in step SB308, the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB309: YES) (step SB310). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated by one step. When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB309: NO) or when the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SB306, but the setting update is performed in step SB306. If it is determined that the value of the use area 342 is 7 or more, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 in step SB307. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", the process returns to "setting 1".

When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB308: YES), the setting reference area 341 is overwritten with the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 ( Step SB311). As a result, the setting value information obtained as a result of the update in the setting value updating process this time (FIG. 167) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the current value. It becomes the set value of the pachinko machine 10.

After that, the interruption is prohibited (step SB312). As a result, when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is terminated and the process returns to the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 165), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the interrupt of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

Then, the second RAM clearing process is executed (step SB313). In the second RAM clearing process, as in the RAM clearing process (step SA416) in the forty-fifth embodiment, an area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control ( That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for the specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode is cleared to "0". The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not being variably displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general electric power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display portion 37a is erased and the general figure display portion is deleted. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are cleared to "0". Further, the setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. Further, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". In the second RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. In the second RAM clearing process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to "0" and then the initial setting is executed. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step SB102 is executed. Note that the processing for clearing “0” and the processing for initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

After that, a return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step SB314). By receiving the return command at the time of updating, the sound emission control device 81 identifies that the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is completed in the main CPU 63, and the operating power of this time It is specified that the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) has been executed in the processing at the start of supply (steps SB101 to SB122). Then, the processing corresponding to the reception of the update return command is executed. The contents of the processing will be described later.

Based on not only performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c as described above, but also performing the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 while further operating the setting key insertion portion 68a by the setting key. The set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. Further, as described above, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is performed based on the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. Executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make the ON operation for the setting key insertion unit 68a common as the operation for executing the setting related processing regarding the setting value. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for generating the setting related processing.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by the setting key, and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is not added, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is performed. When the reset button 68c is pressed, the set value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make different the process to be executed among the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) depending on whether the reset button 68c is pressed or not. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to easily understand the operation content for executing the desired processing of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 167). Further, by making the operation contents for executing the set value update process (FIG. 167) larger than the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), the action for making the set value update process (FIG. 167) illegal is performed. It is possible to make it difficult.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 165), when it is determined in step SB108 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, the setting key insertion portion 68a has not been turned ON using the setting key. When it is determined (step SB114: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB116). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the positive determination is made in step S8906 to steps S8907 to step. The process of S8920 is not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control are If at least one of the checksums does not match due to the change in the information storage state since the last power-off, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and illegal operation While the processing for monitoring is executed, the processing for advancing the game is not executed.

When "1" is not set in the game stop flag (step SB116: NO), the first RAM clearing process is executed (step SB117). In the first RAM clearing process, as in the RAM clearing process (step SA416) in the forty-fifth embodiment, an area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control ( That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for the specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode is cleared to "0". The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not being variably displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general electric power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display portion 37a is erased and the general figure display portion is deleted. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are cleared to "0". Further, the setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. In the first RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. Further, in the first RAM clearing process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0” and then the initial setting is executed. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step SB102 is executed.

Note that the processing for clearing “0” and the processing for initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. The processing contents of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) are the same as the processing contents of the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) in the set value updating process (FIG. 167), but some of these processing contents are different. It may be configured to have. For example, in the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the area targeted for “0” clearing and initial setting may not be the target for “0” clearing and initializing setting in the second RAM clearing process (step SB313). In the second RAM clearing process (step SB313), the area targeted for "0" clearing and initial setting may not be the target for "0" clearing and initial setting in the first RAM clearing process (step SB117).

After that, a return command at the time of clear is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step SB118). By receiving the return command at the time of clearing, the sound emission control device 81 specifies that the main CPU 63 has completed the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, and at the same time, confirms the operation power of this time. It is specified that the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed in the process at the start of supply (steps SB101 to SB122). Then, the processing corresponding to the reception of the clear return command is executed. The contents of the processing will be described later.

In the main process (FIG. 165), when a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106, that is, when the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal. If it is, the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB119). As described above, by setting the game stop flag to "1", the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the positive determination is made in step S8906. The processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control are If at least one of the checksums does not match due to the change in the information storage state since the last power-off, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and illegal operation While the processing for monitoring is executed, the processing for advancing the game is not executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SB120). When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB120: NO), an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag, the checksum, or the set value at the start of supplying the operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Yes (step SB121). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, and the speaker unit 54 "Please change the setting." Is output. Further, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is given when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed. It will be started again.

Then, the external output process at the time of abnormality is executed (step SB122). In the external output process at the time of abnormality, a process for externally outputting an abnormality signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and under the situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", the signal output of the abnormal signal is continued, and the game stop flag is cleared to "0", thereby indicating the abnormal signal. The signal output may be stopped. The abnormality signal can also be output when an abnormality different from the abnormality regarding the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs. For example, in the fraud detection process (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), when the fraud of the monitored object (detection of fraudulent radio wave or detection of fraudulent magnetism) occurs, the abnormal signal is output. It is output externally. However, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the abnormality signal is also used as described above, and a configuration in which an abnormality signal dedicated to an abnormality related to a power failure flag, checksum, or set value is externally output may be used. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an abnormality signal corresponding to each of the abnormality regarding the check, the abnormality regarding the checksum, and the abnormality regarding the set value is externally output.

When the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB120: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on by using the setting key (step SB114). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB114 and step SB120: YES), the set value updating process is executed (step SB115). The processing content of the setting value update processing is as already described. That is, when the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63 while the "setting change operation" is being performed, an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, and thus the result is negative in any of steps SB104 to SB106. Even if the determination is made, the set value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to give priority to the change of the set value. Further, in the set value update processing (FIG. 167), the game stop flag is cleared to “0” by executing the initial setting at the start in step SB303 as already described. As a result, when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, it is possible to eliminate the state in which the main RAM 65 has an abnormality after the set value update is completed.

On the other hand, when the reset button 68c is pressed but the setting key insertion part 68a is not turned on (step SB120: YES, step SB114: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". Is set (step SB116). In the process of step SB116 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step SB119, since the game stop flag is set to "1" as a matter of course, a positive determination is made in step SB116. In this case, an abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 in step SB121, and an abnormal signal is externally output in step SB122.

That is, when an abnormality relating to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106, the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed in the state where the "RAM clear operation" is performed. The first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is not executed even if the power supply is started. The first RAM clearing process is also performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the situation where the game stop flag is set to "1" and the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. (Step SB117) is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is being performed, the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1" can be prevented from being resolved. It will be possible. On the other hand, when the "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed and the setting is performed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1". The game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the initial setting (step SB303) at the start of the value updating process (Fig. 167). As a result, it becomes necessary to execute the set value updating process (FIG. 167) in order to cancel the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1". Therefore, when the information abnormality of the work area 221 for specific control occurs, not only the process for initializing the work area 221 for specific control, but also the resetting of the set value can be required. ..

Further, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", when "setting change operation" is not performed, that is, "no operation" In case of “RAM clear operation” or “setting confirmation operation”, an affirmative judgment is made in step SB109 or step SB116, so that an abnormal command is transmitted in step SB121 and an abnormality is detected in step SB122. The external output process of is executed. As a result, when the game stop flag is set to "1", regardless of the processing results of step SB104 to step SB106 in the subsequent main processing, unless the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, the main side Every time the supply of operating power to the CPU 63 is started, an abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and an external output at the time of abnormality to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 are performed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value should be changed.

When the process of step SB112 is executed, the process of step SB113 is executed, the process of step SB115 is executed, the process of step SB118 is executed, or the process of step SB122 is executed, Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 (step SB123). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the 35th embodiment. When the value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 35th embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the residual processing is performed after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed in the main CPU 63. Before (Step SB125 to Step SB128) is started, the initial check period is started. With this, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

Further, while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122), the initial check period is the operating power. It is started after the processing at the start of the supply of is completed. Thereby, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set values are displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

After that, the startup processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB124). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906, and thus not only the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 The processing of steps S8907 to S8920 will be executed, and the state where the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step SB124, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps SB125 to SB128. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between the one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Residual time will occur. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps SB125 to SB128 is repeatedly executed by utilizing this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps SB125 to SB128 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed. In steps SB125 to SB128, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are permitted in the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is being executed. The situation will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 168. FIG. 168(a) shows a period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an ON state, and FIG. 168(b) shows a period during which the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of operating power is executed. 168(c) shows a period in which the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", and FIG. 168(d) shows the residual processing (step SB125 to step SB128). 168(e) shows the period during which interrupts are permitted, and FIG. 168(f) shows the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). 168(g) shows the period during which the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, and FIG. 168(h) shows the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). Indicates the period.

First, a case will be described in which both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power.

At a timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 168(a), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation of "no operation" in which none of the "RAM clear operation", the "setting change operation", and the "setting confirmation operation" are performed. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power. Further, as shown in FIG. 168(c), the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1".

After that, at the timing of t2, the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is finished as shown in FIG. 168(b), and the residual process (step SB125 is shown as shown in FIG. 168(d). ~Step SB128) is started. Also, at the timing of t2, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 168(c). At the timing when the residual process (step SB125 to step SB128) is started, the interrupt is not permitted as shown in FIG. 168(e).

After that, at the timing of t3, the residual processing (step SB125 to step SB128) is completed as shown in FIG. 168(d), and the interrupt is permitted as shown in FIG. 168(e). This starts the timer interrupt processing as shown in FIG. 168(f). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed first and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) ends, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed. It may be configured to be executed.

Next, a case will be described in which the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power.

At timing t4, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 168(a). In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed. At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power. Further, as shown in FIG. 168(c), the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1".

Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is started as shown in FIG. 168(g). In this case, the interrupt is permitted at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 168(e). When the interrupt is permitted, the timer interrupt process is started at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 168(f). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed first and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) ends, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed. It may be configured to be executed. Further, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed, since the start-up processing flag is set to “1” as shown in FIG. 168(c), power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and While processing for performing fraud monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed.

The timer interrupt process ends at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 168(f), and then the set value updating process (FIG. 167) as shown in FIG. 168(g) ends at the timing of t8. Then, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed, and the start-up flag is set as shown in FIG. 168(c). "0" is cleared. Further, at the timing of t8, the residual process (step SB125 to step SB128) is started as shown in FIG. 168(d).

Next, a case where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power will be described.

At timing t9, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 168(a). In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the “setting confirmation operation” is performed. At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power. Further, as shown in FIG. 168(c), the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1".

After that, at the timing of t10, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is started as shown in FIG. 168(h). In this case, the interrupt is permitted at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 168(e). When the interrupt is permitted, the timer interrupt process is started at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 168(f). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed first and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) ends, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed. It may be configured to be executed. Further, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed, since the start-up processing flag is set to “1” as shown in FIG. 168(c), power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and While processing for performing fraud monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed.

The timer interrupt process ends at timing t12 as shown in FIG. 168(f), and then the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) as shown in FIG. 168(h) ends at timing t13. Then, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed, and the start-up flag is set as shown in FIG. 168(c). "0" is cleared. Further, at the timing of t13, the residual processing (step SB125 to step SB128) is started as shown in FIG. 168(d).

As described above, the first timer interrupt process (in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of the operating power) 133) and the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are permitted. If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, the timer interrupt process is not interrupted and activated during the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power. By doing so, it becomes possible to complete the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of the operating power at an early stage.

On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed, the process according to the operation of the manager of the game hall is executed. Becomes longer. In this case, even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, assuming that the interrupt of the timer interrupt process remains disabled, the execution of the timer interrupt process starts. The timing is extremely late. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the interrupt of the timer interrupt process is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution start timing of the timer interrupt processing from being extremely delayed. Further, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, the process for display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed by interruption, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is used to display the set values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to do it.

Further, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, “1” is set in the startup processing flag. Therefore, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. It is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being executed while the processing for performing power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraudulent monitoring among various processing of 133) is executed.

Next, the manner in which the processing proceeds when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, checksum, or set value occurs will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 169. FIG. 169(a) shows a period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an ON state, and FIG. 169(b) shows a period during which the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of operating power is executed. 169(c) shows the period during which the residual processing (step SB125 to step SB128) is executed, and FIG. 169(d) shows the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134). 169) indicates a period during which the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", and FIG. 169(f) indicates that an abnormal signal is external. 169(g) shows the period during which the set value updating process (FIG. 167) is being executed.

At a timing of t1, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 169(a). In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation of "no operation" in which none of the "RAM clear operation", the "setting change operation", and the "setting confirmation operation" are performed. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power.

After that, at the timing of t2, the occurrence of an abnormality relating to any of the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value is specified, so that the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "" as shown in FIG. 169(e). 1” is set. Further, at the timing of t2, the external output of the abnormal signal is started as shown in FIG. 169(f). As a result, it becomes possible for the management computer in the gaming hall to specify that an abnormality relating to any one of the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value has occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

After that, at the timing of t3, the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) ends as shown in FIG. 169(b), and the residual process (steps SB125 to step SB125 to step SB125 as shown in FIG. 169(c). SB128) is started. Further, at the timing of t4, the external output of the abnormal signal is ended as shown in FIG. 169(f). The external output of the abnormal signal is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) from the timing of t2 to the timing of t4, so that the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality regarding one of the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value. It is possible to accurately specify what has been done in the management computer of the game hall. Moreover, since the period during which the external output of the abnormal signal is continued is constant for the predetermined period, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing the external output of the abnormal signal. In addition to the external output of the abnormality signal, abnormality notification in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 is also executed.

After that, at the timing of t5, the residual processing (step SB125 to step SB128) is finished as shown in FIG. 169(c). Then, the timer interrupt processing is executed as shown in FIG. 169(d) from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, and the residual processing as shown in FIG. 169(c) from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7 ( Steps SB125 to SB128) are executed, and the timer interrupt processing is executed from timing t7 to timing t8 as shown in FIG. 169(d). However, since "1" is set in the game stop flag as shown in FIG. 169(e), even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud Although the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed. At the timing of t8, the power failure process is executed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 169(a).

After that, at the timing of t9, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again as shown in FIG. 169(a), and the process at the start of supplying the operating power as shown in FIG. 169(b) (steps SB101 to SB122). ) Is started. In this case, "1" is set to the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 as shown in FIG. 169(e). Therefore, the abnormal signal is externally output as shown in FIG. 169(f) from the timing of t10 to the timing of t12. As a result, it becomes possible to make the management computer of the game hall recognize again that the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality related to any of the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value. In addition to the external output of the abnormality signal, abnormality notification in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 is also executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169(b), the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) ends at the timing of t11, and the processing from the timing of t11 to the timing of t13 is performed as shown in FIG. 169(c). The residual process (step SB125 to step SB128) is executed as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 169(d), the timer interrupt process is executed at the timing of t13. However, since "1" is set in the game stop flag as shown in FIG. 169(e), even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud Although the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed. At the timing of t14, the power failure process is executed by the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 169(a).

After that, at the timing of t15, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again as shown in FIG. 169(a), and the process at the start of supplying the operating power as shown in FIG. 169(b) (steps SB101 to SB122). ) Is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 169(g), the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed from the timing of t16 to the timing of t17. Not only is the setting value changed by executing the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), but the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. 169(e). It As a result, the state in which the execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked due to the occurrence of the information abnormality of the work area 221 for specific control is eliminated. After that, the residual processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is executed as shown in FIG. 169(c) from the timing of t17 to the timing of t18, and the timer interrupt processing is performed at the timing of t18 as shown in FIG. 169(d). Is started.

As described above, when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106 in the main processing (FIG. 165), the game in the work area 221 for specific control is played. By setting the stop flag to "1", the process for advancing the game is not executed. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the game from being played even if the information abnormality of the work area 221 for specific control has occurred.

Also, the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1" cannot be resolved unless the set value updating process (Fig. 167) is executed. As a result, it becomes necessary to execute the set value update processing (FIG. 167) in order to cancel the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1", and the information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control occurs. In that case, not only the processing for initializing the work area 221 for the specific control but also the resetting of the set value can be required.

Next, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 170. FIG. 170(a) shows a period during which the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power is executed, and FIG. 170(b) shows the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122). ) Shows the period during which the process is executed, FIG. 170(c) shows the initial check period, and FIG. 170(d) shows the period during which the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. 170(e) shows a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 170(f) shows the period during which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, and FIG. 170(g) shows the set value of the pachinko machine 10. The display indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in the current state and the display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 indicate the setting confirmation display period performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

First, a case will be described in which both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supply of operating power.

As shown in FIG. 170(a), the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is executed from the timing t1 to the timing t2. Then, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 170(b), the process after the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is finished is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the setting process of the checking counter in step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing of t2. As a result, the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 128(b)). Since the process for advancing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game can be performed in a situation where the check display is being displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. .. After that, at the timing of t3, the initial check period ends as shown in FIG. 170(c). As a result, the display of the base value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Next, a case will be described in which the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power.

At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 170(a), the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started. Then, the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed from timing t5 to timing t6 as shown in FIG. 170(d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 170(e), the setting update display period is from the timing t5 to the timing t6.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 170(b), the process after the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is finished is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the setting process of the checking counter in step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing of t6. As a result, the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 128(b)). Since the process for advancing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game can be performed in a situation where the check display is being displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. .. Thereafter, at the timing of t7, the initial check period ends as shown in FIG. 170(c). As a result, the display of the base value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Next, a case where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power will be described.

As shown in FIG. 170(a), the processing at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started at the timing of t8. Then, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed from timing t9 to timing t10 as shown in FIG. 170(f). In this case, as shown in FIG. 170(g), the setting confirming display period extends from the timing t9 to the timing t10.

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 170(b), the process after the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is finished is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the setting process of the checking counter in step SB122 of the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing of t10. As a result, the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 128(b)). Since the process for advancing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game can be performed in a situation where the check display is being displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. .. After that, at the timing of t11, the initial check period ends as shown in FIG. 170(c). As a result, the display of the base value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the residual processing is performed after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed in the main CPU 63. Before (Step SB125 to Step SB128) is started, the initial check period is started. With this, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

Further, while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122), the initial check period is the operating power. It is started after the processing at the start of the supply of is completed. Thereby, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set values are displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

Next, when the power outage process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 167) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the main process (Fig. The contents of the processing executed in (165) will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

When neither the set value update processing (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed, when the power failure processing is executed, the main processing (FIG. The contents of the process executed in () will be described first.

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the "no operation" situation, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (Fig. 167) and the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) in the main process (Fig. 165) are performed. ) Is not executed. When the supply of operating power is restarted in the state where the “RAM clear operation” is performed, the main process (FIG. 165) executes the first RAM clear process (step SB117) while the set value update process ( 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is restarted in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed in the main process (FIG. 165), while the first RAM clearing process (step SB117). ) And the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is restarted while the "setting confirmation operation" is performed, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 165), while the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is executed. ) And the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed.

Next, when the power outage process is executed in the situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed (that is, the condition where the setting update display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power is performed. The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 165) when the process is restarted will be described.

If the operating power supply is restarted in the "no operation" situation, if the operating power supply is restarted in the "RAM clear operation" situation, the operation is performed in the "setting change operation" situation Whether the power supply is restarted or the operating power supply is restarted in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, the main process (FIG. 165) does not perform the set value update process (FIG. 165). 167) is executed, but the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed. That is, when the power outage process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the set value update is performed regardless of the operation content at the time of restarting the supply of the operating power thereafter. The process (FIG. 167) is newly started.

With the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the set value updating process (FIG. 167), when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the setting key insertion part when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It is possible to newly start the set value updating process (FIG. 167) regardless of the operation contents of the 68a and the reset button 68c. As a result, it is possible to reliably generate an opportunity to complete the update of the set value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being started even though the setting value has not been updated.

Further, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the set value updating process (FIG. 167), the set value updating process (FIG. 167) is uniquely executed irrespective of the operation contents when restarting the supply of operating power. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the above excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration as compared with the configuration in which the processing content executed according to each operation content is changed.

Next, when the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed (that is, the state where the setting confirmation display flag is set to “1”), the subsequent supply of operating power is performed. The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 165) when the process is restarted will be described.

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the state where the "RAM clear operation" is performed, the main process (FIG. 165) executes the first RAM clear process (step SB117), while the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed. That is, even if the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, the setting confirmation is performed when the “RAM clear operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. The first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed without newly executing the processing (FIG. 166). This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the first RAM clear process (step SB117) for the “RAM clear operation”. The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the first RAM clearing process (step SB117).

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed in the main process (FIG. 165), while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. Is not executed. That is, even if the power failure process is executed in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, the setting confirmation is performed when the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. The setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed without newly executing the use process (FIG. 166). As a result, it becomes possible to give priority to the execution of the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) for the “setting change operation”. Even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed in this way, the setting value to be updated is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 by the setting value update process (FIG. 167) being executed. At the end of the set value update process (FIG. 167) that is displayed, the information of the set value to be updated at that time is set in the setting reference area 341. The set value of 10 can be confirmed. The setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) in the setting value updating process (Fig. 167).

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the situation where the "setting confirmation operation" is performed, the main processing (Fig. 165) is for confirming the setting, provided that no abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value. The process (FIG. 166) is executed. As a result, even if the power failure process is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), it is possible to restart the setting value confirmation by performing the “setting confirmation operation” when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Becomes

When the supply of operating power is restarted in the “no operation” situation, the setting key insertion unit 68a operates on the condition that no abnormality has occurred in the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value in the main process (FIG. 165). The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed even if the ON operation is not performed. As a result, even if the power failure process is executed in the middle of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value is confirmed when the operation power supply is restarted after that, the operation is not performed. It becomes possible to restart.

Next, the processing executed by the sound emission control device 81 will be described. Prior to the description of the processing, the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 81 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 172.

The voice emission control device 81 includes a voice emission control board 351. The sound emission side MPU 352 is mounted on the sound emission control board 351. The sound-light side MPU 352 includes a sound-light side ROM 354 and a sound-light side RAM 355 in addition to the sound-light side CPU 353 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit. In addition to the above-described elements, the sound/light side MPU 352 has an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like built therein.

The sound-light side ROM 354 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage, and is used as a read-only memory. The sound-light side ROM 354 stores various control programs executed by the sound-light side CPU 353 and fixed value data.

The sound-light side RAM 355 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs to be supplied with electric power from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The sound-light side RAM 355 is capable of random access and has a shorter read time than the sound-light side ROM 354 when compared with the same data capacity. The sound-light side RAM 355 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the sound-light side ROM 354.

An RTC 356 and an RTC memory 357 are mounted on the sound emission control board 351 in addition to the sound-light side MPU 352. The RTC 356 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date information and time information, and outputs the measured date information and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date and time information) according to an instruction from the sound-light side CPU 353. This is a configuration that can be performed. The RTC 356 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure the date information and the time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. Further, the RTC 356 is not limited to the configuration in which the date and time information is measured, and may have a configuration in which only the time information is measured.

The RTC memory 357 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) such as an SRAM and a DRAM that needs to be supplied with electric power from the outside to retain the storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The RTC memory 357 stores date and time information of the RTC 356 in accordance with an instruction from the sound-light side CPU 353. The date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is read by the sound-light side CPU 353 as necessary. The sound-light side CPU 353 grasps the reference time based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, and the time-corresponding effect is executed every time a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses with reference to the reference time. To execute the process. The RTC memory 357 is configured to be supplied with backup power from a backup power supply provided for the RTC 356, and the date and time information is stored and retained even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RTC memory 357 may be an EEPROM or the like that does not require external power supply to store and hold information.

Next, the effect control processing executed by the sound-light side CPU 353 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The effect control process is executed when the supply of operating power to the sound-light side CPU 353 is started.

When the update start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SB401: YES), the update notification setting process is executed (step SB402). As described above, the update start command is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 when the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is started by the main CPU 63. In the update notification setting process, an image showing that the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the set value, and the set value update process ( Display control of the display control device 82 is performed so that an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for ending (FIG. 167) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation content and the setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (FIG. 167). It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the operation content necessary for ending the game. In addition to or instead of the above-mentioned notification being performed by the symbol display device 41, at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 may be configured.

When the confirmation start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SB403: YES), the confirmation notification setting process is executed (step SB404). As described above, the confirmation start command is transmitted to the sound/light side CPU 353 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is started by the main side CPU 63. In the confirmation notification setting process, an image showing that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for terminating the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are displayed. The display control device 82 controls the display so that it is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the game hall to recognize that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed, and is necessary for ending the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). It is possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize various operation contents. In addition to or instead of the above-mentioned notification being performed by the symbol display device 41, at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 may be configured.

When the processes of steps SB401 to SB404 are executed, it is determined whether any one of the normal restoration command, the clear restoration command, the confirmation restoration command, and the update restoration command is received from the main CPU 63 ( Step SB405). The normal return command is a process at the start of supply of operating power (step SB101) without executing the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), and the set value update process (FIG. 167). ~ Sent when step SB122) is completed. The return command at the time of clearing is transmitted when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed and the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. The return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed and the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. The update return command is transmitted when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed and the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed.

If these return commands have not been received (step SB405: NO), the process returns to step SB401. The main CPU 63 transmits one of the return commands to the sound/light side CPU 353 when the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed. In this case, as described above, the sound-light side CPU 353 does not execute the processing from step SB406 until any one of the return commands is received from the main side CPU 63. As a result, while the main CPU 63 is executing the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the time of starting the supply of operating power, the sound/light side CPU 353 can be prevented from starting the execution control of the normal effect. It will be possible.

Further, in a situation where no return command has been received, there is a possibility that an update start command or a confirmation start command will be received from the main CPU 63, and when the update start command is received, the set value update processing has already been described. The notification corresponding to the execution of (FIG. 167) needs to be performed, and when the confirmation start command is received, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed as described above. Corresponding notifications need to be made. In this case, the sound-light side CPU 353 does not execute the processing of step SB406 and subsequent steps until it receives any return command from the main side CPU 63, so that when the update start command or the confirmation start command is received, the corresponding notification Can be started appropriately.

When any return command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SB405: YES), it is determined whether the received return command is a normal return command (step SB406). As described above, the normal recovery command is executed when the supply of operating power is started without executing the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), and the set value update process (FIG. 167). Is transmitted when the process (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed. When the normal recovery command is received (step SB406: YES), the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read out and the read out date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357 (step SB407). As a result, the RTC memory 357 stores the date and time information serving as a reference when specifying the timing for executing the time-based effect.

When the return command received this time is not the normal return command (step SB406: NO) but the update return command (step SB408: YES), the update notification end processing is executed (step SB409). The return command at the time of updating is transmitted to the sound/light side CPU 353 when the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is completed by the main side CPU 63 as already described. In the update notification end processing, the notification corresponding to the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) started in step SB402 is ended.

If the return command received this time is not the update return command (step SB408: NO) but the confirmation return command (step SB410: YES), the confirmation notification end process is executed (step SB411). As described above, the return command for confirmation is transmitted to the sound/light side CPU 353 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is completed in the main side CPU 63. In the confirmation notification ending process, the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) started in step SB404 is ended.

When the process of step SB407 is executed, the process of step SB409 is executed, the negative determination is made in step SB410, or the process of step SB411 is executed, a process for performing execution control of a normal effect is performed. Execute. Specifically, it is first determined whether or not it is the start timing of the time-corresponding effect (step SB412).

The time-corresponding effect is an effect that is executed every time a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses with reference to the reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. In the time corresponding effect, the display light emitting unit 53 performs a light emitting effect corresponding to the time corresponding effect, the speaker unit 54 performs a sound output effect corresponding to the time corresponding effect, and the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the time corresponding effect. Display effect is performed.

When the time corresponding effect is started in the situation where the game turning effect is being executed, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 preferentially execute the time corresponding effect over the game turning effect. On the other hand, on the symbol display device 41, the image display corresponding to the time-corresponding effect is performed in a state where the image display corresponding to the effect for game play is reduced and displayed on a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. In addition, when the time-corresponding effect is started in a situation where the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the time-corresponding effect is executed with priority over the effect for the opening/closing execution mode in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. On the other hand, on the symbol display device 41, the image display corresponding to the time-corresponding effect is performed in a state where the image display corresponding to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is reduced and displayed on a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

With the configuration in which the time-corresponding effect is executed every time a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses with reference to the reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, a plurality of adjacent game halls are provided. If the reference times of the pachinko machines 10 are the same, it is possible to start the time-corresponding effect simultaneously with the plurality of pachinko machines 10. In the game hall, since the power of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is simultaneously turned on, the reference times of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 basically match.

In step SB412, the reference time is grasped based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. Also, the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the time difference between the reference time and the time corresponding to the current date and time information read from the RTC 356 is an integral multiple of the predetermined time. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB412, time-corresponding effect setting processing is executed (step SB413). In the time-corresponding effect setting process, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 are set to execute the time-corresponding effect, and the symbol display device 41 issues a command to execute the time-corresponding effect. 82. Note that the execution content of the time-corresponding effect may be different depending on the number of times the time-corresponding effect is executed when the reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is used as a reference.

When a negative determination is made in step SB412 or the process of step SB413 is executed, other processes are executed (step SB414). In other processing, when the command to start the game use effect is received from the main CPU 63, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are used to start the game use effect. When the settings are made and the situation for the game use is to be advanced, the settings for advancing the game use effect are made by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54, and the game time is set. When it is a situation in which the effect for use is to be ended, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are set to end the effect for game play. Further, in other processing, when a command to start the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is received from the main CPU 63, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is provided by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. In order to proceed with the opening/closing execution mode effect by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54, when the setting for starting is performed and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is to be advanced. When the setting is performed and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is to be ended, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are set for ending the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the operation corresponding to the contents of the processing executed in the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 174.

All of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), and the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63. If the process is not executed, the main CPU 63 sends a normal return command to the sound/light side CPU 353 when the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of the operating power ends. When the sound-light side CPU 353 receives the normal recovery command, the control regarding the notification is not executed for the normal recovery command. On the other hand, when the sound-light side CPU 353 receives the normal return command, it stores the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. As a result, the information corresponding to the reference time referred to for specifying the execution trigger of the time-corresponding effect is newly stored in the RTC memory 357.

When the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power in the main CPU 63, the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) When the process ends, the main CPU 63 transmits a clear return command to the sound/light side CPU 353. When the sound-light side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of clearing, it does not execute the control related to the notification. Further, the sound-light side CPU 353 does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357 even if the clear-time return command is received. Since the backup power is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if the RTC memory 357 does not store new date and time information, the RTC memory is turned off before the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and retained as it is.

When the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63, the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). When the process ends, the main CPU 63 transmits a return command for updating to the sound/light side CPU 353. When receiving the update return command, the sound-light side CPU 353 ends the notification corresponding to the execution of the set value update processing (FIG. 167). Further, the sound-light side CPU 353 does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357 even when the return command at the time of updating is received. Since the backup power is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if the RTC memory 357 does not store new date and time information, the RTC memory is turned off before the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and retained as it is.

When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power in the main CPU 63, the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) When the process ends, the main CPU 63 transmits a return command for confirmation to the sound/light side CPU 353. When the sound-light side CPU 353 receives the return command for confirmation, it terminates the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). Further, the sound-light side CPU 353 does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357 even when the return command upon confirmation is received. Since the backup power is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if the RTC memory 357 does not store new date and time information, the RTC memory is turned off before the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and retained as it is.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

When the set value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the set value is changed from the set value corresponding to the start that is set in advance. As a result, regardless of the set value to be used before the set value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the set value update process (FIG. 167) changes the set value from the set value corresponding to a certain start in the set value update process (FIG. 167). Will be possible. Therefore, it becomes easy for the operator to understand the work content of the setting value changing operation.

Specifically, the setting value corresponding to the start is “setting 1” having the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value is changed from “setting 1” having the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the manager of the game hall unintentionally terminates the set value update processing (FIG. 167) immediately after the start of the set value update processing (FIG. 167), the setting value with the lowest advantage is set. Therefore, even if the game is started in such a situation, it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage from occurring in the game hall.

The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342, and information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value update processing is performed. The information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the situation where (FIG. 167) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. As a result, while the setting reference area 341 stores and holds the information of the setting value set before the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) sets the target of updating. It is possible to change the set value.

When the main CPU 63 starts the supply of the operating power, when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed, the clear return command is transmitted, and the set value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed. A return command at the time of update is transmitted, and when the process for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) is executed, a return command at the time of confirmation is transmitted, these first RAM clear process (step SB117), set value update process (FIG. 167), and If none of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed, the normal return command is transmitted. Accordingly, it is possible to control not only the main CPU 63 but also the sound/light side CPU 353 to perform control corresponding to the type of the start situation when the supply of the operating power is started.

The sound-light side CPU 353 makes a positive determination in step SB405 of the effect control process (FIG. 173) regardless of which of the normal return command, the clear return command, the update return command and the confirmation return command is received. Then, the state becomes such that the processes of steps SB412 to SB414 are executed. On the other hand, when the normal return command is received, the write processing to the RTC memory 357 (step SB407) is executed, and when the update return command is received, the update notification end processing (step SB409) is executed. If the return command at the time of confirmation is received, the confirmation notification end process (step SB411) is executed, and if the return command at the time of clear is received, the dedicated process is not executed. As a result, the control corresponding to each return command is performed while the process corresponding to the progress of the game is started in the sound-light side CPU 353 upon reception of any one of the return commands. It can be executed by the side CPU 353.

The main-side CPU 63 terminates the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power after transmitting any return command, and starts the process (step S8907 to step S8920) for controlling the progress of the game. However, when the sound-light side CPU 353 receives any return command, the sound-light side CPU 353 controls the execution of the effect corresponding to the progress content of the game. As a result, after the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed by the main CPU 63, the sound-light side CPU 353 controls the execution of the effect corresponding to the progress of the game. Is possible. In this case, the sound-light side CPU 353 executes a process corresponding to each return command. With this, by using a plurality of return commands that cause the sound-light side CPU 353 to differ in the content of execution of processing at the start of supply of operating power, the sound-light side CPU 353 triggers the start of execution control of the effect corresponding to the progress of the game. Can be made to recognize.

Since the time-corresponding effect is executed when the execution timing of the time-corresponding effect is reached based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, the time-corresponding effect is executed at the timing when the predetermined time comes. It becomes possible to In this case, when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the set value updating process (FIG. 167), or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. No new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs, but the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the set value updating process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirming process (FIG. 166) are all executed. If not, the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 is stored in the RTC memory 357. This allows the RTC memory 357 to newly store date and time information according to the content of processing executed by the main CPU 63 when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the RTC memory. It is possible to cause a situation in which the date and time information is not newly stored in the memory 357.

When the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed, and the "setting change operation" is performed. The setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, and when the “setting confirmation operation” is performed, the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed. On the other hand, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the “no operation” situation, the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). ) Is not executed. In this case, the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started as described above. If so, no new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs, but any of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). The current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 when the memory is not executed is stored in the RTC memory 357. Thus, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, whether the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357 or the date and time information is not newly stored in the RTC memory 357. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to select.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the residual processing (step SB125 to step SB125) is performed after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) is completed in the main CPU 63. Before the SB128) is started, the initial check period is started. With this, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), while the initial check period supplies the operating power. It is started after the processing at the start is completed. Thereby, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set values are displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. ). 166) and the set value updating process (FIG. 167) are not executed, the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal regardless of the situation when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

In the main process (FIG. 165) of the main CPU 63, when either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting process are performed. This is a process that is commonly executed even when neither of the value update processes (FIG. 167) is executed, and either of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167). When the execution is performed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked as the processing whose execution order is later than those of the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 167). The process to start the message display is set. As described above, the processing for starting the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set as the common processing, and thus the processing configuration is simplified and excellent as already described. It is possible to achieve the desired effect.

Even when the check display is being executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the main CPU 63 can start the process for advancing the game. Thereby, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the game is played. It is possible to prevent the start timing of the processing for advancing from being delayed.

In the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, which is executed when the supply of the operating power is started in the main CPU 63, it is determined whether or not the set value of the use target is within the normal range. Processing for monitoring is executed. Then, when the set value of the use target is abnormal, the processing for advancing the game is in a restricted state in which the processing is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being started even though the setting value of the use target is abnormal.

The process for monitoring whether or not the set value of the use target is within the normal range is the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) even after the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. ) Is executed in step S8919. As a result, even if the set value to be used becomes abnormal during the progress of the game, it is possible to deal with it.

Whether or not the setting value to be used is within the normal range in the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB101 to step SB122) executed when the supply of the operating power is started in the main CPU 63 Not only the monitoring but also the monitoring of whether the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" is executed, and the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are checked. Monitoring of whether or not the thumb is normal is performed. Then, when "1" is not set in the power failure flag or when the checksum is abnormal, the restriction state in which the process for advancing the game is not started is entered. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being started even though the information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65.

The regulation state is resumed when the supply of the operating power is resumed even if the supply of the operating power is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the process for advancing the game is restricted due to the occurrence of the information abnormality with respect to the main side RAM 65, from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operating power. Become.

The restricted state is canceled by executing the set value updating process (FIG. 167). As a result, when the state where the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of the information abnormality with respect to the main RAM 65 is released, it becomes possible to newly set the set value to be used.

Even in the above-mentioned regulated state, power failure monitoring and various counter update processing are executed. As a result, it becomes possible to ensure the execution of the necessary processing even when the progress of the game is restricted as described above. In particular, by executing the power outage monitoring, it is possible to appropriately deal with the power outage even if the progress of the game is restricted.

When the regulated state is reached, it is informed that the set value to be used should be changed. This makes it possible to urge the manager of the game hall to eliminate the information abnormality in the main RAM 65 when it occurs.

When an information abnormality has occurred with respect to the main RAM 65, an abnormality signal is externally output to the management computer of the game hall. This makes it possible to urge the manager of the game hall to eliminate the information abnormality in the main RAM 65 when it occurs.

An abnormal signal is externally output to the management computer of the game hall even when an abnormality occurs that is different from the case where the information abnormality has occurred with respect to the main RAM 65. As a result, it is possible to combine the configuration for performing external output.

Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the restricted state where the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65, it is still restricted when the supply of the operating power is resumed. When the state is not released, the external output of the abnormal signal is performed again. As a result, in the regulated state, the abnormal signal is externally output every time the supply of operating power is restarted. Therefore, it becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65.

The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of operating power. In the situation where the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is prohibited and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and Execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted. If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, the timer interrupt process is not interrupted and activated during the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power. By doing so, it becomes possible to complete the processing (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supply of the operating power at an early stage.

On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed, the process according to the operation of the manager of the game hall is executed. Becomes longer. In this case, even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the set value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, assuming that the interrupt of the timer interrupt process remains disabled, the execution of the timer interrupt process starts. The timing is extremely late. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the interrupt of the timer interrupt process is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution start timing of the timer interrupt processing from being extremely delayed. Further, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, the process for display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed by interruption, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is used to display the set values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to do it.

Further, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, “1” is set in the startup processing flag. Therefore, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. It is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being executed while the processing for performing power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraudulent monitoring among various processing of 133) is executed.

When neither the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the set value updating process (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. However, when any of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the set value updating process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirming process (FIG. 166) is executed, the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357. It is not limited to the configuration that does not occur. For example, when neither the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, or the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed Alternatively, the RTC memory 357 may be newly stored with the date and time information. When neither the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed Alternatively, the RTC memory 357 may be newly stored with the date and time information. When neither the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed Alternatively, the RTC memory 357 may be newly stored with the date and time information.

When neither the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, or the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, Alternatively, the configuration may be such that new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. When neither the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, or the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed, Alternatively, the configuration may be such that new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. When neither the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, or the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed, Alternatively, the configuration may be such that new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs when the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed.

Further, when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed, new storage of date and time information occurs in the RTC memory 357, and in other cases, new date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357. The storage may not occur. Further, when the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs, and in other cases, new date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357. The storage may not occur. When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information occurs in the RTC memory 357, and in other cases, new date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357. The storage may not occur. Further, when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) or the set value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed, new storage of date and time information occurs in the RTC memory 357, and in other cases, it is used for the RTC. A configuration may be adopted in which new storage of date and time information in the memory 357 does not occur. When the first RAM clear process (step SB117) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information occurs in the RTC memory 357, and in other cases, the RTC memory 357. The date and time information may not be newly stored in the configuration. Further, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of the date and time information occurs in the RTC memory 357, and in other cases, the RTC memory is used. A configuration may be adopted in which new storage of date and time information in the memory 357 does not occur.

In addition, when the set value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the entire work area 221 for specific control including the setting reference area 341 and the setting update area 342 in the initial setting at the start (step SB303). The area may be cleared to "0" and initialized. In this case, the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) may not be executed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 167).

Further, when the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value may be changed from a predetermined set value other than “setting 1”. For example, the configuration may be changed from "setting 2", the setting may be changed from "setting 3", or the setting may be changed from "setting 4". The configuration may be changed, the setting value may be changed from “setting 5”, or the setting value may be changed from “setting 6”.

When the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is overwritten in the setting update area 342 as in the 45th embodiment. As a result, the setting value may be changed from the setting value that has been set as the usage target until then.

In addition, the process for transmitting various return commands in the main process (FIG. 165) may be set as a process before the residual process (step SB125 to step SB128) is started. In this case, when any one of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the set value updating process (FIG. 167) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, a flag corresponding to the process is set, and In the processing for transmitting various return commands, the return command corresponding to the state of the flag may be transmitted to the sound/light side CPU 353.

Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the time-corresponding effect is executed every time a predetermined time elapses with reference to the date/time information stored in the RTC memory 357, the date/time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is used as a reference. Alternatively, it may be configured to monitor whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred each time a predetermined time elapses, and each time a predetermined time elapses with reference to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. The base value may be notified. In this case, the RTC 356 and the RTC memory 357 may be provided on the main control board 61, and the main CPU 63 may monitor the abnormality or notify the base value. A plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall perform abnormality monitoring at the same time, and the result is notified by, for example, the symbol display device 41 or the like, so that whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred is regularly performed. It is possible to perform various types of monitoring collectively for a plurality of pachinko machines 10. Further, the base value is simultaneously notified by the symbol display device 41 and the like in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 set in the game hall, so that the base value is regularly monitored for the plurality of pachinko machines 10. It becomes possible to do it. The above-mentioned various notifications are not limited to the configuration performed by the pachinko machine 10 itself, but may be configured to be performed by external output to the game hall management computer.

In addition, in the main process (FIG. 165), it is determined that the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksum is abnormal, or the setting value of the setting reference area 341 is abnormal. When the determination is made, the setting value update processing (FIG. 165) may be forcedly executed regardless of whether or not the “setting change operation” is performed. This makes it possible to immediately change the set value when the information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65.

<50th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the effect control processing executed by the sound-light side CPU 353 is different from that in the forty-ninth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 49th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the 49th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the effect control process in the present embodiment, which is executed by the sound-light side CPU 353.

In Step SB501 to Step SB505, the same processing as Step SB401 to Step SB405 of the effect control processing (FIG. 173) in the forty-ninth embodiment is executed. When any of the normal return command, the clear return command, the check return command, and the update return command are received from the main CPU 63 (step SB505: YES), the return command received this time is other than the normal return command. It is determined whether the command is a return command (step SB506).

When the return command received this time is one of the return command for clear, the return command for confirmation, and the return command for update (step SB506: YES), the effect control process in the forty-ninth embodiment (FIG. 173). Similar to step SB407 in step S407, the current date/time information of the RTC 356 is read and the read date/time information is stored in the RTC memory 357 (step SB407). As a result, the RTC memory 357 stores the date and time information serving as a reference when specifying the timing for executing the time-based effect.

In Steps SB508 to SB514, the same processing as Steps SB408 to SB414 of the effect control processing (FIG. 173) in the forty-ninth embodiment is executed.

FIG. 176 is an explanatory diagram for describing an action corresponding to the content of the process executed in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power in the main CPU 63.

Similar to the forty-ninth embodiment, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166), and the process at the start of supplying the operating power in the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122) are performed. When none of the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, the main CPU 63 sends a normal return command to the sound/light side CPU 353, and when the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is executed, The main CPU 63 sends a return command at the time of clearing to the sound/light side CPU 353, and when the set value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, the main side CPU 63 sends a return command at the time of updating to the sound/light side CPU 353. When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the main CPU 63 sends a confirmation return command to the sound/light side CPU 353.

Similarly to the forty-ninth embodiment, the sound-light side CPU 353 terminates the notification corresponding to the execution of the set value update processing (FIG. 167) when the update return command is received, and at the time of confirmation. When the return command is received, the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is ended. Further, even when the sound-light side CPU 353 receives the normal return command and the return command at the time of clearing, similarly to the forty-ninth embodiment, the notification control is not executed for that.

The sound/light-side CPU 353 stores the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357 when receiving any of the clear return command, the update return command, and the confirmation return command. As a result, the information corresponding to the reference time referred to for specifying the execution trigger of the time-corresponding effect is newly stored in the RTC memory 357. On the other hand, the sound-light side CPU 353 does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357 even if the normal return command is received. Since the backup power is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 does not occur, the RTC memory 357 is used before the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The date and time information stored in the memory 357 is stored and retained as it is.

According to the above configuration, any one of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the set value updating process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) in the process (step SB101 to step SB122) at the start of supplying the operating power. Is executed, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is rewritten to the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356, while the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SB101 to step SB101). If neither the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the set value updating process (FIG. 167) nor the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in step SB122), it is stored in the RTC memory 357. The date and time information cannot be rewritten. As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off for maintenance and operation check of the pachinko machine 10 during the operation of the game hall, in the situation of "no operation" at the time of restarting the supply of operation power after that. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to prevent the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 from being rewritten. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off during the operation of the game hall and the supply of operating power is restarted, the reference time of the time-corresponding effect is set to be the same as that of the surrounding pachinko machines 10 in the game hall. However, it becomes possible to enhance the operability for restarting the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, since the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 cannot be rewritten by performing the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 in the “no operation” state, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on so that the contents are not rewritten, the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the set value update process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) are not performed. It is possible to prevent the processing from being executed.

<51st Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that in the 49th embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 49th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the 49th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps SB601 to SB630 in the main process are executed by using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

Steps SB601 to SB622 execute the same processes as steps SB101 to SB122 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

When the process of step SB612 is executed, the process of step SB613 is executed, the process of step SB615 is executed, the process of step SB618 is executed, or the process of step SB622 is executed, Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 (step SB623). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the 35th embodiment. When the value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 35th embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the residual processing is performed after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB601 to SB622) is completed in the main CPU 63. The initial check period is started before (steps SB627 to SB630) are started. With this, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

Further, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB601 to SB622), while the initial check period is the operating power. The process is started after the process at the start of the supply has been completed. Thereby, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set values are displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

After that, interrupt permission is set (step SB624). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt period. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interruption, the first to fourth notification display devices are displayed so that the check display is performed in the situation where the check counter is set to a value of 1 or more. Display control of 201 to 204 is performed.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the checking counter in the specific control work area 221 is "0" (step SB625). Then, the process waits at step SB625 until the value of the checking counter becomes "0". In this case, since the state in which the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" is maintained, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started by interruption. Of the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the process for performing power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while the process for advancing the game is not executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is completed. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB623 elapses, a check display is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where execution of a process for advancing a game is blocked. Is continued.

After that, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB626). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906, and thus not only the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 The processing of steps S8907 to S8920 will be executed, and the state where the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step SB626, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps SB627 to SB630. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between the one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Residual time will occur. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps SB627 to SB630 is repeatedly executed by utilizing this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps SB627 to SB630 is an aperiodic process that is executed aperiodically. In steps SB627 to SB630, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

According to the above configuration, the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked. As a result, it is possible to check whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal in a situation where a game is not played.

<Fifty-second Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that in the 49th embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 49th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the 49th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. Note that the processing of steps SB701 to SB734 in the main processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

In the main process of this embodiment, unlike the forty-ninth embodiment, the power-on initialization process is not executed. Therefore, when the main processing is activated, the processing of step SB701 and thereafter is started without waiting for the predetermined time for waiting to elapse. Although the power-on initialization process is not executed, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted when the main process is started.

In the main process, first, the internal function register setting process is executed similarly to step SB102 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment (step SB701), and the main process in the forty-ninth embodiment (FIG. 165). Similarly to step SB103 in (1), "1" is set to the in-start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB702). After that, the power failure flag is set to "1", the checksum is normal, the set value is normal, and the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1". Under that condition (steps SB703 to SB705: YES, step SB706: NO), it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SB707).

When the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SB707: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB708). When "1" is not set in the game stop flag and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on by using the setting key (step SB708: NO, step SB709: YES), or the game stop flag Is not set to "1" and the setting key insertion portion 68a is not turned on by using the setting key, and "1" is set to the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 221. If so (step SB708 and step SB709: NO, step SB710: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step SB711). In the setting confirmation process, steps SB201 to SB202 and steps SB204 to SB207 are executed in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

That is, in the setting confirmation processing of this embodiment, the confirmation start command is not transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the setting confirmation process is executed, the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process is not executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the main process is started, the process after step SB701 is started without waiting for the predetermined time for weight to elapse, so that the design confirmation process is started at the timing. There is a possibility that the operation start and initial setting of the display device 41 have not been completed. On the other hand, as described above, by making the symbol display device 41 not perform the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is started in the situation where the initial setting is not completed. It is possible to prevent it. The notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process may be performed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 but not by the symbol display device 41.

After the setting confirmation process is executed, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SB712). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the 35th embodiment. When the value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 35th embodiment. That is, when the setting confirmation process is executed in the process (step SB701 to step SB729) at the start of supplying the operating power, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are executed after the setting confirmation process is completed. The check display is started at 204, and the check display is performed in a situation where the progress of the process is not waiting.

When the reset button 68c is not pressed and the game stop flag is not set to "1", and the setting key insertion portion 68a is not turned on by using the setting key, the work for specific control is performed. When the setting confirmation display flag in the area 221 is not set to "1" (step SB707 to step SB710: NO), the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to the initial check period (specifically, Information corresponding to 5 seconds) is set (step SB713). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the 35th embodiment. When the value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 35th embodiment.

After that, the interruption permission is set (step SB714). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt period. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interruption, the first to fourth notification display devices are displayed so that the check display is performed in the situation where the check counter is set to a value of 1 or more. Display control of 201 to 204 is performed.

Then, the weighting process is executed (step SB715). In the wait process, the process waits until the value of the checking counter in the specific control work area 221 becomes "0". In this case, since the state in which the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" is maintained, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started by interruption. Of the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the process for performing power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while the process for advancing the game is not executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is completed. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB713 elapses, the check display is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation in which execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked. Is continued. Further, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the waiting time in the weight process. That is, using the wait period for preventing the execution of the process for advancing the game until the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. It is possible to make a check display. After the wait process (step SB715) is completed, the normal recovery command is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 as in step SB113 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment (step SB716).

When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key (steps SB707 and SB717: YES), the set value updating process is executed (step SB718). Further, even when the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" regardless of whether or not the above "setting change operation" is performed (step SB706: YES). ), the set value update process is executed (step SB717). In the set value updating process, the processes of step SB301 to step SB304 and step SB306 to step SB314 are executed in the set value updating process (FIG. 167) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

That is, the update start command is not transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 in the setting value update processing of the present embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the setting value updating process is executed, the notification corresponding to the setting value updating process is not executed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the main process is activated, the design value update process is started at the timing when the setting value update process is started in order to start the processes of step SB701 and thereafter without waiting for the predetermined time for waiting to elapse. There is a possibility that the operation start and initial setting of the display device 41 have not been completed. On the other hand, as described above, by making the symbol display device 41 not perform the notification corresponding to the setting value update processing, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is started in the situation where the initial setting is not completed. It is possible to prevent it. The notification corresponding to the set value updating process may be performed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 but not by the symbol display device 41.

After executing the setting value update process, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB719). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the 35th embodiment. When the value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 35th embodiment. That is, when the set value update process is executed in the process (step SB701 to step SB729) at the start of supplying the operating power, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 are set after the set value update process is completed. The check display is started at 204, and the check display is performed in a situation where the progress of the process is not waiting.

When the reset button 68c is being pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is not being turned on (step SB707: YES, step SB717: NO), the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is "1". Is set (step SB720: NO), the first RAM clearing process is executed (step SB721). The processing content of the first RAM clearing process is the same as the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

After that, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB722). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the 35th embodiment. When the value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 35th embodiment.

After that, the interrupt permission is set (step SB723). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt period. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interruption, the first to fourth notification display devices are displayed so that the check display is performed in the situation where the check counter is set to a value of 1 or more. Display control of 201 to 204 is performed.

After that, the processing for weight is executed (step SB724). In the wait process, the process waits until the value of the checking counter in the specific control work area 221 becomes "0". In this case, since the state in which the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" is maintained, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started by interruption. Of the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the process for performing power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while the process for advancing the game is not executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is completed. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB722 elapses, the check display is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation in which execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked. Is continued. Further, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the waiting time in the weight process. That is, using the wait period for preventing the execution of the process for advancing the game until the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed. It is possible to make a check display. After the wait process (step SB724) is completed, a clear return command is transmitted to the sound-light side CPU 353 (step SB725), as in step SB118 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps SB703 to SB705, after setting the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control to "1" (step SB726), whether the reset button 68c is pressed or not. It is determined whether or not (step SB727). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on by using the setting key (step SB717 and step SB727: YES), the set value updating process is performed in step SB718. At the same time, the setting processing of the checking counter is executed in step SB719. The contents of these processes are as already described.

When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB727: NO), when it is determined that the game stop flag is set to "1" in step SB720, or the game stop flag is set to "1" in step SB708. When it is determined that is set, the processes of step SB728 and step SB729 are executed. The processing contents of these steps SB728 and SB729 are the same as those of steps SB121 and SB122 of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

When the process of step SB712 is executed, the process of step SB716 is executed, the process of step SB719 is executed, the process of step SB725 is executed, or the process of step SB729 is executed, The start-up processing flag in the work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB730). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906, and thus not only the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 The processing of steps S8907 to S8920 will be executed, and the state where the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step SB730, the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is also cleared to "0".

After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps SB731 to SB734. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between the one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Residual time will occur. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps SB731 to SB734 is repeatedly executed by utilizing this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of the steps SB731 to SB734 is an aperiodic process that is executed aperiodically. In steps SB731 to SB734, the same processing as steps S113 to S116 of the main processing (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment is executed.

According to the above configuration, when the setting confirmation process (step SB711) and the set value update process (step SB718) are not executed in the process (step SB701 to step SB729) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the weight process is executed. The check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 while waiting for the process to proceed. Thereby, by using the wait period for preventing the execution of the process for advancing the game until the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It is possible to display a check for. In addition, it is possible to secure an opportunity to confirm the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 before the processing for advancing the game is started.

On the other hand, since the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is not completed unless the setting key insertion part 68a is turned off by at least the manager of the game hall, these setting confirmation processes (step SB711) Alternatively, by the time the setting value update process (step SB718) is completed, the time that is longer than the time required to start the operation of the symbol display device 41 and complete the initial setting has elapsed. In this case, when the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the set value update process (step SB718) is executed, the weight confirmation process is not executed, so that the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting When the value update process (step SB718) is executed, it is possible to prevent the time required to start the process for advancing the game from becoming excessively long.

When the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the set value update process (step SB718) is executed, the first to the first after the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the set value update process (step SB718) is completed. 4 Check display is performed on the notification display devices 201 to 204. Thereby, the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 while not affecting the display of the set value using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible.

<53rd Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that in the 49th embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 49th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the 49th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps SB801 to SB826 in the main process are executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step SB801). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the main process is started, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) elapses without waiting for the next process. In the predetermined period for this weight, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Then, the internal function register setting process is executed (step SB802). In the internal function register setting process, as in the 35th embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt period. (Specifically, 4 ms), and the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process that is periodically interrupted and activated with respect to the main process, is set from the first interrupt period. Is set to the second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) which is a short cycle.

That is, in the present embodiment, similar to the 35th embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are performed so that the interrupt cycle becomes relatively short as the timer interrupt processing. And exist. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are activated by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) does not start by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). Further, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are not executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is started first regardless of the lapsed order of the above. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is a process that is activated prior to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be activated prior to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is set. It is set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, the setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

Then, "1" is set to the in-start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB803). As in the 35th embodiment, the start-up processing flag is among the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated. While the power outage monitoring, the processing for updating various counters and the illegality monitoring are executed, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) should be terminated without executing the processing for advancing the game. This is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63.

The start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the processing (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the start of supplying the operating power is started in the main processing (FIG. 165), and the operating power is set. Is cleared before the residual process (step SB819 to step SB822) is started and the process at the start of the supply is finished. As in the 35th embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. As a result, a setting confirmation process (step SB810) or a set value update process (FIG. 181), which will be described later, among the processes at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) are executed. It is possible to prevent the processing for advancing the game from being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", by executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905, the operating power is reduced. Even if the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the set value update process (FIG. 181) to be described later among the processes at the start of supply (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) is being executed. The power failure is monitored, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and fraud is detected.

Particularly, even when the start-up processing in progress flag is set to "1", the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) is executed, so that the operation power supply start processing (steps SB801 to SB818) is started. , Step SB823 to Step SB826), even if a power failure occurs in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (Step SB810) or the set value update processing (FIG. 181) described later is being executed, the power failure processing is executed for it. It becomes possible. In the power failure process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for the specific control. Since the data is stored in the work area 221 of No. 2, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, if a power outage occurs during the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the set value update process (FIG. 181), the fact that a power outage has occurred during the setting related process is supplied to the next operating power. It is possible to specify at the start.

Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are performed. Interrupts are not prohibited and can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated in the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the set value update process (FIG. 181), Information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 179) for returning after the timer interrupt process that is the target of activation is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt process is activated. Information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process that is the activation target ends, the process returns to the process of the main process (FIG. 179) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is restored to various registers of the main CPU 63.

After setting the start-up processing flag to "1" in step SB803, it is determined whether the power failure flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB804). .. When the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) executes the power failure processing, the power failure flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power outage process was appropriately performed at the previous power off time.

When the power failure flag is set to "1" (step SB804: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step SB805). Specifically, first, checksums are calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. The method of calculating the checksum is the same as in the 33rd embodiment. After that, the work area 221 for the specific control and the work area 221 for the specific control, which are calculated in the power failure process executed immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for the specific control, are performed. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the main processing this time. Then, it is determined whether the checksums match.

If the checksums match (step SB805: YES), is the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 within the normal range? It is determined whether or not (step SB806). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored as in the 45th embodiment. When the numerical information of “1” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 1”. When the numerical information of “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. When the numerical information of “3” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 3”. When the numerical information of “4” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 4”. When the numerical information of “5” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 5”. When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 6”. In step SB806, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is any of "1" to "6".

When a positive determination is made in all of steps SB804 to SB806, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SB807). That is, it is determined whether or not the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the reset button 68c is being pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in the present embodiment, as in the 35th embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with the setting key insertion portion 68a and the reset button 68c, but not the update button 68b. Further, the main control device 60 is provided with not the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c but the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the eleventh embodiment.

When the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SB807: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag or the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control. (Step SB808).

The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the positive determination is made in step S8906 to steps S8907 to step. The process of S8920 is not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control are If at least one of the checksums does not match due to the change in the information storage state since the last power-off, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and illegal operation While the processing for monitoring is executed, the processing for advancing the game is not executed.

The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) is being executed, as in the 35th embodiment, and the setting update display flag is set to "1". When is set, a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a setting value being updated are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) is started and is cleared to "0" when the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) is ended. In the situation where the set value update process (FIG. 181) is not executed, basically, the state where the setting update display flag is set to "1" is not set. However, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) is being executed, and then the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In, the setting update display flag is set to "1". The state in which the setting update display flag is set to "1" is maintained until the process of clearing the setting update display flag to "0" is executed in the setting value update process (FIG. 181).

When a negative determination is made in step SB808 because "1" is not set in the game stop flag and the setting update display flag, it is determined whether the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key. (Step SB809). When the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on by using the setting key (step SB809: YES), the setting confirmation process is executed (step SB810). The processing content of the setting confirmation processing is the same as the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) in the forty-ninth embodiment. Note that in the present embodiment, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the process for confirming the setting is being executed, the setting confirmation is performed unless the “setting confirmation operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Processing is not executed.

When the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned on using the setting key (step SB809: NO), a normal recovery command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step SB811). The contents of processing executed by the voice emission control device 81 when the normal recovery command is received are the same as those in the forty-ninth embodiment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and it is determined that the setting key insertion portion 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (steps SB807 and SB812). : YES), the set value update processing is executed (step SB813). That is, in the present embodiment, even if the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the "setting change operation" is not performed at the start of supplying the operating power to the main CPU 63. As long as the setting value update process is not executed. Details of the setting value update processing will be described later.

If it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c has been pressed and it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned on using the setting key (step SB812: NO), identification It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag or the setting update display flag in the control work area 221 (step SB814).

When "1" is not set in both the game stop flag and the setting update display flag (step SB814: NO), the first RAM clearing process is executed (step SB815). In the first RAM clearing process, as in the RAM clearing process (step SA416) in the forty-fifth embodiment, an area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control ( That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for the specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode is cleared to "0". The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not being variably displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general electric power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display portion 37a is erased and the general figure display portion is deleted. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are cleared to "0". Further, the setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. In the first RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. Further, in the first RAM clearing process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to “0” and then the initial setting is executed. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step SB802 is executed. Note that the processing for clearing “0” and the processing for initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

After that, a return command at the time of clear is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step SB816). The contents of the processing executed by the voice emission control device 81 when the clear return command is received are the same as those in the forty-ninth embodiment.

When the process of step SB810 is executed, the process of step SB811 is executed, the process of step SB813 is executed, or the process of step SB816 is executed, the check area provided in the work area 221 for specific control is being checked. Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the counter (step SB817). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the 35th embodiment. When the value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as in the 35th embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) is completed in the main CPU 63. The initial check period is started later and before the residual process (steps SB819 to SB822) is started. With this, it is not necessary to control the initial check period in the situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed, so that the processing load in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed is reduced. It becomes possible.

Further, while the setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the setting value update process (FIG. 181) are executed as the process (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the start of supplying the operating power, The initial check period starts after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. Thereby, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the set values are displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible not to affect.

Then, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB818). When the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag “0”, a negative determination is made in step S8906, and thus not only the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 The processing of steps S8907 to S8920 will be executed, and the state where the processing for advancing the game is not executed is released. In step SB818, the power failure flag in the specific control work area 221 is also cleared to "0".

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps SB819 to SB822. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between the one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Residual time will occur. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps SB819 to SB822 is repeatedly executed by utilizing this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing of steps SB819 to SB822 is non-periodic processing that is performed non-periodically. In steps SB819 to SB822, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

In the main process (FIG. 179), when a negative determination is made in any of steps SB804 to SB806, that is, when the power failure flag is not set to "1", the checksums do not match, or the set value is abnormal. If it is, the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB823). As described above, by setting the game stop flag to "1", the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the positive determination is made in step S8906. The processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. As a result, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for the specific control and the stack area 222 for the specific control are If at least one of the checksums does not match due to the change in the information storage state since the last power-off, or if the set value is abnormal, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and illegal operation While the processing for monitoring is executed, the processing for advancing the game is not executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SB824). If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SB824: NO), an abnormal command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power failure flag, the checksum, or the set value at the start of supplying the operating power is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. (Step SB825). Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, and the speaker unit 54 "Please change the setting." Is output. Further, the character image "Please change the setting" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification is given when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is restarted until the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) is executed. It will be restarted.

After that, the external output process at the time of abnormality is executed (step SB826). In the external output process at the time of abnormality, a process for externally outputting an abnormality signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormal signal is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a situation where an event that triggers the execution of the process of step SB826 occurs, the signal output of the abnormal signal continues, and an event that triggers the execution of the process of step SB826 occurs. The configuration may be such that the output of the abnormal signal is stopped when the situation is not met. Further, the abnormal signal may be output not only in step SB826 but also by other processing. For example, in the fraud detection process (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), when the fraud of the monitored object (detection of fraudulent radio wave or detection of fraudulent magnetism) occurs, the abnormal signal is output. It is output externally. However, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the abnormal signal is also used as described above, and the abnormal signal dedicated to step SB826 may be externally output.

If the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SB824: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned on using the setting key (step SB812). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on using the setting key (steps SB812 and SB824: YES), the set value updating process is executed (step SB813). That is, when the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63 in the situation where the “setting change operation” is being performed, an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, and the result is NO in any of steps SB804 to SB806. Even if the determination is made, the set value updating process (FIG. 181) is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to give priority to the change of the set value.

On the other hand, when the reset button 68c is pressed but the setting key insertion part 68a is not turned on (step SB824: YES, step SB812: NO), the game stop flag or the setting update in the specific control work area 221. It is determined whether the display flag is set to "1" (step SB814). In the process of step SB814 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step SB823, since the game stop flag is set to "1" as a matter of course, a positive determination is made in step SB814. In this case, an abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 in step SB825, and an abnormal signal is externally output in step SB826. After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps SB819 to SB822 without executing the processes of step SB817 and step SB818.

That is, when an abnormality related to the power failure flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB804 to SB806, the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed in the state where the "RAM clear operation" is performed. The first RAM clearing process (step SB815) is not executed even if the power supply is started. The first RAM clearing process is also performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the situation where the game stop flag is set to "1" and the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. (Step SB815) is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is being performed, the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1" can be prevented from being resolved. It will be possible. On the other hand, when the "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1" and the details are As will be described later, the game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the initial setting at the start of the set value updating process (FIG. 181). As a result, it becomes necessary to execute the set value update processing (FIG. 181) in order to cancel the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1". Therefore, when the information abnormality of the work area 221 for specific control occurs, not only the process for initializing the work area 221 for specific control, but also the resetting of the set value can be required. ..

Here, when it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c is not pressed, "1" is set in the game stop flag or the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control in step SB808. When it is determined that the abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 in step SB825, the abnormal signal is externally output in step SB826. After executing these processes, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps SB819 to SB822 without executing the processes of steps SB817 and SB818. Further, when it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c has been pressed and it is determined in step SB812 that the setting key insertion part 68a has not been turned on (that is, when the "RAM clear operation" is performed). ), even if "1" is set to the game stop flag or the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control, an affirmative decision is made in step SB814, and a voice emission is carried out in step SB825. An abnormal command is transmitted to the control device 81, and an abnormal signal is externally output in step SB826. After executing these processes, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps SB819 to SB822 without executing the processes of steps SB817 and SB818.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 180, a description will be given of the state of the subsequent processing when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) is being executed. .. FIG. 180(a) shows a period in which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an ON state, and FIG. 180(b) shows the processing (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the start of supply of operating power. 180C shows a period during which the process is executed, and FIG. 180C shows a period during which the process after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) is completed, FIG. 180(d) shows the period during which the set value update processing (FIG. 181) is being executed, and FIG. 180(e) shows that the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to “1”. 180(f) shows a period in which the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", and FIG. 180(g) shows an abnormal signal output to the outside. Indicates the period.

At timing t1, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 180(a). In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process (steps SB801 to SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, and FIG. As shown in (), "1" is set to the in-start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control.

Then, at the timing of t2, the set value updating process (FIG. 181) is started as shown in FIG. 180(d). In this case, at the timing of t2, "1" is set to the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 as shown in FIG. 180(e).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180(d), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off at the timing of t3 which is a state in which the setting value update processing (FIG. 181) is being executed, and thus the main CPU 63 is instructed. The supply of operating power of is stopped. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) is completed, and the set value update process (step SB(d) is performed as shown in FIG. 180(d)). 181) ends.

After that, at the timing of t4, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed again as shown in FIG. 180(a). In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed while the “RAM clear operation” is performed. At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process (steps SB801 to SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the start of supplying the operating power. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 180(e) and 180(f), both the setting update display flag and the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control continue to be set to “1” before the supply of the operating power is stopped last time. Is set.

This time, since the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the situation where the "RAM clear operation" is performed in the situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1", the first RAM clear process (step SB815). 180) is not executed, the external output of the abnormal signal is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) from timing t5 to timing t7 as shown in FIG. 180(g). Further, the abnormality notification based on the transmission of the abnormality command is started at the timing of t5.

As shown in FIG. 180(b), the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) started at the timing of t4 ends at the timing of t6. Then, at the timing of t6, the process after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) is finished is started.

In this case, since the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 180(f), it is assumed that the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started. Also, the processing for monitoring the power failure, updating various counters, and monitoring for fraud is executed, but the processing for advancing the game is not executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180(a), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off at the timing of t8 to stop the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63. In addition, at the timing of t8, the processing after the supply ends as shown in FIG. 180(c).

After that, at the timing of t9, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed again as shown in FIG. 180(a). In this case, the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed. At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process (steps SB801 to SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the start of supply of operating power. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 180(e) and 180(f), both the setting update display flag and the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control continue to be set to “1” before the supply of the operating power is stopped last time. Is set.

After that, the set value updating process (FIG. 181) is executed as shown in FIG. 180(d) from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11. In this case, the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) ends normally. The setting update display flag is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 180(e) at the timing t11 which is the end timing. Further, at the timing of t11, the process at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) is ended as shown in FIG. 180(b). As a result, at the timing of t11, the start-up processing flag is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 180(f). Then, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 180(c), the processing after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) is started is started. In this case, since the start-up processing flag has already been cleared to “0”, processing for performing power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraud monitoring when the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is activated. Not only that, processing for advancing the game is executed.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) is executed as described above, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted. Unless the "setting change operation" is performed, in the process (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 and the abnormal signal is externally output. Even if the "RAM clear operation" is performed, the first RAM clear processing (step SB815) is not performed, and the setting confirmation processing ( Step SB810) is never executed. Furthermore, when the abnormal command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 and the abnormal signal is externally output, the process of clearing the startup flag in the work area 221 for specific control to "0" (step) Since the residual processing (step SB819 to step SB822) is executed without executing SB818), power failure monitoring, updating of various counters and unauthorized monitoring are performed even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is activated. While the processing for is executed, the processing for advancing the game is not executed. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the main CPU 63 is not changed in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed. It is necessary to restart the supply of operating power and execute the set value updating process (FIG. 181). Therefore, it becomes possible to surely change the set value.

Next, the set value update processing in this embodiment executed in step SB813 of the main processing (FIG. 179) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The processing of steps SB901 to SB918 in the setting value update processing is executed using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" (step SB901). The OFF confirmation flag 361 is provided in the work area 221 for specific control as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. Even in the present embodiment, in the setting value updating process (FIG. 18 1 ), the value of the setting updating area 342 of the work area 221 for specific control, that is, the setting value to be updated is 1 each time the reset button 68c is pressed. Is added. In this case, when the reset button 68c is changed from the non-operated state to the operated state in order to add only “1” to the set value to be updated for one pressing operation of the reset button 68c, that is, When the detection signal from the detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 68c is switched from the operation non-detection state to the operation detection state, the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 to set the update target setting value. Is configured to be incremented by 1.

In the configuration, the OFF confirmation flag 361 indicates whether or not it is the timing when the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is started in the case of confirming whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed in the set value updating process (FIG. 181). This is a flag for confirmation. When it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed after performing the determination processing (step SB910) of whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed in the set value update processing (FIG. 181), “1 "Is set or the set state of "1" is maintained, and when it is determined that the reset button 68c is not pressed, "0" is cleared or the state of "0" is maintained.

Here, the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed on condition that it is determined in step SB807 or step SB824 of the main process (FIG. 179) that the reset button 68c is pressed, as described above. In step SB807 or step SB824, the main CPU 63 directly monitors the input port to which the detection signal from the detection sensor that detects the presence/absence of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is input to determine whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. Determine whether. In this case, instead of confirming the start timing and the end timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, it is confirmed whether or not the reset button 68c is being pressed. Therefore, in step SB807 or step SB824, a positive determination is made when the signal corresponding to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is input to the input port without confirming the OFF confirmation flag 361.

However, in the configuration, the end timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 for turning on the set value update processing (FIG. 181) and the start timing of the set value update processing (FIG. 181) are set. Depending on the relationship, there may be a case where the pressing operation triggers an addition of one set value to be updated, and a case where the pressing operation does not occur. Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the update mode of the set value to be updated changes depending on the end timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, which deteriorates the operability. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the set value to be updated is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed while the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to “0”, the set value update process When (FIG. 181) is started, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to “1” in step SB901 which is executed prior to the process of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the set value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

After the processing of step SB901 is executed, interrupt permission is set (step SB902). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt period. In the present embodiment, similar to the forty-ninth embodiment, in the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, step SB823 to step SB826), the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the first timer interrupt processing are basically performed. The interrupt of the 2-timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is prohibited, and the interrupt is permitted in the setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the set value update process (FIG. 181). Therefore, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the set value update process (FIG. 181) are not executed in the process (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the start of supplying the operating power, Execution of the 1st timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the 2nd timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is prohibited, and the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed first. Execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, since the startup flag is set to “1”, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. Even if 133) is activated, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the processes for performing power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraudulent monitoring are executed, while progressing the game. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is terminated without executing the process.

Thereafter, the setting update display flag is set to "1" on condition that the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1" (step SB903). When the setting update display flag is set to "1", a positive determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step S9004) is executed. The processing content of the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is the same as that in the 45th embodiment. By executing the process, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 124(a), for example, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and selection as an update target of the pachinko machine 10 are made. The displayed set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, initial setting at the start is performed (step SB904). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". As for the game stop flag, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power shutdown (step SB804: NO), the work area 221 for specific control and If the checksums do not match due to a change in the information storage state of at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control since the last power-off (step SB805: NO), or the setting reference area 341 This is a flag that is set to "1" in step SB823 of the main process (FIG. 179) when the set value corresponding to the information stored in is not in the normal range (step SB806: NO). When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), while the positive determination is made in step S8906 to steps S8907 to step. The process of S8920 is not executed. As a result, when the information abnormality of the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, the processing for performing the power failure monitoring, the updating of various counters and the illegality monitoring is executed, while the processing for advancing the game is executed. Will not be done. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step SB904, the state where the occurrence of the information abnormality of the main side RAM 65 is specified is canceled when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is executed. Is possible.

Then, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 (step SB905). The setting update area 342 is a storage area for storing information on the setting value being updated in the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) as in the 45th embodiment. When the numerical information of “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the set value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When the numerical information of “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 2”. When the numerical information of “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 3”. When the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 4". When the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 6”.

By setting "1" in the setting update area 342 in step SB905, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1". That is, in the present embodiment, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1” when the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) is started, whichever setting value the pachinko machine 10 currently has.

After that, the update start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step SB906). Upon receiving the update start command, the sound emission control device 81 displays an image showing that the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the set value. , And the display control device 82 so that an image for recognizing the operation content for terminating the set value updating process (FIG. 181) is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation content and the setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (FIG. 181). It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the operation content necessary for ending the game. In addition to or instead of the above-mentioned notification being performed by the symbol display device 41, at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 may be configured. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which an external output indicating that the set value updating process (FIG. 181) is being executed is performed to a device outside the pachinko machine 10 such as a game hall management computer.

Then, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is any one of "1" to "6" (step SB907). If it is not any of "1" to "6" (step SB907: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB908). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SB907 or the processing of step SB908 is executed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB909). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. To do.

When a negative determination is made in step SB909, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SB910). Specifically, whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed is determined by directly monitoring the input port to which the detection signal from the detection sensor that detects whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. When the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step SB910: NO), the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB911), and the process returns to step SB907.

When the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB910: YES), it is determined whether the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the specific control work area 221 is "0" (step SB912). When the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" (step SB912: NO), the current confirmation timing is not the start timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, but the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is continued. Since it means that the situation is present, the process returns to step SB907 without adding 1 to the setting value to be updated.

When the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is “0” (step SB912: YES), this means that the confirmation timing this time is the start timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c. In this case, after the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" (step SB913), the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SB914). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated by one step. In addition, when the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB910: NO), the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" (step SB912: NO), or the value of the setting update area 342 is set to 1 If it is added (step SB914), the process returns to step SB907, but if it is determined in step SB907 that the value of the setting update area 342 is 7 or more, the setting update area is determined in step SB908. “1” is set in 342. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", the process returns to "setting 1".

When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB909: YES), the setting reference area 341 is overwritten with the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 ( Step SB915). As a result, the setting value information obtained as a result of the update in the setting value update processing this time (FIG. 181) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the current state. It becomes the set value of the pachinko machine 10.

After that, the interruption is prohibited (step SB916). As a result, in the case of ending the set value update process (FIG. 181) and returning to the process (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power in the main process (FIG. 179), The interrupts of the 1-timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second-timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

After that, the second RAM clearing process is executed (step SB917). In the second RAM clearing process, as in the RAM clearing process (step SA416) in the forty-fifth embodiment, an area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control ( That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the work area 221 for the specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. As a result, the area indicating whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode is cleared to "0". The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game times are not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not being variably displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, since the hold storage area 65a and the general electric power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display portion 37a is erased and the general figure display portion is deleted. The hold information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are cleared to "0". Further, the setting update area 342 provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0”. Further, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". In the second RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed. In the second RAM clearing process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to "0" and then the initial setting is executed. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step SB802 is executed. Note that the processing for clearing “0” and the processing for initial setting are not executed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

After that, a return command for updating is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step SB918). The contents of processing executed by the voice emission control device 81 when the return command at the time of updating is received are the same as those in the forty-ninth embodiment.

Next, how the set value to be updated is updated will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 183. FIG. 183(a) shows a period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an ON state, FIG. 183(b) shows an operation state of the setting key insertion part 68a, and FIG. 183(c) shows an operation of the reset button 68c. 183(d) shows the period during which the set value update processing (FIG. 181) is being executed, FIG. 183(e) shows the setting status of the OFF confirmation flag 361, and FIG. 183(f) shows the setting status. Indicates the value update timing.

First, a comparative example in which the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not set to "1" when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started will be described.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 183(b), the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key, and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 183(c). Then, as shown in FIG. 183(a), the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the timing t2 when the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c are continued. In this case, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is being performed in the situation where the “setting change operation” is performed, and therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 183(d), the set value update processing ( 181) is started.

In the comparative example, since the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not set to “1” when the set value updating process (FIG. 181) is started, the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 183(e). Is "0". After that, the reset button 68c is pressed with the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 being "0" at the timing of t4 when the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is continued during the power-on operation. By specifying this, the setting value to be updated is incremented by 1, as shown in FIG. 183(f). At the timing of t4, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 183(e).

That is, in the above comparative example, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c at the time of turning on the power is continued even after the start of the set value updating process (FIG. 181), so that the set value to be updated is 1 when the pressing operation is triggered. Will be added. In this case, although the game hall manager does not intend to update the update target setting value, the update target setting value will be updated.

Next, a description will be given of the present embodiment in which the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to “1” when the set value updating process (FIG. 181) is started.

At the timing of t5, the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on by using the setting key as shown in FIG. 183(b), and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 183(c). Then, as shown in FIG. 183(a), the power-on operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the timing of t6 when the ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c are continued. In this case, since the power of the pachinko machine 10 is being turned on while the "setting change operation" is being performed, the set value updating process (see FIG. 183(d)) is performed at the timing of t7. 181) is started. When the set value updating process (FIG. 181) is started, a process of setting “1” to the OFF confirmation flag 361 is executed in step SB901. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 183(e). Since the timing of setting "1" to the OFF confirmation flag 361 is the timing before the timing of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed in the set value update processing (FIG. 181), the timing shown in FIG. As shown in (), even if the pressing operation of the reset button 68c during the ON operation of the power source is continued, 1 is not added to the set value to be updated. After that, at the timing of t8, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is finished as shown in FIG. 183(c), so that the OFF confirmation flag 361 is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. 183(e).

After that, as shown in FIG. 183(c), the reset button 68c is pressed at each of the timing t9 to the timing t10, the timing t11 to the timing t12, and the timing t13 to the timing t14. In this case, the reset button 68c is pressed in a situation where the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is "0" at each of the timings t9, t11, and t13. As shown, the set value to be updated is incremented by 1 at each of these timings.

After that, the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned off at the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 183(b), which causes the setting value updating process (see FIG. 181) at the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 183(d). ) Ends.

As described above, in the configuration in which the set value to be updated is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed in the situation where the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to “0”, the set value update process (FIG. When 181) is started, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" in step SB901 which is executed prior to the process of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the set value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

When the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the set value is changed from the set value corresponding to a predetermined start. As a result, regardless of the set value to be used before the set value update process (FIG. 181) is started, in the set value update process (FIG. 181), the operation of changing the set value from the set value corresponding to a certain start is performed. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it becomes easy for the operator to understand the work content of the setting value changing operation.

Specifically, the setting value corresponding to the start is “setting 1” having the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the setting value is changed from “setting 1” having the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the manager of the game hall unintentionally terminates the set value update processing (FIG. 181) immediately after the start of the set value update processing (FIG. 181), the setting value with the lowest advantage is set. Therefore, even if the game is started in such a situation, it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage from occurring in the game hall.

The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342, and information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value update processing is performed. Information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the situation where (FIG. 181) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. As a result, while the setting reference information 341 stores and holds the information of the setting value set before the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) is started, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) indicates an object to be updated. It is possible to change the set value.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) is being executed, then when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, a game is played. The regulation state in which the process for advancing is started is not started. This makes it possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being started even though the set value update process (FIG. 181) has not been completed.

Even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the situation where the set value updating process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed after that. When the "setting change operation" is performed on the above, the above-mentioned restricted state is not obtained. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the execution of the process for advancing the game from being restricted until the setting value is changed.

Even in the above-mentioned regulated state, power failure monitoring and various counter update processing are executed. As a result, it becomes possible to ensure the execution of the necessary processing even when the progress of the game is restricted as described above. In particular, by executing the power outage monitoring, it is possible to appropriately deal with the power outage even if the progress of the game is restricted.

The regulation state is resumed when the supply of the operating power is resumed even if the supply of the operating power is stopped. As a result, when the set value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped to restrict the execution of the process for advancing the game. It is possible not to be released only by stopping the supply of.

In the configuration in which the set value to be updated is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed while the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "0" When the value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to “1” in step SB901 which is executed before the process of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. This is the configuration. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the set value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

It should be noted that if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the middle of the set value updating process (FIG. 181) and then the process for confirming the setting is performed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted ( When step SB810) is executed, the setting update display flag may be cleared to "0" and the execution of the process for advancing the game may not be restricted. By executing the setting confirmation process (step SB810), the setting value of the current usage target is notified, so that the manager of the game hall can grasp the setting value of the usage target. In such a case, even if the execution of the process for advancing the game is not restricted, the game will not be advanced with the set value that is not assumed by the manager of the game hall.

Further, if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the set value updating process (FIG. 181), whether or not the “setting change operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. Alternatively, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) may be forcibly executed regardless of the above. This makes it possible to forcibly change the set value.

Further, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the middle of the setting confirmation process (step SB810), the execution of the process for advancing the game is restricted when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the regulation state is set. In this case, when the setting confirmation process (step SB810) is executed when the supply of the operating power is resumed, the regulation state may not be set. In addition to or instead of the configuration, when the supply of the operating power is resumed. When the set value updating process (FIG. 181) is executed, the regulation state may not be set.

Further, if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in the middle of the setting confirmation process (step SB810), whether or not the “setting confirming operation” is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. The configuration confirmation process (step SB810) may be forcibly executed regardless of the above. This makes it possible to forcibly confirm the set value.

Further, in the set value update process (FIG. 181), it is specified that the reset button 68c has not been pressed in the preceding process times in two consecutive process times, and the reset button 68c is changed in the subsequent process times. Although the setting value of the selection target is changed when it is specified that the pressing operation is performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reset button 68c may be pressed at each of a plurality of past consecutive processing times. Is determined not to be pressed, and the setting value of the selection target is changed when it is specified that the reset button 68c is pressed in one situation or a plurality of consecutive treatments in that situation. It may be configured to be. Even in this case, when the set value updating process (FIG. 181) is started, the reset button 68c is operated by pressing the information regarding the confirmation history of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c in a plurality of past consecutive processing times. By rewriting the information corresponding to the fact that the setting value is updated, the setting value to be selected is changed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) by pressing the reset button 68c for starting the setting value updating process (FIG. 181). It becomes possible not to.

<Fifty-fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that in the 53rd embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 53rd embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the 53rd embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps SC101 to SC128 in the main process are executed by using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

In Step SC101 to Step SC106, the same processing as Step SB801 to Step SB806 of the main processing (FIG. 179) in the 53rd embodiment is executed. When a positive determination is made in all of steps SC104 to SC106, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SC107). If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SC107: NO), it is determined whether the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SC108). ). When the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting update display flag is not set to "1" (step SC107 and step SC108: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". It is determined whether or not is set (step SC109). When the game stop flag is set to "1", an abnormal command is transmitted in step SC127, and external output processing at the time of abnormality is executed in step SC128.

When "1" is not set in the game stop flag (step SC109: NO), the process proceeds to step SC110. In Step SC110 to Step SC112, the same processing as Step SB809 to Step SB811 of the main processing (FIG. 179) in the 53rd embodiment is executed.

If it is determined in step SC107 that the reset button 68c is pressed, or if it is determined in step SC108 that the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting key insertion portion 68a is determined in step SC113. It is determined whether or not is ON-operated by using the setting key. Then, when it is determined that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on (step SC113: YES), after setting the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control to "1" (step SC114), the setting is performed. A value update process is executed (step SC115). In step SC116 to step SC128, the same processing as step SB114 to step SB826 of the main processing (FIG. 179) in the 53rd embodiment is executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the execution of the setting value update process (step SC115), the situation of “no operation” or the “RAM clear operation” is performed. When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted in the situation, the situation in which the process for advancing the game is blocked is continued as in the 53rd embodiment, while the "setting change operation" is continued. Not only when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted in the situation where the operation is performed, but also when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted in the situation where the “setting confirmation operation” is performed. The set value updating process (step SC115) is executed. As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the execution of the set value updating process (step SC115), the set value updating process ( It becomes easy to execute step SC115).

In particular, in the "setting change operation", it is necessary to turn on the setting key insertion portion 68a using the setting key and to press the reset button 68c, and to use the setting key in the "setting confirmation operation". In the configuration in which the key insertion portion 68a needs to be turned on, if the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on even if the reset button 68c is not pressed. By doing so, the set value updating process (step SC115) is executed. As a result, although the setting value update processing (step SC115) is started by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 in the state of performing the "setting change operation", for example, the power is turned off by mistake during the process. In this case, in order to quickly return to the ON state of the power supply after that, the setting key insertion portion 68a is maintained in the ON operation state, and the reset button 68c is not pressed even if the setting operation is performed. The value update process (step SC115) can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step SC112 that the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on, the work for specific control is performed in step SC114 before the setting value update process (step SC115) is started. The OFF confirmation flag 361 in the area 221 is set to "1". As a result, even if the processing for setting "1" to the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not performed when the setting value update processing (step SC115) is started, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c at the time of the power-on operation is triggered. It is possible to prevent the set value to be updated from being incremented by 1. By the way, in the set value updating process (step SC115) of the present embodiment, the process of step SB901 in the set value updating process (FIG. 181) of the 53rd embodiment described above is not executed and the process of steps SB902 to SB918 is executed. To be executed.

In the set value update process (step SC115), it is specified that the reset button 68c has not been pressed in the preceding process times in two consecutive process times, and the reset button 68c is pressed in the subsequent process times. Although the setting value of the selection target is changed when it is specified that the pressing operation is performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reset button 68c may be pressed at each of a plurality of past consecutive processing times. Is determined not to be pressed, and the setting value of the selection target is changed when it is specified that the reset button 68c is pressed in one situation or a plurality of consecutive treatments in that situation. It may be configured to be. Even in this case, when the set value updating process (step SC115) is started, the reset button 68c is pressed and operated on the information regarding the confirmation history of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c in a plurality of past consecutive processing times. By rewriting the information corresponding to the fact that the setting value is updated, the setting value to be selected is changed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) by pressing the reset button 68c for starting the setting value updating process (FIG. 181). It becomes possible not to.

<55th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that in the 49th embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 49th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the 49th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the main CPU 63 in this embodiment. The processes of steps SC201 to SC230 in the main process are executed by using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on initialization processing is executed (step SC201). In the power-on initialization process, for example, the main process is started, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) elapses without waiting for the next process. In the predetermined period for this weight, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Then, the internal function register setting process is executed (step SC202). In the internal function register setting process, as in the 35th embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is activated by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt period. (Specifically, 4 ms), and the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188), which is a process that is periodically interrupted and activated with respect to the main process, is set from the first interrupt period. Is set to the second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) which is a short cycle.

That is, in the present embodiment, as in the 35th embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) are performed so that the interrupt cycle becomes relatively long and short as the timer interrupt processing. And exist. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are activated by interrupting the main process. The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) does not start by interrupting the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188). Further, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have passed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) are not executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is started first regardless of the lapsed order of. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is a process activated prior to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be activated prior to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188).

In the internal function register setting processing, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) is set. It is set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to the setting of the first and second interrupt cycles, the setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the hit random number counter C1 is executed.

Then, "1" is set to the in-start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SC203). As in the 35th embodiment, the start-up processing flag is among the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated. While the power outage monitoring, the processing for updating various counters and the illegality monitoring are executed, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) should be terminated without executing the processing for advancing the game. This is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63.

The start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the processing (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power is started in the main processing (FIG. 185), and the processing at the start of supplying the operating power. "0" is cleared before (steps SC201 to SC223) are ended and residual processing (steps SC227 to SC230) is started. As in the 35th embodiment, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. Thus, the process for advancing the game in a situation where the process for confirming the setting (step SC213) or the process for updating the setting value (step SC216) is being performed among the processes at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SC201 to SC223). Can be prevented from being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", by executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905, the operating power is reduced. In the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (step SC216) among the processes at the start of supply (step SC201 to step SC223) is being executed, the power failure monitoring is executed, The hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is executed.

Particularly, even when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the power failure information storage processing (step S8901) is executed, so that the processing at the start of supplying the operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is started. Even if a power failure occurs in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (step SC216) is executed, the power failure process can be executed for the power failure. In the power failure process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the power failure flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for the specific control. Since the data is stored in the work area 221 of No. 2, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, when a power failure occurs during the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (step SC216), the fact that the power failure has occurred during these setting-related processes is supplied to the next operating power. It is possible to specify at the start.

Incidentally, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are performed. Interrupts are not prohibited and can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is activated in the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (step SC216), Information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 185) for returning after the completion of the timer interrupt process that is the activation target is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt process is activated. Information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process that is the activation target ends, the process returns to the process of the main process (FIG. 185) corresponding to the information of the return address saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is restored to various registers of the main CPU 63.

Then, the display start flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SC204). The display start flag specifies in the main CPU 63 that the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a should be started after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. It is a flag for.

Then, in steps SC205 to SC225, the same processing as steps SB104 to SB124 of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment is executed. In this case, the content of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 185) is the 49th above because of the combination of the situation when the supply of the operating power of the previous time is stopped and the operation content when the supply of the operating power of this time is started. Similar to the embodiment, the processing content shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 171 is obtained. For example, when the power failure process is executed in a situation where neither the setting confirmation process (step SC213) nor the set value update process (step SC216) is executed, or the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is executed. If the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed after the power failure process is executed in the above condition, the first RAM clear process (step 185) is performed in the main process (FIG. 185). SC218) is executed. Further, when the power outage process is executed in the situation where the set value update process (step SC216) is being executed, the set value update process ( In step SC216), the second RAM clearing process (step SB313 in FIG. 167 in the forty-ninth embodiment) is executed, and the power outage process is executed in the situation where the set value updating process (step SC216) is not executed. Even in such a case, if the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of the operating power is subsequently restarted, the second RAM clearing process (see FIG. 49 in the 49th embodiment in the setting value updating process (step SC216)) is performed. Step SB313) is executed.

In the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process, the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is executed, while the clear target non-clear area 372 in the specific control work area 221 is executed. For 0, clear "0" and initial setting are not executed. FIG. 186 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372 provided in the work area 221 for specific control.

Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped because the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the power supply/launch control is performed. Backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 from the power supply unit for power interruption provided in the device 78 as power for storing and holding. By supplying backup power to the main RAM 65 in this manner, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are provided. Backup power is also supplied. Then, by supplying the backup power to the work area 221 for specific control, the backup power is supplied to the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372. As a result, backup power is supplied to the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372 even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped because the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF. Information is stored and held in the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372.

The clear target area 371 includes the second display data buffer 272, the fourth display data buffer 274, and the fifth display data buffer 275. The second display data buffer 272 is an area in which display data for causing the special figure suspension display portion 37b to perform a predetermined display is set, as in the 33rd embodiment. When the pending information for the special drawing display unit 37a is newly stored in the pending storage area 65a in the pending information acquisition processing (step S401) in the special drawing special power control processing (FIG. 12), the first timer interrupt processing In the second display data buffer 272, display data corresponding to the number of pieces of reservation information for the special figure display unit 37a stored in the reservation storage area 65a after the storage by the display control unit (step S8915) in FIG. 133 is stored. Is set to. Further, in the data setting process (step S502) in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), when the hold information for the special figure display portion 37a is exhausted as an opportunity to execute the game, the first timer interrupt process ( In the second display data buffer 272, the display control means (step S8915) in FIG. 133) stores, in the second display data buffer 272, display data corresponding to the number of reservation information for the special figure display unit 37a stored in the reservation storage area 65a after the digestion. Is set.

The fourth display data buffer 274 is an area for storing display data for causing the universal figure reservation display section 38b to perform a predetermined display as in the 33rd embodiment. When the hold information for the universal figure display unit 38a is newly stored in the universal figure retaining area 65c in the universal figure universal communication control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the first timer The display control means (step S8915) in the interrupt process (FIG. 133) displays the fourth display data corresponding to the number of reservation information for the universal figure display portion 38a stored in the universal communication suspension area 65c after the storage. It is set in the data buffer 274. Further, the hold information for the universal figure display unit 38a is consumed in the universal figure universal communication control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) as an execution trigger for the variable display times of the universal diagram display unit 38a. In this case, the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) corresponds to the number of reservation information for the universal figure display unit 38a stored in the universal communication holding area 65c after the digestion. The display data to be set is set in the fourth display data buffer 274.

The fifth display data buffer 275 is an area in which display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform a predetermined display is set, as in the 33rd embodiment. The setting of the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is executed in step SC403, step SC405 and step SC406 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) described later.

In addition to the second display data buffer 272, the fourth display data buffer 274, and the fifth display data buffer 275, the clear target area 371 includes a hold storage area 65a for storing hold information for the special figure display portion 37a and a normal storage area. It includes a general electric power reservation area 65c in which reservation information for the diagram display unit 38a is stored. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed, the pending information for the special figure display unit 37a and the pending information for the general figure display unit 38a are erased. In this case, the clear target area 371 includes the second display data buffer 272 and the fourth display data buffer 274 as described above. As a result, when the holding storage area 65a is initialized and the holding information for the special figure display unit 37a becomes 0, the display content of the special figure holding display unit 37b is also held for the special figure display unit 37a. It becomes possible to set the display content to be 0 pieces of information, and when the holding information for the figure display unit 38a becomes 0 by the initialization of the ordinary electricity holding area 65c, the figure holding is performed. The display content of the display unit 38b can also be set to the display content in which there is no reservation information for the general figure display unit 38a.

In addition, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, basically, after the processing (step SC201 to step SC223) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is finished, the base is basically the same as in the above-mentioned forty-ninth embodiment. Although the value information is displayed, if the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the current pachinko machine 10 If the set value is displayed and the set value update process (step SC216) is executed, the set value in the middle of updating is displayed, and the process at the start of supply of operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. In some cases, a check display is displayed. That is, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, when the supply of the operating power is restarted, information different from the information of the base value displayed before the supply of the operating power is stopped is displayed. Will be displayed. Therefore, even if the fifth display data buffer 275 is initialized when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed, no problem occurs in the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. ..

In addition to the above areas, the clear target area 371 includes an area for special map/special electric control and an area for general/universal electric power control. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed, the win/loss lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the win/loss lottery mode immediately before the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game times are not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general-purpose display unit 38a is not being variably displayed, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. It becomes a situation. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 are cleared to "0", and the setting update area 342 provided to the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0". To be done. Further, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to “0” and the initial setting is executed. Also, after the various registers of the main CPU 63 are cleared to "0", the initial setting is executed. In this initial setting, the same processing as the internal function register setting processing in step SC202 is executed.

The processing contents of the first RAM clearing process are the same as the processing contents of the second RAM clearing process in the set value updating process, but a part of these processing contents may be different. For example, in the first RAM clear processing, the area targeted for "0" clear and initial setting may not be the target targeted for "0" clear and initial setting in the second RAM clear processing, and may be "0" in the second RAM clear processing. The area targeted for clearing and initial setting may not be targeted for clearing and initializing “0” in the first RAM clear processing.

The non-clearing target area 372 includes the first display data buffer 271, the third display data buffer 273, and the initial display completed flag 373. The first display data buffer 271 is an area for storing display data for causing the special figure display portion 37a to perform a predetermined display, as in the 33rd embodiment. In step S513 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the process for starting the variable display of the picture is executed in the special figure display unit 37a, whereby the display control unit (FIG. 133) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. In step S8915), the display data corresponding to the display at the start of fluctuation of the special figure display unit 37a is set in the first display data buffer 271. Further, the processing for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is executed in the special figure changing process (step S407) in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12), whereby the first timer interrupt process (FIG. The display control means (step S8915) in 133) sets the display data for advancing the variable display of the picture of the special figure display portion 37a in the first display data buffer 271. Further, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) during the special figure finalizing process (step S408), the display content of the special figure display portion 37a is changed to the hit determination process (step S504) and the distribution determination process (step S504) in this game time. By executing the processing for setting the display content corresponding to the processing result of step S506), the special control display unit (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) causes the special figure display unit 37a to play this game. The display data for displaying the result corresponding to the number of times is set in the first display data buffer 271. The display data set in this case becomes the display data selected in step S507 or step S509 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13) at the start of the current game time. Further, the display data set in this case is stored and held in the first display data buffer 271 until the special figure display portion 37a becomes a situation where a new game time is started.

The third display data buffer 273 is an area for storing display data for causing the general-purpose display section 38a to perform a predetermined display, as in the 33rd embodiment. In the universal figure universal communication control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the process for starting the variable display of the pattern is executed in the universal pattern display portion 38a, whereby the first timer interrupt process ( The display control means (step S8915) in FIG. 133) sets the display data corresponding to the display at the start of the fluctuation of the universal figure display section 38a in the third display data buffer 273. Further, the processing for updating the display content of the universal figure display unit 38a is executed in the universal figure universal communication control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), whereby the first timer interrupt process ( The display control means (step S8915) in FIG. 133) sets the display data for advancing the variable display of the picture on the universal figure display section 38a in the third display data buffer 273. In addition, the display content of the universal figure display unit 38a in the universal figure universal communication control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) corresponds to the result of the universal network open lottery in the current variable display times. By executing the processing for the above, the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) causes the general figure display unit 38a to perform the display corresponding to the result of the current variable display time. Display data is set in the third display data buffer 273. The display data set in this case is stored and held in the third display data buffer 273 until a situation in which a new variable display time is started on the universal figure display section 38a is reached.

The initial display completed flag 373 is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the situation is after the initial display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a at the factory shipping stage is completed. Since the non-clearing target area 372 includes the initial display completed flag 373, once the initial display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a at the shipping stage of the factory is once confirmed, the operation power of It is possible to prevent the initial display from being performed when the supply is restarted.

Since the non-clearing target area 372 includes the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273, the supply of operating power is restarted even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed. After the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are displayed before the supply of the operating power is stopped. It is possible to return to. Thereby, even if the player confirms the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a after the supply of the operating power is restarted, it is determined whether the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed. Can't do it.

In particular, the second RAM clearing process is executed by the setting value updating process (step SC216) that enables changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the second RAM clearing process is executed, the special figure display unit is displayed. If the display content of at least one of 37a and the universal figure display section 38a becomes the display content corresponding to the execution of the second RAM clearing process or is changed from the display content before the supply of the operating power is stopped, the display content By checking the special figure display section 37a or the general figure display section 38a, the presence or absence of a change in the set value of the pachinko machine 10 can be predicted. On the other hand, even if the second RAM clearing process is executed, the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a are displayed after the supply of the operating power is started and these special figure display section 37a are started. Also, the display content of the public figure display unit 38a is restored to the display content before the supply of the operating power is stopped. As a result, even if the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are checked, it is possible to prevent the setting value update processing (step SC216) from being specified.

In addition to the above-mentioned areas, the non-clearing target area 372 includes an area (that is, a setting reference area 341) in which information of setting values indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Thereby, even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed, the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as it is. The non-clearing target area 372 also includes a work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control.

By the way, since backup power is not supplied to the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off to supply operating power to the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82. When stopped, the information stored in the RAMs of the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 is erased. However, when the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the supply of the operation power is started, the main CPU 63 stops the supply of the operation power to the sound emission control device 81 to the effect execution state. By transmitting the command for returning to the state immediately before, the content of the effect execution control in the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 is returned to the state immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. It will be.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 185), after the process of step SC225 is executed, the display start process is executed (step SC226). After that, the residual processing is executed in steps SC227 to SC230. The processing contents of these steps SC227 to SC230 are the same as those of steps SB125 to SB128 of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

Next, the display start processing executed in step SC226 of the main processing (FIG. 185) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 187. Note that the processing of step SC301 to step SC305 in the display start processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

When "1" is not set in the initial display completed flag 373 (step SC301: NO), the initial display data for special drawing is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC302), and the initial for general drawing is set. The display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC303). Then, "1" is set to the initially displayed flag 373 (step SC304).

By performing display control of the special figure display unit 37a using the initial display data for special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271, the initial display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. The display content of the initial display on the special figure display part 37a is arbitrary, but for example, all of the plurality of light emitting parts provided in the special figure display part 37a may be in a light emitting state, and the display may be provided on the special figure display part 37a. A configuration may be adopted in which a part of the plurality of light emitting units thus formed are in a light emitting state. When some of the light emitting units are in the light emitting state, the light emitting units that are in the light emitting state and the light emitting units that are maintained in the off state may be alternately arranged in the arrangement order. In addition, the display of the general figure display unit 38a is controlled by using the initial display data for general figure stored in the third display data buffer 273, so that the general figure display unit 38a performs the initial display. The display content of the initial display on the public figure display unit 38a is arbitrary, but, for example, all of the plurality of light emitting units provided on the public figure display unit 38a may be in a light emitting state, and the general figure display unit 38a may be provided. A configuration may be adopted in which a part of the plurality of light emitting units thus formed are in a light emitting state. When some of the light emitting units are in the light emitting state, the light emitting units that are in the light emitting state and the light emitting units that are maintained in the off state may be alternately arranged in the arrangement order.

On the other hand, when "1" is set to the initial display completed flag 373 (step SC301: YES), the processes of step SC302 and step SC303 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as it is. Further, as described above, the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are provided in the non-clearing target area 372, so that the main processing (FIG. 185) does not include the first RAM clearing processing and the second RAM clearing processing. Even if either is executed, the display data stored immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored in the first display data buffer 271 as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is operated by the operating power. The display data stored immediately before the supply of C is stopped is stored as it is.

If an affirmative decision is made in step SC301, or if the processing of step SC304 is executed, "1" is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC305). .. The display start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. Is. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

As described above, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). The processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth sections. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, as described above, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 187) executed after the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the processing at the start (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

Next, the second timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 188. The processes of steps SC401 to SC415 in the second timer interrupt process are executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63. In the second timer interrupt process, the interrupt is permitted when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is started, and the interrupt is prohibited when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is ended. In the second timer interrupt process, the interrupt is permitted when the set value update process (step SC216) is started, and the interrupt is prohibited when the set value update process (step SC216) is finished. In addition, the second interrupt process is interrupted from when the interrupt permission is set in step SC230 of the main process (FIG. 185) to when the interrupt prohibition is set in step SC227 of the main process (FIG. 185). Allowed The same applies to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133).

In steps SC401 to SC409, the same processing as steps S8401 to S8409 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment is executed. Then, it is determined whether the value of the type counter is "5" (step SC410). Similar to the 33rd embodiment, the type counter identifies the transmission target of the display data among the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the main CPU 63 in the current processing time of the second timer interrupt processing. It is a counter for doing. When the value of the type counter is "1", the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is the transmission target. When the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data of the third display data buffer 273 is the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 is When it becomes a transmission target and the value of the type counter is “5”, the display data of the fifth display data buffer 275 becomes a transmission target.

When the value of the type counter is any of "1" to "4", that is, any one of the special figure display portion 37a, the special figure reservation display portion 37b, the general figure display portion 38a, and the general figure reservation display portion 38b is displayed. If it is in the control situation (step SC410: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the display start flag of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC411). When the value of the type counter is "5" (step SC410: YES), or when the value of the type counter is any of "1" to "4" and the display start flag is set to "1" (Step SC410: NO, step SC411: YES), the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 is executed.

In the processing of steps SC412 to SC414, first, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step SC412). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the second type data is read. The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the type counter value is “3”, the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64 and the type counter value is When it is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 64, and when the type counter value is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is mainly read. Read from the side ROM 64.

Then, the display data is read from the display data buffers 271-275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step SC413). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is “1”, the display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is “2”, the second display data buffer 272 is read. When the display data is read and the value of the type counter is “3”, the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273, and when the value of the type counter is “4”, the fourth display data buffer 274 is read. The display data is read out, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the display data is read out from the fifth display data buffer 275.

After that, the transmission processing of various signals is executed (step SC414). In the transmission processing, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step SC412 is transmitted to the display IC 266. In the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step SC413 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

On the other hand, when the value of the type counter is any of "1" to "4" and the display start flag is not set to "1" (step SC410 and step SC411: NO), the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 Do not run. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display portion 37a, the special figure reservation display portion 37b, and the general figure display portion 38a are set until the display start flag is set to "1". The display control of the special figure reservation display section 38b is not started, and the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the general figure display section 38a, and the general figure reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state.

If a negative determination is made in step SC411, or if the process of step SC414 is executed, interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process (step SC415).

Next, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the time of starting the supply of the operating power will be described. FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

Since "1" is not yet set in the initial display completed flag 373 at the factory shipping stage, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a are displayed. When it is started, initial display is started on the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a. The initial display on the special figure display portion 37a is a pattern on the special figure display portion 37a when a game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 and the start condition of the game is satisfied. It continues until the variable display of is started. The initial display on the universal figure display portion 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display portion 38a is started.

If it is not at the factory shipping stage, that is, if the initial display completion flag 373 has already been set to "1", the first RAM clearing process is performed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power. The supply of operating power is stopped regardless of whether it is executed, the setting value update process is executed, the setting confirmation process is executed, or these processes are not executed. The special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a are display-controlled so that the display contents immediately before are displayed. As a result, even if the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are checked, it is possible to prevent the setting value update processing (step SC216) from being specified.

Particularly, the display contents when the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are started, and the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped are displayed. Are the same. Thus, after confirming and memorizing the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure are displayed after the start of the supply of the operating power. Even if the display content initially displayed on the display unit 38a is confirmed, it is possible to prevent the setting value update processing (step SC216) from being specified.

Further, by setting the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the non-clear target area 372 that is not the target of the execution of the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing in the work area 221 for specific control, The display content when the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is the same as the display content of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. This is the configuration. In other words, even if the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are checked, no special process is required to make it impossible to specify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) has been executed. .. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described while suppressing an increase in processing load.

The area not to be cleared 372 is not limited to the configuration in which both the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are provided, and the first display data buffer 271 is not to be cleared. Although provided, the third display data buffer 273 may be provided in the clear target area 371. In this case, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the special figure display unit 37a displays the contents displayed before the supply of the operating power is stopped. However, the initial display is performed on the universal figure display section 38a. Alternatively, the third display data buffer 273 is provided in the non-clearing target area 372, but the first display data buffer 271 may be provided in the clearing target area 371. In this case, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the general-purpose display unit 38a displays the contents displayed before the supply of the operating power is stopped. However, the initial display is performed on the special figure display portion 37a.

Further, in a configuration in which a round display unit for notifying the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is provided as a display unit whose display is controlled by the main CPU 63. May be configured such that an area for storing display data for displaying on the round display unit is provided in the non-clearing target area 372. In this case, the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the predetermined display is being performed on the round display unit. Even in this case, the predetermined display is restarted on the round display unit.

In addition, all the display units including the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b which are directly display-controlled by the main CPU 63 perform display. The area in which the display data is stored may not be initialized by the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process. In this case, the display unit directly controlled by the main CPU 63 supplies the operating power even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. The display according to the display contents before the stop is performed. In the configuration, although the display according to the display contents before the supply of the operating power is stopped is temporarily started on the special figure reservation display unit 37b and the general figure reservation display unit 38b, the corresponding reservation information is 0 after that. It may be configured to switch to the display content corresponding to the individual number.

The area in which the display data for displaying on the special figure reservation display section 37b and the general figure reservation display section 38b is stored is initialized when the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed. However, the number of corresponding pending information may be displayed on the special figure pending display section 37b and the general figure pending display section 38b in a manner that is difficult for the player to understand. In this case, by performing the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process, a display indicating that the corresponding pending information is 0 is displayed on each of the special figure pending display section 37b and the general figure pending display section 38b. Even if it is broken, it is difficult for the player to understand that the display indicating that the number of pieces of the hold information is 0 is displayed. Therefore, the special figure hold display section 37b and the general figure hold display section 38b are confirmed. However, it becomes difficult to specify that the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process has been executed.

<56th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted are different from those in the 55th embodiment. The structure different from that of the 55th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the 55th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control.

In the clear target area 371, a second display data buffer 272 in which display data for causing the special figure reservation display section 37b to perform a predetermined display is stored, and for causing the general figure reservation display section 38b to perform a predetermined display Not only the fourth display data buffer 274 in which display data is stored and the fifth display data buffer 275 in which display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform a predetermined display are stored A first display data buffer 271 in which display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform a predetermined display is stored; and a first display data buffer 271 in which display data for causing the normal figure display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display is stored. A 3 display data buffer 273 is provided. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process (step SC218) is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process (step SC216) is executed, the operating power is supplied. The display data corresponding to the display contents of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a immediately before the stop is deleted.

In the clear target area 371, an initial display flag 375 is provided in addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275. The initial display flag 375 is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not there is a situation in which the initial display needs to be performed on the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a. Since the initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the initial display flag 375 is set to "0". It will be cleared. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the special figure display is performed after the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power is executed. When the display of the section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is started, the initial display is performed on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a.

FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of step SC501 to step SC511 in the display start processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

When "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC501: NO), the initial display data for special drawing is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC502) and the initial for general drawing is set. The display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC503). Then, "1" is set to the initial display flag 375 (step SC504).

By performing display control of the special figure display unit 37a using the initial display data for special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271, the initial display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. The display content of the initial display on the special figure display part 37a is arbitrary, but for example, all of the plurality of light emitting parts provided in the special figure display part 37a may be in a light emitting state, and the display may be provided on the special figure display part 37a. A configuration may be adopted in which a part of the plurality of light emitting units thus formed are in a light emitting state. When some of the light emitting units are in the light emitting state, the light emitting units that are in the light emitting state and the light emitting units that are maintained in the off state may be alternately arranged in the arrangement order. Further, the display content of the initial display on the special figure display portion 37a is different from the display content stopped and displayed for notifying the game result of the game times on the special figure display portion 37a. The display content of the initial display on the special figure display unit 37a is different from the display content displayed in the situation where the variable display of the picture is being performed on the special figure display unit 37a. This makes it possible to clearly specify that the initial display is being performed on the special figure display unit 37a.

By performing display control of the general figure display unit 38a using the initial display data for general figure stored in the third display data buffer 273, initial display is performed on the general figure display unit 38a. The display content of the initial display on the public figure display unit 38a is arbitrary, but, for example, all of the plurality of light emitting units provided on the public figure display unit 38a may be in a light emitting state, and the general figure display unit 38a may be provided. A configuration may be adopted in which a part of the plurality of light emitting units thus formed are in a light emitting state. When some of the light emitting units are in the light emitting state, the light emitting units that are in the light emitting state and the light emitting units that are maintained in the off state may be alternately arranged in the arrangement order. Further, the display content of the initial display on the public figure display unit 38a is different from the display content that is stopped and displayed to notify the result of the vibration release lottery in the variable display times on the public figure display unit 38a. There is. The display content of the initial display on the public figure display unit 38a is different from the display content displayed in the situation where the variable display of the picture is being performed on the public figure display unit 38a. As a result, it is possible to clearly specify that the initial display is being performed on the public figure display portion 38a.

If an affirmative decision is made in step SC501, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the game time is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, It is determined whether or not it is in a situation where the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped during execution of (step SC505). Information indicating that the game time is being executed is stored in the storage area when the game time is started, and information indicating that the game time is being executed is stored when the game time is ended. Erased from the area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. It is also stored and held when the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted.

In addition, by referring to the storage area in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control that stores information indicating whether the open/close execution mode is being executed, the operating power during the open/close execution mode is being executed. It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power has been restarted after the supply of power has been stopped (step SC506). The storage area stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and indicates that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is ended. The information is erased from the storage area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. It is also stored and held when the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the game times nor during the opening/closing execution mode (step SC505 and step SC506: NO), the initial display data for special maps is the first display data. The data is set in the buffer 271 (step SC507). By performing the display control of the special figure display unit 37a using the initial display data for special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271, the initial display already described in the special figure display unit 37a is performed. On the other hand, if the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was during the game time or during the open/close execution mode (step SC505 or step SC506: YES), the initial display data for special maps is Since it is not set in the 1 display data buffer 271, the display data stored before the supply of the operating power is stopped remains in the first display data buffer 271. Therefore, when the display on the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display content of the special figure display unit 37a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is restarted as it is.

When the affirmative judgment is made in step SC505, the affirmative judgment is made in step SC506, or the process of step SC507 is executed, the change of the general figure display portion 38a in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is performed. By referring to the storage area in which the information indicating whether or not it is being displayed is stored, the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display portion 38a. It is determined whether or not it is the situation (step SC508). The storage area stores information indicating that the variable display of the picture is being performed on the universal figure display section 38a when the variable display of the pattern is started on the universal figure display section 38a. When the variable display of the pattern is terminated at, the information indicating that the variable display of the pattern is being executed is erased from the storage area on the public figure display portion 38a. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. It is also stored and held when the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted.

Further, by referring to the storage area in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control that stores information indicating whether or not the normal power open state is being executed, the normal power open state is being executed. It is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped (step SC509). Information indicating that the universal power open state is being executed is stored in the storage area when the universal power open state is started, and the universal power open state is being executed when the universal power open state is ended. The information indicating that there is is erased from the storage area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. It is also stored and held when the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the variable display of the picture on the universal figure display portion 38a nor during the open state of the universal electricity (step SC508 and step SC509: NO), for the regular figure The initial display data of is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC510). By performing display control of the general figure display unit 38a using the initial display data for general figure stored in the third display data buffer 273, the initial display already described in the general figure display unit 38a is performed. On the other hand, if the previous stoppage of the supply of operating power was either during execution of variable display of the picture on the universal graphic display unit 38a or during execution of the universal power open state (step SC508 or step SC509: YES), Since the initial display data for general use is not set in the third display data buffer 273, the display data stored before the supply of the operating power is stopped remains in the third display data buffer 273. .. Therefore, when the display on the public figure display unit 38a is started, the display content of the public figure display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is restarted as it is.

When the process of step SC504 is executed, the affirmative judgment is made in step SC508, the affirmative judgment is made in step SC509, or the process of step SC510 is executed, the clear target area of the work area 221 for specific control "1" is set to the display start flag provided in 371 (step SC511). Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether or not the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). The processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth sections. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, in the display start processing (FIG. 191) executed after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display start flag is set to “1”. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the processing at the start (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 191), even if both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the main process (FIG. 185), as already described, the first display data buffer 271 is stored. The initial display data for special figures may be set and the initial display data for general figures may be set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit are displayed. At 38a, the initial display will be started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is displayed. Then, the player visually observing such a change in the display content starts the initial display on the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a in a situation where neither the first RAM clear process nor the second RAM clear process is executed. You will be able to understand what was done. On the other hand, when the display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 191), the display start flag is set after the process of setting the display data ends. Is set to "1" and display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display contents from changing as described above.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the time of starting the supply of the operating power will be described. FIG. 192 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of the operating power is started.

When the first RAM clear process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is set to "1." When the display of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is started because the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display are displayed. Initial display is started in the section 38a. The initial display on the special figure display portion 37a is a pattern on the special figure display portion 37a when a game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 and the start condition of the game is satisfied. It continues until the variable display of is started. The initial display on the universal figure display portion 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display portion 38a is started. Even at the factory shipping stage, since "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375, the initial display is started on the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a.

Whether the first RAM clearing process is executed based on the “RAM clearing operation” as described above or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed based on the “setting change operation”, When the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are displayed, initial display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a, so that supply of operating power is started. Whether the first RAM clearing process or the set value updating process is executed even if the display contents of the display units 37a and 38a when the display is started on the diagram display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are confirmed. I can't figure it out. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started can be confirmed, it cannot be specified whether or not the set value updating process has been executed. It becomes possible to do.

Even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) when the supply of the operating power is started, the situation where the supply of the operating power is stopped is a game. When the special figure display unit 37a starts the display when the current state is neither during the execution of the second time nor in the open/close execution mode, the initial display is started at the special figure display unit 37a. Even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the supply of the operating power is stopped. When the display is started on the public figure display unit 38a in the case where the display is not being performed on the general figure display unit 38a while the variable display of the pattern is being executed or the general electric open state is being executed. Initial display is started in the section 38a. Then, as described above, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a and Initial display is carried out on the universal figure display section 38a. Accordingly, even if it is confirmed that the initial display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started, the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are performed. It becomes possible not to specify that any one has been executed.

On the other hand, the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is either during execution of the game times or during execution of the opening/closing execution mode, and the first RAM in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the time of starting the supply of operating power. If the clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed, when the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure display unit has the display content just before the supply of the operating power is stopped. The display of 37a is controlled. In addition, when the supply of the operating power is stopped is either the execution of the variable display of the picture on the universal display unit 38a or the execution of the universal power open state, the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201). ~ If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed in step SC223), the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started on the universal figure display unit 38a The general figure display unit 38a is display-controlled so that As a result, when the game situation immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is resumed when the supply of the operation power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal state are displayed in a mode corresponding to the restart of the game situation. It becomes possible to start the display on the diagram display unit 38a.

The contents of the initial display displayed on the special figure display unit 37a differ depending on whether the first RAM clearing process is performed or the second RAM clearing process is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. It may be configured to have. In addition, the contents of the initial display displayed on the universal figure display unit 38a are different depending on whether the first RAM clearing process is executed or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. It may be configured to have.

Further, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the initial display is performed on the special figure display part 37a, whereas the general figure display part 38a is displayed. Then, the display content before the supply of the operating power is stopped may be displayed. Further, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the special figure display section 37a displays the initial display on the public figure display section 38a. Then, the display content before the supply of the operating power is stopped may be displayed.

Further, there are a plurality of types of initial display on the special figure display unit 37a, and when initial supply is performed on the special figure display unit 37a when the supply of operating power is started, the initial display is selected by lottery. The initial display may be performed on the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, there are a plurality of types of initial display on the general figure display unit 38a, and when the initial display is performed on the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started, it is selected by lottery. The initial display may be performed on the public figure display unit 38a.

Further, in a configuration in which a round display unit for notifying the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is provided as a display unit whose display is controlled by the main CPU 63. Indicates that either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing has been executed when the supply of the operating power has been started, or both the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing have not been executed. Even if there is, the initial display may be performed on the round display unit. As a result, even if the round display section is confirmed, it is not possible to specify whether the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing has been executed.

In addition, all the display units, including the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b, which are directly display-controlled by the main CPU 63, supply the operating power. When either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed or the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is not executed, the initial display is displayed. It may be configured to be performed. In the configuration, although the initial display is temporarily started on the special figure reservation display section 37b and the general figure reservation display section 38b, the display content corresponding to the fact that the corresponding reservation information is 0 is switched thereafter. It may be configured.

Further, when the first RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display starting process (FIG. 191) are executed, while the second RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, the display start process (FIG. 191) may be configured such that steps SC502 to SC503 are not executed. If the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display starting process (FIG. 191) are executed, while the first RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, the display start process (FIG. 191) may be configured such that steps SC502 to SC503 are not executed.

<57th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents displayed on the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted are different from those in the 56th embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 56th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the 56th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of step SC601 to step SC605 in the display start processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63. Further, the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 is provided with first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 and an initial display flag 375.

If "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC601: NO), the special display deviation display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC602), and the general drawing deviation is performed. The display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC603). Then, "1" is set to the initial display flag 375 (step SC604).

The deviation display data for the special figure is selected by the stop result setting processing (step S509) for the deviation result when the result of the success/failure determination processing (step S504) of the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 13) is the deviation result. This is the display data that is displayed. In other words, the special figure deviation display data is display data for finally causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform the deviation display in the game game in which the result of the hit determination processing is the deviation result. Since only one type of deviation display data for special figures is set, there is also one kind of deviation display in the special figure display portion 37a. Further, in the game times in which the result of the hit/miss determination processing is a hit result, a plurality of types of hit displays finally displayed on the special figure display portion 37a are set, but the out-of-place display is different from these hit displays of a plurality of types. It is displayed.

By performing the display control of the special figure display unit 37a by using the special figure deviation display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, the special figure display unit 37a performs the deviation display. Although the display content of the off-display is arbitrary, for example, only one light emitting unit of the plurality of light emitting units provided in the special figure display unit 37a may be in a light emitting state, and the plurality of light emitting units emit light. It may be configured to be in a state.

The disengagement display data for the general map is the execution of the general electric open lottery when the result of the general electric open lottery in the general universal communication control process (step S8914) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is a misplacement result. It is the display data for finally causing the general figure display unit 38a to display the deviation in the variable display times of the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to. Since only one type of deviation display data for a general figure is set, there is also one kind of deviation display on the general figure display unit 38a. In addition, only one type of hit display finally set on the public figure display section 38a is set in the variable display times of the public figure display section 38a in which the result of the general electric open lottery is the winning result, but the deviation display is The display content is different from the hit display.

By performing the display control of the general figure display unit 38a by using the general figure deviation display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, the general figure display unit 38a performs the misalignment display. Although the display content of the off-display is arbitrary, for example, only one light emitting unit of the plurality of light emitting units provided in the general-purpose display unit 38a may be in a light emitting state, and the plurality of light emitting units emit light. It may be configured to be in a state.

If an affirmative decision is made in step SC601, or if the processing of step SC604 is executed, "1" is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC605). .. Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether or not the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). The processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth sections. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, "1" is set to the display start flag in the display start processing (FIG. 193) executed after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the processing at the start (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 193), when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) as already described, the special display in the first display data buffer 271 is performed. The deviation display data for general purpose is set in the third display data buffer 273 while the deviation display data for general purpose is set. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit are displayed. At 38a, the off-display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is displayed. Then, the player visually observing such a change in the display content starts the off-display on the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a in the situation where either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed. You will be able to understand what was done. On the other hand, when the display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 191), the display start flag is set after the process of setting the display data ends. Is set to "1" and display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display contents from changing as described above.

On the other hand, when "1" is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC601: YES), the processes of step SC602 and step SC603 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display portion 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Is displayed on the special figure display portion 37a. When the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the universal figure display unit 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is displayed immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Corresponding display is performed on the public figure display unit 38a.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the time of starting the supply of the operating power will be described. FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of the operating power is started.

When the first RAM clear process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is set to "1." Is not set, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 37a are displayed. The off display is started on the display unit 38a. The deviation display on the special figure display unit 37a indicates that the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 and the start condition of the game times is satisfied, so that the special display section 37a displays a pattern. It continues until the variable display of is started. The out-of-range display on the universal figure display section 38a is continued until the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display section 38a is started. Even at the factory shipping stage, "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375, so that the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a start the dislocation display.

Whether the first RAM clear process is executed or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process is executed as described above, the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started. When the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a are disengaged, the supply of operating power is started and the display is started on the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a. Even if the displayed contents of the display portions 37a and 38a are confirmed in such a case, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clear process and the set value update process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started can be confirmed, it cannot be specified whether or not the set value updating process has been executed. It becomes possible to do.

When the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a starts displaying. In this case, the display content on the special figure display unit 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started on the universal figure display unit 38a. The display in the general figure display portion 38a is started with the display content immediately before the display. Here, during the business hours of the game hall, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is mostly shut off in a situation where neither the game times nor the open/close execution mode are executed, and further, the general display unit 38a In most cases, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off in a situation where neither the variable display time nor the normal power open state is executed. That is, the display contents of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a just before the supply of the operating power is stopped are basically off-displays. Then, as described above, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a and The general figure display section 38a displays the dislocation. Accordingly, even if it is confirmed that the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a are out of display when the supply of the operating power is started, the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are performed. It becomes possible not to specify that any one has been executed.

In addition, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of off-displays of the special figure display unit 37a, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the plurality of types are displayed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one kind of predetermined deviation display among the deviation displays is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of out-of-range display on the universal figure display unit 38a, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the plurality of types are displayed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one type of predetermined out-of-miss display among the out-of-display is performed on the universal figure display section 38a.

Further, when the first RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display starting process (FIG. 193) are executed, while the second RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, the display start process (FIG. 193) may be configured such that steps SC602 to SC603 are not executed. If the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display starting process (FIG. 193) are executed, while the first RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, the display start process (FIG. 193) may be configured such that steps SC602 to SC603 are not executed.

<58th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted are different from those in the 55th embodiment. The structure different from that of the 55th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the 55th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372 of the work area 221 for specific control.

In the clear target area 371, a second display data buffer 272 in which display data for causing the special figure reservation display section 37b to perform a predetermined display is stored, and for causing the general figure reservation display section 38b to perform a predetermined display Not only the fourth display data buffer 274 in which display data is stored and the fifth display data buffer 275 in which display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform a predetermined display are stored A first display data buffer 271 in which display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform a predetermined display is stored; and a first display data buffer 271 in which display data for causing the normal figure display unit 38a to perform a predetermined display is stored. A 3 display data buffer 273 is provided. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process (step SC218) is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) or the second RAM clear process of the set value update process (step SC216) is executed, the operating power is supplied. The display data corresponding to the display contents of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a immediately before the stop is deleted.

In the clear target area 371, an initial display flag 375 is provided in addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275. The initial display flag 375 is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not there is a situation in which it is necessary to perform the off display as the initial display on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. Since the initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the initial display flag 375 is set to "0". It will be cleared. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the special figure display is performed after the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power is executed. The off display is performed as the initial display on the portion 37a and the public figure display portion 38a.

The non-clearing target area 372 is provided with an initial display counter 381 for special figures and an initial display counter 382 for general figures. The special display initial display counter 381 has a plurality of types of special displays when the special display display unit 37a starts the off-display as the initial display when the special display display unit 37a starts displaying. This is a counter for determining, by lottery, which kind of special display the special display is to be displayed. The numerical range that the initial display counter 381 for a special figure can take is "0 to 59", but is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The general-purpose initial display counter 382 has a plurality of types of general-purpose figures when the general-purpose figure display section 38a displays a disengagement display as an initial display when the general-purpose figure display section 38a starts displaying. This is a counter for deciding by a lottery which kind of out-of-range display for out-of-range display should be performed. The numerical range that the initial display counter 382 for general drawings can take is "0 to 59", but the numerical range is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The special display initial display counter 381 and the general-purpose initial display counter 382 are provided in the non-clearing target area 372 as described above. As a result, if the backup power is continuously supplied to the main RAM 65 in a situation where the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the first RAM clear process or the first RAM clear process or the Even if the 2RAM clear processing is executed, the initial display counter 381 for special figures and the initial display counter 382 for general figures are not initialized and the numerical information immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored. Is maintained.

The numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for special drawings and the numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for general drawings are periodically updated by the first timer interrupt processing in the situation where the activation of the first timer interrupt processing is permitted. To be done. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps SC701 to SC722 in the first timer interrupt process are executed by using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

In Step SC705 to Step SC705, the same processing as Step S8901 to Step S8905 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) in the 35th embodiment is executed. Then, the special display initial display counter updating process is executed (step SC706). In the update process, the current numerical value information is read from the special display initial display counter 381, the read numerical value information is incremented by 1, and the numerical information after the addition of 1 is overwritten on the special figure initial display counter 381. To do. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value (specifically "59"), it is cleared to "0".

After that, in step SC707, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the game stop flag or the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control. When "1" is set in any of the flags (step SC707: YES), the first timer interrupt processing is ended without executing the processing of step SC708 to step SC722. When "1" is not set in any of the flags (step SC707: NO), the initial display counter updating process for universal graphics is executed (step SC708). In the updating process, the current numerical value information is read from the general-purpose initial display counter 382, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and the numerical information after the addition of 1 is overwritten on the general-purpose initial display counter 382. To do. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value (specifically "59"), it is cleared to "0". In Step SC709 to Step SC722, the same processing as Step S8907 to Step S8920 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) in the 35th embodiment is executed.

Here, the initial display counter updating process for special figures (step SC706) is set as a process executed regardless of whether "1" is set in the game stop flag or the in-start-up flag. On the other hand, the initial display counter updating process for normal figures (step SC708) is set as a process that is not executed when "1" is set in the game stop flag or the in-progress process flag. As a result, the update frequency can be made different between the special display initial display counter 381 and the general display initial display counter 382, and the special display initial display counter 381 and the general display initial display counter 382 can be changed. Can be prevented from synchronizing.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of step SC801 to step SC807 in the display start processing is executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

When "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC801: NO), a lottery process for out-of-specification display data is executed (step SC802). In the lottery process for the special figure deviation display data, the special figure deviation display lottery table 383 stored in advance in the main ROM 64 is referred to. FIG. 198(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special display deviation display lottery table 383. As shown in FIG. 198(a), there are first deviation display data for special drawings, second deviation display data for special drawings, and third deviation display data for special drawings as deviation display data for special drawings. ing.

The first deviation display data for special maps, the second deviation display data for special maps, and the third deviation display data for special maps have the result of the success/failure determination process (step S504) of the special map variation start process (FIG. 13). This is display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process for the disengagement result (step S509) when the result is the disengagement result. That is, the first to third deviation display data for special maps are display data for finally performing the deviation display on the special drawing display portion 37a in the game game in which the result of the hit determination processing is the deviation result. .. The first deviation display data for special drawings is data for displaying the first deviation display for special drawings on the special drawing display portion 37a, and the second deviation display data for special drawings is the second deviation for special drawings. The display is data for displaying the special figure display portion 37a, and the third deviation display data for special drawing is data for displaying the third deviation display for special drawing on the special figure display portion 37a. The display contents of the first deviation display for the special drawing, the second deviation display for the special drawing, and the third deviation display for the special drawing are different from each other. Further, in the game times in which the result of the hit/miss determination processing is a hit result, a plurality of types of hit displays finally displayed on the special figure display portion 37a are set, but the first to third out-of-range displays for special figures are The display content is different from these multiple types of hit display. Even in the stop result setting process for the disconnection result (step S509), by using the initial display counter 381 for the special map and the removal display lottery table 383 for the special map, the disconnection display to be displayed on the special map display unit 37a is performed. The type is selected from the first to third out-of-range displays for special drawings.

In the special figure deviation display lottery table 383, the numerical range of the initial figure counter 381 for special figures is set for each of the first to third deviation display data for special figures. Specifically, the numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 of “0 to 19” is set for the first special display data for special figures, and the second deviation display data for special figures is set. On the other hand, the numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 of “20 to 39” is set, and the special display initial display counter of “40 to 59” is set for the third deviation display data for special drawing. The numerical value range of 381 is set. In other words, the selection probability of the first deviation display data for special drawings, the second deviation display data for special drawings, and the third deviation display data for special drawings in the lottery process of the deviation display data for special drawings is “1/3”. Are the same.

In the lottery process of the special display deviation display data, after reading the special figure deviation display lottery table 383, the special display initial display counter 381 provided in the clear target non-clear area 372 in the specific control work area 221. Get the current numerical information of. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information with the special display deviation display lottery table 383, the display data to be displayed this time is the first deviation display data for special drawings and the second deviation display data for special drawings. Select from the deviation display data and the third deviation display data for special drawings.

The display data selected in the lottery process for the special display deviation display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC803). By controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, the deviation display corresponding to the display data is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. That is, when the first deviation display data for special drawing is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first deviation display for special drawing is performed on the special drawing display portion 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the second deviation display data for special drawing is set in, the second deviation display for special drawing is displayed in the special drawing display portion 37a, and the third deviation for special drawing is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the special figure display unit 37a displays the third deviation display for the special figure.

After that, the lottery process for the out-of-print display data for general drawings is executed (step SC804). In the lottery process for the general-purpose image non-display display data, the general-purpose non-display display lottery table 384 stored in advance in the main ROM 64 is referred to. FIG. 198(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the general-purpose deviation display lottery table 384. As shown in FIG. 198(b), there are the first deviation display data for general drawings, the second deviation display data for general drawings, and the third deviation display data for general drawings as the deviation display data for general drawings. ing.

The first deviation display data for general purpose drawing, the second deviation display data for general purpose drawing, and the third deviation display data for general purpose drawing are the general purpose picture electric power control processing (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196). ), if the result of the ordinary electric lottery lottery executed by using the ordinary electric utility article opening counter C4 to determine whether or not to open the ordinary electric utility article 34a is a failure result, This is display data for causing the general figure display section 38a to finally perform the deviation display for the general figure in the variable display time of the figure display section 38a. The first deviation display data for general drawings is data for displaying the first deviation display for general drawings on the general drawing display portion 38a, and the second deviation display data for general drawings is the second deviation for general drawings. This is data for displaying the display on the public figure display unit 38a, and the third out-of-display display data for public figure is data for displaying the third off-display for general figure on the public figure display unit 38a. The display contents of the first out-of-display for the general drawing, the second out-of-display for the general drawing, and the third out-of-display for the general drawing are different from each other. In addition, a plurality of types of hit displays finally displayed on the public figure display portion 38a are set in the variable display times in which the result of the general electric open lottery is a win result. The display has different display contents from those of the plural types of hits. In addition, also in the universal figure universal communication control process (step SC716), by using the initial display counter 382 for universal figure and the detachment display lottery table 384 for universal figure, the type of detachment display to be displayed on the universal figure display section 38a is selected. Select from the first to third out-of-range display for general drawings.

In the out-of-drawing display lottery table 384 for a general figure, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for a general figure is set for each of the first to third out-of-range display data for a general figure. Specifically, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for a general figure of "0 to 19" is set for the first deviation display data for a general figure, and is set to the second deviation display data for a general figure. On the other hand, the numerical range of the general display initial display counter 382 of “20 to 39” is set, and the initial display counter for general display of “40 to 59” is set for the third deviation display data for general display. The numerical range of 382 is set. In other words, the selection probability of the first out-of-range display data for a general figure, the second out-of-range display data for a general figure, and the third out-of-range display data for a general figure in the lottery process of the out-of-range display data for a general figure is “1/3”. Are the same.

In the lottery processing of the out-of-drawing display data for the general figure, after reading out the out-of-drawing display lottery table 384 for the general figure, the initial display counter 382 for the general figure provided in the non-clear target area 372 in the work area 221 for the specific control. Get the current numerical information of. Then, by collating the obtained numerical information with the general-purpose out-of-drawing display lottery table 384, the display data to be displayed this time is the first out-of-place display data for general purpose and the second for general purpose display. Select from the deviation display data and the third deviation display data for general drawings.

The display data selected in the lottery process for the non-standard display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC805). By controlling the display of the public figure display unit 38a by using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, a deviation display corresponding to the display data is performed on the general figure display unit 38a. In other words, when the first out-of-display display data for a general figure is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first out-of-display display for a general figure is displayed on the general-drawing display section 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 is displayed. When the second deviation display data for a general figure is set in the, the second deviation display for a general figure is displayed on the general figure display unit 38a, and the third deviation for a general figure is displayed in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, the third figure display for a figure is displayed on the figure display unit 38a.

After executing the processing of steps SC802 to SC805, "1" is set to the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SC806).

If an affirmative judgment is made in step SC801 or if the processing of step SC806 is executed, "1" is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC807). .. Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether or not the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). The processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth sections. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, the display start flag (1) is set in the display start processing (FIG. 197) executed after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the processing at the start (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 197), as described above, when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the special display is added to the first display data buffer 271. Any one of the first to third outlier display data for general purpose is set, and at the same time, any one of the first to third outlier display data for general purpose is set in third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit are displayed. At 38a, the off-display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is displayed. Then, the player visually observing such a change in the display content starts the off-display on the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a in the situation where either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed. You will be able to understand what was done. On the other hand, when the display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 197), the display start flag is set after the process of setting the display data ends. Is set to "1" and display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display contents from changing as described above.

On the other hand, when "1" is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC801: YES), the processes of steps SC802 to SC805 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display portion 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Is displayed on the special figure display portion 37a. When the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the universal figure display unit 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is displayed immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Corresponding display is performed on the public figure display unit 38a.

As described above in detail, when the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power or when the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed, Since "1" is not set in the display flag 375, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started, these special characteristics are displayed. The off display is started in the figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a. The deviation display on the special figure display unit 37a indicates that the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 and the start condition of the game times is satisfied, so that the special display section 37a displays a pattern. It continues until the variable display of is started. The out-of-range display on the universal figure display section 38a is continued until the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display section 38a is started. Even at the factory shipping stage, "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375, so that the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a start the dislocation display.

Whether the first RAM clearing process is executed or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed as described above, the display on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is displayed. When the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a are disengaged when starting, supply of operating power is started and the display is performed on the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a. Even if the displayed contents of the display units 37a and 38a are confirmed when starting, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clear process and the set value update process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started can be confirmed, it cannot be specified whether or not the set value updating process has been executed. It becomes possible to do.

When the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a starts displaying. In this case, the display content on the special figure display unit 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started on the universal figure display unit 38a. The display in the general figure display portion 38a is started with the display content immediately before the display. Here, during the business hours of the game hall, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is mostly shut off in a situation where neither the game times nor the open/close execution mode are executed, and further, the general display unit 38a In most cases, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off in a situation where neither the variable display time nor the normal power open state is executed. That is, the display contents of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a just before the supply of the operating power is stopped are basically off-displays. Then, as described above, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a and The general figure display section 38a displays the dislocation. Accordingly, even if it is confirmed that the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a are out of display when the supply of the operating power is started, the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are performed. It becomes possible not to specify that any one has been executed.

In particular, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value update process is executed in a configuration in which there are a plurality of out-of-displays for special drawings, a selection is made from among the plurality of out-of-displays by lottery. The deviation display of the selected type is performed on the special figure display portion 37a. As a result, whether or not any of the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed depending on the type of the deviation display first displayed on the special figure display unit 37a when the supply of the operating power is started. It is possible to make it difficult to do so even if you try to identify.

Similarly, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in a configuration in which there are a plurality of out-of-range displays for general drawings, a selection is made by lottery from among the plurality of out-of-place displays. The dislocation display of the selected type is performed on the public figure display unit 38a. As a result, whether or not the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are executed depending on the type of the deviation display first displayed on the universal graphic display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started. It is possible to make it difficult to do so even if you try to identify the.

The first deviation display data for special drawing, the second deviation display data for special drawing, and the special data in the lottery processing (step SC802) for the special display deviation display data executed in the display start processing (FIG. 197). The selection probabilities of the third out-of-display data for drawing are not limited to the same configurations, and the configurations may be substantially the same although they are slightly different, or the configurations may be selection probabilities that are greatly different.

Further, the first deviation display data for the special drawing, the second deviation display data for the special drawing, and the special data in the lottery processing (step SC802) for the special display deviation display data executed in the display start processing (FIG. 197). The respective selection probabilities of the third out-of-drawing display data for figures are the first out-of-range display data for special figures, the second out-of-range display data for special figures and the third out-of-range display for special figures in the game times that result in deviation. Although the configuration is the same as the selection probability of each data, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be substantially the same although it is slightly different, or the configuration may be a selection probability that is significantly different.

Further, in the lottery process (step SC804) for the out-of-drawing display data for the universal figure, which is executed in the display start process (FIG. 197), the first out-of-range display data for the ordinary figure, the second out-of-range display data for the ordinary figure, and the ordinary-outline display data for the ordinary figure. The selection probabilities of the third outlier display data for the drawings are not limited to the same configurations, and the configurations may be slightly different but substantially the same, or the configurations may have selection probabilities that are significantly different from each other. Good.

Further, in the lottery process (step SC804) for the out-of-drawing display data for the universal figure, which is executed in the display start process (FIG. 197), the first out-of-range display data for the ordinary figure, the second out-of-range display data for the ordinary figure, and the ordinary-outline display data for the ordinary figure. The respective selection probabilities of the third outlier display data for figures are the first outlier display data for ordinary figures, the second outlier display data for ordinary figures and the third outlier for ordinary figures in the variable display times that result in outliers. Although the selection probabilities of the display data are the same as each other, the present invention is not limited to this, and the structures may be substantially the same although they are slightly different, or the selection probabilities may be greatly different.

Further, when the first RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SC802 to SC805 of the display starting process (FIG. 197) are executed, while the second RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, the display start process (FIG. 197) may be configured such that steps SC802 to SC805 are not executed. Further, when the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the steps SC802 to SC805 of the display starting process (FIG. 197) are executed, while the first RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, the display start process (FIG. 197) may be configured such that steps SC802 to SC805 are not executed.

Further, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the display start process (FIG. 197) is performed at step SC802, and the first to third deviations for special drawings are removed. The display data is not limited to the configuration selected by the lottery, and when the supply of the operating power is started, every time the process of step SC802 is executed, the first deviation display data for special drawing → for special drawing Second deviation display data → third deviation display data for special drawing → first deviation display data for special drawing →... The predetermined deviation display data for special drawings to be selected. The configuration may be changed in sequence.

Further, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the display start process (FIG. 197) is started at step SC804, and the first to third deviations for the normal figure are removed. The display data is not limited to the configuration selected by the lottery, and when the supply of the operating power is started, every time the processing of step SC804 is executed, the first deviation display data for the general figure → for the general figure Second deviation display data -> third deviation display data for general drawings -> first deviation display data for general drawings -> ... and so on. The configuration may be changed in sequence.

<59th Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the contents displayed on the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted are different from those in the 58th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the 58th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the 58th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of step SC901 to step SC907 in the display start processing is executed using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

When "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC901: NO), a lottery process of initial display data for special drawing is executed (step SC902). In the lottery process of the initial display data for special figures, the initial display lottery table 385 for special figures stored in the main ROM 64 in advance is referred to. FIG. 200A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial display lottery table 385 for special drawings. As shown in FIG. 200(a), as the initial display data for special maps, the first deviation display data for special drawings, the second deviation display data for special drawings, the third deviation display data for special drawings, and the special drawings There is a first hit display data for a special drawing, a second hit display data for a special drawing, and a third hit display data for a special drawing.

The first deviation display data for special maps, the second deviation display data for special maps, and the third deviation display data for special maps have the result of the success/failure determination process (step S504) of the special map variation start process (FIG. 13). This is display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process for the disengagement result (step S509) when the result is the disengagement result. In addition, the first hit display data for the special figure, the second hit display data for the special figure, and the third hit display data for the special figure are determined by the success/failure determination process (step S504) of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13). This is display data that can be selected by lottery in the big hit result stop result setting process (step S507) when the result is a win result. That is, the first to third deviation display data for special maps are display data for finally performing the deviation display on the special drawing display portion 37a in the game game in which the result of the hit determination processing is the deviation result. The first to third hit display data for special maps are the display data for finally performing the hit display on the special map display portion 37a in the game game in which the result of the hit determination processing is the hit result.

The first deviation display data for special drawings is data for displaying the first deviation display for special drawings on the special drawing display portion 37a, and the second deviation display data for special drawings is the second deviation for special drawings. The display is data for displaying the special figure display portion 37a, and the third deviation display data for special drawing is data for displaying the third deviation display for special drawing on the special figure display portion 37a. The first hit display data for special figures is data for displaying the first hit display for special figures on the special figure display portion 37a, and the second hit display data for special figures is the first hit display data for special figures. 2 is data for displaying the special hit display on the special figure display portion 37a, and the third hit display data for special drawing is data for displaying the third hit display for special drawing on the special figure display portion 37a. .. In the first hit display for the special figure, the result of the hit determination processing (step S504) of the special figure variation start processing (FIG. 13) is the hit result, and the result of the distribution determination processing (step S506) is the low certainty big hit result. It is finally displayed on the special figure display portion 37a in a certain game time. In addition, in the second winning display for special maps, the result of the hit determination processing (step S504) of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 13) is a winning result, and the result of the distribution determination processing (step S506) is low winning amount. It is finally displayed on the special figure display portion 37a in the game time which is the result of a certain jackpot. In addition, in the third hit display for special maps, the result of the hit determination processing (step S504) of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 13) is a winning result, and the result of the distribution determination processing (step S506) is the most advantageous big hit. It is finally displayed on the special figure display portion 37a in the resulting game time. The first deviation display for these special drawings, the second deviation display for special drawings, the third deviation display for special drawings, the first hit display for special drawings, the second hit display for special drawings, and the special hits The display contents of the third winning display are different from each other.

In the special display initial display lottery table 385, the special display initial display counter 381 for each of the special display first to third deviation display data and the special drawing first to third hit display data. The numerical range of is set. Specifically, the numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 of “0 to 9” is set for the special deviation first deviation display data, and the numerical range is set to the special deviation second deviation display data. On the other hand, the numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 of "10 to 19" is set, and the special display initial display counter of "20 to 29" is set for the third deviation display data for special drawing. The numerical range of 381 is set, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for special maps of “30 to 39” is set for the first hit display data for special maps. The numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 of "40 to 49" is set for the 2 hit display data, and the special range of "50 to 59" is set for the 3rd hit display data for the special drawing. The numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for is set. That is, the first deviation display data for special drawings, the second deviation display data for special drawings, the third deviation display data for special drawings, the first hit for special drawings in the lottery process of the initial display data for special drawings. The selection probabilities of the display data, the second hit display data for special drawing, and the third hit display data for special drawing are “1/6”, which are the same.

In the special display initial display data lottery process, after reading the special display initial display lottery table 385, the special display initial display counter 381 provided in the non-clearing target area 372 in the specific control work area 221. Get the current numerical information of. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information with the initial display lottery table 385 for special maps, the display data to be displayed this time is the first deviation display data for special maps and the second deviation data for special maps. It is selected from the deviation display data, the third deviation display data for special figures, the first hit display data for special figures, the second hit display data for special figures, and the third hit display data for special figures.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC903). By controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, a deviation display or a hit display corresponding to the display data is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. .. That is, when the first deviation display data for special drawing is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first deviation display for special drawing is performed on the special drawing display portion 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the second deviation display data for special drawing is set in, the second deviation display for special drawing is displayed in the special drawing display portion 37a, and the third deviation for special drawing is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the special figure display unit 37a displays the third deviation display for the special figure. Further, when the first hit display data for special drawing is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first hit display for special drawing is performed in the special drawing display portion 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. If the second hit display data for special drawing is set in, the second hit display for special drawing is performed in the special drawing display portion 37a, and the third hit for special drawing is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the special figure display portion 37a displays the third hit for the special figure.

After that, the lottery process of the initial display data for general drawings is executed (step SC904). In the lottery processing for initial display data for general drawings, the initial display lottery table 386 for general drawings stored in advance in the main ROM 64 is referred to. FIG. 200(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial display lottery table 386 for general figures. As shown in FIG. 200(b), as the initial display data for the general drawing, the first deviation display data for the general drawing, the second deviation display data for the general drawing, the third deviation display data for the general drawing, and the general drawing There is hit display data for use.

The first deviation display data for general purpose drawing, the second deviation display data for general purpose drawing, and the third deviation display data for general purpose drawing are the general purpose picture electric power control processing (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196). ), if the result of the ordinary electric lottery lottery executed by using the ordinary electric utility article opening counter C4 to determine whether or not to open the ordinary electric utility article 34a is a failure result, This is display data for causing the general figure display section 38a to finally perform the deviation display for the general figure in the variable display time of the figure display section 38a. In addition, the hit display data for a general figure is finally displayed on the general figure display section 38a in the variable display time of the general figure display section 38a when the result of the above-mentioned general electric open lottery is a winning result. This is display data for displaying a hit display.

The first deviation display data for general drawings is data for displaying the first deviation display for general drawings on the general drawing display portion 38a, and the second deviation display data for general drawings is the second deviation for general drawings. This is data for displaying the display on the public figure display unit 38a, and the third out-of-display display data for public figure is data for displaying the third off-display for general figure on the public figure display unit 38a. The hit display data for a general figure is data for displaying a hit display for a general figure on the general figure display unit 38a. The display contents of the first deviating display for general drawings, the second deviating display for general drawings, the third deviating display for general drawings, and the hit display for general drawings are different from each other.

In the general-purpose initial display lottery table 386, the numerical range of the general-purpose initial display counter 382 is set for each of the first to third deviation display data for general drawings and hit display data for general drawings. Has been done. Specifically, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for a general figure of “0 to 14” is set for the first deviation display data for a general figure, and the numerical range of the second deviation display data for a general figure is set. On the other hand, the numerical range of the general display initial display counter 382 of "15 to 29" is set, and the general display initial display counter of "30 to 44" is set for the third deviation display data for general drawing. The numerical range of 382 is set, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for general figures of “45 to 59” is set for the hit display data for general figures. That is, in the lottery process of the initial display data for general drawings, the first deviation display data for general drawings, the second deviation display data for general drawings, the third deviation display data for general drawings, and the hit display data for general drawings The selection probabilities of are 1/4 and are the same.

In the lottery process for initial display data for public figures, after reading the initial display lottery table 386 for general figures, the initial display counter 382 for general figures provided in the non-clearing target area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control. Get the current numerical information of. Then, the acquired numerical information is collated with the initial display lottery table 386 for general figures, so that the display data to be displayed this time is the first deviation display data for general figures and the second display data for general figures. Select from the deviation display data, the third deviation display data for general drawings, and the hit display data for general drawings.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for general drawings is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC905). By controlling the display of the general figure display unit 38a by using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, a deviation display or a hit display corresponding to the display data is performed on the general figure display unit 38a. .. That is, when the first deviation display data for a general figure is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first deviation display for a general figure is performed on the general figure display unit 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 is displayed. When the second deviation display data for a general figure is set to the second figure, the second deviation display for a general figure is displayed on the general figure display unit 38a, and the third deviation for a general figure is displayed in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, the third figure display for the figure is displayed on the figure display portion 38a, and when the hit display data for the figure is set in the third display data buffer 273, the figure display is displayed. A hit display for a general figure is displayed on the figure display unit 38a.

After executing the processes of steps SC902 to SC905, "1" is set to the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 (step SC906).

If an affirmative decision is made in step SC901, or if the processing of step SC906 is executed, "1" is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SC907). .. Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether or not the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). The processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth sections. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, in the display start processing (FIG. 199) executed after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is finished, "1" is set to the display start flag. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the processing at the start (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 199), as described above, when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the special display in the first display data buffer 271 is performed. Either one of the first to third deviation display data for special drawing and the first to third hit display data for special drawing is set, and the first to third deviation display data for general drawing are stored in the third display data buffer 273. Set one of the hit display data for general drawings. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit are displayed. In 38a, the off display or the hit display is started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is displayed. Then, the player visually observing such a change in the display content displays a deviation or hits on the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a in the situation where either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed. It is possible to grasp that the display has started. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 199), the display start flag is set after the process of setting the display data is completed. Is set to "1" and display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display contents from changing as described above.

On the other hand, when "1" is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SC901: YES), the processes of steps SC902 to SC905 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display portion 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Is displayed on the special figure display portion 37a. When the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the universal figure display unit 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is displayed immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Corresponding display is performed on the public figure display unit 38a.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the time of starting the supply of the operating power will be described. FIG. 201 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of the operating power is started.

When the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is set to “1. Is not set, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started, the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 37a are displayed. The off display or the hit display is started on the display unit 38a. The deviation display or the hit display on the special view display unit 37a is performed when the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 and the start condition of the game time is satisfied, It continues until the variable display of the pattern is started. The deviation display or the hit display on the universal figure display portion 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display portion 38a is started. Even at the factory shipping stage, since "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375, the deviation display or the hit display is started on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a.

Whether the first RAM clearing process is executed or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed as described above, the display on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is displayed. When the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a are displayed when the start is started, the supply of operating power is started and the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a are started. Even if the display contents of these display units 37a and 38a are confirmed when the display is started, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clear process and the set value update process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started can be confirmed, it cannot be specified whether or not the set value updating process has been executed. It becomes possible to do.

When the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a starts displaying. In this case, the display content on the special figure display unit 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started on the universal figure display unit 38a. The display in the general figure display portion 38a is started with the display content immediately before the display. That is, when the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a and the universal figure are displayed. The display content of the display unit 38a depends on the situation at the timing when the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the display content is various. On the other hand, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal The deviation display or the hit display is determined and displayed by lottery on the diagram display unit 38a. As a result, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the supply of the operating power is started. In the same manner as when the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223), the display contents of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a are displayed. It is possible to diversify. Therefore, even if the display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started when the supply of the operating power is started and the display is confirmed, either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to identify what has been executed.

In addition, the special figure display unit 37a and the universal figure that can be selected when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power. The display data of the display unit 38a is display data that can be selected during a normal game. As a result, the first RAM clearing process or the first RAM clearing process is performed in the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) while preventing the data capacity of the display data of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a from increasing. It is possible to diversify the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed.

The first deviation display data for special drawings, the second deviation display data for special drawings, and the special deviation data for the special display in the lottery processing (step SC902) for initial display data for special characters executed in the display start processing (FIG. 199). Limited to the configuration in which the selection probability of each of the third deviation display data for drawing, the first hit display data for special drawing, the second hit display data for special drawing, and the third hit display data for special drawing is the same. However, the configurations may be slightly different but substantially the same, or the configurations may have significantly different selection probabilities. As a configuration having greatly different selection probabilities, for example, a configuration in which the total selection probability of the first to third outlier display data for special maps is higher than the total selection probability of the first to third per display data for special maps Or a low configuration.

Further, the first deviation display data for general drawings, the second deviation display data for general drawings, the general deviation display data for general drawings in the lottery processing (step SC904) for initial display data for general drawings executed in the display start processing (FIG. 199). The selection probabilities of the third deviation display data for drawings and the hit display data for general drawings are not limited to the same configurations, and the configurations may be slightly different but substantially the same. The configuration may be probability.

In addition, as display data selected in the lottery process (step SC902) for initial display data for special figures executed in the display start process (FIG. 199), a display not included in the result of stopping the game is performed. The display data may be included. Further, as the display data selected in the lottery process (step SC904) for the initial display data for universal figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 199), the display not included in the stop result of the variable display times is performed. The display data may be included.

If the first RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display starting process (FIG. 199) are executed, while the second RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, the display start process (FIG. 199) may be configured such that steps SC902 to SC905 are not executed. When the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display starting process (FIG. 199) are executed, while the first RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, the display start process (FIG. 199) may be configured such that steps SC902 to SC905 are not executed.

Further, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the first to third deviations for special drawings are made in step SC902 of the display starting process (FIG. 199). The display data and the first to third hit display data for special drawings are not limited to the configuration selected by lottery, and each time the process of step SC902 is executed when the supply of operating power is started. 1st deviation display data for special drawings → 2nd deviation display data for special drawings → 3rd deviation display data for special drawings → 1st hit display data for special drawings → 2nd hit display data for special drawings → The configuration may be such that the display data to be selected is sequentially changed in a predetermined order such as the third hit display data for special figure→the first deviation display data for special figure→.

Further, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the first to third deviations for general figures are removed in step SC904 of the display starting process (FIG. 199). The display data and the display data for the first to third hits for general drawings are not limited to the configuration selected by lottery, and each time the process of step SC904 is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. First deviation display data for general drawings → Second deviation display data for general drawings → Third deviation display data for general drawings → Hit display data for general drawings → First deviation display data for general drawings → ・・The display data to be selected may be sequentially changed in a predetermined order such as.

<60th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted are different from those in the 59th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the 59th embodiment will be described. Note that basically the description of the same configuration as the 59th embodiment is omitted.

FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps SD101 to SD115 in the display start process are executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

When "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD101: NO), the processes of steps SD102 to SD106 are executed. The processing contents of step SD102 to step SD106 are the same as step SC901 to step SC906 of the display start processing (FIG. 199) in the 59th embodiment. As a result, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed, the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started as in the 59th embodiment. In the case of a failure, a misplacement display or a hit display is performed.

When "1" is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD101: YES), information indicating whether or not the game game is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the specific control work area 221 is stored. By referring to the storage area, it is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the game game (step SD107). Information indicating that the game time is being executed is stored in the storage area when the game time is started, and information indicating that the game time is being executed is stored when the game time is ended. Erased from the area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, they are stored and held.

In addition, by referring to the storage area in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control that stores information indicating whether or not the open/close execution mode is being executed, the operating power during the open/close execution mode is being executed. It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power has been resumed after the supply of power has been stopped (step SD108). The storage area stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and indicates that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is ended. The information is erased from the storage area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, they are stored and held.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the game times nor during the opening/closing execution mode (step SD107 and step SD108: NO), the lottery process for initial display data for special maps is executed. Yes (step SD109). The contents of the lottery process for initial display data for special drawings are the same as those in step SD102, and more specifically, they are the same as step SC902 in the display starting process (FIG. 199) in the 59th embodiment. As a result, as the display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to perform the deviation display or the hit display when the display of the special figure display unit 37a is started, the first deviation display data for the special figure and the special deviation display data for the special figure are displayed. Either the second deviation display data, the third deviation display data for special maps, the first hit display data for special drawings, the second hit display data for special drawings, or the third hit display data for special drawings is selected. To be done.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for special maps is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD110). By controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, a deviation display or a hit display corresponding to the display data is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. .. That is, when the first deviation display data for special drawing is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first deviation display for special drawing is performed on the special drawing display portion 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the second deviation display data for special drawing is set in, the second deviation display for special drawing is displayed in the special drawing display portion 37a, and the third deviation for special drawing is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the special figure display unit 37a displays the third deviation display for the special figure. Further, when the first hit display data for special drawing is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first hit display for special drawing is performed in the special drawing display portion 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. If the second hit display data for special drawing is set in, the second hit display for special drawing is performed in the special drawing display portion 37a, and the third hit for special drawing is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the special figure display portion 37a displays the third hit for the special figure.

On the other hand, if the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was during execution of the game time or during execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SD107 or step SD108: YES), the initial display data for special maps is Since it is not set in the 1 display data buffer 271, the display data stored before the supply of the operating power is stopped remains in the first display data buffer 271. Therefore, when the display on the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display content of the special figure display unit 37a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is restarted as it is.

When the affirmative judgment is made in step SD107, the affirmative judgment is made in step SD108, or the process of step SD110 is executed, the change of the general figure display portion 38a in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control. By referring to the storage area in which the information indicating whether or not it is being displayed is stored, the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display portion 38a. It is determined whether or not it is the situation (step SD111). The storage area stores information indicating that the variable display of the picture is being performed on the universal figure display section 38a when the variable display of the pattern is started on the universal figure display section 38a. When the variable display of the pattern is terminated at, the information indicating that the variable display of the pattern is being executed is erased from the storage area on the public figure display portion 38a. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, they are stored and held.

Further, by referring to the storage area in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control that stores information indicating whether or not the normal power open state is being executed, the normal power open state is being executed. It is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped (step SD112). Information indicating that the universal power open state is being executed is stored in the storage area when the universal power open state is started, and the universal power open state is being executed when the universal power open state is ended. The information indicating that there is is erased from the storage area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, they are stored and held.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during execution of variable display of the picture on the universal figure display section 38a nor during execution of the universal electrical open state (step SD111 and step SD112: NO), for universal figure The initial display data lottery process is executed (step SD113). The processing contents of the lottery processing for initial display data for general drawings are the same as those in step SD104, and further, they are the same as step SC904 in the display starting processing (FIG. 199) in the above fifty-ninth embodiment. As a result, when starting the display of the general figure display unit 38a, as the display data for causing the general figure display unit 38a to perform the deviation display or the hit display, the first deviation display data for the general figure and the general deviation display data for the general figure are displayed. Any one of the second deviation display data, the third deviation display data for general drawings, and the hit display data for general drawings is selected.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for general drawings is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD114). By controlling the display of the general figure display unit 38a by using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, a deviation display or a hit display corresponding to the display data is performed on the general figure display unit 38a. .. That is, when the first deviation display data for a general figure is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first deviation display for a general figure is performed on the general figure display unit 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 is displayed. When the second deviation display data for a general figure is set to the second figure, the second deviation display for a general figure is displayed on the general figure display unit 38a, and the third deviation for a general figure is displayed in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, the third figure display for the figure is displayed on the figure display portion 38a, and when the hit display data for the figure is set in the third display data buffer 273, the figure display is displayed. A hit display for a general figure is displayed on the figure display unit 38a.

On the other hand, if the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was during execution of variable display of the picture on the universal graphic display unit 38a or during execution of the universal power open state (step SD111 or step SD112: YES), Since the initial display data for general use is not set in the third display data buffer 273, the display data stored before the supply of the operating power is stored in the third display data buffer 273 as it is. .. Therefore, when the display on the public figure display unit 38a is started, the display content of the public figure display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is restarted as it is.

When the process of step SD106 is executed, the affirmative judgment is made in step SD111, the affirmative judgment is made in step SD112, or the process of step SD114 is executed, the clear target area of the work area 221 for specific control is executed. "1" is set to the display start flag provided in 371 (step SD115). Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether or not the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). The processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth sections. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, in the display start process (FIG. 202) executed after the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is finished, “1” is set to the display start flag. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the processing at the start (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 202), as already described, even in the situation where neither the first RAM clear process nor the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the first display data buffer 271 is stored. The initial display data for special figures may be set and the initial display data for general figures may be set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit are displayed. At 38a, the initial display will be started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is displayed. Then, the player visually observing such a change in the display content starts the initial display on the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a in a situation where neither the first RAM clear process nor the second RAM clear process is executed. You will be able to understand what was done. On the other hand, when the display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 202), the display start flag is set after the process of setting the display data ends. Is set to "1" and display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display contents from changing as described above.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation at the time of starting the supply of the operating power will be described. FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of the operating power is started.

When the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is set to “1. Is not set, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started, the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 37a are displayed. The off display or the hit display is started on the display unit 38a. The deviation display or the hit display on the special view display unit 37a is performed when the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 and the start condition of the game time is satisfied, It continues until the variable display of the pattern is started. The deviation display or the hit display on the universal figure display portion 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display portion 38a is started. Even at the factory shipping stage, since "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375, the deviation display or the hit display is started on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a.

Whether the first RAM clearing process is executed or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed as described above, the display on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is displayed. When the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a are displayed when the start is started, the supply of operating power is started and the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a are started. Even if the display contents of these display units 37a and 38a are confirmed when the display is started, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clear process and the set value update process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started can be confirmed, it cannot be specified whether or not the set value updating process has been executed. It becomes possible to do.

Even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) when the supply of the operating power is started, the situation where the supply of the operating power is stopped is a game. If the special figure display section 37a starts displaying when the current state is neither during the execution of the second time nor in the open/close execution mode, the special figure display section 37a starts the deviation display or the hit display. To be done. Even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the supply of the operating power is stopped. When the display is started on the public figure display unit 38a in the case where the display is not being performed on the general figure display unit 38a while the variable display of the pattern is being executed or the general electric open state is being executed. The off display or the hit display is started in the portion 38a. Then, as described above, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a and The general figure display unit 38a displays the deviation or the hit display. As a result, even if it is confirmed that the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a perform the off display or the hit display when the supply of the operating power is started, the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM are performed. It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify that any one of the clearing processes has been executed.

On the other hand, the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is either during execution of the game times or during execution of the opening/closing execution mode, and the first RAM in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the time of starting the supply of operating power. If the clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed, when the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure display unit has the display content just before the supply of the operating power is stopped. The display of 37a is controlled. In addition, when the supply of the operating power is stopped is either the execution of the variable display of the picture on the universal display unit 38a or the execution of the universal power open state, the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201). ~ If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed in step SC223), the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started on the universal figure display unit 38a The general figure display unit 38a is display-controlled so that As a result, when the game situation immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is resumed when the supply of the operation power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal state are displayed in a mode corresponding to the restart of the game situation. It becomes possible to start the display on the diagram display unit 38a.

The first deviation display data for special drawing and the second deviation display for special drawing in the lottery processing (step SD102, step SD109) for initial display data for special drawing executed in the display start processing (FIG. 202). The selection probabilities of the data, the third deviation display data for the special figure, the first hit display data for the special figure, the second hit display data for the special figure, and the third hit display data for the special figure are the same. The configuration is not limited, and the configurations may be substantially the same although they are slightly different, or the configurations may have significantly different selection probabilities. As a configuration having greatly different selection probabilities, for example, a configuration in which the total selection probability of the first to third outlier display data for special maps is higher than the total selection probability of the first to third per display data for special maps Or a low configuration.

Further, the first deviation display data for a general figure and the second deviation display for a general figure in the lottery processing (step SD104, step SD113) for initial display data for a general figure executed in the display start processing (FIG. 202). The selection probabilities of the data, the third off-display data for general drawings, and the hit display data for general drawings are not limited to the same configuration, and may be slightly different but substantially the same. The selection probabilities may differ greatly.

Further, as the display data selected in the lottery process (step SD102, step SD109) for the initial display data for special figures executed in the display start process (FIG. 202), a display not included in the result of stopping the game is displayed. It may be configured to include display data for performing. Further, as display data selected in the lottery process (step SD104, step SD113) for initial display data for universal figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 202), a display not included in the stop result of the variable display times. It may be configured to include display data for performing the above.

When the first RAM clear process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the display start process (FIG. 202) steps SD102 to SD105 are executed, while the second RAM clear process is executed. In this case, the display start process (FIG. 202) may be configured such that steps SD102 to SD105 are not executed. Further, when the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the steps SD102 to SD105 of the display starting process (FIG. 202) are executed, while the first RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, the display start process (FIG. 202) may be configured such that steps SD102 to SD105 are not executed.

<61st Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents displayed on the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted are different from those in the 56th embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 56th embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the 56th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SD201 to SD219 in the display start processing is executed by using the specific control program and the specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD201: NO), the special drawing display portion 37a is provided in the lottery target counter provided in the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221. "7" corresponding to the number of the emitted light emitting units is set (step SD202). The lottery target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is necessary to execute the processing of steps SD203 to SD207 or the processing of steps SD211 to SD215.

After that, a random number value is acquired from the special figure random number circuit corresponding to the value of the lottery target counter (step SD203). In the present embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with random numbers for special figures corresponding to the number of light emitting sections provided in the special figure display section 37a. Specifically, since the special figure display section 37a is provided with seven light emitting sections, seven special figure random number circuits are provided. These seven random numbers circuits for special figures have a relatively short period (for example, 1 microsecond to 7 microseconds) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and each of them is held by a different cycle. In this configuration, the backup power is supplied to stop the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. This is a configuration capable of storing and holding the random number value immediately before.

When the seven light emitting units of the special figure display unit 37a are the first to seventh light emitting sections and the seven special figure random number circuits are the first to seventh special figure random number circuits, the first special figure The special random number circuit corresponds to the first light emitting unit, the second special figure random number circuit corresponds to the second light emitting unit, the third special figure random number circuit corresponds to the third light emitting unit, The fourth special figure random number circuit corresponds to the fourth light emitting section, the fifth special figure random number circuit corresponds to the fifth light emitting section, and the sixth special figure random number circuit corresponds to the sixth light emitting section. Therefore, the seventh special figure random number circuit corresponds to the seventh light emitting unit. When the value of the lottery target counter is "7", it corresponds to the first light emitting unit and the first special figure random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "6", the second It corresponds to the light emitting unit and the second special figure random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "5", it corresponds to the third light emitting unit and the third special figure random number circuit. When the value of the counter is “4”, it corresponds to the fourth light emitting unit and the fourth special figure random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is “3”, the fifth light emitting unit and the fourth light emitting unit. When the value of the lottery target counter is “2”, the value corresponds to the sixth light emitting unit and the sixth special figure random number circuit, and the value of the lottery target counter is When it is "1", it corresponds to the seventh light emitting unit and the seventh special figure random number circuit. It should be noted that the random number circuits for the first to seventh special figures have the same numerical value range of random numbers (for example, "0 to 255").

After that, the special drawing lighting lottery process is executed (step SD204). In the special drawing lighting lottery process, the special drawing lighting lottery table is read from the main ROM 64. In the special drawing lighting lottery table, half of the random number values that can be taken by the first to seventh special figure random number circuits are set as winning random number values. Then, the random number value obtained in step SD203 is collated with the lighting lottery table for special figures.

If the result of the special drawing lighting lottery process is a lighting win (step SD205: YES), the lighting information is output to the area corresponding to the current value of the lottery target counter in the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221. Is stored (step SD206). Each area provided corresponding to the lottery target counter is cleared to "0" when the process of step SD202 is executed.

Then, the value of the lottery target counter is decremented by 1 (step SD207), and it is determined whether the value of the lottery target counter after the decrement by 1 is "0" (step SD208). When a negative determination is made in step SD208, the processes of steps SD203 to SD207 are executed again.

When a positive determination is made in step SD208, the initial display data for special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD209). The special display initial display data is determined by the presence or absence of lighting information corresponding to each of the lottery target counter values “1” to “7”. For example, while the lighting information corresponding to the values of the lottery target counter being “7”, “5” and “1” is stored, the lighting information corresponding to the other values of the lottery target counter is not stored. In this case, the first light emitting portion, the third light emitting portion and the seventh light emitting portion of the special figure display portion 37a are in the light emitting state, and the second light emitting portion, the fourth light emitting portion, the fifth light emitting portion and the sixth light emitting portion are Initial display data for a special figure that enables initial display for a special figure that is turned off is set in the first display data buffer 271.

By controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. The display contents that can be displayed on the special map display unit 37a as the initial display include the display contents that can be displayed on the special map display unit 37a in the normal game, and the display contents that are not displayed on the special map display unit 37a in the normal game. Contents are also included. In addition, as the display contents that can be displayed on the special map display unit 37a as the initial display and that can be displayed on the special map display unit 37a in the normal game, the final contents are displayed on the special map display unit 37a in the game result of the deviation result. Included is a special display deviation display and a special result hit display finally displayed on the special figure display portion 37a in the game times of the winning result.

After that, the lottery target counter provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "7" corresponding to the number of light emitting units provided in the universal figure display unit 38a (step SD210).

After that, a random number value is acquired from the universal figure random number circuit corresponding to the value of the lottery target counter (step SD211). In the present embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with the number of random numbers circuits for general figures corresponding to the number of light emitting units provided in the general figure display section 38a. Specifically, since the public figure display section 38a is provided with seven light emitting sections, seven public figure random number circuits are provided. These seven random number circuits for universal figures have relatively short period cycles (for example, 1 microsecond to 7 microseconds) when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and each of them is held by a different cycle. In this configuration, the backup power is supplied to stop the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. This is a configuration capable of storing and holding the random number value immediately before.

In the case where the seven light emitting units of the universal figure display unit 38a are first to seventh light emitting units and the seven random number circuits for universal figure are the random number circuits for first to seventh universal figure, The random number circuit for use corresponds to the first light emitting portion, the second random number circuit for universal figure corresponds to the second light emitting portion, the third random number circuit for universal figure corresponds to the third light emitting portion, The fourth universal figure random number circuit corresponds to the fourth light emitting section, the fifth universal figure random number circuit corresponds to the fifth light emitting section, and the sixth universal figure random number circuit corresponds to the sixth light emitting section. Therefore, the random number circuit for the seventh universal figure corresponds to the seventh light emitting unit. Further, when the value of the lottery target counter is "7", it corresponds to the first light emitting unit and the first random number circuit for universal figures, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "6", the second It corresponds to the light-emitting unit and the second random number circuit for general purpose, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "5", it corresponds to the third light-emitting unit and the third random number circuit for general purpose, and the lottery target When the value of the counter is "4", it corresponds to the fourth light emitting unit and the fourth random number circuit for universal drawing, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "3", the fifth light emitting unit and the fourth light emitting unit. 5 If the value of the lottery target counter is “2”, it corresponds to the sixth light emitting unit and the sixth universal figure random number circuit, and the value of the lottery target counter is When the value is "1", it corresponds to the seventh light emitting unit and the seventh random number circuit for universal figure. The first to seventh universal figure random number circuits have the same numerical value range of random numbers (for example, "0 to 255").

After that, the lighting lottery process for the universal figure is executed (step SD212). In the normal drawing lighting lottery processing, the general-purpose lighting lottery table is read from the main ROM 64. Half of the random number values that can be taken by the first to seventh universal figure random number circuits are set as winning random number values in the lighting random selection table for universal figures. Then, the random number value obtained in step SD211 is collated with the lighting lottery table for general figures.

When the result of the lighting lottery process for general drawings is a lighting win (step SD213: YES), the lighting information is displayed in the area corresponding to the current value of the lottery target counter in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control. Is stored (step SD214). Each area provided corresponding to the lottery target counter is cleared to "0" when the process of step SD210 is executed.

Then, the value of the lottery target counter is decremented by 1 (step SD215), and it is determined whether the value of the lottery target counter after the decrement by 1 is "0" (step SD216). When a negative determination is made in step SD216, the processes of steps SD211 to SD215 are executed again.

If an affirmative decision is made in step SD216, the initial display data for a universal figure is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD217). The initial display data for general drawings is determined by the presence/absence of lighting information corresponding to each of the lottery target counter values “1” to “7”. For example, while the lighting information corresponding to the values of the lottery target counter being “7”, “5” and “1” is stored, the lighting information corresponding to the other values of the lottery target counter is not stored. In this case, the first light emitting portion, the third light emitting portion and the seventh light emitting portion of the universal figure display portion 38a are in the light emitting state, and the second light emitting portion, the fourth light emitting portion, the fifth light emitting portion and the sixth light emitting portion are Initial display data for a general figure that enables execution of an initial display for a general figure that is turned off is set in the third display data buffer 273.

By controlling the display of the public figure display unit 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, the general figure display unit 38a performs the initial display corresponding to the display data. The display contents that can be displayed as the initial display on the public figure display unit 38a include the display contents that can be displayed on the public figure display unit 38a in the normal game, and the display contents that are not displayed on the public figure display unit 38a in the normal game. Contents are also included. In addition, as the display content that can be displayed on the public figure display unit 38a as an initial display and that can be displayed on the public figure display unit 38a in the normal game, the final content is displayed on the general figure display unit 38a in the variable display time of the deviation result. The general-purpose out-of-range display and the hit result variation display time include the general-purpose hit display finally displayed on the general-purpose display unit 38a.

After executing the processing of steps SD202 to SD217, "1" is set to the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD218).

If an affirmative decision is made in step SD201, or if the processing of step SD218 is executed, "1" is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SD219). .. Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether or not the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). The processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth sections. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, in the display start process (FIG. 204) executed after the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, “1” is set to the display start flag. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the processing at the start (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 204), when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) as already described, the special display in the first display data buffer 271 is performed. The initial display data for general purpose is set in the third display data buffer 273 while the initial display data for normal is set. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit are displayed. At 38a, the initial display will be started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is displayed. Then, the player visually observing such a change in the display content starts the initial display on the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a in the situation where either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed. You will be able to understand what was done. On the other hand, when the display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 204), the display start flag is set after the process of setting the display data ends. Is set to "1" and display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display contents from changing as described above.

On the other hand, when "1" is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD201: YES), the processes of steps SD202 to SD218 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display portion 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Is displayed on the special figure display portion 37a. When the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the universal figure display unit 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is displayed immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Corresponding display is performed on the public figure display unit 38a.

As described above in detail, when the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power or when the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed, Since "1" is not set in the display flag 375, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started, these special characteristics are displayed. Initial display is started in the figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a. The initial display on the special figure display portion 37a is a pattern on the special figure display portion 37a when a game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 and the start condition of the game is satisfied. It continues until the variable display of is started. The initial display on the universal figure display portion 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display portion 38a is started. Even at the factory shipping stage, "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375, so that the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a start the dislocation display.

Whether the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are displayed. When the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a are initially displayed when the operation is started, the supply of operating power is started and the display is performed on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a. Even if the displayed contents of the display portions 37a and 38a are confirmed when starting, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clear process and the set value update process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started can be confirmed, it cannot be specified whether or not the set value updating process has been executed. It becomes possible to do.

When the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a starts displaying. In this case, the display content on the special figure display unit 37a is started with the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started on the universal figure display unit 38a. The display in the general figure display portion 38a is started with the display content immediately before the display. That is, when the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a and the universal figure are displayed. The display content of the display unit 38a depends on the situation at the timing when the supply of the operating power is stopped, and the display content is various. On the other hand, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal The initial display is determined and displayed by lottery on the diagram display unit 38a. As a result, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the supply of the operating power is started. In the same manner as when the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223), the display contents of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a are displayed. It is possible to diversify. Therefore, even if the display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started when the supply of the operating power is started and the display is confirmed, either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to identify what has been executed.

In particular, when determining the display content of the initial display, the lighting lottery process is executed for each light emitting unit for each of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. This makes it possible to diversify the display contents that can be selected as the initial display.

It should be noted that the processing of steps SD202 to SD218 of the display start processing (FIG. 204) is executed even when the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Good. In this case, even if the special figure display portion 37a and the universal figure display portion 38a are confirmed when the supply of the operating power is started, the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are performed when the supply of the operating power is started. It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not any one has been executed. Further, in the configuration, if the variation display of the pattern is being executed on the special figure display portion 37a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped or if it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the display is started. The display of the display content before the supply of the operating power is stopped may be restarted by the special figure display unit 37a by not executing the processing of step SD202 to step SD209 of the processing (FIG. 204). .. In addition, when the variable display of the pattern is being executed on the universal graphic display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped or when the universal power is open, the display start process ( It may be configured such that the display of the display content before the supply of the operating power is stopped is restarted by the special figure display unit 37a by not executing the processing of step SD210 to step SD217 of FIG.

Further, in the special drawing lighting lottery process (step SD204) of the display start process (FIG. 204), a lottery of whether or not to individually light each of the light emitting units of the special figure display unit 37a is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light a predetermined plurality of units such as two or three. Further, in the drawing lottery process (step SD212) for the general figure of the display start process (FIG. 204), the lottery for whether or not to individually light each of the light emitting units of the general figure display unit 38a is not performed. A configuration may be adopted in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light a predetermined plurality of units such as two or three.

When the first RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, steps SD202 to SD217 of the display starting process (FIG. 204) are executed, while the second RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, the steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start processing (FIG. 204) may not be executed. Further, when the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the steps SD202 to SD217 of the display starting process (FIG. 204) are executed, while the first RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, the steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start processing (FIG. 204) may not be executed.

<62nd Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started are different from those in the 58th embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the 58th embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as the 58th embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the setting value update processing in this embodiment executed in step SC216 in the main processing (FIG. 185) of the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SD301 to SD316 in the setting value update processing is executed by using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt permission is set (step SD301). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt period.

In the present embodiment, the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are basically prohibited in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power. In the setting confirmation process (step SC213) and the set value update process (FIG. 205), interruption is permitted. Therefore, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) and the set value update process (FIG. 205) are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are prohibited, and the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (FIG. 205) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196). ) And the execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are permitted. However, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the set value update process (FIG. 205) is being executed, since the start-up processing flag is set to “1”, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. Even if 196) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196), the process for power failure monitoring, updating various counters, and fraudulent monitoring is executed while the game progresses. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) is terminated without executing the process.

After that, the setting update display flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" on condition that "1" is not set (step SD302). When the setting update display flag is set to "1", a positive determination is made in step SC402 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188), and the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step SC403) is executed. The processing content of the setting processing for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is the same as that in the 45th embodiment. By executing the process, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 124(a), for example, a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and selection as an update target of the pachinko machine 10 are made. The displayed set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, initial setting at the start is performed (step SD303). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". As for the game stop flag, when the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure process was not properly performed at the previous power shutdown (step SC205: NO), the specific control work area 221 and If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information since the last power-off of at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control (step SC206: NO), or the setting reference area 341 This is a flag that is set to "1" in step SC220 of the main process (FIG. 185) when the set value corresponding to the information stored in is not in the normal range (step SC207: NO). When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processing of steps SC701 to SC706 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196), while the positive determination is made in step SC707 to step SC708 to step SC708. The process of SC722 is not executed. As a result, when the information abnormality of the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, the processing for performing the power failure monitoring, the updating of various counters and the illegality monitoring is executed, while the processing for advancing the game is executed. Will not be done. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step SD303, the state in which the occurrence of the information abnormality of the main RAM 65 is specified is canceled when the set value update process (FIG. 205) is executed. Is possible.

After that, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 (step SD304). The setting update area 342 is a storage area for storing information on the setting value being updated in the setting value updating process (FIG. 205) as in the 45th embodiment. When the numerical information of “1” is stored in the setting update area 342, the set value of the update target (selection target or change target) is “setting 1”. When the numerical information of “2” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 2”. When the numerical information of “3” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 3”. When the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 4". When the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". When the numerical information of “6” is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is “setting 6”.

By setting "1" in the setting update area 342 in step SD304, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1". That is, in the present embodiment, the setting value to be updated is “setting 1” when the setting value updating process (FIG. 205) is started, whichever setting value the pachinko machine 10 currently has.

After that, the update start command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step SD305). Upon receiving the update start command, the sound emission control device 81 displays an image showing that the setting value update processing (FIG. 205) is being executed, and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation content for changing the setting value. , And the display control device 82 so as to display an image for recognizing the operation content for ending the setting value update process (FIG. 205) on the symbol display device 41. This allows the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation content and the setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (FIG. 205). It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the operation content necessary for ending the game. In addition to or instead of the above-mentioned notification being performed by the symbol display device 41, at least one of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 may be configured. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which an external output indicating that the set value update processing (FIG. 205) is being executed is performed to a device outside the pachinko machine 10, such as a game hall management computer.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is any one of "1" to "6" (step SD306). If it is not any of "1" to "6" (step SD306: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SD307). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes “setting 1”.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step SD306 or the processing of step SD307 is executed, it is judged whether or not the setting key inserting section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state by using the setting key (step SD308). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. To do. Therefore, the OFF state is maintained not only when the setting key inserting section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value updating process is started in the situation where the setting key inserting section 68a is in the OFF state. Also in this case, a negative determination is made in step SD308.

When a negative determination is made in step SD308, the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SD309: YES) (step SD310). As a result, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated by one step. When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SD309: NO) or when the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SD306, but the setting update is performed in step SD306. When it is determined that the value of the use area 342 is 7 or more, “1” is set in the setting update area 342 in step SD307. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "setting 6", the process returns to "setting 1".

When it is specified that the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SD308: YES), the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 is stored in the setting reference area 341. By determining whether or not the set value corresponding to the set information is equal to or more than the set value, the set value equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value selected before the current set value update process (FIG. 205) is started is determined. It is determined whether or not it has been selected in the current set value update processing (FIG. 205) (step SD311). When an affirmative determination is made in step SD311, "1" is set to the rising expectation flag provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD312). The increase expectation flag indicates whether or not the set value that is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value that has been selected by the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power this time (step SC201 to step SC223) is set. This is a flag for specifying by the CPU 63.

When a negative determination is made in step SD311 or when the processing of step SD312 is executed, the setting reference information 341 is overwritten with the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 (step SD313). As a result, the setting value information obtained as a result of the update in the setting value updating process this time (FIG. 205) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is the current state. It becomes the set value of the pachinko machine 10.

After that, the interruption is prohibited (step SD314). As a result, when the set value updating process (FIG. 205) is terminated and the process returns to the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 185), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) and the interrupt of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) are prohibited.

After that, the second RAM clearing process is executed (step SD315). In the second RAM clearing process, as in the first RAM clearing process (step SC218) of the main process (FIG. 185), the area provided in the clearing target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initialized. Execute the setting. The area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (that is, the setting reference area 341) is provided not in the clear target area 371 but in the non-clear target area 372.

After that, a return command for updating is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 (step SD316). The voice emission control device 81 receives the return command at the time of update to identify that the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) has been completed in the main CPU 63, and It is specified that the setting value update process (FIG. 205) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (step SC201 to step SC223). Then, similar to the forty-ninth embodiment, the processing corresponding to the reception of the update return command is executed.

FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SD401 to SD413 in the display start processing is executed using the specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

When "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD401: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the rising expectation flag of the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221. The determination is made (step SD402). When "1" is not set in the rising expectation flag (step SD402: NO), the first display allocation table 391 for special drawings provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD403), and the rising expectation flag is set to " If "1" is set (step SD402: YES), the second display allocation table 392 for special drawings provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD404).

207(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display allocation table 391 for special drawings, and FIG. 207(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second display allocation table 392 for special drawings. It is a figure. In both the first display distribution table 391 for special maps and the second display distribution table 392 for special maps, the first initial display data for special maps and the initial display data for special maps are used as initial display data for special maps. There are second initial display data and third initial display data for special drawings.

The first initial display data for the special figure is data for displaying the first initial display for the special figure on the special figure display portion 37a, and the second initial display data for the special figure is the second initial for the special figure. The display is data for displaying the special figure display portion 37a, and the third initial display data for special figure is data for displaying the third initial display for special figure on the special figure display portion 37a. The display contents of the first initial display for special maps, the second initial display for special maps, and the third initial display for special maps are different from each other.

The first initial display data for the special figure, the second initial display data for the special figure, and the third initial display data for the special figure are the stop result setting process for the jackpot result in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13) (step This is the display data that is not selected in either the step S507) or the stop result setting process for the disconnection result (step S509). Therefore, the first initial display for special maps, the second initial display for special maps, and the third initial display for special maps are different from the display contents that can be finally stopped and displayed on the special map display portion 37a at the game time. ing. Furthermore, the first initial display for special drawing, the second initial display for special drawing, and the third initial display for special drawing are displayed when the variable display of the picture is performed on the special drawing display portion 37a at the game time. The display contents are not selected as. As a result, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and at the time of starting the display in the special figure display portion 37a, the first initial display for the special figure, the second initial display for the special figure, and the third initial point for the special figure. If any of the initial displays is performed, one of the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is performed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power this time. It is possible to know what has been executed.

As shown in FIGS. 207(a) and 207(b), the first display allocation table 391 for special maps and the second display allocation table 392 for special maps respectively include the first display allocation table 391 for special drawings. The numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for special figures is set for each of the third initial display data. The special display initial display counter 381 is provided in the non-clearing target area 372 as in the case of the 58th embodiment. If the backup power is continuously supplied, the numerical value immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped without being initialized even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed. The state in which the information is stored is maintained. Further, the numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for special figures is updated in step SC706 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196) as in the 58th embodiment.

In the special display first display allocation table 391, as shown in FIG. 207(a), the special display initial display counter 381 of "0 to 39" is added to the special display first initial display data. The numerical range is set, the numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 of “40 to 54” is set for the second special display data for special drawing, and the third initial for special drawing is set. For the display data, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for special drawings of "55 to 59" is set. In other words, in the special display first display allocation table 391, the selection probability of the special initial first display data is ⅔, so that the selection probability is highest, and the special initial second display is selected. The selection probability of the data is 1/4, so that the selection probability is second highest, and the selection probability of the third initial display data for special drawing is 1/12, the selection probability is the lowest.

In the special display second display allocation table 392, as shown in FIG. 207(b), the special display initial display counter 381 of "0 to 9" is added to the special display first initial display data. The numerical range is set, and the numerical range of the special display initial display counter 381 of “10 to 39” is set for the second special display data for special drawing. For the display data, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for special figures of "40 to 59" is set. In other words, in the special display second display distribution table 392, the selection probability is highest because the selection probability of the special initial second display data is ½, and the special initial display third third display is performed. The selection probability of data is ⅓, which is the second highest selection probability, and the selection probability of the first initial display data for special drawing is ⅙, which is the lowest selection probability.

Returning to the description of the display start process (FIG. 206), after the process of step SD403 or the process of step SD404 is executed, the lottery process of initial display data for special figures is executed (step SD405). In the lottery process for initial display data for special maps, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for special maps is acquired. Then, the special display first display allocation table 391 in which the acquired numerical information is read from the main ROM 64 in step SD403 or the special display second display allocation table read from the main ROM 64 in step SD404. By collating with 392, the display data to be displayed this time is selected from the first initial display data for special maps, the second initial display data for special maps, and the third initial display data for special maps. select.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for special maps is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD406). By controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. That is, when the first initial display data for special drawing is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first initial display for special drawing is performed in the special drawing display portion 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the second initial display data for special drawing is set to the special drawing, the second initial display for special drawing is performed in the special drawing display portion 37a, and the third initial for special drawing is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the special initial display 37a displays the third initial display for special drawings.

After that, it is determined whether or not the rising expectation flag of the clearing target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SD407). When "1" is not set in the rising expectation flag (step SD407: NO), the first display sorting table 393 for general figures provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD408), and the rising expectation flag is set. When "1" is set (step SD407: YES), the second display allocation table 394 for general drawings provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step SD409).

207(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display distribution table 393 for general drawings, and FIG. 207(d) is a description for explaining the second display distribution table 394 for general drawings. It is a figure. In both the first display sorting table 393 for general drawings and the second display sorting table 394 for general drawings, the first initial display data for general drawings There is the second initial display data and the third initial display data for general drawings.

The first initial display data for general drawings is data for displaying the first initial display for general drawings on the general drawing display unit 38a, and the second initial display data for general drawings is the second initial display data for general drawings. The display is data for displaying on the public figure display portion 38a, and the third initial display data for public figure is data for displaying the third initial display for public figure on the public figure display portion 38a. The display contents of the first initial display for general drawings, the second initial display for general drawings, and the third initial display for general drawings are different from each other.

The first initial display data for the universal figure, the second initial display data for the universal figure, and the third initial display data for the universal figure are the universal figure universal communication control process (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196). ) In the case where the result of the general electric open lottery executed by using the general electric utility object opening counter C4 to determine whether or not to open the general electric utility object 34a is a miss result, and the winning result The display data is not selected in any of the cases. Therefore, the first initial display for public figures, the second initial display for general figures, and the third initial display for general figures are the display contents that can be finally stopped and displayed on the general figure display unit 38a in the variable display time. Different. Furthermore, the first initial display for public figures, the second initial display for public figures, and the third initial display for general figures are displayed when the variable display of the pattern is performed on the general figure display unit 38a in the variable display time. It is the display content that is not selected as the target. As a result, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the first initial display for general drawings, the second initial display for general drawings and the third initial display for general drawings are started at the time of starting the display on the general drawing display unit 38a. If any of the initial displays is performed, one of the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is performed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of the supply of the operating power this time. It is possible to know what has been executed.

As shown in FIGS. 207(c) and 207(d), the first display sorting table 393 for general drawings and the second display sorting table 394 for general drawings each have a first display sorting table for general drawings. The numerical range of the general-purpose initial display counter 382 is set for each of the third initial display data. The general-purpose initial display counter 382 is provided in the non-clearing target area 372 as in the case of the above-mentioned 58th embodiment. If the backup power is continuously supplied, the numerical value immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped without being initialized even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed. The state in which the information is stored is maintained. Further, the numerical information of the general-purpose initial display counter 382 is updated in step SC708 in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196) as in the 58th embodiment.

In the first display distribution table 393 for general drawings, as shown in FIG. 207(c), the initial display counter 382 for general drawings of "0 to 29" is added to the first initial display data for general drawings. The numerical range is set, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for a general figure of “30 to 49” is set for the second initial display data for a general figure, and the third initial for general figure is set. A numerical range of the general-purpose initial display counter 382 of "50 to 59" is set for the display data. That is, in the general-purpose first display allocation table 393, the selection probability of the general-purpose first initial display data is 1/2, so that the selection probability is the highest, and the general-purpose second initial display data is ½. The selection probability of the data is ⅓, so that the selection probability is second highest, and the selection probability of the third initial display data for general drawings is ⅙, the lowest selection probability.

In the second display distribution table 394 for a general figure, as shown in FIG. 207(d), the initial display counter 382 for a general figure of “0 to 19” is added to the first initial display data for a general figure. A numerical range is set, and a numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for a general figure of "20 to 29" is set for the second initial display data for a general figure, and the third initial for a general figure is set. The numerical range of the general-purpose initial display counter 382 of "30 to 59" is set for the display data. That is, in the second display distribution table 394 for a general figure, the selection probability of the third initial display data for a general figure is 1/2, so the selection probability is highest, and the first initial display for a general figure is The selection probability of the data is ⅓, so that the selection probability is the second highest, and the selection probability of the second initial display data for general drawings is ⅙, the lowest selection probability.

Returning to the description of the display start process (FIG. 206), after the process of step SD408 or the process of step SD409 is executed, the lottery process of initial display data for universal graphics is executed (step SD410). In the lottery process for initial display data for general drawings, the current numerical value information of the initial display counter 382 for general drawings is acquired. Then, the obtained numerical value information is read from the main ROM 64 in the main side ROM 64 at the first display distribution table 393 for general maps, or in step SD409 the main display is read out from the main side ROM 64 as the second display distribution table for general maps. By checking against 394, the display data to be displayed this time is selected from the first initial display data for general drawings, the second initial display data for general drawings, and the third initial display data for general drawings. select.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for general drawings is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD411). By controlling the display of the public figure display unit 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, the general figure display unit 38a performs the initial display corresponding to the display data. That is, when the first initial display data for a general figure is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first initial display for a general figure is performed on the general figure display section 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 is displayed. If the second initial display data for a public figure is set in the, the second initial display for a general figure is performed in the general figure display unit 38a, and the third initial for a general figure is displayed in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, the third figure display for a figure is performed on the figure display portion 38a.

After performing the processing of steps SD402 to SD411, "1" is set to the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 (step SD412).

If an affirmative decision is made in step SD401, or if the processing of step SD412 is executed, "1" is set to the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control (step SD413). .. Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether or not the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). The processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth sections. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, in the display start processing (FIG. 206) executed after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display start flag is set to “1”. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the processing at the start (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start processing (FIG. 206), as described above, when either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing is executed in the main processing (FIG. 185), the special display in the first display data buffer 271 is performed. Any one of the first to third initial display data for general purpose is set and any one of the first to third initial display data for general purpose is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit are displayed. At 38a, the initial display will be started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is displayed. On the other hand, when the display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 206), the display start flag is set after the process of setting the display data ends. Is set to "1" and display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display contents from changing as described above.

On the other hand, when "1" is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD401: YES), the processes of steps SD402 to SD412 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 is in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored as it is, and the third display data buffer 273 is immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as it is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display portion 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Is displayed on the special figure display portion 37a. When the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the universal figure display unit 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is displayed immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. Corresponding display is performed on the public figure display unit 38a.

As described above in detail, when the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power or when the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed, Since "1" is not set in the display flag 375, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started, these special characteristics are displayed. Initial display is started in the figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a. The initial display on the special figure display portion 37a is a pattern on the special figure display portion 37a when a game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 and the start condition of the game is satisfied. It continues until the variable display of is started. The initial display on the universal figure display portion 38a is continued until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the pattern on the universal figure display portion 38a is started. Even at the factory shipping stage, since "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375, the initial display is started on the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a.

Whether the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are displayed. When the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a are initially displayed when the operation is started, the supply of operating power is started and the display is performed on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a. Even if the displayed contents of the display portions 37a and 38a are confirmed when starting, it is not possible to grasp which of the first RAM clear process and the set value update process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started can be confirmed, it cannot be specified whether or not the set value updating process has been executed. It becomes possible to do.

On the other hand, when the set value update process (FIG. 205) is executed and a set value that is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set values so far is selected in the set value update process (FIG. 205), the special figure display unit 37a. The second display allocation table 392 for special drawings is selected as a table for determining the initial display to be performed on the other hand, whereas the setting value update processing (FIG. 205) is not executed or the setting value update is performed. As a table for determining the initial display to be displayed on the special figure display portion 37a when the set value equal to or higher than the advantage of the set values is not selected in the process (FIG. 205), The display allocation table 391 is selected. The first display allocation table 391 for special maps and the second display allocation table 392 for special maps have different initial display selection modes. Thus, by confirming the contents of the initial display when the supply of the operating power is started and the display of the special figure display portion 37a is started, the set value more than the advantage of the set values up to that time is newly set. It is possible to predict whether or not it has been done.

Similarly, when the set value update process (FIG. 205) is executed and a set value that is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set values up to that time is selected in the set value update process (FIG. 205), the general setting is performed. The second display allocation table 394 for general drawings is selected as the table for determining the initial display to be performed on the display unit 38a, whereas the setting value update processing (FIG. 205) is not executed, or As a table for determining an initial display to be displayed on the figure display unit 38a when a set value equal to or higher than the advantage of the set values is not selected in the set value update process (FIG. 205) The first display allocation table 393 is selected. The first display allocation table 393 for general drawings and the second display allocation table 394 for general drawings have different initial display selection modes. With this, by confirming the contents of the initial display when the supply of the operating power is started and the display of the general-purpose display unit 38a is started, the set value more than the advantage of the set values up to that time is newly set. It is possible to predict whether or not it has been done.

In addition, as described above, it is possible to predict whether or not a new set value equal to or higher than the advantage of the set values up to that time is newly set according to the contents of the initial display when the supply of the operating power is started and the display is started. There are a plurality of display sections, that is, a special figure display section 37a and a general figure display section 38a as possible display sections. As a result, since there are many items of judgment in predicting whether or not a set value that is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value up to that time is newly set, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the prediction by the player. ..

In addition, in the set value update process (FIG. 205), when the set value which is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set values is set, the rising expectation flag is set to "1", and the special display is used for the special display when the initial display data is selected. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the second display distribution table 392 or the second display distribution table 394 for general figures is referred to, and is more advantageous in the setting value update processing (FIG. 205) than the setting values up to that point. When the set value is set, "1" is set in the rising expectation flag, and the second display distribution table 392 for special drawings or the second display distribution table 394 for general drawings is referred to when the initial display data is selected. When the set value update process (FIG. 205) is executed, the rising expectation flag is set to "1" regardless of which set value is newly set, and the initial display data is selected by lottery. At that time, the second display allocation table 392 for special drawings or the second display allocation table 394 for general drawings may be referred to.

Further, initial display data for special maps that can be selected when the first display distribution table 391 for special maps is referred to, and special maps that can be selected when the second display distribution table 392 for special maps is referred to. It is not limited to the configuration in which the initial display data for special use completely matches, and the initial display data for special use and the special display for special use set in the first display allocation table 391 for special use The configuration may be such that the initial display data for special maps set in the second display distribution table 392 does not completely match. In this case, the display content of the special figure display portion 37a is clearly different depending on whether or not "1" is set in the rising expectation flag in the set value update processing (FIG. 205). Therefore, by confirming the display content of the special figure display portion 37a when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not the set value equal to or higher than the advantage of the set values up to that time is set. Is possible.

In addition, although the initial display data for special maps, which is common to the first display allocation table 391 for special maps and the second display allocation table 392 for special maps, is set, The first display allocation table 391 and the special display second display allocation table 392 may have one of the initial display data for special maps which is not set to the other. In this case, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for special maps which is set only in the first display allocation table 391 for special maps is executed by the special map display portion 37a, the setting up to that time is performed. It is possible to specify that the set value equal to or higher than the value advantage is not set. On the other hand, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for special maps which is set only in the second display allocation table 392 for special maps is executed in the special map display portion 37a, the setting up to that time is performed. It is possible to specify that the set value equal to or higher than the value advantage is set.

In addition, initial display data for a public figure that can be selected when referring to the first display sorting table 393 for public figures and public chart that can be selected when referring to the second display sorting table 394 for public figures It is not limited to the configuration in which the initial display data for a normal picture completely matches, and the initial display data for a general picture set for the first display distribution table 393 for a general picture and the general display The configuration may be such that the general display initial display data set in the second display distribution table 394 does not completely match. In this case, the display content of the general figure display portion 38a is clearly different depending on whether or not the rising expectation flag is set to "1" in the set value update processing (FIG. 205). Therefore, by confirming the display content of the universal figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not the set value equal to or higher than the advantage of the set values up to that time has been set. Is possible.

In addition, although common initial display data for general drawings is set for the first display allocation table 393 for general drawings and the second display allocation table 394 for general drawings, The first display allocation table 393 and the general display second display allocation table 394 may be configured to include the initial display data for general purpose that is set in one side and not set in the other side. In this case, if the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for a general figure set only in the first display allocation table 393 for a general figure is executed by the general figure display unit 38a, the settings up to that time are performed. It is possible to specify that the set value equal to or higher than the value advantage is not set. On the other hand, when initial display corresponding to the initial display data for general figures set only in the second general-purpose picture display table 394 for general figures is executed in the general figure display unit 38a, the settings up to that time are performed. It is possible to specify that the set value equal to or higher than the value advantage is set.

The initial display data for special maps is not limited to the configuration determined by the lottery, and the initial display data for special maps selected when the rising expectation flag is set to 1 is 1 There is only one type, and the initial display data for special maps selected when "1" is not set in the rising expectation flag is only one type, and the initial display data for each special map is different. It may be configured to have. In this case, the display content of the special figure display portion 37a differs depending on whether or not the set value that is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set values up to that time is set.

Further, the initial display data for the general figure is not limited to the configuration determined by the lottery, and the initial display data for the general figure selected when "1" is set in the rising expectation flag is 1 There is only one type, and the initial display data for general drawings that is selected when "1" is not set in the rising expectation flag is only one type, and the initial display data for each general drawing is different. It may be configured to have. In this case, the display content of the general figure display section 38a differs depending on whether or not the set value that is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set values up to that time is set.

<63rd Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is restarted are different from those in the 62nd embodiment. The configuration different from that of the 62nd embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 62nd embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The processes of steps SD501 to SD514 in the display start process are executed by using the program for specific control and the data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

When "1" is not set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD501: NO), the initial display lottery process is executed (step SD502). In the lottery process for initial display, the same process as step SD402 to step SD411 of the display start process (FIG. 206) in the 62nd embodiment is executed. Accordingly, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed, the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started as in the 62nd embodiment. In some cases initial display is performed. Then, "1" is set to the initial display flag 375 (step SD503).

When "1" is set in the initial display flag 375 (step SD501: YES), information indicating whether or not the game game is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the specific control work area 221 is stored. By referring to the storage area, it is determined whether or not the situation in which the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the game game (step SD504). Information indicating that the game time is being executed is stored in the storage area when the game time is started, and information indicating that the game time is being executed is stored when the game time is ended. Erased from the area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, they are stored and held.

In addition, by referring to the storage area in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control that stores information indicating whether or not the open/close execution mode is being executed, the operating power during the open/close execution mode is being executed. It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power has been restarted after the supply of power has been stopped (step SD505). The storage area stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and indicates that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is ended. The information is erased from the storage area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, they are stored and held.

If the last stop of the supply of operating power was neither during the game times nor during the open/close execution mode (step SD504 and step SD505: NO), the first display shake for special drawing from the main ROM 64 The minute table 391 is read (step SD506). Then, a lottery process for initial display data for special drawings is executed (step SD507). In the lottery process for initial display data for special maps, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for special maps is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information with the first display distribution table 391 for special figures read out from the main ROM 64 in step SD506, the display data to be displayed this time is displayed for special figures. Select from the first initial display data, the second initial display data for special figures, and the third initial display data for special figures.

The display data selected by the lottery process of the initial display data for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD508). By controlling the display of the special figure display unit 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed on the special figure display unit 37a. That is, when the first initial display data for special drawing is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first initial display for special drawing is performed in the special drawing display portion 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 is displayed. When the second initial display data for special drawing is set to the special drawing, the second initial display for special drawing is performed in the special drawing display portion 37a, and the third initial for special drawing is displayed in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, the special initial display 37a displays the third initial display for special drawings.

On the other hand, if the previous stop of the supply of operating power was either during the game times or during the open/close execution mode (step SD504 or step SD505: YES), the initial display data for special maps is Since it is not set in the 1 display data buffer 271, the display data stored before the supply of the operating power is stopped remains in the first display data buffer 271. Therefore, when the display on the special figure display unit 37a is started, the display content of the special figure display unit 37a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is restarted as it is.

When the affirmative judgment is made in step SD504, the affirmative judgment is made in step SD505, or the process of step SD508 is executed, the fluctuation of the general figure display portion 38a in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for the specific control. By referring to the storage area in which the information indicating whether or not it is being displayed is stored, the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display portion 38a. It is determined whether or not it is the situation (step SD509). The storage area stores information indicating that the variable display of the picture is being performed on the universal figure display section 38a when the variable display of the pattern is started on the universal figure display section 38a. When the variable display of the pattern is terminated at, the information indicating that the variable display of the pattern is being executed is erased from the storage area on the public figure display portion 38a. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, they are stored and held.

In addition, by referring to the storage area in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control that stores information indicating whether or not the normal power open state is being executed, the normal power open state is being executed. It is determined whether or not the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped (step SD510). Information indicating that the universal power open state is being executed is stored in the storage area when the universal power open state is started, and the universal power open state is being executed when the universal power open state is ended. The information indicating that there is is erased from the storage area. The information in the storage area is stored and retained when the backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is restarted, they are stored and held.

If the previous stoppage of the supply of operating power was neither during the variable display of the picture on the universal graphic display section 38a nor during the universal power open state (step SD509 and step SD510: NO), the main ROM 64 The first display allocation table 393 for general drawings is read from (step SD511). Then, the lottery process of the initial display data for universal graphics is executed (step SD512). In the lottery process for initial display data for general drawings, the current numerical value information of the initial display counter 382 for general drawings is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information with the first display sorting table 393 for general figures read from the main ROM 64 in step SD511, the display data to be displayed this time is displayed for general figures. Select from the first initial display data, the second initial display data for general drawings, and the third initial display data for general drawings.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for general drawings is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD513). By controlling the display of the public figure display unit 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, the general figure display unit 38a performs the initial display corresponding to the display data. That is, when the first initial display data for a general figure is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first initial display for a general figure is performed on the general figure display section 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 is displayed. If the second initial display data for a public figure is set in the, the second initial display for a general figure is performed in the general figure display unit 38a, and the third initial for a general figure is displayed in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, the third figure display for a figure is performed on the figure display portion 38a.

On the other hand, if the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was during execution of variable display of the picture on the universal graphic display unit 38a or during execution of the universal power open state (step SD509 or step SD510: YES), Since the initial display data for general use is not set in the third display data buffer 273, the display data stored before the supply of the operating power is stored in the third display data buffer 273 as it is. .. Therefore, when the display on the public figure display unit 38a is started, the display content of the public figure display unit 38a immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is restarted as it is.

When the process of step SD503 is executed, the affirmative judgment is made in step SD509, the affirmative judgment is made in step SD510, or the process of step SD513 is executed, the clearing target area of the work area 221 for specific control is executed. The display start flag provided in 371 is set to "1" (step SD514). Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly indicates whether or not the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b should be started. This is a flag for specifying by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not perform the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b. When the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b.

Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). The processing timing is after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, the general figure reservation display unit 38b, and the first to fourth sections. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing the display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed. Then, in the display start process (FIG. 202) executed after the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223) is finished, “1” is set to the display start flag. As a result, immediately after the supply of the operating power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of the operating power is performed. After the processing at the start (step SC201 to step SC223) is completed, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure reservation display unit 37b, the general figure display unit 38a, and the general figure reservation display unit 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 202), as already described, even in the situation where neither the first RAM clear process nor the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the first display data buffer 271 is stored. The initial display data for special figures may be set and the initial display data for general figures may be set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit are displayed. At 38a, the initial display will be started immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped is displayed. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 208), the display start flag is set after the process of setting the display data ends. Is set to "1" and display of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display contents from changing as described above.

According to the above configuration, even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the operating power is supplied. When the stopped situation is neither during the execution of the game times nor during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, when the display is started on the special figure display section 37a, the initial is set on the special figure display section 37a. The display starts. Even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process are not executed in the process at the start of supplying the operating power (step SC201 to step SC223), the supply of the operating power is stopped. When the display is started on the public figure display unit 38a in the case where the display is not being performed on the general figure display unit 38a while the variable display of the pattern is being executed or the general electric open state is being executed. Initial display is started in the section 38a. Then, as described above, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the set value updating process is executed in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the start of supplying the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a and Initial display is carried out on the universal figure display section 38a. Accordingly, even if it is confirmed that the initial display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a when the supply of the operating power is started, the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are performed. It becomes possible not to specify that any one has been executed.

Further, when the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the set value update process are not executed, when the initial display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a, the special display is selected during the lottery process of the initial display data. The first display allocation table 391 for general purpose and the first display allocation table 393 for general purpose are referred to. As a result, only when the set value update process (FIG. 205) is executed and a set value equal to or greater than the advantage of the set values up to that time is newly set, the special display is used for the initial display data lottery process. It is possible to refer to the second display allocation table 392 and the second display allocation table 394 for general purpose. Therefore, even if the configuration is such that it is not possible to specify that either the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing has been executed as described above, the supply of operating power is started and the special figure display unit By confirming the contents of the initial display when the display of 37a and the general figure display portion 38a is started, it is possible to predict to the player whether or not the set value that is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set values up to that time is newly set. It is possible to

On the other hand, the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is either during execution of the game times or during execution of the opening/closing execution mode, and the first RAM in the process (step SC201 to step SC223) at the time of starting the supply of operating power. If the clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed, when the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a, the special figure display unit has the display content just before the supply of the operating power is stopped. The display of 37a is controlled. In addition, when the supply of the operating power is stopped is either the execution of the variable display of the picture on the universal display unit 38a or the execution of the universal power open state, the process at the start of the supply of the operating power (step SC201). ~ If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed in step SC223), the display content immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped when the display is started on the universal figure display unit 38a The general figure display unit 38a is display-controlled so that As a result, when the game situation immediately before the supply of the operation power is stopped is resumed when the supply of the operation power is resumed, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal state are displayed in a mode corresponding to the restart of the game situation. It becomes possible to start the display on the diagram display unit 38a.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. By the way, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied to the configurations of the above-described embodiments individually or in combination.

(1) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, the number of times the open/close execution mode is generated per unit game is calculated as a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the open/close execution mode. The number of times the open/close execution mode is generated may be divided by the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA to calculate the result. In addition to or instead of this, the result of dividing the number of times the open/close execution mode is generated by the total number of balls entering the first operating port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 is calculated. May be Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-63rd embodiment.

(2) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, as a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode for the number of times of the high frequency support mode and the number of times of opening/closing execution mode per unit game time. However, in addition to or instead of this, the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode may be divided by the total number of discharged game balls from the game area PA to calculate the result. Good. In addition to or instead of this, the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode by the total number of balls entering the first operation port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 is calculated. It may be configured. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-63rd embodiment.

(3) As a game result that triggers the opening and closing execution mode, not only a big hit result but also a small hit result may be present. When the small hit result is obtained, the open/close execution mode is generated, but the win/loss lottery mode and the support mode are not changed before and after the open/close execution mode. In addition, the opening/closing execution mode that results in a small hit may be a low-frequency winning mode. In this case, when the big hit result occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the big hit result is stored in the history memory 117, and when the small hit result occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the small hit result is the history. It may be configured to be stored in the memory 117 for use. Further, in this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 may be used to calculate the parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the big hit result and the parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence of the small hit result. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-63rd embodiment.

Further, the probability of winning the small hit result may change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, or may not change. In the case of a configuration in which the probability of winning the small hit result changes according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the small hit result may be. It may be configured to have a low probability of performing.

In addition, in the configuration in which the small hit result exists, the holding information acquired when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 and the holding information acquired when the game ball enters the second operating port 34. When the jackpot result and the jackpot result are different from each other, the distribution ratios of the jackpot results are different, and when aiming to enter the first working opening 33, the variable display unit 36 is used in the game area PA. Also, the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side area, and when aiming to enter the second working opening 34, the game ball flows down the area on the right side of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. The shooting operation may be performed as described above, and the small hit result may be generated based on the hold information acquired when the game ball enters the first operating port 33.

In the configuration, the following 51st parameter may be present as a result of managing the game history. It should be noted that the normal period is the sum of the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result based on the ball entering the first operation port 33 and the execution period of the low frequency support mode instead of the opening/closing execution mode. To do. Further, the number of balls entered into the outlet 24a during the normal period is the number of balls entered K51, and the number of balls entered into the general prize hole 31 during the period of normal is the number K52 of balls entered. The number of balls entered is K53, the number of balls entered into the first operation port 33 during the normal period is the number of balls entered K54, and the number of balls entered into the second operation port 34 during the normal period is the number of balls entered K55.
The 51st parameter: the total payout number of game balls in the normal period (K52 x "the number of prize balls for winning the general prize hole 31" + K53 x "the number of prize balls for winning the special electric prize winning device 32" + K54 x "first" Ratio of the number of prize balls for winning in the operating port 33+K55דthe number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34)/the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in the normal period (K51+K52+K53+K54+K55) In the configuration in which the 51st parameter is calculated, when the winning probability of the small hit result varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Becomes Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used for calculating the 51st parameter is deleted when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. On the other hand, if the winning probability of the small hit result does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used for calculating the 51st parameter is not deleted even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

(4) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, instead of the configuration in which history information corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of which type of jackpot result occurs Thus, history information corresponding to the type of jackpot result may be stored in the history memory 117. In this case, a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence may be calculated for each type of jackpot result. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-63rd embodiment.

(5) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, various parameters (first to eighth parameters, eleventh to eighteenth parameters, twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, thirty-first parameters, and thirty-first to fourty-second parameters are periodically provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various parameters are calculated when, for example, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches the calculation trigger number (for example, 10000). The configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and the number of executions of the game times becomes the number of times of calculation trigger (for example, 1000 times). In this case, various parameters may be calculated. In this case, the history memory 117 may be cleared to “0” at the timing when various parameters are calculated. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-63rd embodiment.

(6) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameters, the thirty-first parameters, and the thirty-first parameters each time the calculation timing of various parameters comes. Although all of the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one part of the various parameters described above is a calculation target at one calculation timing, and the calculation timing may be changed. The parameter groups to be calculated may be sequentially changed. For example, the first to eighth parameters are calculated at one calculation timing, the first to eighteenth parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, the second to twenty-sixth parameters are calculated at the next calculation timing, and the next calculation is performed. The 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters may be calculated at the timing, and thereafter, the calculation target may be repeatedly changed in the above order each time the calculation timing comes. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating the parameters when one calculation timing is reached. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-63rd embodiment.

(7) In the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments, various parameters may be calculated using the history information of the history memory 117 on condition that a game is being played. For example, the calculation of various parameters may be performed on condition that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being unnecessarily repeated even when a game is not being played. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-63rd embodiment.

(8) The first to fourteenth embodiments are not limited to the configuration in which the management IC 66 is provided separately from the main CPU 63, and the function of the management IC 66 is performed by the main CPU 63. It may be configured. In this case, the correspondence information is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. The history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be provided separately from the main RAM 65. In the main RAM 65, the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate memory The configuration may be such that the function of the storage memory 171 is fulfilled. In the configuration in which the functions of the history memory 117, the operation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are fulfilled in the main RAM 65, the history data is recorded when the main RAM 65 clear processing (step S105, step S117) is executed. A part or all of the area corresponding to each of the memory 117, the operation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be cleared to “0”, and the history memory 117, the operation result memory 131, and the separate storage. Areas corresponding to the respective memory 171 may be excluded from the target of “0” clear, and “0” may be cleared when the corresponding clear condition in each of the above embodiments is satisfied. Further, in the main side RAM 65, the manual operation contents for executing the clear processing may be different between the areas corresponding to the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131 and the separate storage memory 171 and the other areas. Good. The function of the management IC 66 may be fulfilled by the sound emission control device 81.

(9) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the history information in the history memory 117 is stored and held without being erased, and the calculation is performed. The configuration may be such that various parameters stored in the result memory 131 are deleted. This makes it possible to prevent notification of various parameters calculated before the setting is performed after the new setting of the setting state is performed. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-63rd embodiment.

(10) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the main CPU 63 executes the setting value update process), If the set value is not changed before and after the setting, the history memory 117 may not be cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even though the set value has not been changed.

In this configuration, the area for storing the set value in the main RAM 65 is excluded from the target of clearing "0" even if the clearing process (step S117) is executed, whereby the set value updating process ( It is possible for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the set value has been changed before and after step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the management CPU 112 outputs a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed in, the management side CPU 112 may output a signal to the management side CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is executed.

Further, when the signal indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, when the management CPU 112 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the clearing process of the history memory 117 is not executed, and the management CPU 112 specifies that the setting value has been changed. In this case, it is possible to execute the clearing process of the history memory 117.

(11) In the third to fifth embodiments, even if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, even if the main CPU 63 executes the set value updating process), When the setting value is not changed before and after the setting, the arithmetic processing of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the setting state may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the various parameters from being calculated when the setting value is newly set, even though the setting value has not been changed.

In this configuration, the area for storing the set value in the main RAM 65 is excluded from the target of clearing "0" even if the clearing process (step S117) is executed, whereby the set value updating process ( It is possible for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the set value has been changed before and after step S118). In this case, when the main CPU 63 specifies that the setting value has not been changed, the management CPU 112 outputs a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed, and the main CPU 63 When it is specified that the setting value has been changed in, the management side CPU 112 may output a signal to the management side CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is executed.

Further, when the signal indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 refers to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the set value has been changed. In this case, when it is determined that the setting value has not been changed by the management CPU 112, the calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state is not executed, and the setting is performed by the management CPU 112. When it is specified that the value has been changed, it is possible to execute the calculation of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the current setting state.

(12) In the third to fifth embodiments, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, various parameters may be calculated by various calculation processes (step S1807) at that time. Instead, the various parameters stored in the operation result memory 131 at that time are stored in the storage target area of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171, and the calculation is performed. The information stored in the result memory 131 may be cleared to “0”. In this case, since it is not necessary to calculate various parameters under the situation where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, it is possible to complete the storage of various parameters in the separate storage memory 171 at an early stage. Become.

(13) In the third to fifth embodiments, the contents of various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 are changed by performing a predetermined display start operation. It may be configured to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c or another display device. The predetermined display start operation may be performed by operating a dedicated operation unit, or may be performed by performing a predetermined dedicated operation on an operation unit for performing another operation. This makes it possible to easily check various parameters stored in the separate storage memory 171.

(14) All of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 are set as the storage targets of the history information (or the entry history). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, and the second working opening 34 is the storage target of the history information. May be For example, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, and the second operating opening 34 may be the target of storing history information, or the general winning opening 31 may be the target of storing history information. It’s good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the entering mode of the game ball in a predetermined period for the entering part for which the history information is stored.

(15) A signal path for transmitting information corresponding to the result of entering a game ball in association with each of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. Although the configuration in which 118a to 118c are set is not limited to this, the information corresponding to the ball entry result for the same type of ball entry portion includes a plurality of the same type of ball entry portions. In addition to the configuration in which there are a plurality of ball entrance detection sensors in accordance with that, it may be configured to be transmitted as one type of information. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(16) In the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is used by the main CPU 63 for management. Although the configuration is such that it is transmitted to the IC 66, the configuration is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, since it is not necessary to execute the processing for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63.

(17) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o. The transmission to the main CPU 63 is performed at the start of supplying the operating power to the main CPU 63, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 can be bidirectionally communicated with each other. The correspondence relationship information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting the transmission of the correspondence relationship information is received from the IC 66. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped to the main CPU 63. Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, the correspondence memory 116 stores and holds the power. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the correspondence information is transmitted.

(18) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o. Is transmitted using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the information of the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence relationship A dedicated signal path for transmitting information from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 may be provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is being received from the main CPU 63 by the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(19) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the main CPU 63 sends information to the management IC 66, but the management IC 66 does not send information to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management-side CPU 112 based on history information may be transmitted to the main-side CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notification means so that the notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. By transmitting the command corresponding to the content of the parameter to the voice emission control device 81, the notification corresponding to the content of the various parameters is executed by using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. It may be configured to.

(20) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 is notified to the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters may be calculated by using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the like to notify the contents of the calculated various parameters. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA on the last business day is normal at the start of the game hall business. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-63rd embodiment.

(21) When various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the first to fourteenth embodiments are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 is operated until the prohibition cancel operation is performed. The game may not be started at. As a configuration that prevents the game from being started, for example, a configuration in which the game ball is prohibited to be launched, a configuration in which each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a may be invalidated, and a first operation opening It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the win/no determination process is not executed even if a win is generated in 33 or the second operating port 34. Further, the prohibition canceling operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the reset button 68c is being pressed, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. Alternatively, the operation means may be operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the game balls in the game area PA are in an abnormal mode. Further, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in the situation where the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is abnormal. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-63rd embodiment.

(22) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a in the first to fourteenth embodiments is stored in the history memory 117, various parameters are calculated using the history information. The configuration may be such that it is not executed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. In this case, the history information may be read by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and the operator of the reading operation may calculate various parameters using the read history information. Of course, the external device may be configured to execute various parameter calculations using the read history information. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-63rd embodiment.

(23) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 is provided with a power source different from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 is also provided. In the above, the configuration may be such that calculation of various parameters using history information and output of history information or various parameters can be performed. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the external device.

(24) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the reading terminal 68d used for reading the program from the main ROM 64 also serves as the terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the external device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the external device is the reading terminal 68d for reading the program from the main ROM 64. It may be configured separately. In this case, the terminal used to read the history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62, or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 in the main control board 61.

(25) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the operation result memory 131 are not limited to the configuration provided as a non-volatile storage unit such as a flash memory. However, for example, one of these memories 116, 117, 131 is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and hold information, and backup power is supplied to the memory, so that the main side Information may be stored and held even when the supply of operating power to the CPU 63 is stopped. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for that memory, or a configuration in which backup power is supplied to the memory from a power supply/launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65. Good.

(26) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 includes the management side CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU, and performs history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing based on programs and data stored in the management side ROM 113. The configuration to be executed is not limited, and the configuration may be such that a hard circuit designed to have these functions is formed in the management IC 66. More specifically, regarding the configuration, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives from the main CPU 63 a signal indicating that one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a has detected a game ball. The correspondence relation information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored in the history memory 117 from the correspondence relation memory 116, and the RTC 115 information at that time is stored in the history memory 117. To do. Further, for example, in the case of the sixth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that the game ball is detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63, that signal is received. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by 1. In addition, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters by using the history information at the time when the calculation trigger in the first embodiment or the like occurs. Further, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 68d is generated, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters that are calculation results and the history information.

(27) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips or may be provided as separate boards, and different control devices may be provided. It may be configured to be provided as.

(28) Regarding the number of game balls entering the out port 24a, the number of game balls is measured, while the number of game balls such as the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 History information including RTC information may be stored with respect to payout of a prize ball or entry into the privilege opportunity entry portion that triggers the prize determination process. As a result, it is possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each privilege opportunity ball unit with respect to the total number of discharged game balls, while allowing the history of game balls entering the privilege opportunity ball unit to be extracted. Become.

(29) The predetermined event that triggers the storage of the history information may include those other than those in the above embodiments. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower tray 56a is full, the timing when the full tank is started, and the timing when the full tank is released may be stored as history information. At least one of the time when the no-ball state is started, the timing when the no-ball state is started, and the timing when the no-ball state is released may be stored as history information, and the payout device 76 is in an abnormal state. That is, at least one of the timing when the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 is started and the timing when the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 is released may be stored as the history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the occurrence frequency of these events.

(30) In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal is set in advance in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal and is also recognized by the management IC 66 by the type identification command transmitted from the main CPU 63. May be Further, in the first embodiment, it is set in advance that the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management-side I/F 111 corresponds to the set value update signal in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the fifteenth buffer 122o corresponds to the set value update signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by the type identification command being transmitted from the main CPU 63. It may be configured. In this case, it is not necessary to previously set the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66 in advance.

(31) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 may be configured to send a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when it is operating normally. In this case, it becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(32) The display device that displays the setting value being updated in the setting value update process is not limited to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and may be the symbol display device 41, It may be a dedicated display device. Further, the display device that displays the setting value in the setting confirmation process is not limited to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and may be the symbol display device 41, or a dedicated display device. May be

(33) The operation unit operated to update the set value in the set value update process is not limited to the update button 68b and may be the reset button 68c. Further, the position corresponding to each of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is set as the rotation operation position when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and the rotation operation is performed. A set value corresponding to the rotational operation position of the portion 68a may be set. In addition, the setting key insertion portion 68a is configured to be able to be rotated further than the ON position, and each time the rotating operation beyond the ON position is performed, the set value being updated becomes the set value in the next order. The configuration may be updated.

(34) In the first to tenth and fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are arranged side by side, but they are arranged vertically. The configuration may be such that they are arranged side by side, or they may be arranged side by side obliquely, or may be arranged side by side so as to be in two stages above and below. Further, although the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged side by side in the first to fourteenth and twenty-second to sixty-third embodiments, they are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The configuration may be such that they are arranged side by side obliquely, or that they are arranged side by side so as to be in two stages above and below. Further, in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be used as the display devices for displaying the game history management results.

(35) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, history information (hereinafter referred to as variation target history information) used to calculate a parameter whose normal value varies according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. ) And history information (hereinafter referred to as non-variation target history information) used for calculating a parameter whose normal value does not fluctuate according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, in different areas in the history memory 117. It may be configured to be stored in. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the area in which the history information of the change target is stored in the history memory 117 is “0”. On the other hand, the area in which the history information of the non-variation target is stored in the history memory 117 may not be cleared to “0” while being cleared. Thereby, the calculation of the parameter whose normal value fluctuates according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately performed even after the setting value is changed, and the normal value does not fluctuate according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The accuracy of parameter calculation can be improved. Moreover, you may apply the said structure to the said 15th-63rd embodiment.

(36) In the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may not be designated in advance in the main RAM 65. Even in this case, the areas corresponding to the stack areas 222 and 224 are specified in the main RAM 65 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, but the areas are specified beyond the storage capacity of the areas. When the information storage process is executed, the originally unscheduled information is written in the originally unscheduled area, so that the main RAM 65 may be cleared to “0”.

(37) In the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, when the main RAM 65 clearing process (step S105, step S117) is executed, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are Although the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0", the configuration is such that the work area 223 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0". In step S117), not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". .. Further, in the clear process of the main RAM 65 (steps S105 and S117), not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but also the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency Although the support mode counter area 233 is cleared to “0”, the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to “0”. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 can be protected.

(38) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments described above, an operation for clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0", and a work area 223 for non-specific control and a non-specific control area The operation for clearing the stack area 224 for specific control to “0” may be different from each other. For example, when supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the update button 68b is clicked. When the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started during operation, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". This makes it possible to selectively erase each piece of information. Further, in the configuration, when supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating both the update button 68b and the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are provided. Alternatively, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may all be cleared to "0". This makes it possible to improve workability when collectively erasing information in the areas 221 to 224 in the configuration that allows selective erasing as described above.

(39) Similar to the nineteenth embodiment in the fifteenth to eighteenth and twentieth embodiments, when the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is the work for the non-specific control. The saved information may be saved in the area 223 and returned to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. As a result, even if the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 can be changed when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed, the main side can be changed. The state of the stack pointer of the CPU 63 can be returned to the state before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

(40) Processing for collecting game history information as processing corresponding to non-specific control in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, processing for calculating various parameters using the collected history information, and Although the processing for notifying the calculation result is executed, only a part of these processing is executed as the processing corresponding to the non-specific control, and the other is executed as the processing corresponding to the specific control. May be Further, in addition to or instead of the process for collecting information on the game history, the process for calculating various parameters using the collected history information, and the process for notifying the calculation result, other than these processes The process may be executed as a process corresponding to the non-specific control. For example, at least one of the fraud monitoring and the notification of the monitoring result may be executed as a process corresponding to the non-specific control.

(41) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control from the situation where the process corresponding to the non-specific control is being executed in the main CPU63, the flag register of the main CPU63, Although neither the stack pointer nor the various registers are saved in the main RAM 65, instead of this, the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to the non-specific control to change the process corresponding to the specific control. When returning, at least part of the information of the flag register, stack pointer, and various registers of the main CPU 63 is saved in the main RAM 65, and the saved information restarts the process corresponding to the non-specific control. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be restored to the corresponding storage area. As a result, the information of the main CPU 63 used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control can be carried over and used.

(42) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments described above, various parameters are calculated in response to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area reaching 6000. The total number of game balls may be greater than or less than 6000. For example, various parameters may be calculated when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches 60000. In this case, although the storage capacity necessary for storing the information on the game history is increased, the information on the game history is stored in the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62 as in the twenty-first embodiment. With the configuration of storing, it becomes possible to flexibly cope with the increase of the storage capacity.

(43) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, the sixty-first to sixty-eighth parameters are calculated as the game history management result, but in addition to or instead of this, the thirty-first embodiment is described. At least a part of the parameters, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter may be calculated.

(44) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, when the process of newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the work area 221 for specific control is set. In addition to the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to “0”. In this case, when a process of newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency The support mode counter area 233 and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to “0”.

Further, when a process of newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control The normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 may be cleared to “0”, but the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to “0”. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 can be protected.

In addition, when the process of newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are set to “0. The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, which are cleared, may not be cleared to “0”. In this case, the information stored in the non-specific control work area 223 and the non-specific control stack area 224 can be protected.

Further, when the configuration of (43) is provided, when the process of newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the first Although the history information for calculating the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter in the above embodiment is deleted, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are deleted. The calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0".

(45) In the first to 63rd embodiments described above, instead of the configuration in which the total number of discharged game balls discharged from the game area PA is used to calculate various parameters, it is supplied to the game area PA. The configuration may be such that the total supply number of game balls is used. In this case, for example, a detection sensor is provided so as to detect a game ball that has been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and has reached the game area PA, and the game ball supplied to the game area PA based on the detection result of the detection sensor. The number may be measured. In this configuration, since it is not necessary to count the number of game balls discharged from the outlet 24a, the outlet detection sensor 48a may not be provided.

(46) In the fifteenth to sixty-third embodiments, at least a part of the information of various registers and stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is stored in the stack area 222 for specific control or the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It may be configured to be saved by a load instruction. In this case, it is necessary to update the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when saving the information in the stack areas 222 and 224. Further, the information saved in the stack areas 222 and 224 may be restored to the corresponding storage area of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction. Also in this case, it is necessary to update the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when the information is returned from the stack areas 222 and 224.

(47) In the above embodiments, when the set value updating process is executed, the corresponding notification may be performed by any of the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. This allows the manager of the game hall to clearly understand that the setting value updating process is being executed.

(48) In each of the above-described embodiments, the history that the set value is newly set may be stored in the main RAM 65. Further, the history that the set value is newly set may be stored in the RAM provided in the voice emission control device 81. In this case, every time the set value update process is completed, a command including information about the set value set in the set value update process is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81, and the sound emission control device 81 81, each time the command is received, the information indicating that the set value is newly set and the information indicating the set value at that time are cumulatively stored in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81. In the configuration, when a predetermined operation is performed, the setting history of the setting values cumulatively stored in the RAM of the voice emission control device 81 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

(49) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the set value is newly set in the set value updating process, the information stored in the payout control device 77 indicating the number of game balls to be paid out is not erased. However, instead of this, the information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out may be deleted. Also, if the set value update process has been executed but the set value has not been changed, the information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out is not erased, and if the set value has been changed, the payout plan is to be paid out. The information indicating the number of game balls may be deleted.

(50) When the set value updating process is executed in each of the above-mentioned embodiments but the set value is not changed, the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 are not cleared to "0" and the set value is When changed, at least a part of each of the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 may be cleared to "0". For example, when the set value is changed, the area other than the set value counter in the specific control work area 221 may be cleared to “0”.

(51) Even in the situation where the processing for confirming the set value in the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 87) is being executed by the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second to thirty-third embodiments, it is a game benefit. The movable object involved may be continuously operated. For example, a V-zone and a non-V zone are provided in the ball-entering means that can enter the ball in the opening/closing execution mode, and the game ball entered in the ball-entering means is distributed to either the V-zone or the non-V-zone. In the configuration including the distribution member, the operation of the distribution member may be continued even in the situation where the process for confirming the set value is being executed in the setting confirmation process. In this case, even if an attempt is made to stop the operation of the distribution member by improperly generating a situation in which the processing for confirming the setting value is executed in the setting confirmation processing, it is possible to disable it. In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned distribution member, a ball that has entered the ball entering means is a movable object that continues to operate even when the process for confirming the set value is executed in the process for confirming the setting. The game ball into which the game ball enters the advantageous hole that will generate a round game after entering the ball and the discharge port which discharges the game ball entering the ball entering means without entering the advantage ball A distribution member that distributes the

(52) In the twenty-second to sixty-third embodiments, at least one of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may not be a target of information abnormality monitoring. In this case, even if it is specified that the information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area for non-specific control are provided. By making the configuration in which 224 is not cleared to "0", the situation where the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0" based on the occurrence of information abnormality is prevented. It becomes possible to do.

(53) In the twenty-sixth to sixty-third embodiments, information abnormality is found in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which all the monitoring of whether or not it has occurred is executed in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. Further, it may be configured such that the processing for clearing each area 221 to 224 to “0” when the information abnormality occurs is executed by the processing corresponding to the non-specific control.

(54) In each of the above-described embodiments, the main RAM 65 needs to be supplied with power to store and hold information, and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. However, the main RAM 65 may be a non-volatile memory that does not require power supply to store and hold information.

(55) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the various clearing processes of the main RAM 65, the target area of the main RAM 65 is initialized by executing a process of clearing “0” and an initializing process. Alternatively, the target area may be initialized by executing a process of initializing without executing a process of clearing “0”.

(56) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on, the setting value update processing is executed without any other operation. It may be configured to be. Further, instead of the setting key insertion portion 68a that is turned on and off by the setting key, a setting switch that is turned on and off directly by hand may be provided. Further, if the setting key insertion portion 68a is not provided and the reset button 68c is pressed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the setting value can be set without any other operation. The update process may be executed. In this case, a cover member may be provided so that the reset button 68c can be switched between a closed state and an uncovered open state. The locking device locks the cover member at the closed position. May be provided.

(57) A configuration in which the setting value being selected is confirmed and the setting value updating processing is ended when the state where the setting key insertion portion 68a is operated to the OFF position is held for a predetermined period in the setting value updating processing. May be Further, when the end reference period (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the setting value updating process was started, the selected setting value may be automatically determined and the setting value updating process may be ended. Further, when the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is pressed and held for more than the end reference period (for example, 10 seconds) in the set value update processing, the selected set value is confirmed and the set value update processing ends. It may be configured.

(58) The setting key insertion portion 68a is configured to be able to be rotated further than the ON position, and each time the rotating operation beyond the ON position is performed, the set value being updated is the set value in the next order. In the configuration that is updated to, the setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of the set value is started when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the situation where the setting key insertion portion 68a is operated to the ON position. Then, the setting confirmation process may be terminated when the setting key insertion portion 68a is operated to the OFF position. Also, when the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, a setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of the set value is started, and The configuration confirmation process may be terminated when the pressing operation is released. Further, in a configuration in which a setting switch that is directly turned on and off by a hand is provided instead of the setting key insertion portion 68a that is turned on and off by the setting key, it is mainly used when the setting switch is turned on. When the supply of operating power to the side CPU 63 is started, a setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of a set value is started, and when the setting switch is turned off or turned on after the off operation. The configuration confirmation process may be terminated. Further, in a configuration in which a setting switch that is directly turned on and off by a hand is provided instead of the setting key insertion portion 68a that is turned on and off by the setting key, it is mainly used when the setting switch is turned on. When the supply of the operating power to the side CPU 63 is started, the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value is started, and when the reset button 68c is pressed, the setting confirmation process is ended. Good.

(59) In the case where the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is executed in each of the above-described embodiments, the image corresponding to the procedure may be configured to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, so as to assist it. The voice corresponding to the procedure may be output from the speaker unit 54. For example, in the set value updating process in the thirty-third embodiment, the set value is changed by one step by pressing the reset button 68c, and the set value updating process is ended by turning off the setting key inserting section 68a. The configuration may be such that it is notified. This facilitates the work of updating the set value. Since the display control of the symbol display device 41 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed by the voice emission control device 81, when the setting confirmation process or the set value update process is started, the command corresponding to it is issued. When the main CPU 63 transmits the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process, the corresponding command needs to be transmitted from the main CPU 63.

(60) In order to end the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in each of the above embodiments, not to end the initial check period The check display may be continued until an operation is performed. As the operation for ending the operation, for example, the reset button 68c may be operated regardless of whether any one of the setting confirmation processing and the setting value update processing is executed, and an operation other than the reset button 68c. The unit may be operated. In this case, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until it is time to confirm the base value or the set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it becomes possible to confirm the base value or the set value after confirming whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. Moreover, since the check display is ended based on the operation of the operation unit, the check display can be ended at a desired timing.

(61) The first to fourth notification display devices when a predetermined operation unit such as the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is operated regardless of whether the supply of the operating power is started in each of the above embodiments The check display of 201 to 204 may be started. In this case, the check display can be started at a desired timing when confirming the base value or the set value. Further, in the configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, and the predetermined operation unit operated to start the check display or another operation unit different from the predetermined operation unit. The check display may be terminated when the operation unit is operated.

(62) In each of the above-described embodiments, when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a state where a specific operation unit other than the reset button 68c such as the update button 68b is operated, the first to fourth notifications are given. The check display may not be started when the check display of the display devices 201 to 204 is started and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started without operating the specific operation unit. .. In this case, in the configuration in which the check display is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to select whether or not the check display is started by the operation of the game hall manager.

(63) In each of the above embodiments, the base value is not displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 regardless of whether or not the gaming machine body 12 is in the open state, but rather the gaming machine body. When the open state of 12 is specified based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, the base values may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, first the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started, and then the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201. The base value may be displayed at 204. Thereby, before confirming the base value, it is possible to confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. Further, in the configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, and the predetermined operation unit operated to start the check display or another operation unit different from the predetermined operation unit. The check display may be terminated when the operation unit is operated.

(64) In the above embodiments, when the main process is started while the condition for executing the setting check process is satisfied, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Alternatively, the check display may be started when the main process is started in a state where the condition for executing the setting check process is not satisfied. In this case, if it is confirmed that the set value is confirmed, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed.

(65) In the above embodiments, when the main process is started while the condition for executing the set value update process is satisfied, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started. Alternatively, the check display may be started when the main process is started in a state where the condition for executing the set value update process is not satisfied. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed when it is determined that the setting value will be updated.

(66) First to fourth notifications when the main process is started in a state in which either the condition for executing the setting confirmation process or the condition for executing the setting value update process is satisfied in each of the above embodiments When the main display is started in a state where both the condition for executing the setting confirmation process and the condition for executing the setting value updating process are not satisfied without starting the check display of the display devices 201 to 204 The check display may be started. In this case, when it is confirmed that the set value is confirmed or the set value is updated, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed.

(67) In the check display in each of the above-described embodiments, the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in the light emitting state, but the first to fourth Each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the notification display devices 201 to 204 may be in a blinking state. Further, in the check display, each of the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 sequentially becomes a light emitting state one by one or in a part thereof, and the range of the initial check period Each of the display segments 321 to 324 may be in a light emitting state at least once.

(68) In each of the above-described embodiments, the process of causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform the check display is not executed as the process corresponding to the specific control, but corresponds to the non-specific control. It may be configured to be executed as a process.

(69) In each of the above embodiments, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be performed not by the main CPU 63 but by dedicated control means. The configuration may be performed by 81 or the display control device 82. In this case, when the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the base value to be notified is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means that is the control subject, and When the set value is displayed on the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the set value to be notified is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means that is the control subject. When the main CPU 63 executes the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the first to the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed in the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. Thus, the information corresponding to the start of the check display is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control subject so that the check display is started.

(70) In the above embodiments, when the power failure flag is not set to “1” or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag is set to “1” to stop the progress of the game. In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, each display segment 321 to 324 may be in a light emitting state similarly to the check display, or each display segment 321 to 324 may be in a blinking state. Good.

(71) The set value is set not only when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in each of the above-described embodiments but also when the setting change trigger is generated after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. The update process may be executed. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to turn the pachinko machine 10 off and on when starting the set value update process.

(72) In each of the above-described embodiments, the “setting change operation” and the “setting confirmation operation” may have a reverse relationship. That is, when the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned ON, it is specified that the "setting confirmation operation" is performed, and the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting is performed. A configuration may be specified in which the "setting change operation" is performed when the key insertion portion 68a is turned on. Further, the operation may not be overlapped between the “setting change operation” and the “setting confirmation operation”.

(73) In each of the above-described embodiments, the set value updating process is started based on the start of the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 under the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed, and the set value updating process is also performed. In the configuration described above, the setting value to be selected is not changed each time the reset button 68c is pressed, but the operation unit operated to start the setting value update process and the selection target in the setting value update process are changed. The configuration may be such that the operation unit operated to change the setting value of does not match.

(74) In the forty-ninth to thirty-sixth embodiments, the process of setting the information of the setting update area 342 in the setting reference area 341 in the setting value update process, that is, the process of setting the setting value to be used is performed. Although the second RAM clearing process is performed later, the configuration is not limited to this, and the second RAM clearing process may be performed before performing the process of setting the setting value to be used. In this case, the second RAM clearing process may be executed instead of the initial setting at the start in the set value updating process.

In addition, in the setting value updating process, neither the initial setting at the start nor the second RAM clearing process is executed, so that the clearing target area 371 is set even if the setting value to be used is set in the setting value updating process. The configuration may be such that the initialization of is not executed. When the configuration is applied to the 55th to 63rd embodiments, when the first RAM clear process is performed by performing the “RAM clear operation”, the clear target area 371 is initialized. When the set value updating process is executed, the initialization of the clear target area 371 is not executed. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the 56th embodiment, the initial display may be performed on the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a even if the setting value updating process is executed. The initial display may not be performed. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the 57th to 58th embodiments, even if the set value updating process is executed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are configured to display the deviation. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the deviation display is not performed. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the 59th to 60th embodiments, even if the set value updating process is executed, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a perform the misalignment display or the hit display. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the deviation display or the hit display is not performed. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the sixty-first embodiment, even if the set value updating process is executed, the respective light emitting units of the special figure display unit 37a and the general light display unit 38a are turned on. The lottery process may be executed, or the lighting lottery process may not be executed. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the 62nd to 63rd embodiments, the initial display data lottery process (step SD405) in the display start process (FIGS. 206 and 208) even if the setting value update process is executed. , Step SD410, step SD502) may be performed, or the initial display data lottery process (step SD405, step SD410, step SD502) may not be performed.

(75) Instead of the configuration in which the display data for causing the special figure display unit 37a to display in the 49th to 63rd embodiments is stored in the main RAM 65 that requires power supply when storing and holding information Then, the display data may be stored in a memory that is used for both reading and writing without supplying power when storing and holding information. In this case, the display data stored in the memory may not be erased during the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process, and the clear target area 371 is initialized during the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process. The display data stored in the memory may also be erased. Moreover, you may apply the said structure with respect to the display data for making a figure display part 38a display.

(76) Suspended information on the special drawing side acquired by the winning of the first working opening 33 and the winning information of the second working opening 34 in the 55th to 63rd embodiments. It is also possible to apply a configuration in which the stored information on the special drawing side that has been stored is stored separately, and the retained information on the second operating port 34 side is preferentially consumed, and conversely, the first operating port. A configuration may be applied in which the pending information on the 33 side is preferentially consumed, and a configuration in which the reservation information is consumed in the acquisition order regardless of whether it is the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is applied. Good. Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports may not be arranged side by side in the vertical direction, but the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 may be arranged side by side in the left and right directions. The mouths may be arranged obliquely side by side. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing operation device 28, both the working ports 33, 34 are arranged so as to be separated so that only the first working port 33 or only the second working port 34 can be won. It may be configured. In addition, the case where the hold information acquired due to the occurrence of a prize in the first operation port 33 is the target of the winning/disapproval determination, and the case where the hold information acquired due to the occurrence of a prize in the second operation port 34 is The profit obtained by the player may be different from that of the case where the judgment is made.

Further, in the above-described configuration, as the special figure display unit 37a, the first special figure display unit that displays the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first operation port 33 is provided, and the second operation port 34. You may separately provide the 2nd special figure display part which displays the result of the judgment of right or wrong of the hold information acquired based on the winning of. In this case, the holding information acquired based on the winning of the first working opening 33 is applied to the first special map display unit prior to the target of the success/failure determination or the target of the success/failure determination. The variation display of 1 is started and the variation display of the one game time is ended by displaying the stop result corresponding to the hit determination. Further, based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning of the winning on the second operating port 34 is the target of the winning/non-judgment determination or the object of the winning/non-judgment determination, When the variable display is started, the stop result corresponding to the win/fail judgment is displayed, and the variable display for one game is ended.

In the configuration in which the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit are provided as described above, the special figure display unit 37a when the supply of the operating power in the 55th to 63rd embodiments is started The configuration of the display content of may be applied to each of the first special figure display section and the second special figure display section, and may be applied to only one of the first special figure display section and the second special figure display section. May be.

In the structure in which the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit are separately provided as described above, one of the first special figure display unit and the second special figure display unit is displayed as a variable display of the pattern. When the target game time is being executed, the other game time may be configured so that the other game time is not executed as a pattern variable display target. Further, it may be configured such that the game times in which the first special figure display unit is the subject of variable display of the pattern and the game times in which the second special figure display unit is the subject of variable display of the pattern are overlapped. In such a configuration in which the game times can be executed in an overlapping manner, as a result of the game times in the second special map display unit, the expected number of winning game balls to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is larger than the case of the jackpot result. It may be configured such that the small winning result is set to be smaller and the winning probability of the small winning result is set to be higher than that of the large winning result. In this configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped, it is highly possible that the special figure display unit 37a displays a hit corresponding to one of the big hit result and the small hit result. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the first to third deviation display data for special figures and It is preferable that any one of the first to third hit display data for special drawings is selected.

(77) In the 55th to 63rd embodiments, the configuration of the characteristic display contents when the supply of the operating power is started is applied to both the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a. The configuration is not limited, and the configuration may be applied to only one of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. For example, the configuration of the characteristic display contents when the supply of the operating power is started may be applied only to the special figure display portion 37a, or may be applied only to the general figure display portion 38a. Good.

(78) In the fifty-fifth to sixty-third embodiments, even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the special figure display portion 37a and the universal figure are displayed until the display start flag is set to "1". Although the display of the display unit 38a is not started, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the display start flag is not provided and the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, it is special. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the display on the figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is started. In this case, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the supply of the operating power is stopped in the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. After the immediately preceding display is started, the display contents of the special figure display portion 37a and the general figure display portion 38a are switched to the display corresponding to the execution of the first RAM clear processing or the second RAM clear processing.

(79) Instead of the configuration in which the display controller 82 is controlled by the sound emission controller 81 based on the command transmitted from the main controller 60, the display control is performed based on the command transmitted from the main controller 60. The device 82 may control the audio emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, both the control devices may be provided as one control device, and the function of one of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of the both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are arbitrary.

(80) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a big hit is generated, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and sparrow balls.

Also, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, provided with a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reel is started by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

Further, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame to be openable and closable includes a storage part and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage part are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined so that the reels start to rotate.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, for example, the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination executed when one game is started based on the operation of the start lever is history information. It may be configured such that the actual winning probability of each winning combination is calculated by using the history information, and when a transition to a special game state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history thereof is stored. The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special game state, or the ratio of the number of stay games in the special game state to the total number of exhausted games may be calculated. Then, the history information and various parameters may be readable by an external device, or the gaming machine itself may give a notification corresponding to a calculation result of the various parameters. Further, it may be configured such that there are a plurality of stages of setting states such as “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and the winning probability in the lottery process of the winning combination is changed according to the setting state. In this case, the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments may be applied to the handling of history information when the setting of the setting state is newly set or the setting value is changed, the calculation of various parameters, and the handling of repeated changes. ..

(81) The characteristic configurations of the first to 63rd embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the thirtieth embodiment. The configuration, the characteristic configuration of the 45th embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the 55th embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment and the A characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, a characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment, a characteristic configuration of the eleventh embodiment, and a characteristic configuration of the thirty-third embodiment, The characteristic configuration of the 43rd embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the 58th embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment and the 15th embodiment may be combined. Characteristic configuration of the embodiment, characteristic configuration of the 21st embodiment, characteristic configuration of the 29th embodiment, characteristic configuration of the 34th embodiment, the 49th embodiment The characteristic configuration of the embodiment described above and the characteristic configuration of the 60th embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment and the characteristic of the 16th embodiment may be combined. Configuration, the characteristic configuration of the twenty-second embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the thirty-fifth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the thirty-ninth embodiment, and the fifty-third embodiment. And the characteristic configuration of the 62nd embodiment may be combined. Further, in addition to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to 63rd embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination, the configuration in the other mode may be applied in any combination.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in brackets or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
An information erasing unit that erases at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage unit under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit (third part). In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1809 in the management-side CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S2109 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the function of performing the process of step S2109 in the sixth embodiment. A function of executing the process of S2308, a function of executing the process of step S2608 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic A1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can set the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification.

In this case, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is erased under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is newly set. This makes it possible to adjust the content of the history storage means so that the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation after the new setting of the setting value to be used is performed can be suitably performed. ..

Feature A2. A ball entering means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball input means.
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504);
A privilege granting means (a step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the probability of being the assignment correspondence result in the assignment determination varies according to the setting value.

According to the characteristic A2, it is possible to change the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value. In this case, since the configuration of the characteristic A1 is provided, it is possible to suitably manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in the situation after the probability of the assignment correspondence result is changed. It is possible to adjust the content.

Features A3. The information erasing means erases all of the history information stored in the history storage means under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. The game machine according to A1 or A2.

According to the feature A3, all the history information stored in the history storage means is erased when the setting value to be used is newly set, so that the setting value to be used is set. It is possible to specify the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event with reference to the timing of the new execution.

Features A4. The information erasing means erases a part of the history information stored in the history storage means under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is left.

According to the characteristic A4, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information unnecessary for the management of the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event thereafter is deleted and the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is managed thereafter. It becomes possible to leave necessary history information. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event after the setting value to be used is newly set.

Features A5. The history information stored in the history storage means includes first history information (a history indicating that an opening/closing execution mode has occurred) in which the probability of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the history information varies according to the set value. Information) and second history information (history information indicating that a game ball has been discharged from the game area PA) that does not change according to the set value.
The information erasing means erases the first history information stored in the history storing means on the condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, at least one condition, The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized in that the second history information stored in the history storage means is left.

According to the characteristic A5, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the first history information corresponding to the predetermined event in which the occurrence probability changes according to the setting value is erased, and the occurrence probability is set to the setting value. The second history information corresponding to the predetermined event that does not fluctuate according to is not deleted. As a result, when the first history information before the setting of the setting value to be used is newly performed is taken over after the setting of the setting value is newly performed, a predetermined event corresponding to the first history information occurs. It is possible to delete the first history information, which is not preferable for specifying the frequency, when the setting of the setting value is newly performed. On the other hand, the second history information is referred to when the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event corresponding to the second history information is specified by not deleting even if the setting value to be used is newly set. Since it is possible to secure a large number of second history information, it is possible to accurately specify the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event corresponding to the second history information.

Features A6. A ball entering means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball input means.
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504);
A privilege granting means (a step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
It is a configuration in which the probability of being the assignment correspondence result in the assignment determination varies according to the setting value,
The first history information includes information corresponding to the grant of the privilege,
The game machine according to feature A5, wherein the second history information includes information corresponding to a game ball being discharged from the game area in a predetermined manner.

According to the characteristic A6, since the privilege granting probability varies depending on the set value, the first history information should be deleted when the setting of the set value to be used is newly set. Thus, it is possible to specify the privilege grant frequency under the condition of the newly set setting value. On the other hand, since the frequency with which the game balls are discharged from the game area does not change according to the set value, the second history information is not deleted even if a new set value to be used is set. It is possible to accurately specify the frequency with which the game balls are discharged from the game area in a predetermined manner.

Features A7. At least the history information is deleted when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means and when the history storage means stores a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, which is characterized by erasing a part.

According to the feature A7, when the predetermined history information is not stored in the history storage unit in the predetermined amount or more, the history information is not deleted even if a new setting value to be used is set. As a result, even if a new setting of the set value is repeated in a situation where the game is not played, it is possible to prevent the history information stored in the history storage means from being repeatedly erased.

Feature A8. Corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means under at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means Information deriving means for deriving the mode information (the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7.

According to the characteristic A8, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is provided with the configuration of the characteristic A1 and at least one condition is that a new setting value to be used is set. In the configuration to be deleted, a mode corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means, triggered by the new setting of the setting value to be used Information is derived. As a result, even if at least a part of the history information is deleted when the setting value is changed, the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed is grasped. It becomes possible to do.

Features A9. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, further comprising a mode information storage unit (separate storage memory 171) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation unit.

According to the characteristic A9, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is utilized by using the history information stored in the history storage means when the setting value to be used is newly set. Is derived, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. As a result, even if the set value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

Feature A10. The amusement machine according to feature A9, wherein the aspect information storage means can store a plurality of the aspect information.

According to the characteristic A10, since it is possible to store a plurality of mode information in the mode information storage means, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped on the basis of the timing when the new setting of the setting value is performed. It becomes possible to do. Further, even if new setting of the set value is repeated under the situation where the game is not played, the aspect information derived by utilizing the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played is the aspect information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in.

Feature A11. The aspect information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The gaming machine is a means for executing special processing when the setting value to be used by the setting means is set a predetermined number of times under a predetermined condition (in the third embodiment, in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to the feature A9 or A10, which is provided with a function of executing a monitoring process of repeated changes, and a function of performing a monitoring process of repeated changes in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment.

According to the characteristic A11, the set value is set in a situation where the game is not played so that the aspect information derived by utilizing the history information of the situation in which the game is substantially played does not remain in the aspect information storage means. When the new setting of is repeated, special processing is executed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature A12. The game machine according to any one of features A8 to A11, wherein the information deriving unit derives the aspect information when the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage unit in a predetermined amount or more. ..

According to the characteristic A12, since the form information is derived when the predetermined amount of history information is stored in the history storage means in a predetermined amount or more, it is possible to prevent the form information from being unnecessarily derived. ..

Feature A13. The information erasing means erases the history information from when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means until a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means. Without setting the set value to be used by the setting unit before the setting of the set value is performed when the history information is stored in the history storage unit in a predetermined amount or more. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, characterized in that the history information stored in the history storage means is erased.

According to the characteristic A13, until a predetermined amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting is performed. The history information that has been displayed is not deleted. As a result, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period.

Feature A14. The history storage unit includes a first history storage unit (first history memory 191) and a second history storage unit (second history memory 192),
The history storage executing means,
When the predetermined event occurs in a predetermined period from when the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit to when a release condition is satisfied, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the first history storage unit and Means for storing in both of the second history storage means (function of executing the processing of step S2604 in the management side CPU 112);
When the predetermined event occurs in a period that is not the predetermined period, a unit that stores the corresponding history information in the storage target side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit. (Function of executing the process of step S2603 in the management-side CPU 112),
Equipped with
The information erasing means erases the history information stored in the side of the first history storing means and the second history storing means that has been set as the storage target until then, when the cancellation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13.

According to the characteristic A14, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage unit, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting. The history information is not deleted. As a result, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period. Further, the effect can be brought about only by appropriately changing the history storage means for storing history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

Feature A15. Using the history information stored on the side set as the storage target of the first history storage means and the second history storage means, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived. The gaming machine according to Feature A14, which is provided with information deriving means (a function of executing the processing of step S2703 in the management-side CPU 112).

According to the characteristic A15, even if the history information is stored in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means due to the new setting of the setting value, the aspect using the history information It is possible to appropriately derive the information.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features A1 to A15. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Equipped with
The predetermined history information stored in the history storage unit before the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting unit is performed by the setting unit to set the setting value to be used. A gaming machine, which is stored and held in the history storage means even after being played.

According to the characteristic B1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, so that the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification.

In this case, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the history information stored in the history storage means is not erased but stored and retained. As a result, even if the setting value to be used is set, the history information up to that point can be continuously stored in the history storage unit, and accumulated in the history storage unit for a long period of time. It is possible to specify the management result of the game history by using the history information.

Feature B2. The history storage executing means stores the history information corresponding to the setting value to be used in the history storing means when the setting value is set by the setting means. In the embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S1307, and in the seventh embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing the process of step S2408). Machine.

According to the characteristic B2, even if the setting value to be used is newly set, the setting value to be used is newly set in the configuration in which the history information is not deleted and stored and retained. The history information corresponding to that is stored in the history storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to distinguish between the history information before the new setting of the setting value to be used and the history information after the new setting.

Feature B3. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, the storage execution unit at the time of setting stores information corresponding to the set value set in the history storage unit as the history information. The gaming machine according to feature B2.

According to the feature B3, it is possible to specify the content of the setting value set in the past by referring to the history information.

Feature B4. The history storage means includes a plurality of corresponding history storage means (history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of setting values that can be set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3.

According to the feature B4, since the correspondence history storage means is provided corresponding to each set value, it is possible to store the history information separately for each set value.

Feature B5. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the correspondence history storage means corresponding to the set value is set as a target for storing the history information thereafter (management side) (A function of executing the process of step S2406 in the CPU 112) The gaming machine according to feature B4.

According to the feature B5, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the corresponding history storage unit corresponding to the setting value is set as the subsequent storage object of the history information. It is possible to distinguish and store the history information.

Feature B6. Information derivation means (display output processing in the management-side CPU 112) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the correspondence history storage means that is the storage target The game machine according to feature B5, which is provided with a function for executing.

According to the feature B6, in the configuration in which the history information is stored separately for each set value, it becomes possible to derive the mode information corresponding to the currently set set value.

Feature B7. A ball entering means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball input means.
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504);
A privilege granting means (a step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the probability of being the assignment correspondence result in the assignment determination varies according to the setting value.

According to the feature B7, it is possible to change the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features B1 to B7. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
After setting the setting value to be used by the setting means, the history information is not erased until at least a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage means. (Function of executing the processing of step S2506 and step S2605 to step S2609 in the management CPU 112),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic C1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player sets the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification.

In this case, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting. The history information is not deleted. As a result, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period.

Feature C2. The post-setting correspondence means sets the set value when a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the history information stored in the history storage unit is erased before being performed.

According to the characteristic C2, when the history storage means stores a specific amount of history information that enables the management result of the game history to be specified in a predetermined period after the new setting of the setting value is performed. Deletes the history information stored in the history storage unit before the new setting of the set value is performed. This makes it possible to prevent wasteful history information from being continuously stored in the history storage means.

Feature C3. The history storage unit includes a first history storage unit (first history memory 191) and a second history storage unit (second history memory 192),
The history storage executing means,
When the predetermined event occurs, a unit for storing the history information corresponding to the side set as a storage target in the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit (step S2603 in the management-side CPU 112). Function that executes the processing of
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, the predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that is not set as the storage target. A means for storing the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means until the predetermined amount or more is stored (management side CPU 112). Function for executing the process of step S2604 in step 2),
Equipped with
After the setting, the corresponding means is
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, the predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit which is not set as the storage target. A means for changing the storage target between the first history storage means and the second history storage means (a function of executing the processing of step S2607 in the management side CPU 112) when the specific amount or more is stored;
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting unit, the predetermined history information is stored on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit which is not set as the storage target. When more than the specific amount is stored, a unit that erases the history information on the side of the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit that has been set as the storage target until then (step S2608 in the management-side CPU 112). Function that executes the processing of
The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, which is provided with.

According to the characteristic C3, until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting value to be used is set, it is stored before the setting is performed. The history information is not deleted. As a result, even if a new setting value is set, it is possible to specify the management result of the game history in a predetermined period. Further, the effect can be brought about only by appropriately changing the history storage means for storing history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

Feature C4. Using the history information stored on the side set as the storage target of the first history storage means and the second history storage means, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived. The gaming machine according to feature C3, which is provided with an information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the management-side CPU 112).

According to the characteristic C4, even if the history information is stored in both the first history storage unit and the second history storage unit due to the new setting of the set value, the mode in which the history information is used It is possible to appropriately derive the information.

Feature C5. A ball entering means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball input means.
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504);
A privilege granting means (a step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, wherein the probability of being the granting correspondence result in the granting determination varies according to the setting value.

According to the characteristic C5, it is possible to change the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features C1 to C5, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
Special execution means for executing special processing on the condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed in a special situation (in the third embodiment, monitoring of repeated changes in the management CPU 112) A function of executing processing, a function of executing monitoring processing of repeated changes in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of making negative determination in step S2106 of the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic D1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, the special process is executed on the condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in the special situation. This makes it possible to deal with a case where a new setting value is set in an unfavorable situation.

Feature D2. Characteristic D1 characterized in that the special execution means executes the special processing under at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed a specific number of times or more in the special situation. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic D2, even if a new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in the special situation, the special process is not executed when the execution frequency is less than the specific frequency. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the special process from being executed until the regular worker performs new setting of the set value less than the specified number of times in the special situation.

Feature D3. The special execution means, as the special situation, a situation in which a game is not being performed after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, or the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. In a situation in which the game has not been played over a predetermined reference since the game was performed, it is possible to execute the special process with at least one condition that the setting of the set value to be used by the setting means has been executed. The gaming machine described in the characteristic D1 or D2.

According to the feature D3, special processing is executed when a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed in a situation where no game is being played or a situation where a game is not substantially being played, When the act is performed, it becomes possible to deal with it.

Feature D4. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the special execution means executes a notification process as the special process.

According to the characteristic D4, the notification process is executed under at least one condition that the new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in the special situation. As a result, when a new setting value is set in an unfavorable situation, it is possible to prompt the user to deal with it.

Feature D5. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set. Information deriving means for deriving the mode information (the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D4, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic D5, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification.

In this case, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is used by using the history information stored in the history storage means. Derived. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

Feature D6. The special execution means, as at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed in the special situation, as the special processing, derives the aspect information by the information deriving means. The gaming machine according to feature D5, which is characterized in that the game is not performed.

According to the feature D6, even if a new setting value to be used is set, the aspect information is not derived when the setting value is set in an unfavorable situation. This makes it possible to prevent the aspect information from being unnecessarily derived.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D5 or D6, characterized by further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to the characteristic D7, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is utilized by using the history information stored in the history storage means when the setting value to be used is newly set. Is derived, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. As a result, even if the set value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

According to the characteristic D8, since it is possible to store a plurality of mode information in the mode information storage means, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped with reference to the timing at which the new setting of the setting value is made. It becomes possible to do. Further, even if new setting of the set value is repeated under the situation where the game is not played, the aspect information derived by utilizing the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played is the aspect information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in.

Feature D9. The aspect information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the aspect information,
Characteristic D7 characterized in that the special execution means executes the special processing when the setting value to be used by the setting means is set a number of times exceeding the predetermined number in the special situation. Or the gaming machine described in D8.

According to the characteristic D9, the set value is set in a situation in which the game is not played so that the mode information derived by using the history information of the situation in which the game is substantially played does not remain in the mode information storage means. When the new setting of is repeated, special processing is executed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature D10. A ball entering means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball input means.
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504);
A privilege granting means (a step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D9, wherein the probability of being the grant corresponding result in the grant determination varies according to the set value.

According to the characteristic D10, it is possible to change the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features D1 to D10. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set. Information deriving means for deriving the mode information (the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic E1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage degree of the player, so that the player sets the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification.

In this case, when the setting value to be used is newly set, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is used by using the history information stored in the history storage means. Derived. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in the situation before the setting value is changed.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, comprising a mode information storage unit (separate storage memory 171) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation unit.

According to the feature E2, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is utilized by using the history information stored in the history storage means in response to the new setting of the setting value to be used. Is derived, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. As a result, even if the set value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history in a situation before the set value is changed at an arbitrary timing thereafter.

Feature E3. The amusement machine according to feature E2, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information.

According to the characteristic E3, since it is possible to store a plurality of aspect information in the aspect information storage means, the management result of the game history in a plurality of periods is grasped on the basis of the timing at which the new setting value is set. It becomes possible to do. Further, even if new setting of the set value is repeated under the situation where the game is not played, the aspect information derived by utilizing the history information of the situation where the game is substantially played is the aspect information storage means. It is possible to increase the possibility of remaining in.

Feature E4. The aspect information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the aspect information,
The gaming machine is a means for executing special processing when the setting value to be used by the setting means is set a predetermined number of times under a predetermined condition (in the third embodiment, in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to the feature E2 or E3, which is provided with a function of executing monitoring processing of repeated changes, a function of executing monitoring processing of repeated changes in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the characteristic E4, the set value is set in a situation where the game is not played so that the aspect information derived by using the history information of the situation in which the game is substantially played does not remain in the aspect information storage means. When the new setting of is repeated, special processing is executed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the information deriving unit derives the aspect information when the history storage unit stores a predetermined amount or more of the history information. ..

According to the feature E5, the aspect information is derived when the history storage means stores a predetermined amount or more of the predetermined history information, and thus it is possible to prevent the situation information from being unnecessarily derived. Become.

Feature E6. A ball entering means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball input means.
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504);
A privilege granting means (a step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E5, wherein the probability of being the granting correspondence result in the granting determination varies according to the setting value.

According to the feature E6, it is possible to change the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features E1 to E6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic A group, the characteristic B group, the characteristic C group, the characteristic D group, and the characteristic E group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A ball entering means (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means (function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball input means.
An assignment determination unit that determines whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment information (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S503 and S504);
A privilege granting means (a step in the main CPU 63) for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant information in the grant determination. A function of executing the processing of S409 to step S412),
Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
The grant determination means has a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode so that the probability of the grant-corresponding result is relatively high or low, as the mode of the grant determination.
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of being the assignment correspondence result varies at least in the low probability mode according to the set value.

According to the feature F1, it is possible to vary the probability of the assignment correspondence result in at least the low probability mode in the so-called pachinko machine according to the set value. As a result, even in the case of a single gaming machine, it is possible to cause a situation in which the probability of being the assignment correspondence result in the low probability mode is advantageous or disadvantageous. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the high probability mode does not change according to the set value.

According to the characteristic F2, the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the low probability mode is changed according to the set value, while the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the high probability mode is not changed according to the set value. By doing so, it becomes possible to limit the influence of the set value to the situation in the low probability mode.

Feature F3. There are several types of benefits,
The amusement machine according to the characteristic F1 or F2, wherein the selection mode of the privilege does not change according to the set value.

According to the feature F3, the probability of the assignment correspondence result in the low probability mode is changed according to the set value, while the privilege selection mode is not changed according to the set value, so that the influence of the set value is affected. Can be restricted to situations in the low probability mode.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features F1 to F3, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic group F, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Features G1. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to a result of a game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means (steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112 in the first embodiment). The function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management-side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment).
Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and eleventh to tenth) so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed. In the fourteenth embodiment, first information display control means (a function of executing display processing in the management-side CPU 112) for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
Second information display control means (steps S202 and S208 in the main CPU 63 in the first to tenth embodiments) for controlling display of the information display means so that display corresponding to different information different from the aspect information is performed. Function for executing the processing of step S3101, step S3103 and step S3109 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment, step S3201, step S3202, step S3204 in the main CPU 63 in the twelfth embodiment. And a function of executing the process of step S3210, a function of executing an abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic G1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification. Further, using the history information stored in the history storage means, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived. Then, the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only the display corresponding to the aspect information but also the display corresponding to the different information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

Features G2. Characteristic G1 characterized in that a period during which a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the information display unit and a period during which a display corresponding to the different information is performed on the information display unit are distinguished. Amusement machine.

According to the feature G2, which of the display corresponding to the aspect information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed on the information display means by grasping the situation in which the display is performed on the information display means. Can be specified.

Features G3. The second information display control means displays the display corresponding to the different information by controlling the display of the information display means so as to be a display mode different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine described in the feature G1 or G2, which is characterized by being performed.

According to the feature G3, by grasping the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed on the information display means. It will be possible.

Features G4. As the information display means, individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and eleventh to fourteenth, respectively) capable of performing a plurality of types of display respectively. In the embodiment, the gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G3, characterized in that a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) are provided.

According to the feature G4, it is possible to display a wide variety of aspect information by performing the display corresponding to the aspect information using the plurality of individual information display means. In addition, the presence of the plurality of individual information display means makes it possible to greatly differ the display mode between when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed and when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. ..

Features G5. The second information display control means, when performing the display corresponding to the different information, does not become a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, first notification display device 201, second notification display device in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) The display device 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are set in a non-display state. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic G5, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. With this, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. Is possible.

Features G6. The second information display control means, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the specific individual information display means (the first individual information display means that is in a display state when the aspect information is displayed among the plurality of individual information display means (first In the first to tenth embodiments, the third notification display device 69c, in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification. Display device 204) for display,
The display content of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the different information is performed may be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine described in G5.

According to the feature G6, the display content that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the specific individual information display means can be displayed even when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. It is possible to prevent the display contents from being restricted when the display corresponding to the information is performed. Even if the specific individual information display means has the same display content as described above, it does not become the non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is provided with the configuration of the above feature G5. When a predetermined individual information display means displays a display corresponding to different information, it is in a non-display state, so that it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means.

Features G7. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means in a display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed.

According to the feature G7, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display units is in the display state, and thus the predetermined individual information display unit corresponds to the other information in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly distinguish it from the case where it is displayed.

Features G8. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the mode information on the information display means, and even when the display of the mode information is changed, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G5 to G7, which is characterized in that the gaming machine is not maintained.

According to the characteristic G8, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. With this, regardless of the timing of confirming the plurality of individual information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the aspect information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed in the plurality of individual information display means. Is possible.

Features G9. The second information display control means is one specific individual information display means among the plurality of individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the third notification display device 69c, eleventh and twelfth). In any of the features G5 to G8, the fourth notification display device 204) displays a display corresponding to the different information, and the remaining individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature G9, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, only one individual information display unit is in the display state, so that it is easy to understand whether or not the display corresponding to the different information is performed. Become.

Feature G10. A plurality of the individual information display means are arranged in a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to feature G9, wherein the specific individual information display means is present at an end of the plurality of individual information display means arranged in the predetermined direction in the predetermined direction.

According to the characteristic G10, since one individual information display means for displaying the different information is present at the end portion in the predetermined direction, it is grasped whether or not the display corresponding to the different information is performed. Easier to do.

Feature G11. The first information display control means is an individual information display means of a type display target that is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a, the eleventh notification display device). In the fourteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are configured to perform a display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed, and a plurality of the individual information display means. The individual information display means of the result display target that is a part of the second display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, and the first information display device 69c in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments. The display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204),
The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G10, wherein the predetermined individual information display unit corresponds to the individual information display unit of the type display target.

According to the characteristic G11, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the individual information display unit for the type display target performs the display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed and the individual information display for the result display target. The means performs a display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed. This makes it easier to understand the aspect information that is the display target. In this case, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, the individual information display means of the type display target is in the non-display state, which means that the type display non-display state corresponds to the different information. It becomes easier to understand if the different information is displayed.

Features G12. The information display unit has a plurality of unit light emitting units (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by a combination of the unit light emitting units that are in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting units. Is possible configuration,
The second information display control means responds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting unit, which can be in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, among the plurality of unit light emitting units, to a light emitting state. The display is performed, and the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed does not exist when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G11, which is a combination.

According to the feature G12, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the display corresponding to the different information is performed by setting the unit light-emitting unit that is in the light emitting state to the light emitting state to perform the display corresponding to the aspect information. In order to diversify, it is possible to prevent the contents of display corresponding to the aspect information from being restricted as much as possible. On the other hand, the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. This makes it possible to grasp which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed by grasping the combination of the unit light emitting units which are in the light emitting state.

Features G13. There are a plurality of display modes of the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means,
The game according to the feature G12, characterized in that there is no unit light emitting unit that does not enter the light emitting state even if all the displays corresponding to the aspect information of the plurality of aspects are performed in the plurality of unit light emitting units. Machine.

According to the feature G13, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the unit light-emitting units of an arbitrary combination are set to the light emitting state, so that the aspect corresponding to the aspect information can be diversified. It is possible to prevent the contents of the display corresponding to the information from being restricted as much as possible.

Features G14. Specific individual information display means which is the information display means (third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, fourth notification display device 204, thirteenth in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments). In the embodiment, a plurality of individual information display means including the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204) are provided,
The second information display control means, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, does not become the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, first notification display device 201, second notification display device in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) The display device 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are set in a non-display state. Or a game machine according to G13.

According to the feature G14, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. With this, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. Is possible.

Feature G15. A setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the advantage of the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G14, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the different information in a situation in which the setting value can be changed.

According to the feature G15, it becomes possible to use the information display means for displaying the aspect information as the display means for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

Feature G16. The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the second information display control means causes the display of information corresponding to the setting value currently selected as the display corresponding to the different information.

According to the feature G16, it becomes possible to use the information display means for displaying the mode information as the display means for displaying the set value being changed.

Feature G17. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G16, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine as a display corresponding to the different information.

According to the feature G17, it becomes possible to use the information display means for performing the display corresponding to the aspect information as the display means for performing the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine.

Features G18. The second information display control means, when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in a situation where the abnormal state has not occurred, causes the display corresponding to that the abnormal state has not occurred. The gaming machine described in G17.

According to the feature G18, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not the abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features G1 to G18. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Features H1. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to a result of a game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means (steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112 in the first embodiment). The function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management-side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment).
Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and eleventh to tenth) so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed. In the fourteenth embodiment, first information display control means (a function of executing display processing in the management-side CPU 112) for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
Second information display control means (steps S202 and S208 in the main CPU 63 in the first to tenth embodiments) for controlling display of the information display means so that display corresponding to different information different from the aspect information is performed. Function for executing the processing of step S3101, step S3103 and step S3109 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment, step S3201, step S3202, step S3204 in the main CPU 63 in the twelfth embodiment. And a function of executing the process of step S3210, a function of executing an abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
Equipped with
The information display unit has a plurality of unit light emitting units (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and performs a predetermined display by a combination of the unit light emitting units that are in a light emitting state among the plurality of unit light emitting units. Is possible configuration,
The second information display control means responds to the different information by setting a unit light emitting unit, which can be in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, among the plurality of unit light emitting units, to a light emitting state. The display is performed, and the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed does not exist when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. A game machine characterized by being a combination.

According to the feature H1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification. Further, using the history information stored in the history storage means, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived. Then, the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, in the information display means, not only the display corresponding to the aspect information but also the display corresponding to the different information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

In addition, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the unit light-emitting unit that can be in the light emitting state is set to the light emitting state, and the display corresponding to the different information is performed, thereby diversifying the display corresponding to the aspect information. For this purpose, it is possible to prevent the contents of display corresponding to the aspect information from being restricted as much as possible. On the other hand, the combination of the unit light emitting units that are in the light emitting state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed is a combination that does not exist when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. This makes it possible to grasp which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is being performed by grasping the combination of the unit light emitting units which are in the light emitting state.

Features H2. There are a plurality of display modes of the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means,
The game according to the feature H1, wherein the plurality of unit light emitting units does not have a unit light emitting unit that does not enter a light emitting state even if all the displays corresponding to the aspect information of the plurality of aspects are performed. Machine.

According to the characteristic H2, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, the unit light-emitting units of an arbitrary combination are set to the light emitting state. Therefore, in order to diversify the display corresponding to the mode information, It is possible to prevent the contents of the display corresponding to the information from being restricted as much as possible.

Features H3. Specific individual information display means which is the information display means (third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, fourth notification display device 204, thirteenth in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments). In the embodiment, a plurality of individual information display means including the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204) are provided,
The second information display control means, when the display corresponding to the different information is performed, does not become the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, first notification display device 201, second notification display device in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) Characteristic H1 characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in a non-display state. Or the gaming machine described in H2.

According to the feature H3, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit that is not in the non-display state is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the different information is performed. With this, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. Is possible.

Features H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means in a display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed.

According to the feature H4, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display units is in the display state, and thus the predetermined individual information display unit corresponds to the other information in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly distinguish it from the case where it is displayed.

Features H5. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the mode information on the information display means, and even when the display of the mode information is changed, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to the feature H3 or H4, characterized in that the gaming machine is not maintained at.

According to the feature H5, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. With this, regardless of the timing of confirming the plurality of individual information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the aspect information and the display corresponding to the different information is performed in the plurality of individual information display means. Is possible.

Features H6. A setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the advantage of the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the different information in a situation where the setting value can be changed.

According to the feature H6, it is possible to use the information display means for performing the display corresponding to the aspect information as the display means for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

Features H7. The gaming machine according to Feature H6, wherein the second information display control means causes the display of information corresponding to the setting value currently selected as the display corresponding to the different information.

According to the feature H7, it is possible to use the information display means for performing the display corresponding to the aspect information as the display means for displaying the set value being changed.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature group I>
Feature I1. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to a result of a game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means (steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112 in the first embodiment). The function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management-side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment).
First information display control means (management side) for controlling display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that the display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed. A function of executing display processing in the CPU 112),
Second information display control means (a function of executing processing for abnormality display in the main CPU 63) for controlling display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic I1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification. Further, using the history information stored in the history storage means, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived. Then, the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. In addition, not only the display corresponding to the mode information but also the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the gaming machine is performed on the information display means. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

Feature I2. The second information display control means, when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed in a situation where the abnormal state has not occurred, causes the display corresponding to that the abnormal state has not occurred. The gaming machine described in Feature I1.

According to the characteristic I2, it is possible to clearly specify whether or not the abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

Feature I3. Characteristic I1 or I2 characterized in that a period during which a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the information display unit is distinguished from a period during which a display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed on the information display unit. The game machine described.

According to the feature I3, which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed on the information display unit by grasping the situation in which the display is performed on the information display unit. Can be specified.

Feature I4. The second information display control means displays the display corresponding to the abnormal state by controlling the display of the information display means so as to be a display mode different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed. The gaming machine described in the feature G1 or G2, which is characterized by being performed.

According to the characteristic I4, by grasping the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed on the information display means. It will be possible.

Feature I5. As the information display means, a plurality of individual information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) capable of performing a plurality of types of display are provided, respectively, and features I1 to I4 The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to display a wide variety of aspect information by performing the display corresponding to the aspect information using the plurality of individual information display means. In addition, the presence of the plurality of individual information display means makes it possible to greatly differ the display mode between when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed and when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. ..

Feature I6. The second information display control means, when performing the display corresponding to the abnormal state, does not become a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed among the plurality of individual information display means The gaming machine according to feature I5, characterized in that the information display means (the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) is in a non-display state.

According to the feature I6, the predetermined individual information display means, which is not in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, is in the non-display state when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed. With this, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed, only by grasping the type of the individual information display means in the non-display state. Is possible.

Feature I7. The second information display control means, when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is to be performed, the specific individual information display means (the first individual information display means to be in the display state when the aspect information is displayed among the plurality of individual information display means (first The third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204) to a display state,
The display content of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed may be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine described in Feature I6.

According to the feature I7, the display content that can be displayed when the display corresponding to the mode information is displayed on the specific individual information display means can be displayed even when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is displayed. It is possible to prevent the display contents from being restricted when the display corresponding to the information is performed. Even if the specific individual information display means has the same display content as described above, it does not become the non-display state when the display corresponding to the aspect information is provided with the configuration of the characteristic I7. When a predetermined individual information display means displays a display corresponding to an abnormal state, it is in a non-display state, and therefore it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means.

Feature I8. The game machine according to feature I6 or I7, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means in a display state when performing display corresponding to the aspect information.

According to the characteristic I8, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display units is in the display state, and thus the predetermined individual information display unit corresponds to the abnormal state in which the predetermined individual information display unit is in the non-display state. It is possible to clearly distinguish it from the case where it is displayed.

Feature I9. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the mode information on the information display means, and even when the display of the mode information is changed, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features I6 to I8, characterized in that the gaming machine is not maintained at.

According to the feature I9, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the predetermined individual information display unit is not maintained in the non-display state. This makes it possible to identify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display means are confirmed. Is possible.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features I1 to I9, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Features J1. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of the game corresponding to it in the history storage means (history memory 117) )When,
Information derivation means for deriving mode information corresponding to a result of a game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the history storage means (steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112 in the first embodiment). The function of executing the processing of step S1807 in the management-side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2107 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment).
Information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and eleventh to tenth) so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed. In the fourteenth embodiment, first information display control means (a function of executing display processing in the management-side CPU 112) for controlling display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
Equipped with
The first information display control means sequentially changes the display corresponding to the aspect information on the information display means, and the information display means does not display even when the display corresponding to the aspect information is changed. A game machine characterized in that it is not maintained in a state.

According to the feature J1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification. Further, using the history information stored in the history storage means, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived. Then, the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed by the information display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the information display means is not maintained in the non-display state. This makes it possible to specify the display corresponding to the aspect information regardless of the timing when the information display means is confirmed.

Features J2. As the information display means, individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and eleventh to fourteenth, respectively) capable of performing a plurality of types of display respectively. In the above embodiment, the gaming machine according to feature J1 is provided with a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

According to the feature J2, it is possible to display a wide variety of aspect information by performing the display corresponding to the aspect information using the plurality of individual information display means.

Features J3. The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means in a display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed.

According to the feature J3, when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, and even when the display corresponding to the mode information is changed, the display state is changed. Maintained. This makes it easier to understand the aspect information.

Features J4. The first information display control means is a part of the plurality of individual information display means, which is a type display target individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a and the eleventh display device). In the fourteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are configured to perform a display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed, and a plurality of the individual information display means. The individual information display means of the result display target which is a part of the second display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, and the first information display device 69c in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments. The gaming machine according to feature J2 or J3, characterized in that a display corresponding to the contents of the aspect information to be displayed is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204).

According to the feature J4, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the individual information display unit for the type display target performs the display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed and the individual information display for the result display target. The means performs a display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed. This makes it easier to understand the aspect information that is the display target.

For the configurations of the features J1 to J4, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game, history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management-side CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) ),
The history storage execution means is a means for preventing the history information from being stored in the history storage means even if the predetermined event occurs (a function of making a negative determination in step S3501 in the main CPU 63) even if the predetermined event occurs. ) Is provided with a gaming machine.

According to the characteristic K1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification. Further, in the restricted situation, the history information is not stored even if a predetermined event occurs, so that it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored in a situation where it is not preferable to store the history information. ..

Features K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the restricted status can occur as a status from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started to when a restriction release event occurs.

According to the characteristic K2, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the operation check immediately after the start of supplying the operating power from being stored as history information.

Features K3. Means for setting the restriction status when the supply of the operating power to the history storage executing means is started and the restriction condition is satisfied (function of executing the process of step S3610 in the main CPU 63); ,
Means for not setting the limited condition when the supply of operating power to the history storage executing means is started and the limiting condition is not satisfied (function of executing the process of step S3621 in the main CPU 63) When,
The gaming machine described in the feature K2, which is provided with.

According to the characteristic K3, there are a case where the restriction condition is set and a case where the restriction condition is not set depending on whether or not the restriction condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to prevent the restriction status from being set as necessary.

Features K4. It is characterized in that the restriction situation can occur as a situation from when the supply of the operating power to the history storage executing means is started to when the number of discharged game balls from the game area becomes a predetermined reference number or more. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K3.

According to the characteristic K4, it is possible to prevent the history information from being stored until the number of discharged game balls from the game area reaches or exceeds the predetermined reference number after the supply of the operating power is started.

Features K5. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, the history information of the game corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, high frequency support mode counter area 233). History storing execution means for storing (a function for executing a normal ball management process in the main CPU 63, a ball management process in the open/close execution mode, and a ball management process in the high-frequency support mode);
Information derivation means (a function for executing the process of step S4208 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means,
Equipped with
The game machine characterized in that the information deriving means does not derive the mode information when the status is restricted.

According to the characteristic K5, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification. Further, using the history information stored in the history storage means, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, in the restricted situation, the aspect information is not derived even if a predetermined event occurs, so it is possible to prevent the aspect information from being derived in a situation where it is not desirable to derive the aspect information. ..

Features K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the restricted situation can occur as a situation from when supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started to when a restriction release event occurs.

According to the characteristic K6, it becomes possible to prevent the aspect information using the history information based on the occurrence of the predetermined event by the operation check immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power from being derived.

Features K7. It is characterized in that the restriction situation can occur as a situation from when the supply of the operating power to the history storage executing means is started to when the number of discharged game balls from the game area becomes a predetermined reference number or more. The gaming machine described in K5 or K6.

According to the characteristic K7, it is possible to prevent the aspect information from being derived until the number of discharged game balls from the game area reaches or exceeds the predetermined reference number after the supply of the operating power is started.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features K1 to K7. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic G group, the characteristic H group, the characteristic I group, the characteristic J group, and the characteristic K group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least one stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. A sixteenth function for executing the processing of step S3802 and steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, which saves predetermined information, which is information on a set, to a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) Of the main CPU 63 in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and a step of main CPU63 in the eighteenth embodiment. A function of executing the processing of S4602, a function of executing the processing of steps S4701 and S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment),
When or after ending the second predetermined process, a return executing unit for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit to the internal storage unit (in the fifteenth embodiment, step S3804 in the main CPU 63 and A function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3915, a function of executing the processing of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment, and a processing of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment. Function, the function of executing the process of step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and the function of executing the processes of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU63 in the nineteenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature L1, when the first predetermined process is being executed, the second predetermined process is being executed, or the second predetermined process is being executed, the result is stored in the internal storage means. At least a part of the information is saved in the predetermined storage means. Accordingly, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, when the second predetermined process is ended or after the end, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. As described above, various controls can be suitably performed.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage means.

According to the feature L2, since only a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the predetermined storage means, the storage capacity necessary for saving the information in the internal storage means in the predetermined storage means is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress.

Feature L3. The internal storage means includes a first storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register) and a second storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and And a register other than the IY register),
The second predetermined processing execution means is configured to store information in the first storage area in the second predetermined processing but not store information in the second storage area,
The game machine according to feature L2, wherein the save executing means saves the information stored in the first storage area to the predetermined storing means.

According to the feature L3, when the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is performed in the internal storage means. At, the information in the first storage area, which is the storage target of the information, is saved in the predetermined storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage unit before the execution of the second predetermined process, while the internal process is performed in the predetermined storage unit. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to save the information in the storage means.

Feature L4. The predetermined storage means,
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the second predetermined storage area.

According to the feature L4, since the predetermined storage means is provided with the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area, the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means is determined by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It is possible to make a clear difference. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, at least a part stored in the internal storage means when the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed or the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed Information is saved in the second predetermined storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to save the information in the internal storage means immediately before the second predetermined process is started, and it is possible to save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Feature L5. The evacuation executing means is
In the first predetermined process, the first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage unit, is changed from the state in which the first predetermined process is being performed to the state in which the second predetermined process is being performed. Means for evacuating to the first predetermined storage area (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4402 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment); ,
The second predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, when the second predetermined processing is executed from the state in which the first predetermined processing is executed, In the second predetermined storage area (function of executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, in steps S4502 to S4507 of the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment). A function of executing the processing, a function of executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S4702 and S4703 in the main CPU63 in the nineteenth embodiment),
The gaming machine described in the feature L4, which is provided with.

According to the feature L5, the first predetermined information which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined processing, and the part of the information stored in the internal storage means. The second predetermined information is saved in the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to save at a timing suitable for each information stored in the internal storage means, and the processing for saving the information is distributed and executed by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It becomes possible.

Feature L6. The gaming machine according to feature L5, wherein the first predetermined information is information of a flag register provided in the internal storage means.

According to the feature L6, it is possible to appropriately save the information in the flag register in the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

Feature L7. The second predetermined storage area is
A stack area (a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load instruction,
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features L4 to L6, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in one of the stack area and the work area.

According to the feature L7, when the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed, the stack area in the second predetermined storage area And at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in one of the work areas. As a result, it becomes possible to aggregate the save destinations of information, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring.

Feature L8. The game machine according to feature L7, wherein the save executing means saves the predetermined information in the work area.

According to the characteristic L8, since the save area of at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is the work area, it is possible to save the information without cumulatively changing the stack pointer. Become.

Feature L9. In the first predetermined storage area, information can be stored and information can be read when the first predetermined processing is executed, and information can be read when the second predetermined processing is executed. It is impossible to store information,
In the second predetermined storage area, information can be stored and information can be read when the second predetermined processing is executed, and information can be read when the first predetermined processing is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features L4 to L8, which is characterized in that information cannot be stored.

According to the feature L9, the first predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined processing. Becomes

Feature L10. The predetermined storage means,
A stack area (a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load instruction,
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L9, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in one of the stack area and the work area.

According to the feature L10, it is possible to aggregate the save destinations of the predetermined information, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving the predetermined information and the processing configuration for restoring the predetermined information.

Feature L11. The game machine according to feature L10, wherein the save executing means saves the predetermined information in the work area.

According to the feature L11, since the save destination of the predetermined information is the work area, it is possible to save the information without cumulatively changing the stack pointer.

Feature L12. The predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage means,
The evacuation executing means is configured to perform the internal storage means when the second predetermined processing is executed from the situation in which the first predetermined processing is executed, or when the second predetermined processing is executed. The gaming machine according to feature L11, further comprising means (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63) for saving specific information, which is a part of information stored in the stack area, in the stack area. ..

According to the characteristic L12, the specific information is saved in the stack area in the configuration in which the predetermined information is saved in the work area. This makes it possible to disperse and save the information stored in the internal storage means in the work area and the stack area.

Feature L13. The gaming machine according to feature L12, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

According to the feature L13, the predetermined information having a larger amount of information than the specific information is saved in the work area, so that a large amount of information is cumulatively stored in the stack area when the information stored in the internal storage means is saved. It is possible to prevent it.

Feature L14. Information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means when the state in which the second predetermined process is executed is changed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed Is a fixed information structure,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L13, wherein the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is not a target for saving by the saving executing means.

According to the feature L14, since it is not necessary to secure the capacity for saving the information of the stack pointer in the predetermined storage means, the capacity of the predetermined storage means can be suppressed. Even if the stack pointer information is not saved in this way, the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed or the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed If the stack pointer information becomes fixed, the information of the stack pointer becomes fixed. Therefore, it is possible to restore the stack pointer information before the second predetermined process is started without saving the stack pointer information as described above. It is possible.

Feature L15. A means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after ending the second predetermined processing (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3909 in the main CPU 63, a seventeenth embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S4509 in the main CPU 63 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S4604 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment). ..

According to the feature L15, it is possible to return to the information of the stack pointer before or after the second predetermined process is started, or when the second predetermined process is ended.

Feature L16. When the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined processing is executed or the second predetermined processing is executed, the stack pointer is set to the second predetermined processing. Means for setting corresponding second correspondence start information (function of executing step S3901 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, function of executing step S4501 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, In the eighteenth embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step S4601). The gaming machine according to the feature L14 or L15.

According to the feature L16, when the second predetermined process is started, the second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set in the stack pointer, so that an appropriate address in the second predetermined process is set. Information can be stored in the stack area.

Feature L17. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L16, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

According to the feature L17, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process.

Feature L18. The predetermined storage means,
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
Equipped with
The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231 and opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event generated when a game is executed is stored. , The high-frequency support mode counter area 233) is provided, the gaming machine according to Feature L17.

According to the feature L18, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature L19. The second predetermined processing execution means uses the history information stored in the history storage area to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period (step S4208 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to feature L18, which is provided with a function of executing the process of.

According to the feature L19, the history information stored in the history storage area is used to derive the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period, thereby managing the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. It is possible to grasp the result.

Feature L20. The gaming machine according to feature L19, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes an aspect information storage area (operation result storage area 234) that stores the aspect information derived by the information deriving means.

According to the feature L20, when the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the form information is stored in the form information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features L1 to L20. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature M group>
Features M1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least one stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. Evacuation executing means for evacuating predetermined information, which is information of a set, to a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) (function of executing steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, seventeenth embodiment) Then, a function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S4502 to S4507, a function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of step S4602 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a step S4701 and a step of the main CPU63 in the nineteenth embodiment. Function for executing the processing of S4703),
When or after ending the second predetermined process, a return execution unit that restores the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit to the internal storage unit (step S3910 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S3915, a function of executing the processes of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, In the nineteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the predetermined storage means by a load command.

According to the feature M1, when the first predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is executed, or the second predetermined process is executed, the result is stored in the internal storage means. The predetermined information, which is at least a part of the information, is saved in the predetermined storage means. Accordingly, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is ended, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. When the situation in which the first predetermined process is being executed is changed to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed or the second predetermined process is executed, the predetermined information is saved in the predetermined storage means by the load instruction. .. This makes it possible to save the predetermined information without changing the stack pointer.

Features M2. The predetermined storage means,
A stack area (a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load instruction,
Equipped with
The game machine according to feature M1, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the work area.

According to the feature M2, since the save destination of the predetermined information which is at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is the work area, the information is saved without cumulatively changing the stack pointer. It becomes possible.

Features M3. The predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage means,
The evacuation executing means is configured to perform the internal storage means when the second predetermined processing is executed from the situation in which the first predetermined processing is executed, or when the second predetermined processing is executed. The game machine according to feature M2, further comprising: a unit (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63) that saves specific information that is a part of the information stored in the stack area. ..

According to the feature M3, in the configuration in which the predetermined information is saved in the work area, the specific information is saved in the stack area. This makes it possible to disperse and save the information stored in the internal storage means in the work area and the stack area.

Features M4. The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

According to the feature M4, the predetermined information having a larger amount of information than the specific information is saved in the work area, so that a large amount of information is cumulatively stored in the stack area when the information stored in the internal storage means is saved. It is possible to prevent it.

Features M5. The work area is
A first work area (a work area 221 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second work area (work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of the features M2 to M4, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information in the second work area.

According to the feature M5, since the first work area and the second work area are provided in the work area, the storage destination of information in the work area is clearly different between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, at least a part stored in the internal storage means when the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed or the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed Information is saved in the second work area. This makes it possible to save the information in the internal storage unit immediately before the second predetermined process is started, and save the information without using the first work area.

Features M6. In the first work area, information can be stored and information can be read when the first predetermined process is executed, and information can be read when the second predetermined process is executed. It is impossible to store information,
Although information can be stored and information can be read from the second work area when the second predetermined process is executed, and information can be read when the first predetermined process is executed. The game machine according to feature M5, which is characterized in that information cannot be stored.

According to the feature M6, the first work area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined processing, and the second work area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined processing. ..

Features M7. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least one stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. Evacuation executing means for evacuating predetermined information, which is information of a set, to a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) (function of executing steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, seventeenth embodiment) Then, a function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S4502 to S4507, a function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of step S4602 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a step S4701 and a step of the main CPU63 in the nineteenth embodiment. Function for executing the processing of S4703),
When or after ending the second predetermined process, a return execution unit that restores the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit to the internal storage unit (step S3910 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S3915, a function of executing the processes of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, In the nineteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
The predetermined storage means,
A stack area (a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load instruction,
Equipped with
The game machine, wherein the save execution means saves the predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to the feature M7, when the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed or the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed is stored in the internal storage means. The predetermined information, which is at least a part of the information, is saved in the predetermined storage means. Accordingly, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is ended, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process.

Further, when the second predetermined process is executed or the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed, one of the stack area and the work area in the predetermined storage unit is set. Then, the predetermined information is saved. As a result, it becomes possible to aggregate the save destinations of information, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features M1 to M7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature N group>
Features N1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
Equipped with
In a case where the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined processing is executed, the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is a fixed information. A gaming machine to do.

According to the feature N1, when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed, the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means becomes fixed information. It is not necessary to save the information of the stack pointer when starting the predetermined process. This eliminates the need to secure a storage area for saving the stack pointer information. In addition, when the first predetermined process is being executed and the second predetermined process is being executed, the stack pointer information is fixed, so that the stack pointer information is not saved as described above. However, the information of the stack pointer before the second predetermined process is started can be restored.

Features N2. A means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after ending the second predetermined processing (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3909 in the main CPU 63, a seventeenth embodiment). The game machine according to the feature N1 is characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S4509 in the main CPU 63 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S4604 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment). ..

According to the feature N2, it is possible to return to the information of the stack pointer before or after the second predetermined process is started when or after the second predetermined process is ended.

Features N3. Means for setting second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process to the stack pointer when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is being executed (fifteenth) Of the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, the function of step S4501 in the main CPU63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and the processing of step S4601 in the main CPU63 in the eighteenth embodiment. The game machine according to the feature N1 or N2.

According to the feature N3, when the second predetermined process is started, the second correspondence start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set in the stack pointer, so that an appropriate address in the second predetermined process is set. Information can be stored in the stack area.

Features N4. At least one stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. A sixteenth function for executing the processing of step S3802 and steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, which saves predetermined information, which is information on a set, to a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) Of the main CPU 63 in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and a step of main CPU63 in the eighteenth embodiment. A function of executing the processing of S4602, a function of executing the processing of steps S4701 and S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment),
When or after ending the second predetermined process, a return executing unit for returning the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit to the internal storage unit (in the fifteenth embodiment, step S3804 in the main CPU 63 and A function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3915, a function of executing the processing of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment, and a processing of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment. Function, the function of executing the process of step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and the function of executing the processes of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU63 in the nineteenth embodiment).
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, wherein the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is not a target for saving by the saving executing means.

According to the characteristic N4, when the first predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is executed, or the second predetermined process is executed, the data is stored in the internal storage means. At least a part of the information is saved in the predetermined storage means. Accordingly, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, when the second predetermined process is ended or after the end, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process. Further, since the stack pointer information is not saved, it is not necessary to secure the capacity for saving the stack pointer information in the predetermined storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the predetermined storage means. Even if the stack pointer information is not saved in this way, the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed or the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed If the stack pointer information becomes fixed, the information of the stack pointer becomes fixed. Therefore, it is possible to restore the stack pointer information before the second predetermined process is started without saving the stack pointer information as described above. It is possible.

Features N5. The predetermined storage means,
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
Equipped with
The game machine according to feature N4, wherein the save executing means saves the predetermined information in the second predetermined storage area.

According to the characteristic N5, since the predetermined storage means is provided with the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area, the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means is determined by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It is possible to make a clear difference. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, at least a part stored in the internal storage means when the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed or the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed Information is saved in the second predetermined storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to save the information in the internal storage means immediately before the second predetermined process is started, and it is possible to save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Features N6. The first predetermined storage area can store information and read information when the first predetermined process is executed, and can read information when the second predetermined process is executed. It is impossible to remember information about things,
The second predetermined storage area can store information and read information when the second predetermined process is executed, and can read information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature N5, wherein the information of the object cannot be stored.

According to the feature N6, the first predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined processing. Becomes

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features N1 to N6. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature O group>
Features O1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
At least a part of the storage in the internal storage means when the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed. First state setting means (main CPU 63 performs steps S4803 to S4808) for setting the state of a predetermined storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register), which is an area, to a predetermined state. Function to execute)
A second state setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4903 to S4908 in the main CPU 63) for setting the state of the predetermined storage area to the predetermined state when or after the second predetermined process is finished;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature O1, in the case where the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed or the second predetermined process is executed, the predetermined storage area of the internal storage means Is set to the predetermined state, and when the second predetermined process is finished or after the second predetermined process is finished, the state of the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state again. As a result, the state of the predetermined storage area can be set to the predetermined state before and after the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area by one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process from affecting the other process. As described above, various controls can be suitably performed.

Feature O2. The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein the predetermined state is a state when supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to the characteristic O2, since the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the processing configuration for setting the predetermined state can be simplified. Is possible.

Features O3. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which the predetermined storage area is cleared to "0".

According to the characteristic O3, since the predetermined storage area is set to the state in which “0” is cleared as the predetermined state, the processing configuration for setting the predetermined state can be simplified.

Features O4. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, wherein the predetermined storage area is a partial storage area in the internal storage means.

According to the characteristic O4, since only a part of the storage area of the internal storage means is set to the predetermined state, it is possible to reduce the processing load for setting the predetermined state.

Features O5. The internal storage means includes at least the predetermined storage area and a separate storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and register other than IY register).
The second predetermined processing execution means is configured to store information in the predetermined storage area in the second predetermined processing but not store information in the separate storage area,
The gaming machine according to feature O4, wherein the first state setting means and the second state setting means are configured not to change the state of the separate storage area.

According to the characteristic O5, when the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is performed in the internal storage means. At, a predetermined storage area for storing information is set to a predetermined state. This makes it possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area by the first predetermined processing from affecting the second predetermined processing. Further, since the state of the separate storage area is not changed, setting the predetermined state when the second predetermined process is started does not affect the process after the second predetermined process is completed. It will be possible.

Features O6. Features O1 to O5 characterized in that the information of the predetermined storage area before the setting of the predetermined state by the first state setting means is information that is not used after the second predetermined process is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature O6, even if the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state when the second predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is terminated. It is possible to prevent the processing after the processing from being affected.

Features O7. A part stored in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed. Save execution means (function of executing the process of step S4802 in the main CPU 63) for saving the predetermined information (flag register information), which is information of the above, in a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65).
When the second predetermined process is ended or after the second predetermined process is ended, a return execution unit that restores the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage unit to the internal storage unit (function of executing the process of step S4810 in the main CPU 63) When,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O6, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature O7, when the first predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is executed, or the second predetermined process is executed, the result is stored in the internal storage means. The predetermined information, which is a part of the information, is saved in the predetermined storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process is executed, the information stored in the internal storage means at the time of executing the first predetermined process and necessary for the subsequent execution of the first predetermined process is rewritten. It becomes possible not to. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is ended, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. As a result, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process.

Features O8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

According to the feature O8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process.

Features O9. The predetermined storage means,
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
Equipped with
The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231 and opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event generated when a game is executed is stored. And a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

According to the feature O9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature O10. The second predetermined processing execution means uses the history information stored in the history storage area to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period (step S4208 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to feature O9, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of.

According to the characteristic O10, by using the history information stored in the history storage area, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived, so that the management of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is performed. It is possible to grasp the result.

Feature O11. The gaming machine according to feature O10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (a calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

According to the feature O11, when the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the form information is stored in the form information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features O1 to O11. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature P1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means different between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Therefore, when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased.

Feature P2. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The game machine according to feature P1, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

According to the feature P2, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process.

Feature P3. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231 and opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which, when a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history information of the game corresponding thereto is stored. , The high-frequency support mode counter area 233) is provided, the gaming machine according to the feature P2.

According to the feature P3, when a predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature P4. The second predetermined processing execution means uses the history information stored in the history storage area to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period (step S4208 in the main CPU 63). (A function of executing the process of). The gaming machine according to feature P3.

According to the feature P4, the history information stored in the history storage area is used to derive the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period, thereby managing the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. It is possible to grasp the result.

Feature P5. The gaming machine according to feature P4, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

According to the feature P5, when the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the form information is stored in the form information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature P6. In the first predetermined process, the first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage unit, is changed from the state in which the first predetermined process is being performed to the state in which the second predetermined process is being performed. First saving means for saving to the first predetermined storage area (function of executing step S3802 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, execution of step S4402 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment) Function),
The second predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, when the second predetermined processing is executed from the state in which the first predetermined processing is executed, In the 15th embodiment, a second evacuation means (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63, in the seventeenth embodiment, step S4502 of the main CPU 63 in (A function of executing the process of step S4507, a function of executing the process of step S4602 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment, and a function of executing the processes of step S4701 and step S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment) When,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features P1 to P5, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic P6, the first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined processing, and the part of the information stored in the internal storage means. The second predetermined information is saved in the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to save at a timing suitable for each information stored in the internal storage means, and the processing for saving the information is distributed and executed by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It becomes possible.

Feature P7. When the second predetermined processing is ended or after the second predetermined processing is ended, first return execution means (in the fifteenth embodiment, a main return execution means for returning the first predetermined information saved in the first predetermined storage area to the internal storage means) The function of executing the process of step S3804 in the side CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment),
A second return execution unit (in the fifteenth embodiment, a main unit in the fifteenth embodiment) for returning the second predetermined information saved in the second predetermined storage area to the internal storage unit when or after the second predetermined process is finished. The function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3915 in the side CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment. A function of executing processing, a function of executing processing of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63 in the nineteenth embodiment),
The gaming machine according to feature P6, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic P7, the first predetermined information saved in the first predetermined storage area is returned to the internal storage means when or after the second predetermined processing ends, and the first predetermined information saved in the second predetermined storage area Since the second predetermined information is returned to the internal storage means, the state of the internal storage means can be returned to the state before the second predetermined processing is started.

Feature P8. The game machine according to feature P6 or P7, wherein the first predetermined information includes information of a flag register provided in the internal storage means.

According to the characteristic P8, it becomes possible to appropriately save the information in the flag register in the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

Feature P9. The game machine according to any one of features P6 to P8, wherein the second predetermined information includes information of all registers of the internal storage means.

According to the characteristic P9, the information of all the registers of the internal storage means is collectively saved, so that it is not necessary to selectively save the information of the registers.

Feature P10. The second predetermined storage area is
A stack area (a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is written by a push instruction and information is read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information is written and read by a load instruction,
Equipped with
The game machine according to feature P9, wherein the second save execution means saves the second predetermined information in one of the stack area and the work area.

According to the characteristic P10, the information of all the registers of the internal storage means is saved in one of the stack area and the work area in the second predetermined storage area. As a result, the save destinations of the information of all the registers can be integrated, and the process configuration for saving and the process configuration for restoring can be simplified.

Feature P11. The gaming machine according to feature P10, wherein the second save execution means saves the second predetermined information in the stack area.

According to the feature P11, it is possible to save the information of all the registers while not using the work area.

Feature P12. The game machine according to any one of features P6 to P11, wherein the second predetermined information includes information on a stack pointer of the internal storage means.

According to the feature P12, it is possible to appropriately save the information of the stack pointer in the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features P1 to P12. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic L group, the characteristic M group, the characteristic N group, the characteristic O group, and the characteristic P group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, various controls need to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature Q group>
Features Q1. A control unit (MPU 62) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed;
History storage means (management RAM 241), which is provided as a chip separate from the control means and is capable of temporarily storing information,
Equipped with
The control means, when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means for storing history information of the game corresponding thereto in the history storage means (normal entrance management processing in the main CPU 63, A game machine having a function of executing a ball entrance management process in the opening/closing execution mode and a ball entrance management process in the high frequency support mode).

According to the feature Q1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification. Further, since the history storage means is provided as a chip separate from the control means, it is possible to increase the storage capacity for storing history information while using a general-purpose control means.

Features Q2. The game machine according to feature Q1, wherein the control means includes a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) that temporarily stores information when executing various processes.

According to the feature Q2, in the configuration including not only the predetermined storage means provided in the control means but also the history storage means provided as a chip different from the control means, by storing the history information in the history storage means. It becomes possible to store and hold a large amount of history information.

Features Q3. The gaming machine according to Feature Q2, wherein the control unit temporarily stores the information in the predetermined storage unit when executing the process related to the history information.

According to the feature Q3, in the configuration in which the history storage means for storing the history information is provided as a chip separate from the control means, when executing the process related to the history information, the predetermined storage means provided in the control means is used. Since the information is temporarily stored, it is possible to prevent the processing speed when executing the processing relating to the history information from being extremely reduced.

Features Q4. The control means uses the history information stored in the history storage means to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period (the processing of step S4208 in the main CPU 63 is executed). The gaming machine according to any one of the features Q1 to Q3.

According to the characteristic Q4, by using the history information stored in the history storage means, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived, and the management of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is performed. It is possible to grasp the result.

Features Q5. The gaming machine according to feature Q4, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

According to the feature Q5, when the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the form information is stored in the form information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features Q1 to Q5. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic Q group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature R group>
Feature R1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
Change of the set value to be used based on the fact that a plurality of events including the first event and the second event occur when the supply of the operating power to the control means having the setting means is started. Situation generating means for providing a settable status in which the above can be performed (a function for executing the processing of steps S5003 to S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, or a step S5503 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment). A function of executing the processing of step S5507, a function of executing the processing of steps S5703 to S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic R1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage degree of the player, so that the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, in order to set the setting value to be used, a plurality of events including the first event and the second event occur when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. Need to be As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R2. Opening grasping means for grasping that the opening/closing body (front door frame 14) is in the open state (a function of executing the process of step S5005 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63 in another form). A function of executing the process of S5505, and a function of executing the process of step S5703 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment).
A feature R1 characterized in that the situation generation means specifies that the first event has occurred based on the fact that the opening grasping means has grasped that the opening/closing body is in an opened state. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic R2, the opening/closing body needs to be in the open state in order to set the setting value to be used. Thereby, when an act of illegally setting a setting value to be used is performed, it becomes possible to make the illegal act conspicuous, and as a result, it becomes possible to easily detect the illegal act. ..

Feature R3. Another opening grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, which grasps that the another opening/closing body (game machine main body 12) is in the open state, in another embodiment, the main CPU 63 The function of executing the process of step S5506 in step S5506, and the function of executing the process of step S5704 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment).
The situation occurrence means specifies that the second event has occurred based on the fact that the separate opening grasping means has grasped that the another opening/closing body is in an open state. The gaming machine described in the feature R2.

According to the characteristic R3, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to open the opening/closing body but also open another opening/closing body. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it becomes possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

Feature R4. The setting means selects at least one of the setting value to be used and the setting value to be used based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (update button 68b, reset button 68c). It is a configuration to do,
The gaming machine according to feature R2 or R3, wherein the predetermined operation means is operable by opening a separate opening/closing body.

According to the feature R4, the setting value to be used cannot be set unless the opening/closing body that is different from the separate opening/closing body that is opened to enable the operation of the predetermined operation means is opened. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it becomes possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

Feature R5. The opening and closing body defines the gaming machine front side of the gaming area where the gaming balls flow down,
The gaming machine according to any one of features R2 to R4, wherein the game area is opened in front of the gaming machine by opening the opening/closing body.

According to the characteristic R5, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to open the game area to the front of the gaming machine by opening and closing the openable body. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it becomes possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

Feature R6. The situation generation means specifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred, based on the fact that the setting key insertion unit (setting key insertion unit 68a) performs a predetermined operation with the setting key. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R5.

According to the characteristic R6, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion portion but also to generate an event other than that. is there. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R7. Based on the fact that a predetermined game event (operation of the firing operation device 28, entry into the through gate 35) that occurs when a game is played is generated, the situation generating means The gaming machine according to any one of the features R1 to R6, which is characterized in that one of the events is specified to occur.

According to the characteristic R7, in order to set the setting value to be used, not only is it necessary to generate a predetermined game event that occurs when a game is played, but it is different from that. It is necessary to cause the event of. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R8. The situation generating means is based on the fact that the game ball is detected by a ball detecting means (gate detecting sensor 49a) for detecting that the game ball has entered a predetermined ball portion provided in the game area. , The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R7, wherein one of the plurality of events is specified to occur.

According to the characteristic R8, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to enter the game ball into a predetermined ball entrance portion and to generate an event other than that. There is. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R9. A setting value notifying unit (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that causes the notifying unit to notify the setting value set by the setting unit to be used,
The set value notifying unit notifies the notifying unit of the set value to be used set by the setting unit based on the occurrence of a plurality of events including the first event and the second event. The gaming machine according to any one of the features R1 to R8, characterized in that the gaming machine is informed.

According to the feature R9, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally confirm the set value. In addition, since the manager of the game hall only needs to generate the first event and the second event regardless of whether the setting value to be used is set or the setting value is confirmed, the work is It becomes common, and it becomes easy to understand each work.

Feature R10. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
There are a plurality of events including both a predetermined operation by the setting key for the setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a) and another event different from the predetermined operation by the setting key for the setting key insertion section. On the basis of the occurrence, the status generating means (in the twenty-second embodiment, the main CPU 63 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, the status setting means is set such that the setting value to be used can be set by the setting means. A function of executing the processing of steps S5003 to S5006, a function of executing the processing of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, and a function of executing steps S5703 to S5705 and S5715 of the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment. Function to execute processing),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic R10, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can set the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation on the setting key insertion portion with the setting key, but also to generate an event other than that. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R11. Opening grasping means for grasping that the opening/closing body (front door frame 14) is in the open state (a function of executing the process of step S5005 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63 in another form). A function of executing the process of S5505, and a function of executing the process of step S5703 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment).
In the characteristic R10, the situation occurrence means specifies that the another event has occurred based on the fact that the opening grasping means has grasped that the opening/closing body is in an opened state. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic R11, the opening/closing body needs to be in the open state in order to set the setting value to be used. Thereby, when an act of illegally setting a setting value to be used is performed, it becomes possible to make the illegal act conspicuous, and as a result, it becomes possible to easily detect the illegal act. ..

Feature R12. Another opening grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, which grasps that the another opening/closing body (game machine main body 12) is in the open state, in another embodiment, the main CPU 63 The function of executing the process of step S5506 in step S5506, and the function of executing the process of step S5704 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-third embodiment).
The situation generating means identifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the fact that the separate opening/closing body has grasped that the separate opening/closing body is in an open state. The gaming machine described in the feature R11.

According to the characteristic R12, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to open the opening/closing body but also to open another opening/closing body. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it becomes possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

Feature R13. The setting means selects at least one of the setting value to be used and the setting value to be used based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (update button 68b, reset button 68c). It is a configuration to do,
13. The gaming machine according to feature R11 or R12, wherein the predetermined operation means is operable by opening a separate opening/closing body.

According to the feature R13, the setting value to be used cannot be set unless the opening/closing body that is different from the separate opening/closing body that is opened so that the predetermined operation means can be operated. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it becomes possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

Feature R14. The opening and closing body defines the gaming machine front side of the gaming area where the gaming balls flow down,
The gaming machine according to any one of features R11 to R13, wherein the game area is opened to the front of the gaming machine by opening the opening/closing body.

According to the characteristic R14, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to open the game area to the front of the gaming machine by opening and closing the openable body. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud, and it becomes possible to make the fraudulent act conspicuous.

Feature R15. Based on the fact that a predetermined game event (operation of the firing operation device 28, entry into the through gate 35) that occurs when a game is played is generated, the situation generating means The gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R14, which is characterized in that one of the events is specified to occur.

According to the characteristic R15, in order to set the setting value to be used, not only the predetermined operation by the setting key to the setting key insertion portion is performed, but also the predetermined value generated when the game is performed. It is necessary to generate the game event. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R16. The situation generating means is based on the fact that the game ball is detected by a ball detecting means (gate detecting sensor 49a) for detecting that the game ball has entered a predetermined ball portion provided in the game area. , The gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R15, wherein one of the plurality of events is specified to occur.

According to the feature R16, in order to set the setting value to be used, not only the predetermined operation by the setting key to the setting key insertion portion is performed, but also the game ball is inserted into the predetermined ball insertion portion. You need to make a ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud.

Feature R17. A setting value notifying unit (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that causes the notifying unit to notify the setting value set by the setting unit to be used,
The set value notifying means is based on the fact that the predetermined operation is being performed on the setting key insertion section by the setting key and that a plurality of events including both of the different events have occurred. The gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R16, characterized in that the notifying unit notifies the setting value set by the above.

According to the characteristic R17, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of confirming the set value by fraud. In addition, the manager of the game hall performs a predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion part and causes another event whether the setting value to be used is set or the setting value is confirmed. Since all that is required is to share the work, it becomes easier to understand each work.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features R1 to R17, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic R group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to deal illegally with the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature S group>
Features S1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
Situation generating means for setting a settable state in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the twenty-second embodiment, processing of steps S5003 to S5006 and steps S5401 to S5408 in the main CPU 63). A function of executing steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, and a function of executing steps S5703 to S5705 and S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the 23rd embodiment. In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU63, and in the twenty-fifth embodiment of the main CPU63, a function of executing the processes of steps S5901 to S5904).
A set value grasping unit that grasps whether or not the set value before the settable state and the set value set by the setting unit are the same (step S5017 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment). And a function of executing the processing of steps S5111 to S5112, in another form, a function of executing the processing of steps S5611 to S5612 in the main CPU 63).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature S1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, so that the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, it is grasped whether or not the set value before the settable state and the set value set in the settable state are the same. This makes it possible to execute a process corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same across the settable status. Therefore, when the setting value to be used is set, it is possible to generate a favorable situation for the setting result, and it is possible to suitably perform the setting work of the setting value.

Features S2. Based on the fact that the setting value grasping unit has grasped that the setting value before the setting possible state is the same as the setting value set by the setting unit, the same-time processing corresponding thereto is performed. The same-time means to be executed (function of executing step S5113 of the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, function of executing step S5613 of the main CPU 63 in another embodiment) is provided. The gaming machine according to feature S1.

According to the feature S2, when the set values are the same across the settable situations, the same-time processing is executed, so that it is possible to cause a preferable situation with respect to the identical set values. Become.

Features S3. The game machine according to feature S2, wherein the same time means performs a process for performing a notification corresponding to the fact that the set value is not changed, as the same time process.

According to the feature S3, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall that the set values are the same across the settable situations.

Features S4. Based on the fact that the setting value grasping means has determined that the setting value set by the setting means is different from the setting value before the setting possible state, the corresponding non-identical processing is executed. A non-identical means (function of executing the process of step S5114 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, function of executing the process of step S5614 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment) to be performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features S1 to S3.

According to the feature S4, when the set values are not the same across the settable situations, the non-identical time process is executed, so that it is possible to generate a favorable situation with respect to the changed set values. Becomes

Features S5. The non-identical time means, as the non-identical time process, executes a process for performing a notification corresponding to the change of the set value, the gaming machine according to feature S4 ..

According to the feature S5, it becomes possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the set value has been changed with the settable status interposed.

Features S6. The situation generating means sets the setting based on the need to erase the information in the storage means for storing the setting value after the supply of the operating power to the control means having the setting means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features S1 to S5, characterized in that the gaming machine is in a possible state.

According to the feature S6, when it becomes necessary to delete the information in the storage means for storing the setting value, the setting is possible, so that the game is continued despite the setting value information being deleted. It becomes possible not to. In this case, the configuration of the feature S1 is provided, and it is grasped whether or not the set value before the settable situation and the set value set in the settable situation are the same. This makes it possible to execute a process corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same across the settable status.

Features S7. The set value is not changed based on the fact that the set value grasping unit has grasped that the set value before the settable state is the same as the set value set by the setting unit. Means for performing notification corresponding to the fact (function of executing the process of step S5113 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-second embodiment, function of executing the process of step S5613 in the main CPU 63 in another form) The gaming machine according to feature S6, which is characterized by being provided.

According to the feature S7, even if the settable status is brought about by the deletion of the information in the storage means, the set value is changed if the settable status is the same with the settable status in between. The notification corresponding to the absence is made. This makes it possible to notify the player that the set value has not been changed even if the setting is possible during the game, and the player is safe even if the setting is possible during the game. It becomes possible to continue playing the game with care.

Features S8. The situation generating means,
First situation generating means for setting the setting possible situation based on the start of supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means (in the twenty-second embodiment, step S5003 to the main CPU 63 in step S5003 to A function of executing the process of step S5006, a function of executing the processes of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, a process of steps S5703 to S5705 and S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the 23rd embodiment. Function),
A second situation in which the setting possible state is set based on the need to erase the information in the storage unit that stores the setting value after the supply of the operating power to the control unit is started. Generating means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5401 to S5408 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63 in the 24th embodiment, the 25th In the embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
The set value grasping means is set to the settable status regardless of whether the settable status is generated by the first status generating means or the settable status is generated by the second status generating means. The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S7, wherein the gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S7 is configured to grasp whether or not the set value in step 1 is the same as the set value set by the setting means.

According to the characteristic S8, when it becomes necessary to delete the information in the storage means for storing the setting value, the setting becomes possible, so that the game is continued even though the setting value information is deleted. It becomes possible not to. In this case, using the same processing as the case where the setting possible situation is set based on the start of the supply of the operating power to the control means, the setting possible situation is accompanied by the deletion of the information in the storage means. When occurs, it is possible to execute the process corresponding to whether or not the set values are the same across the settable situation.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features S1 to S8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above characteristic S group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, when a setting value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine is set, it is necessary to generate a suitable situation for that, and this point is still improved. There is room for

<Feature T group>
Feature T1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
First monitoring execution means for monitoring whether or not the first predetermined storage area is normal (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5401 to S5404 in the main CPU 63, in the twenty-fourth embodiment Function of executing the processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63, function of executing the processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, step S7701 of the main CPU63 in the thirty-second embodiment. The function of executing the processing of step S7703),
Second monitoring execution means for monitoring whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal (in the twenty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5405 to S5408 in the main CPU 63, in the twenty-fourth embodiment. A function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processing of steps S5809, S5810, step S5812, and step S5813; and a function that executes the processing of steps S6101, S6102, S6105, and S6106 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. In the thirty-second embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S7706 to S7708 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature T1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means different between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Therefore, when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased. In addition, the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing are performed by monitoring whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and by monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area is normal. It is possible to specify whether each of the processes is in a situation in which it can be normally performed.

Feature T2. The game according to the feature T1, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring execution means and the monitoring by the second monitoring execution means are executed by either one of the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Machine.

According to the feature T2, monitoring of whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and monitoring of whether the second predetermined storage area is normal are performed by one of the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It is executed collectively. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration as compared with the configuration in which the monitoring of each storage area is distributed and executed by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing.

Feature T3. The gaming machine according to feature T1 or T2, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring execution means and the monitoring by the second monitoring execution means are executed in the first predetermined processing.

According to the feature T3, it is possible to collectively monitor whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and monitor whether the second predetermined storage area is normal by the first predetermined processing. Becomes

Feature T4. A predetermined erasing unit (in the twenty-second embodiment, the main side) for erasing information in the first predetermined storage region based on the fact that the first monitoring execution unit specifies that the first predetermined storage region is abnormal. Function of executing the process of step S5410 in the CPU 63, function of executing the processes of step S5806, step S5811 and step S5814 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, step S5906, step of the main CPU63 in the twenty-fifth embodiment The game machine according to any one of features T1 to T3, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of S6103 and step S6107.

According to the feature T4, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, the information in the first predetermined storage area is erased, so that the first predetermined processing is executed while the first predetermined storage area is in the abnormal state. It is possible to prevent it.

Feature T5. The predetermined erasing means erases information in the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that the first monitoring execution means identifies that the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, and the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature T4, which is characterized by erasing information in the area.

According to the feature T5, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, not only the first predetermined storage area but also the second predetermined storage area is erased. As a result, when there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the second predetermined storage area, it becomes possible to erase the information in the second predetermined storage area regardless of the monitoring result by the second monitoring execution means.

Feature T6. The predetermined erasing means erases the information in the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that the second monitoring execution means specifies that the second predetermined storage area is abnormal. The gaming machine described in T4 or T5.

According to the feature T6, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, the information in the first predetermined storage area is erased, so that the first predetermined processing is executed while the first predetermined storage area is in the abnormal state. It is possible to prevent it.

Feature T7. The predetermined erasing means erases the information in the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that the second monitoring execution means identifies that the second predetermined storage area is abnormal, and the first predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature T6, characterized by erasing information in the area.

According to the characteristic T7, when the second predetermined storage area is abnormal, not only the second predetermined storage area but also the first predetermined storage area is erased. Accordingly, when there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the first predetermined storage area, it becomes possible to erase the information in the first predetermined storage area regardless of the monitoring result by the first monitoring execution means.

Feature T8. The processing for erasing information by the predetermined erasing means is executed in either one of the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing, in any one of characteristics T4 to T7. Game machine.

According to the feature T8, the process of deleting the information in each predetermined storage area based on the fact that the abnormality is specified is collectively executed by one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration as compared with the configuration in which the erasing of information in each storage area is performed in a distributed manner by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing.

Feature T9. The gaming machine according to any one of features T4 to T7, wherein a process for erasing information by the predetermined erasing means is executed in the first predetermined process.

According to the feature T9, it is possible to collectively execute the processing of erasing the information in the predetermined storage areas based on the fact that the abnormality is specified, in the first predetermined processing.

Feature T10. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The game machine according to any one of features T1 to T9, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

According to the feature T10, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the processing for managing the game history from being rewritten when the processing for executing the above is executed.

Feature T11. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231 and opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which, when a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history information of the game corresponding thereto is stored. , The high-frequency support mode counter area 233) is provided, the gaming machine according to Feature T10.

According to feature T11, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature T12. The second predetermined processing execution means uses the history information stored in the history storage area to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period (step S4208 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to the feature T11, which is provided with a function of executing the process of.

According to the feature T12, by using the history information stored in the history storage area, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived, so that the management of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is performed. It is possible to grasp the result.

Feature T13. The gaming machine according to feature T12, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (a calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

According to the feature T13, when the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the form information is stored in the form information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features T1 to T13. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature U group>
Features U1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A flag register provided in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed State setting means for causing the state of No. to become the specific state (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211 in the main CPU 63, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the step in the main CPU63 A function of executing the processing of S6302 to step S6307 and step S6312),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic U1, when the second predetermined process is executed or the second predetermined process is executed from the condition in which the first predetermined process is executed, the flag register of the internal storage means is changed. The state is set to a specific state. This makes it possible to start the second predetermined process in a situation where the state of the flag register is in a predetermined specific state. Therefore, various controls can be suitably performed.

Features U2. The gaming machine according to feature U1, wherein the specific state is a state when supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to the characteristic U2, the flag register is set to the state when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started as the specific state, so that the processing configuration for setting the specific state can be simplified. It will be possible.

Features U3. The specific state is a state in which the flag register is cleared to "0". The gaming machine according to the feature U1 or U2.

According to the feature U3, the flag register is set to a state in which “0” is cleared as the specific state, so that the processing configuration for setting the specific state can be simplified.

Features U4. A means for causing the state of the flag register to be the specific state when or after the second predetermined process is finished (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the processes of steps S6213 to S6218 in the main CPU 63 are executed). The game machine according to any one of the features U1 to U3, which has a function, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S6314 to S6322 in the main CPU 63.

According to the characteristic U4, the second predetermined process is performed not only when the second predetermined process is executed from the state where the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. The state of the flag register is set to the specific state when the process ends or when the process ends. As a result, the first predetermined process can be restarted in a situation where the state of the flag register is the predetermined specific state. Also, the state of the flag register can be set to the specific state before and after the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the flag register by one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process from affecting the other process.

Features U5. A predetermined storage unit (main RAM 65) for temporarily storing information when the control unit executes a process;
The state setting means,
A means for changing the state of a predetermined storage area in the predetermined storage means to the specific state (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing steps S6202 to S6204 in the main CPU 63, in the twenty-seventh embodiment). A function of executing the processing of steps S6302 to S6307 in the main CPU 63),
A unit that stores the information stored in the predetermined storage area in the flag register so that the state of the flag register becomes the specific state (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the processing of step S6211 in the main CPU 63 is performed). A function to execute, a function to execute the process of step S6312 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-seventh embodiment),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features U1 to U4.

According to the characteristic U5, even if the flag register state cannot be directly set to a specific state as an instruction of the control means, the flag is written by using the writing of information to the predetermined storage means and the reading of the information. It becomes possible to set the state of the register to a specific state.

Features U6. The predetermined storage means,
A stack area (a stack area 222 for specific control) in which the control unit can write information by a push command and the control unit can read information by a pop command;
A work area (a work area 221 for specific control) in which the control means can write and read information by a load instruction;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature U5, wherein the predetermined storage area is provided in the stack area.

According to feature U6, even if the information stored in the work area cannot be directly written to the flag register, the state of the flag register can be specified by writing the information to the stack area and reading the information. It is possible to set the state.

Features U7. A predetermined register provided in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed. Means for making the state of the predetermined state a predetermined state (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing steps S6205 to S6210 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-seventh embodiment, steps S6308 to S6311 of the main CPU 63). Function to execute processing)
The state setting means sets the state of the flag register to the specific state after the state of the predetermined register is set to the predetermined state, according to any one of features U1 to U6. Amusement machine.

The state of the flag register may change each time the control means executes various processes. In this case, according to the characteristic U7, since the state of the flag register is set to the specific state after the state of the predetermined register is set to the predetermined state, the flag register is set to the specific state immediately before the second predetermined process is started. It becomes possible to do so.

Features U8. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is means for causing the state of the flag register to be in a specific state (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211 in the main CPU 63, the twenty-seventh embodiment). Then, a gaming machine having a function of executing the processing of steps S6302 to S6307 and step S6312 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature U8, it becomes possible to set the state of the flag register to a specific state if necessary.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features U1 to U8. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature V group>
Features V1. A control unit (main CPU 63) for executing various processes and temporarily storing information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when the processes are executed,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A flag register provided in the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed Information in a predetermined storage unit (main side RAM 65) for saving execution means (function of executing step S3802 in the main side CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, step S4402 in the main side CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment). A function of executing processing, a function of executing the processing of step S4802 in the main CPU 63 in the twentieth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S6402 to S6405 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and a twenty-ninth embodiment. In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6502 to S6509 in the main CPU 63),
In the case of ending the second predetermined process or after the second predetermined process, return execution means for returning the information in the flag register saved in the predetermined storage means to the flag register (in the fifteenth embodiment, step S3804 in the main CPU 63). 28th embodiment A function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S6407 to S6415, and a function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S6511 to S6518 in the twenty-ninth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic V1, the information of the flag register is stored in a predetermined manner when the second predetermined process is executed from the state in which the first predetermined process is executed, or when the second predetermined process is executed. It is evacuated to the means. This makes it possible to prevent the information stored in the flag register from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed when the second predetermined process is executed. In addition, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the flag register when or after the second predetermined processing is ended. As a result, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the flag register before the execution of the second predetermined process. As described above, various controls can be suitably performed.

Features V2. The predetermined storage means,
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
Equipped with
The game machine according to feature V1, wherein the save executing means saves the information in the flag register to the first predetermined storage area.

According to the characteristic V2, since the predetermined storage means is provided with the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area, the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means is determined by the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. It is possible to make a clear difference. This makes it possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, when the situation in which the second predetermined processing is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined processing is executed, or when the second predetermined processing is executed, the information in the flag register is the first predetermined storage area. Be evacuated to. This makes it possible to save the information in the flag register immediately before the second predetermined process is started, and save the information without using the second predetermined storage area.

Features V3. In the first predetermined storage area, information can be stored and information can be read when the first predetermined processing is executed, and information can be read when the second predetermined processing is executed. It is impossible to store information,
In the second predetermined storage area, information can be stored and information can be read when the second predetermined process is executed, and information can be read when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature V2, which is characterized in that information cannot be stored.

According to the feature V3, the first predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area can be treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined processing. Becomes

Features V4. The predetermined storage means,
A stack area (a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information can be written by a push instruction and information can be read by a pop instruction;
A work area (a work area 221 for specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load instruction,
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features V1 to V3, wherein the save execution means saves information in the flag register to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to the feature V4, when the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed is changed from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed or when the second predetermined process is executed, the stack area in the second predetermined storage area And the information of the flag register is saved in one of the work areas. As a result, it becomes possible to aggregate the save destinations of information, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring.

Features V5. The game machine according to feature V4, wherein the save executing means saves the information in the flag register to the work area.

According to the feature V5, since the save destination of the information in the flag register is the work area, it is possible to save the information without cumulatively changing the stack pointer.

Features V6. The evacuation executing means is
A means for storing the information of the flag register in a predetermined register provided in the internal storage means (a function for executing the processing of steps S6402 and S6403 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a main function in the twenty-ninth embodiment). Function of executing the processing of steps S6502 to S6505 in the side CPU 63),
Means for storing information of the flag register stored in the predetermined register in the predetermined storage means (function of executing step S6404 in the main CPU 63 in the 28th embodiment, main CPU 63 in the 29th embodiment). In step S6506))),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features V1 to V5, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic V6, even if the information of the flag register cannot be directly saved in the predetermined storage means as an instruction of the control means, the information is written in the predetermined register and the information stored in the predetermined register is predetermined. It is possible to save the information in the flag register to the predetermined storage means by using the writing to the storage means.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features V1 to V6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature W group>
Features W1. A control means (main CPU 63) for executing various processes is provided,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
An abnormal event monitoring unit (a program monitoring unit 252) for monitoring whether or not an abnormal event has occurred,
It is possible to cause a situation in which the information erasing process is executed at least in the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that the abnormal event monitoring unit has identified that the abnormal event has occurred. Erasing status generating means (reset signal output unit 251),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature W1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means different between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Therefore, when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased. Further, the information erasing process is executed on at least the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that the abnormal event has been identified. This makes it possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information in the first predetermined storage area is held as it is, despite the occurrence of the abnormal event.

Features W2. The control means is
Means for executing processing for storing power failure correspondence information when supply of operating power to the control means is stopped (in the thirtieth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S6709 and S6710 in the main CPU 63) In the thirty-second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S7609 to S7611 in the main CPU 63),
When the supply of the operating power to the control means is started and the processing at the start of the supply is executed in a situation where the power failure correspondence information is not stored, the information erasing processing is performed on at least the first predetermined storage area. Means for executing the processing in step S6607 in the main CPU 63 in the thirtieth embodiment, a function for executing the clear processing at the time of abnormality in the main CPU63 in the thirty-first embodiment, and the thirty-second embodiment. In the above embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S7704, S7705, S7808, and S7810 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
The erasing status generation means starts the supply by the control means in a situation where the power failure correspondence information is not stored, based on the abnormal event monitoring means specifying that the abnormal event has occurred. The gaming machine described in the feature W1 is characterized in that the process at the time is executed.

According to the characteristic W2, when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started and the process at the start of the supply is executed in the situation where the power failure correspondence information is not stored, the information erasing process is at least the first predetermined. By being executed for the storage area, the information of the first predetermined storage area is retained as it is when the supply of operating power to the control means is started in a situation where the process at the time of power failure is not properly performed. It is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in this state. In this case, on the basis of the fact that the abnormal event has been identified, the control means executes the process at the start of supply in the situation where the power failure response information is not stored. As a result, when the control means executes the process at the time of starting the supply in the situation where the power failure correspondence information is not stored, the configuration for executing the information erasing process is used, and the information of the abnormal event is generated. It becomes possible to execute the erasing process.

Features W3. The control means executes various processes when a reset signal is received, and receives the reset signal from a situation where the reset signal is not received in a situation where operating power is supplied. The process at the start of the supply is started based on the situation that
The erasure status generating means is configured to notify the control means after the control means does not receive the reset signal based on the fact that the abnormal event has been identified by the abnormal event monitoring means. The game machine according to feature W2, wherein the game machine is set to receive the reset signal.

According to the feature W3, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects by switching the reception state of the reset signal.

Features W4. The control unit is configured to temporarily store information in an internal storage unit (a register and a program counter of the main CPU 63) when executing a process, and the information stored in the internal storage unit is stored in the first predetermined storage unit. It is a configuration that can be temporarily saved in the area,
The abnormal event monitoring means, as the abnormal event, monitors whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the internal storage means,
Any one of the characteristics W1 to W3 is characterized in that the erasing status generating means causes a status in which the erasing processing of the information is executed on at least both the first predetermined storage area and the internal storage means. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature W4, the information stored in the internal storage means can be temporarily saved in the first predetermined storage area. Therefore, when an abnormality occurs in the information stored in the internal storage means, 1 There is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the predetermined storage area. In this case, when an abnormality occurs in the information stored in the internal storage means, the information erasing process is executed not only in the internal storage means but also in the first predetermined storage area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed as it is, even if an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the first predetermined storage area.

Features W5. The erasure status generating means prevents the erasing process of the information from being performed on the second predetermined storage area even if the abnormal event monitoring means specifies that the abnormal event has occurred. The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W4.

According to the feature W5, even if an abnormal event occurs, information can be stored and held in the second predetermined storage area.

Features W6. The erasure status generating means performs the information erasing process on the basis of the fact that the abnormal event has been identified by the abnormal event monitoring means as the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of the features W1 to W4, characterized in that it causes a situation to be executed for both.

According to the feature W6, the information erasing process is executed for both the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that the abnormal event has been identified. This makes it possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information in the first predetermined storage area is retained as it is even though an abnormal event has occurred, and an abnormal event has occurred. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information in the second predetermined storage area is retained as it is.

Features W7. The erasing process of the information in the first predetermined storage area is performed in the first predetermined process, and the erasing process of the information in the second predetermined storage region is performed in the second predetermined process. The gaming machine according to W6.

According to the feature W7, also in the information erasing process, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined processing. It becomes possible to be exposed.

Features W8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The game machine according to any one of features W1 to W7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

According to the feature W8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process.

Features W9. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231 and opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which, when a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history information of the game corresponding thereto is stored. , The high-frequency support mode counter area 233) is provided, the gaming machine according to Feature W8.

According to the feature W9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Features W10. The second predetermined processing execution means uses the history information stored in the history storage area to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period (step S4208 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to the feature W9, which is provided with a function of executing the process of.

According to the feature W10, by using the history information stored in the history storage area, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived, thereby managing the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. It is possible to grasp the result.

Features W11. The gaming machine according to Feature W10, wherein the second predetermined storage region includes a feature information storage region (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the feature information derived by the information deriving unit.

According to the characteristic W11, when the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the form information is stored in the form information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features W1 to W11. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature X group>
Feature X1. A control means (main CPU 63) for executing various processes is provided,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
Equipped with
The second predetermined processing execution means executes the deletion processing of information on the second predetermined storage area as the second predetermined processing based on the occurrence of the deletion trigger. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs the processing of steps S6103 and S6107, in the thirtieth embodiment, the main CPU63 performs the processing of step S7204, and in the thirty-first embodiment the main CPU63. A function of executing the processing of step S7508 in step S7508, and a function of executing the processing of steps S7808 and S7810 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-second embodiment).

According to the feature X1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means different between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Therefore, when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased.

Further, when the erasing trigger occurs, the information erasing process is executed on the second predetermined storage area, so that the second predetermined storage area is generated despite some abnormality in the second predetermined storage area. It is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed in a state where the above information is held as it is. Further, since the information erasing process is executed in the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from intervening in updating the information in the second predetermined storage area.

Feature X2. The erasing execution means executes the erasing process of the information on the second predetermined storage area while preventing the non-erasing target information (management monitoring flag, return address information, information of various registers) from being erased. The gaming machine according to feature X1.

According to the feature X2, the erasing process of the information in the second predetermined storage area is performed while preventing the non-erasure target information in the second predetermined storage area from being erased. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the information erasing process on the second predetermined storage area while preventing even the necessary information from being erased.

Feature X3. The second predetermined processing execution means is configured to perform the second predetermined processing when the first predetermined processing is being executed, the second predetermined processing is being executed, or the second predetermined processing is being executed. A storage executing means (in the thirtieth embodiment, which stores the return correspondence information (return address information, information of various registers) necessary for returning to the situation in which the first predetermined processing is executed in the second predetermined storage area. Function of executing the processing of steps S7102 to S7107 in the main CPU 63, function of executing the processing of steps S7502 to S7507 in the main CPU 63 in the 31st embodiment, and step S7802 of the main CPU 63 in the 32nd embodiment. A function for executing the processing of step S7807),
The game according to the feature X2, wherein the erasing execution means performs the erasing process of the information on the second predetermined storage area while preventing the return corresponding information from being erased as the non-erasing target information. Machine.

According to the feature X3, the second predetermined process is performed while preventing even the restoration correspondence information necessary for returning from the situation in which the second predetermined process is being performed to the situation in which the first predetermined process is being performed. It is possible to execute the information erasing process for the storage area.

Feature X4. The storage executing means stores, in the second predetermined storage area, information on a return address of a program when the second predetermined processing is terminated and the processing returns to the first predetermined processing, as the return correspondence information. The gaming machine described in Feature X3.

According to the feature X4, the information erasing process is executed on the second predetermined storage region while the information at the return address of the program is not erased when returning to the first predetermined process, and thus the second predetermined storage region is executed. Even if the information erasing process is executed for the above, it is possible to return to the predetermined program in the first predetermined process when the second predetermined process is completed.

Feature X5. The control unit is configured to temporarily store information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when executing processing,
The game machine according to feature X3 or X4, wherein the storage execution means stores the information stored in the internal storage means in the second predetermined storage area as the return correspondence information.

According to the feature X5, since the information erasing process is executed on the second predetermined storage area while the information in the internal storage means used in the first predetermined process is not erased, the second predetermined storage area is stored. On the other hand, even if the information erasing process is executed, the information used in the first predetermined process can be restored to the internal storage means when the second predetermined process is completed.

Feature X6. The erasing execution means causes the erasing process of the information to be executed on the second predetermined storage area as the occurrence of the erasure trigger based on the occurrence of an abnormality in the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of the features X1 to X5.

According to the feature X6, since the information erasing process is executed for the second predetermined storage area based on the occurrence of the abnormality in the second predetermined storage area, an abnormality occurs in the second predetermined storage area. It is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed in the state of being kept.

Feature X7. The second predetermined processing execution means is means for monitoring whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal as the second predetermined processing (in the thirtieth embodiment, steps S7201 to S7203 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to feature X6, which is provided with a function of executing processing.

According to the feature X7, not only the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area, but also the monitoring of whether the second predetermined storage area is normal or not can be performed by the second predetermined processing without intervening the first predetermined processing. Since it is executed, it is possible to monitor whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal and execute the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area as a series of processes in the second predetermined process. ..

Feature X8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The game machine according to any one of features X1 to X7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

According to the feature X8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process.

Feature X9. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231 and opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which, when a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history information of the game corresponding thereto is stored. , The high-frequency support mode counter area 233) is provided, the gaming machine according to Feature X8.

According to the feature X9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature X10. The second predetermined processing execution means uses the history information stored in the history storage area to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period (step S4208 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to the feature X9, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of.

According to the feature X10, by using the history information stored in the history storage area, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived, and the management of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is performed. It is possible to grasp the result.

Feature X11. The gaming machine according to Feature X10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information deriving unit.

According to the feature X11, when the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the form information is stored in the form information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features X1 to X11, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature Y group>
Feature Y1. A control means (main CPU 63) for executing various processes is provided,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a process other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a first predetermined process among the various processes;
A second predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes;
A first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined processing is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined processing is executed;
First calculating means for calculating first reference numerical value information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the first predetermined storage area (in the thirtieth embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes steps S6604 and S6710). Function, a function of executing the process of step S7304 in the main CPU 63 in the 31st embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S7610 and step S7701 in the main CPU 63 in the 32nd embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature Y1, the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined processing, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to clearly make the storage destination of the information in the predetermined storage means different between the first predetermined processing and the second predetermined processing. Therefore, when one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information used in the other process from being erased. In this case, the first reference numerical value information corresponding to the plurality of pieces of information stored in the first predetermined storage area is calculated. By using the first reference numerical value information, it is possible to specify whether or not the information abnormality has occurred only in the first predetermined storage area.

Feature Y2. Information erasing means for causing information erasing processing to be executed for the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that an abnormality has been identified with respect to the first reference numerical value information calculated by the first calculating means. (A function for executing the process of step S6607 in the main CPU 63 in the thirtieth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S7401 and step S7402 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-first embodiment, and a main side in the thirty-second embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature Y1, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of steps S7704 and S7705 in the CPU 63.

According to the characteristic Y2, when the occurrence of an abnormality is specified with respect to the first reference numerical value information, the information erasing process is executed for the first predetermined storage area. Instead, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed while the information in the first predetermined storage area is held as it is.

Feature Y3. The first calculation means,
A first power failure time calculating means for calculating the first reference numerical value information when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped (in the thirtieth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S6710 in the main CPU 63, In the 32nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S7610 in the main CPU 63),
A first power-on-time calculation unit that calculates the first reference numerical value information when the supply of operating power to the control unit is started (in the thirtieth embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing step S6604). , A function of executing the process of step S7304 in the main CPU 63 in the 31st embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S7701 in the main CPU 63 in the 32nd embodiment).
Equipped with
The information erasing means is based on the fact that the first reference numerical value information calculated by the first power failure time calculating means does not match the first reference numerical value information calculated by the first power-on time calculating means. The gaming machine according to feature Y2, wherein the erasing process of the information is executed at least in the first predetermined storage area.

According to the feature Y3, it is possible to specify whether or not the information in the first predetermined storage area is stored and held with the situation where the supply of the operating power is stopped sandwiched by calculating the first reference numerical value information. Becomes Then, when the information in the first predetermined storage area is not stored and held with the supply of the operating power stopped, the information erasing process is executed for the first predetermined storage area. It is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in a state where the information in the first predetermined storage area is held as it is, despite the occurrence of.

Feature Y4. The information erasing means does not execute the erasing process of the information in the second predetermined storage area even if the occurrence of an abnormality is specified with respect to the first reference numerical value information calculated by the first calculating means. The gaming machine according to the feature Y2 or Y3.

According to the feature Y4, when the occurrence of an abnormality is specified with respect to the first reference numerical value information, the information erasing process is performed on the first predetermined storage area, while the information is erased on the second predetermined storage area. The process is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent even the information in the second predetermined storage area from being erased in a situation where information abnormality has occurred in the first predetermined storage area.

Feature Y5. The gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y4, wherein the first reference numerical value information is information that does not change according to the information stored in the second predetermined storage area.

According to the feature Y5, in the configuration in which the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area exist, it is possible to individually specify the information abnormality relating to the first predetermined storage area using the first reference numerical value information. It will be possible.

Feature Y6. It is provided with a second calculating means (a function of executing the processing of steps S7611 and S7706 in the main CPU 63) for calculating the second reference numerical value information corresponding to the plurality of pieces of information stored in the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of the features Y1 to Y5.

According to the characteristic Y6, the second reference numerical value information corresponding to the plurality of pieces of information stored in the second predetermined storage area is calculated. By using the second reference numerical value information, it becomes possible to specify whether or not the information abnormality has occurred only in the second predetermined storage area.

Feature Y7. Means for causing information erasing processing to be executed on at least the second predetermined storage area based on the fact that an abnormality has been identified with respect to the second reference numerical value information calculated by the second calculating means ( The gaming machine according to feature Y6, which is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S7808 and S7810 in the main CPU 63.

According to the characteristic Y7, when the occurrence of an abnormality is specified with respect to the second reference numerical value information, the information erasing process is executed on the second predetermined storage area. Instead, it is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed while the information in the second predetermined storage area is retained as it is.

Feature Y8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The game machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a game history.

According to the feature Y8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process to control the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process.

Feature Y9. The second predetermined storage area is a history storage area (normal counter area 231 and opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which, when a predetermined event occurs due to execution of a game, history information of the game corresponding thereto is stored. , The high-frequency support mode counter area 233) is provided, the gaming machine according to the feature Y8.

According to the feature Y9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information or unauthorized modification. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature Y10. The second predetermined processing execution means uses the history information stored in the history storage area to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period (step S4208 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to the feature Y9, which is provided with a function of executing the process of.

According to the feature Y10, by using the history information stored in the history storage area, the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived, and the management of the game history such as the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event is performed. It is possible to grasp the result.

Feature Y11. The gaming machine according to feature Y10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information deriving means.

According to the characteristic Y11, when the form information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived using the history information, the form information is stored in the form information storage area. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history at an arbitrary timing. Further, a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, whereby a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It is possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features Y1 to Y11. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic T group, the characteristic U group, the characteristic V group, the characteristic W group, the characteristic X group, and the characteristic Y group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, various controls need to be suitably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature Z group>
Feature Z1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
Status generating means (a function of executing the processing of steps S7905, S7916 and S7917 in the main CPU 63) for setting a settable status in which the setting value to be used can be changed;
In the situation where the supply of the operating power to the control means (main CPU 63) having the setting means is started and the processing at the start of the supply is being executed, the set value of the use target in the situation where the setting is not possible is performed. A setting informing means (a function of executing the setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for informing;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic Z1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player is allowed to use the more advantageous setting value. Will be expected. In this case, in order to confirm the set value set as the usage target, it is necessary to temporarily stop the supply of the operating power to the control means and then restart the supply of the operating power to the control means. .. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally confirming the set value. Moreover, since the setting value is notified in the situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed, it is not necessary to notify the setting value in the situation where the game is interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the set value.

Feature Z2. The gaming machine according to feature Z1, wherein the situation generating means sets the setting possible situation in a situation where the processing at the start of supply is being executed.

According to the feature Z2, the setting possible situation in which the setting value to be used can be set, and the situation in which the setting value to be used is notified in a situation that is not the setting possible situation are set at the start of supply. It is possible to aggregate the situation where the processing is being executed.

Feature Z3. A first specifying means (a function for executing the processes of steps S7912 and S7916 in the main CPU 63) for specifying the occurrence of the first trigger event;
The setting notification means can perform the setting based on the situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed and the occurrence of the first trigger event is identified by the first identifying means. The gaming machine according to feature Z1 or Z2, characterized in that the setting value of the use target in a situation other than the situation is notified.

According to the feature Z3, in order to notify the set value of the target to be used, it is necessary not only to start the supply of the operating power to the control means but also to generate the first trigger event. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally confirming the set value.

Feature Z4. The gaming machine according to feature Z3, wherein the first trigger event is that a predetermined operation is performed on the setting key inserting unit (setting key inserting unit 68a) with the setting key.

According to the feature Z4, in order to notify the setting of the use target, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion portion. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally confirming the set value.

Feature Z5. The setting notification means is in a situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed and the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means, and the notification condition is satisfied. In such a case, the notification of the setting value of the use target in a situation that is not the setting possible situation is performed,
The setting condition is satisfied based on that the situation occurrence means is in a situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed and the occurrence of the first trigger event is identified by the first identifying means. If it does, it will be in the setting possible situation,
The gaming machine according to feature Z3 or Z4, wherein the notification condition and the setting condition are different.

According to the feature Z5, not only is the supply of operating power to the control means started, but the first trigger event is generated, regardless of whether the settable status is generated or the setting value to be used is notified. Need to occur. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to perform both the act of setting the setting value to be used due to fraud and the act of checking the setting value to be used due to fraud. On the other hand, since the setting condition for generating the settable condition and the notification condition for notifying the set value of the use target are different, the settable condition and the situation where the set value of the use target is notified It is possible to generate either one of them independently.

Feature Z6. A second specifying unit (a function of executing the process of step S7905 in the main CPU 63) for specifying the occurrence of the second trigger event is provided,
The setting condition is a situation in which the occurrence of the first trigger event is identified by the first identifying means in a situation in which the process at the start of supply is being performed, It is established based on the situation that the occurrence of the trigger event is specified,
The notification condition is a situation in which the occurrence of the first trigger event is identified by the first identifying means in a situation in which the process at the start of supply is being performed, and the second identifying means is configured to perform the second operation. The gaming machine according to feature Z5, which is established based on a situation in which the occurrence of the trigger event is not specified.

According to the feature Z6, in order to generate the settable condition, it is necessary to start the supply of the operating power to the control means and generate the second trigger event as well as the first trigger event. As a result, in both cases of setting the setting value to be used and notifying the setting value of the usage target, it is not only necessary to start supplying the operating power to the control means. In the configuration in which it is necessary to generate the first trigger event, the operation for generating the settable status can be made more complicated. Therefore, it becomes possible to more intensively prevent the act of illegally setting the setting value to be used.

Feature Z7. The gaming machine according to feature Z6, wherein the second trigger event is that a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) is operated.

According to the feature Z7, in order to generate the settable state, it is necessary to start the supply of the operating power to the control means and generate the first trigger event, and also to operate the predetermined operation means. This makes it difficult to illegally set the setting value to be used, but prevents the operation for legally generating the settable status from becoming excessively complicated. It becomes possible.

Feature Z8. An information erasing unit that executes an information erasing process based on a situation in which the occurrence of the second trigger event is identified by the second identifying unit in the situation in which the process at the start of supply is being performed ( The game machine according to feature Z6 or Z7, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step S7915 in the main CPU 63.

According to the feature Z8, the condition for generating the settable status by using the second trigger event necessary for executing the information erasing process and the set value of the usage target in the situation that is not the settable status It is possible to make the condition different from the condition for making the notification.

Feature Z9. The gaming machine according to feature Z8, wherein the information erasing means executes the erasing process of the information even when the setting possible situation occurs.

According to the feature Z9, it becomes possible to execute the information erasing process when the setting is possible.

Feature Z10. A situation in which the occurrence of the second trigger event is identified by the second identifying unit in a situation in which the process at the start of supply is being performed, and the occurrence of the first trigger event is identified by the first identifying unit. The game machine according to the feature Z8 or Z9, characterized in that, in a situation where the setting is not possible, the information erasing process is executed by the information erasing means although the setting is not possible.

According to the characteristic Z10, depending on whether or not the first trigger event is generated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the information erasing process is executed and the setting possible state is set, and It is possible to select whether or not the erasing process is executed but the settable status does not occur.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features Z1 to Z10. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature a group>
Features a1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
Status generating means (a function of executing the processing of steps S7905, S7916 and S7917 in the main CPU 63) for setting a settable status in which the setting value to be used can be changed;
Information erasing means for executing information erasing processing (function of executing the processing of step S7915 in the main CPU 63),
Setting informing means (a function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63) for informing the setting value of the use target in a situation other than the setting possible situation;
First specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the first trigger event (a function of the main CPU 63 for executing the processing of steps S7912 and S7916);
Second identifying means for identifying the occurrence of the second trigger event (a function of the main CPU 63 for executing the processing of step S7905);
Equipped with
The situation occurrence means identifies the occurrence of the first trigger event by the first identification means in a situation where the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started and the processing at the start of supply is being executed. Based on the fact that the occurrence of the second trigger event is specified by the second specifying means, the setting possible status is set.
The information erasing means is based on the fact that the occurrence of the second trigger event is identified by the second identifying means in the situation where the processing at the start of supply is being executed, and the information erasing processing is performed. Run
A situation in which the occurrence of the second trigger event is identified by the second identifying means in the situation in which the process at the start of supply is being performed, and the occurrence of the first trigger event is identified by the first identifying means. If not, the information erasing process by the information erasing means is executed although the setting is not possible.
The setting notifying means is in a situation in which the occurrence of the first trigger event is identified by the first identifying means in a situation in which the process at the start of supply is being executed, and A gaming machine characterized in that, based on a situation in which the occurrence of a triggering event is not specified, a notification of the setting value of the use target in a situation that is not the setting possible situation is performed.

According to the characteristic a1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player is allowed to use the more advantageous setting value. Will be expected. Further, since the information erasing process can be executed, it is possible to prevent the game from being played despite the occurrence of the information abnormality. Further, since the set value set as the usage target can be notified, it is possible to confirm the set value.

In this case, in order to confirm the set value set as the usage target, it is necessary to start the supply of the operating power to the control means and generate the first trigger event. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally confirming the set value.

Further, in order to generate the settable status, it is necessary to start the supply of the operating power to the control means and generate the second trigger event as well as the first trigger event. As a result, in both cases of setting the setting value to be used and notifying the setting value of the usage target, it is not only necessary to start supplying the operating power to the control means. In the configuration in which it is necessary to generate the first trigger event, the operation for generating the settable status can be made more complicated. Therefore, it becomes possible to more intensively prevent the act of illegally setting the setting value to be used.

In addition, the second trigger event necessary for executing the information erasing process is used to notify the condition for generating the settable status and the setting value of the usage target in the situation that is not the settable status. It becomes possible to differ from the conditions for doing so.

In addition, depending on whether or not the first trigger event is generated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the information erasing process is executed and the setting possible state and the information erasing process are performed. It is possible to select whether to be executed but not settable.

Feature a2. The gaming machine according to feature a1, wherein the first trigger event is that a predetermined operation is performed on the setting key inserting unit (setting key inserting unit 68a) with the setting key.

According to the feature a2, in order to notify the setting of the use target, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation with the setting key on the setting key insertion portion. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally confirming the set value.

Feature a3. The gaming machine according to feature a1 or a2, wherein the second trigger event is that a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) is operated.

According to the feature a3, in order to generate the settable condition, it is necessary to start the supply of the operating power to the control means and generate the first trigger event, and also to operate the predetermined operation means. This makes it difficult to illegally set the setting value to be used, but prevents the operation for legally generating the settable status from becoming excessively complicated. It becomes possible.

For the configurations of the features a1 to a3, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic Z group and the characteristic a group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, a configuration capable of suitably confirming the setting value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. ..

<Feature b group>
Features b1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
Status generating means (a function of executing the processing of steps S7905, S7916 and S7917 in the main CPU 63) for setting a settable status in which the setting value to be used can be changed;
A setting monitoring unit that executes a setting monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the setting value of the use target is abnormal (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the process of step S8202);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the setting monitoring processing is not included in the processing at the start of supply, which is executed when the supply of the operating power to the control means having the setting means is started.

According to the feature b1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player, the player is allowed to use the more advantageous setting value. Will be expected. Further, since the setting monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the setting value of the usage target is abnormal is performed, it is possible to deal with it when the setting value of the usage target is abnormal. Further, since the setting monitoring process is not included in the process at the start of supply, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while preventing the processing load of the process at the start of supply from increasing.

Feature b2. The gaming machine according to feature b1, wherein the situation generation means generates the setting possible situation in a situation where the processing at the start of supply is being executed.

According to the feature b2, since the setting possible situation occurs in the situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed, it becomes possible to set the set value of the use target before the game is started. .. In this case, since the set value to be used is set in the process at the start of supply, the processing load of the process at the start of supply is correspondingly increased. On the other hand, since the process at the start of supply does not include the setting monitoring process because of the configuration of the characteristic b1 described above, the processing load of the process at the start of supply is prevented from further increasing while being used. It is possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal.

Feature b3. The gaming machine according to feature b1 or b2, wherein the setting monitoring unit executes the setting monitoring process after the process at the start of supply is completed.

According to the feature b3, since the setting monitoring process is executed after the process at the start of supply is completed, the setting value of the use target is abnormal while preventing the processing load of the process at the start of supply from increasing. It becomes possible to monitor whether or not.

Feature b4. The gaming machine according to feature b3, wherein the setting monitoring unit executes the setting monitoring process each time a monitoring trigger occurs after the process at the start of supply is completed.

According to the feature b4, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time a monitoring trigger occurs after the process at the start of supply is completed, it is easy to specify that the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature b5. A means for executing an interrupt process that is regularly activated (a function for executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b4, wherein the setting monitoring process is included in the interrupt process.

According to the feature b5, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time it is activated, it is possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature b6. The setting monitoring means is means for restricting the progress of the game based on the fact that the setting value of the use target is specified to be abnormal in the setting monitoring processing (step S8207 in the main CPU 63 and The gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b5, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of step S8302.

According to the feature b6, when it is specified that the set value of the use target is abnormal, the progress of the game is restricted, so that the game is continued even though the set value of the use target is abnormal. It becomes possible not to.

Feature b7. Based on the fact that the setting monitoring means identifies that the setting value of the use target is abnormal in the setting monitoring process, a notification is made to enable the player to recognize that the setting possible situation should be generated. The gaming machine described in any one of the features b1 to b6, which is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step S8303 in the main CPU 63) to be executed.

According to the feature b7, when it is specified that the setting value of the use target is abnormal, a notification is made to enable the player to recognize that the setting possible situation should be generated, and thus the setting of the use target is performed. When the value becomes abnormal, it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to cancel it.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features b1 to b7. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above-mentioned feature b group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably manage the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic c group>
Feature c1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification);
A predetermined display control means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the predetermined display means;
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means causes the predetermined display means to perform a check display for confirming whether or not the predetermined display means is normal based on the occurrence of the check trigger (the 35th control means). In the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S9102 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the process of step S9602 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-eighth embodiment).

According to the feature c1, the check display is displayed on the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of the check trigger. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal.

Feature c2. The predetermined display means has a plurality of light emitting parts (display segments 321 to 324),
The gaming machine according to feature c1, wherein the check display is a display that enables confirmation that each of the plurality of light emitting units can be in a light emitting state.

According to the characteristic c2, each of the plurality of light emitting units of the predetermined display means is in a light emitting state as a check display. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not each of the plurality of light emitting units of the predetermined display means is in the light emitting state.

Feature c3. The gaming machine according to feature c1 or c2, wherein the check trigger is generated when supply of operating power is started.

According to the characteristic c3, since the check display is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to quickly confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal.

Feature c4. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c3, wherein the check trigger is generated each time supply of operating power is started.

According to the characteristic c4, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal every time the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature c5. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c4, wherein the check trigger is generated without requiring an operation for generating the check trigger when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature c5, when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display is displayed without requiring a special operation, which makes it easy to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. It becomes possible to do.

Feature c6. The check control means causes the predetermined display means to perform the check display when the supply of the operating power is started and the check trigger is generated, and the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features c1 to c5, wherein the check display is not displayed on the predetermined display means when the check trigger has not occurred.

According to the characteristic c6, since the check display is performed when the supply of the operating power is started and the check opportunity is generated, the predetermined display is provided at the stage before the game is started on the gaming machine. It is possible to confirm whether or not the means is normal. On the other hand, even if the supply of operating power is started, the check display is not displayed if the check trigger has not occurred, so the check display is displayed in the situation where it is not necessary to display the check display. It becomes possible not to.

Feature c7. And a means (a function of executing the process of step S8606 in the main CPU 63) for storing information in the use correspondence storage means (management start flag) based on the fact that the gaming machine is used in a predetermined mode,
The check control means generates the check trigger when the supply of operating power is started and the information stored in the use correspondence storage means does not correspond to the use correspondence information. When the predetermined display means is caused to perform the check display as described above, and the supply of operating power is started, and the information stored in the use correspondence storage means corresponds to the use correspondence information. The gaming machine according to feature c6, wherein the check display is not displayed on the predetermined display means because the check trigger has not occurred.

According to the feature c7, when the supply of the operating power is started until the game machine is used in the predetermined mode, the check display is displayed on the predetermined display means, and the game machine is used in the predetermined mode. Even if the supply of the operating power is started based on this, the check display is not displayed on the predetermined display means. Thus, for example, in the shipping stage of the gaming machine, when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display is displayed on the predetermined display means, thereby determining whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. This makes it possible to confirm and even if the supply of operating power is started after the gaming machine is installed in the game hall, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed on the predetermined display means.

Feature c8. The check control means,
Display ending means for ending the check display on the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of an ending trigger (a function of executing the processing of step S9002 in the main CPU 63 and a negative determination in step S9101),
Canceling means for terminating the check display on the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of the cancellation trigger even if the termination trigger has not occurred (function of executing the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63, and A function of making a negative judgment in step S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of making a negative judgment in step S9101),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features c1 to c7, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature c8, the check display is terminated based on the cancellation trigger even if the check display termination trigger has not occurred, so that the check display is being performed on the predetermined display means. Even in this case, it is possible to end the check display halfway and perform another display.

Feature c9. The gaming machine according to feature c8, wherein the cancellation opportunity is generated based on an operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

According to the characteristic c9, since the cancellation trigger is generated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is possible to end the check display at an arbitrary timing.

Feature c10. The predetermined display control means has a separate display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63) for performing another display different from the check display when the separate display execution state is set. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to feature c8 or c9, wherein the cancellation trigger is generated based on the fact that the separate display execution state is set.

According to the characteristic c10, since the check display is terminated when the cancellation trigger occurs due to the fact that the separate display execution state is set, the separate display can be prioritized over the check display.

Feature c11. Features c1 to c1 which are provided with a unit (a function of executing the process of step S9406 in the main CPU 63) for waiting the progress of the process when the check display is being executed on the predetermined display unit. The gaming machine according to any one of c10.

According to the characteristic c11, since the check display is performed by the predetermined display means in the situation where the progress of the processing is on standby, it is possible to perform the check display while suppressing an increase in the processing load.

Feature c12. The check control means starts the check display on the predetermined display means before the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of c1 to c11.

According to the characteristic c12, when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before the game is played on the gaming machine.

Features c13. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operation power based on start of supply of operation power (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63, the thirty-sixth embodiment). In the embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
It is a configuration in which predetermined setting-related processing (setting confirmation processing, setting value updating processing) relating to the setting value can be executed in a situation where the processing at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed,
The gaming machine according to feature c12, wherein the check control means starts the check display on the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

According to the characteristic c13, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed, a predetermined setting-related process relating to the set value can be executed. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the setting related processing at a stage before the game is started. In this case, the check display is started by the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. This makes it possible to combine not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means with respect to the processing when the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature c14. The check control means starts the check display on the predetermined display means before the timing when the predetermined setting-related processing can be executed (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63). The game machine according to feature c13, which has a function of performing the process of step S9404 and step S9405 of the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment.

According to the characteristic c14, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display unit is normal before the predetermined setting-related processing is executed.

Feature c15. The predetermined display control means causes the predetermined display means to display the current setting value when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed (function of executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine described in the feature c13 or c14, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic c15, the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall confirms the predetermined display means to display the current setting value. It becomes possible to grasp. In this case, since the configuration of the characteristic c13 is provided, not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means are integrated in the processing when the supply of the operating power is started. , A process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the work of confirming the predetermined display means to grasp whether the predetermined display means is normal and the work of confirming the predetermined display means to grasp the current set value It becomes possible to carry out collectively in the situation where is executed.

Further, in the case where the configuration of the characteristic c14 is provided, since the check display is started on the predetermined display means before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, the predetermined display means is normal. After confirming whether or not it is possible to confirm the current set value by using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value.

Feature c16. The check control means,
Means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the timing at which the predetermined setting-related processing can be executed (function of executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for ending the check display based on the occurrence of a cancellation trigger in the predetermined setting-related processing in the situation where the check display is being performed (function and step for executing the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63) A function of making a negative judgment in S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of making a negative judgment in step S9101),
The gaming machine according to feature c15, which is provided with:

According to the characteristic c16, since the check display is started on the predetermined display means before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, after confirming whether the predetermined display means is normal or not. It is possible to confirm the current set value by using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value. Further, in the situation where the check display is being performed, a predetermined setting-related process is executed, and the check display is ended based on the occurrence of a cancellation trigger. As a result, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the check display can be ended and the current setting value can be displayed on the predetermined display means without waiting for the check display to be ended. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the current set value at an early stage.

Feature c17. The gaming machine according to feature c16, wherein the cancellation trigger is generated based on an operation of a predetermined operation unit (reset button 68c).

According to the feature c17, the cancellation trigger is generated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, so that the check display can be ended at an arbitrary timing.

Feature c18. As the predetermined setting-related processing, a means for executing processing for setting a setting-enabled state in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63). S8806, a function of making a positive determination in steps S8817 and S8818, and a function of making a positive determination in steps S9407, S9418 and S9419 in the main CPU 63 in the 36th embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of the features c13 to c17.

According to the characteristic c18, not only the processing for setting the setting value to be used but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means are integrated with respect to the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power. It becomes possible.

Feature c19. The setting means updates the set value to be used based on the operation of the predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) in the setting possible state,
The check control means,
Means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the setting possible state (a function of the main CPU 63 for executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805);
A means for ending the check display based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the setting possible status in the situation where the check display is being performed (the processing of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 is executed). Function and a function of making a negative determination in step S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of making a negative determination in step S9101).
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means executes the processing of step S9004 and step S9006 in the main CPU 63 after displaying the check display in the setting possible state, and causing the predetermined display means to display the current setting value. The game machine according to feature c18, which is characterized by having a function of

According to the feature c19, since the check display is started on the predetermined display means before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, after confirming whether the predetermined display means is normal or not. It is possible to confirm the current set value by using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value. In addition, when the display for checking is being performed, the setting display state is set, and the display for checking is ended based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, and the current set value is displayed. This makes it possible to terminate the check display and display the current set value on the predetermined display means without waiting for the check display to be terminated when the settable status is reached. .. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the current set value at an early stage.

Furthermore, in the configuration in which the set value to be used is updated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable situation, the check display is displayed based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable situation. Since the current setting value is displayed after the completion, the dedicated operation for terminating the check display and displaying the current setting value is not required. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for updating the setting value to be used.

Feature c20. As the predetermined setting-related processing, there is provided means for executing processing for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of the features c13 to c19.

According to the characteristic c20, not only the process for confirming the current set value but also the process for starting the check display on the predetermined display means can be integrated with the process at the start of the supply of the operating power. It will be possible.

Feature c21. The predetermined display control means is provided with means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function of executing the processes of steps S8708, S8709 and S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of the features c1 to c20.

According to the characteristic c21, it becomes possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the management result of the game history. In this case, whether or not the information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means is accurately displayed by providing the check display on the predetermined display means with the configuration of the characteristic c1. It becomes possible to confirm.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features c1 to c21, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature d group>
Feature d1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification);
A predetermined display control means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the predetermined display means;
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means checks whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Check control means for causing the predetermined display means to display a message (a function of executing the process of step S9102 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and a process of step S9602 in the main CPU63 in the thirty-eighth embodiment. A gaming machine characterized by having a function to do).

According to the feature d1, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal by performing the check display on the predetermined display means. Further, when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display is started before the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed, so that when the supply of the operating power is started, Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before the game is played.

Feature d2. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operation power based on start of supply of operation power (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63, the thirty-sixth embodiment). In the embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
It is a configuration in which predetermined setting-related processing (setting confirmation processing, setting value updating processing) relating to the setting value can be executed in a situation where the processing at the start of supply of the operating power is being executed,
The gaming machine according to feature d1, wherein the check control means starts the check display on the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

According to the characteristic d2, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage degree of the player, so that the player sets the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed, a predetermined setting-related process relating to the set value can be executed. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the setting related processing at a stage before the game is started. In this case, the check display is started by the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. This makes it possible to combine not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means with respect to the processing when the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature d3. The check control means starts the check display on the predetermined display means before the timing when the predetermined setting-related processing can be executed (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63). A function of executing the processing of step S9404 and step S9405 of the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment).

According to the characteristic d3, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before the predetermined setting-related processing is executed.

Feature d4. The predetermined display control means causes the predetermined display means to display the current setting value when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed (function of executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine described in the feature d2 or d3, characterized in that

According to the feature d4, the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall confirms the predetermined display means to display the current setting value. It becomes possible to grasp. In this case, since the configuration of the characteristic d2 is provided, the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power includes not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means. , A process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the work of confirming the predetermined display means to grasp whether the predetermined display means is normal and the work of confirming the predetermined display means to grasp the current set value It becomes possible to carry out collectively in the situation where is executed.

In the case where the configuration of the characteristic d3 is provided, the check display is started on the predetermined display means before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, so the predetermined display means is normal. After confirming whether or not it is possible to confirm the current set value by using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value.

Feature d5. The check control means,
Means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the timing at which the predetermined setting-related processing can be executed (function of executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for ending the check display based on the occurrence of a cancellation trigger in the predetermined setting-related processing in the situation where the check display is being performed (function and step for executing the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63) A function of making a negative judgment in S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of making a negative judgment in step S9101),
The gaming machine described in the feature d4, which is characterized by including:

According to the characteristic d5, since the check display is started on the predetermined display means before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, after confirming whether the predetermined display means is normal or not. It is possible to confirm the current set value by using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value. Further, in the situation where the check display is being performed, a predetermined setting-related process is executed, and the check display is ended based on the occurrence of a cancellation trigger. As a result, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the check display can be ended and the current setting value can be displayed on the predetermined display means without waiting for the check display to be ended. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the current set value at an early stage.

Feature d6. The gaming machine according to feature d5, wherein the cancellation trigger is generated based on an operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

According to the characteristic d6, since the cancellation trigger is generated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is possible to end the check display at an arbitrary timing.

Feature d7. As the predetermined setting-related processing, a means for executing processing for setting a setting-enabled state in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63). S8806, a function of making a positive determination in steps S8817 and S8818, and a function of making a positive determination in steps S9407, S9418 and S9419 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-sixth embodiment. The gaming machine described in any one of the features d2 to d6.

According to the characteristic d7, not only the processing for setting the set value to be used but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means are integrated with respect to the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power. It becomes possible.

Feature d8. The setting means updates the set value to be used based on the operation of the predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) in the setting possible state,
The check control means,
Means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the setting possible state (a function of the main CPU 63 for executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805);
A means for ending the check display based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the setting possible status in the situation where the check display is being performed (the processing of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 is executed). Function and a function of making a negative determination in step S9101, a function of executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function of making a negative determination in step S9101).
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means executes the processing of step S9004 and step S9006 in the main CPU 63 after displaying the check display in the settable status, and causing the predetermined display means to display the current set value. The gaming machine according to feature d7, which is characterized by having a function of

According to the characteristic d8, since the check display is started on the predetermined display means before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, after confirming whether the predetermined display means is normal or not. It is possible to confirm the current set value by using the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately confirm the set value. In addition, when the display for checking is being performed, the setting display state is set, and the display for checking is ended based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, and the current set value is displayed. This makes it possible to terminate the check display and display the current set value on the predetermined display means without waiting for the check display to be terminated when the settable status is reached. .. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the current set value at an early stage.

Furthermore, in the configuration in which the set value to be used is updated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable situation, the check display is displayed based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the settable situation. Since the current setting value is displayed after the completion, the dedicated operation for terminating the check display and displaying the current setting value is not required. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for updating the setting value to be used.

Feature d9. As the predetermined setting-related processing, there is provided means for executing processing for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of the features d2 to d8.

According to the characteristic d9, not only the process for confirming the current set value but also the process for starting the check display on the predetermined display means can be integrated with the process at the start of the supply of the operating power. It will be possible.

Feature d10. The predetermined display control means is provided with means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function of executing the processes of steps S8708, S8709 and S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of the features d1 to d9.

According to the characteristic d10, it becomes possible to inform the manager of the game hall of the management result of the game history. In this case, whether or not the information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means is accurately displayed by providing the check display on the predetermined display means with the configuration of the characteristic d1. It becomes possible to confirm.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features d1 to d10, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic c group and the characteristic d group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, a configuration capable of confirming whether or not the display on the predetermined display means is accurately performed is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. is there.

<Feature e group>
Feature e1. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (normal entrance management processing in the main CPU 63) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (normal counter area 231) Function to execute)
Information derivation means (function of executing the process of step S8601 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means,
Mode information storage means (operation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means,
Equipped with
The aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the aspect information derived at different timings by the information derivation means.

According to the feature e1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means, and the derived mode information is stored in the mode information storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and it is preferable to manage the occurrence frequency of predetermined events by using this managed information. It becomes possible to do it. Further, the aspect information storage means can store a plurality of aspect information derived at different timings. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event in a plurality of periods, so that it is possible to accurately grasp the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event.

Feature e2. The aspect information storage means,
A latest storage area (current area 311) for storing the latest aspect information derived by the information deriving means;
A past storage area (first to third history areas 312 to 314) that stores the aspect information derived by the information deriving unit before the aspect information stored in the latest storage area,
The gaming machine described in the feature e1 characterized by being provided with.

According to the feature e2, each of the latest aspect information and the past aspect information derived before that is stored, so that not only the latest frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event but also the past frequency is grasped. It becomes possible.

Feature e3. A period elapse identifying unit that identifies that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the period start trigger to the occurrence of the period end trigger (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the processes of steps S8605 and S8613);
Nearest memory execution means (step in the main CPU 63) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means in the nearest memory area in a situation where the predetermined period has not been specified by the period elapsed specifying means. Function for executing the process of S8602),
Based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapse specifying means, the predetermined value derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. Past memory execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S8607 and S8614 in the main CPU 63) for storing the period corresponding mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the period in the past memory area,
The gaming machine according to feature e2, which is provided with

According to the feature e3, the aspect information derived when the predetermined period has not elapsed is stored in the latest storage area, and the aspect information derived when the predetermined period has elapsed is stored in the past storage area. To be done. As a result, it is possible to grasp the latest occurrence frequency of the predetermined event and also to grasp the past occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in units of a predetermined period. Further, since the form information in units of a predetermined period is stored in the past storage area, the number of form information stored in the past storage area can be suppressed.

Feature e4. Means for erasing the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapsed specification means (processing of steps S8608 and S8615 in the main CPU 63) The game machine according to feature e3, which is provided with a function of executing

According to the feature e4, since the history information in the history information storage means is erased when a predetermined period has elapsed, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the history information storage means. Further, even if the history information is erased after the predetermined period elapses in this manner, the mode information derived by using the history information in the predetermined period is stored in the past storage area. It is possible to later grasp the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event during the period.

Feature e5. The gaming machine according to any one of features e2 to e4, wherein the past storage area can store a plurality of pieces of the aspect information having different derived timings.

According to the feature e5, since a plurality of pieces of aspect information are stored in the past storage area, it is possible to compare the occurrence frequencies of predetermined events corresponding to a plurality of periods.

Feature e6. A period elapse specifying unit that specifies that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of the predetermined period end trigger (function of executing the processes of steps S8605 and S8613 in the main CPU 63) )When,
The predetermined period derived by the information deriving unit using the history information stored in the history storage unit based on the fact that the predetermined period has been identified by the period lapse identifying unit. Past memory execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S8607 and S8614 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the period corresponding to the result of the game in the period in the mode information storage means,
Equipped with
The game according to any one of the features e1 to e5, wherein the mode information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of mode information corresponding to the respective periods corresponding to different predetermined periods. Machine.

According to the feature e6, since a plurality of past aspect information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored, it is possible to support a plurality of periods while suppressing the number of aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means. It becomes possible to compare the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event.

Feature e7. Means for erasing the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapsed specification means (processing of steps S8608 and S8615 in the main CPU 63) The game machine according to feature e6, which is provided with a function for executing.

According to the characteristic e7, since the history information in the history information storage means is erased when a predetermined period has elapsed, it becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the history information storage means. Further, even if the history information is erased after the predetermined period elapses in this manner, the mode information derived by using the history information in the predetermined period is stored in the past storage area. It is possible to later grasp the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event during the period.

Feature e8. Means (main side) for controlling the notification means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that the notifications corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the mode information storage means are sequentially executed The gaming machine according to any one of features e1 to e7, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of steps S8702 to S8709 in the CPU 63.

According to the characteristic e8, the notification corresponding to the mode information is performed by the notification means. This makes it possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, since the notification corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information is sequentially executed, it is possible to individually grasp the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in a plurality of periods while suppressing the number of notification means.

Feature e9. The aspect information storage means includes a first storage area (first history area 312) capable of storing the aspect information and a second storage area (second history area 313) capable of storing the aspect information. ) And,
The gaming machine shifts the aspect information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area by an instruction including at least an LDIR instruction when an information shift trigger occurs (step S8607 in the main CPU 63). And the function of executing the process of step S8614), The gaming machine according to any one of features e1 to e8.

According to the feature e9, it is possible to shift between the storage areas of the mode information with a simple processing configuration.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features e1 to e9, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above-mentioned characteristic e group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature f group>
Feature f1. Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operation power based on start of supply of operation power (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63, the thirty-sixth embodiment). In the embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63),
A power failure monitoring means for performing a power failure monitoring process for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being performed (a function of executing the process of step S8901 in the main CPU 63). )When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic f1, since the power failure monitoring processing is executed even in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed, the power failure occurs in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed. When it occurs, it can be dealt with appropriately.

Feature f2. A means for executing an interrupt process that is regularly activated (a function for executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63),
The interruption processing includes the power failure monitoring processing,
The gaming machine according to feature f1, wherein the interrupt process can be interrupted and activated in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

According to the feature f2, even when the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed, the interrupt process is periodically interrupted and activated, so that the process at the start of supplying the operating power is executed. Even in the situation, it becomes possible to regularly monitor the occurrence of power failure.

Feature f3. The interrupt processing can be activated in an interrupted manner even in a situation where post-end processing (steps S8822 to S8825 in the main CPU 63) is being executed after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. The gaming machine according to feature f2.

According to the feature f3, interruption processing that can be activated by interruption in a situation where post-completion processing is being executed is used to regularly monitor the occurrence of a power failure in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. It becomes possible to do it.

Feature f4. The interruption processing includes a progress corresponding process (step S8907 to step S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
When the interrupt process is interrupted and activated in a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, the power failure monitoring process is executed while the progress handling process is not executed,
The feature f3 is characterized in that both the power failure monitoring process and the progress handling process can be executed when the interrupt process is interrupted and activated in a situation where the post-end process is being executed. Game machine.

According to the feature f4, the interrupt process that can be interrupted and activated in the situation where the post-termination process is being executed is used to regularly monitor the occurrence of the power outage in the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. In a configuration to be performed in a general manner, even if the interrupt process is interrupted and activated in the situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, the progress corresponding process for controlling the progress of the game is not executed. It becomes possible to do.

Feature f5. A setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the advantage of the player,
Any one of features f1 to f4, which can be a settable state in which the setting value to be used can be changed in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature f5, the power failure monitoring process is executed even in the situation where the setting value to be used is set, so a power failure occurs during the setting of the setting value to be used. Even if it does, it is possible to deal with it appropriately.

Feature f6. If the supply of operating power is stopped after the occurrence of a power failure is identified in the power outage monitoring process, and if the supply of operating power is restarted, it is set as a target for use before the supply of operating power is stopped. The game machine according to feature f5, wherein the game can be played with the set value set.

According to the feature f6, even if a power failure occurs in the situation where the setting value to be used is set, the occurrence of the power failure is identified by the power failure monitoring process, so that the supply of operating power is restarted. In this case, it becomes possible to play the game in the situation where the set value selected at the timing of the power failure is the target of use. As a result, even if a power failure occurs in the situation where the setting value to be used is being set, there is no need to set the setting value again when the supply of operating power is resumed.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features f1 to f6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic f group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, it is necessary to appropriately deal with the occurrence of a power outage in the gaming machine as illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group g>
Feature g1. Setting correspondence storage areas (first to sixth setting information storages in the thirty-ninth embodiment) for storing setting correspondence information (low probability mode win/loss table, high probability mode win/loss table) corresponding to the advantage of the player Areas 325a to 325f, in the 40th embodiment, first to third setting information storage areas 326a to 326c), a setting correspondence storage means (a setting correspondence storage area 325 in the 39th embodiment) having a plurality of first predetermined numbers. In the 40th embodiment, a setting correspondence storage area 326),
Setting means for setting a set value to be used (a function for executing a set value updating process in the main CPU 63);
Using the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the setting value set by the setting unit, a profit related unit for executing a profit related process (step S504) related to a player's profit. (Function of executing special figure variation start processing in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the number of kinds of the set values that can be set by the setting means is smaller than the first predetermined number.

According to the characteristic g1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, in the configuration in which the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas for storing the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting values are provided, the number of kinds of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number. It is a small number. As a result, the configuration relating to the setting correspondence storage means can be shared with the gaming machine in which the number of types of setting values to be used is the first predetermined number, and the gaming machine in the case of changing the number of types of setting values can be used. The design work can be performed easily. From the above, it is possible to make the configuration related to the set value suitable.

Feature g2. And a correspondence information storage unit (setting value counter in the specific control work area 221) capable of storing and holding correspondence information corresponding to each of the first predetermined number of the setting correspondence storage areas,
The setting means sets the setting value to be used by changing the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means based on a change operation,
The setting correspondence information of the setting values that can be set by the setting means is stored in at least one of the setting correspondence storage areas, and is a part of the first predetermined number and corresponds to a plurality of the setting correspondences. Since the same setting correspondence information is stored in the storage area, the setting correspondence information is stored in all of the first predetermined number of the setting correspondence storage areas. The gaming machine described in g1.

According to the feature g2, the setting value to be used is changed by changing the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means based on the changing operation, and the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the changed correspondence information. By using the setting correspondence information of (1) in the profit-related processing, the profit-related processing is executed in a mode corresponding to the setting value of the usage target. In this case, the setting correspondence information of the setting values that can be set by the setting means is stored in at least one setting correspondence storage area, and is a part of the first predetermined number, and is a plurality of setting correspondence storages. Since the same setting correspondence information is stored in the area, the setting correspondence information is stored in all of the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas. Thus, the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas are used as they are, and the configuration for determining the setting value to be used by using the correspondence information storage means is used as it is, while the number of kinds of setting values to be used is different. Can be smaller than the first predetermined number.

Feature g3. The profit-related means is
A means for reading the setting correspondence information from the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means (a function for executing the read/write processing of the hit/miss table in the main CPU 63);
Means for executing the profit-related processing by using the read setting correspondence information (function of executing the processing of step S504 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine described in the feature g2, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic g3, even if the number of kinds of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the setting correspondence corresponding to the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means is provided. Since the profit-related processing may be executed by using the setting correspondence information read from the storage area, the configuration for reading the setting correspondence information when executing the profit-related processing can be used as it is.

Feature g4. Predetermined display control for causing a predetermined display unit (fourth notification display device 204) to perform a display corresponding to the current set value in a situation where the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage unit can be changed. Means (function of executing the processing of steps S9801 to S9804 in the main CPU 63),
The predetermined display control means is
A means for reading out display information of the set value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information of the correspondence information storage means (processing of steps S9801 to S9803 in the main CPU 63). Function to execute)
Means for causing the predetermined display means to perform a display corresponding to the read display information of the set value (function of executing the processing of step S9804 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine described in the feature g2 or g3.

According to the feature g4, when changing the setting value to be used, it is possible to perform the setting value changing operation while confirming the display corresponding to the current setting value displayed on the predetermined display means. Become. In this case, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is less than the first predetermined number, the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information in the correspondence information storage means The display information of the corresponding set value is read out and a display corresponding to the read display information of the set value is displayed on a predetermined display means. As a result, the configuration for reading the display information of the set value can be used as it is when executing the display corresponding to the set value.

Feature g5. The number of kinds of the set values that can be set by the setting unit is a divisor of the first predetermined number and is a number different from the first predetermined number,
The gaming machine according to feature g4, wherein the number of the setting correspondence storage areas in which the setting correspondence information corresponding to each setting value is stored is the same among the setting values.

According to the feature g5, even if the number of kinds of set values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the frequency with which the display corresponding to the set value is performed by the predetermined display means is determined. The set values can be the same.

Feature g6. The setting correspondence information corresponding to the same setting value is stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information in a consecutive order in the change order of the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means. The gaming machine described in the feature g4 or g5, which is characterized in that it is not present.

According to the feature g6, it is possible to change the set value to be displayed on the predetermined display means each time the changing operation is performed once. This makes it possible to improve the operability of the changing operation even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features g1 to g6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the above-mentioned characteristic g group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to make the configuration relating to the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature h group>
Features h1. Display means (special figure display section 37a, special figure reservation display section 37b, general figure display section 38a, general figure reservation display section 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, first to fifth display circuit 261 ~265),
Display control means (main CPU 63) for transmitting display data (display data signal, display clock signal) corresponding to the display content to be displayed on the display means,
Display execution means (display IC 266) for performing display setting on the display means so that the display content corresponds to the display data when the display data is transmitted by the display control means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of the display means,
The display control unit includes a sequential transmission unit (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) that sequentially transmits the display data corresponding to each of the plurality of display units to the display execution unit,
The display execution means, when the display data is transmitted by the display control means, displays the display content corresponding to the display data to the display means of the display data to be set among the plurality of display means. The above display settings are made so that
The transmission interval of the display data from the sequential transmission means to the display execution means is such that the display execution means is provided to each display means before the display corresponding to the display data cannot be maintained in each display means. A game machine characterized in that the display intervals are set according to the transmission interval.

According to the feature h1, the display execution means sets the display on the display means in accordance with the display data transmitted from the display control means, so that the display means is display-controlled so that the display content corresponds to the display data. It This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the display control means. In this case, in the configuration in which the plurality of display means are provided, the display execution means is not provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of display means, but one display is provided for the plurality of display means. The execution means is also used. This makes it possible to increase the number of display means while suppressing the increase in the number of display execution means. Further, the transmission interval of the display data from the display control means to the display execution means is set to the display execution means by the display execution means before the display corresponding to the display data cannot be maintained in each display means. Is set to the transmission interval at which Accordingly, even in the configuration in which one display execution unit is also used for a plurality of display units, it is possible to appropriately perform the display corresponding to the display data on each display unit. As described above, it is possible to make the configuration for controlling the display of the display unit suitable.

Features h2. When the display data is transmitted to the display execution unit, the sequential transmission unit transmits the identifiable information (type data signal, type clock signal) that enables identification of the type of the display unit to which the display data is set. The gaming machine described in the characteristic item h1, which is transmitted to the display executing means.

According to the characteristic h2, when the display data is transmitted from the display control means, the display execution means may set the display data to the display means corresponding to the identifiable information transmitted from the display control means. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration of the display executing unit even if one display executing unit also serves as a plurality of display units.

Features h3. The sequential transmission means is configured to repeat the update cycle when the update cycle is set such that the plurality of display means are set once in the predetermined order as the display data setting target. The gaming machine according to the characteristic h1 or h2, which is for transmitting display data.

According to the characteristic h3, the display control means only needs to change the display means to which the display data is transmitted in accordance with a predetermined order, so that the processing configuration of the display control means can be simplified.

Features h4. Even if the content of the display data for one of the display units is the same as the content of the display data when the display unit was previously transmitted as the transmission target, the sequential transmission unit determines that the display unit is the transmission target. The gaming machine described in any one of the features h1 to h3, characterized in that the display data is transmitted when the gaming data is lost.

According to the characteristic h4, since the display data is transmitted even if the content of the display data to be transmitted is not changed, one display executing means is also used for a plurality of display means. Also, the same display can be continued by a predetermined display means.

Features h5. The sequential transmission unit executes a process for transmitting the display data by a predetermined interrupt process (second timer interrupt process) which is activated by being interrupted when the display control unit is executing a predetermined process. The gaming machine according to any one of features h1 to h4.

According to the characteristic h5, since the processing for transmitting the display data is executed by the predetermined interrupt processing, it is possible to set the cycle in which the display data is set in each display means to the predetermined cycle. Therefore, even in a configuration in which one display execution means is also used for a plurality of display means, before each display means cannot maintain the display corresponding to the display data, It is possible to set the display data by the display executing means.

Features h6. The processing for transmitting the display data by the display executing means to the plurality of display means to be subjected to the display setting is integrated into the predetermined interrupt processing. Amusement machine.

According to the feature h6, it is possible to set the cycle in which the display data is set by the display execution means to each display means that is the target of display setting to be the same cycle.

Features h7. The display control unit includes a unit (a function of executing the first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) that interrupts and activates a specific interrupt process (first timer interrupt process) in a state where the predetermined process is being executed. ,
The gaming machine according to the characteristic h5 or h6, wherein the interrupt cycle of the predetermined interrupt processing is shorter than the interrupt cycle of the specific interrupt processing.

According to the characteristic h7, the process of transmitting the display data to the display executing means is executed in the predetermined interrupt process which is shorter than the interrupt period of the specific interrupt process. As a result, the display data can be transmitted in a shorter cycle than the configuration in which the process of transmitting the display data to the display executing means is executed in the specific interrupt process.

Feature h8. The gaming machine according to feature h7, wherein a process for advancing a game is executed in the specific interrupt process.

According to the characteristic h8, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already described while activating the specific interrupt process at an appropriate cycle in executing the process for advancing the game.

Features h9. The gaming machine according to feature h7 or h8, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and activated even when the specific interrupt process is being executed.

According to the characteristic h9, the predetermined interrupt processing is interrupted and activated even in the situation where the specific interrupt processing is being executed. Therefore, even if the specific interrupt processing is activated by the interrupt, the transmission cycle of the display data is reduced. It becomes possible to set a predetermined cycle.

Features h10. Features h7 to h9 characterized in that the interrupt of the specific interrupt process is prohibited when the predetermined interrupt process is started, and the interrupt of the specific interrupt process is permitted when the predetermined interrupt process is terminated. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the characteristic h10, it is possible to prevent the specific interrupt processing from being interrupted and executed in the situation where the predetermined interrupt processing is being executed. This makes it possible to prioritize the processing for transmitting the display data.

Features h11. The display control unit is a unit that executes a process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power when the supply of the operating power is started (in the 33rd embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S7901 to S7918 in the main CPU 63). , A function of executing the processes of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63 in the 35th embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63 in the 36th embodiment, the 37th embodiment. A function of executing the processing of steps S9501 to S9518 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of steps S9901 to S9917 in the main CPU 63 in the 42nd embodiment).
The gaming machine according to any one of features h5 to h10, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is activated by interrupting even when the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed.

According to the characteristic h11, it is possible to control the display of the plurality of display units even in the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. Further, since the predetermined interrupt process is activated by interrupting the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, the supply of the operating power can be performed without complicating the process configuration of the process at the start of supplying the operating power. It is possible to control the display of a plurality of display means in a situation where the processing at the start is being executed.

Features h12. A setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the advantage of the player,
In a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, it is a configuration that can be a settable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed,
The sequential transmission unit transmits the display data to the display execution unit so that a display corresponding to the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display unit in the setting possible state. The gaming machine described in feature h11.

According to the characteristic h12, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means in the situation where the setting value to be used is set, it becomes easy to perform the setting work of the setting value to be used. ..

Features h13. The display control means includes means (function of executing first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63) for executing progress corresponding processing for controlling the progress of the game after the processing at the start of supply of the operating power is completed. Prepare,
The sequential transmission means transmits the display data to the display execution means so that the correspondence display corresponding to the execution result of the progress correspondence processing is displayed on at least a part of the display means of the plurality of display means. To send,
The gaming machine according to the feature h11 or h12, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and activated even after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed.

According to the characteristic h13, by using the predetermined interrupt process, it is possible to perform a plurality of processes in both the situation in which the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed and the situation after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It becomes possible to control the display of the display means.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features h1 to h13. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature i group>
Features i1. First interrupt executing means (first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) that interrupts the other process and executes the first interrupt process based on the lapse of the first interrupt cycle in a state where the other process is being executed. Function to execute)
Second interrupt execution means (second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) that interrupts the other process and executes the second interrupt process based on the lapse of the second interrupt cycle in the state where the other process is being executed. Function to execute)
Equipped with
The second interrupt cycle is shorter than the first interrupt cycle,
Display control of predetermined display means (special figure display section 37a, special figure reservation display section 37b, general figure display section 38a, general figure reservation display section 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) A game machine, wherein the processing is executed by the second interrupt processing.

According to the feature i1, the process for controlling the display of the predetermined display means is executed by the predetermined interrupt process which is a period shorter than the interrupt period of the specific interrupt process. As a result, the display control of the predetermined display unit can be performed in a shorter cycle than the configuration in which the process for controlling the display of the predetermined display unit is executed in the specific interrupt process.

Feature i2. The game machine according to feature i1, wherein a process for advancing a game is executed in the first interrupt process.

According to the feature i2, the first interrupt process is activated at an appropriate cycle for executing the process for advancing the game, and it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described.

Feature i3. The gaming machine according to feature i1 or i2, wherein the second interrupt process is activated by interrupting even when the first interrupt process is being executed.

According to the feature i3, the second interrupt processing is interrupted and activated even in the situation where the first interrupt processing is being executed. Therefore, even if the first interrupt processing is activated by interruption, the predetermined display The display control of the means can be performed at a predetermined cycle.

Feature i4. The interrupt of the first interrupt process is prohibited when the second interrupt process is started, and the interrupt of the first interrupt process is permitted when the second interrupt process is ended. The gaming machine according to any one of i1 to i3.

According to the feature i4, it is possible to prevent the first interrupt process from being interrupted and executed in the situation where the second interrupt process is being executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to give priority to the display control of the predetermined display means.

Feature i5. A means for executing the process at the start of the supply of the operating power when the supply of the operating power is started (a function of executing the main process in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features i1 to i4, wherein the second interrupt process is activated by being interrupted even in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

According to the feature i5, it is possible to control the display of a predetermined display unit even in the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed. In addition, since the second interrupt process is configured to be activated by interrupting the process at the start of the supply of the operating power, the operation power can be supplied without complicating the process configuration of the process at the start of supplying the operating power. It is possible to display-control a predetermined display unit in a situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed.

Feature i6. A setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the advantage of the player,
In a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, it is a configuration that can be a settable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed,
The second interrupt executing means executes, in the second interrupt processing, processing for causing a display corresponding to the current set value to be displayed on the predetermined display means in the settable status. The gaming machine according to feature i5.

According to the feature i6, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means in the situation where the setting value to be used is set, it becomes easy to perform the setting operation of the setting value to be used. ..

Feature i7. The second interrupt execution means executes the second interrupt processing based on the lapse of the second interrupt cycle even after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed, i5 Alternatively, the gaming machine described in i6.

According to the feature i7, by using the predetermined interrupt process, the predetermined process is performed in both the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed and the situation after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It becomes possible to control the display of the display means.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features i1 to i7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic h group and the characteristic i group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to make the structure for displaying by the display means suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature j group>
Feature j1. Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operation power based on start of supply of operation power (in the 33rd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S7901 to S7918 in the main CPU 63, the 35th embodiment). In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs the processing of steps S8801 to S8819, in the 36th embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs the processing of steps S9401 to S9420, and in the 37th embodiment the main CPU 63. A function of executing the processing of steps S9501 to S9518 in the above, and a function of executing the processing of steps S9901 to S9917 in the main CPU 63 in the 42nd embodiment).
Predetermined interrupt executing means for interrupting the process at the start of supplying the operating power and executing a predetermined interrupt process (a function for executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63, a function for executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) )When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature j1, since the predetermined interrupt process is activated by interruption even in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed, the predetermined interrupt process is set even immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power. It is possible to give priority to the execution of the processing that is being performed. Further, since it is not necessary to set the process set as the predetermined interrupt process with respect to the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the operation can be performed without complicating the processing configuration of the process at the start of supplying the operating power. Even immediately after the start of the power supply, it is possible to give priority to the execution of the process set as the predetermined interrupt process. As described above, it is possible to preferably perform the process when the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature j2. The predetermined interrupt execution means is a predetermined display means (special figure display section 37a, special figure reservation display section 37b, general figure display section 38a, general figure reservation display section 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. ) The process for controlling the display is executed by the predetermined interrupt process, the gaming machine according to the feature j1.

According to the feature j2, it becomes possible to display a predetermined display on a predetermined display means even immediately after the start of supplying the operating power.

Feature j3. A setting means (a function of executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the advantage of the player,
In a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, it is a configuration that can be a settable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed,
The predetermined interrupt execution means performs processing for causing the predetermined display means (fourth notification display device 204) to perform a display corresponding to the current set value in the settable status in the predetermined interrupt processing. The gaming machine according to the feature j1 or j2, which is characterized by being executed as follows.

According to the feature j3, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means in the situation where the setting value to be used is set, it becomes easy to perform the setting work of the setting value to be used. ..

Feature j4. One of the features j1 to j3, wherein the predetermined interrupt execution means executes the predetermined interrupt processing based on the lapse of a predetermined interrupt cycle even after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature j4, by using the predetermined interruption process, the predetermined process is performed in both the situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed and the situation after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. It is possible to execute the process set as the interrupt process.

Feature j5. The gaming machine according to any one of features j1 to j4, wherein the predetermined interrupt executing means executes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring occurrence of a power failure by the predetermined interrupt process.

According to the feature j5, the power failure monitoring processing is executed even in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed, so that the power failure occurs in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed. When it occurs, it can be dealt with appropriately.

Feature j6. The predetermined interruption process includes a progress corresponding process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
If the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and activated in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed, the power failure monitoring process is executed, while the progress handling process is not executed,
When the predetermined interrupt processing is interrupted and activated in a situation where post-termination processing (step S8822 to step S8825 in the main CPU 63) is executed after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed, the power failure monitoring is performed. The gaming machine according to feature j5, wherein both the process and the progress corresponding process can be executed.

According to the feature j6, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored in the situation where the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is being performed by using the predetermined interrupt processing that can be interrupted and activated in the situation where the post-termination processing is being executed. In the configuration that is performed periodically, even if the predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and activated in the situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is being executed, the progress corresponding process for controlling the progress of the game is not executed. It becomes possible to do so.

For the configurations of the features j1 to j6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above-mentioned feature j group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably perform the processing when the supply of the operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic k group>
Features k1. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (normal entrance management processing in the main CPU 63) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (normal counter area 231) Function to execute)
Information derivation means (a function of executing the process of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means,
Mode information display control means (main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that the display corresponding to the mode information derived by the information deriving means is performed. Function for executing the display processing and the second timer interrupt processing in),
A predetermined correspondence display (pre-shift display) is performed on the information display means before a display corresponding to the aspect information is newly started based on occurrence of a predetermined display trigger. Control means (function for executing the processing of step SA320 and the second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic k1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived by using the history information stored in the history storage means, and the information display means performs the display corresponding to the derived mode information. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Further, the predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display means before the display corresponding to the aspect information is newly started based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger. With this, when a predetermined display trigger is generated, the predetermined corresponding display corresponding thereto can be preferentially displayed on the information display means over the display corresponding to the aspect information, and the information display means can be used. It is possible to notify that a predetermined display trigger has occurred.

Features k2. A period elapse specifying unit (function of executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) that specifies that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of the predetermined period end trigger ,
The predetermined correspondence display control means is configured to display the predetermined correspondence display on the information display means on the assumption that the predetermined display trigger has occurred when the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapse specifying means. The gaming machine according to the characteristic k1 characterized by being performed.

According to the characteristic k2, when the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the information display means performs the predetermined correspondence display, and then the information display means newly starts the display corresponding to the aspect information. This allows the manager of the game hall to recognize that the mode information displayed on the information display means is after the lapse of a predetermined period.

Features k3. The information deriving unit uses the history information corresponding to the predetermined event that occurs after the predetermined period based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period lapse specifying unit. Is to derive the aspect information,
The predetermined correspondence display control means, based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapse specifying means, displays the history information corresponding to the predetermined event that occurs after the predetermined period. It is characterized in that the predetermined correspondence display is performed on the information display means before the display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information deriving means is performed on the information display means. The gaming machine described in the feature k2.

According to the characteristic k3, in the configuration in which the mode information is newly derived on the basis of the passage of the predetermined period, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the predetermined display is performed by the information display means. After the elapse of the predetermined period, the display corresponding to the newly derived mode information is performed. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means is the display corresponding to the newly derived mode information after a predetermined period has elapsed. Becomes

Features k4. Means for erasing the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined duration has been identified by the duration elapsed identification means (the processing of step SA217 in the main CPU 63 is executed). A gaming machine according to feature k3, which is provided with a function).

According to the characteristic k4, since the history information in the history information storage means is erased when a predetermined period has elapsed, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the history information storage means.

Feature k5. Based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapse specifying unit, the predetermined value derived by the information deriving unit using the history information stored in the history storage unit A function for executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63 that stores the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the period in the mode information storage unit (calculation result storage area 234) as the period corresponding mode information. ),
The aspect information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the period corresponding aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed.
The predetermined correspondence display control means, based on the fact that the predetermined time period has been specified by the period elapse specification means, corresponds to the period newly stored in the aspect information storage means by the storage execution means. The game according to any one of features k2 to k4, characterized in that the predetermined correspondence display is performed on the information display means before the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the information display means. Machine.

According to the characteristic k5, the past aspect information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as the period corresponding aspect information, and the information corresponding to the period corresponding aspect information is displayed on the information display means. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp the past period corresponding mode information derived in units of a predetermined period by checking the information display means. Further, when the predetermined period has elapsed, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information newly derived as the predetermined period has elapsed is performed. Thereby, whether the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information on the information display means is the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information newly derived based on the lapse of a predetermined period is determined by the manager of the game hall. Can be grasped.

Features k6. The aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the period corresponding aspect information corresponding to each of the different predetermined periods,
The aspect information display control means is for controlling the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to each of the plurality of period corresponding aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed. The gaming machine according to feature k5.

According to the feature k6, since a plurality of past period corresponding aspect information derived in units of a predetermined period are stored and a display corresponding to the plurality of period corresponding aspect information is performed by the information display means, a plurality of items are displayed. It is possible to compare the occurrence frequency of a predetermined event corresponding to a predetermined period.

Features k7. From the situation in which the display corresponding to the mode information is being performed, the information display means is set to the pre-switching state (state of non-display for interval) before displaying the mode information different from the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k6, which is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step SA316 and the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63).

According to the characteristic k7, when the mode information to be displayed is switched, the information display means is in the pre-switching state, so that the manager of the game hall clearly indicates that the mode information to be displayed has been switched. It becomes possible to grasp. In this case, the information display means provides the predetermined correspondence display based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger, which has the configuration of the characteristic k1. With this, it is possible to notify that a predetermined display trigger has occurred by using the information display unit that displays information corresponding to different mode information with the pre-switching state in between.

Feature k8. The predetermined correspondence display control means, when the predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined correspondence display is displayed on the information display means even if the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the aspect information has not elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features k1 to k7, characterized in that the gaming machine is started.

According to the characteristic k8, when the predetermined display trigger is generated, the predetermined correspondence display is started even if the display corresponding to the aspect information is being performed. As a result, it is possible to promptly notify that a predetermined display trigger has occurred.

Feature k9. If the predetermined display trigger occurs in the middle of the display continuation period of the display corresponding to the aspect information, the predetermined correspondence display control means displays the predetermined correspondence display on the information display means after the display continuation period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features k1 to k7, which is characterized in that the gaming machine is started.

According to the characteristic k9, even if a predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined correspondence display is started after the display corresponding to the mode information displayed at that time is completed. As a result, it is possible to notify that a predetermined display trigger has occurred while not disturbing the display corresponding to the mode information that has already been performed.

Feature k10. A mode information storage unit (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation unit is provided,
The aspect information storage means stores a plurality of specific storage areas (current area 311 and first history area 312) so as to be able to store each of the plurality of aspect information derived at different timings by the information deriving means. , A second history area 313, a third history area 314),
The aspect information display control means controls the information display means so that a display corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed according to a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k9.

According to the characteristic k10, since the notification corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information is sequentially executed, it is possible to individually grasp the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event in a plurality of periods while suppressing the number of information display means. Becomes Further, since the display corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed in accordance with the predetermined display order, the manager of the game hall grasps the type of mode information to be displayed. Easier to do.

Feature k11. The gaming machine according to feature k10, wherein a predetermined display order is defined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas.

According to the feature k11, since the predetermined display order of the display corresponding to the aspect information is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas, the display target is set when the display corresponding to one aspect information is newly started. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of the aspect information.

Features k12. When the aspect information display control means causes the information display means to perform the display corresponding to the aspect information after the predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display means, the aspect information display control means performs the first order in the predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to feature k10 or k11, which is started from a display corresponding to the corresponding aspect information.

According to the feature k12, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger, the display corresponding to the mode corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order is started. Accordingly, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, it is possible to check the display corresponding to the aspect information again from the first order of the predetermined display order.

Features k13. A period elapse specifying unit (a function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) that specifies that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of the predetermined period end trigger;
Based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapse specifying means, the predetermined information derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. Storage executing means for storing the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the period as the period corresponding mode information in the plurality of specific storage areas (a function of executing the processes of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
Any one of the characteristics k10 to k12 characterized in that the storage execution means causes the period corresponding mode information to be stored in the plurality of specific storage areas in the order derived by the information derivation means. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature k13, it becomes possible to confirm the period corresponding mode information in the derived order.

Features k14. The information derivation means performs an information derivation process for deriving the aspect information based on the occurrence of a process execution trigger, and derives the aspect information after starting the derivation of the aspect information. The game machine according to any one of the features k1 to k13, wherein the information derivation process is executed a plurality of times until the completion of the above.

According to the feature k14, since the information derivation process is executed a plurality of times from the start of derivation of the mode information until the derivation of the mode information is completed, the derivation of the mode information is completed in one information derivation process. It is possible to reduce the processing load for executing the information derivation process as compared with the configuration in which it is performed.

Feature k15. A period elapse specifying unit (a function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) that specifies that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of the predetermined period end trigger;
Based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapse specifying means, the predetermined value derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. A function for executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63 that stores the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the period in the mode information storage unit (calculation result storage area 234) as the period corresponding mode information. )When,
Equipped with
The aspect information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the period corresponding aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means is performed.
The predetermined correspondence display control means is configured to display the predetermined correspondence display on the information display means on the assumption that the predetermined display trigger has occurred when the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapse specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature k14, which is characterized by being performed.

According to the feature k15, the past aspect information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as the period corresponding aspect information, and the information corresponding to the period corresponding aspect information is displayed on the information display means. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp the past period corresponding mode information derived in units of a predetermined period by checking the information display means. Further, when the predetermined period has elapsed, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information newly derived as the predetermined period has elapsed is performed. Thereby, whether the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information on the information display means is the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information newly derived based on the lapse of a predetermined period is determined by the manager of the game hall. Can be grasped. Further, since it becomes possible to display the predetermined correspondence display during the period during which the period correspondence mode information is being derived, the predetermined period has elapsed and the period correspondence mode information is being derived. Nevertheless, regardless of that, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information from being displayed.

Feature k16. The predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to perform the predetermined correspondence display for a period longer than the longest period required for deriving the one aspect information by the information deriving means. The gaming machine according to feature k15.

According to the characteristic k16, when the predetermined period has elapsed and the period correspondence mode information is being derived, the information display means displays the predetermined correspondence.

For the configurations of the features k1 to k16, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature 1 group>
Feature l1. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (normal entrance management processing in the main CPU 63) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (normal counter area 231) Function to execute)
Information derivation means (a function of executing the process of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means,
An aspect information storage unit (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving unit,
Mode information display control means (main side) for controlling display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that the display corresponding to the mode information stored in the mode information storage means is performed A function of executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing in the CPU 63),
Equipped with
The aspect information storage means stores a plurality of specific storage areas (current area 311 and first history area 312) so as to be able to store each of the plurality of aspect information derived at different timings by the information derivation means. , A second history area 313, a third history area 314),
The aspect information display control means controls the information display means such that the display corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed according to a predetermined display order. Characteristic gaming machine.

According to the characteristic l1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game is derived by using the history information stored in the history storage means, and the information display means performs the display corresponding to the derived mode information. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event.

Further, since a plurality of aspect information items having different derived timings are stored in the aspect information storage means and the notifications corresponding to the plurality of aspect information items are sequentially executed, the number of information display means can be reduced. It is possible to individually grasp the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in a plurality of periods. Further, since the display corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is sequentially executed in accordance with the predetermined display order, the manager of the game hall grasps the type of mode information to be displayed. Easier to do.

Feature l2. The gaming machine according to feature 11, wherein a predetermined display order is set in association with the plurality of specific storage areas.

According to the characteristic l2, since the predetermined display order of the display corresponding to the aspect information is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas, the display target is set when the display corresponding to one aspect information is newly started. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of the aspect information.

Feature l3. A predetermined correspondence display (pre-shift display) is performed on the information display means before a display corresponding to the aspect information is newly started based on occurrence of a predetermined display trigger. Control means (function of executing the processing of step SA320 and the second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63),
When the mode information display control means causes the information display means to display the information corresponding to the mode information after the predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display means, 13. The gaming machine according to the characteristic l1 or l2, which is started from a display corresponding to the corresponding aspect information.

According to the characteristic l3, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger, the display corresponding to the mode corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order is started. Accordingly, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, it is possible to confirm the display corresponding to the information again from the first order of the predetermined display order.

Feature l4. A period elapse specifying unit (a function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) that specifies that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of the predetermined period end trigger;
Based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapse specifying means, the predetermined information derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. Storage executing means for storing the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the period as the period corresponding mode information in the plurality of specific storage areas (a function of executing the processes of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
Any one of the characteristics 11 to 13 characterized in that the storage execution means causes the period corresponding mode information to be stored in the plurality of specific storage areas in the order derived by the information derivation means. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the characteristic l4, it becomes possible to confirm the period corresponding mode information in the derived order.

Feature l5. From the situation in which the display corresponding to the mode information is being performed, the information display means is set to the pre-switching state (state of non-display for interval) before displaying the mode information different from the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features 11 to 14, characterized in that it has a means (function of executing the process of step SA316 and the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature l5, when the mode information to be displayed is switched, the information display means is in the pre-switching state, so that the manager of the game hall clearly indicates that the mode information to be displayed has been switched. It becomes possible to grasp.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features 11 to 15, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature m group>
Features m1. When a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of the game, history storage execution means (normal entrance management processing in the main CPU 63) for storing history information of the game corresponding to the predetermined event in the history storage means (normal counter area 231) Function to execute)
Information derivation means (a function of executing the process of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means,
Equipped with
The information derivation means performs an information derivation process for deriving the aspect information based on the occurrence of a process execution trigger, and derives the aspect information after starting the derivation of the aspect information. A gaming machine, characterized in that the information derivation process is executed a plurality of times until the completion of.

According to the feature m1, when the predetermined event occurs, the history information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the history information and unauthorized modification. Further, by using the history information stored in the history storage means to derive mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, the management result of the game history such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event is grasped. It becomes possible. Further, since the information derivation process is executed a plurality of times from the start of derivation of the form information to the completion of the derivation of the form information, compared to the configuration in which the derivation of the form information is completed in one information derivation process It is possible to reduce the processing load for executing the information derivation process.

Features m2. A period elapse specifying unit (a function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) that specifies that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of the predetermined period end trigger;
Based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapse specifying means, the predetermined value derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. A function for executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63 that stores the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the period in the mode information storage unit (calculation result storage area 234) as the period corresponding mode information. )When,
Mode information display control means for controlling the display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information stored in the mode information storage means is performed ( A function of executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63),
A predetermined correspondence display control unit (step SA320 in the main CPU 63 that causes the predetermined display to be performed on the information display unit based on the fact that the predetermined period has been specified by the period elapsed specifying unit). And the function of executing the second timer interrupt process),
The gaming machine described in the feature m1.

According to the characteristic m2, the past aspect information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as the period corresponding aspect information, and the information corresponding to the period corresponding aspect information is displayed on the information display means. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp the past period corresponding mode information derived in units of a predetermined period by checking the information display means. Further, when the predetermined period has elapsed, after the predetermined correspondence display is performed by the information display means, the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information newly derived as the predetermined period has elapsed is performed. Thereby, whether the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information on the information display means is the display corresponding to the period corresponding mode information newly derived based on the lapse of a predetermined period is determined by the manager of the game hall. Can be grasped. Further, since it becomes possible to display the predetermined correspondence display during the period during which the period correspondence mode information is being derived, the predetermined period has elapsed and the period correspondence mode information is being derived. Nevertheless, regardless of that, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the period correspondence mode information from being displayed.

Features m3. The predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to perform the predetermined correspondence display for a period longer than the longest period required for deriving the one aspect information by the information deriving means. The gaming machine according to feature m2.

According to the feature m3, when the predetermined period has passed and the period correspondence mode information is being derived, the information display means displays the predetermined correspondence.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features m1 to m3, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, features S1-S8, features T1-T13, features U1-U8, features V1-V6, features W1-W11, features X1-X11, features Y1-Y11, features Z1-Z10, features a1-a3, features b1-. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic k group, the characteristic l group, and the characteristic m group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko machine, the game machine front face section is provided with a dish storage section for storing the game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature n group>
Features n1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player (function of executing the processing of step SA709 in the main CPU 63);
Change of the set value to be used based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when supply of operating power is started. Situation generating means for setting a possible setting state (a situation in which the set value updating process is executed) (function and step for making an affirmative determination in step SA412 of the main CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment) A function to make an affirmative judgment in SA417, a function to make an affirmative judgment in steps SA905 and SA916 in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment, and a function to make an affirmative judgment in step SA917).
Based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a) is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the setting value to be used set by the setting means is set. Notification generating means (function of executing processing for setting confirmation in the main CPU 63) to be notified,
Equipped with
The status generating means can perform the setting even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable status and when the supply of the operating power is started after that. Post-start generation means for making the situation (function of making a positive determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment, positive determination in steps SA905 and SA916 in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment A game machine characterized by having a function of performing.

According to the characteristic n1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage degree of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Also, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is started, so an act of illegally changing the setting value to be used It is possible to make it difficult to perform. Further, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value of the usage target is notified by performing the second setting related operation, so that the manager of the game hall confirms the setting value of the usage target as necessary. It becomes possible.

In addition, even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable status and then the supply of the operating power is started, the settable status is set. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the set value to be used, when the supply of operating power is resumed after that, the setting of the used target is set rather than the notification of the set value of the used target. It becomes possible to give priority to the change of the value, and it is possible to prevent the game from being started even though the change of the set value to be used is not actually completed.

Feature n2. Situation notifying means (function for executing the processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the main CPU 63 and function for executing the second timer interrupt processing) for notifying the set value being changed in the settable status is provided. The gaming machine according to feature n1, which is characterized in that

According to the feature n2, since the set value being changed is notified in the settable state, it is possible to change the set value while grasping the current set value. Further, in this way, the setting value being changed in the settable status is notified, so that the settable status is set even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. Even if the value changing operation is prioritized, the set value can be substantially confirmed.

Feature n3. Both the status notification means and the notification generation means are configured to display a target set value on a predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine described in n2.

According to the feature n3, the target setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means regardless of whether the setting value is changed or the setting value is confirmed. On the other hand, it becomes possible to use a predetermined display means. In addition, even if the setting is possible even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means when the setting is possible. Is displayed, the manager of the game hall who has performed the second setting-related operation can confirm the set value by visually observing the predetermined display means.

Feature n4. In the characteristic n3, the status notifying means causes the display corresponding to the setting value being changed and the display corresponding to the setting possible status to be performed on the predetermined display means. The game machine described.

According to the feature n4, when the setting is possible, not only the display corresponding to the set value being changed is displayed on the predetermined display means, but also the display corresponding to the setting possible. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable status and the supply of the operating power is then started, the second setting-related operation is performed, but the settable status is set. In this case, it becomes easy for the manager of the gaming hall to know that the setting is possible.

Feature n5. In the case where the setting possible state is set, the generation means after start enables the setting value to be changed from the setting value selected when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features n1 to n4.

According to the feature n5, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state, when the supply of the operating power is resumed, the setting value is changed from the state immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped. It is possible to continue the operation.

Features n6. Setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means,
A selection correspondence storage unit (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the setting possible state;
Equipped with
The situation generation means changes the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that a setting value that is a selection target is changed when a change trigger occurs in the setting possible status. (Function of executing the process of step SA708 in the main CPU 63),
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when an ending trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. According to the above, the setting value that was the selection target in the setting possible status is set as the usage target,
In the case where the setting possible status is set, the post-start generation means sets the setting corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible status. The game machine according to any one of features n1 to n5, wherein the setting value can be changed from a value.

According to the feature n6, the setting correspondence storing means for storing the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used and the selection correspondence storing means for storing the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the settable state are provided. By being provided, it becomes possible to change the set value in the settable situation while storing and holding the information of the set value set before the start of the settable situation. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the midst of the settable state, it is stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the supply of the operating power is stopped. The setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable status, if the supply of operating power is restarted, the operation to change the set value will continue from the state immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped. It becomes possible to do it.

Feature n7. The status generating means may include: when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable status and when the supply of the operating power is subsequently started, the first setting-related operation is performed; Means for enabling the setting value to be changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means (function for making a positive determination in step SA417 in the main CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment, In the forty-sixth embodiment, the gaming machine described in the feature n6 is provided with a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917 in the main CPU 63.

According to the feature n7, the supply of the operating power is stopped when the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state. While it is possible to restart the change of the set value from the set value that was the target of change before the setting is stopped, the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable status. When the second setting-related operation is performed, the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means is changed. This makes it possible to make the initial set value when changing the set value different according to the operation content when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

Feature n8. The post-start generation means is configured to perform the first setting-related operation and the second setting-related operation when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible state and the supply of the operating power is started after that. The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n7, wherein the setting possible state can be set even when no operation is performed.

According to the characteristic n8, both the first setting-related operation and the second setting-related operation are performed when the supply of the operating power is stopped when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state. Even if the setting value is not set, the setting value may change, so if the operating power supply is stopped while changing the setting value, change the setting value when the operating power supply is restarted. It is possible to positively generate a situation in which it is possible.

Feature n9. The first setting-related operation includes that the setting key inserting section (setting key inserting section 68a) is in a predetermined corresponding state (state of being turned on) by the setting key,
The situation generation means ends the settable situation based on the fact that the setting key insertion portion specifies that the predetermined correspondence state has been changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state (state that has been turned off) by the setting key. The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n8, which is provided with means (a function of executing the processing of step SA709 and step SA710 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature n9, since it is necessary to use the setting key to bring the setting key insertion part into a predetermined corresponding state in order to make the setting possible, it is possible to illegally change the setting value to be used. It is possible to make it difficult to do. In this case, the settable status does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the setting key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable status and then the supply of the operating power is started in the situation in which the setting key insertion section is in the specific support state, the settable status is immediately set. It is not ended, and the setting possible status is ended by changing the setting key insertion part from the specific correspondence state to the predetermined correspondence state and then further changing from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. It is possible to end the settable status at a timing that is preferable for the user.

Feature n10. The situation generating means is provided when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the notification of the setting value of the use target is being performed by the notification generating means, and when the supply of the operating power is started after that. The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n9, wherein the setting possible state is set when the first setting-related operation is performed.

According to the characteristic n10, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value to be used is being notified, the first setting-related operation is performed at the start of the subsequent supply of the operating power. Is settable status. This makes it possible to prioritize the work of changing the set value over the work of checking the set value.

For the configurations of the features n1 to n10, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature o group>
Feature o1. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a usage target among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Setting-related executing means for executing a predetermined setting-related process relating to the set value (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63, a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
Based on the fact that the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, the halfway restarting means for restarting the predetermined setting-related processing from the middle after the supply of the operating power is started thereafter ( In the 45th embodiment, the function of making an affirmative judgment in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and the function of making an affirmative judgment in step SA414 in the main CPU 63. Function to make an affirmative decision)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic o1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, so that the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, the predetermined setting-related processing is restarted halfway when the supply of the operating power is restarted. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the predetermined setting-related process, the predetermined setting-related process can be continued when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

Feature o2. The setting-related execution means performs a predetermined setting-related operation (if the predetermined setting-related processing is a set value update processing, an ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c, and a predetermined setting-related processing is for setting confirmation. In the case of processing, the predetermined setting-related processing is executed based on the fact that the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on).
The gaming machine according to feature o1, wherein the midway restarting means restarts the predetermined setting-related processing from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed.

According to the feature o2, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, the predetermined setting-related processing is restarted from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed. It is possible to give priority to the restart from the middle of the predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature o3. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started,
The midway restarting means restarts the predetermined setting-related processing from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started,
When the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing and then the supply of the operating power is started, when the predetermined setting-related operation is performed, The gaming machine according to feature o2, wherein the predetermined setting-related processing is newly restarted by the setting-related executing means, instead of restarting the predetermined setting-related processing.

According to the feature o3, since the predetermined setting-related process is executed based on the predetermined setting-related operation being performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the act of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related process It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In this case, even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting-related processing, the predetermined setting-related processing is still in progress. Since it is restarted from, it is possible to give priority to the restart from the middle of the predetermined setting related processing. On the other hand, if the predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting-related processing, the predetermined setting-related processing is performed from the middle. Instead of restarting, it starts anew. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the predetermined setting-related process, the predetermined setting-related process is newly started depending on the presence or absence of the predetermined setting-related operation when the supply of the operating power is restarted. It is possible to select either to restart the predetermined setting-related processing from the middle.

Features o4. The predetermined setting-related operation includes that the setting key inserting section (setting key inserting section 68a) is in a predetermined corresponding state (state turned ON) by the setting key,
The setting-related execution means determines the predetermined setting-related processing based on the fact that the setting key insertion unit has specified that the predetermined corresponding state has been changed to the specific corresponding state (the OFF-operated state) by the setting key. In the feature o2 or o3, the main CPU 63 has means (a function of executing the process of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processes of step SA709 and step SA710 in the main CPU 63). Amusement machine.

According to the feature o4, in order to start the predetermined setting-related processing, it is necessary to use the setting key to bring the setting key insertion unit into the predetermined corresponding state, and therefore, the act of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related processing is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to do. In this case, the predetermined setting-related process does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the setting key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing and the supply of the operating power is started in the situation where the setting key insertion section is in the specific correspondence state after that, the supply of the operating power is immediately performed. The predetermined setting-related processing is not ended, and the predetermined setting-related processing is ended by changing the setting key insertion part from the specific correspondence state to the predetermined correspondence state and then further changing from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Therefore, it becomes possible to end the predetermined setting-related processing at a timing preferable for the manager of the gaming hall.

Features o5. The gaming machine according to any one of features o1 to o4, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for changing a setting value to be used.

According to the feature o5, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the set value is being changed, when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the set value is changed from the set value being changed. It becomes possible to restart. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the set value is being changed, it is possible to continue the work of changing the set value when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

Features o6. The predetermined setting-related processing is processing for changing the setting value to be used,
A setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used,
A selection correspondence storage unit (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the predetermined setting-related processing;
Equipped with
The setting-related execution means,
As the predetermined setting-related processing, a unit that changes the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage unit so that the setting value that is a selection target is changed when a change trigger occurs (main side). A function of executing the processing of step SA708 in the CPU 63),
As the predetermined setting-related processing, by storing information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the termination trigger occurs in the setting correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information, Means for setting the set value that was the selection target as the usage target (function of executing the processing of step SA709 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The midway resuming means selects the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the supply of the operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting related processing. The gaming machine according to any one of the features o1 to o5, wherein the gaming machine can be changed.

According to the feature o6, the setting correspondence storing means for storing the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used and the selection correspondence storing means for storing the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the settable state are provided. By being provided, it becomes possible to change the set value in the settable situation while storing and holding the information of the set value set before the start of the settable situation. In this case, if the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped while the set value is being changed, the selection correspondence storage means stores the supply of the operating power when the supply of the operating power is stopped. The setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the selected correspondence information. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the set value is being changed, if the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value will be changed from the state immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped. It is possible to continue the operation.

Features o7. The setting-related executing means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on a predetermined setting-related operation being performed when the supply of operating power is started,
The midway restarting means restarts the predetermined setting-related processing from the middle based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation has not been performed when the supply of operating power is started,
The setting-related executing means performs the predetermined setting-related operation when the supply of the operating power is stopped after the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related process. Means for enabling the setting value to be changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means (in the 45th embodiment, an affirmative determination is made in step SA417 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature o6, which is provided with a function, a function of making a positive determination in step SA917 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-sixth embodiment.

According to the feature o7, when the supply of the operating power is resumed after the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, the operating power based on the fact that the predetermined setting related operation is not performed is performed. It is possible to restart the change of the set value from the set value that was the change target before the supply of the power was stopped, while the supply of operating power was stopped while changing the set value. If the predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means is changed. This makes it possible to make the initial set value when changing the set value different according to the operation content when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

For the configurations of the features o1 to o7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature p group>
Features p1. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a usage target among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Predetermined setting related operation (if the predetermined setting related process is a set value update process, ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and pressing of the reset button 68c, and if the predetermined setting related process is a setting confirmation process, set key insertion The setting-related executing means (a function for executing the setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined setting-related process relating to the set value based on the fact that the ON operation of the section 68a is performed, and the setting in the main CPU 63. A function that executes the confirmation process)
Equipped with
When the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the setting-related execution means does not perform the predetermined setting-related operation after the supply of the operating power is started after that. Also, after-supply execution means for executing the predetermined setting-related processing (in the 45th embodiment, the function of making a positive determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and the function of making a positive determination in step SA414 in the main CPU 63, In the forty-sixth embodiment, the gaming machine is provided with a function of making an affirmative determination in steps SA905 and SA916 in the main CPU 63).

According to the characteristic p1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, it is possible to execute a predetermined setting-related process by performing a predetermined setting-related operation. In this case, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, if the supply of the operating power is restarted, the predetermined setting is performed even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed. Related processing is executed. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing.

Features p2. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine according to feature p1, wherein the after-execution executing unit executes the predetermined setting-related process even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is started. ..

According to the characteristic p2, the predetermined setting-related process is executed based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, so that the predetermined setting-related process is illegally executed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to do. In this case, the predetermined setting-related process is executed even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting-related process. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing.

Features p3. The predetermined setting-related operation includes that the setting key inserting section (setting key inserting section 68a) is in a predetermined corresponding state (state turned ON) by the setting key,
The setting related execution means determines the predetermined setting related processing based on the setting key insertion unit specifying that the predetermined corresponding state is changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state (state of being turned off) by the setting key. The feature p1 or p2 is characterized in that it is provided with a means (function of executing the process of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, function of executing the process of step SA709 and step SA710 in the main CPU 63) for terminating Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic p3, in order to start the predetermined setting-related processing, it is necessary to use the setting key to bring the setting key insertion unit into the predetermined corresponding state, and therefore, the act of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related processing is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to do. In this case, the predetermined setting-related process does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the setting key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing and the supply of the operating power is started in the situation where the setting key insertion section is in the specific correspondence state after that, the operation is immediately performed. The predetermined setting-related processing is not ended, and the predetermined setting-related processing is ended by changing the setting key insertion part from the specific correspondence state to the predetermined correspondence state and then further changing from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Therefore, the predetermined setting-related processing can be ended at a timing that is preferable for the manager of the game hall.

Features p4. The post-supply execution means performs the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started after that even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related processing. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p3, characterized in that the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed.

According to the characteristic p4, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related process, the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that. Does not execute the predetermined setting-related processing. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related process, the supply of the operating power is started when it is not necessary to execute the predetermined setting-related process thereafter. In this case, by performing the specific related operation, it is possible to prevent the predetermined setting related processing from being executed.

Features p5. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p4, wherein the predetermined setting-related processing is processing for notifying a setting value to be used.

According to the characteristic p5, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the notification of the set value is being performed, the predetermined setting related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that. Also, the notification of the set value is restarted. This makes it possible to give priority to the notification of the set value.

Features p6. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player (function of executing the processing of step SA709 in the main CPU 63);
Based on the fact that a specific related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed. Situation generating means for setting a possible settable situation (situation in which the set value updating process is executed) (in the 45th embodiment, the function of making a positive determination in step SA412 of the main CPU 63 and step SA417). A function to make an affirmative judgment in the 46th embodiment, a function to make an affirmative judgment in steps SA905 and SA916 in the main CPU 63, and a function to make an affirmative judgment in step SA917).
Equipped with
The post-supply execution unit performs the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started after that even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related processing. If this happens, the predetermined setting related processing is not executed,
Even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the situation generating means performs the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started after that. In the case of above, the gaming machine described in the characteristic p5 is characterized in that the setting possible state is set.

According to the characteristic p6, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the notification of the set value is being performed, the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that. In this case, the notification of the set value is not performed, but the settable state in which the set value can be changed is set. This makes it possible to prioritize the occurrence of the settable status over the notification of the set value when a specific related operation for making the settable status in which the set value can be changed is performed.

Features p7. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p6, wherein the predetermined setting-related processing is processing for changing a setting value to be used.

According to the characteristic p7, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value is being changed, it is possible to change the setting value when the supply of the operating power is restarted. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped while the set value is being changed, it is possible to continue the work of changing the set value when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features p1 to p7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature q group>
Features q1. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a usage target among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Setting-related executing means for executing a predetermined setting-related process relating to the set value (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63, a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, the setting-related executing means performs the specific related operation (the predetermined setting-related processing when the supply of the operating power is started after that). If the setting confirmation process is a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation, and if the predetermined setting related process is a set value update process, a RAM clear operation), the predetermined setting related process is not executed. Characteristic game machine.

According to the characteristic q1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related process, the predetermined operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that. Setting related processing of is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related process, the supply of the operating power is started when it is not necessary to execute the predetermined setting-related process thereafter. In this case, by performing the specific related operation, it is possible to prevent the predetermined setting related processing from being executed.

Features q2. The gaming machine according to feature q1, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for notifying a setting value to be used.

According to the feature q2, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the notification of the set value, if the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that, the setting is performed. Value notification does not resume. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the notification of the set value and it is not necessary to notify the set value after that, when the supply of the operating power is started. By performing the specific related operation, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being notified.

Features q3. The setting-related execution means performs a predetermined setting-related operation (if the predetermined setting-related processing is a set value update processing, an ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c, a predetermined setting-related processing is for confirming the setting). In the case of processing, the predetermined setting-related processing is executed based on the fact that the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on), and the operating power is supplied before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed. A feature that the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed when the specific related operation is performed instead of the predetermined setting-related operation when the supply of the operating power is started after the operation is stopped The gaming machine described in q1 or q2.

According to the characteristic q3, since it is necessary to perform the predetermined setting-related operation in order to perform the predetermined setting-related processing, it is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related processing.

Features q4. The setting related execution means does not perform the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related process and the supply of the operating power is started after that. In this case, the means for executing the predetermined setting-related processing even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed (in the 45th embodiment, the function of making a positive determination in step SA412 in the main-side CPU 63 and the main-side CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature q3, which is provided with a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA414).

According to the feature q4, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related process, the predetermined setting-related operation is performed depending on whether or not the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. It is possible to select whether or not the predetermined setting-related processing is executed without performing.

Features q5. The predetermined setting-related operation includes that the setting key inserting section (setting key inserting section 68a) is in a predetermined corresponding state (state turned ON) by the setting key,
The setting related execution means determines the predetermined setting related processing based on the fact that the setting key insertion unit has specified that the predetermined corresponding state has been changed to the specific corresponding state (state of being turned off) by the setting key. The game machine according to feature q4, characterized in that it is provided with a means for terminating the process (function for executing the process of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, function for executing the process of step SA709 and step SA710 in the main CPU 63). ..

According to the feature q5, in order to start the predetermined setting-related processing, it is necessary to use the setting key to bring the setting key insertion unit into the predetermined corresponding state, and therefore, the act of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related processing is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to do. In this case, the predetermined setting-related process does not end only when the setting key insertion unit is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the setting key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing and the supply of the operating power is started in the situation where the setting key insertion section is in the specific correspondence state after that, the supply of the operating power is immediately performed. The predetermined setting-related processing is not ended, and the predetermined setting-related processing is ended by changing the setting key insertion part from the specific correspondence state to the predetermined correspondence state and then further changing from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. Therefore, it becomes possible to end the predetermined setting-related processing at a timing preferable for the manager of the gaming hall.

Features q6. Based on the fact that the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, another execution means for executing another process different from the predetermined setting related process (the predetermined setting related process is for confirming the setting). If it is a process, the main CPU 63 executes only the RAM clear process and does not execute the set value update process, or the main CPU 63 executes the RAM clear process and the set value update process, and the predetermined setting related process is the set value. In the case of update processing, the main CPU 63 according to the forty-fifth embodiment has a function of executing only RAM clear processing and not executing set value update processing). Game machine.

According to the feature q6, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related process, the supply of the operating power is performed after that by using the specific related operation performed to execute another process. It is possible to prevent the predetermined setting related processing from being executed when the processing is started.

Features q7. Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, the separate execution means determines that the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that. The gaming machine according to feature q6, wherein the different process is executed based on the above.

According to the feature q7, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related process, the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that. It is possible to give priority to the execution of another process over the predetermined setting related process.

Feature q8. In the characteristic q6 or q7, the predetermined setting-related processing is processing for notifying a setting value to be used, and the different processing is processing for changing the setting value to be used. The game machine described.

According to the feature q8, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the notification of the set value, if the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after that, the setting is performed. Value notification does not resume. As a result, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped during the notification of the set value and it is not necessary to notify the set value after that, when the supply of the operating power is started. By performing the specific related operation, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being notified. Further, as the operation for preventing the notification of the set value in this way, it is possible to use the specific related operation for executing the process for changing the set value.

For the configurations of the features q1 to q8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature r group>
Feature r1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player (function of executing the processing of step SA709 in the main CPU 63);
Situation generating means (in the 45th embodiment, the step SA412 in the main CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment) is such that the setting value to be used can be changed so that the setting value can be changed (the setting value updating process is executed). Function for making an affirmative judgment in step SA417, and function for making an affirmative judgment in step SA417 in the 46th embodiment, and function for making an affirmative judgment in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63 and in step SA917. )When,
Setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means,
A selection correspondence storage unit (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the setting possible state;
Equipped with
The situation generation means changes the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that a setting value that is a selection target is changed when a change trigger occurs in the setting possible status. (Function of executing the process of step SA708 in the main CPU 63),
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when an ending trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. According to the above, the game machine is characterized in that the set value that has been the selection target in the setting possible state is set as the usage target.

According to the characteristic r1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can set the more advantageous setting value to the use target. Will be expected. In this case, a setting correspondence storing means for storing the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used and a selection correspondence storing means for storing the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the settable state are provided. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the set value in the settable state while storing and holding the information of the set value set before the start of the settable state.

Feature r2. The status generating means stores the setting correspondence status that has been stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the previous setting enable status in the setting enable status that occurs after the setting enable status ends before the termination trigger occurs. A feature r1 characterized by being provided with a first change execution means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA701 in the main CPU 63) capable of changing the set value from the set value corresponding to the selection correspondence information. The game machine described.

Feature r2. When the settable status starts after the settable status ends before the termination trigger occurs, the set value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means is changed. .. As a result, even if the settable status ends before the end trigger occurs, if the settable status is restarted, the operation to change the set value from the last selected set value in the previous settable status. Can be continued.

Feature r3. The situation generating means sets the setting corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storing means in the setting possible situation generated after the setting possible situation ends before the termination trigger occurs. The gaming machine according to feature r2, which is provided with a second change execution unit (a function of making a negative determination in step SA701 in the main CPU 63) that enables a change of the set value from a value.

According to the feature r3, when the settable situation is started after the settable situation ends before the termination trigger occurs, the setting value is changed from the last selected set value in the previous settable situation. Not only it becomes possible to restart the setting correspondence information but also the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means when the setting possibility situation is started after the setting possibility situation ends before the termination trigger occurs. It becomes possible to change the set value from the set value to be set. This makes it possible to make the initial set value when changing the set value different depending on the situation when the settable situation is restarted.

Feature r4. The second change execution means sets the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in the setting possible situation that has occurred after the setting possible situation that ended when the termination trigger occurs. The game machine according to feature r3, wherein the setting value can be changed from

According to the characteristic r4, in a normal setting-possible situation, the setting value is changed from the current setting value of the object of use.

Feature r5. The situation generation means is based on that a specific related operation is performed when the settable situation is started after the settable situation ends before the termination trigger occurs in the settable situation. A situation in which the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means can be changed and a setting corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means It is provided with means (a function of executing the processing of step SA405, step SA412, and step SA417 in the main CPU 63) for making one of the situations in which the setting value can be changed from the value. The gaming machine according to feature r3 or r4.

According to the characteristic r5, when the settable status is started after the settable status ends before the termination trigger occurs, the set value of the set value is changed from the last selected set value in the previous settable status. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to select whether to restart the change or to start changing the set value from the set value of the current usage target.

Feature r6. The setting values corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the settable state are displayed on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to any one of the features r1 to r5, which is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of step SA801 to step SA803 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature r6, it is possible to perform the setting value changing operation while confirming the setting value which is being changed in the settable state.

Feature r7. The display of the set value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in a situation other than the setting possible situation is displayed on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to any one of features r1 to r6, which is provided with means (a function of executing the processing of steps SA601 to SA603 in the main CPU 63) to be performed.

According to the characteristic r7, it is possible to confirm the current setting value of the target of use, if necessary.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features r1 to r7. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic n group, the characteristic o group, the characteristic p group, the characteristic q group, and the characteristic r group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to make the configuration relating to the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature s group>
Features s1. The predetermined corresponding processing (setting confirmation processing, set value updating processing) is started based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion portion (setting key insertion portion 68a) is set to the predetermined corresponding state (state of being turned on) by the predetermined key. Predetermined correspondence starting means (in the 45th embodiment, the function of making an affirmative judgment in step SA413 in the main CPU 63 and the function of making an affirmative judgment in step SA 417 in the main CPU 63; The function of making an affirmative judgment in SA913 and the function of making an affirmative judgment in step SA917),
Predetermined correspondence ending means (mainly) for terminating the predetermined correspondence processing based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion portion specifies that the predetermined correspondence state has been changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state (state of being turned off) by the predetermined key. The function of executing the processing of step SA709 and step SA710 in the side CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic s1, since it is necessary to use the predetermined key to bring the predetermined key insertion part into the predetermined corresponding state in order to start the predetermined corresponding process, an action for illegally starting the predetermined corresponding process is performed. It is possible to make it difficult. In this case, the predetermined correspondence process does not end only when the predetermined key insertion portion is in the specific correspondence state, but ends when the predetermined key insertion portion is changed from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state. As a result, even if the predetermined response processing is started in a situation where the predetermined key insertion section is in the specific response state for some reason, the predetermined response processing is not immediately terminated, and the predetermined key insertion section is moved from the specific response state to the specific response state. Since the predetermined correspondence process is ended by changing the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state after changing to the predetermined correspondence state, it is possible to end the predetermined correspondence process at a timing preferable for the manager of the game hall.

Features s2. Based on that the specific start condition is satisfied, another start means for starting the predetermined corresponding process in the situation where the predetermined key insertion part is in the specific corresponding state (in the 45th embodiment, step SA412 in main CPU 63). A function for making an affirmative judgment in step SA414 in the main CPU 63, and a function for making an affirmative judgment in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment). The gaming machine described in the feature s1.

According to the characteristic s2, the predetermined response process is started even when the predetermined key insertion part is in the specific response state based on the fact that the specific start condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to make it. However, in the configuration, the predetermined correspondence processing is started in a situation where the predetermined key insertion portion is in the specific correspondence state. However, the predetermined correspondence processing is provided in the specific correspondence state when the predetermined key insertion portion is in the specific correspondence state. The above does not mean that the process is ended, but the process ends when the predetermined key insertion part is changed from the predetermined corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. As a result, even if the predetermined correspondence processing is started in a situation where the predetermined key insertion portion is in the specific correspondence state, the predetermined correspondence processing is not immediately terminated and the predetermined key insertion portion is changed from the specific correspondence state to the predetermined correspondence state. Since the predetermined correspondence process is ended by further changing the predetermined correspondence state from the predetermined correspondence state to the specific correspondence state after the change to, it is possible to end the predetermined correspondence process at a timing preferable for the manager of the game hall.

Features s3. The predetermined correspondence starting means starts the predetermined correspondence processing based on that the predetermined key insertion portion is in the predetermined correspondence state when supply of operating power is started,
The characteristic s2 is characterized in that the specific start condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is stopped and the supply of the operating power is restarted in the situation where the predetermined corresponding process is executed. Game machine.

According to the characteristic s3, when the supply of the operating power is started, the predetermined correspondence processing is started based on the predetermined key insertion portion being in the predetermined correspondence state. Therefore, the predetermined correspondence processing may be illegally started. It becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the act. Further, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the predetermined handling process is being executed, if the specific start condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is resumed, the predetermined key insertion part performs the predetermined handling. Even if it is not in the state, the predetermined handling process is started. This makes it possible to prioritize the start of the predetermined handling process when the predetermined handling process ends midway.

Features s4. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a usage target from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute
The gaming machine according to any one of features s1 to s3, wherein the predetermined correspondence process is a process related to the set value.

According to the characteristic s4, it is possible to obtain the above-mentioned excellent effects for the processing related to the set value.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features s1 to s4, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic s group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed by the control means to determine whether or not to generate a game state advantageous to the player.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary for the control means to appropriately perform the processing, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature t group>
Feature t1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S205 to S207 in the main CPU 63, The function of executing the processes of steps S3106 to S3108 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S3207 to S3209 in the main CPU 63 in the twelfth embodiment, and the twenty-second embodiment. Then, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S5605 to S5607, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of step SB311 in the 49th embodiment, and the 53rd embodiment of the main CPU 63 to the processing of step SB915. Function to execute)
Situation generating means (in the first embodiment, step S103 in the main CPU 63 in the first embodiment) for setting the setting value to be used to be changeable (setting value update process is executed). Function for making an affirmative judgment in the 22nd embodiment, a function for making an affirmative judgment in steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63, and a function for making an affirmative judgment in step SB113 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment. , A function of making a positive determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment),
In the case where the settable status is reached, a start correspondence means for changing the set value from a preset start correspondence set value (in the first embodiment, the processing of step S201 in the main CPU 63 is executed. Functions, in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3102 in the main CPU 63, in the twelfth embodiment, of executing the process of step S3203 in the main CPU 63, and in the twenty-second embodiment, the main CPU 63. Function for executing the process of step S5601 in the 49th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB304 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SB905 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic t1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, when the setting is possible, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the predetermined start. As a result, regardless of the set value of the object to be used before the settable status is reached, the set value can be changed from the set value corresponding to a certain start in the settable status. Therefore, it becomes easy for the operator to understand the work content of the setting value changing operation.

Feature t2. The gaming machine according to feature t1, wherein the setting value corresponding to the start is a setting value having the lowest advantage (“setting 1”).

According to the characteristic t2, when the setting is possible, the setting value is changed from the setting value having the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the manager of the game hall unintentionally ends the setting possible situation immediately after the setting possible situation, the setting value has the lowest advantage, so in such a situation It is possible to prevent unintended disadvantages from occurring in the game hall even if the game is performed.

Feature t3. Setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means,
A selection correspondence storage unit (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the setting possible state;
Equipped with
The situation generation means changes the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that a setting value that is a selection target is changed when a change trigger occurs in the setting possible status. (A function for executing the processing of steps SB307 and SB310 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps SB908 and SB914 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment),
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when an ending trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. According to the above, the setting value that was the selection target in the setting possible status is set as the usage target,
The game according to the feature t1 or t2, wherein the start correspondence means stores the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value of the start correspondence in the selection correspondence storage means when the setting possible situation is reached. Machine.

According to the feature t3, the setting correspondence storing means for storing the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used and the selection correspondence storing means for storing the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the settable state are provided. By being provided, it becomes possible to change the set value in the settable situation while storing and holding the information of the set value set before the start of the settable situation.

Feature t4. The setting values corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the settable state are displayed on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to the feature t3, which is provided with a means (a function of executing the processes of steps SA801 to SA803 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature t4, it is possible to perform the setting value changing operation while confirming the setting value being changed in the settable state.

Feature t5. The display of the set value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in a situation other than the setting possible situation is displayed on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine described in the feature t3 or t4, which is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of step SA601 to step SA603 in the main CPU 63) to be performed.

According to the feature t5, it is possible to confirm the current set value of the target of use, if necessary.

For the configurations of the features t1 to t5, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above-mentioned characteristic t group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to make the configuration relating to the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature u group>
Features u1. A first control means (MPU 62),
Second control means (sound-light side MPU 352) that executes control corresponding to the information transmitted by the first control means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The first control means is
First transmission means (in the 49th embodiment, the main side in the forty-ninth embodiment) that transmits the first start correspondence information (return command at the time of update) based on the first start situation when the supply of the operating power is started. A function of executing the processing of step SB314 in the CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of step SB918 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment).
Second transmission means (49th return command) for transmitting second start correspondence information (return command for confirmation or return command for clear) based on the second start situation when supply of operating power is started. In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB118 or step SB207 in the main CPU 63, in the fifty-first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB618 in the main CPU63, and in the fifty-second embodiment the step of main CPU63. A function of executing the process of SB725, a function of executing the process of step SB816 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC118 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic u1, in the configuration in which the control corresponding to the information transmitted by the first control unit is executed by the second control unit, the first control unit starts the first start when the supply of the operating power is started. The first start correspondence information is transmitted on the basis of the situation, and the second start correspondence information is transmitted on the basis of the second start situation. With this, it is possible to control not only the first control unit but also the second control unit to perform the control corresponding to the type of the start situation when the supply of the operating power is started.

Features u2. The first control means performs a process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power depending on whether the first starting situation or the second starting situation occurs when the supply of the operating power is started (49th embodiment). Step SB101 to Step SB122, step SB601 to Step SB622 in the 51st embodiment, step SB701 to Step SB729 in the 52nd embodiment, step SB801 to Step SB818 and step SB823 to Step SB826 in the 53rd embodiment, and 54 embodiment, at least a part of the processing contents of step SC101 to step SC120 and step SC125 to step SC128) are different from each other, the gaming machine described in the characteristic u1.

According to the characteristic u2, at least a part of the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power in the first control means depends on whether it is the first start situation or the second start situation when the supply of the operating power is started. Since the processing contents are different, it is possible for the first control means to execute the processing corresponding to the start situation as the processing when the supply of the operating power is started.

Features u3. The second control means is
Start correspondence executing means for executing start correspondence processing regardless of whether the first start correspondence information is received or the second start correspondence information (a positive determination is made in step SB405 in the sound-light side CPU 353). Function),
When the start correspondence information of one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, a predetermined correspondence process is executed, and the other of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is executed. A predetermined correspondence executing means (a function of executing the processing of steps SB407, SB409 and SB411 in the sound-light side CPU 353) that does not execute the predetermined correspondence processing when the start correspondence information is received;
The gaming machine according to the feature u1 or u2.

According to the characteristic u3, the second control means executes the start handling process regardless of which of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received. It is possible to cause the second control means to execute the start handling process when the information is transmitted. Further, the second control means executes a predetermined correspondence process when one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, and performs a predetermined correspondence process when the other start correspondence information is received. Do not execute the corresponding process. With this, it is possible to control not only the first control unit but also the second control unit to perform the control corresponding to the type of the start situation when the supply of the operating power is started.

Features u4. One of the first start situation and the second start situation is that a predetermined start-corresponding operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation) is performed when the supply of operating power is started. Occurs based on
The other one of the first start situation and the second start situation occurs based on the fact that the predetermined start corresponding operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the characteristic u3 Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic u4, the content of the control executed not only by the first control means but also by the second control means according to whether or not a predetermined start corresponding operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. Can be different.

Features u5. The first control means is a process for controlling the progress of the game after transmitting any one of the start correspondence information among a plurality of types of start correspondence information including the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information. (Step S8907 to step S8920) is executed,
The second control means is configured to execute processing (step SB412 to step SB414) corresponding to the progress content of the game after receiving any one of the plurality of types of start correspondence information. The gaming machine according to the characteristic u3 or u4.

According to the characteristic u5, the first control means transmits any start correspondence information before starting the process for controlling the progress of the game, and the second control means after receiving any start correspondence information. A process corresponding to the progress of the game is executed. As a result, the second control means can execute the process corresponding to the progress of the game after the situation where the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed by the first control means. It will be possible. In this case, since the configuration of the characteristic u3 is provided, a plurality of start correspondence information that makes the second control means different in whether or not to execute the predetermined correspondence processing is used to start the processing corresponding to the progress of the game. The trigger can be recognized by the second control means.

Features u6. The first control means is
Means for executing common handling processing regardless of whether the first start situation or the second start situation is reached when the supply of operating power is started (49th embodiment) A function of executing the processing of steps SB101 to SB103 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps SB601 to SB603 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, and a step of the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment. Function for executing the processing of SB701 and step SB702, function of executing the processing of steps SB801 to SB803 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, processing of step SC101 to step SC103 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. Function to execute)
When the supply of the operating power is started, the specific handling process is executed based on the one of the first starting situation and the second starting situation, and the supply of the operating power is started. In this case, means for not executing the specific corresponding process based on the other one of the first start situation and the second start situation (in the forty-ninth embodiment, step SB112 in the main CPU 63, step Function for executing the processing of SB115 or step SB117, the function of executing the processing of step SB612, step SB615 or step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment, step SB711, the step of main CPU63 in the fifty-second embodiment. Function for executing the processing of SB718 or step SB721, function of executing the processing of step SB810, step SB813 or step SB815 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, step SC111, step of the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. SC115 or the function of executing the processing of step SC117),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features u1 to u5.

According to the characteristic u6, the first control means executes the common handling process regardless of whether it is in the first start situation or the second start situation, while the first control situation and the If one of the two start situations is the start situation, the specific handling process is executed. As a result, the common control processing is executed by the first control means regardless of the start status, while the processing corresponding to the type of the start status is executed by the first control means. It becomes possible to do. In this case, the configuration of the characteristic u1 is provided, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the fact that the first start situation is set and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the fact that the second start situation is reached. Since the 2 start correspondence information is transmitted, the control corresponding to the type of the start situation when the supply of the operating power is started can be performed not only by the first control means but also by the second control means. Become.

Features u7. The first control means is
Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the processing of step SB311; In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB915 in the main CPU 63),
Based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the first start situation, First correspondence executing means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, the first correspondence execution means) is set to be in a settable state in which the setting value to be used can be changed (a setting value updating process is executed). A function of making an affirmative judgment in step SB114, a function of making an affirmative judgment in step SB614 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment, and a function of making an affirmative judgment in step SB717 in the main CPU63 in the fifty-second embodiment, In the 53rd embodiment, the function of making a positive determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, making a positive determination in step SC113 of the main CPU 63).
Based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a) is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is set by the setting means as the second start situation. Second correspondence execution means (function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63) for notifying the set value to be used
The gaming machine according to any one of the features u1 to u6.

According to the characteristic u7, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player is allowed to use the more advantageous setting value. Will be expected. Also, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is started, so an act of illegally changing the setting value to be used It is possible to make it difficult to perform. Further, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value of the usage target is notified by performing the second setting related operation, so that the manager of the game hall confirms the setting value of the usage target as necessary. It becomes possible. In this case, the configuration of the characteristic u1 is provided, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the fact that the first start situation is set and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on that the second start situation is shown. Since the 2 start correspondence information is transmitted, it is possible to cause the second control means to perform different control depending on whether the setting is possible or the setting value to be used is notified.

Features u8. The first control means is
Means for executing profit-giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a usage target among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
First correspondence executing means (setting value update processing or setting confirmation in the main CPU 63, which executes predetermined setting related processing relating to the setting value based on the first start situation when supply of operating power is started Function to execute processing for
Second response execution means (in the 49th embodiment, the main side in the forty-ninth embodiment, which executes another response processing different from the predetermined setting-related processing based on the second start situation when the supply of the operating power is started. A function of the CPU 63 to execute the process of step SB117, a function of the main CPU 63 to execute the process of step SB617 in the fifty-first embodiment, a function of the main CPU63 to execute the process of step SB721 in the fifty-second embodiment, A function of executing the process of step SB815 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step SC117 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features u1 to u7.

According to the characteristic u8, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, when the supply of the operating power is started, a predetermined setting-related process relating to the set value is executed based on the first starting status, and when the supply of the operating power is started, the second starting status is obtained. Based on this, another corresponding process different from the predetermined setting-related process is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to cause a case where a predetermined setting-related process is executed and a case where it is not executed depending on the start situation when the supply of the operating power is started. In this case, the configuration of the characteristic u1 is provided, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the fact that the first start situation is set and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the fact that the second start situation is reached. Since the 2 start correspondence information is transmitted, it is possible to cause the second control means to perform different control depending on whether or not the predetermined setting-related processing is executed by the first control means. ..

Features u9. The gaming machine according to feature u8, wherein the second correspondence execution means executes processing for initializing a predetermined storage area provided in the first control means as the different correspondence processing.

According to the characteristic u9, a case where a predetermined setting-related process is executed according to a start situation when the supply of the operating power is started and a case where a predetermined storage area of the first control means is initialized occur. It becomes possible. In this case, the configuration of the characteristic u1 is provided, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the fact that the first start situation is set and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the fact that the second start situation is reached. Since the 2nd start correspondence information is transmitted, different control is performed by the second control means depending on whether the predetermined setting-related processing is executed by the first control means and when the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible to

Features u10. The second control means is
When one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, the time correspondence information measured by the time measuring means (RTC 356) capable of measuring the time is stored as the time correspondence information. Means (RTC memory 357) to store the function (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing step SB407 in the sound-light side CPU 353; in the 50th embodiment, to execute the process of step SB507 in the sound-light side CPU 353). Function),
Means for executing time correspondence processing when the processing execution timing is based on the time correspondence information stored in the time correspondence storage means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the processing of step SB413 in the sound-light side CPU 353 is executed. Function for executing the process of step SB513 in the sound-light side CPU 353 in the fifty embodiment).
The gaming machine according to any one of the features u1 to u9.

According to the characteristic u10, the second control means executes the time correspondence processing when the processing execution timing is based on the time correspondence information stored in the time correspondence storage means, so that the timing when the predetermined time comes It is possible to execute the time corresponding processing in. In this case, when one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means is stored in the time correspondence storage means. As a result, it is possible to select a situation in which the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means or a situation in which the time correspondence information is not newly stored.

For the configurations of the features u1 to u10, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature v group>
Features v1. Time storage execution means (in the 49th embodiment, the sound-light side in the 49th embodiment) that stores the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means (RTC356) capable of measuring time in the time correspondence storage means (RTC memory 357). A function of executing the processing of step SB407 in the CPU 353, and a function of executing the processing of step SB507 in the sound-light side CPU 353 in the 50th embodiment).
Time correspondence executing means that executes the time correspondence processing when the processing execution timing is based on the time correspondence information stored in the time correspondence storage means (in the 49th embodiment, in step SB413 of the sound-light side CPU 353). A function of executing processing, a function of executing the processing of step SB513 in the sound-light side CPU 353 in the fifty embodiment),
Equipped with
The time storage execution means is configured to perform a first start situation when the supply of the operating power is started (in the 49th embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in a situation where no operation is performed, a 50th operation is performed). In the embodiment, when the RAM clear operation, the setting change operation, or the setting confirmation operation is performed and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the time is measured by the time measuring means. The time corresponding information is stored in the time corresponding storage means, and when the supply of the operating power is started, the second start situation (in the 49th embodiment, a RAM clear operation, a setting change operation, or a setting confirmation operation is performed). When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in the above-described situation, in the 50th embodiment, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on when no operation is performed). A game machine characterized in that the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means is not stored in the time correspondence storage means.

According to the feature v1, since the time correspondence processing is executed when the processing execution timing is based on the time correspondence information stored in the time correspondence storage means, the time correspondence processing is executed at the timing when the predetermined time comes. It becomes possible to be executed. In this case, when the first start situation is reached when the supply of the operating power is started, the time correspondence information measured by the time measuring means is stored in the time correspondence storing means, and the supply of the operating power is started. If the second start situation is reached, the time correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. As a result, it is possible to select a situation in which the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means or a situation in which the time correspondence information is not newly stored.

Feature v2. One of the first start situation and the second start situation is that a predetermined start-corresponding operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation) is performed when the supply of operating power is started. Occurs based on
The other of the first start situation and the second start situation occurs based on the fact that the predetermined start corresponding operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the feature v1 Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature v2, depending on whether or not a predetermined start corresponding operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, there are a situation in which the time corresponding information is newly stored in the time corresponding storage means and a situation in which the time corresponding information is not newly stored. It becomes possible to select each of the.

Features v3. The second start situation occurs based on a predetermined start corresponding operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation or setting confirmation operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine according to feature v1 or v2, wherein the first start situation occurs based on a fact that the predetermined start corresponding operation is not performed when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature v3, when the predetermined start corresponding operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is started, the time corresponding information is newly stored in the time corresponding storage means, and the supply of the operating power is started. In this case, the time correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means when a predetermined start correspondence operation is performed. Accordingly, when the supply of the operating power is started, basically, the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means, and a predetermined start correspondence operation is performed as necessary, so that the time It is possible to prevent the correspondence information from being stored in the time correspondence storage means.

Features v4. When the supply of the operating power is started, the specific handling process is executed based on the one of the first starting situation and the second starting situation, and the supply of the operating power is started. In this case, means for not executing the specific corresponding process based on the other one of the first start situation and the second start situation (in the forty-ninth embodiment, step SB112 in the main CPU 63, step Function for executing the processing of SB115 or step SB117, the function of executing the processing of step SB612, step SB615 or step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment, step SB711, the step of main CPU63 in the fifty-second embodiment. Function for executing the processing of SB718 or step SB721, function of executing the processing of step SB810, step SB813 or step SB815 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, step SC111, step of the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. The game machine according to any one of features v1 to v3, which is provided with a function of executing processing of SC115 or step SC117.

According to the feature v4, the specific handling process is executed when the start situation is one of the first start situation and the second start situation. In this case, the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the first start situation and the second start situation according to the feature v1. Correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to associate the presence or absence of execution of the specific correspondence process with the presence or absence of new storage of the time correspondence information.

Features v5. When the supply of the operating power is started, the specific correspondence process is executed based on the second starting status, and when the supply of the operating power is started, the first starting status is obtained. Means for not executing the specific correspondence process based on the above (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB112, step SB115 or step SB117 in the main CPU 63, in the fifty-first embodiment, step SB612 in the main CPU63, The function of executing the processing of step SB615 or step SB617, the function of executing the processing of step SB711, step SB718 or step SB721 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, the step SB810 of the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, Features v1 to v4 having a function of executing the process of step SB813 or step SB815, and a function of executing the process of step SC111, step SC115 or step SC117 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature v5, the specific handling process is executed when the first start situation and the second start situation are the second start situations. In this case, the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the first start situation and the second start situation according to the feature v1. Correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to prevent the time correspondence information from being newly stored in the time correspondence storage means when the specific correspondence process is executed.

Features v6. Means for executing a common handling process in either the first start situation or the second start situation when the supply of operating power is started (49th embodiment) Then, the function of executing the processing of steps SB101 to SB103 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of steps SB601 to SB603 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment, and the step of the main CPU63 in the fifty-second embodiment. Function for executing the processing of SB701 and step SB702, function for executing the processing of steps SB801 to SB803 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, processing of step SC101 to step SC103 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. The game machine according to the feature v4 or v5.

According to the feature v6, the common handling process is executed regardless of whether the first start situation or the second start situation occurs, while the first start situation and the second start situation If the start status is one of them, the specific handling process is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute the common handling process regardless of which start situation, while executing the process corresponding to the type of the start situation.

Features v7. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a usage target among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Setting-related executing means for executing a predetermined setting-related process relating to the set value when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing a set value update process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on one of the first start situation and the second start situation when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features v1 to v6.

According to the characteristic v7, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, when the supply of the operating power is started, the predetermined setting-related processing is executed based on one of the first start situation and the second start situation. This makes it possible to associate the presence/absence of execution of a predetermined setting-related process with the presence/absence of new storage of time correspondence information.

Feature v8. When the supply of the operating power is started, the predetermined storage area provided in the control means is initialized based on one of the first start situation and the second start situation. Means (function of executing step SB117 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, function of executing step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, main function of the CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment) A function of executing the process of step SB721, a function of executing the process of step SB815 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step SC117 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of the features v1 to v7.

According to the feature v8, when the supply of the operating power is started, the predetermined storage area of the first control means is initialized based on the one of the first start situation and the second start situation. Be converted. This makes it possible to associate the presence or absence of initialization of the predetermined storage area and the presence or absence of new storage of the time correspondence information.

For the configurations of the features v1 to v8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic u group and the characteristic v group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably perform the processing when the supply of the operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature w group>
Features w1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification);
A predetermined display control means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the predetermined display means;
Means for executing profit-giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a usage target among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Setting-related executing means for executing a predetermined setting-related process relating to the set value when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing a set value update process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means,
Means for causing the predetermined display means to display the set value when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed (a function of the main CPU 63 for executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006);
After the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the check control means (in the thirty-seventh embodiment, mainly used in the thirty-seventh embodiment A function of executing the process of step S9519 in the side CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step SA419 in the main CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SA919 in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment, In the forty-ninth embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SB123, in the fifty-first embodiment the main CPU63 executes the process of step SB623, and in the fifty-second embodiment the main CPU63 executes step SB712. And a function of executing the process of step SB719, a function of executing the process of step SB817 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC119 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature w1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the display regarding the set value is performed on the predetermined display means, so that the manager of the game hall can grasp the current set value by checking the predetermined display means. Becomes Further, by performing the check display on the predetermined display means, it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal.

In this case, when the supply of the operating power is started, the predetermined display means displays the check display after the predetermined setting-related processing is executed. As a result, the display related to the setting value when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed without the need for the adjustment processing such as ending the check display in the middle when the predetermined setting-related processing is started. Can be prioritized over the check display.

Features w2. The check control unit displays the check display regardless of whether the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined setting-related process is executed, or the predetermined setting-related process is not executed. The gaming machine according to the feature w1, characterized in that the predetermined display means is caused to perform.

According to the characteristic w2, when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display is displayed on the predetermined display means regardless of whether the predetermined setting-related processing is executed. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

Features w3. Whether the predetermined setting-related process is executed or the predetermined setting-related process is not executed as the process at the start of supply, which is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. In the case of commonly executed processes, when the predetermined setting-related process is executed, a common process that is a process whose execution order is later than the predetermined setting-related process is set,
The gaming machine according to the feature w1 or w2, wherein a process for starting the check display on the predetermined display means is set as the common process.

According to the feature w3, when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display is displayed on the predetermined display means regardless of whether the predetermined setting-related processing is executed. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power is started. Further, since the process for starting the check display on the predetermined display means is set as the common process, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while simplifying the process configuration.

Features w4. A means for executing processing for advancing the game after the supply of the operating power is started and the processing at the start of the supply is completed (function of executing the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w3, wherein a process for advancing the game can be started even in a situation where the check display is being executed on the predetermined display means. ..

According to the feature w4, the process for advancing the game can be started even in the situation where the check display on the predetermined display means is being executed. Therefore, the check is performed on the predetermined display means after the predetermined setting-related processing is executed. It is possible to prevent the start timing of the process for advancing the game from being delayed even when the message is displayed.

Features w5. When the supply of the operating power is started, the delay execution means for executing the delay processing that makes it possible to delay the start of the processing for advancing the game (executes the processing of steps SB715 and SB724 in the main CPU 63). Function),
The check control means causes the predetermined display means to start the check display before the delay processing is started when the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed when the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features w1 to w4.

According to the feature w5, when the supply of the operating power is started, the delay process that allows the start of the process for advancing the game to be delayed is executed, thereby completing the initial setting of various devices. It is possible to start the process for advancing the game later. In this case, if the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display on the predetermined display means is started before the delay processing is started. As a result, it is possible to perform the check display using the period in which the start of the process for advancing the game is delayed.

Features w6. The gaming machine according to feature w5, wherein the delay executing means does not execute the delay process when the predetermined setting-related process is executed.

According to the feature w6, since a predetermined period is required when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, it is possible to complete the initial setting of various devices before the processing for advancing the game is started. Become. In this case, when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the delay processing is not executed, so that the start of the processing for advancing the game in the situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is executed is extremely extreme. It's possible to avoid being late.

Features w7. The setting-related execution means,
Change of the set value to be used based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when supply of operating power is started. The status generating means (the function for making an affirmative determination in step SB114 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, which enables the setting to be a settable status (the status in which the setting value updating process is executed). In the fifty-first embodiment, the function of making an affirmative decision in step SB614 in the main CPU63, in the fifty-second embodiment, the function of making an affirmative decision in step SB717 in the main CPU63, and in the fifty-third embodiment the step in main CPU63. A function to make an affirmative judgment in SB812, and a function to make an affirmative judgment in step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
Notification generation that notifies the setting value to be used based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a) is performed when the supply of operating power is started Means (function of executing processing for setting confirmation in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features w1 to w6.

According to the feature w7, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of the operating power is started, so the setting value to be used is illegally changed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the intended action. Further, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value of the usage target is notified by performing the second setting related operation, so that the manager of the game hall confirms the setting value of the usage target as necessary. It becomes possible.

Features w8. The predetermined display control means is provided with means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function of executing the processes of steps S8708, S8709 and S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w7.

According to the feature w8, it becomes possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the management result of the game history. In this case, whether or not information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means is accurately displayed by providing the check display on the predetermined display means with the configuration of the characteristic w1. It becomes possible to confirm.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features w1 to w8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature x group>
Feature x1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification);
A predetermined display control means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the predetermined display means;
Means for executing processing for advancing the game after the supply of the operating power is started and the situation after the start of supply is completed (function of executing the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means causes the predetermined display means to perform a check display for confirming whether or not the predetermined display means is normal in the post-supply start situation (36th embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S9405 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the processes of step SB713 and step SB722 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment).
In a situation in which the check display is being displayed on the predetermined display means, a delay situation that makes it possible to delay the start of the processing for advancing the game (in the 36th embodiment, a negative determination is made in step S9406). The game machine characterized by the above-mentioned situation, the situation in which the processing of step SB715 and step SB724 is being executed by the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment).

According to the feature x1, when the supply of the operating power is started, the check display is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that it is possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. In this case, in the situation where the check display is being performed, there may occur a delay situation in which it is possible to delay the start of the process for advancing the game. This makes it possible to secure an opportunity to confirm the check display on the predetermined display means before the process for advancing the game is started. Further, due to the occurrence of the delay situation, it is possible to complete the initial setting of various devices before the processing for advancing the game is started. Then, it is possible to make a check display on the predetermined display means by utilizing this delay state.

Feature x2. Means for setting the delay status when the check display is being performed on the predetermined display means (in the thirty-sixth embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S9406, the fifty-second embodiment). In the form, the gaming machine described in the feature x1 is provided with a function of executing the processes of step SB715 and step SB724 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature x2, since the check display is in a delayed state, the process for advancing the game should not be started while the check display is being performed. Is possible.

Feature x3. When the supply of the operating power is started, the delay state is set in the situation where the check display is being performed on the predetermined display means based on the first starting situation, and the supply of the operating power is started. In this case, the gaming machine according to the feature x1 or x2 is characterized in that the delay state does not occur in the situation where the check display is being performed on the predetermined display means based on the second start situation.

According to the characteristic x3, in the case where the first display situation is the first display situation, the game is progressed while the check display is being performed due to the delay situation when the check display is being performed by the predetermined display means. It is possible to prevent the processing for starting from being started, and in the case of the second start situation, it is possible to prevent the delay situation in the situation where the check display is being performed by the predetermined display means. It is possible to prevent the start timing of the processing for advancing the game from being extremely delayed.

Feature x4. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a usage target among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Setting-related executing means for executing a predetermined setting-related process relating to the set value when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing a set value update process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The first start situation is a situation in which the predetermined setting-related process is not executed in the situation after the start of supply,
The gaming machine according to feature x3, wherein the second start situation is a situation in which the predetermined setting-related processing is executed in the post-supply start situation.

According to the characteristic x4, since a predetermined period is required when the predetermined setting related processing is executed, it is possible to complete the initial setting of various devices before the processing for advancing the game is started. Become. In this case, when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the predetermined setting-related processing is executed by preventing the delay state from occurring in the situation where the check display is being displayed on the predetermined display means. It is possible to prevent the start of the process for advancing the game from being extremely delayed in the situation.

Feature x5. The setting-related execution means,
Change of the set value to be used based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when supply of operating power is started. The status generating means (the function for making an affirmative determination in step SB114 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, which enables the setting to be a settable status (the status in which the setting value updating process is executed). In the fifty-first embodiment, the function of making an affirmative decision in step SB614 in the main CPU63, in the fifty-second embodiment, the function of making an affirmative decision in step SB717 in the main CPU63, and in the fifty-third embodiment the step in main CPU63. A function to make an affirmative judgment in SB812, and a function to make an affirmative judgment in step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
Notification generation that notifies the setting value to be used based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a) is performed when the supply of operating power is started Means (function of executing processing for setting confirmation in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to feature x4, which is provided with.

According to the feature x5, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of the operating power is started, so the setting value to be used is illegally changed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the intended action. Further, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value of the usage target is notified by performing the second setting related operation, so that the manager of the game hall confirms the setting value of the usage target as necessary. It becomes possible.

Feature x6. The predetermined display control means is provided with means for displaying information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means (function of executing the processes of steps S8708, S8709 and S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of the features x1 to x5.

According to the feature x6, it becomes possible to inform the manager of the game hall of the management result of the game history. In this case, whether or not the information corresponding to the management result of the game history on the predetermined display means is accurately displayed by providing the check display on the predetermined display means with the configuration of the above feature x1. It becomes possible to confirm.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features x1 to x6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic w group and the characteristic x group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, a configuration capable of confirming whether or not the display on the predetermined display means is accurately performed is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. is there.

<Characteristic y group>
Feature y1. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the processing of step SB311; In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB915 in the main CPU 63),
Situation generating means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the step SB114 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment) to bring about a settable situation (a situation in which the setting value update processing is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed. Function for making an affirmative judgment in the 51st embodiment, a function for making an affirmative judgment in step SB614 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, and a function for making an affirmative judgment in step SB717 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment. In the embodiment, the function of making an affirmative judgment in step SB812 in the main CPU 63, and the function of making an affirmative judgment in step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment).
A setting monitoring unit that executes a setting monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the setting value of the usage target is abnormal (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB106 in the main CPU 63, the fifty-first embodiment). In the 52nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SB 606 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SB 705, and in the 53rd embodiment the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SB 806. A function to execute, a function to execute the process of step SC106 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
Equipped with
The process at the start of supply performed when the supply of the operating power to the control unit having the setting unit is started (step SB101 to step SB122 in the forty-ninth embodiment, step SB601 to step in the fifty-first embodiment). SB622, step SB701 to step SB729 in the 52nd embodiment, step SB801 to step SB818 and step SB823 to step SB826 in the 53rd embodiment, step SC101 to step SC120 and step SC125 to step SC128 in the 54th embodiment). A game machine characterized in that the setting monitoring process is included in.

According to the characteristic y1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player, the player can set the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, since the setting monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the setting value of the usage target is abnormal is performed, it is possible to deal with it when the setting value of the usage target is abnormal. In addition, since the setting monitoring process is included in the process at the start of supply, it is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being started even if the setting value to be used is abnormal. Becomes

Feature y2. The gaming machine according to feature y1, wherein the setting monitoring unit executes the setting monitoring process each time a monitoring trigger occurs even after the process at the start of supply is completed.

According to the feature y2, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time the monitoring trigger occurs after the process at the start of supply is completed, it is easy to identify that the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature y3. A means for executing an interrupt process that is regularly activated (a function for executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to feature y2, wherein the interrupt processing includes the setting monitoring processing.

According to the feature y3, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time it is activated, it is possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature y4. The setting monitoring means sets a restricted state in which execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing a game is restricted based on the fact that the setting value of the use target is specified to be abnormal in the setting monitoring process. Restricting Means (Function of Performing Step SB119 in Main CPU 63 in 49th Embodiment, Function of Performing Step SB619 in Main CPU 63 in 51st Embodiment, Main CPU 63 in 52nd Embodiment) A function of executing the process of step SB726 in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB823 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step SC125 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of the features y1 to y3.

According to the characteristic y4, when it is specified that the set value of the use target is abnormal, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is restricted, so that the set value of the use target is also abnormal. Regardless, it is possible to prevent the game from being started.

Feature y5. Means for releasing the restricted state based on the occurrence of the settable state (a function for executing the process of step SB303 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, step SB904 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment). (A function of executing the process of). The gaming machine according to the feature y4.

According to the feature y5, it is possible to make a new setting of the set value of the use target when canceling the situation where the set value of the use target is abnormal.

Feature y6. The feature y4 or y5 is characterized in that the regulation means brings the regulation state into the regulation state when the supply of the operation power is resumed even if the supply of the operation power is stopped in the situation of the regulation state. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic y6, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted due to the abnormal setting value of the use target from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operating power.

Feature y7. Features y4 to y4 characterized by including a unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63) that executes a non-regulation process different from the predetermined progress process even in the restriction state. The gaming machine according to any one of y6.

According to the feature y7, it is possible to execute the non-restriction process even in the situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted due to the abnormal setting value of the use target. As a result, it becomes possible to ensure the execution of the required processing even in the restricted state.

Feature y8. The gaming machine according to feature y7, wherein the non-restriction process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring occurrence of a power failure.

According to the feature y8, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the regulated state, so that when the power outage occurs in the regulated state, it is possible to appropriately cope with the power outage.

Feature y9. Based on the fact that the setting monitoring means identifies that the setting value of the use target is abnormal in the setting monitoring process, a notification is made to enable the player to recognize that the setting possible situation should be generated. Means to be executed (function of executing the process of step SB121 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, function of executing the process of step SB621 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, 52nd embodiment In the form, the function of executing the process of step SB728 in the main CPU 63, in the 53rd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB825 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, the process of step SC127 in the main CPU 63 is executed. A gaming machine according to any one of the features y1 to y8.

According to the feature y9, when it is specified that the setting value of the use target is abnormal, a notification is made to enable the player to recognize that the settable situation should be generated, and thus the use target setting is performed. When the value becomes abnormal, it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to cancel it.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features y1 to y9. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic y group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably manage the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature z group>
Feature z1. Predetermined monitoring means for monitoring whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control) when supply of operating power is started (thirty-third embodiment). Then, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S7906 and S7909, the function of the main CPU 63 to execute the processing of steps S8807 and S8810 in the 35th embodiment, and the step of the main CPU 63 in the 36th embodiment. A function of executing the processing of S9408 and step S9411, a function of executing the processing of steps S9506 and S9509 in the main CPU 63 in the 37th embodiment, and a processing of steps S9905 and S9908 in the main CPU 63 in the 42nd embodiment. Function for executing the processing of steps SA406 and SA409 in the main CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step SA907 and step SA910 in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment, In the forty-ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps SB104 to SB106 in the main CPU 63, in the fifty-first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of step SB604 to step SB606 in the main CPU63, and in the fifty-second embodiment, the main The function of executing the processing of steps SB703 to SB705 in the side CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of steps SB804 to SB806 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and the step SC104 of the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. A function of executing the processing of step SC106),
Based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means, the restriction means is set to a restriction state in which execution of the predetermined progression processing for advancing the game is restricted (third embodiment). Then, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S7910, the 35th embodiment executes the process of step S8811 in the main CPU 63, and the 36th embodiment executes the process of step S9412 in the main CPU 63. Function, a function of the main CPU 63 to execute the process of step S9510 in the 37th embodiment, a function of the main CPU 63 to execute the process of step S9909 in the 42nd embodiment, and a main CPU 63 of the 45th embodiment. A function of executing the process of step SA410, a function of executing the process of step SA911 in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB119 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, and a 51st In the 52nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SB619 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SB726, and in the 53rd embodiment the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SB823. A function to execute, a function to execute the process of step SC125 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment),
Means for executing non-restriction processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the restricted state (function of executing processing of steps S8201 to S8206 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-third embodiment, in the thirty-fifth embodiment A function of executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of steps SA101 to SA106 in the main CPU 63 in the 42nd embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic z1, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, the execution of the predetermined progression process for advancing the game is restricted, so that the predetermined abnormality occurs. It is possible to prevent the game from starting even though it has occurred. Further, even when the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, the non-restriction processing can be executed. As a result, it becomes possible to ensure the execution of the required processing even in the restricted state.

Feature z2. The non-regulation processing includes a power failure monitoring processing for monitoring occurrence of power failure (step S8201 in the 33rd embodiment, step S8901 in the 35th embodiment, step SA102 in the 42nd embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature z1, which is characterized in that

According to the feature z2, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the regulated state, so that when the power outage occurs in the regulated state, it is possible to appropriately cope with the power outage.

Feature z3. The feature z1 or z2 is characterized in that the regulation means brings the regulation state into the regulation state when the supply of the operation power is resumed even if the supply of the operation power is stopped in the situation of the regulation state. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic z3, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operating power.

Feature z4. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the processing of step SB311; In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB915 in the main CPU 63),
Situation generating means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the step SB114 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment) to bring about a settable situation (a situation in which the setting value update processing is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed. Function for making an affirmative judgment in the 51st embodiment, a function for making an affirmative judgment in step SB614 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, and a function for making an affirmative judgment in step SB717 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment. In the embodiment, the function of making an affirmative judgment in step SB812 in the main CPU 63, and the function of making an affirmative judgment in step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment).
The gaming machine according to any one of features z1 to z3, characterized in that

According to the characteristic z4, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can set the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, if a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, there is a possibility that an abnormality has also occurred with respect to the set value. On the other hand, with the configuration of the characteristic z1 and when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being started even though an abnormality may have occurred with respect to the set value.

Feature z5. Means for executing a notification for making it possible for the player to recognize that the settable condition should be generated based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means ( In the forty-ninth embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SB121, in the fifty-first embodiment the main CPU63 executes the process of step SB621, and in the fifty-second embodiment the main CPU63 executes step SB728. The function of executing the process of step SB825 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature z4.

According to the characteristic z5, when it is specified that the predetermined abnormality has occurred, a notification is made to enable the player to recognize that the setting-possible situation should be generated. It is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to set the set value.

Feature z6. Means for releasing the restricted state based on the occurrence of the settable state (a function for executing the process of step SB303 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, step SB904 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment). The game machine according to the feature z4 or z5, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of.

According to the feature z6, it is possible to make a new setting of the setting value to be used when canceling the situation where the predetermined abnormality has occurred.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features z1 to z6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αA group>
Features αA1. Predetermined monitoring means for monitoring whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control) when supply of operating power is started (49th embodiment). Then, the function of executing the processing of steps SB104 to SB106 in the main CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of steps SB604 to SB606 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-first embodiment, and the step of the main CPU63 in the fifty-second embodiment. Function for executing the processing of SB703 to step SB705, function of executing the processing of step SB804 to step SB806 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, processing of step SC104 to step SC106 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. Function to execute)
When the predetermined abnormality is identified by the predetermined monitoring means, the execution content of the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is identified by the predetermined monitoring means as the predetermined abnormality. Restriction means for making the execution content different from the case of not performing (a function of executing the process of step SB119 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, a process of step SB619 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment. Function to be executed, function to execute the process of step SB726 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, function to execute the process of step SB823 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, main part in the 54th embodiment A function of executing the processing of step SC125 in the CPU 63),
Specific output means for performing a specific output to the outside of the gaming machine based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been specified by the predetermined monitoring means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the process of step SB122 in the main CPU 63). Function for executing step SB622 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, function for executing step SB729 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, main function in the 53rd embodiment. A function of executing the processing of step SB826 in the side CPU 63, and a function of executing the processing of step SC128 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic αA1, when it is specified that the predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, when the execution content of the process at the start of supplying the operating power does not have the predetermined abnormality Since the execution content is different from that, it is possible to prevent the processing from proceeding normally even if the predetermined abnormality has occurred. Further, the specific output is performed outside the gaming machine based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified. Thereby, it becomes possible to urge the manager of the game hall to deal with the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality.

Features αA2. The gaming machine according to feature αA1, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific output to the outside of the gaming machine even when it is specified that an event different from the predetermined abnormality is occurring.

According to the feature αA2, the specific output is performed outside the gaming machine even when an event different from the predetermined abnormality occurs. As a result, it is possible to combine the configuration for performing the specific output.

Features αA3. Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the predetermined abnormality is occurring, the specific output means is the gaming machine if the predetermined abnormality occurs when the supply of the operating power is resumed. The gaming machine according to the feature αA1 or αA2, which is characterized in that the specific output is performed externally.

According to the characteristic αA3, it is possible to perform the specific output to the outside of the gaming machine each time the supply of the operating power is restarted in the situation where the predetermined abnormality occurs. This makes it easier for the manager of the game hall to recognize that the predetermined abnormality has occurred.

Features αA4. The restriction means sets a restriction state in which execution of predetermined progress processing for advancing a game is restricted based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αA1 to αA3.

According to the characteristic αA4, when it is specified that the predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, the execution of the predetermined progression process for advancing the game is restricted, so that the predetermined abnormality occurs. It is possible to prevent the game from starting even though it has occurred.

Features αA5. Means for executing non-restriction processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the restricted state (function of executing processing of steps S8201 to S8206 in the main CPU 63 in the thirty-third embodiment, in the thirty-fifth embodiment A feature αA4 characterized in that the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905, and in the 42nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the processes of steps SA101 to SA106). The game machine described.

According to the characteristic αA5, the non-restriction process can be executed even in the situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. As a result, it becomes possible to ensure the execution of the required processing even in the restricted state.

Features αA6. The non-regulation processing includes a power failure monitoring processing for monitoring occurrence of power failure (step S8201 in the 33rd embodiment, step S8901 in the 35th embodiment, step SA102 in the 42nd embodiment). The gaming machine described in the feature αA5.

According to the feature αA6, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the regulated state, so that when the power outage occurs in the regulated state, it is possible to appropriately cope with the power outage.

Features αA7. Features αA4 to αA6 characterized in that the regulation means brings the regulation state into the regulation state when the supply of the operation power is resumed even if the supply of the operation power is stopped in the situation of the regulation state. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the characteristic αA7, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted due to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operating power.

Feature αA8. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the processing of step SB311; In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB915 in the main CPU 63),
Situation generating means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the step SB114 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment) to bring about a settable situation (a situation in which the setting value update processing is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed. Function for making an affirmative judgment in the 51st embodiment, a function for making an affirmative judgment in step SB614 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, and a function for making an affirmative judgment in step SB717 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment. In the embodiment, the function of making an affirmative judgment in step SB812 in the main CPU 63, and the function of making an affirmative judgment in step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment).
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αA4 to αA7.

According to the characteristic αA8, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, so that the player can set the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, if a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, there is a possibility that an abnormality has also occurred with respect to the set value. On the other hand, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the predetermined storage area, which has the configuration of the characteristic αA1, the execution content of the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is predetermined. Since the execution content is different from that when there is no error, it is possible to prevent the process from proceeding normally even though an error may have occurred regarding the set value. Become. In addition, since a specific output is performed outside the gaming machine based on the fact that a predetermined abnormality has been identified, it is possible to deal with the possibility that an abnormality may have occurred with respect to the set value. It is possible to urge the manager of the hall.

Features αA9. Means for executing a notification for making it possible for the player to recognize that the settable condition should be generated based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means ( In the forty-ninth embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SB121, in the fifty-first embodiment the main CPU63 executes the process of step SB621, and in the fifty-second embodiment the main CPU63 executes step SB728. The function of executing the process of step SB825 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature αA8.

According to the characteristic αA9, when it is specified that the predetermined abnormality has occurred, a notification is made to enable the player to recognize that the setting-possible situation should be generated. It is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to set the set value.

Feature αA10. The restriction means is in a restriction state in which execution of predetermined progress processing for advancing a game is restricted based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has been identified by the predetermined monitoring means. ,
This gaming machine is means for canceling the restricted state based on the occurrence of the settable condition (a function for executing the process of step SB303 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, a main function in the fifty-third embodiment). The game machine according to feature αA8 or αA9, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of step SB904 in the side CPU 63.

According to the characteristic αA10, it is possible to make a new setting of the set value to be used when canceling the situation in which the predetermined abnormality has occurred.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features αA1 to αA10. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αB group>
Feature αB1. A means for starting the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power when the supply of the operating power is started (steps SB101 to SB122 in the forty-ninth embodiment, step SB601 to step SB622 in the fifty-first embodiment, step 52). Step SB701 to Step SB729 in the embodiment, Step SB801 to Step SB818 and Step SB823 to Step SB826 in the 53rd embodiment, Step SC101 to Step SC120 and Step SC125 to Step SC128 in the 54th embodiment, and
Means for executing interrupt processing that is activated periodically (function for executing first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63);
Means for executing profit-giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a usage target among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
As a part of the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, a setting-related execution unit that executes a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value (a function for executing a setting value update process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63). )When,
Permission setting means for setting a state in which the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the execution of the interrupt processing is permitted when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed in the processing at the start of supplying the operating power (A function of executing the processing of step SB201 or step SB301 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step SB901 in the main CPU63 in the fifty-third embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic αB1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, so that the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, since the predetermined setting-related processing relating to the set value is executed as a part of the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, it is possible to make it difficult to carry out the act of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related processing. It will be possible.

In this case, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed in the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the execution of the interrupt process is changed from the prohibited state to the permitted state. That is, basically, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited in the process at the start of supplying the operating power, while the interrupt process can be interrupted and activated in the predetermined setting-related process. By basically prohibiting the execution of the interrupt process in the process at the start of supplying the operating power, it is possible to shorten the time required to complete the process at the start of supplying the operating power. On the other hand, since the process related to the setting value is executed in the predetermined setting-related process, it is expected that the time required to complete the process will be long. In such a situation where the predetermined setting-related process is executed, By permitting the execution of the interrupt processing, it becomes possible to optimize the processing execution mode.

Feature αB2. The gaming machine according to feature αB1, wherein the setting-related executing means ends the predetermined setting-related processing on the basis of an end trigger operation being performed in the predetermined setting-related processing.

According to the characteristic αB2, the predetermined setting-related process is continued until the end trigger operation is performed, and therefore the time required for the process to be completed tends to be long. In this case, since the configuration of the characteristic αB1 is provided and the execution of the interrupt process is permitted in the situation where the predetermined setting-related process is executed, the execution mode of the process can be made suitable. ..

Feature αB3. When the predetermined setting-related processing ends, the prohibition setting means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, the main CPU 63 in the main CPU 63 in the forty-ninth embodiment, sets the state in which the execution of the interrupt processing is permitted to the state in which execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited The gaming machine described in the feature αB1 or αB2, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step SB206 or step SB312, and a function of executing the process of step SB916 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment.

According to the characteristic αB3, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited again when the predetermined setting-related process ends. As a result, it is possible to limit the period during which the execution of the interrupt process is permitted to the period during which the predetermined setting-related process is executed in the situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

Feature αB4. The game machine according to any one of the features αB1 to αB3, wherein the interrupt process includes a power outage monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage.

According to the characteristic αB4, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the situation where the predetermined setting-related process is executed, so that the time required to complete the predetermined setting-related process may be long. Even in this case, when a power failure occurs in the situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, it is possible to appropriately deal with the power failure.

Feature αB5. The interruption processing includes a progress corresponding process (step S8907 to step S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
When the interrupt processing is interrupted and activated in a situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, the power failure monitoring processing is executed while the progress handling processing is not executed,
If the interrupt processing is interrupted and activated after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is finished, both the power failure monitoring processing and the progress handling processing can be executed. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic αB5, in the configuration in which the occurrence of power failure is regularly monitored in the situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed, the interrupt processing is interrupted and activated in the situation where the predetermined setting-related processing is being executed. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the progress corresponding process for controlling the progress of the game from being executed.

Feature αB6. The setting-related execution means,
Based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when supply of operating power is started, the use as the predetermined setting-related processing is performed. Means for executing a changeable process in which the target set value can be changed (a function for executing the set value updating process in the main CPU 63);
Based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a) is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, as the predetermined setting-related process, the setting value to be used is set. Means for executing setting notification processing for notification (a function for executing setting confirmation processing in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The permission setting means sets a state in which the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited from a state in which the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited when the changeable processing is executed in the processing when the supply of the operating power is started. When the setting notification process is executed in the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power, the state in which the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited is set to the state in which the execution of the interrupt process is permitted. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αB1 to αB5.

According to the characteristic αB6, since the first setting-related operation needs to be performed when the supply of the operating power is started in order to change the setting value to be used, the setting value to be used is illegally changed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the intended action. Further, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value of the usage target is notified by performing the second setting related operation, so that the manager of the game hall confirms the setting value of the usage target as necessary. It becomes possible.

For the configurations of the features αB1 to αB6, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic z group, the characteristic αA group, and the characteristic αB group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably perform the processing when the supply of the operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αC group>
Features αC1. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a usage target among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Setting-related executing means (a function for executing a setting value updating process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting-related process relating to the setting value when supply of operating power is started;
When the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related process, and when the supply of the operating power is started after that, the regulation of the execution of the predetermined progress process for advancing the game is restricted. A regulation means for setting the state (a function of making an affirmative judgment in step SB808 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function of making an affirmative judgment in steps SC108 and SC116 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment). ,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic αC1, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, and if the supply of the operating power is resumed after that, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is restricted. It As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting-related processing is not completed.

Feature αC2. The regulation means executes the predetermined setting-related process even when the supply of the operating power is stopped after the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related process. The gaming machine described in the feature αC1 is characterized in that the regulation state is not established in the case of the above.

According to the feature αC2, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being restricted until the predetermined setting-related processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. ..

Features αC3. A feature αC1 including a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63) that executes a non-regulation processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the restriction state The gaming machine described in αC2.

According to the characteristic αC3, the non-restriction process can be executed even in the situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted. As a result, it becomes possible to ensure the execution of the required processing even in the restricted state.

Features αC4. The gaming machine according to feature αC3, wherein the non-restriction process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure.

According to the feature αC4, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the regulated state, so that when a power outage occurs in the regulated state, it is possible to appropriately cope with the power outage.

Features αC5. The features αC1 to αC4 are characterized in that the regulation means brings the regulation state into the regulation state when the supply of the operation power is resumed even if the supply of the operation power is stopped in the state of the regulation state. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the characteristic αC5, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted from being released only by stopping the supply of the operating power.

Features αC6. Means for executing a notification that allows the player to recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing is to be executed based on the fact that the restricted state has been reached (in the 53rd embodiment, Any one of features αC1 to αC5 characterized in that the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step SB825, and in the 54th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC127 of the main CPU 63). The game machine described.

According to the characteristic αC6, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, it is possible to prompt the game hall manager to execute the predetermined setting-related processing again. Become.

Features αC7. Even when the supply of the operating power is stopped after the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, the restricting unit controls the specific related operation (setting key insertion unit 68a). The game machine according to any one of the features αC1 to αC6, wherein the regulation state is not set based on the ON operation and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c).

According to the characteristic αC7, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, the game is advanced by performing the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is restarted. It is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing of 1. from being restricted.

Feature αC8. The gaming machine according to feature αC7, wherein the setting-related executing means executes the predetermined setting-related process based on the fact that the specific-related operation is performed when supply of operating power is started. ..

According to the characteristic αC8, it becomes possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being restricted until the predetermined setting-related processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. ..

Feature αC9. For the specific related operation, the setting key insertion portion (setting key insertion portion 68a) is set to a predetermined corresponding state (ON operation state) by the setting key, and another predetermined operation (press operation of the reset button 68c). ) Is being done,
When the supply of the operating power is stopped before the supply of the operating power is completed before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, and the supply of the operating power is started thereafter, the other predetermined operation is not performed. The gaming machine according to feature αC8, wherein the setting key insertion portion is not brought into the restricted state based on the predetermined corresponding state.

According to the feature αC9, even if the specific related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the setting key insertion portion is in the predetermined corresponding state, and thus the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is executed. Can be prevented from being regulated. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing, the setting key insertion part is in the predetermined corresponding state but the power is turned on without performing another predetermined operation. Even if there is, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing from being restricted.

Feature αC10. When the supply of operating power is started, the setting key insertion unit is brought into the predetermined corresponding state in a situation where the other predetermined operation is not performed, and another related process regarding the set value is executed. The gaming machine according to feature αC9, which is provided with another related execution means (a function for executing the setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63).

According to the characteristic αC10, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related process, the operation for executing another related process when the supply of the operating power is restarted is performed. It is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being restricted.

Feature αC11. When the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing and then the supply of the operating power is started, the setting key insertion unit is operated in a situation where the other predetermined operation is not performed. The predetermined setting-related process is executed without executing the another related process based on the fact that is set to the predetermined corresponding state, the gaming machine according to the feature αC10.

According to the characteristic αC11, when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related process, the operation for executing another related process when the supply of the operating power is restarted is performed. A predetermined setting related process is executed instead of another related process. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing.

Features αC12. The predetermined setting-related processing is processing that enables changing the setting value to be used,
The gaming machine according to feature αC11, wherein the different related process is a process for notifying the setting value to be used.

According to the characteristic αC12, when the supply of the operating power is stopped while the setting value to be used is being changed, the setting value to be used is notified when the supply of the operating power is resumed thereafter. It is possible to give priority to the execution of the process for changing the setting value to be used rather than the process.

Features αC13. The gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC12, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process that enables changing a setting value to be used.

According to the characteristic αC13, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the process for changing the setting value to be used, the game is advanced when the supply of the operating power is resumed after that. Execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being executed despite the situation where the change of the set value is not completed.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features αC1 to αC13, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αD group>
Features αD1. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a usage target among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Predetermined setting-related processing relating to the set value is executed based on the fact that a specific related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when supply of operating power is started. Setting-related executing means (a function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
Based on the fact that a predetermined related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a) is performed when the supply of operating power is started, another related execution means (main Function for executing the setting value update processing in the side CPU 63),
When the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related process, and when the supply of the operating power is started after that, the regulation of the execution of the predetermined progress process for advancing the game is restricted. A regulation means for setting the state (a function of making an affirmative judgment in step SB808 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function of making an affirmative judgment in steps SC108 and SC116 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment). ,
Equipped with
The regulation means performs the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started after that even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related process. In the case where the supply of the operating power is started after that even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, A gaming machine which is not brought into the restricted state based on a predetermined related operation being performed.

According to the characteristic αD1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, so that the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, and if the supply of the operating power is resumed after that, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is restricted. It As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting-related processing is not completed.

Further, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, the execution of the predetermined progress processing is not restricted because the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being restricted until the predetermined setting-related processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted even when the predetermined related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Not done. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing from being restricted when the operation for executing the processing related to the set value is performed.

Feature αD2. Based on that the predetermined related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is started after the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related process, the another related process The gaming machine according to feature αD1, wherein the predetermined setting-related processing is performed without being performed.

According to the characteristic αD2, in the case where the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting related process, the operation for executing another related process when the supply of the operating power is resumed is performed. A predetermined setting related process is executed instead of another related process. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature αD3. For the specific related operation, the setting key insertion portion (setting key insertion portion 68a) is set to a predetermined corresponding state (ON operation state) by the setting key, and another predetermined operation (press operation of the reset button 68c). ) Is being done,
The predetermined related operation includes that the setting key insertion portion is brought into the predetermined corresponding state by the setting key, and does not include that the other predetermined operation is performed. Gaming machine described in.

According to the characteristic αD3, even if the specific related operation is not performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted, the setting key insertion portion is in the predetermined corresponding state, so that the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is executed. Can be prevented from being regulated. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing, the setting key insertion part is in the predetermined corresponding state but the power is turned on without performing another predetermined operation. Even if there is, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing from being restricted.

Features αD4. The predetermined setting-related processing is processing that enables changing the setting value to be used,
The gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD3, wherein the different related process is a process for notifying the setting value to be used.

According to the characteristic αD4, when the supply of the operating power is stopped during the process for changing the setting value to be used, the game is advanced when the supply of the operating power is resumed after that. Execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being executed despite the situation where the change of the set value is not completed. Also, if the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the setting value to be used, a process that enables changing the setting value to be used when restarting the supply of operating power is performed. The predetermined progress processing is performed not only when the operation for performing the operation is performed but also when the operation for performing the processing for notifying the setting value to be used is performed. It is possible to prevent the execution of the.

Feature αD5. Features αD1 to A1 which are characterized by including a unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63) that executes a non-regulation process different from the predetermined progress process even in the restriction state. The gaming machine described in any one of αD4.

According to the feature αD5, the non-restriction process can be executed even in the situation where the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted. As a result, it becomes possible to ensure the execution of the required processing even in the restricted state.

Features αD6. The game machine according to feature αD5, wherein the non-restriction process includes a power failure monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring occurrence of a power failure.

According to the feature αD6, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the regulated state, so that when the power outage occurs in the regulated state, it is possible to appropriately cope with the power outage.

Features αD7. The features αD1 to αD6 are characterized in that the regulation means brings the regulation state into the regulation state when the supply of the operation power is resumed even if the supply of the operation power is stopped in the situation of the regulation state. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature αD7, it is possible to prevent the state in which the execution of the predetermined progress processing is restricted from being canceled only by stopping the supply of the operating power.

Feature αD8. Means for executing a notification that allows the player to recognize that the predetermined setting-related processing is to be executed based on the fact that the restricted state has been reached (in the 53rd embodiment, Any one of features αD1 to αD7 characterized in that the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step SB825, and in the 54th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC127 of the main CPU 63). The game machine described.

According to the feature αD8, when the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, it is possible to prompt the game hall manager to execute the predetermined setting-related processing again. Become.

Feature αD9. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a usage target among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
Predetermined setting-related processing relating to the set value is executed based on the fact that a specific related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed when supply of operating power is started. Setting-related executing means (a function of executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63),
When the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related process, and when the supply of the operating power is started after that, the regulation of the execution of the predetermined progress process for advancing the game is restricted. A regulation means for setting the state (a function of making an affirmative judgment in step SB808 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function of making an affirmative judgment in steps SC108 and SC116 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment). ,
Equipped with
The specific related operation includes a first related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a) and a second related operation (press operation of the reset button 68c),
Even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, the regulation means performs the specific related operation when the supply of the operating power is started after that. If the supply of the operating power is started after that even if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting related processing is completed, A gaming machine, wherein the restricted state is not set based on the first related operation being performed among the first related operation and the second related operation.

According to the characteristic αD9, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage degree of the player, the player sets the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. In this case, if the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, and if the supply of the operating power is resumed after that, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is restricted. It As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting-related processing is not completed.

Further, even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related processing, the execution of the predetermined progress processing is not restricted because the specific related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being restricted until the predetermined setting-related processing is executed when the supply of the operating power is restarted.

Even when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related process, the execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted if the first related operation is performed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Not done. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing from being restricted when a part of the operations for executing the predetermined setting-related processing is performed.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features αD1 to αD9. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αE group>
Feature αE1. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a usage target among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
When the supply of operating power is started, the settable condition (set value) in which the set value to be used can be changed based on the fact that the specific related operation including the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is performed. A situation generating means (a function for making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment), and a step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. Function to make an affirmative decision)
An operation specifying means (a function for executing the process of step SB910 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated;
When the operation identifying unit identifies that the predetermined corresponding operating unit is not operated, the stored state becomes the non-operation corresponding state, and the operation identifying unit identifies that the predetermined corresponding operating unit is operated. An operation-corresponding storage unit (OFF confirmation flag 361) whose storage state becomes an operation-corresponding state when
Selection is made based on the operation specifying means specifying that the predetermined correspondence operation means is operated in a situation where the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means is the non-operation correspondence state in the setting possible state. Selection target changing means for changing the target setting value (function of executing the process of step SB914 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
When the termination trigger occurs in the setting possible situation, the setting value that is the selection target is the setting value that is the usage target,
This gaming machine sets the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means to the operation correspondence state when the setting possible situation is started or when the setting possible situation is started (fifth embodiment). A game machine having a function of executing the process of step SB901 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the process of step SC114 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment.

According to the characteristic αE1, the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of the plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player, so that the player can use the more advantageous setting value as the usage target. Will be expected. Further, in order to generate a settable situation in which the set value to be used can be changed, it is necessary to turn on the power supply in a state where a specific related operation including an operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult to illegally change the setting value to be used. In addition, since the setting value to be selected is changed based on the operation of the predetermined corresponding operating means operated to generate the settable condition, the number of operating means necessary to change the setting value is set. It becomes possible to suppress. Further, in the settable situation, the set value to be selected is changed based on the fact that the predetermined correspondence operation means is specified to be operated in the situation where the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means is the non-operation correspondence state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting value to be selected from being changed a plurality of times for one operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means.

In this case, the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means is set to the operation correspondence state when the settable situation is started or when the settable situation is started. As a result, when the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means for causing the settable situation continues even after the start of the settable situation, the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means causes a change in the setting value to be selected. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Feature αE2. In the situation generating means, when the detection state of the means for detecting the operation of the predetermined correspondence operating means is the operation detection state, the predetermined correspondence operating means is operated regardless of the storage state of the operation correspondence storing means. The gaming machine described in the feature αE1 characterized by being specified.

According to the feature αE2, when specifying whether or not the specific related operation is performed, it is not specified whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means is switched from the unoperated state to the operated state, but the predetermined corresponding operation is performed. Since it is a configuration that specifies whether or not the means is being operated, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying whether or not to generate the settable status.

Features αE3. A setting correspondence storage unit (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used,
A selection correspondence storage unit (setting update area 342) that stores selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value that is the selection target;
Equipped with
The selection target changing unit specifies that the predetermined corresponding operating unit is operated by the operation specifying unit in a situation where the storage state of the operation corresponding storage unit is the non-operation corresponding state in the setting possible state. On the basis of this, the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means is changed so that the setting value as the selection target is changed,
The situation generation means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the setting correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information when the termination trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. The game machine according to the feature αE1 or αE2, in which the setting value that has been the selection target in the setting possible state is set as the use target.

According to the feature αE3, the setting correspondence storage unit that stores the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used and the selection correspondence storage unit that stores the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the settable state. By being provided, it becomes possible to change the set value in the settable situation while storing and holding the information of the set value set before the start of the settable situation.

Features αE4. Means for causing the display of the set value that is the selection target in the settable status to be performed by a predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) (step SA801 in the main CPU 63) ~ The function of executing the processing of step SA803) is provided, The gaming machine according to any one of the features αE1 to αE3.

According to the feature αE4, it is possible to perform the setting value changing operation while confirming the setting value which is being changed in the setting possible state.

Features αE5. Means for executing profit-giving processing in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a usage target among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage (processing of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) Function to execute)
When the supply of operating power is started, the settable condition (set value) in which the set value to be used can be changed based on the fact that the specific related operation including the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is performed. A situation generating means (a function for making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment), and a step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. Function to make an affirmative decision)
An operation specifying means (a function for executing the process of step SB910 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated;
Selection target changing means for changing the setting value to be selected based on the fact that the operation specifying means specifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated in the setting possible state (step SB914 in the main CPU 63). Function that executes the processing of
Equipped with
When the termination trigger occurs in the setting possible situation, the setting value that is the selection target is the setting value that is the usage target,
In the gaming machine, the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means when the supply of the operating power for generating the settable situation is started triggers the change of the setting value to be selected in the settable situation. Means to prevent it from being treated as an operation (function to execute the process of step SB901 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, function to execute the process of step SC114 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the characteristic αE5, since the setting value to be used is set from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player, the player is allowed to use the more advantageous setting value. Will be expected. Further, in order to generate a settable situation in which the set value to be used can be changed, it is necessary to turn on the power supply in a state where a specific related operation including an operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult to illegally change the setting value to be used. In addition, since the setting value to be selected is changed based on the operation of the predetermined corresponding operating means operated to generate the settable condition, the number of operating means necessary to change the setting value is set. It becomes possible to suppress.

In this case, the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means when the supply of the operating power for generating the settable status is started is treated as the operation that triggers the change of the setting value to be selected in the settable status. Not to be. As a result, when the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means for causing the settable situation continues even after the start of the settable situation, the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means causes a change in the setting value to be selected. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features αE1 to αE5, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic αC group, the characteristic αD group, and the characteristic αE group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to make the configuration relating to the set value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αF group>
Features αF1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, general figure display section 38a),
Display data setting means (function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273);
A specific display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Initializing means for initializing a predetermined storage area (clearing target area 371 in the 55th embodiment) based on the start of supply of operating power (second RAM clear of main CPU 63 in the 55th embodiment) Function to execute processing),
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the display storage area is not initialized by the initialization means.

According to the feature αF1, it is possible to start the game in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized by initializing the predetermined storage area based on the start of the supply of the operating power. It will be possible. In this case, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized, the display storage area in which the display data for causing the specific display means to display is set is not initialized by the initialization means. With this, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initializing means or not, is the operating power. It is possible to display the contents before the supply of the is stopped. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it cannot be specified whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible.

Features αF2. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player in a setting possible situation generated based on the start of supply of operating power (55th). The function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
The initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means or after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine described in the feature αF1.

According to the characteristic αF2, a predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed when the supply of the operating power is started, or when the setting value is newly set. As a result, when a new setting value to be used is set, it is possible to start the game in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, even if a predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means in association with the new setting of the setting value to be used, the display data for causing the specific display means to display is set. The display storage area is not initialized by the initialization means. As a result, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started is changed when the setting value to be used is newly set and the setting value to be used is newly set. In either case, the display content before the supply of the operating power is stopped can be performed. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed. Is possible.

Features αF3. When the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 does not occur, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1"). In the case where a “RAM clear operation” is performed in a situation), another initialization unit that initializes the predetermined storage area even when the setting value to be used is not set by the setting unit ( A function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the 55th embodiment),
The gaming machine according to feature αF2, wherein the display storage area is not initialized by the different initialization means.

According to the characteristic αF3, even when the setting value to be used is not newly set when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is started, the predetermined storage area is set. Is initialized, it is possible to start the game in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized even in a situation where a new setting value to be used is not set. In this case, the display data for causing the specific display means to display is set regardless of whether the setting value to be used is newly set or the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. The display storage area is not initialized. With this, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started is initialized to a predetermined value when a new setting value is set, when a new setting value is not set. Regardless of whether the condition is satisfied or the predetermined initialization condition is not satisfied, the display content before the supply of the operating power is stopped can be performed. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, whether a new setting value is set and whether a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. It becomes possible not to specify.

Features αF4. It is characterized in that it is provided with means (power supply/firing control device 78) for supplying backup power to the display storage area and the predetermined storage area in a situation where operating power is not supplied to the specific display control means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αF1 to αF3.

According to the characteristic αF4, even if the display storage area and the predetermined storage area have a configuration in which the operating power needs to be supplied for storing and holding information, in the situation where the specific display control means is not supplied with the operating power. Since backup power is supplied to the display storage area and the predetermined storage area, information should be stored and retained in the display storage area and the predetermined storage area even when operating power is not supplied to the specific display means. Is possible.

Features αF5. It is determined whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and when the privilege is given to the player, the privilege giving information (information of "1" set in the flag corresponding to the kind of the big hit result) is given as above. An assignment determining unit (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the privilege granting information stored in the predetermined storage area (a function of executing the processes of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63). )When,
Equipped with
The display data setting means stores the display data (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the result determined by the grant determining means when the display timing of the determination result comes, in the display storage area. Set to
The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that the display corresponding to the result-corresponding display data stored in the display storage area is performed, thereby responding to the determination result of the assignment determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF4, characterized in that the display is performed by the specific display means.

According to the characteristic αF5, the player pays attention to the specific display means by performing the display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give the privilege to the player on the specific display means. In this case, since the configuration described in the above characteristic αF1 is provided, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of the operating power is started, the display is performed on the specific display means. The display storage area in which the display data for displaying is set is not initialized by the initialization means. With this, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initializing means or not, is the operating power. It is possible to display the contents before the supply of the is stopped. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it cannot be specified whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible.

Features αF6. Even when the privilege giving information is erased from the predetermined storage area by the initialization means initializing the predetermined storage area, the display storage area is not initialized by the initialization means. The gaming machine according to feature αF5.

According to the characteristic αF6, when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operation power is started, the privilege giving information is erased from the predetermined storage area, so that the supply of the operation power is stopped. Even if the privilege giving information is stored in a predetermined storage area before the game is started, it is possible to start the game in a state where the privilege giving information is erased when the supply of the operating power is restarted. In this case, even when the privilege granting information is deleted from the predetermined storage area in this way, the display storage area in which the display data for causing the specific display means to display is set is initialized by the initialization means. Not be converted. Thereby, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible to prioritize things.

Features αF7. As the specific display unit, a first specific display unit (special figure display unit 37a) and a second specific display unit (general figure display unit 38a) are provided,
The display storage area includes a first display storage area (first display data buffer 271) and a second display storage area (third display data buffer 273).
The display data setting means,
First display data setting means for setting display data in the first display storage area (function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 with respect to the special figure display unit 37a);
Second display data setting means for setting display data in the second display storage area (a function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 with respect to the general figure display portion 38a);
Equipped with
The specific display control means,
First specific display control means for controlling the display of the first specific display means such that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the first display storage area is performed (step in the main CPU 63 regarding the special figure display portion 37a). SC412 to the function of executing the processing of step SC414),
Second specific display control means for controlling the display of the second specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the second display storage area is performed (steps in the main CPU 63 regarding the general figure display portion 38a). SC412 to the function of executing the processing of step SC414),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF6, wherein the first display storage area and the second display storage area are not initialized by the initialization unit.

According to the characteristic αF7, the display contents when the supply of the operating power is started for both the first specific display means and the second specific display means are displayed when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means, and It is possible to set the display content before the supply of the operating power is stopped in any case where the initialization is not performed. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of either the first specific display means or the second specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, the initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area. It becomes possible not to specify whether or not it was broken.

Features αF8. The processing for starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, and the processing for initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization unit is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. The configuration included in the processing of
Any of the characteristics αF1 to αF7, wherein the specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed when the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature αF8, whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is provided at a timing after the processing at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It is possible to start the display at.

Features αF9. Based on the fact that the supply of operating power has been started, it is possible to set a setting value in which a setting value to be used can be set from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the advantage of the player. Situation generating means (function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 55th embodiment),
The initialization means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting possible situation occurs or after the setting possible situation occurs,
The gaming machine according to feature αF8, wherein the settable situation occurs in a situation where a process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

According to the characteristic αF9, the display on the specific display means is started at the timing after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is finished, regardless of whether the setting possible situation occurs or not. It becomes possible to do.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features αF1 to αF9. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αG group>
Features αG1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, general figure display section 38a),
Display data setting means (function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273);
A specific display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
An initialization unit (mainly in the 56th embodiment) for initializing a predetermined storage area including the display storage area (clear target area 371 in the 56th embodiment) based on the start of supply of operating power. Function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the side CPU 63),
Equipped with
The display data setting means is configured such that when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of the operating power is started and when the supply of the operating power is started by the initialization means. Correspondence setting means for setting the specific correspondence display data for causing the specific display means to perform the specific correspondence display in the display storage area in any case where the predetermined storage area is not initialized (step SC502 in the main CPU 63). , A function of executing the processing of step SC503, step SC507 and step SC510).

According to the characteristic αG1, it is possible to start the game in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized by initializing the predetermined storage area based on the start of the supply of the operating power. It will be possible. In this case, the specific display means performs the specific correspondence display both when the supply of the operating power is started and when the predetermined storage area is initialized and when it is not initialized. With this, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is impossible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible to do.

Features αG2. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation generated based on the start of supply of operating power (56th The function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
The initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting means or after the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature αG1.

According to the characteristic αG2, when the setting value of the use target is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or when the predetermined value is accompanyingly initialized when the set value of the use target is set, the use target is set. When a new setting of the set value is performed, it becomes possible to start the game in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, the specific display means performs the specific correspondence display both when the predetermined storage area is initialized and when it is not initialized accompanying the new setting of the setting value to be used. With this, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed. Is possible.

Features αG3. When the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 does not occur, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1"). In the case where a “RAM clear operation” is performed in a situation), another initialization unit that initializes the predetermined storage area even when the setting value to be used is not set by the setting unit ( A function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the 56th embodiment),
The correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area even when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine described in Characteristic αG2.

According to the characteristic αG3, the predetermined storage area is initialized even when the setting value is not set when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is started. Even if the setting value is not newly set, it is possible to start the game with the predetermined storage area initialized. In this case, when a new setting value is set, when a new setting value is not set, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined initialization condition is not satisfied. In either case, the specific display is performed by the specific display means. Thereby, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, whether or not a new setting of the set value is performed and whether a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. It becomes possible not to specify whether or not.

Features αG4. The correspondence setting means is capable of supplying operating power in a predetermined regulation situation (during game times, opening/closing execution mode, variable display times on the universal display section 38a, and normal power open state). If the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means when the supply of the operating power is started after the stop, the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αG1 to αG3.

According to the characteristic αG4, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the predetermined regulation situation and the supply of the operating power is started after that, the display storage area is not initialized. Since the specific correspondence display data is not set in, the display data when the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored and held in the display storage area as it is. With this, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the predetermined regulation situation, and when the supply of the operating power is subsequently started and the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the supply of the operating power is stopped. The display of the specific display means can be started from the display content of the specific display means when the display is stopped.

Features αG5. It is determined whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and when the privilege is given to the player, the privilege giving information (information of "1" set in the flag corresponding to the kind of the big hit result) is given as above. An assignment determining unit (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the privilege granting information stored in the predetermined storage area (a function of executing the processes of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63). )When,
Equipped with
The display data setting means stores the display data (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the result determined by the grant determining means when the display timing of the determination result comes, in the display storage area. Set to
The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that the display corresponding to the result-corresponding display data stored in the display storage area is performed, thereby responding to the determination result of the assignment determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αG1 to αG4, characterized in that the display is performed by the specific display means.

According to the characteristic αG5, the player pays attention to the specific display means by performing the display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give the privilege to the player on the specific display means. In this case, since the configuration described in the above characteristic αG1 is provided, both when the predetermined storage area is initialized and when it is not initialized when the supply of the operating power is started. The specific display is performed by the specific display means. With this, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is impossible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible to do.

Features αG6. The specific display control means is for controlling the display of the specific display means such that a display corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination means is performed after the variable display of the pattern is started,
The correspondence setting means is initialized when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being displayed on the specific display means and then the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αG5, wherein the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area when the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the means.

According to the characteristic αG6, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed by the specific display means and the supply of the operating power is started after that, the predetermined storage area is obtained. Since the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area when is not initialized, the display data when the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored and held as it is in the display storage area. As a result, the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed by the specific display means and the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. If not, the variable display of the pattern on the specific display means can be restarted.

Features αG7. When the privilege grant information is stored in the predetermined storage area, the privilege granting unit grants the privilege after the display corresponding to the privilege granting is displayed on the specific display unit. Is something
The correspondence setting unit is configured to perform the initialization by the initialization unit when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the privilege is provided by the privilege providing unit and the supply of the operating power is subsequently started. The gaming machine according to feature αG5 or αG6, wherein the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage region if a predetermined storage region is not initialized.

According to the characteristic αG7, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the privilege is granted and the supply of the operating power is started after that, the predetermined storage area is not initialized. Since the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area, the display data when the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored and held as it is in the display storage area. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the privilege is granted, and when the supply of the operating power is started after that, the predetermined storage area is not initialized, It becomes possible to start the display of the specific display means from the display content corresponding to the situation in which is added.

Features αG8. The specific display control means, when the specific display is performed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, the specific display is performed after the specific display data is set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αG1 to αG7, characterized in that display of means is started.

According to the feature αG8, the display content when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed when the supply of the operating power is started is prevented from being performed by the specific display means. It becomes possible.

Features αG9. The processing for starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, and the processing for initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization unit is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. The configuration included in the processing of
The characteristic display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic αG9, whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is performed at a timing after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It is possible to start the display at.

Features αG10. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation generated based on the start of supply of operating power (56th The function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
A configuration in which the initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting unit And
The gaming machine according to feature αG9, wherein the setting of the setting value of the use target by the setting unit occurs in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

According to the characteristic αG10, in the case where the setting value to be used is newly set or not, in the specific display means at the timing after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It is possible to start the display.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features αG1 to αG10, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αH group>
Features αH1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, general figure display section 38a),
Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (in the case of the 55th to 57th embodiments, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S8915). Function for executing the process of step SC717 in the main CPU 63 in the 58th to 60th embodiments).
A specific display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Setting means (55th to 55th) for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the advantage of the player in a setting possible situation that occurs when the supply of operating power is started. A function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 60th embodiment),
Equipped with
The display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started is that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means when the supply of the operation power is started, and the operation power When the supply of the game is started, the display contents are such that it is impossible to distinguish that the predetermined value in which the setting value to be used has not been set by the setting means.

According to the characteristic αH1, the setting value to be used is set in the settable situation generated based on the start of the supply of the operating power, so that the setting value to be used is set. Requires that the supply of operating power be newly started, and even if the setting value to be used is illegally set, it becomes difficult to do so. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started indicates that the set value to be used is set when the supply of the operating power is started, and the supply of the operating power is performed. When is started, the display content is such that it is impossible to distinguish that it is a predetermined situation in which the setting value to be used is not set. Thereby, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the setting value to be used has been set. It will be possible.

Features αH2. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, general figure display section 38a),
Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (in the 56th to 57th embodiments, main CPU 63 executes step S8915). Function for executing the process of step SC717 in the main CPU 63 in the 58th to 60th embodiments).
A specific display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Setting means for setting a setting value to be used among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the advantage of the player in a setting possible situation generated based on the start of supply of operating power (56th to 56th). A function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 60th embodiment),
Equipped with
The display data setting means is configured by the setting means when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means when the supply of the operating power is started and when the supply of the operating power is started. Correspondence setting means for setting the specific correspondence display data for causing the specific display means to perform the specific correspondence display in the display storage area in any case where the setting value to be used is not set. (A function for executing the processing of steps SC502, SC503, SC507, and SC510 in the main CPU 63 in the 56th embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps SC602 and SC603 in the main CPU 63 in the 57th embodiment. , A function of executing the processing of steps SC802 to SC805 in the main CPU 63 in the 58th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps SC902 to SC905 in the main CPU 63 in the 59th embodiment, the 60th embodiment Then, a gaming machine having a function of executing steps SD102 to SD105, step SD109, step SD110, step SD113, and step SD114 in the main CPU 63).

According to the characteristic αH2, the setting value to be used is set in the settable situation generated based on the start of the supply of the operating power, so that the setting value to be used is set. Requires that the supply of operating power be newly started, and even if the setting value to be used is illegally set, it becomes difficult to do so. In this case, the setting value to be used is not set when the setting value to be used is set when the supply of the operating power is started and the setting value to be used is not set when the supply of the operating power is started. In any of the predetermined situations, the specific display is displayed by the specific display means. Thereby, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the setting value to be used has been set. It will be possible.

Features αH3. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when supply of operating power is started (information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 does not occur, and "1" is not set in the setting update display flag and the game stop flag. When a "RAM clear operation" is performed in a situation), another initialization means for initializing the predetermined storage area (function of executing the first RAM clear processing of the main CPU 63 in the 56th to 60th embodiments). Equipped with
The correspondence setting means uses the setting means when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when the supply of the operating power is started and when the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αH2, wherein the specific correspondence display data is set in the display storage area in any case where a target setting value is set.

According to the characteristic αH3, when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is started, the predetermined storage area is initialized, so the game is performed in the situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized. Can be started. In this case, both when the setting value to be used is set and when the predetermined storage area is initialized, the specific display is displayed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started. Is done. As a result, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, either the new setting of the set value to be used or the initialization of the predetermined storage area is performed. It becomes possible to make it impossible to distinguish whether it was broken.

Features αH4. Initializing means for initializing the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the use target is set by the setting means or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting means (56th- The game machine according to feature αH2 or αH3, which is provided with a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the sixtyth embodiment.

According to the characteristic αH4, when the setting value of the use target is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or when the predetermined value is accompanyingly initialized when the set value of the use target is set, the use target is set. When a new setting of the set value is performed, it becomes possible to start the game in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, the setting value to be used is not set when the setting value to be used is set when the supply of the operating power is started and the setting value to be used is not set when the supply of the operating power is started. In any of the predetermined situations, the specific display is displayed by the specific display means. Thereby, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the setting value to be used has been set. It will be possible.

Features αH5. It is determined whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and when the privilege is given to the player, the privilege giving information (information of "1" set in the flag corresponding to the kind of the big hit result) is given as above. An assignment determining unit (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the privilege granting information stored in the predetermined storage area (a function of executing the processes of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63). )When,
Equipped with
The display data setting means stores the display data (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the result determined by the grant determining means when the display timing of the determination result comes, in the display storage area. Set to
The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that the display corresponding to the result-corresponding display data stored in the display storage area is performed, thereby responding to the determination result of the assignment determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αH2 to αH4, characterized in that the display is performed by the specific display means.

According to the characteristic αH5, the player pays attention to the specific display means by performing the display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give the privilege to the player on the specific display means. In this case, since the configuration described in the above characteristic αH1 is provided, when the setting value to be used is set when the supply of the operating power is started, and the supply of the operating power is started. In any of the predetermined situations where the setting value to be used is not set, the specific display is displayed by the specific display means. Thereby, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the setting value to be used has been set. It will be possible.

Features αH6. The gaming machine according to feature αH5, wherein the specific correspondence display data is display data used as display data corresponding to the result.

According to the characteristic αH6, the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started by using the display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result of the grant determination means. .. As a result, while suppressing the increase in the capacity of the display data, the setting value to be used is set even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started. It becomes possible not to specify whether or not it has occurred.

Features αH7. Among the display data corresponding to the result, the specific correspondence display data is display data used when the grant determining means determines not to grant the privilege to the player. The game machine described.

When the game hall is closed, it is usual that the power supply of the gaming machine is shut off in a situation where the display content corresponding to the decision not to give the privilege to the player has been displayed by the specific display means by the grant determination means. .. In this case, according to the feature αH7, the setting value to be used is set when the setting value to be used is set when the supply of the operating power is started and the setting value to be used when the supply of the operating power is started. In any of the predetermined situations where the setting is not performed, the display content of the specific display means is the display content corresponding to the determination of not granting the privilege to the player by the grant determination means. Thereby, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of the operation power was stopped. With this, it becomes possible for the player to recognize, and it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the setting value to be used has been set.

Features αH8. There are multiple types of the specific correspondence display data,
The correspondence setting means sets, in the display storage area, the specific correspondence display data to be used from a plurality of types of specific correspondence display data. Game machine.

According to the characteristic αH8, it is possible to diversify the display content of the specific correspondence display of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started.

Features αH9. The specific display control means, when the specific display is performed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, the specific display is performed after the specific display data is set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αH2 to αH8, characterized in that display of means is started.

According to the characteristic αH9, the display content when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed when the supply of the operating power is started is prevented from being performed by the specific display means. It becomes possible.

Features αH10. The setting means sets the setting value to be used in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed,
The characteristic display control unit starts the display of the specific display unit after the process at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic αH10, the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is performed regardless of whether the setting value to be used is set or the setting value to be used is not set. It is possible to start the specific correspondence display on the specific display means at a timing after the end.

Features αH11. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when supply of operating power is started (information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 does not occur, and "1" is not set in the setting update display flag and the game stop flag. In the case where a "RAM clear operation" is performed), another initialization unit (56th to 56th units) that initializes the predetermined storage area even when the setting value is not set by the setting unit. 60, a function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment of the present invention,
The separate initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed,
The correspondence setting means sets the setting by the setting means when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when the supply of the operating power is started and when the supply of the operating power is started. In any case where a value is set, the specific correspondence display data is set in the display storage area,
In the characteristic αH9 or αH10, the specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic αH11, when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is started, the predetermined storage area is initialized, so that the setting value of the use target is newly set. Even if there is no such situation, it is possible to start the game in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, both when the setting value to be used is set and when the predetermined storage area is initialized, the specific display is displayed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started. Is done. As a result, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, either the new setting of the set value to be used or the initialization of the predetermined storage area is performed. It becomes possible to make it impossible to distinguish whether it was broken. Further, regardless of whether the setting value to be used is set or the predetermined storage area is initialized, the specific display means is provided at a timing after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It is possible to start the specific correspondence display in.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features αH1 to αH11. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αI group>
Features αI1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, general figure display section 38a),
It is determined whether or not to give a bonus to the player, and when the bonus is given to the player, the bonus giving information (the information of "1" set in the flag corresponding to the kind of the jackpot result) is stored in a predetermined memory. An assignment determination unit (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the process of step S508) to be stored in the area (the clear target area 371 in the 57th to 60th embodiments);
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the privilege granting information stored in the predetermined storage area (a function of executing the processes of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63). )When,
When the display timing of the determination result comes, the display data corresponding to the result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means (the display data selected in step S507 or step S509) is displayed in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, The display data setting means set in the third display data buffer 273 (a function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 in the 57th embodiment, and the main CPU 63 in the 58th to 60th embodiments). Function for executing the processing of step SC717 in step 1),
By controlling the display of the specific display means so that the display corresponding to the result-corresponding display data stored in the display storage area is performed, the display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is the specific display means. Specific display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63),
Initialization means (57th to 57th) for initializing a predetermined storage area (clearing target area 371 in the 57th to 60th embodiments) including the display storage area based on the start of supply of operating power. 60) the function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment,
Equipped with
The display data setting means stores the specific correspondence display data used as the display data corresponding to the result when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of the operating power is started. Corresponding setting means for setting in the display storage area (in the 57th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SC602 and step SC603 in the main CPU 63, in the 58th embodiment, the processing of step SC802 to step SC805 in the main CPU 63 Function to be executed, function to execute step SC902 to step SC905 in the main CPU 63 in the 59th embodiment, step SD102 to step SD105, step SD109, step SD110, step SD113 in the main CPU 63 in the 60th embodiment. And a function of executing the processing of step SD114).

According to the feature αI1, the player pays attention to the specific display means by performing the display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give the privilege to the player on the specific display means. Further, it is possible to start the game in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized by initializing the predetermined storage area based on the start of the supply of the operating power. In this case, when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, the display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result of the assignment determination means is set in the display storage area. To be done. With this, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is displayed when notifying the determination result of the assignment determination means. It becomes the content. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to prevent whether or not the initialization of the predetermined storage area is performed. Become.

Features αI2. Setting means (57th to 57th) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable situation that occurs when the supply of operating power is started. A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 60th embodiment),
The initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting means or after the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting means. The gaming machine described in the feature αI1.

According to the characteristic αI2, when the setting value of the usage target is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or when the predetermined value is accompanyingly initialized when the setting value of the usage target is set, the usage target is set. When a new setting of the set value is performed, it becomes possible to start the game in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, when the predetermined storage area is initialized in association with the new setting of the setting value to be used, the display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result of the grant determination means is displayed and stored. Set to the area. With this, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is displayed when notifying the determination result of the assignment determination means. It becomes the content. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it may not be possible to specify whether or not a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed. It will be possible.

Features αI3. When the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 does not occur and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1"). In the case where the “RAM clear operation” is performed under the circumstances), another initialization unit (first unit) that initializes the predetermined storage area even when the setting value of the use target is not set by the setting unit 57 to 60th embodiment, a function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63),
The correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area even when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when the supply of operating power is started. Characteristic feature The gaming machine described in αI2.

According to the characteristic αI3, the predetermined storage area is initialized even when the setting value to be used is not set when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is started. Therefore, it is possible to start the game in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized even in a situation where a new setting value of the use target is not set. In this case, regardless of whether the setting value to be used is newly set or the predetermined storage area is initialized by satisfying the predetermined initialization condition, Display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result is set in the display storage area. As a result, the display of the specific display unit is displayed regardless of whether the new setting value of the use target is newly set or the predetermined storage area is initialized by the establishment of the predetermined initialization condition. The content is the display content displayed when notifying the determination result of the grant determination means. Therefore, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, whether or not a new setting of the set value to be used is performed and a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. It becomes possible not to specify whether or not it has been done.

Features αI4. Among the display data corresponding to the result, the specific correspondence display data is display data used when the grant determining unit determines not to grant the privilege to the player. The gaming machine described in any one of αI3.

When the game hall is closed, it is usual that the power supply of the gaming machine is shut off in a situation where the display content corresponding to the decision not to give the privilege to the player has been displayed by the specific display means by the grant determination means. .. In this case, according to the characteristic αI4, when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means does not give the privilege to the player in the addition determination means. The display content corresponds to the determined one. Thereby, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of the operation power was stopped. With this, it becomes possible for the player to recognize, and it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the initialization of a predetermined storage area has been performed.

Features αI5. There are multiple types of the specific correspondence display data,
The correspondence setting unit sets the specific correspondence display data to be used from a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area, according to any one of features αI1 to αI4. Game machine.

According to the characteristic αI5, it is possible to diversify the display content of the specific correspondence display of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started.

Features αI6. The specific display control means, when the specific display is performed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, the specific display is performed after the specific display data is set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αI1 to αI5, characterized in that display of means is started.

According to the characteristic αI6, the display contents when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the supply of the operating power is stopped before the display of the specific correspondence is prevented from being performed by the specific display means. It becomes possible.

Features αI7. The processing for starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, and the processing for initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization unit is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. The configuration included in the processing of
The characteristic display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic αI7, whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is provided at a timing after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It is possible to start the display at.

Feature αI8. Setting means (57th to 57th) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable situation that occurs when the supply of operating power is started. A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 60th embodiment),
A configuration in which the initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting unit And
The gaming machine according to feature αI7, wherein the setting of the set value of the use target by the setting unit occurs in a situation where a process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

According to the characteristic αI8, in the case where the setting value to be used is newly set or not set, in the specific display means at the timing after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It is possible to start the display.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features αI1 to αI8. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αJ group>
Features αJ1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, general figure display section 38a),
Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (in the 58th to 60th embodiments, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SC717). Function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 in the 61st embodiment).
A specific display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Initialization means (58th to 58th) for initializing a predetermined storage area (clearing target area 371 in the 58th to 61st embodiments) including the display storage area based on the start of supply of operating power. 61) a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment of the present invention,
Correspondence setting means for changing the display content of the specific display means to the specific correspondence display when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started (58th In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SC802 to SC805 in the main CPU 63, in the 59th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps SC902 to SC905 in the main CPU 63, and in the 60th embodiment, the main CPU 63. Function of executing the processing of steps SD102 to SD105, step SD109, step SD110, step SD113, and step SD114 in step 61, and a function of executing the processing of steps SD202 to SD217 in the main CPU 63 in the sixty-first embodiment).
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that there are a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display.

According to the feature αJ1, it is possible to start the game in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized by initializing the predetermined storage area based on the start of the supply of the operating power. It will be possible. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started becomes the specific correspondence display. There are a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display. As a result, the display contents of the specific display means are diversified when the predetermined storage area is initialized. Therefore, even if the display content of the specific display means is confirmed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to make it difficult to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Features αJ2. The correspondence setting means causes the specific display means to perform the specific correspondence display when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of the operating power is started. Data is set in the display storage area,
The gaming machine according to feature αJ1, wherein there are a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data.

According to the feature αJ2, when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, one of the plurality of types of specific correspondence display data is stored in the display storage area. By setting, the specific display is displayed by the specific display means. With this, it is possible to cause the specific display means to perform the specific correspondence display only by selecting one type of the specific correspondence display data from a plurality of predetermined types of the specific correspondence display data and setting it in the display storage area. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for causing the specific display means to perform one type of specific correspondence display among a plurality of types of specific correspondence displays.

Features αJ3. It is determined whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and when the privilege is given to the player, the privilege giving information (information of "1" set in the flag corresponding to the kind of the big hit result) is given as above. An assignment determining unit (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the privilege granting information stored in the predetermined storage area (a function of executing the processes of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63). )When,
Equipped with
The display data setting means stores the display data (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the result determined by the grant determining means when the display timing of the determination result comes, in the display storage area. Set to
The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that the display corresponding to the result-corresponding display data stored in the display storage area is performed, thereby responding to the determination result of the assignment determination means. The display is performed by the specific display means,
The gaming machine according to feature αJ2, wherein the specific correspondence display data is display data used as the result correspondence display data.

According to the feature αJ3, since the display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give the privilege to the player is performed by the specific display means, the player pays attention to the specific display means. In this case, when the supply of the operating power is started by using the display data corresponding to the result used for notifying the determination result of the grant determination means, the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means. As a result, whether or not the predetermined storage area is initialized even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started while suppressing the increase in the capacity of the display data. It is possible to make it difficult to specify whether or not.

Features αJ4. Among the display data corresponding to the result, the specific correspondence display data is display data used when the grant determination means determines not to grant the privilege to the player. The game machine described.

When the game hall is closed, it is usual that the power supply of the gaming machine is shut off in a situation where the display content corresponding to the decision not to give the privilege to the player has been displayed by the specific display means by the grant determination means. .. In this case, according to the characteristic αJ4, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means does not give the privilege to the player in the addition determination means. The displayed content corresponds to the determination made. Thereby, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of the operation power was stopped. With this, it becomes possible for the player to recognize, and it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not a predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Features αJ5. Among the display data corresponding to the result, the specific correspondence display data is display data used when the grant determination means determines not to grant the privilege to the player, and the display data corresponding to the player in the grant determination means. The gaming machine according to feature αJ3, which includes both display data used when it is determined to grant the privilege.

According to the feature αJ5, in the display and the grant determination means when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is started, the grant determination means determines that the privilege is not granted to the player Any of the displays in the case where it is determined to give a privilege to the player is performed by the specific display means as the specific correspondence display. Thereby, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operation power is started, the display content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of the operation power was stopped. With this, it becomes possible for the player to recognize, and it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not a predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Features αJ6. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from setting values of a plurality of levels corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation generated based on the start of supply of operating power (58th to A function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 61st embodiment),
The initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting means or after the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αJ1 to αJ5.

According to the characteristic αJ6, when the setting value of the usage target is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or when the predetermined value is accompanyingly initialized when the setting value of the usage target is set, the usage target is set. When a new setting of the set value is performed, it becomes possible to start the game in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, when the predetermined storage area is initialized in association with the new setting of the setting value to be used, one of the plurality of types of specific correspondence display is displayed by the specific display means. Done. As a result, the display contents of the specific display means are diversified when the setting value of the use target is newly set, and the player displays the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started. Even if the contents are confirmed, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed.

Features αJ7. When the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 does not occur, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1"). In the case where the "RAM clear operation" is performed under the circumstances), another initialization unit (58th to 58th units) that initializes the predetermined storage area even when the setting value is not set by the setting unit. 61) a function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment of FIG.
The correspondence setting means uses the setting means when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when the supply of the operating power is started and when the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αJ6, characterized in that the display content of the specific display means is set to a specific correspondence display when the target setting value is set.

According to the characteristic αJ7, the predetermined storage area is initialized even when the setting value is not set when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is started. Even if the setting value is not newly set, it is possible to start the game with the predetermined storage area initialized. In this case, the specific display means displays the specific correspondence whether the new setting value is set or the predetermined storage condition is initialized by the predetermined initialization condition. Done. Thereby, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, whether or not a new setting of the set value is performed and whether a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. It becomes possible not to specify whether or not.

Features αJ8. The correspondence setting means sets the display content of the specific display means to the specific correspondence display even when the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means when the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αJ1 to αJ7.

According to the feature αJ8, the specific display means performs the specific correspondence display both when the predetermined storage area is initialized and when it is not initialized when the supply of the operating power is started. With this, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, it is impossible to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible to do.

Features αJ9. The correspondence setting means is capable of supplying operating power in a predetermined regulation situation (during game times, opening/closing execution mode, variable display times on the universal display section 38a, and normal power open state). Specific correspondence display data for performing the specific correspondence display when the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means when the supply of the operating power is started after that The game machine according to feature αJ8, wherein is not set in the display storage area.

According to the characteristic αJ9, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the predetermined regulation situation and the supply of the operating power is started after that, the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the display storage area Since the specific correspondence display data is not set in, the display data when the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored and held in the display storage area as it is. With this, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the predetermined regulation situation, and when the supply of the operating power is subsequently started and the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the supply of the operating power is stopped. The display of the specific display means can be started from the display content of the specific display means when the display is stopped.

Features αJ10. The specific display control means is for controlling the display of the specific display means such that a display corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination means is performed after the variable display of the pattern is started,
The correspondence setting means is initialized when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being displayed on the specific display means and then the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to the feature αJ8 or αJ9, wherein specific correspondence display data for performing the specific correspondence display is not set in the display storage region when the predetermined storage region is not initialized by the means. ..

According to the characteristic αJ10, the predetermined storage area is obtained when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed by the specific display means and the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. Since the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area when is not initialized, the display data when the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored and held as it is in the display storage area. As a result, the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed by the specific display means and the supply of the operating power is started thereafter. If not, the variable display of the pattern on the specific display means can be restarted.

Features αJ11. When the privilege grant information is stored in the predetermined storage area, the privilege granting unit grants the privilege after the display corresponding to the privilege granting is displayed on the specific display unit. Is something
The correspondence setting unit is configured to perform the initialization by the initialization unit when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a situation where the privilege is provided by the privilege providing unit and the supply of the operating power is subsequently started. The game according to any one of the features αJ8 to αJ10, wherein specific correspondence display data for performing the specific correspondence display is not set in the display storage region when a predetermined storage area is not initialized. Machine.

According to the feature αJ11, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the privilege is given and the supply of the operating power is started after that, the predetermined storage area is not initialized. Since the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area, the display data when the supply of the operating power is stopped is stored and held as it is in the display storage area. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in the situation where the privilege is granted, and when the supply of the operating power is started after that, the predetermined storage area is not initialized, It becomes possible to start the display of the specific display means from the display content corresponding to the situation in which is added.

Features αJ12. The specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means in the state in which the specific correspondence display is performed when the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αJ1 to αJ11.

According to the feature αJ12, the display content when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the specific correspondence display is performed when the supply of the operating power is started is prevented from being performed by the specific display means. It becomes possible.

Features αJ13. The processing for starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, and the processing for initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization unit is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. The configuration included in the processing of
A characteristic αJ12 characterized in that the specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Amusement machine.

According to the feature αJ13, whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is provided at a timing after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It is possible to start the display at.

Features αJ14. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from setting values of a plurality of levels corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation generated based on the start of supply of operating power (58th to A function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 61st embodiment),
A configuration in which the initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting unit And
The gaming machine according to feature αJ13, wherein the setting of the setting value of the use target by the setting unit occurs in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

According to the feature αJ14, in the case where the setting value to be used is newly set and the case where the setting value is not set, the specific display means is set at the timing after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It is possible to start the display.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features αJ1 to αJ14, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H1. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αK group>
Features αK1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, general figure display section 38a),
It is determined whether or not to give a bonus to the player, and when the bonus is given to the player, the bonus giving information (the information of "1" set in the flag corresponding to the kind of the jackpot result) is stored in a predetermined memory. An assignment determination unit (a function of the main CPU 63 that executes the process of step S508) to be stored in the area (the clear target area 371 in the 61st embodiment);
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the privilege granting information stored in the predetermined storage area (a function of executing the processes of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63). )When,
When the display timing of the determination result is reached, the display data corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination means (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) is stored in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, Display data setting means (function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) set in the third display data buffer 273);
By controlling the display of the specific display means so that the display corresponding to the result-corresponding display data stored in the display storage area is performed, the display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is the specific display means. Specific display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63),
Initialization means (mainly in the 61st embodiment) for initializing a predetermined storage area including the display storage area (clear target area 371 in the 61st embodiment) based on the start of supply of operating power. Function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the side CPU 63),
Correspondence setting means (main CPU 63) for setting the display content of the specific display means to be the specific correspondence display when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of the operating power is started. Function for executing the processing of steps SD202 to SD217) in
Equipped with
There are multiple types of specific correspondence display,
A game machine characterized in that the plurality of types of the specific correspondence display include display contents that are not selected as a display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means.

According to the characteristic αK1, it is possible to start the game in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized by initializing the predetermined storage area based on the start of the supply of the operating power. It will be possible. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started becomes the specific correspondence display. There are a plurality of types of the specific correspondence display, and the plurality of types of specific correspondence displays include display contents that are not selected as the display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. As a result, the display contents of the specific display means are diversified when the predetermined storage area is initialized. Therefore, even if the display content of the specific display means is confirmed when the supply of the operating power is started, it is possible to make it difficult to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Features αK2. The plurality of types of the specific correspondence display include display content that can be selected as a display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means, and display content that is not selected as a display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The gaming machine described in the feature αK1.

According to the characteristic αK2, since the plurality of types of specific correspondence displays include both the display contents that can be selected and the display contents that are not selected as the display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination unit, the predetermined storage area is initially set. It is possible to diversify the display contents of the specific display means in the case of being liquefied.

Features αK3. The specific display means has a plurality of light emitting units,
The correspondence setting means executes a lottery process (step SD204, step SD212) as to whether or not to individually turn on each of the plurality of light emitting units, and a result of the lottery process for each of the plurality of light emitting units. The gaming machine according to the feature αK1 or αK2, wherein the display data of the lighting pattern corresponding to is set in the display storage area so that the specific correspondence display is performed.

According to the feature αK3, the lottery process for determining whether or not each of the plurality of light emitting units in the specific display means is turned on is executed, and the display content of the lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process is stored in the predetermined storage area. Is displayed on the specific display means as a specific correspondence display when the is initialized. This makes it possible to diversify the display contents of the specific display means when the predetermined storage area is initialized, and to prevent the display contents of the specific display means when the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible to be regular.

Features αK4. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from a plurality of setting values corresponding to the advantage of the player in a setting possible situation that occurs when the supply of operating power is started (61st setting) The function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
The initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting means or after the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αK1 to αK3.

According to the feature αK4, when the setting value of the usage target is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or when the predetermined value is accompanyingly initialized when the setting value of the usage target is set, the usage target is set. When a new setting of the set value is performed, it becomes possible to start the game in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, when the predetermined storage area is initialized in association with the new setting of the setting value to be used, one of the plurality of types of specific correspondence display is displayed by the specific display means. Done. As a result, the display contents of the specific display means are diversified when the setting value of the use target is newly set, and the player displays the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started. Even if the contents are confirmed, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed.

Features αK5. When the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is started (the information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 does not occur, and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1"). In the case where the “RAM clear operation” is performed under the circumstances), another initialization unit (first unit) that initializes the predetermined storage area even when the setting value of the use target is not set by the setting unit 61, a function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment of FIG.
The correspondence setting means uses the setting means when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when the supply of the operating power is started and when the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αK4, wherein the display content of the specific display means is set to a specific correspondence display in any case where the target setting value is set.

According to the characteristic αK5, the predetermined storage area is initialized even when the setting value is not set when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is started. Even if the setting value is not newly set, it is possible to start the game with the predetermined storage area initialized. In this case, the specific display means displays the specific correspondence whether the new setting value is set or the predetermined storage condition is initialized by the predetermined initialization condition. Done. Thereby, even if the player confirms the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, whether or not a new setting of the set value is performed and whether a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. It becomes possible not to specify whether or not.

Features αK6. The specific display control means starts the display of the specific display means in the state in which the specific correspondence display is performed when the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αK1 to αK5.

According to the characteristic αK6, the display content when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the display of the specific correspondence when the supply of the operating power is started is prevented from being performed by the specific display means. It becomes possible.

Features αK7. The processing for starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started, and the processing for initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization unit is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. The configuration included in the processing of
The characteristic display control means starts the display of the specific display means after the processing at the time of starting the supply of the operating power is executed when the supply of the operating power is started. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic αK7, whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is performed at a timing after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It is possible to start the display at.

Features αK8. Setting means for setting a setting value to be used from setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation generated based on the start of supply of operating power (56th The function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
A configuration in which the initialization unit initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting unit And
The gaming machine according to feature αK7, wherein the setting of the setting value of the use target by the setting unit occurs in a situation where the process at the start of supplying the operating power is being executed.

According to the feature αK8, whether the new setting of the setting value to be used is performed or not, the specific display means displays the timing after the process at the start of supplying the operating power is completed. It is possible to start the display.

In addition, with respect to the configurations of the features αK1 to αK8, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F3, the features G1 to G18, and the features H1 to H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the characteristic αF group, the characteristic αG group, the characteristic αH group, the characteristic αI group, the characteristic αJ group, and the characteristic αK group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to make the operation at the time of starting the supply of the operating power suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αL group>
Features αL1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, general figure display section 38a),
A specific display control means for controlling the display of the specific display means (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63);
Setting means for setting a setting value to be used among setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage in a settable situation generated based on the start of supply of operating power (62nd to A function of executing the processing of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 63rd embodiment),
Equipped with
The specific display control means is that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, and the setting value or operation is equal to or higher than the advantage of the setting value before the supply of operating power is stopped. Based on the fact that a setting value that is more advantageous than the setting value before the power supply is stopped is set by the setting means as the setting value that is the usage target, which is one of the suggestion target situations , A mode of determining the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started (a mode of referring to the second display allocation table 392 for special figures, a mode for general figures) 2 Mode distribution means (mode of referring to the display distribution table 394) (function for executing the processes of steps SD402 to SD411 in the main CPU 63 in the 62nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 in the 63rd embodiment) A game machine having a function of executing the processing of step SD502).

According to the characteristic αL1, by confirming the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, the setting value to be used is newly set or the setting to be used is made. It is possible to predict that the advantage of the value is equal to or higher than the advantage of the previously set value or higher than the advantage of the previously set value. As a result, it becomes possible to make the player predict the set value by using the display content of the specific display means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature αL2. The aspect determining means is configured such that the set value that is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value before the supply of the operating power is stopped or the set value that is more advantageous than the set value before the supply of the operating power is stopped is The display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started on the basis of being set by the setting means as the setting value to be used is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation, and the operation is performed. In the case where the supply of the operating power is started based on the fact that the setting value lower than the advantage of the setting value before the power supply is stopped is set by the setting means as the setting value to be used. A mode of determining the display content of the specific display means corresponding to a non-indication target situation (a mode of referring to the first display allocation table 391 for special drawings, a mode of referring to the first display allocation table 393 for general drawings) The gaming machine described in the feature αL1, which is characterized by being determined by.

According to the characteristic αL2, the determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation when the advantage of the set value to be used is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value up to that point or higher than the advantage of the set value up to that point In the case where the display content of the specific display means is determined, and when the advantage of the set value to be used becomes lower than the set value up to then, the specific display means of the specific display means is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the non-indication target situation. The display content is determined. As a result, it becomes easy to predict whether or not the advantage of the set value to be used is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value up to that point or higher than the advantage of the set value up to that point.

Feature αL3. The mode determining means sets the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started based on the fact that the setting value to be used is not set by the setting means to the non-indication target. The gaming machine according to feature αL2, which is determined in a determination mode corresponding to a situation.

According to the characteristic αL3, the supply of the operating power is started in the determination mode corresponding to the non-indication target situation even when the setting value to be used is not newly set when the supply of the operating power is started. When the display content of the specific display means is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the non-indication target situation, the situation is changed to a new setting value to be used. It is possible to make it impossible to identify whether the setting is not performed or the setting value to be used is less advantageous than before.

Features αL4. Any one of the characteristics αL1 to αL3 characterized in that the aspect determining means determines the display content of the specific display means by lottery in a lottery manner corresponding to the suggestion target situation when the suggestion target situation is the suggestion target situation. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature αL4, it is possible to diversify the display content of the specific display means in the suggestion target situation. As a result, even if the specific display means is confirmed, it is possible not to clearly specify whether or not the situation is the suggestion target situation.

Features αL5. The aspect determining means determines the display content of the specific display means by lottery in a lottery manner corresponding to the non-indication target situation when the non-indication target situation is not the suggestion target situation The gaming machine described in αL4.

According to the feature αL5, it is possible to diversify the display content of the specific display means in the non-indication target situation. As a result, even if the specific display means is confirmed, it is possible not to clearly specify whether or not the situation is the non-indication target situation.

Features αL6. Display contents that can be selected in a lottery of display contents of the specific display means by a lottery mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation and selection by display lottery of display contents of the specific display means in a lottery mode corresponding to the non-indication target situation There is common display content (first to third initial display for special drawings, first to third initial display for general drawings) in any of the display contents that can be displayed, and the selection probability of the common display content is The gaming machine according to feature αL5, which is different in a lottery mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation and a lottery mode corresponding to the non-indication target situation.

According to the feature αL6, the common display content is displayed on the specific display means regardless of whether the suggestion target situation or the non-indication target situation, and therefore it is clear which of the suggestion target situation and the non-indication target situation. It is possible to make it impossible to specify. On the other hand, since the selection probability of the common display content is different in the suggestion target situation and the non-indication target situation, the display content of the specific display means indicates whether the suggestion target situation or the non-indication target situation. It becomes possible to predict whether there is any.

Features αL7. Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63),
The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed.
Initialization in the case where the setting value of the use target is set by the setting means or after the setting value of the use target is set by the setting means, initialization of a predetermined storage area including the display storage area The gaming machine according to any one of the features αL1 to αL6, which is provided with means (a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the 62nd to 63rd embodiments).

According to the feature αL7, when the setting value of the usage target is set when the supply of the operating power is started, or when the predetermined value is accompanyingly initialized when the setting value of the usage target is set, the usage target is set. When a new setting of the set value is performed, it becomes possible to start the game in a situation where a predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, by providing the configuration of the characteristic αL1, the situation in which the display storage area is initialized along with the initialization of the predetermined storage area is used, and the indication target situation is indicated by the display content of the specific display means. It is possible to predict whether or not

Feature αL8. When a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when supply of operating power is started (information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 does not occur, and "1" is not set in the setting update display flag and the game stop flag. When a "RAM clear operation" is performed in a situation), another initialization means for initializing the predetermined storage area (function of executing the first RAM clear processing of the main CPU 63 in the 62nd to 63rd embodiments). Equipped with
The aspect determination means determines, when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the different initialization means, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started corresponding to the non-indication target situation. The gaming machine described in the feature αL7, which is determined by a mode.

According to the characteristic αL8, since the predetermined storage area is initialized when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of the operating power is started, the game is performed in the situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized. Can be started. In this case, when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the non-indication target situation. Therefore, it becomes easy to predict whether or not the situation is a suggestion target.

Features αL9. It is determined whether or not to give a bonus to the player, and when the bonus is given to the player, the bonus giving information (the information of "1" set in the flag corresponding to the kind of the jackpot result) is stored in a predetermined memory. An assignment determination means (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the area;
A privilege granting unit for granting a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the privilege granting information stored in the predetermined storage area (a function of executing the processes of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63). )When,
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features αL1 to αL8, wherein the specific display control unit causes the display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination unit to be performed by the specific display unit.

According to the characteristic αL9, the player pays attention to the specific display means by the display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give a privilege to the player, by the specific display means. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above characteristic αL1, it becomes possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above by utilizing the specific display means.

Feature αL10. The display content of the specific display means determined in the determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation is display content that is not displayed when the display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is performed by the specific display means. The gaming machine described in the feature αL9.

According to the feature αL10, it is possible to distinguish the display content determined in the determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation from the display content corresponding to the determination result of the assignment determination means.

Feature αL11. The specific display control means, when the display according to the display content determined by the mode determining means is performed by the specific display means when the supply of the operating power is started, the display content determined by the mode determining means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features αL1 to αL10, characterized in that the display of the specific display means is started in a state where the display is performed.

According to the characteristic αL11, when the supply of the operating power is started, the display of the display content when the supply of the operating power is stopped before the display according to the display content determined by the mode determining means is performed is the specific display means. It is possible to prevent it from happening in.

It should be noted that features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to the configurations of the features αL1 to αL11. H7, features I1-I9, features J1-J4, features K1-K7, features L1-L20, features M1-M7, features N1-N6, features O1-O11, features P1-P12, features Q1-Q5, features R1-. R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1. b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, features h1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features 11 to 11. l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, and features αF1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations of αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the characteristic αL group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, the pachinko machine is provided with a dish storage unit for storing the game balls given to the player in the game machine front face portion, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device, It is fired toward the game area according to the firing operation of the player. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage unit, for example. In addition, in the pachinko machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage part and a lower plate storage part as a plate storage part is also known, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper plate storage part are game ball launching devices. The game balls that have been surplus in the upper side dish storage section are discharged to the lower side dish storage section.

In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started while the medals are bet. When the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means is executed. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature.

Pachinko machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game area A gaming machine that is provided with each game component arranged therein, and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of the respective game components.

Rotating type gaming machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the starting operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a gaming machine which gives a privilege to the player according to the stopped patterns.

10... Pachinko machine, 12... Game machine main body, 14... Front door frame, 28... Firing operation device, 33... First actuation port, 34... Second actuation port, 35... Through gate, 37a... Special drawing display section, 38a General display unit 49a Gate detection sensor 62 MPU 63 Main CPU 65 Main RAM 68a Setting key insertion unit 68b Update button 68c Reset button 69a First notification Display device, 69b... Second notification display device, 69c... Third notification display device, 78... Power supply/launch control device, 112... Management side CPU, 117... History memory, 171... Separate storage memory, 181 -186... History memory for settings 1-6, 191... First history memory, 192... Second history memory, 201... First notification display device, 201a-201g... Display segment, 202... Second Display device for notification, 202a to 202g... Display segment, 203... Display device for third notification, 204... Display device for fourth notification, 221... Work area for specific control, 222... Stack area for specific control, 223 ... Work area for non-specific control, 224... Stack area for non-specific control, 231,... Normal counter area, 232... Open/close execution mode counter area, 233... High frequency support mode counter area, 234... Calculation result storage Area, 241... Management RAM, 251... Reset signal output section, 252... Program monitoring section, 266... Display IC, 271... First display data buffer, 273... Third display data buffer, 311... Present area, 312... 1 history area, 313... 2nd history area, 314... 3rd history area, 321-324... display segment, 325... setting correspondence storage area, 325a-325f... 1st-6th setting information storage area, 326... setting Corresponding storage area, 326a to 326c... First to third setting information storage area, 341... Setting reference area, 342... Setting update area, 352... Sound light side MPU, 353... Sound light side CPU, 356... RTC, 357... RTC memory, 361... OFF confirmation flag, 371... Clearing target area, 391... First display allocation table for special drawing, 392... Second display allocation table for special drawing, 393... General drawing First display distribution table, 394... Second display distribution table for general purpose drawing.

Claims (1)

Specific display means,
A specific display control means for controlling the display of the specific display means,
In a settable situation that occurs based on the start of supply of operating power, setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the advantage of the player,
Equipped with
The specific display control means is a set value which is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value before the supply of the operating power is stopped or a set value which is more advantageous than the set value before the supply of the operating power is stopped. When the supply of operating power is started based on being set by the setting means as the setting value to be used, the display content of the specific display means is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation, and the operation is performed. In the case where the supply of the operating power is started based on the setting value lower than the advantage of the setting value before the supply of the power is stopped is set by the setting means as the setting value to be used. The display content of the specific display means is provided with a mode determining means for determining in a determination mode corresponding to a non-indication target situation ,
The mode determining means sets the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started based on the fact that the setting value to be used is not set by the setting means to the non-indication target. A game machine characterized by making a decision in a decision mode corresponding to a situation .

Images